ns 
 'OGDEN 
 
 
 
 
 li 
 
 .

 
 A COMPLEAT 
 
 SYSTEM 
 
 O F 
 
 General Geography : 
 
 EXPLAINING 
 
 The Nature and Properties of the EARTH; 
 riz. 
 
 It's Figure, Magnitude, Motions, Situation, Contents, 
 and Divifion into Land and Water, Mountains, Woods, 
 Defarts, Lakes, Rivers, f)V. 
 
 With particular Accounts of the different Appearances 
 of the Heavens in different Countries ; the Seafons of 
 the Year over all the Globe ; the Tides of the Sea ; Bays, 
 Capes, Ifhnds, Rocks, Sand-Banks, and Shelves. 
 
 The State of the Atmofphere ; the Nature of Exhala- 
 tions; Winds, Storms, Tornados, bV. 
 
 The Origin of Springs, Mineral- Waters, Burning Moun- 
 tains, Mines, t3c. 
 The Ufes and Making of Maps, Globes, and Sea-Charts. 
 
 The Foundations of Dialling; the Art cf Measuring 
 Heigbts and Diflancer, the Art of Ship-Building, Navigation, 
 and the Ways of Finding //^LONGITUDE AT SEA. 
 
 Originally written in LATIN 
 
 By BERNHARD VARENIUS, M. D. 
 
 Since Improved and Illuftrated 
 By Sir ISAAC NEWTON and Dr J u R i N ; 
 
 And nowTranflated into Englijh-, with additional Notts, Cop- 
 per-Plates, an Alphabetical Index, and other Improvements. 
 
 Particularly ufeful to Students in the Univerjities ; Travellers, 
 Sailors, and all thofe who defire to be acquainted with Mixed 
 Mathematics, Geography, Agronomy, and Navigation* 
 
 By MrDUGDJLE. 
 
 The whole Revifed and Corrected by P E T E R SHAW, M. D. 
 
 3Et)e g>econD (fcDttion, toitfj large 2tDDttion0. 
 
 In i vVO VOLUMES. 
 
 LONDON: Printed for STEPHEN AUSTEN, at 
 the AngelzK& Bible, in St Paul's Cburcb-Yard. 1734.
 
 V.I 
 
 I HAVE perufed this SYSTEM of 
 GENERAL GEOGRAPHY; 
 and I do recommend it as the moil Ufeful 
 Book upon this Subject 
 
 JAMES HODGSON, 
 
 Majler of the Royal Mathematical 
 
 ChriJl-Hofpital, School; And Fellow of the 
 
 Dec. 14. 1732, Royal Society.
 
 THE 
 
 TRANSLATOR'S 
 
 PREFACE- 
 
 HE Original of this Work 
 was Re-printed at Cam- 
 bridge in the Year 1672, 
 for the Ufe of the Students 
 in that Univerfity ; and an 
 Advertilement was given of 
 it, the Beginning of the Year following, 
 in the Pbilofophical Tranfaftions (a). 
 
 THE Dutch Edition being then out of 
 Print, was carefully corrected, in many 
 
 (a) Phil. Tranfaft. No. 
 91. Pag. 5172. BERN- 
 HARD i VARENII, 
 M. D. Geographia Gene- 
 ral is ; in qua Affeftiones ge- 
 nerates Telluris explicantur, 
 fumma cura quam plurimls 
 in- Loci s emendata, &* 33 
 Scbematilus nvui$ i are in- 
 A 2 
 
 ci/ts, una cum Tabulis alt' 
 quoty qu<z dejiderabantur^ 
 aufta & illujlrata: ab 
 ISAACO NEWTON 
 Mathef. Profejfire Luca- 
 fiano apud Cantabrigienfes. 
 e Societate Regia. Cantab. 
 1672. in 8vo. 
 
 Places
 
 iv *fhe Tranjlator's Preface. 
 
 Places enlarged and improved, and the ne- 
 ceflary fables and Schemes fupplied by the 
 Illuftrious Sir ISAAC NEWTON, at that 
 Time Lucafian ProfeJJor of Mathematics in 
 that Univerfity. 
 
 THE Reafon why this great Man took 
 fo much Care in Correcting and Publifhing 
 our Author, was, becaufe he thought him 
 neceflary to be read by his Audience, 
 the Toung Gentlemen of Cambridge^ while 
 he was delivering Lectures upon the fame 
 Subjeffi from the Lucajian Chair. And 
 tho' many Hundreds were then printed at 
 Cambridge^ and from that Edition often re- 
 printed abroad , yet by being frequently 
 read in both Univerfities, all the Impreffions 
 were in Time fold off; Ib that their Scarcity 
 among the Bookfellers was obferved by the 
 Reverend Dr B E N T L E Y to be a great 
 Detriment to the Toung Gentlemen of Cam- 
 bridge in perfecting their Studies (b). 
 
 WHERE- 
 
 (b) Appendix Jurin. jorem a quo pro bonitate fua 
 
 Pag. T. Cum frujlra jam & Humanitate opinionem 
 
 ubique fere quesrerentur, conceperat, hortatus eft ut 
 
 apud Bibliopolas Varenii noiits hujufce Editiones a- 
 
 txemplaria, idque judicaret dornande curam fufciperem. 
 
 magno cum Juveniuth A- Simul monuit utile futurum 
 
 tademicts detriments fieri ut quee inventa, dimidii am" 
 
 Vir Reverendus, nee mihi pllus feculi poft Varenium 
 
 nlfifummo cum Honor e no- fpatio,fatis multa fuerant, 
 
 minandusy R I c H A R- ea y in Tyronum Gratiam, 
 
 DUS BENTLEJUS in Appendicem conferrem t 
 
 - - - is me dt quo ma~ brruiturque explicarem. E- 
 
 jus
 
 The fran/latcr s Preface. Y 
 
 WHEREUPON thisworthy En- 
 courager and Advancer of all Sorts of Lite- 
 rature, importuned the Learned Dr J u R I N 
 (as being the fitter! Perfon) to take parti- 
 cular Care of a new Impreflion - y and, for 
 the Benefit of the younger. Students, to fup- 
 ply the Defeats of Varenius with an Appen- 
 dix^ containing the later Dhcoveries and 
 Improvements. 
 
 TO Him therefore is owing that cor- 
 reft Edition of Varenius, with an excellent 
 Appendix ', printed in the Year 1712. and 
 Dedicated to Dr B E N T L E Y : which is the 
 Edition from whence the following ran- 
 Jlation was made (c). 
 
 I beg leave to infift the more upon this 
 becaufe the Authority of our Author, back'd 
 with three fuch Great and Learned Men, 
 as Sir ISAAC NEWTON, DrBENT- 
 L E Y, and Dr J u R i N, will doubtlefs make 
 an Englijh Edition of this Work more ac- 
 ceptable to an Englijh Reader. 
 
 jus egoauftoritatiitanti Vi- cipua Reccntiorum uiven- 
 
 77, &f cujus eram beneficiis ta, ad Geographiam fpe- 
 
 ornatus maximis, non ob- ftantia, continens, a J A- 
 
 temperare omn'mo non $o- COBO JURIN, A. M. 
 
 tut, &c. Collegii S. Trinitatis Soda, 
 
 (c) Bernhardi Varenit ^f Scholte public* Novoca- 
 
 Geographia Generalis, &c. JlrenjisArchididafcalo. Cart' 
 
 adjedta eft Appendix prae- tabrigiee 1712. in 8vo, 
 
 A 3 IT
 
 vr ^fbe tfranflators Preface. 
 
 I T is therefore unneceffary to add any 
 thing farther in Recommendation of the 
 Author j or enter into an Encomium of the 
 Work, fince they have both of them fo 
 well recommeded themfelves to the Public 
 already. All that remains is only to indicate 
 what has been farther done in our prefent 
 Edition. 
 
 AN D firft, in the Geometrical Part, we 
 have given Demonstrations to feveral Prppo- 
 iitions, where they were wanting, and in a 
 concife Manner explained feveral tedious 
 Demonftrations j or at leaft have directed the 
 Reader where he may find them ready de- 
 monftrated: fo that we hope by this 
 Means to incite the Studious to purfue the 
 Mathematical Studies, by giving them cer- 
 tain Specimens of their Excellency. 
 
 2. IN the Agronomical Part, we have 
 flrengthened our Author's Arguments in Fa- 
 vour of the Copernican Hypothefis; and 
 corrected or illuflrated his Affertions and 
 Proportions, by others taken from later 
 Authors, or built upon more accurate Obfer- 
 vations made fince his Time. 
 
 3. IN the Philofopbical and Phyfcal 
 Part, we have rejected the improbable 
 Conjectures of the Antients, and the un- 
 warrantable Suppofitions of Des Cartes, 
 which our Author feems to be fond of: 
 
 Inftead
 
 7 s he yranjlators. Preface, vii 
 
 Inftead whereof, we have (with the learn- 
 ed Dr J u R i N) introduced the Newtonian 
 Philofophy to folve the Phenomena, as being 
 much more eligible than the Cartefian, for 
 the Agreeable and Geometrical Manner of 
 it's Conclufions. Wherefore we have fre- 
 quently made ufe of this New Philofophy t 
 in the Way of Annotations upon our Au- 
 thor, where he has ufed that of Des 
 Cartes. 
 
 4. I N the Geographical and Hydrographi- 
 cal Part y there is often not the leaft Confo- 
 nance or Similitude between the Latin and 
 modern Englijh Names of feveral Countries, 
 I/lands, Seas, Streights, 5cc. And very 
 often their Names are changed by later 
 Difcoverers, and their Figures and Situa- 
 tions better difcovered iince our Author's 
 Time. Wherefore, in fuch Cafes, we 
 have taken the Liberty to alter their 
 Names, Situations , and Defcriptions, in 
 order to make them conformable to our 
 lateft and befl Englijh Maps ; deviating a9 
 little as poffible from our Author's Senfej 
 and making ufe of the fame Words as 'tis 
 likely he would have done, had he writ 
 at the fame 1'ime, and in thejame Lan- 
 guage. We have done this to avoid, in 
 fome Meafure, Marginal Notes, which 
 muft neceflarily have been inferted to have 
 explained a Jlrift T^ranjlation ; but would 
 have been neither entertaining nor inftru- 
 A 4
 
 viii The Tranflator s Preface. 
 
 dive to an Englijh Reader. Thefe Alte- 
 rations are included in Brackets, and for 
 the moft part diftinguifhed by a different- 
 Charafter. 
 
 5. W E have tranflated Dr J u R i N'S 
 r Appendix^ and added it to the fcveral Paf- 
 fages of our Author, whereto 4 each Part 
 of it properly belongs. 
 
 6. W E have, as much as poffible, en- 
 deavoured after our Author' ^fingular Plain- 
 nefs of Expreffion, and perhaps in this may 
 be thought to have imitated him to a Fault ; 
 but confidering that we were not fpeaking 
 to the Learned -, but to thofe lefs fkilled in 
 Language $ we thought it neceflary to en~ 
 deavour to make the Author underftood, 
 even by Perfons of ordinary Capacities, ra- 
 ther than to render him abftrufe and unin- 
 telligible by being too concife and curious 
 in Words and Phrafes, 
 
 T O contlude, we have endeavoured to 
 give the EngHJh Reader an ufeful Edition 
 of the Work, rather than one that was 
 Elegant and Polite. And to this Purpofe, 
 We have added, what was never added be- 
 fore, an Alphabetical Index to the whole. 
 
 THE
 
 THE 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 Of the Firft VOLUME. 7" 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 The ABSOLUTE, or INDEPENDENT 
 
 PART:. 
 
 C HAP. I. 
 
 PRELIMINARIES. Page i, 
 
 i. <Tbe Definition of Geography, 
 2. Divifion. 
 
 3. Subjetf. 
 
 4. Properties. 
 
 5. Principles. 
 
 6. Or^r. 
 
 7. Method of Proof. 
 
 8. OHgf'ir. 
 
 9. Excellency 
 
 jo. Divifion of the whole Work. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Preparatory Propofuions from Geography and 
 Trigonometry. Page 15. 
 
 j. T/?rft? ^^j / Magnitude. 
 
 3-> 4* 5- Definitions of a right Line, Circle 9 Dia~ 
 ^ and Arc. 
 
 6. ft
 
 x The CONTENTS. 
 
 6. To ereft a Perpendicular upon a given Line. 
 j. To divide a Circle and it's Periphery into four 
 Quadrants. 
 
 8. To divide the Periphery of a Circle into^6o De- 
 grees. 
 
 9. To find the Contents of a Reftangled-Triangle. 
 
 10. Having the Semi-diameter given, to find the Pe- 
 riphery of a Circle. 
 
 11. Having the Periphery given to find the Diameter. 
 
 12. The Diameter of a Sphere being given , to find it's 
 curve Surface , and Solidity , or folid Content. 
 
 13. Definitions of a Triangle ', Sine, Tangent, and ma- 
 thematical Canon. 
 
 14. Two necejfary Theorems. 
 
 15. Four necejfary Problems. 
 
 1 6. An Explanation of different Meafures. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Figure of the Earth. Page 27. 
 
 1 . Various Opinions concerning the Figure of the Earth. 
 
 2. The Earth's Figure ', the primary Property where- 
 on the reft depend. 
 
 3. The Arguments that prove it fpherical. 
 
 4. taken from the Heavens. 
 
 5. taktnfrom the Earth. 
 
 6. Objections anfwered. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of the Menfuration and Magnitude of the Earth. 
 
 Page 41. 
 
 1. The Menfuration of the Earth requires a Know- 
 ledge of three Particulars ; viz. Ltnes y Surface, 
 and Solidity. 
 
 2. The different Authors who have attempted ths 
 Menfuration of the Earth.
 
 The C O N T E N T S. * 
 
 3 . The Method of the Arabians. 
 
 4. Eratofthenes. 
 
 5. Pofidonius. 
 
 6. Snellius. 
 
 7. Thefirjl Terr eftrial Method. 
 
 8. Thefecond. 
 
 9. 7&<? /6/>J. 
 
 i o. The Circumference of the Earth ; it's Diameter^ 
 Surf ace ) and Solid 'Content , z' linear ? fquare, 
 and cubic Miles. 
 
 11. The Errors and Defefts of the federal -preceding 
 Methods of meafuring the Earth. 
 
 12. The Meafure of the Parallels of the Earth. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Motion of the Earth. Page 64. 
 
 1. The Motion cf the Earth the Caufe of the Celejlial 
 Appearances^ upon the Copernican Hypothecs. 
 
 2. A double Motion^ le fides the third, which is ra- 
 ther an Inclination of the Earth's Axis. 
 
 3. The Arguments for proving tbefe Motions. 
 
 4. Objections anfwered. 
 
 5. The Velocity of this Motion in different Parts of 
 the Earth. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the Earth's Place in the Syftem of the World. 
 
 Page 78 
 
 1. Common Opinion places the Earth in the Centre of 
 the World. 
 
 2. The Situation of the Earth > and the Order cf 
 the Planets. 
 
 3. The Situation of the Earth upon the Copernican 
 Hypothecs. 
 
 4. The Diftance the Earth from the Planets. 
 5: The Dijlance of the Earth from the Jixed Stars. 
 
 2 CHAP.
 
 xil The C O N T E N T S. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Subftance, internal Strufture, and Comp o- 
 fition of the Earth. Page 87 
 
 1. To explain of what Subjlances the Earth is com- 
 pofed. 
 
 2. The Earth divided into a confident and fluid Part? 
 and the Atmofpbere ; or into Earth, Water, and 
 Air. 
 
 3. How the Earth and Water bold together, and 
 conftitute one Globe. 
 
 4. The Surface of the Earth continued, but not the 
 Surface of the Waters. 
 
 5. How the Parts of the Earth are, from the Sur- 
 face to the Center, is uncertain. 
 
 6. 'That Earth has it's Conjtftency and Coherence from 
 Salt. 
 
 7. Different kinds of Earth variously mixed in the 
 Globe. 
 
 8. The Situation and Difpofition oflbe Parts of the 
 Earth different at different Times. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the Divifion of the Parts of the Earth into 
 integrant Parts of the Sea. Page 103 
 
 i. Part of the Earth covered with Water, and 
 Part not. 
 
 z. The dry Paris feparated from each other by the 
 Waters between. 
 
 3 . Four great Continents enumerated. 
 
 4. Ten great IJlands enumerated. 
 
 5. Ten moderate IJlands enumerated. 
 
 6. Ten fmall Ifiands enumerated. 
 
 7. The fmalleft IJlands enumerated. 
 
 8. The PeninfulaS) IftbmuJJes^ and Capes, or Head- 
 Lands. 
 
 . Fourteen
 
 The C O N T E N T S. xiii 
 
 9. Fourteen Peninfula's enumerated. 
 
 10. The more remarkable Jjlmvjfes enumerated. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of Mountains in general, and the Ways of taking 
 their Altitude. Page 1 1 9 
 
 1. The Parts of the Earth are of different Al- 
 titudes. 
 
 2. To fnd the Height of a Mountain by Al- 
 timetry. 
 
 3. The Height of a Mountain Icing given , to fnd 
 it's Dijlancefrom a certain Place. 
 
 4. The Diftance being given from whence the Top 
 of a Mountain is frft feen to fnd it's 
 Height. 
 
 5. The Height of a Mountain being known, to 
 fnd the utmoft Diftance whereto it may be 
 feen. 
 
 6. The Sun's Height above the Horizon being given 
 at any Time, and the Length of the Shadow of 
 the Mountain at that Time, to fnd the Height 
 of the Mountain. 
 
 7. The Height of Mountains bears no fenfible Pro- 
 portion to the Semidiameter of the Earth, or does 
 not hinder the Sphericity of the Globe. 
 
 8. To explain the Origin of Mountains. 
 
 9. Why Rains and watery Meteors are frequent on 
 the Tops of Mountains, wbilft it is fair below. 
 
 10. Whet her the Surface of a Mountain be more ca^ 
 facious than the Plain it ftands on. 
 
 CHAP, X. 
 
 Of the Differences of Mountains. Page 135 
 
 1 . Some Mountains are large, others fmall. 
 
 2. The more famous Mountains enumerated. 
 
 . Tbt
 
 
 xiv The CONTENTS. 
 
 3. 'The Tops of Mountains in mo ft I/lands and Head" 
 Lands reach to the middle Region of the Air. 
 
 4. To enumerate the Mountains remarkable for their 
 Height. 
 
 5. To enumerate the Burning Mountains. 
 
 6. To explain the Differences of Mountains. 
 
 7. Some Mountains are open, others clofe. 
 
 8. To enumerate the more famous Promontories. 
 
 9. Caves, deep Pits, &c. oppofed to Mountains. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Of Mines, Woods, and Defarts. Page 158 
 
 1 . The Difference of Mines, and the more famous 
 of them enumerated. 
 
 2. The Difference of Woods, and the more famous 
 enumerated. 
 
 3 . The Differences of Defarts and the more famous 
 enumerated. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Divifion of the Ocean by the Interpofition 
 of the Land. Page 165 
 
 1. The Ocean furrounds the Earth in a continued 
 Extent. 
 
 2. The Parts if the Ocean are of three kinds, viz. 
 Seas, Bays, and Streights 
 
 3. The Ocean divided into four grand Parts, or 
 Oceans, 
 
 4. The Parts of the Ocean named. 
 
 5. The eminent Bays enumerated, with their Diffe- 
 rences. 
 
 6. The Enumeration and Differences of Streights. 
 "j.TheSea-Coajls traced over the four Barters, 
 
 and the Communication of the Parti of the 
 Ocean, 
 
 CHAP.
 
 The C O N T E N T S. X v 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Of certain Properties of the Ocean. Page 181 
 
 1 . The Surface of the Ocean fpherical. 
 
 2. The Sea not higher than the Land. 
 
 3. Why the Sea feems to rife higher when viewed 
 at a Diflance from the Shore. 
 
 4. To explain the Origin of Bays and Streigbts. 
 
 5. Whether the Ocean be every where of the fame 
 Height. 
 
 6. The Depth of the Ocean may be found in many 
 Places but not in all. 
 
 7. The Ocean has no -proper Springs. 
 
 8. The Saltnefs of the Ocean from the Particles of 
 Salt diffolved in it. 
 
 9. Whether Sea Water be fweeter at the Bottom. 
 
 10. The Sea grows falter towards the Equator, 
 and the Seafons of it's being unequally fait. 
 
 11. Why the Rain is fweet on the Sea. 
 
 12. Different Sea Waters are heavier than each 
 other, and than common Water. 
 
 13. Sea-Water does not freeze fo foon as River- 
 Water. 
 
 14. Why the Ocean becomes no larger by receiving 
 fo many Rivers. 
 
 1 5 . Different Parts of the Ocean have different Colours. 
 
 16. Certain Peculiarities in certain Parts of the Ocean. 
 
 17. Why the Sea appears luminous ; or Jhines^ by 
 Night, efpecially when the Waves are violent. 
 
 1 8. The Ocean throws up terrejlrial and confident 
 , Bodies to the Shore. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 Of the Motions of the Ocean, particular it's 
 Flux and ReBux. Page 230 
 
 i. Water has only one natural Motion. 
 
 2. When
 
 xvi The CONTENTS. 
 
 2. When a Part of the Ocean moves, the whole 
 is moved. 
 
 3. To obferve the Point of the Compafs wherein 
 the Sea moves. 
 
 4. The Motion of the Sea is either direft, vortical, 
 concujjbry^ or tremulous. 
 
 5. Some Motions of the Sea are general, fome 
 particular, and the reft contingent. 
 
 6. The Wind caufes the contingent Motions of the 
 Sea. 
 
 7. The general Motions of the Ocean double, viz. 
 continued, and ebbing and flowing. 
 
 8. Winds often alter the general Motions of the Ocean. 
 
 9. The Caufe of the general Motion uncertain. 
 
 10. What the Motion of the Flux and Reflux is. 
 
 1 1 . The Caufe of that Motion. 
 
 12. Why at new ana full Moon the general Mo- 
 tion of the Sea is more violent ; and alfo the 
 Swell larger. 
 
 13. Why on the Days of the Equinoxes the general 
 Motion and Swell of the Sea is greater. 
 
 14. A great Flux and Reflux on fome Shores, 
 and on others fcarce fenfible. 
 
 15. The Flux of the Sea violent, the Reflux natural. 
 
 1 6. The Flux large ft in thofe Places where the Moon 
 is vertical. 
 
 17. The Quantity of the Flux not conflant. 
 
 1 8. The Time of the beginning and ending of the 
 Flux different in different Places. 
 
 19. In moft Places the Sea flows to the Shore 
 fix Hours, and ebbs as many ; but in fome 
 
 Places it flows longer than it ebbs, and vice versa. 
 
 20. Whether the Flood begins when the Moon 
 touches the Horizon. 
 
 21. The Hour being given, wherein the Flood is at 
 ifs greatefl Height in any Place, on the Day 
 ef new Moon ; to find the Hour of it's greateft 
 Height for the following Days. 
 
 2 22. The
 
 The CONTENTS. xvii 
 
 22. The Winds prolong and Jhorten the Duration 
 of the Flux and Reflux. 
 
 23. A great Diverftty in the particular Motion of 
 . tbe Sea. 
 
 24. Tbe frft particular perpetual Motion. 
 15. Thefecond 
 
 26. Tbe third 
 
 27. The fourth 
 
 28. Tbe fifth 
 
 29. Tbe fixtb 
 
 30. The feventh 
 
 3 1 . The particular periodical Motions enumerated. 
 
 32. Two kinds of Vortices in the Sea. 
 
 33. Tbe Caufe of the Tremor in the Sea, with 
 Examples. 
 
 34. Wbj the Pacific Ocean is fo calm in fair 
 Weather, but eaftly moved with gentle Winds. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Of Lakes, Moors and Bogs. Page 280 
 
 1. Lakes, Moors, and Bogs defined. 
 
 2. Four kinds of Lakes. 
 
 3. To explain the Origin of thofe Lakes that 
 neither receive nor fend out Rivers*; and to 
 enumerate them. 
 
 4. To explain the Origin of thofe that fend out 
 Rivers, but receive none. 
 
 5. To explain the Origin of thofe that receive 
 Rivers, but fend none out. 
 
 6. To explain tbe Origin of thofe that both re- 
 ceive and fend out Rivers. 
 
 7. Moft Lakes contain afrejh but fame a fait Water. 
 
 8. Whether the Cafpian Sea be a Lake or a Bay. 
 
 9. Whether the Euxine be a Lake or a Bay. 
 
 jo. The Lakes enumerated that have IJlands in 
 tbe middle. 
 
 VOL. I. a ii. To
 
 xviii The C O N T.E N T S. 
 
 11. 2*0 make a Lake in a Place aj/igned ; if ikt 
 thing be pojfible. 
 
 12. 'To dry or drain up a Lake. 
 
 13. Bogs of two kinds. 
 
 14. Bogs contain a fulphureous Earth. 
 
 15. %4 dry a Bog. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 Of Rivers in general. Page 295 
 
 1 . The Definition of Rivers, Rivulets, and Springs, &c. 
 
 2. Torrents and Rivers fometimes produced by 
 violent Rains, and melted Snow. 
 
 3. Moft Rivulets rife from Springs, and Rivers 
 from a Conflux of Rivulets. 
 
 4. Rivers enlarged by Rains and melted Snow at 
 different Times of the Tear. 
 
 5 . The Caufcs of Springs, or the Origin of Spring- Water. 
 
 6. Some Rivers dip under Ground, and rife again. 
 
 7. Rivers difembogue into the Sea, or Lakes. 
 
 8. Few Rivers become jlagnant. 
 
 9. Whether the Cbanels, and Windings of Rivers 
 were made by Nature or human Induftry. 
 
 10. Cbanels, the nearer to the Spring- Head the higher ; 
 and the nearer to the River's mouth the deeper. 
 
 11. Of Cataratls. 
 
 1 2. Why Rivers are broader in one Part than another. 
 
 13. The Cbanels of Rivers fink more or lefs in one 
 Part than another. 
 
 14. Why fome Rivers are rapid, others gentle ; and 
 why the fame River is more rapid in one 
 Place than another. 
 
 15. Some few Rivers run a dirett Courfe ; but 
 mojl a winding one, to their Exits. 
 
 1 6. The Lakes tbro* which certain Rivers have 
 their Courfe. 
 
 17. Moft Rivers the nearer their Mouths, the 
 
 tbe\ become, 
 
 18. ne
 
 The C O N T E N T S. xix 
 
 18, The Water of Rivers contains many Particles 
 of different Metals, Minerals, Sands, oleaginous 
 and other Subftances ; as alfo certain fubtils 
 Spirits of Vitriol^ Salt, Sulphur, &c. 
 
 ig. 'The Rivers that have Gold-Sand enumerated. 
 
 20. The Waters of mofi Rivers differ in Colour 9 
 Gravity, and other Qualities. 
 
 21. Certain Rivers are fo inlarged, at Jlated 
 Times, as to overflow their Banks. 
 
 22. To enumerate thefe Rivers, and their Caufes. 
 
 23. To explain the Origin and Rife of Springs. 
 
 24.- To find whether a Spring, or Well, may be 
 made in a Place ajjigned. 
 
 25. To make a Well in a given Spot ; if the 
 Thing be poffible. 
 
 26. To make an apparent Spring in a Place 
 ajjigned ; if the Thing be poffible. 
 
 27 .To bring a River from a Spring, or from another 
 River, to a given Place, if the Thing be pojjible. 
 
 28. The Art of Levelling, or taking the Fall of Wa- 
 ter, &c. 
 
 29. The great Rivers of a long Courfe enumerated. 
 
 30. Certain Rivers have Whirlpools and Swallows* 
 
 31. River- Water lighter than Sea- Water. 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 Of Mineral -Waters, Hot- Springs, &V. Page 359 
 
 1 . No Water found pure and elementary. 
 
 2. Mineral Waters defined. 
 
 3 . Three general Kinds of Mineral Waters. 
 
 4. To explain the Origin of Mineral Waters. 
 
 5. That the particular Species of Mineral Waters 
 are infinite. 
 
 6. To enumerate the more remarkable and extra- 
 ordinary Differences of Waters. 
 
 7. Of the Acidulse, or tart Waters. 
 
 8. Of Hot Springs. 
 
 a 2 9. Of
 
 xx The C O N T E N T S. 
 
 9. Of oily and uncJuous Waters. 
 
 10. Of bitter Waters. 
 
 11. Of extreamly cold Springs. 
 
 12. Offuch Waters as tranfmute or alter Subftanfts. 
 
 13. Of poifonous and Mortal Waters. 
 
 14. Of coloured Waters. 
 
 15. Of Salt-Waters. 
 
 1 6. Of bubbling^ or boiling, Springs, andfuch as break 
 forth with a violent Spirit. 
 
 17. Springs that run only at flat ed Times. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 Of the Change, and Origin of dry Parts and 
 watery, on the Earth. Page 395 
 
 1. To examine the extant Surface of the Earth, and 
 that covered with Water. 
 
 2. The Surface of the Land and Water not perpe- 
 tually the fame. 
 
 3. To compute how much Sand, and how much 
 Water the Earth contains. 
 
 4. Waters forfake the Shores, and leave them dry on 
 many Accounts ; andfirft, as in Mears and Bogs. 
 
 5. Rivers forfake their Banks and Cbanels, and af- 
 ford new Land. 
 
 6. Lakes are dried up, and changed to Land. 
 
 7. S freights are dried up. 
 8 Bays are dried up. 
 
 9. Parts of the Ocean are dried up. 
 
 10. To explain the Origin of Sand- Banks. 
 
 11. Whether Sand- Banks may become a part of the 
 neighbouring Continent. 
 
 12. I/lands are formed feveral Ways. 
 
 13. The more extraordinary Ways wherein IJlands art 
 formed. 
 
 1 4. Of Floating IJlands. 
 
 15. Rivers change their Chanels many Ways, or run 
 over new Trafts of Land, 
 
 16. Lakes
 
 The C O N T E N T S. xxi 
 
 1 6. Lakes, Meers, and Bogs poffefs Spaces of Land 
 they did not occupy before. 
 
 17. 'The Ocean poffeffes new Trafls of Land, where it 
 did not appear before. 
 
 1 8. Whether the entire Surface of the Earth may be 
 folely poffeffcd by Water alone, or Land alone. 
 
 19. Why there are few I/lands in the middle of the 
 Ocean ; but many Shoals of them near Continents, 
 or larger I/lands. 
 
 20. Why Lands prove fertile or barren ; and why on 
 the Sea-Shore the kind of Earth alters that 
 covers the Fields. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Of the Air and Atmofphere. Page 419 
 
 j . Exhalations continually rife from the Parts of 
 the Earth. 
 
 2. 'The State of the Atmofphere. 
 
 3. Exhalations are thicker or thinner at different 
 Times, and in different Places. 
 
 4. Various Kinds of Exhalations. 
 
 5. The Particles of the Air rcfleft the Surfs Rays, 
 like a Speculum. 
 
 6. The upper Parts of the Atmofphere are more 
 rarijied than the lower. 
 
 7. Exhalations are driven upwards by a violent Mo- 
 tion ', tho y their natural 'Tendency is downwards. 
 
 2. The Atmofphere when warmed poffeffes a larger 
 
 Space, and when cold a lefs. 
 9. To make a Thermometer, or Weather-Glafs. 
 
 10. How, or to what Degree, the Air may be rarijied. 
 
 1 1 . Why the Air is generally thick and Cloudy in the 
 Frigid Zone. 
 
 12. Why the Air is thin and clear in violently frojly 
 Weather. 
 
 13. Why the Air appears thicker at the Horizon. 
 
 14. Whether the Air, or Atmofpbtre, be of the fame 
 Height in all Places, 
 
 15. flfc
 
 xxii The C O N T E N T S. 
 
 15. < Tbe Condenfation and Rarifaftion of the Air 
 does not alter it's Height. 
 
 16. The Height of the Air the fame at all Times, and 
 in all Places. 
 
 17. The Ah- more condenfed in the Winter, and at 
 Night, than in the Summer, and by Day. 
 
 1 8. The different Denjity of the Air in different Places. 
 
 19. The middle Region of the Air nearer the Earth 
 in Places contiguous to the Pole. 
 
 20. In Places adjacent to the Pole the hot Region of 
 the Air, or the beginning of the upper Region, 
 is more remote. 
 
 21. We Rays of the Sun, Moon, and Stars are re- 
 framed in the Air. 
 
 22. On Account of this Refraftion the Sun and Moon 
 appear to rife fooner than they ought. 
 
 23. The thicker the Air , the greater the Refratlion. 
 
 24. The thicker the Air, the fooner the Sun and Moon 
 appear to rife. 
 
 25. The lower the Air that caufes the Refratlion, the 
 fooner the Stars appear to rife. 
 
 26. The Rejraftion of a Star may be the fame in the fame 
 Situation, tho* the Height of the Air be different. 
 
 27. If the Air be thicker, or lower, in one Place than 
 in another, the Sun or Moon will appear fooner 
 in the former than in the latter. 
 
 28. If the Air be thicker and higher in one Place than 
 another, the Stars will accordingly be feen to rife 
 fooner, or later. 
 
 29. Two Refractions being taken at two Altitudes, to 
 find from thence both the Height and Thicknefs of 
 the Air, with Refpeft to the ALlber, or the 
 Law of Refraction. 
 
 go. To find the leaft poffible Height of the Atmofpbere. 
 
 3 1 . To find the Law of Refraction. 
 
 32. To find the Refraction at any Inclination. 
 
 33. To find the Refraction at the given Height of a Star. 
 
 34. The Light of the Stars, particularly the Sun and 
 Moon t are rcflefted by the Particles of Air. 
 
 35-
 
 The CONTENTS, xxiii 
 
 35. This Reflection is the principal Caufe of the Twilight. 
 
 36. When the Twilight begins. 
 
 37. 'The Height of the Air not to be found from the 
 Quantity of the Twilight. 
 
 38. The Height of the Air^ upon a Suppofition that 
 a double Reflection is the Caufe of the Twilight. 
 
 39. The Height of the Air being given ^ to compute 
 it's Quantity. 
 
 40. The Air has certain Peculiarities, in certain 
 Places. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Of the Motion of the Air, Winds in general, and 
 the Points of the Compafs. Page 477 
 
 j . Winds defined. 
 
 2. Moft Winds blow from one Point to the oppofite. 
 
 3 . Points of the Compafs defined. 
 
 4. The Number of Points and Winds. 
 
 5. Two and thirty Points and Winds. 
 
 6. A more accurate Enumeration of the Points and 
 Winds. 
 
 7. The Winds according to the Antients enumerated. 
 
 8. Another Enumeration of the Winds. 
 
 9. Oppofite Winds. 
 
 10. Various Caufes of Winds. 
 
 11. Why Winds may blow perpendicularly to the Ho- 
 rizon of a Place. 
 
 12. Why the Winds blow not in continued^ but inter- 
 rupted Blafts. 
 
 13. Why Winds veryfetdom blow perpendicularly upon 
 a Place from above, but generally oblique. 
 
 14. Why the South and Weft Winds are warm. 
 
 15. Why the Weft Winds blow feldomer than the Eaft. 
 
 1 6. Why the North and Eaft Winds are ftronger, and 
 the South and Weft Winds weaker. 
 
 17. Why a fmall, thick, and blacki/h Cloud for et eh 
 Wind from that Quarter. 
 
 1 8 . Wby Winds are frequent in the Spring and Autumn. 
 
 19. At
 
 xxiv The CONTENTS. 
 
 19. At what Height, or in what Region of the dir, 
 the Winds How. 
 
 20. To what Diftance one and the fame Wind may reach. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of particular Winds, and Storms or Tempefts. 
 
 Page 491 
 
 1. Some Winds are conflant, others not. 
 
 2 . Some Winds are general, others particular. 
 
 3. The Caufe of the general Winds. 
 
 4. Some Winds periodical and jlated ; others uncer- 
 tain and contingent. 
 
 5. The periodical Winds enumerated. 
 
 6. The Caufe of the Eteftan Winds. 
 
 7. Why the Etefian are not found in many Places. 
 
 8. Some Winds peculiar ', others common. 
 
 9. Certain winds periodical at certain Hours. 
 
 jo. Northern Winds moft frequent in Places near the 
 North Pole. 
 
 1 1 . Four Species of Winds. 
 
 12. Certain impetuous and fudden Winds. 
 
 13. Their Kinds exemplified. 
 
 14. Tornados, or Travados. 
 
 15. Cataracts, or Exbydrias. 
 
 i 6. Ecnephias, or leffer Exhydrias. 
 
 17. Typbon, or Orancban. 
 
 1 8. Whether certain Winds burft out of the Earth, or 
 rife from the Water. 
 
 19. Whether a certain Wind may rife from the Flood 
 of the Sea and Rivers. 
 
 20. the Caufe s of the Brothers at Sea ; or Caftor, 
 Pollux, and Helena in Tempejls. 
 
 2 1 . Why Calms are fo frequent in Part of the Ethiopic 
 Ocean, under the Equator ; efpecially on the Gui- 
 nea Coaft. 
 
 az. Storms and Tempejls anniverfary in certain Places^, 
 
 THE
 
 THE 
 
 ABSOLUTE PART 
 
 O F 
 
 Univerfal Geography. 
 
 SECT. I. 
 
 P R E L I M IN A R I E S. 
 CHAP, j?^ 
 
 Of //^DEFINITION, DIVISION, METHOD, &c, 
 ofGEOGR/tPHT. 
 
 T hath been an antient Cuflom for 
 thole that fully treat of any Art, 
 or Science, to premife fomewhac 
 of it's Origin^ Nature^ Conjlilul'ion^ 
 &c. And this Procedure is not 
 improper, provided it be clear t>f 
 all fophiftical Equivocation *, be- 
 caufe from fuch Preliminaries the Reader may con- 
 ceive an Idea of the Work, or at leaft the Sub- 
 ftance thereof, and fo proceed more advifedly there- 
 in. We fhall therefore here offer a few Particu- 
 lars as to the Nature, Ufe* and Defign of Geography. 
 VOL. I. B 2&
 
 2 Ibe Abjolute Part SECT. I, 
 
 The Definition of Geography. 
 
 GEOGRAPHT'is that part of mix'd Mathe- 
 matics, which explains the State of the Earth, and 
 of it's Parts, depending on Quantity, viz. it's 
 Figure, Place, Magnitude, and Motion, with the 
 Celeflial Appearances, &c. 
 
 B Y fome it is taken in too limited a Senfe, for a 
 bare Defcription of the feveral Countries ; and by 
 others too extenfively, who along with fuch a De- 
 fcription would have their Political Conftitution. 
 But the Authors who proceed thus are excufable, 
 becaofe they do it only to excite and delight the 
 .-Reader, who might otherwife be the lefs attentive 
 to a bare Enumeration and Defcription of the Coun- 
 tries, without fome Knowledge of the Manners, and 
 Cuftoms of the Inhabitants. 
 
 The Divifton of Geography. 
 
 WE divide Geography into General and Special, 
 or Univerfal and Particular. Golnitzius fays, Geo- 
 graphy is to be explained externally and internally ; 
 but thefe Terms are improper, and ill chofen, Uni- 
 verfal and Particular being much more pertinent. 
 We call that Univerfal Geography which confiders 
 the whole Earth in general, and explains it's Pro- 
 perties without regard to particular Countries : But 
 Special or Particular Geography defcribes the Confti- 
 tution and Situation of each fingle Country by itfelf ; 
 which is twofold, viz. Cborograpbical, which de- 
 fcribes Countries of a confiderable Extent ; or Topo- 
 graphical, which gives a View of fome place or 
 fmall Tract of the Earth. 
 
 I N this Book, we mail exhibit Univerfal Geogra- 
 phy, which may be divided into three Parts, Abfo- 
 lute, Relative, and Comparative. In the dbfolute 
 
 Part
 
 CHAP.- I. of Univerfal Geography* 3 
 
 Part we fhall handle what refpects the Body of the 
 Earth itfelf, it's Parts and peculiar Properties -, as 
 it's .Figure, Magnitude, and Motion , it's Lands, 
 Seas, and Rivers, &c. In the Relative Part we 
 lhall account for the Appearances and Accidents 
 that happen to it from Celt lial Caufes : and, laftly, 
 the Comparative Part lhall contain an Explication 
 of thofe Properties, which arife from comparing dif- 
 ferent Parts of the Earth together (a). 
 
 The Subjeff of Geography. 
 
 THE Object,- or Subject, of Geography is the 
 Earth , efpecially it's Superficies and exterior Parts. 
 
 'The Properties of Geography* 
 
 THE Things which feem to be moft worthy of 
 Obfervation in every Country are of three kinds, viz. 
 Celeftial, Terrejlrial, and Human. The Celejlial Pro- 
 perties are fuch as affect us by reafon of the apparent 
 Motion of the Sun, arid Stars. Thefe are eight in 
 Number : i . The Elevation of the Pole, or the Dif- 
 tance of a Place from the Equator. 2. The Obliquity 
 of the Diurnal Motion of the Stars above the Horizon of 
 that Place. 3. The time of the longejl and Jhortejl 
 
 (a) The Honour of reducing Miftakes, and hath left us a Me- 
 
 Geography to Art and Syftem thod of difcovering his own. 
 was refer ved to Ptolemy j who There is one thing yet very 
 
 by adding Mathematical Advan- lame in our Geography, the fix- 
 
 tages to the Hiftorical Method, ing the true Longitude of 
 
 in which it had been treated of Places ; and tho' feveral new 
 
 before, has defcribed the World Ways have been lately tried, to 
 
 in a much more Intelligible redrefs this Inconvenience, both 
 
 Manner: he has delineated it from exaft Pendulums, and from 
 
 Under more certain Rules, and Obfervations upon the Immer- 
 
 by fixing the Bounds of Places, fions and Emerfions of Jupiter '/ 
 
 from Longitude and Latitude, Satellites, yet they have not al- 
 
 hath both difcovercd others together preved effectual. 
 
 B 2 Day.
 
 4 f&e AbfdutePart SECT. I. 
 
 Day f 4. The Climate and Zone. 5. Heat, Cold, 
 andtheSeafonsoftbe Tear-, with Rain, Snow, Wind, 
 and other Meteors : and tho j thefe may feem Ter- 
 reftrial Properties, yet becaufe they chiefly depend 
 upon the Motion of the Sun, and the four Seafons 
 of the Year, we have reckoned them among the 
 Celeftial Matters. 6. The Rifmg, Appearance, and 
 Continuance, of the Stars above the Horizon. 7. The 
 Stars that pafs thro' the Zenith of a Place. 8. The 
 Celerity of the Motion with which, according to the Co- 
 pernican Hypotbe/is, every Place conjlantly revolves, 
 And according to Aftrologers a ninth Property may 
 be added ; for they afiign fome Country or other 
 to every one of the twelve Signs of the Zodiac, and 
 the Planets which are Lords of thefe Signs , but 
 fuch imaginary Qualities feem fuperftitious and vain 
 to me ; nor do I perceive any reafonable Foundati- 
 on for them (a). Thus far the Celeftial Properties. 
 
 W E call thofe Terreftrial Properties that are ob- 
 ferved in the Face of every Country ; which are 
 ten in Number, i . The Limits and Bounds of each 
 Country. 2. It's Figure. 3. It's Magnitude. 4, It's 
 Mountains. 5. It's Waters, viz. Springs, Rivers, 
 and Bays. 6. It' s Woods and Defarts. 7. The Fruit- 
 fulnefs and Barrennefs of the Country, with it's various 
 kinds of Fruits. 8. The Minerals and FoJJils. 9. The 
 living Creatures there. 10. The Longitude of the 
 Place: which might be comprehended under the 
 firft of thefe Properties. 
 
 {a} Tho' this Art be of great to this Day, veaerated in moft 
 Antiquity, it is rejefted and Eaftern Countries, efpecially a- 
 exploded by moft knowing Peo- mong the Indians ; where no- 
 pie of this Age ; and only Im- thing is done of any Confe- 
 poftors, or fome weak Pre- quence, before the Aftrologcr 
 tenders to Learning, now pra- determines a fortunate Hour 
 ftife it, in thefe Parts of the to undertake it. Set Robaulfs 
 World. It is however, even Pbtftt Part z. Chap. 27. 
 
 THE
 
 CHAP. I. of Univerfal Geography. $ 
 
 THE third kind of Obfervations, to be made 
 in every Country, we call Human, becaufe they 
 chiefly refpect the Inhabitants of the Place ; and 
 thefe are alfo ten in Number, i. Weir Stature, 
 Shape, Colour, and the length of their Lives ; their 
 Origin, Meat, and Drink. 2. "Their Arts, and the 
 Profits which arife from them -, with the Merchandife 
 and Wares they barter with one another. 3. 'Their 
 Virtues and Vices, Learning, Capacities, and Schools. 
 4. 'Their Ceremonies at Births, Marriages, and Fu- 
 nerals. 5. 'The Language which the Inhabitants ufe. 
 6. 'Their Political Government. 7. Their Religion and 
 Church Government. 8. 'Their Cities and famous 
 Places. 9. Their remarkable Hi/lories. 10. 'Their 
 famous Men, Artificers, and the Inventions of the 
 Natives. 
 
 T H E S E are the three kinds of Occurrences to 
 be explained jn Special Geography , and tho' the laft 
 Sort feem not fo properly to belong to this Science, 
 yet we are obliged to admit them for Cuftom fake, 
 and the Information of the Reader. 
 
 IN Univerfal Geography (which is the Subject 
 of this Book) the abfolute Divifion of the Earth, 
 and the Conftitution of it's Parts, will firft be exa- 
 mined , then the Celeftial Phenomena, in general, 
 that are to be applied to their refpective Countries, 
 in Special Geography ; and laftly there will follow in 
 the Comparative Part fuch Confiderations as occur 
 from comparing the Phenomena of one Place with 
 another. 
 
 The Principles of Geography, 
 
 THE Principles from which Arguments are 
 drawn for proving Proportions in Geography are 
 of three forts, i. Geometrical, Arithmetical, and 
 Trigonometrical Propofitions. 2. Aftronomical 
 Precepts and Theorems (tho' it may feem ftrange 
 B 3 we
 
 6 ?be Abfolute Part SECT. I. 
 
 we mould have Recourfe to the Celeftial Bodies, 
 which are diftant from us fo many Millions of 
 Miles, for Underftanding the Nature of the Earth 
 we inhabit). 3. Experience; becaufe the greateft 
 JPart of Geography, and chiefly the Special, is 
 founded only upon the Experience and Obferva- 
 tions of thofe who have defcribed the feveral Coun- 
 ts, 
 
 *Thc Order of Geography, 
 
 THE Order we have thought moft conve? 
 nient to follow in General Geography, is already 
 mentioned in the Divifion and Explication of it's 
 Properties ; yet there remains a Doubt as to the 
 Order to be obferved in explaining thefe Properties : 
 viz. whether we mould apply them to their relative 
 Countries in which they are found, or refer the 
 Countries themfelves to the Properties accounted 
 for, in general. Ariftotle, in his firft Book of A- 
 nimals, moves the fame Doubt ; and argues at 
 large, whether the Properties mould be adjufled 
 to the general Account of Animals, or the Ani- 
 mals ranked under the Account of their Proper- 
 ties. The like Difficulty occurs in other Parts of 
 Philofophy. However we mall here firft explain 
 fome general Properties ; and after apply them to 
 $hcir reipetive Countries. 
 
 the Proof of Geography. 
 
 I N proving Geographical Propofitions we are 
 to obferve ; that feveral Properties, and chiefly 
 the Celeftial, are confirmed by proper Demonftrar 
 tions : But in Special Geography (excepting the Ce- 
 leftials) almoft every Thing is explained without 
 pemonftration , being either grounded on Expe- 
 rience and Obfervation, or on the Teftimony of 
 
 our
 
 CHAP. I. of Unherfal Geography. 7 
 
 our Senfes : nor can they be proved by any other 
 Means. For Science is taken either for that Know- 
 ledge which is founded on Things highly proba- 
 ble j or for a certain Knowledge of Things which 
 is gained by the force of Argument, or the Tefti- 
 mony of Senfe ; or for that Knowledge which a- 
 rifes from Demonftration in a ftrid Senfe, fuch as 
 is found in Geometry, Arithmetic, and other Ma- 
 thematical Sciences; excepting Chronology and 
 Geography *, to both which the Name of Science, 
 taken in the fecond Senfe, doth moft properly 
 belong. 
 
 THERE are alfo feveral Propofitions proved, 
 or rather expofed to view, by the artificial Ter- 
 reftrial Globe, or by Geographical Maps -, moft of 
 which might be confirmed by a ftric~t Demonftrati- 
 on ; tho' omitted on Account of the Incapacity of 
 fome Readers. Other Propofitions cannot be Ib 
 well proved, yet are received as apparent Truths. 
 Thus tho' we fuppofe all Places on the Globe, and 
 in Maps, to be laid down in the fame Order as 
 they really are on Earth ; neverthelefs in thefe Mat- 
 ters we rather follow the Defcriptions that are given 
 by Geographical Authors. Globes and Maps, in- 
 deed, made from fuch Obfervations, ferve well 
 enough for Illuftration, and the more eafy Compre- 
 henfion of the Thing. 
 
 The Origin of Geography. 
 
 THE Origin of Geography is not of late Date, 
 nor was it brought into the World as it were at one 
 Birth ; neither was it invented by one Man : but 
 it's Foundations were laid many Ages ago. It is 
 true, indeed, the old Geographers were employed 
 only in defcribing particular Countries, either in 
 whole, or in part. The Romans, when they had 
 overcome and fubdued any Province, ufed to ex- 
 B 4 pofe
 
 8 *lhe Abfolute Part SECT. I. 
 
 pofe the Cborograpby thereof to the Spectators in 
 their Triumphs, delineated upon a Table, and 
 flourifhed round with Pictures. There were alfo at 
 Rome, in the Portico of Lucullus, feveral Geographi- 
 cal Tables expofed to public View. The Senate of 
 Rome, about one hundred Years before the Birth of 
 Chrift, lent Geographers and Surveyors into the fe- 
 veral parts of the Earth, that they might meafure 
 the whole ; tho' they fcarce vifited a twentieth Part 
 of it. Neco, alfo, King of Egypt, many Ages be- 
 fore Chrift, commanded that the Extremities of 
 Africa mould be diligently fearched into -, which 
 was performed by the Phoenicians in the fpace of three 
 Years. Darius commanded that the Mouths of the 
 River Indus, and the whole sEthiopic Sea, to the 
 eaftward, mould be diligently examined into. Alex- 
 ander the Great, as Pliny tells us, jn his Af f atic Ex- 
 pedition, carried along with him two Geographers, 
 Diogenes and Beto, to meafure and delineate to him his 
 Journies ; from whofe Journals and Obfervations 
 the Geographers of fucceeding Ages borrowed many 
 Things. And tho' the Study of all other Arts was 
 almoft aboliihed by the Wars, Geography and For- 
 tification were improved thereby. 
 
 NEVERTHELESS the Geography of the 
 Antients was very imperfect, and commonly full of 
 falfe Relations ; becaufe they knew little or nothing 
 of thcfe Places of the Earth which are of moft Con^ 
 fequence to be known -, or at leaft they had no cer- 
 tain Experience about them. For, i . all America 
 \yas entirely unknown to them. 2. So were the re- 
 moteft Northern Countries. 3. The South Conti- 
 nent and the Country of Magellan. 4. They knew 
 not that the World coijld be failed round, or that 
 the Earth was furrounded by the Ocean, in an un- 
 interrupted Continuity : Some indeed of the Anti- 
 cuts I confefs were of this Opinion, but I deny 
 they had any Certainty of it. 5. They knew not 
 
 that
 
 CHAP. i. tf Unfaerfal Geography. 9 
 
 that the Torrid Zone was inhabited, by an alinoft in- 
 finite number of People. 6. They were ignorant 
 of the true Meafure of the Earth, tho* they writ a 
 great deal on that Subject. 7. They did not think 
 that Africa could be failed round, (b) becaufe the 
 South Parts thereof were unknown to them. 8. 
 Both the Greeks and Romans wanted true Defcripti- 
 ons of the Countries remote from them, and have 
 kit us a great many forged and fabulous Stories, 
 concerning the People that live in the Borders of 
 Afia^ and thofe that inhabit the Northern Parts of 
 the Earth (c). 9. They were ignorant of the ge- 
 neral Motion of the Sea, and the Difference of Cur- 
 rents in particular Places. 10. The Grecians, even 
 Ariftotle himfelf, did not know the Reafon of the 
 Ebbing and Flowing of the Sea. 1 1 . Few of them 
 underftood the Variation of the Winds ; and the 
 
 (b} It is likely the antient Et alibi, cauda villofa famines 
 
 Egyptians had fome Knowledge nafci pernicitatis fximi<t. Th 
 
 of the extream Parts of Africa, Arimafpi are famous for having 
 
 as appears from what Herodotus only one Eye fixed in the mid- 
 
 relates, viz. " That Neco, King die of their Foreheads, between 
 
 " of Egypt, (2200 Years ago) whom and the Griffons there 
 
 ? having furnifhed certain?^- is a continual War carried on 
 
 " niriaris with Ships ; thefe fet- about their Metals. In another 
 
 " ting Sail for the Red-Sea, and Place there are a fort of grinning 
 
 " coafting along Africa, doub- Apifh People, born with long 
 
 " led the Cape of Good Hope ; hairy Tails, and very fwift of 
 
 '' and after two Years fpent Foot. From which Romantic 
 
 " in the Voyage entered the Stories of Pliny, Sir J. Mande- 
 
 " S freights of Gibraltar, in ville took his lying Reports, of 
 
 " the third. Herod. Lib. 4. his meeting (in his Travels,) 
 
 (e)C. Plinii Nat. Hijl. Lib. 5. with thefe very People, and al- 
 
 Cap. 8. Blemmyis traduntur ca- fo fome, in the Torrid Zone, that 
 
 fita abefle, ore & oculis pettori to guard themfelves againft the 
 
 tfjf jf/j. The Bletntnyi are faid to Scorching Heat of the Sun, had 
 
 be without Heads, having their one of their Feet fo large, that 
 
 Mouths and Eyes fixed in their by lying on their backs, and 
 
 Breafts. Ibid. Lib. 7. Cap. 2. Art holding it up againft the Sun, 
 
 nafpi uno oculo in front e media would fcreen them againft it's 
 
 infignei : quibus affidue helium immoderate Heat ; with other 
 
 f/e (in* meia.Ha (urn Gryfkis. the like whimlical Relations. 
 
 Periodical,
 
 jo *fbe Abfolute Part SECT. I. 
 
 Periodical, or Trade-Winds ^ were never dreamt of 
 by diem. 12. The noble Property of the Load- 
 Stone, which mews the North and South, was un- 
 known to them ; tho' they knew it's Virtue of at- 
 tracting Iron. And Anaximander, who lived about 
 400 Years before Chrift, was the firft that attemp- 
 ted to give the Dimenfions of the Earth (a). 
 
 The Excellency of Geography. 
 
 T H E R E are three Things that recommend the 
 Study of Geography, i . It's Dignity * and in that 
 it greatly adorns Man, the Inhabitant of the Earth 
 endowed with Reafon above all other Animals, to 
 underftand the Nature of Countries, and the Con- 
 ftitution of the Earth. 2. It is as well a pleafant, 
 as an innocent Recreation. 3. There is an abfolute 
 neceffity for the Knowledge of it -, becaufe neither 
 Divines, Pbyftcians, Lawyers, Hi/lorians, nor other 
 Men of Letters, can well proceed in their Studies 
 without interruption, unlefs they have fome Know- 
 ledge of Geography ; as it hath been obferved by o- 
 thers, and illuftrated by feveral Examples, 
 
 HERE follow two Tables, whereof the firft 
 may ferve for the Contents of this Book , which 
 
 (a] The Moderns have de- much of the Globe undifcover- 
 
 tefted many Errors of the An- ed. There is a vaft Southern 
 
 tients, and very much improved Continent, as yet fcarce lookt 
 
 Geography, by opening a Pa into. The northern parts of Ame- 
 
 fage to a New World, and by rica, are yet undifcovered : Afri- 
 
 difcovering that thofe Parts of ca, tho' it hath been compafled 
 
 the Old which were thought round and round from the Me- 
 
 uninhabitable, to be inhabited ; diterranean to the Red-Sea, yet 
 
 the Torrid Zone is known to be little more than it's Coafts are 
 
 temperate, and, by refreming throughly known, except Egypt 
 
 Showers and conftant Breezes, and Abaffia. It's inland parts 
 
 and cold Nights ; and the Globe have been either not fuffici- 
 
 itfeif has been compafled by fe- ently viewed or imperfectly 
 
 veral, both Englijb and foreign defcribed. 
 
 $ilori. Jiut there yet . remain* . 
 
 contains
 
 C H A P. r- rf Univerfal Geography. 1 1 
 
 contains Univerfal Geography : the other Ihews the 
 Order that ought to be obferved by thofe that 
 of Special Geography. 
 
 W p divide Univerfal Geography into three Parts, 
 
 viz. 
 
 I. THE ABSOLUTE PART, fubdivided 
 into fix Sections, whereof 
 
 SECTION I. contains two Chapters of 
 PRELIMINARIES. 
 
 C Chap. I. The Introduction or Preface. 
 
 < Chap, n. Some Geometrical Propofitions of ufe 
 
 C in the Work. 
 
 SECT. II. In which the Nature of the Earth 
 is explained, in five Chapters. 
 
 Chap. III. Of the Figure of the Earth. 
 , Chap. IV. Of it's Meafure and Magnitude, 
 l Cbap.V. Of it's Motion. 
 Chap. VI. Of it's Situation in the Syftem of the 
 
 World. 
 Chap. VII. Of it's Subftance and Matter, 
 
 SECT. III. In which the Conftitution of the 
 Earth and it's Parts are explained, in four Chapters. 
 
 'Chap. VIII. Of the Divifion of the Earth by 
 
 Water. 
 
 Chap. IX. Of Mountains in general. 
 }Chap. X. Of the Differences of Mountains, 
 f. XI. OfWopds, Defarts, and Mines. 
 
 SECT.
 
 It <fbe Abfolute Part SECT.!. 
 
 S E C T. IV. Of Hydrography, in which the 
 Conftitution of the Waters, and their Properties 
 are explained, in fix Chapters. 
 
 Chap. XII. Of the Divifion of the Waters by 
 
 the Earth. 
 
 Chap. XIII. Of the Ocean and Sea. 
 Chap. XIV. Of the Motion of the Sea, viz. it's 
 
 Flux and Reflux. 
 
 Chap. XV. Of Lakes, Meres, and Morafles. 
 Chap. XVI. Of Rivers. 
 
 . XVII. Of Mineral Waters. 
 
 SECT. V. 
 
 Cbap. XVIII. Of the extraordinary Changes of 
 the Sea into Land, and dry 
 Places into watery. 
 
 SECT. VI. Of the Atmofphere. 
 
 <" Cbap. XIX. Of the Atmofphere and Air. 
 
 <. Chap. XX. Of Winds in general. 
 
 .Chap. XXI. Of the different forts of Winds. 
 
 II. THE RELATIVE PAR? explains the 
 Celeftial Properties, in nine Chapters. 
 
 Cbap. XXII. Of the Celeftial Properties in ge- 
 neral 
 Chap. XXIII. Of the Latitude of the Place, or 
 
 the Elevation of the Pole. 
 Chap. XXIV. Of the Divifion of the Earth into 
 
 Zones. 
 Chap. XXV. Of the Length of Days, and the 
 
 Divifion of the Earth into 
 
 Climates, 
 
 Chap,
 
 C H A P. i. tf Uniwrfai Geography. 13 
 
 Cbaf. XXVI. Of Light, Heat, and the Seafons 
 of the Year. 
 
 Cbap. XXVII. Of Shadows, and how the Inha^ 
 bitants are divided according 
 to them. 
 
 Cbaf. XXVIII. Of comparing the Celeftial Phe- 
 nomena, in different Places. 
 Of the Anteeci) Periced and 
 Antipodes. 
 
 Chap. XXIX. Of the Difference of Time in dif- 
 ferent Places. 
 
 Chap. XXX. Of the different Rifmg of the Sun 
 and Moon, and other Phe- 
 nomena. 
 
 III. THE COMPARATIVE PAR? 
 
 confiders the Particulars arifing from comparing the 
 Phenomena of one Place, with thofe of another. 
 
 Chap. XXXI. Of the Longitude of Places. 
 Chap. XXXII. Of the Situation of Places in re- 
 
 fpect of one another. 
 
 Chap. XXXIII. Of the Diftances of Places. 
 Chap. XXXIV. Of the Vifible Horizon. 
 Chap. XXXV. Of Navigation, in general, and 
 
 Ship-Building. 
 Chap. XXXVI. Of Lading and Ballafting of 
 
 Ships. 
 Chap. XXXVII. The Nautical Directory, Part 
 
 i. Of Diftances. 
 Chap. XXXVIII. Part 2. Of the Points of the 
 
 Compafs. 
 
 Cbap. XXXIX. Part 3. Of a Ship's Courfe. 
 Chap. XL, Parl 4. Of the Ship's Place in her v 
 Voyage. 
 
 Special
 
 fbe Jbfolute Part SECT.!, 
 
 Special Geography exhibits three kinds of Particu- 
 lars. Ten of them are Terreftrial. 
 
 1. The Limits and Bounds of the Country. 
 
 2. The Longitude and Situation of Places. 
 
 3. The Figure of the Country. 
 
 4. It's Magnitude. 
 
 5. It's Mountains ; their Names, Situations, Al- 
 
 titudes, Properties, and Things contain- 
 ed in them. 
 
 6. It's Mines. 
 
 7. It's Woods and Defarts. 
 
 8. It's Waters ; as Seas, Rivers, Lakes, Marmes, 
 
 Springs; their Rife, their Origin, and 
 Breadth ; the Quantity, Quality, and Ce- 
 lerity of their Waters, with their Cataracts. 
 
 9. The Fertility, Barrennefs, and Fruits, of the 
 
 Country. 
 
 10. It's living Creatures. 
 
 The Celeftial Properties are eight. 
 
 1. The Diftance of the Place from the Equator 
 
 and Pole. 
 
 2. The Obliquity of the Motion of the Stars a- 
 
 bove the Horizon. 
 
 3 . The Length of the Days and Nights. 
 
 4. The Climate and Zone. 
 
 5. The Heat and Seafons : Wind, Rain, and 
 
 other Meteors. 
 
 6. The Rifing and Continuance of the Stars a- 
 
 bove the Horizon. 
 
 7. The Stars that pafs thro* the Zenith of the 
 
 Place. 
 
 8. The Celerity with which each Place revolves, 
 
 according to the Copernican Syftem. 
 
 2 THE
 
 CHAP. 2. of Univerfal Geography. 
 THE Human Particulars are ten. 
 
 1. The Stature of the Inhabitants -, their Meat, 
 
 Drink i >and Origin. 
 
 2. Their Arts, Profits, Commodities, and 
 
 Trade. 
 
 3^ Their Virtues and Vices; their Capacities 
 and Learning. 
 
 4. Their Ceremonies at Births, Marriages, and 
 
 Funerals. 
 
 5. Their Speech and Language. 
 
 6. Their Political Government. 
 
 7. Their Religion and Church Government. 
 
 8. Their Cities. 
 
 9. Their memorable Hiftories. 
 
 10. Their famous Men and Women, Artificers 
 
 and Inventions. 
 
 H 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Some Propofitiotu in Geometry and Trigonometry, of 
 
 ufe in Geography. 
 
 PL A TO very juftly called Geometry and Arith- 
 metic the two Wings whereby the Minds of 
 Men might mount up to Heaven ; that is, in fearch- 
 ing after the Motions and Properties of the Celeftial 
 Bodies. Thefe Sciences are no lefs uferul in Geogra- 
 phy ; if we defire to underftand it's fublime and in- 
 tixcare Parts, without any Hinderance. It is true, 
 a lefs fhare of Mathematics will ferve for Geography* 
 than 4ftronomy : but becaufe feveral are taken with 
 
 the
 
 -i$ Tfa Abfolute Part SECT. I 
 
 the Study of Geography who do not underftand 
 thefe Sciences, we fliall here let down a few Propo- 
 fitions from them, fuch as we think moft necefiary j 
 that the Reader may proceed the more readily with- 
 out Interruption in his Study. Tho% by the way, 
 we "do not at all encourage that bad Cuftom fome 
 young Gentlemen have got, in applying themfelves 
 unadvifedly to other Parts of Philofophy, before 
 they have a competent Knowledge in Arithmetic 
 and Geometry. The Fault is very often in their 
 Matters and Tutors, who are for the moft Part ig- 
 norant of thefe Things themfelves, and therefore 
 cannot admonifh Youth to Ihun fo pernicious a 
 Cuftom. In Arithmetic we fuppofe the Reader to 
 know the four common Rules of Numeration, viz. 
 Addition, SubftracJion^ Multiplication , and Divifion, 
 with the Golden Rule, or Rule of fbree ; and there- 
 fore mail not treat of them here. If any one under- 
 ftand them not, he may learn them much better 
 from fome able Teacher, than from Books. 
 
 1 . BUT as to Geometry, it treats of three forts 
 of Magnitudes, by which every Thing is meafu- 
 red j viz. Lines, Superficies, and Solids : neither can 
 there be found in Nature a Body of any other 
 Dimenfion. 
 
 2. A LINE is either ftraight or curved ; and 
 a Curve again is either uniform as circular, or ciiflf- 
 milar and variable, as the ^Ellipfe, the Conchoid, 
 and Spiral Line. 
 
 3. A CIRCLE is a Space or plain Super- 
 ficies bounded with a curve Line, wherein there 
 is a Point from which all right Lines drawn to 
 the Curve are equal. The curve Line which bounds 
 that Space is called the Circumference, or Periphery 
 of the Circle i and the middle Point is called the 
 Center (a). 
 
 (} Euclid Lib. i. Vef. 15,1 6, 
 
 , THE
 
 CHAP. 2. ofUnmer/al Geography. \j 
 
 4. T H E Diameter of a Circle is a right Line 
 drawn thro' the Center, and terminated at both 
 ends by the Periphery : one half of which is called 
 the Semidiameter, or Radius (a). 
 
 5. AN Arch is part of the Periphery of a 
 Circle. A Quadrant is a fourth Part ot the whole 
 Periphery. What an Arch wants of a Quadrant is 
 called the Complement of that Arch : and it's Diffe- 
 rence from a Semicircle it called it's Supplement (b). 
 
 PROBLEM. 
 
 6. HAVING aright Line given and a Point 
 either in, or out of it, to draw thro* that Point a 
 Line perpendicular to the former. 
 
 LET the Line given (Fig. 2.) be AB, and 
 the Point C : open the Compafles fo, that fetting 
 one Foot in C, you may with the other cut the 
 Line given in df; then one Foot being placed 
 at d, with the other defcribe an Arch, as g h ; allb 
 make/ the Center, and with the fame. Radius de- 
 fcribe another Arch, which will cut the former 
 in g and h , fo draw the Line g b ; which will be 
 the Perpendicular required. 
 
 7. TO divide a Circle and ifs Periphery into four 
 equal Parts. Draw a Diameter, and from the 
 Center raife to it a Perpendicular, which prolonged 
 will be alfo a Diameter ; whereby both the Circle 
 and it's Periphery will be divided into four equal 
 Pans (c). 
 
 8 . TO divide the Periphery of a Circle into Degrees. 
 A Degree is the 36oth Part of the Circumference. 
 Mathematicians always divide the Periphery into 
 
 (a) Euclid Lib. \..Def. 17. (c) ttid. Prop. 4. Lib. iv. 
 
 (*) lb. Prop, M, , 2 . Lib. i. 
 
 V O L. I. C fo
 
 1 8 fbe Abjohitc Part SECT. I. 
 
 fo many equal Parts tf) ; and each of thefc Par ts 
 into 60 fmaller Divifions, called firft Minutes; 
 alfo each Minute into 60 Seconds, &c. commonly 
 writ thus, 3 degr. 2. min. 5 fee. that is, 3 Degrees, 
 2 Minutes, 5 Seconds. Hence the Quadrant con- 
 taineth 90 Degr. the Semicircle 180, and the fixth 
 Part of a Circle 60 Degrees. 
 
 THEREFORE to folve this Problem, di- 
 vide the Periphery into Quadrants, then take off 
 the Semidiameter, and with it's Length cut an 
 Arch from the Periphery (*), which will be equal 
 to 60 Degr. fo there remains in the fame Qua- 
 drant 30 Degr. which being bifected you will have 
 1 5 Degr. this again mechanically trifected will give 
 5 Degr. which divided into five equal Parts make 
 fo many Degrees, Q. E. F. But this is done more 
 artificially by mathematical Inftruments (/). 
 
 9. TO find the Area of a Quadrangle, or a Space 
 contained in a Figure of four Sides, and four Right 
 Angles. Multiply one fide by the other, and the 
 Product is the Area. It is to be obfcrved that 
 Lines are meafured by Lines, and Superficies by 
 Meafures that are Superficies, or Squares ; alfo the 
 Contents of folid Bodies, which have their Dimen- 
 fions, are computed in folid Meafure, or fo many 
 Cubes. Thus we meafure the Sides of a Houfe 
 by a lineal Foot, the Floors and Wainfcot by a 
 
 (d) This Division of a Circle from the fame Point lay on thd 
 into 360 Parts, or Degrees, is Chord of two Degr. fo of three 
 becaufe that number can be di- Degr. &c. 'till you come to 90 
 vided into more Aliquot Parts, Degr. then begin again as before 
 than any other convenient 'till the whole Periphery is di- 
 Number, viz. into 2,3,4,5, vided. By this means you will 
 6, 8 and 9 Parts. avoid the Errors which may a- 
 
 (e) Euclid. Prop. 15. Lib.\v. rife from the intermediate Di- 
 
 (f) By a Line of Chords vifions, and tho' thefe Errors 
 truly divided; thus, from any fmgly confidered are very, fmall. 
 Point in the Periphery lay on yet in fo many Degr. they will 
 ihe Chord of one Degr. then produce one very fenfiblc. 
 
 2 iquare
 
 CHAP. 2. ef Univerfal Geography * 19 
 fquare Foot, and the Space it enclofeth, confider- 
 ed as a Solid, by a cubical Foot. 
 
 10. HAVING the Diameter or Semidiameter of 
 a Circle, to find the Periphery in the fame Meafure : 
 and converfly, having the Periphery given to find the 
 Diameter as near as pojjlble (g). The Solution of 
 this Problem depends upon die determined Pro- 
 portion of the Diameter to the Periphery, which is 
 nearly as 7 to 22 ; as is demonftrated by Archi- 
 medes 9 or more accurately, as 10000000000 is to 
 21415926535 (). For Example, let the Dia- 
 meter be 1 2 Foot ; by the Golden Rule, as 7 is to 
 22 : fo is 12 to the Periphery of the Circle ; or if 
 you ufe the other Proportion it will be much the 
 fame. 
 
 BUT if the Periphery be given, and the Dia- 
 meter be required, fay ; as 22 is to 7, or as. 
 31415926535 to 10000000000, fo is the Peri- 
 phery given to the Diameter required. 
 
 11. THE Diameter and Periphery of a Circle ', 
 or either of them, being given in Miles or Feet, to find 
 
 (g) See Tacquefs felel The- who carried his Calculation to 
 
 orems of dr chime des, Prop. 5. 3 5 places of Decimal Fractions. 
 
 (b) Tho' it be well known Or if he would flill be more 
 
 that the Periphery of a Circle nice and curious, he may have 
 
 is incommensurable to the Dia- recourfe to Mr Abr. Sharp's 
 
 meter, yet either of thefe Pro- Calculation, to double the Num- 
 
 portions will ferve well enough bcr of Fait Caulerfs Fractions, 
 
 for common Ufe. But no Pro- By which Exaftnefs the Cir- 
 
 portion in fmall Numbers is fo cumferance of the Terraqueous 
 
 exact as that of Andrew Me- Globe, may be computed to a 
 
 tius, viz- 113 to 355, which Degree leis than the Breadth 
 
 is found not to differ from the of a Grain of Sand : yea, more 
 
 Truth above T ^ r J__-. But than this, the number of the 
 
 if the Reader defirech the niceft Grains of Sand, that would be 
 
 Computation of the Proportion contained in a Space as big as 
 
 of the Diameter of a Circle to the Sphere of the Fixt Stars, 
 
 the Circumference (ahho 1 that might be truly computed by 
 
 of Mtftiui comes very near,J, let this means. Vid. Math. Tables 
 
 him have recourfe to the labo- printed for Mr Mount, p-ge 
 
 ricus Calculus gf Van Ceulen, 53, &c. 
 
 C 2 be
 
 20 The Absolute Part SECT.!. 
 
 the Area of that Circle in fquare Miles, or fquare Feet. 
 Multiply one half of the Periphery into the Semi- 
 diameter, and the Product will be the Area requi- 
 red (i) : but if you have only one of them given, 
 you may find the other by the laft Problem : Or it 
 may be done without it (k). 
 
 12. THE Diameter, or Semidiameter^ of a Globe 
 being given; to find it's Superficies in Square, or it's 
 Solidity in Cubic Meafure. 
 
 A Globe is a round folid Body, having a certain 
 Point in the Center of it, from whence all right 
 Lines drawn to the Surface are equal : and a Line 
 drawn thro' this Point is the Diameter, about 
 which if the Globe be revolved it is called it's 
 Axis (/;. Moreover if a Globe be cut any how 
 by a right Line, the Section is a Circle ; if thro* 
 the Center the Circle will have the fame Diameter 
 as the Globe itfelf ; and fuch are called the greater 
 Circles of the Sphere or Globe, and the reft letter 
 Circles. To folve the Problem (m) : By the tenth 
 Article, find the Periphery -, then multiply the Di- 
 ameter into this Periphery, and the Product will be 
 the Superficies of the Globe in fquare Meafure, which 
 multiplied into the % of the Diameter, will produce 
 the Solidity of the Globe in cubic Meafure. 
 
 (/) As is demonflrated by i i j j 
 
 Archimedes, Prop. \ . De Di~ j- \- 
 
 men/tone Circuit. 357 9 
 
 (k) By faying, as the Square I I i j 
 
 of i f which is i) is to 7854 -j- ._L 
 
 (the Area of a Circle whofe 1 1 13 15 '17 
 Diameter is \) fo is the Square 
 
 of any other Diameter to it's __ ___ -j 1, & c . 
 
 Area; By Prop. z. Lib. ii. of IQ ' 2l' 
 Euclid. The famons M. Leib- 
 nitz has demonftrated, that if M Eucltd - Ll *-"- ^ e f- 4 
 the Diameter of a Circle be i, '5; l6 ' 7- 
 
 , (m) See this demonftrated in 
 
 the true Area will be Taequet'i Select Theorem s of Ar- 
 
 thimedef, Scholium z, of Prop. 
 24. and that of Prop. 28.
 
 C H A P. 2. of Univerfal Geography. 2 1 
 
 13. A R 1 G HT angled Triangle hath two fides 
 perpendicular to each other (or make an Angle of 
 90 Degr.) which two (ides are called the Catbeti, 
 or Perpendiculars, and the third fide the Hypo- 
 tenufe. 
 
 THE Meafure of an Angle is the Length of 
 an Arch defcribed from the angular Point as a 
 Center : that is, as many Degrees as the Arch be- 
 tween the Legs of the Angle doth contain -, fo 
 many Degrees the Angle is faid to be of. Thus a 
 right Angle is 90 Degr. becaufe the Arch fo de- 
 fcribed is a Quadrant. 
 
 THE right Sine of an Arch is a right Line 
 drawn from the one end of the Arch perpendicular to 
 the Diameter, which paffeth thro' the other end (). 
 
 THE Tangent of an Arch is a right Line which 
 touches the Arch at one end, and is bounded at 
 the other with a Line drawn thro* the Center, and 
 the other end of the Arch ; which Line is called 
 the Secant of that Arch. 
 
 MOREOVER, the Sine, Tangent, and Secant 9 
 of an Angle, are the fame of the Arch which 
 meafureth the Angle. 
 
 (n) Mr Whiflon in his Notes A B D, the Square of A B // e- 
 
 upon Tacquefs Euclid, has neat- qualto the Square of A D and 
 
 ly explained the Origin of Sines, B D. Therefore let the Semi- 
 
 Tangents, and Secants. CorolL diameter A 8 be fquared, and 
 
 to the 47 ch Prop. Lib.'i. which from that Square fubjlr a fl the 
 
 we (hall here tranfcrihe. Let Square of B D : The Remainder 
 
 A C the Semidiameter of aCircle will be the Square of A D or 
 
 ( Fl S- 3-) be f 100.000 Parts, of the Co-fine B F equal to it: 
 
 and toe Jng/eBA Dof$o Deg. out of which extraft the f quart 
 
 becaufe the Chord or Sub ten ft of Root, and you will have the 
 
 60 Degr. is equal to AC the Line B F or A D. Then by this 
 
 Semidiameter (by Prop. \ 5. Lib. Analogy at A B : BD : : A E : 
 
 iv. Euclid] B D the Sine 0/30 C E or A D : B D : : A C : C E, 
 
 Degrees Jkall be equal to ont jo you have the Tangent C E. 
 
 half the Semidiame'.er, or And if the Square of A C be ad- 
 
 AC; and therefore Jhall con- ded tv the Square ofCE, the 
 
 tain 50.000 Parts. But now Root of the Sum being extracted 
 
 in the right-angled Triangle will be the Saant A . $> E. I. 
 
 C 3 IT
 
 22 The Abfblutt Part SECT.I. 
 
 I T is alfo necefiary to be known that Tables 
 have been calculated by the great Labour and In- 
 duftry of fome Mathematicians, in which the Dia- 
 meter being taken for 100000, &c. the Sines, 
 Tangents, and Secants, are found out in propor- 
 tional Numbers; as of 2 Degr. 10 Degr. 20 Degr. 
 32 Min. &V. Thefe Tables are called mathema- 
 tical Canons, and are of extraordinary ufe in all 
 mathematical and phyfical Sciences-, wherefore I 
 am willing to give fome Hints of thefe things 
 to the young Geographer. But becaufe fpherical 
 Triangles have fome Difficulty in their manage- 
 ment, and regard none but thofe who defire to 
 be deeper (killed in this Science, we mail pafs them 
 by ; and only treat of right-angled Triangles, the 
 meafuring of which is as eafy as neceflary. 
 
 two THEOREMS. 
 
 14. THE three Angles of every Triangle^ taken 
 together, are equal to two right Angles, or 180 Degr. 
 and therefore the two acute Angles of a right angledi 
 Triangle make exactly 90 Degr. (0). Alfo if a 
 right Line touch a Circle, and there be drawn from 
 the Point of Contatt another right Line to the Center, 
 that Line makes a right Angle with the Tangent (/>). 
 
 15. THE mod neceflary Problems are thefe. 
 
 I. THE Hypotenufe and one fide of a right angled 
 Triangle being given, to find either of the acute Angles. 
 Say by the Golden Rule , As the given Hypote- 
 nufe is to the given fide: io is the Radius 100000 
 (which_ Number is aflumed equal to the Semidia- 
 meter in the Tables J to the Sine of the oppofite 
 Angle ^ which Sine being found in the Tables 
 
 (o) Euclid. ?r 3 p. 3 z. Lib. \. (p) ibid. Prop. 18. Ub. iii. 
 
 will
 
 CHAP. 2. ofUniverfal Geography. 23 
 
 will mew the Quantity of the Arch or Angle op- 
 polite to the Side given ; and the other Angle is 
 the complement of that now found, to 90 Degr. 
 
 II. NE fide and the acute Angle next it being 
 given, to find the Hypctenufe. Say as before i As 
 the Sine of the Complement of the given Angle is 
 to the Radius 1000000 : fo is the Side given to the 
 Hypotenufe fought. 
 
 III. HAVING two Sties given, to find either of 
 the acute Angles. Say, As either of the Sides is to 
 the other, fo is the Radius 100000 to the Tangent 
 of the Angle adjacent to the Side firft aflumed. 
 
 IV. HAVING the Hypotenufe and one acute 
 Angle given, to find either of the Sides : Say ; As the 
 Radius 100000 is to the Sine of the Angle op- 
 pofite to the Side required : So is the given Hy- 
 potenufe to that Side. 
 
 Of Divers Meafures. 
 
 BECAUSE theufe of Meafures is frequent 
 in Geography, and fince divers Nations ufe dif- 
 ferent Meafures, 'tis proper to premife fomewhat 
 concerning them ; partly that the Reader may the 
 better underftand the Writings of the antient Geo- 
 graphers and Hiftorians , and partly that he may 
 compare together thofe in ufe at this Day. 
 
 THE Length of a Foot is almoft univerfally 
 made ufe of, tho* a Foot in one Place differs 
 from that in another. Mathematicians frequent- 
 ly meafure by the Rhinland Foot of Snellius, which 
 he proves to be equal to the old Roman Foot. 
 And becaufe Snellius was very diligent and accu- 
 rate in meafuring the Earth, that Rbinland Foot 
 C 4 ot
 
 24 fk Abfdute Part SECT.!. 
 
 of his is defervedly taken as a Standard for all 
 other Mcafures ($). See half it's Length, Fig. i. 
 
 A P R C H or Pole ought to conlift of ten 
 fuch Feet. But the Surveyers in Holland make 1 2 
 Feet a Rhinland Perch, and in Germany they com- 
 pute 1 6 ; which is very incommodious in Calcula- 
 tion. Sneliim makes the Holland Mile equal to 
 1500 RbitilandPerchts (each Perch being 12 Foot) 
 or 1800 Rhinland Feet. 
 
 THESE two Meafures, a Perch and a Mile 
 arile from the repetition of a Foot , but a Palm 
 an Inch) and a Barley-Corn (which are fometimes 
 ufed in Holland] proceed from it's Divifion. An 
 Inch is the twelfth Part of a Foot. A Palm is 
 4 Inches. A Barley-Corn is the fourth Part of an 
 Inch. However it would be much better to 
 divide the Foot into 10 Inches, and the Inch into 
 jo Subdivifions or Seconds. &c. 
 
 THESE are the Meafures now made ufe of 
 by the Dutch in Geography. It remains that fome 
 others be alfo taken Notice of ; viz. thofe of the 
 Antients, whether Greeks, Romans, Perfiam, ;gyp- 
 tiam ; and thofe alfo of later Times as of the 
 Turks, Polanden, Germans, Mofcovites, Italians, 
 Spaniards, French, and Englijb. 
 
 (q) Becaufe the Knowledge Bernard's Treatife of Weights 
 
 cfan Eng Hjh, Frereb, and Rbin- and Meafures, where he moft 
 
 landijh Foot will be of ufe in learnedly confutes the great Er- 
 
 what follows, we will here give ror ofStieHius in this Matter. 
 
 their Proportions ; to which we If an Englijb Foot be divided 
 
 fliall add the Meafure of the old into 1000 Parts, and a French 
 
 fcoman Foot, taken from Dr Foot into 1440. Then 
 
 1309 
 
 THE
 
 C IT A P . 2 . of Univerfal Geography. 2 5 
 
 THE Grecian Stadium, or Furlong, is fuppofed 
 to be 600 of their Feet, which make 625 Roman , 
 or Rbinland, Feet , their Foot being a little larger 
 than the Roman. 
 
 A GERMAN Mile (15 of which Geogra- 
 phers allow to a Degree) contains 22800 Rbuaand 
 Feet, and is accounted 4000 Paces, or 32 Fur- 
 longs. It is in Proportion to the Rbinland Mile, 
 as 19 to 15. 
 
 THE Italian or Roman Mile is i ooo Paces, 
 which is equal to 4000 Rbinland Feet. Note, The 
 Romans ufed to call their Mile Lapis, becaufe a 
 Stone was creeled at the end of every Mile ; efpe- 
 cially in Places adjacent to the City. 
 
 ^GEOMETRICAL Prfttis exactly 5 Feet; 
 and a Fathom 6 Feet ; which is thought by fome to 
 have been the Pace of the Grecians. 
 
 A C U BIT is fuppofed to be a Foot and a half. 
 THE Parafange, or Perfian Mile, is thought 
 to be 30 Furlongs, or 3000 Perfian Paces. 
 
 THE Scbanus, or ^Egyptian, Mile, according 
 to Herodotus, contains 60 Furlongs, tho* only 40 
 according to Pliny. Perhaps their Length diffe- 
 red in divers Places, or the Furlongs of the Au- 
 thors might be unequal : Or very likely their Books 
 are corrupted. 
 
 THE French League is in Proportion to the 
 Rbinlandijh Mile, as 19 to 25 i and the Spanijh 
 League is to the fame Mile, as 19 to 27! : But 
 becaufe in feveral Parts of France and Spain their 
 League is found to differ, we cannot be well allu- 
 red of the Length of thefe Meafures. 
 
 THE Engli/h Mile is in Proportion to the 
 Rhinlandijh, as 19 to 55, or as 19 to 60, (r). But 
 
 there 
 
 (r) The leaft Part < Englijh and well dried ; whereof 3 in 
 Meafure i a Barley-Corn, taken Length make and Inch, ts'e. as 
 out of the middle of the Ear in the following Table. 
 
 A TaM*
 
 26 The Abfolute Part SECT.!. 
 
 there are three forts of Englijh Miles, whereof 27 i 
 of the longelt, 50 of the middle Kind, and 60 of 
 the fhorteit, make a Degree or 19 Dutch Miles. 
 
 THE Dw> and Swedijh Mile is to the Rbin- 
 landifb Mile as 19 to 10 ; tho' in fome Places they 
 life the German Mile. 
 
 THE Pore/}, or Rujfian, Mile is as 19 to 80. 
 
 THE Turkijh League or Mile is faid to be e- 
 qual to the Italian Mile ; of which 60 make a 
 Degree. 
 
 THE Arabian League was formerly accounted 
 the twenty fifth Part of a Degree, or 19 Holland 
 Miles: but they now ufe another of which 56 
 make a Degree. 
 
 AHUNDRED Indian Miles are thought to 
 equal a Degree. Tho' the Indians cpmmonly de- 
 fcribe Diftances by a Day, or an Hour's Journey. 
 
 THE Inhabitants of Cambaya and Guzaraf, 
 ufe a Meafure which they call Coffa 9 of which 30 
 make a Degree. 
 
 THE Cbinefe obferve three Meafures in their 
 Journies, which they call Li, Pu, and Uchan. Li is 
 the Diftance at which a Man's loud Voice may be 
 lieard on a Plain, in a calm Air ; which is accounted 
 300 Geometrical Paces. Their Pu contains 10 Li's ; 
 
 fo 
 
 A 'Table of Englifb Meafure. 
 
 Bar. C. 
 
 feh, 
 
 Fftt 
 
 ?W. 
 ~ 
 
 Pace 
 
 
 3 
 
 36 
 
 12 
 
 I OX 
 
 3 6 
 
 3 
 
 i He 
 
 60 
 
 6 
 
 Zlt 
 
 72 
 
 2 
 
 i-i 
 
 594 
 
 198 
 
 i6i 
 
 5^ 
 
 4-ro 
 
 i i o! 40/ar/. 
 8hoj 320) fc A//7/I 
 
 23760 
 
 7920 
 
 660 
 
 220 
 
 132 
 
 i 80090 
 
 63360 
 
 ^28011760 
 
 1050
 
 CHAP. 2. of Vnherfal Geography. 27 
 
 fo that 20 Pu's make a Degree. And 10 PH'S make 
 an Ucban, or 30000 Paces ; which they account a 
 day's Journey. 
 
 Note, A Square Rh'mland Mile confifts of Square 
 Feet and a Cubic Mile of Cubic Feet. Alfo a 
 Mile multiplied into itfelf makes a Square Mile ; 
 and that again by a Mile makes a Cubic Mile. 
 The fame is to be underftood of a Square and 
 Cubic Foot. 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 Containing fome general and absolute Properties 
 of the Earth, in jive Chapters. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Figure of the Earth. 
 
 TH E firft and nobleft Property of the Earth 
 fas exceeding the reft in being more ufeful and 
 neceffary) is it's Figure ; without the Knowledge 
 of which there can be nothing well underftood or 
 demonftrated in this Science ; and all the following 
 Propofitions almoft entirely depend on, or imme- 
 diately flow from, this; which for that Reafon 
 ought to be firft treated of. 
 
 THERE have been, and are to this Day, fe- 
 veral Opinions about the Figure of the Earth ; for 
 the Vulgar that underftand not Geography, imagine 
 it to be extended into a vaft Plain bounded with a 
 Circular Line ; except where Mountains and Val- 
 lies interpofe. Of this ftrange Opinion was Laftan- 
 tius and others of the Fathers, who ftrenuoufly ar- 
 gued that the Earth was extended infinitely down- 
 wards,
 
 28 Tbe Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 wards, and eftablifhed upon feveral Foundations (a}. 
 This they were inclined to think from fome Places 
 of Scripture which they either ill underftood or 
 wrong interpreted. Heraclitus, that antient Philo- 
 fopher, is faid to have been of their Opinion : tho' 
 others fay, he fuppofed the Earth to be in the Shape 
 of a Skiff or Canoo, very much hollowed. But 
 what is more ftrange Francis Patricius (a modern 
 Philofopher of no fmall Repute in the laft Age; 
 ftrenuoufly endeavoured to prove, that the Earth 
 was horizontally ftretched out and plain under Foot. 
 Anazimander is faid by Peucerus to have fuppofed 
 the Earth like a Cylinder ; tho* that is not fo pro- 
 bable, becaufe he tried to meafure it, and alfo in- 
 vented a fort of a Dial at Laced<zmon, upon which 
 the Top of the Gnomon by it's Shadow marked out 
 the Days of the Equinoxes, and Solftices : which 
 mewed him to have been tolerably (killed in Afiro- 
 vomy, confidering the Time he lived in. Leucippus 
 alfo thought the Earth to be in the Shape of a Drum. 
 Thefe with a great many other abfurd Opinions, are 
 by Ariftotle and others attributed to the Antients : of 
 which fee Ariftotle Lib. ii. Cap. 13. de Calo. 
 
 BU T the true and undoubted Opinion, which 
 is defended by all Mathematicians, and almoft all 
 Philofophers, is, That the Earth is of a globular 
 or fpherical Figure (b). 
 
 THE 
 
 /X)See LaHantius Lib. iii. Honour and Admiration in it; 
 
 Cbap.Z4.in&AuguJlinLil>.y.v\. that the true Figure of the 
 
 'Chap. 9. De Civil. Dei. They Earth, which Men have inha- 
 
 thought their Opinion was fa- bited for fo many thoufand 
 
 voured by the Pfalmijt. Pfal. Years, is but now begun to be 
 
 xxiv. 2. and cxxxvi. 6. known a few Years ago. For 
 
 (*) Among the many excel- that which all Men thought to 
 
 lent and wonderful Inventions be globular and truly fpherical, 
 
 ,. 1 modern Pil kpher5, is now found to imitate rather 
 
 this here is not certainly in the an oval Figure, or that of an 
 
 laft Place, nor hath the lealt Eiiipfis revolved about it's letter 
 
 Axis
 
 C H A P . 3 . of Umverfal Geography. 
 
 Axis: So that thofe Diameters 
 are longeft which come nearelt 
 the Equator, and leffen as they 
 become more remote, but the 
 lealt Diameter of all is the Axis 
 which joineth the two Poles. 
 The Thing will perhaps be bet- 
 ter underitood if it be reprefea- 
 ted by a Figure. 
 
 Ltttepqp (Fig. \.) be a cir- 
 cular Section of the Earth made 
 by the Meridian, fuch as it was 
 thought to be formerly and p p 
 the Axis or Dumeter joining 
 the Poles, and a q the Diameter 
 of the Equator : then the oval 
 Line & P QJ>, delcribed upon 
 the Diameter JE Q^and P P, 
 will reprefent the Seftion or 
 true Meridian Line, which for 
 Diilindlion fake is made here to 
 differ more from a Circle than 
 it really ought to do ; but in 
 truth, the Proportion is as 692 
 to 689. So that the Line C Q^ 
 meafuring the Altitude of the 
 Earth at the Equator, exceeds 
 CP the Altitude at the Pole 
 85200 Parii Feet, or about 17 
 Miles. 
 
 This Affair is well worthy to 
 be traced to it's Original, and to 
 be backed by a Demonttration, 
 fo far asour Purpofe will permit. 
 See the Hiflory of the Royal A- 
 lademy of Sciences by du Hamel. 
 Pag. I I o, i 56, 206, Alfo Hijl. 
 de FAcad. Ruy. 1700, 1701. 
 
 The Fremh made an Experi- 
 ment about forty Years ago, 
 IhewingthataPendulum (which 
 is a well known Inltrument for 
 meafuring of Timej vibrates fo 
 much the flower, by how much 
 the nearer it is brought to the 
 Equator : that is, the Gravity, 
 of Celerity of Defcent of the 
 Pendulum, and of all other Bo- 
 
 29 
 
 dies, is lefs in Countries ap- 
 proaching the Equator than in 
 Places near either Pole. The 
 two famous Philofophers New- 
 ten and Huygens being excited 
 by the Novelty of the Thing, 
 and fcarching more narrowly in- 
 to the Caufe of it, found thereby 
 that the Earth muft have fome 
 other Figure than what was 
 known ; and alfo demonflrated 
 that this Diminution of Weight 
 doth naturally arife from the 
 Rotation of the Earth round it's 
 Axis ; which Rotation, accord- 
 ing to the Laws of circular Mo- 
 tion, repels all heavy Bodies 
 from the Axis of Motion : fo 
 that this Motion being fwifter 
 under the Equator than in Parts 
 more remote, the Weight of 
 Bodies mull alfo be much lefs 
 there than nearer the Poles. 
 Therefore the Parts of the O- 
 cean under the Equator being 
 made lighter, and according to 
 the Nature of all Fluids, preffed 
 and forced on either fide by the 
 Waters nearer the Poles, they 
 muft be raifed up to a greater 
 Height, that fothey may better 
 fupport and balance the greater 
 Weight of the contiguous Wa- 
 ters. Which mutual Libration 
 is demonitrated upon Suppofi- 
 tion of that Inequality of the 
 Diameters which we mentioned 
 above. The Figure of the Sea 
 being refembled by the Lands 
 adjacent, which are every where 
 raifed above the Sea, the afore- 
 faid Form muft be attributed to 
 the whole terraqueous Globe. 
 They that would be more fully 
 informed in this Matter may 
 confult Newton's PrincipiaLib. 
 iii. Prop. 19. or Huvgen' 1 * Trea- 
 tife of the Caufe of Gravity. 
 
 The
 
 3 The Abfolute Part S E c T. IL 
 
 THE Arguments indeed which Authors offer 
 to confirm the Truth of this, are handled fo obfcure- 
 Iy and confafedly, that they are almoft inefficient 
 to convince the fhenuous and obftinate Defenders of 
 the contrary Opinion. We fhall therefore as much 
 as is poflible, clear up and examine thefe Argu- 
 ments ; that the Reader may have a diftind Know- 
 ledge of them, and know the better how to ufe them. 
 WE mall not here take notice of fuch Reafons 
 as are of lefs Weight, and at beft only probable, or 
 perhaps fophiftical. Such as, i. A fpherical Fi- 
 gure is the moft capacious , and therefore the Earth 
 ought to have fuch a Figure. i. All the Parts of 
 the Earth tend to the fame Center ; therefore all thefe 
 
 The fame Inequality of Dia- 
 meter is alfo found in the Pla- 
 net Jupiter, by the Obfervations 
 of thofe Excellent Aftronomers 
 CaJJini and Flam/lead, and that 
 much more than in our Earth ; 
 becaufe the diurnal Rotation of 
 that Planet is more than twice 
 as fwift as the Rotation of the 
 Earth : which plainly proves, 
 that the Difference arifes from 
 no other Caufe than the circu- 
 lar Motion. 
 
 Juritfs Appendix, 
 
 Dr Derbam fin his Pbyfico- 
 Tbeof. B ii. C i . Note a) doth not 
 feem to entertain any doubts 
 concerning the terraqueous 
 Globe, and the other Planets, 
 being of a prolate fpheroidal Fi- 
 gure ; but he faith, That altho' 
 he hath often viewed Jupiter ; 
 and other Planets, with very 
 good Glafles, which he hath of 
 72 feet, and the Royal Society's 
 Glafe of above i zo feet, yet he 
 never could perceive them to be 
 otherwife than perfectly globu- 
 
 lar. And he thinks it next to 
 impoffible, to take an exaft mea- 
 f ure of the Polar and ^Equatoreal 
 Diameters, by reafon of the 
 Smallnefs of their apparent Dia- 
 meters in a Micrometer, and 
 theirMotion all the time of mea- 
 furing them. 
 
 And as to the Variation of the 
 Vibrations of Pendulums, under 
 the Line, and in the Northern 
 and Southern Latitudes, he hath 
 no doubt, but different Diftances 
 from the Earth's Center, may 
 caufe different Vibrations ; but 
 yet he (hews, from good Expe- 
 riments he made with Pendu- 
 lums in the Air-Pump, that 
 thofe Alterations might, in fome 
 meafure, be from the Rarity 
 and Denfity of the Air, in the 
 different Zones. And I may add 
 to Dr Derbams Experiments, 
 the Lengthening of Iron Rod* 
 by Heat, and their Shortening 
 by Cold; which I have found 
 to be very confiderable, by ve- 
 ry exadt Experiments. 
 
 Parts
 
 C H A P . 3 . of Univerfal Geography. 3 1 
 
 Parts ought to make up a globular Figure. 3 .When 
 at the firft Creation the Waters were confufedly 
 mixed with the Earth, it was then without doubt 
 moift and foft , but the Figure of all moift and li- 
 quid Bodies is fpherical : and fo ought the Earth to 
 remain after the feparation of the moift Parts from 
 the dry. 
 
 I SAY, neglecling thefe and fuch like Argu- 
 ments, let us look out for better , which are of three 
 kinds. Of the firfl there is only one deduced a priori, 
 as they call it : thofe of the other two kinds are de- 
 monftrated a pofleriori ; or from Celeftial or Ter- 
 reftrial Obfervations and Appearances. 
 
 THE firft Argument is taken from the Nature of 
 Water, and borrowed either from Ariftotle or Archi- 
 medes. Arijiotle in his fecond Book de Ccelo^ chap. 5th, 
 propofes it as his own, after this manner, (tho j it is 
 likely he borrowed it from fome Philofopher before 
 him). If we take it for granted (fays he) that Wa- 
 ter of it's own Nature tends always down to the 
 moft concave or loweft Place ; it will neceflarily 
 follow, that the Superficies of the Water is round 
 or fpherical ; but that Place is moft concave that is 
 neareft the Center of the Earth, therefore let there 
 be drawn from the Center a. two right Lines * and 
 a-y i and from to y the Line y ; to which from 
 * let fall the Perpendicular *s. (c) It is plain the 
 Line <*^ (Fig. 5.) is lefs than */3or *y, and there- 
 fore the Place <T is lower and more concave then p or 
 y j therefore the Water muft flow downwards from 
 p and y *till the Lines *3, *>, and T are equal, 
 that is, 'till *<T becomes <& equal to *, and a.y ; 
 hence 0, *., and y being in the Periphery of the fame 
 Circle, muft make the true Superficies of the Wa^ 
 ter of a round Figure. 
 
 (t) Euclid. Lib. L Prop. \ 8. 
 
 THIS
 
 3 2 The Abfolute Part S E c T. il. 
 
 THIS is Ariftotle's Demonftration, in which, 
 befides the Incoherency of it, which might be eafi- 
 ly amended, I obferve thefe greater Errors, i. He 
 fuppofeth the Univerfe to have a certain Center. 
 2. That Places are higher or lower in refpedt to 
 that Center. Now he who denies the fpherical Fi- 
 gure of the Earth, will perhaps grant neither of thefe 
 Poftulata: Tho' the Univerfe may be eafily 
 proved to have a Center, becaufe the apparent Mo- 
 tion of the fixed Stars obligeth us to fuppofe that 
 they themfelves either revolve by a diurnal Motion, 
 or that the Earth is turned about it's Center. If the 
 Stars be really moved, then the Point about which 
 they will revolve will certainly be the Center of the 
 Univerfe. If the Earth i then the middle Point 
 round which it moves, may, in the Demonftration, 
 be taken for Ariftotlis central Point. But the chief 
 Difficulty is in the fecond Suppofition , viz. that 
 Places are higher or lower in refpeft of that Center ; 
 becaufe he who will have the Superficies of the Earth 
 to be a Plane, or fome other Figure, not round, 
 will deny this Suppofition, and fay that Places appear 
 higher or lower in refpeft of the horizontal Plane, 
 perpendicular to which the Earth is infinitely extend- 
 ed downwards , or will perhaps explain the Decli- 
 vity fome other way ; fo that the Argument would 
 not be conclufive except it were firft granted that the 
 Elevation of one Place above another is only in re- 
 ipedt of fome Center, about which the Stars have 
 their apparent Motion. And tho' this were true, 
 and all other Notions of Declivity by which Water 
 is depreffed were confuted, yet it could fcarcely be 
 admitted for a Principle , becaufe it precarioufly 
 fuppofes the Earth to be of a fpheric Figure, which 
 is begging the Queftion. 
 
 THEREFORE fome prefer Archimedes'* 
 
 Demonftration (found in thefirjl Book of bis De Infi- 
 
 dentibus Humido] which is indeed more artificial than 
 
 2 that
 
 CHAP. 3. of Univerfal Geography. 53 
 that of Arijlotle , yet labours under the fame Diffi- 
 culties, in previoufly fuppofing the Earth to be of a 
 fpheric Figure, to whole Center the preffure of the 
 Water is made. But we are far from iuppofing that 
 the divine Archimedes could be guilty of any falie 
 Reafoning ! No, his Defign in that Book was not 
 to demonftrate the fpherical Figure of the Earth 
 (for then he had indeed begged the Queftion) but 
 only to explain the Nature of Water and other Li- 
 quids ; in order to which he pre-iiippofes the Earth 
 to be of a fpherical Figure, or to have a Center, to 
 which all heavy Bodies in general tend , and this he 
 takes as a Principle before known and demonflrated 
 from other Phenomena : So that I wonder Clavius 
 did not obferve this, who, in his Commentary upon 
 Joannes de Sacro Bofeo, uies this Demonftration of 
 Archimedes for the fpheric Figure of the Earth: 
 Snellius alfo does the fame in his Eratofthenes Batavus. 
 But it was Ariftotle's Defign in the Place before cited 
 to demonftrate the fpheric Figure of the Earth, Sea, 
 and Heavens ; wherefore he could not affume a Cen- 
 ter to the Univerfe, or Earth, without being guilty 
 of a manifeft Parakgifm. 
 
 S O that this Argument taken from the Nature 
 of Water, tho' it be propoled by almoft all Authors, 
 yet labours under fome Difficulties, which more 
 learned Mathematicians have endeavoured to re- 
 move, if pofllble. I have myfelf fpent fome Time 
 upon this Matter, and tryed leveral Methods, but 
 could not bring them to bear. I was induced to 
 attempt the Thing, becaufe it would be an elegant 
 and imqueftionable Demonftration of the fpherical 
 Figure of the Earth. 
 
 THEREFORE waving this ; we mall now 
 propofe fome Arguments a pofteriori^ taken firft 
 from celeftial Phenomena. Let us conceive a Sec-"" 
 tion made by a plane or a meridian Line (which is 
 called the Line of Latitude) to pafs thro 5 a Place B, 
 
 VOL. I. D or
 
 34 The Abfolute Part SECT. It 
 
 or any other Part of the Earth r and alfo thro' the 
 two 'Poles M, N ; as A RC IX And fuppofe another 
 Section (or Line of Longitude) (Fig^ ,) to pals thro* 
 the fame Point B, perpendicular to the former, and 
 parallel to the Equator ; as E BF C, I fay thefe 
 two Sections or Lines on the Surface of the Earth 
 may be proved to be circular. And it is a plain 
 geometrical Theorem, that any Superficies whatever* 
 when it is cut with perpendicular Planes, interfed- 
 ing each other in one common Line or Axis r if the 
 Lines produced on the Surface be circular,, the Body 
 can be no other than fphericaL 
 
 THEREFORE if we can prove y that the 
 two perpendicular' Sedions are circular, which pals 
 thro' any Point, B, taken at Pleafure ; we may alfo 
 by the aforelaid Theorem conclude the Superficies 
 of the Earth to be of a fpherical Figure, and the 
 Earth itfelf a globular Body. 
 
 NOW it is proved from divers celeftial Phaeno- 
 mena. that a Sedion made from one Pole to ano- 
 ther, according to the Latitude of the Earth, is cir- 
 cular, i . If in the Line A B C D, a Perfon go- 
 from any Point, as B, towards either Pole, as M v 
 or the Star near it ; he will find that by equal Jour- 
 nies he will equally approach nearer the Pole , which, 
 would be impoflible if the Line he travelled in was. 
 not circular -, as is plainly mewed by the artificial 
 terrejlrial Globe. 2. The Line A B C D is the me- 
 ridian Line, into which when the Sun comes it is- 
 Noon or Mid-Day with us , and all the People who 
 inhabit that Line, as we know by Experience ; and 
 they that fail in the Torrid Zone teftify, that the Sun 
 at Ibme Time of the Year is perpendicular to fome 
 Place in the Line ABC; for Example, to P. IF 
 we take equal Spaces B Q, P QJor any other) we 
 lhall find the Diftance of the Sun from the Zenith of 
 Q^, equal to the Interval, by which the Diftance of 
 tlie Sun from the Zenith of B- exceeds the Diftance 
 2 of
 
 CHAP. 3. ofUniverfal Geography* 3 5 
 
 of the fame from that of Qj which could by no 
 means happen if the Line B P Q^ was not circular. 
 3. In like manner all the Stars when they come to 
 the Meridian ABC, have their Pittances from the 
 Zeniths of P, Q^ B, in the fame Proportion as the 
 Diftances QJP, P B, QJ3. Moreover when our Ma- 
 riners fail towards the South, the Stars which before 
 were depreffed under the Horizon, and could not 
 be feen, begin to appear, and by degrees are elevated 
 in proportion to their Courfe. 4. If feveral Places 
 be oblerved in the fame Meridian, and the Stars 
 that pafs thro' their Zeniths be noted ; the Diftances 
 of thefe Places have the fame Proportion one to ano- 
 ther, as the Diftances of the meridional Points, 
 wherein the feveral vertical Stars make their fouth- 
 ing. 
 
 ALSO to prove that the Line of Longitude 
 E B F C is circular, and that the Earth riles into a 
 globular Figure, according to that other Dimenfion, 
 we need but obferve that the Sun and Stars rife and 
 fet fooner to thofe that inhabit eaftward of us, but 
 later to them that are more to the weft ; and alfo 
 that the Difference of Time is in proportion to the 
 Diftances of their Meridians from ours. Thus, if 
 we fuppofe two Places directly Eaft, the one diftant 
 from us 225 Miles, the other 450, twice as much ; 
 we mall find that in this laft Place the Sun rifeth two 
 Hours fooner, and in the other one Hour fooner 
 than with us. The Argument will be more clear, 
 if it be propofed about the Sun's approaching the 
 Meridians of divers Places ; for their Diftances in 
 refpeft of ours are in Proportion to the Time of the 
 Sun's apparent Motion (or an Arch of the Equator 
 intercepted between our Meridian and theirs) as is 
 evident in Eclipfes. Thefe Fadts agree precisely to 
 the Demonftrations upon the Artificial Globe : 
 which could not happen if the Earth had any other 
 Figure, 
 
 D 2 SO
 
 3 6 The Abfolute Part SECT. IL 
 
 S O that the Earth is found, to have a fpherical 
 Form, both in Longitude and Latitude 
 
 BUT fmce there feems to be a Difficulty in 
 handling the Longitude, all this may be proved by 
 the Latitude only. For it is manifeft, that the Fi- 
 gure of the Earth is fpherical, fince all the Sections, 
 or Lines of Latitude, are circular ; and pafs thro* 
 the fame Point or Pole. Becaufe any folid Body 
 whatfoever being cut with innumerable Planes, all 
 pafiing thro' the fame Point ; if the Peripheries of 
 thefe Seftions are circular, the Body itfelf mud be 
 fpherical : as is known and allowed by all Geome- 
 tricians. 
 
 THERE is another Reafon of no lefs Force, 
 taken from the Shadow of the Earth upon the Face 
 of the Moon in Lunar Edipfes. For fmce the ob- 
 fcured Part of the Moon, caufed by the conical Sha- 
 dow of the Earth, feems always to be bounded with 
 a circular Line , the Earth itfelf, for that Reafon, 
 muft needs be fpherical (d}. Becaufe it is manifeft 
 from Optics that a folid Body being every way op- 
 pofed to the Sun , if the Shadow be always conical, 
 the Body itfelf is fpherical. 
 
 IF thefe Arguments are not fufficient, we might 
 produce a great many more, from the confideration 
 of the Earth itfelf, which perfectly prove the Earth's 
 Rotundity: fuch as thefe ^ 
 
 ( d] Tacquet (in bis Aftrono- dow proceed from the Earth Ft- 
 
 my Lib. iv.) hath demon- felf, or the Almofpbere, (tho T 
 
 ftrated that the Shadow of the the latter indeed be the Truth) 
 
 Earth never reaches fo far as the the Thing is the fame in th'e 
 
 Moon , fo that the Moon is dark- prefent Cafe : for if the Shadow 
 
 ened not by the Shadow of the of the Atmofpbere be circular, 
 
 Earth, but by that of ii's At- the Shadow of the Earth which 
 
 tncfpbere only ; which was ob- is enclofed on every Side there- 
 
 fervcd, tho' not fo exaclly de- by muft be circular too. Wbi- 
 
 monftrated, by Kepler and Ric- ftoifs AJIron. Left. Pag. z 
 (iolus. But whether the Sha- 
 
 i. FROM
 
 CHAP. 3, ofUmverfdr Geography. 37 
 
 i . FRO M Circumnavigation , for the Europeans 
 have feveral times fet Sail from Europe, and fteer'd 
 their Courfe directly South and Weft, 'till they came 
 to the Magettanic Sea ; and from thence to the North 
 and Weft 'till they returned to Europe from the- 
 Eaft , and all the Phaenomena, which mould na- 
 turally arife from the Earth's Rotundity, happened 
 to them. Their Method of failing alfo was founded 
 upon this Hypothefis ; which could never have fuc- 
 ceeded fo happily if the Earth had been of any other 
 Figure *. 
 
 2. W H E N we take our Departure from high 
 Mountains and Towers , firft the lower Parts, then 
 thofe that .are higher, and laftly, their Tops are by 
 degrees depreffed, as it were, and hid from us : On 
 the other Hand, when we approach towards them, 
 from a Place at a great Diftance, firft the Top ap- 
 pears, then the middle Part, and laftly, when we 
 come pretty near, the very Foot of the Mountain is 
 difcovered. So that this gradual Appearance and 
 Occultation, is fuch as muft neceflarily happen from 
 the fpherical Figure of the the Earth. 
 
 3. I F we meafure the Altitude of any Mountain 
 upon this Suppofition, that the Earth is globular ; 
 the Practice is always found to juftify the Truth of 
 the Theory. 
 
 W E might demonftrate many of thefe Argu- 
 ments geometrically ; but (becaufe it would be both 
 
 * Ferdinand* Magellan was Simon Cordes in the Year 1590. 
 the firft who failed round the By Oliver Noort, Anno 
 
 Earth, in the Year 1519. he By Corml Scbarten, Anno\6i 5, 
 
 performed it in 1 1 24 Days. Sir And by Jacob Heremites, Anno 
 
 Francis Drake was the next, in 1623 ; and all by di reeling their 
 
 the Year 1577. and he perform- Courfe conftantly from Eaft to 
 
 ed it in 1056 Days. The fame Weft', and thus returned into 
 
 was afterwards done by Sir Europe, having all along obfer- 
 
 Tbomas Cavendijb, in the Year ved the Phenomena which ne- 
 
 i 5 86 ; in the Space of 7 77 Days, ceffarily arife upon fuppofing the 
 
 It was done again by Mynheer Earth a fpkerical Body. 
 
 P 3 laborious
 
 3 5 The AbfoluttPdrt SECT. II. 
 
 laborious and difficult to prove this, or that Line 
 circular, from fuch Principles, &V.) we {hall con- 
 tent ourfelves with thofe evident Proofs above de- 
 livered : which being collected into one Sum, will 
 Jufficiently demonftrate the Earth to be globular. As, 
 firft, the celeftial Phenomena (viz. The different 
 Elevation of the Pole ; the unequal Altitude of the 
 Sun, at the lame Inftant, in different Countries ; the 
 Earth's Shadow on the Moon,-, thevaft Increafe of 
 the longeft Day towards the Poles ; the Rifing and 
 Setting of the Stars ; their perpetuaj Appearance 
 near the Pole, &V.) do all equally prove the Earth's 
 Rotundity. Alfo the terreftrial Appearances (viz. 
 The Art of Navigation ; the Appearance and Oc- 
 cultation of Mountains and Towers -, the Diftances 
 of Places ; the Winds and Points of the Compafs, 
 &V.) can only be accounted for by this Figure and 
 no other, Alfo the artificial Globe, which we make 
 to reprefent the Earth, exhibits all thefe Things as 
 they really are on the Earth , which would certainly, 
 in fome Cafes, be different, except this was it's true 
 Reprefentation. The Earth is not of a plane Figure, 
 as is manifeft from the aforefaid Arguments ; nor of 
 a hollow Figure ; for then the Sun and Stars would 
 appear fooner to the weftern Inhabitants than to thofe 
 of the Eaft : Bat we fee the Rifing Sun every Day 
 illuminates the Vallies, before it mines upon the 
 back Parts of the oppofite Mountains *. 
 
 * Another Argument is follow, that one (too vaft a 
 
 drawn from the commodious 'Part) would be drowned; and 
 
 and equal Diftribution of the ' another too dry. But being 
 
 Waters in the E.rth. ' For thus orbicular, the Waters 
 
 - fince, by the Law of Gra- are equally and commodioufly 
 
 vity, the Waters will pof- < diftributed here and there ac- 
 
 fefs the loweft place ; there- < cording as the Divine Provi- 
 
 fore, if the Mufs of the Earth < dence f a \v moft fit. Derbam's, 
 
 was cubic, prifmatic, or any Plniit+Tbnlm. Book 2. Cb. 
 
 other angular Figure,it would j. Art. a.
 
 CHAP. 3. vf Untverfal Geognaphy.. 3*9 
 
 A fpherical Body alfo is the only one that is fi- 
 inilar, or hath all it's Parts alike among themfelves j 
 fo that they may be mutually applied one to another. 
 For if two equal Parts of a Sphere be confidered, the 
 Properties of each are the fame ; which will not hold 
 in any other Body. Thus in meafuring the Earth 
 in different Places ; if it be performed by the fame 
 Method, it is always found of the fame Magnitude-: 
 which doth not a little contribute to the Proof of 
 thefe Aflertions, 
 
 ANY impartial Perfon may eafily perceive ol 
 how little Weight their Reafons are, who believe 
 the Earth to be of a plane Figure. For which they 
 argue, i . Becaufe on a clear Day the Earth feems 
 to be plane, as well as the Sea, if we look every way- 
 round about us (e). 2, If the Surface of it was not 
 .plane, it would be more eafily moved, and more 
 iubje<5t to fall to pieces ; whereas flat Figures are 
 more firm and.ftable (/)_ 3, The Rifing or Setting 
 Sun and Moon are cut, as it were, with right Lines ; 
 but if the Earth was fpherical, they ought to be di- 
 vided by circular ones. Thus the Ancients reafoned, 
 ridiculoufly, as Anf title tells us. 4. Some argue 
 that the many high Mountains muft, of necefiity, 
 deface if s Rotundity. 5. Others believe the Sea to 
 -be higher than the Earth. 6. Some again think it 
 impoflible that Men mould ftand upon the oppofitc 
 
 \e] This Argument is confu- Power cf Attraction upon all 
 
 <ed by what is faid above, about the Matter in the Univerfe^ 
 
 the Appearance and Difappea- whereby all Bodies, and all 
 
 ranee of Mountains. the Parts of Bodies, mutually 
 
 [f] A fpherical Body is not attract themfelves and one ano- 
 
 fo liable to decay and fracture ther; which, as. the Rev. Dr 
 
 as another, becaufe all the Parts Derbam obferves, is the natural 
 
 of the Surface are equidiftant Caule of the Sphericity of our 
 
 <rom the Center. And we are common Globe. See New~ 
 
 taught by Sir Ifaac Newton's ton's Principia, Lib. 3. Prop. 
 
 Principles, that the Divine Being 7. Alfo Derbanfs fbyJico-Tbeol. 
 
 at tiie Creation, bellowed the p. 40. 
 
 D 4 Part
 
 40 The Absolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 Part of the Earth to us , and not fall headlong into 
 the Sky. This laft has created a Scruple not only 
 with the Vulgar, but even with fome Men of 
 Letters , which I could fcarce have believed, had I 
 not heard them confefs, that tho' they could not de- 
 ny the Jpberical Figure of the Earth for many urgent 
 Reafons ; yet they could not remove this one Objec- 
 tion out of their Minds ; not to mention the Taunts 
 and Scoffs of St Augujline, and other Fathers upon 
 this Subjedt. Thefe and fuch like Reafons are foon 
 confuted by any one : and that the higheft Mountains^ 
 have fcarce any Proportion to the Semidiameter of 
 the Earth, we mail afterwards demonftrate (g). 
 
 THEREFORE, fmce the fpherical Figure 
 of the Earth is plainly proved and demonftrated, we 
 ought to make ourfelves acquainted with thofe De- 
 finitions and Properties which are applied to, and 
 found in the Sphere , or Globe, by Geometricians, and 
 accommodate them to the Earth ; as the Center, the 
 Diameter, the Axis and Poles, the greater and lef- 
 fer Circles of the Sphere, &V. ()7 
 
 WHO 
 
 (g] The higheft Mountains 2. Becaufe the Superficies of 
 
 are To inconfiderable to the Se- the Earth is globular, the Head 
 
 midiameter of the Earth ; that of a Traveller goes a longer 
 
 they alter the Figure of it no Journey than his Feet: and 
 
 more than Duft upon the Sur- he who rides on Horfeback, goes 
 
 face of our common Globes, as a longer Journey than he who 
 
 is proved below, Ch. 9. Prop. j. walks the fame Way on Foot. 
 
 (b) Taequet (Lib. \. Chap. z. So, like wife, the upper Part 
 
 of bis Ajironomj] has drawn of the Maft of a Ship goes 
 
 fome very neat Coonfequences more Way than the lower; viz. 
 
 from the roundnefs of the Earth; Becaufe they move in Part of a 
 
 which we mail here tranfcribe larger Circle. 
 
 from Dr Clarke 5 Notes upon Ro- 3. If a Mangoes the whole 
 
 haultV /#?. Vol. ii. Pag. 5. Circumference of the Earth's 
 
 I. If any Part of the Earth's Orb; the Journey which his 
 
 Superficies were plane, Men Head travels exceeds that of 
 
 could- no more (land upright his Feet, by the Circumference 
 
 upon it, than upon the fide of of a Circle whofe Radius is the 
 
 k ' mountain. Man's height. 
 
 4. If
 
 C H A P. 4. of Univerfal Geography. 4 i 
 
 W H O it was that firft found out the Earth's 
 fpherical Figure, lies hid in the dark Ruins of An- 
 tiquity. Certainly the Opinion is very ancient (i) ; 
 for when Babylon was taken by Alexander^ Eclipfes 
 were there found calculated and foretold, for many 
 Years before Chrift : which could not be done with- 
 out the Knowledge of the EariWs Figure. Nor can 
 Thale's the Grecian be thought to have been ignorant 
 of it, by his foretelling an Eclipfe. 
 
 C H A P. IV. 
 
 Of the Menfuration and Magnitude of the Eartb. 
 
 TH E Menfuration of the Earth is founded up- 
 on the Solution of thefe three Problems, i. 
 To meafure the Diameter or Semidiameter, and 
 alfo the Circuit or Periphery. 2. To find the Area 
 
 4. Ifa.Veffel full of Water 
 beraifed perpendicularly, fome 
 of the Water would continually 
 run over, and yet the Veffel 
 Would be always full. viz. Be- 
 caufe the Superficies of tbe 
 Water is continually deprejfid 
 into Part of a larger Sphere. 
 
 5. If a Veffel full of Water 
 were carried direftly downwards 
 tho' none of it run over, yet 
 the Veffel would not be full, 
 viz. Becaufe the Superficies of 
 the Water is continually raijed 
 into Part ofalefs Sphere. 
 
 6. Whence it follows, that 
 the fane Veffel will hold more 
 
 or 
 
 Water at the Foot of a Moun- 
 tain than at the Top; and more 
 in a Cellar than in a Chamber. 
 
 To which may be added, laft- 
 ly, that two Threads upon which 
 two Steel Balls hang perpen- 
 dicularly (or two Walls of a 
 H;ufe raifed by a Plumb Line) 
 are not parallel to each other, 
 but Parts of two Radius's which 
 meet at the Center of the Earth. 
 
 (/') Ptolemy, inbis Almageft', 
 tells the Times of three Lunar 
 Eclipfes, obferved by the Baby- 
 lonian Aftronomers. The firft 
 on the igth o f March 721 
 Years before Chrift: The -next 
 on
 
 4 The Absolute Part SECT, ft 
 
 or Extent of the Superficies. 3. To compute the 
 Solidity, Mafs, or Magnitude, Thefe have fuch 
 a Relation among themfelves, that one being known 
 the reft are obtained by Geometrical Proportions, 
 fuppofing the Earth a Sphere; as is ihewn in 
 Chap. 2, 
 
 THIS Proportion has been efteemed fo advan- 
 tageous and ufeful, that it hath employed andexer- 
 ciied the greateft Genius's for many Ages : fo that 
 whole Volumes have been writ only upon this Sub- 
 ject. Wherefore I thought it would not unaccepta- 
 ble to the Students in Geography, to give a mort 
 Hiftory of the Mensuration of the Earth. 
 
 D IOGENES Laertius highly commends A- 
 naximan&r, a Difciple of Thales^ for that, befide 
 other Aftronomical Inventions, he firft difcovered 
 the Perimeter or Circuit of the terraqueous Globe, 
 This Anaximander lived about 550 Years before 
 the Birth of our Saviour : and Authors mention no 
 other Meafure but his, to be ufed by the Mathema- 
 ticians of fucceeding Ages, even 'till the Time of 
 Eratoflhenes : fo that it is (very likely) his Meafure, 
 which Arijlotle mentions in the end of his fecond 
 Book De Ccelo. " Mathematicians, fays he, who 
 *' have attempted to meafure the Earth, fay it is 
 " 400,000 Furlongs round." Hence we have the 
 Dimenfions of the Earth accordin to Anaximander. 
 
 But befides this one Teftimony of Diogenes 
 
 we are entirely in the dark by what Invention, Ar- 
 
 on the 8 th of March 720 Years " Day became prefently as dark 
 
 before Chrift ; and the third " as the Night ; which Change 
 
 on September i, 710 Years he- " bad been prettified by Thales 
 
 fore the fame jEra. And He- " to the lonians." .This was 
 
 rodotas (in his Hiftory, Lib. i. about 594 Years before Chrift; 
 
 &/?. 74. Pag. 30.}/7v/, " That which fhews us that the Phi- 
 
 " after the War bad been car- lofophers in thefe early Times 
 
 " ried unfix years between the were not ignorant of the true 
 
 " Msdes and Lydians ; as they Figure of the E^rth. 
 e< viert going to battle* the ?.*
 
 CHAP. 4. of Uaiverfal Geography. 45 
 
 tifice, or Method, Anaximander found out this Mea- 
 fure. Therefore Eratoflbenes (who attempted it next 
 after him, and lived about 200 Years before Chrifl ; 
 being perfectly (killed in Menfuration, and other 
 Parts of Mathematics) is juftly celebrated and 
 efteemed by all, as the firft and moft accurate Mea- 
 furer of the Earth. He difcovered the Perimeter of 
 it to be about 250000 Furlongs , or, as others fay, 
 252.000; which are, as Pliny tells us, 31.500.000 
 Roman Paces, equal to 3 1 .500 Miles of .1.000 Paces 
 each. 
 
 S R A B relates the Contents of three Books 
 
 of Geography that had been writ by Eratoftbenes, 
 
 which are now loft, thro' the Injury of Time. Cleo- 
 
 tnedes alfo mentions the Method he ufed in meafur- 
 
 jng the Earth , which we mall explain afterwards. 
 
 However, this Meafure of Eratoflbenes was judged 
 
 by feveral Mathematicians (and firft by Hipparchtts 
 
 about 100 Years after) to deviate fomething from 
 
 the Truth : tho* Hipparchus himfelf has not left us 
 
 his Method of Menfuration , but only added 2 5 .000 
 
 Furlongs to Eratoftbetttfs Perimeter. After him 
 
 Pofidonius (an excellent practical Aftronomer, and 
 
 alfo well fkilled in Philofophy j a little before Chrift, 
 
 in the Time of Cicero and Pompe-f] fet about it, and 
 
 found, by his Menfuration, the Circumference of 
 
 the Earth to be 240.000 Furlongs, as Cleomedes tells 
 
 us. But Strabo differs from him, and fays it was 
 
 I 80.000 : whence there arofe great Doubts and Di- 
 
 putes about the Caufe of this Difference. It^is true, 
 
 Strabo's Method is delivered in few Words, and is 
 
 in Fact much nearer the Truth than the other : but 
 
 becaufe Cleomedes both read and taught Pofidonius's 
 
 Geography, we mall explain his Method hereafter. 
 
 NEVERTHELESS, the Dimenfions of 
 Erato ft benes were made ufe of by many ; even 'till 
 the Time of Ptolemy. And he, in the year of Chrift 
 J44, ufed 180,000 Furlongs as the Perimeter, and
 
 44. The dbfolute Part S E c T. II. 
 
 affirmed it to be moft agreeable to the Truth ; in- 
 fomuch that this Invention was, by Tbeon, afcribed 
 to him. We gather alfo from the Writings of 
 Ptolemy., that Marinus^ a famous Geographer, by 
 whofe Writings he himfelf was very much inilrucl:- 
 ed, had attempted fomething in this Matter. 
 
 P <TOLEMT (in Lib, i. Chap. 3, of his Geo- 
 graphy) tells us, that he alfo had tried this Method, 
 not the fame Way with his Predeceffors * but in 
 Places of different Meridians : tho j he does not tell 
 us how much he found the Perimeter to be, but cqn- 
 tents himfelf with the Meafure he had received from 
 Mannus and his Predeceffors, viz, 180.000 Fur- 
 longs. 
 
 AFTERWARDS, when the Cultivation of 
 Arts by degrees difappeared in Greece, nothing was 
 done in this Bufmefs ; neither did the Romans trou- 
 ble themfelves about it. 
 
 BUT the Arabs and Saracens having wrefted 
 the Glory of Empire and Arts out of the Hands of 
 *he Grecians, did not neglect this Part of Mathe- 
 matics. For (as Snellius tells us from Abulfeda, an 
 Arabian Geographer, who flourifhed about the 
 Year of Chrift 1300, and whofe Writings were pub- 
 limed at Rome] about die 800 Year of the Chriftian 
 Air a, Malmon King of Arabia, or Calif of Baby- 
 lon, being a great Student in Mathematics, com- 
 manded Ptolemy's Great Conjlruclion to be tranflated 
 from the Greek into Arabic, which is, by the Ara- 
 bians, called Ptolemy's Almageft. This Maimon hav- 
 ing fummoned together feveral learned Mathemati- 
 cians commanded them to fearch into the Earth's Pe- 
 rimeter. For performing of which they made ufe 
 of the Planes of Zinjan or Mefopotamia ; and mea- 
 furing from North to South under the fame Meridian 
 'till they had decreafed the Elevation of the Pole 
 one Degr. they found the length of their Journey tQ 
 be 56 Miles, or 56 ij from whence we find the 
 
 Perimeter
 
 CHAP. 4. of Umverfa! Geography ^ 45 
 
 Perimeter of the Earth to be 20.160 Miles, or 20. 
 340, according to that Meafure. 
 
 FROM that Time to this none were folicitous 
 about iblving the Problem. The Arabs commonly 
 ufing the Dimenfions they had received from their 
 Mathematicians-, and the Italians^ when they began 
 to ftudy Aftronomy, madeufe of Ptolemy's Meafure, 
 viz. 180.000 Furlongs (which make 21.600 Italian 
 Miles, or 5.400 German ; fothat 60 of the former, 
 and 15 of the later was thought to make a Degree: 
 but they ought to have reckoned 1 5 f of the latter, 
 becaufe 32 Furlongs nearly equal a German Mile 5 
 thus the Periphery would be 5625. Germ. Miles). 
 But about 80 Years ago Snellius^ a famous Mathe- 
 matician, and Profeffor at Leyden, obferving that 
 the Perimeter of the Earth, commonly made ufe of 
 by Mathematicians (or the length of a Degree, vul- 
 garly fuppofed 15 Dutch Miles), was questionable, 
 and founded upon no certain Demonstration , he 
 thereupon applied himfelf with great Induflry to it's 
 Menfuration, and happily finilhed it ; demonftra- 
 ting the Magnitude of one Degree of the Earth's Pe- 
 riphery to be 28.500 Perches (each containing 12 
 Rhinland Feet) or 1 9 Holland Miles ; and the whole 
 Periphery to equal 6.840 Miles (reckoning 1.500 
 Perches, or 1 8.000 Rhinland Feet, to a Mile). 
 
 W E thought fit to premife this fhort Hiftory of 
 the Earth's Menfuration y that the Reader may per- 
 ceive by what Induflry it hath been managed, and 
 with what Difficulty effected. Now we mall treat 
 of the different Methods of Menfuration, all found- 
 ed upon the Difcovery of the Earth's fpbe rical Figure, 
 which we have proved in the preceding Chapter. 
 Therefore, confidering it globular, if it be cut by a 
 Plane pafling thro* the Center, the Section will be a 
 great Circle of the Earth : if not thro' the Center, then 
 the Section will be one of the leffer Circles. Alfo the 
 Periphery of a great Circle upon the Surface of the 
 
 Earth,
 
 46 The Abfolute Part SECT.?!. 
 
 Earth, is it's Circuit or Meafure round. Note, This 
 Periphery is divided (as all others are) into 360 
 Degr. and becaufe the Extent of the whole cannot be 
 meafured at once, we folve the Problem by finding 
 the Length of a Part (viz. of i Degr. \ Degr. &c.) in 
 known Meaiiires which Neceflity often occurs ino- 
 ther Problems .We alfo frequently take the Periphery 
 of the Earth to be a Meridian paffing thro' the Place 
 of Obfervation, and the North or Pole-Star j which 
 is more eafy, and lefs lubjedt to Error. 
 
 ?be frft Method ; tifed by the Arabians and others 
 for meafuring the Earth. 
 
 L E T our Horizon be b H R S s ; then the Peri- 
 meter of the Terreftrial Meridian (which lies under, 
 and is concentrical to, that in the Heavens abed) 
 will be A BCD, (Fig. 6.) and R will be the Cen- 
 ter of the Earth. Suppofe our Place of Obfervatfon 
 at B, whofe Zenith is b, and the Terreftrial Pole 
 A lying under that in the Heavens a -, then the Ele- 
 vation of the Pole above our Horizon will be A H, 
 or a h. Let us take another Place in the fame Me- 
 ridian A B C D under abed, as G, whofe Zenith is 
 g, and Horizon /F R T t. Now fuppofe the Ele- 
 vation of the Pole to be accurately obferved in the 
 Place B, viz. ah or A H ; and alfo in the Place G, 
 viz. fa or FA. Take FA from HA and the Re- 
 mainder is H F, equal to B G, the Arch intercepted 
 between the two Places. Laftly the Diftance B G 
 equal to the Arch bg, is to be accurately meafured 
 by fome known Meafure, as a Perch or a Mile. 
 Then by the Golden Rule fay, as B G is to A B G C D, 
 360 Degr. fo is the known Interval in Miles or 
 Perches, to the Miles or Perches contained in the 
 Periphery A B G C D : or as the Arch B G is to i 
 Degr. fo are the Miles in the Diftance B G, to the 
 Miles or Perches in i Degree.
 
 C H A P. 4. of Univerfal Geography, 47 
 
 NO FE, If you take the vulgar Computation of the 
 Pittance B G, without meafuring it, then the Quan^ 
 tity of the Degree will be determined accordingly ; 
 as i Degr. will equal 15 fuch Miles, as BG equals 
 10, &c. 
 
 Example, Let B be Amflerdam, where the Eleva- 
 tion of the Pole A H or ah is 52 degr. 23 min. and 
 let G be Scboonhoven, lying under the fame Meri- 
 dian with Amfterdam, where the Elevation of the 
 Pole AF or af is 51 degr. 54 min. therefore FH 
 or BG will be 29 min. but the Diftance between 
 Amfterdam and Schoonhoven is 9^ Dutch Miles, or 
 13875 Rbinland Perches, 12 Foot each; therefore, 
 as 29 min. is to 60 min. or i degr. fo is 9? Miles 
 to 19 Dutch Miles: therefore 19 Dutch Miles equal 
 i degr. and 6.840 make 360, or the whole Peri- 
 phery. 
 
 OR if the Diftance B G be fuppofed 7$ German 
 Miles (each* equal to 1900 Rhinland Perches) it will 
 be as 29 min. is to 60 min. fo is 7^ to 15 of the fame 
 German Miles, for a Degr. of which 5.400 make 
 tlie whole Circumference. Thus the Elevation of 
 the Pole at Prague is 50 degr* 6 min. and at Lmcium 
 48 degr. 1 6 min. the Difference B G is i degr* 50 min. 
 and the Diftance is computed to be 26 German Miles ; 
 from whence the Periphery will be 5.105 Miles. 
 
 tfhefecond Method, that of Eratofthenes. 
 
 AGAIN, let there be two Places under the 
 fame Meridian ; the one B, Alexandria in Egypt* 
 where Eratojlhenes, Keeper of the King*s Library, 
 lived; the other G, (Fig* 6.) the Town of Syene 9 
 a City in Egypt, under the Tropic of Cancer, and, 
 for that Reafon, chofen by Eratofthenei, whofe Di- 
 ftance from Alexandria was computed 5000 Fur- 
 longs. Let the Diftance of the Sun, at Noon, 
 from the Zeniths, and b f of both Places be 
 
 obferved
 
 4* Tie Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 obferved by an Inftrument on the fame Solfti- 
 tialDay, viz. the 21 ft of June*, when, at Alexan- 
 dria^ g b or G B equals ro Part of the Periphery 
 by Obfervation ( or 7 degr. 1 2 mia. ) but at S\ene 
 the Sun hath no Diftance from the Zenith at Noon, 
 it being exactly vertical that Day. So that the Arch 
 of the Diftance B G, intercepted between the two 
 Places is 7 degr. 12 min. but the Diftance itfelf 
 is accounted 5.000 Furlongs (8 of which make 
 an Italian Mile). Therefore by the Golden Rule, 
 as 7 degr. 12 min. is to i degr. (or as TO to 350, or 
 as 36 to 5) fo is 5000 to 694! Furlongs in i degr. 
 Or as fb is to i, (or as i to 50) fo is 5000 to 
 25000 Furlongs, the whole Periphery, according 
 to this Meafure. There are divers ways of taking 
 the Meridian Altitude of the Sun, or it's Diftance 
 from the Vertex ; as by a Quadrant, &c. Eratoftbe- 
 nes found it by a hollow hemifpherical Dial ; 
 where the Style BX (Fig. 7.) points to the 
 Zenith, and OXZ is a Ray of the Sun ter- 
 minating the Shadow of the Style, and fhews the 
 Arch B Z equal to O B 7 degr. 1 2 min. the Diftance 
 of the Sun from the Zenith. But at Syeue the 
 Style hath no Shadow ; nor hath the Sun any Di- 
 ftance from the Zenith ; being perpendicular to 
 the Plane of the Place. Therefore fince B X Z 
 (Fig. 6, 7.) is equal to the Angle X O, (whofe 
 Meafure is B G or b O) B G is equal to B Z 7 degr. 
 12 min. or fo Part of the Periphery, as before. 
 
 72* third Method, that of Pofidonius. 
 
 POSIDONIUS took two Places under the 
 fame Meridian ; viz. B, Rhode* * the Place where 
 he lived, and G, Alexandria in Egypt ; and ob- 
 ferved the Altitude of the Star S (Fig. 6.) (a bright 
 Star in the Ship Argo called Canopus) when it 
 came to the Meridian of both Places, on the fame, 
 
 or
 
 C H A P. 4. of Univerjat Geography* 49 
 or which is all one, on different Days. This Star 
 did not rife above the Horizon h H s at Rhodes, 
 but only glanced upon it at S : tho* it was elevated 
 above the Horizon of Alexandria F R T, the Arch 
 / s Part of the Periphery or 7 degr. 30 min. He 
 tells us the Diftance betwixt Alexandria and Rhodes 
 is 5.000 Furlongs. Therefore, as 7 degr. 30 min. 
 is to I degr. (or as -^ to ~ 9 i. e. as 360 to 48) fo 
 is 5.000 to 666 f- Furlongs in i degr. or as i : 48 : : 
 5.000: 24.000 Furlongs, for the whole Periphe- 
 ry of the Earth, according to Pofidonius. 
 
 The fourth Method, that 0/ Snellius, 
 
 I N the Methods above delivered we have con- 
 ftantly fuppofed the two Places to lie under the 
 fame Meridian ; but becaufe Places may lie plain-, 
 er, and more commodious for this Purpofe under 
 different Meridians, we mail propofe an Example 
 in this Cafe which is that of Snellius. 
 
 LET therefore ABCD (Fig. 6.] i be the Me* 
 ridian of Alcmair, and B, Alcmair itfelf; where 
 the Elevation of the Pole ha is 52 degr. 4.0 i min. 
 and the Polar Diftance B A 37 degr. 19^ min. 30 
 fee. 
 
 LET the other Place P be Bergen- op-zoom, 
 whofe Meridian is A P C, and it's Diftance from 
 the Pole, or Complement of Latitude (viz. to 
 51 degr. 29 min.} is AP 38 degr. 31 min. there- 
 fore, having drawn P G perpendicular to A B G, 
 the Difference of their Diftances from the Pole is 
 BG i degr. ii min. 30 fee. 
 
 AFTER Snellius had taken thefe Obfervations, 
 he accurately meafured the Diftance B P, between 
 Alcmair and Bergen, and found it to be 34710. 
 &h\nland Perches ; and the Angle of Pofition 
 PB G 1 1 degr. 26 min. 2 fee. therefore in the right- 
 angled Triangle PB G, the Hypotenufe PB and 
 
 VOL. I." E the
 
 50 The Abjolute Part S.E.C T. II. 
 
 the Angle P B G being given, the Side B G is 
 found to be 34018: Perches (which Snellius makes 
 only 33930, for he abated 88 Perc-hes on Account 
 of the Stations where the Elevation of the Pole was 
 obferved). But the Arch B G, as was faid before, 
 is 71* min. therefore as 71^ is to i degr. or 60 min. 
 ib is 33930 (or 34018) to 28473 Perches; or the 
 round Number 28500 for i degr. equal to 19 Dutch 
 Miles. Or by fpherical Trigonometry -, having 
 AB, A P, and the Angle ABP given, find the 
 Arch BP i degr. 14 mm. which equals 34710 
 Perches ; therefore i degr. will be 28300 Perches, 
 or i8f Miles. TheReafon why this Account differs 
 from that of Snellius is ; i . He did not obferve the 
 Elevation of the Pole from the very Tops of the 
 Towers B and P themfelves, from whence the An- 
 gle GBP was taken, but from fome Eminence or 
 rifmg Ground a little remote from them : yet with- 
 out Doubt the Altitudes of the Pole were the fame 
 on the Tops of the Towers. 2. Another Reafon 
 is, he took BG, B P, P G for right Lines, which 
 are indeed circular , tho', in fo fmall an Arch, 
 the Difference is of little or no Moment. : There- 
 fore, granting Snelliufs Meafure of a Degree to be 
 28500 Perches, equal to 18^ Miles, (and mine 
 28300 making i8f) the Perimeter of the Earth 
 will be, according to Snelliu^ 10.260.000 Per-- 
 ches, or 123.120.000 Feet, that is- 61840 Holland 
 Miles (a). 
 
 <Tbf 
 
 ai.?' /I . ,:, .uOTt bsn-Jiiu -r;-;rb V s^rsrtc^ia 3:13 
 (a] The Me.\fure of the ficulties, the curious have not- 
 E^rt,b which 5;/^'//j;wi'th great thooght it iafe io confide in. a- 
 Induflry difcovered, .l^ath- been ny one, tho' the moft skillful, 
 defervedly ernVraced" by the Mathematician ; which we fee 
 liearned; as being much- 'Metre confirmed ' by Cdjjlni the Son 
 accurate than any of; .the for- of the famous Aftronomer of 
 mer. Neverthelefs, in a Mat- that Name; For he having cal- 
 tar of fuch Moment, and which culated _the Numbers anling 
 i^ iriVolved whh fa jSaiiy "Dif- fromSne'/tiuSs Obfervation af-' 
 
 figncd
 
 CHAP. 4. ofUruverfal Geography. $ i 
 
 The fifth, but firjt Terrejlrial, Method. 
 
 H O W to perform the Work without Celeftial 
 Obfervations, or a Meridian Line, is explained in 
 
 the 
 
 figned a much greater Meafure 
 to the Earth than Snellius ; 
 and alfo difcovered fome Er- 
 rors in his Calculation, which 
 fpoiled the whole ProceTs of 
 his Work. See Hift. Acad. 
 Scien. 1702. Add to this, that 
 the Latitude and Angle ofPofi- 
 tion of Places can now be taken 
 more accurately by Telefcopes, 
 xvhich are begun, fome Yc.trs 
 ago, to be fitted to Aftrono- 
 inical and Surveying Inftru- 
 ments, inflead of bare little 
 Pins, which Snellias ufed. Tho' 
 feveral others had fet about this 
 Work ; yet fome French Ma- 
 thematicians, Fellows of the 
 Royal Academy of Sciences, 
 did moft fuccefsfully perform 
 it : whofe Menfuration far ex- 
 ceeds all others, both in the 
 Number and Accuracy of their 
 Obfervations, and alfo in the 
 Furniture of moft exquifue In- 
 flruments. Wherefore we e- 
 fteem it well worth the while, 
 to give the whole Method of 
 Operation in Ihort. 
 
 The Points in the Figure 
 which are marked with Roman 
 Letters, {hew the Places cho- 
 fen for Obfervation ; whofe 
 Bearing, or Situation, in refpefl 
 of the Royal O'ofervatory at 
 Paris, is feen in a Geographical 
 Map. (See Fig. 8 ) 
 
 By the fame Method of Men- 
 furation which Snellius ufed, 
 
 they propofed to find the Di- 
 ftance between the Parallels of 
 the Places N and E, or the 
 Line N A- in Fathoms; fo that 
 this Diftance bein^ known, 
 and the Latitude of each Place 
 N and E, or the Difference of 
 Latitude; that is an Arch of 
 the Meridian intercepted be- 
 tween the two Parallels, being 
 found; it will appear how ma- 
 ny Fathoms make any deter- 
 mined Arch of a great Circle 
 of the Earth, fuch as the Me- 
 ridian is: from whence it will 
 be eafily found how many Fa- 
 thoms equal a Degree, or the 
 whole Periphery of the Earth. 
 Afterwards, ic was thought fit 
 to meafure the Line N J3, the 
 Diftance between the Parallels 
 of the FLces N and Q^; fo 
 that the Latitude at- Q_ being 
 alfo oblerved, there might be 
 had an Arch of the Meridian 
 equal to the whole Diltance 
 /3 t. For by this Means, they 
 could more accurately de- 
 termine the Meafure of rhe 
 Earth's Periphery, when they 
 had found it the fame 
 by two Operations. Thefe 
 Lines they meafured by a 
 continued Series of 'Triangles 
 drawn from the Line AB; 
 for it be:ng direclly plane and 
 itraight, they had the Advan- 
 tage of measuring it with Iron 
 Reds as accurately as could 
 
 2 be.
 
 52 The AbfoluU 
 
 be, and found it to be 5663 
 Fathoms. ' 
 
 The Latitudes of the Places 
 were taken by an Inftrument, 
 whofe Radius was 10 Paris 
 Feet; and the Angles of each . 
 Triangle by a Quadrant of a 
 Circle whofe Scmidiameter was 
 3g Feet; both which Inflru- 
 inents were accurately divided 
 by Diagonal Lines. 
 
 In the firft Triangle A B C; 
 There are known by Obfervation 
 
 The 
 
 Fatb. 
 
 Found by 
 
 Part SECT. II. 
 
 In the fifth Triangle DFG- 
 DFG 92. 05. 20' 
 DGF 57. 34. oo. 
 GDF 30. 20. 40. 
 
 DF 21658. oo. 
 Hence DG 25643. oo. 
 And FG 12963. 03. 
 
 In the fixth Triangle G D E- 
 GDE 28. 09. 30. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 DG 25643. oo. 
 DE 8874. 03. 
 Hence GE 31897. oo, 1 
 
 When they had found the 
 Line GE, by another Series 
 
 meafuring - - A B - 5663. oo. of Triangles, to be 3 1 893 path. 
 3 Feet, they divided rhe Dif- 
 ference which made up the 
 letter Meafure 31895 Fatb. 
 
 In the feventhTriangle HFG; 
 HFG 36. 50. oo,; 
 HGF 104. 48. 30. 
 Fatb. Fe. } 
 FG 12963. 03. 
 Hence HG ,12523. oo. 
 
 In the eighth Triangle HGI. 
 HGI 31. 50. 30. 
 HIG 43. 29. 30. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 HG 12523. oo. 
 Hence G I 17562. oo. 
 And HI 9570. oo. 
 
 In the ninth Triangle HIK, 
 HIK 49. 20. 30. 
 HKI 53. 06. 40. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 HI 9570. oo. 
 Hence IK 11683. oo. 
 
 In the tenth Triangle IK L. 
 LIK 58. 31. 30. 
 IKL 58, 31. oo. 
 Fatb. 
 
 Hence by Calcula- 
 tion is found the 
 Side --AC-- 11012. 05. 
 
 In the fecond Triangle ADC. 
 DAC 77 . 25'. 50" 
 ADC 55. oo. oo. 
 A CD 47. 34. oo. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 AC 11012. 5. 
 Hence DC 13121. 3. 
 
 In the third Triangle DEC. 
 DEC 740. 09' 30". 
 DCE 40. 34 oo. 
 CDE 65. 1 6. 30. 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 DC 13121. 03. 
 Hence DE 8870. 03. 
 
 In the fourth Triangle DCF. 
 DCF ,, 3 . 47 : . 40. 
 DFC 33. 40. oo. 
 FDC 32. 32. 20. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 DC 13121. 63. 
 Hence DF 21658. co.
 
 C H A P. 4. of Univerfal Geography. 
 
 Path. Ft. 
 
 IK 11683. oo. 
 
 Hence KL 11188. 02. 
 
 And 1L 11186. 04. 
 
 In the eleventh Triangle KLM. 
 LKM 28. 52. 30. 
 KM L 63 31. oo. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 KL 11188. 02. 
 Hence LM 6036. 02. 
 
 If the Sum of the three 
 Angles ILK, KLM, MLN. 
 be taken from 360 Degrees, 
 there will remain the Angle 
 I L N 119 degr. 3 2 tain. 40 fee . 
 
 In the i zth Triangle LMN. 
 LMN 60. 38. oo. 
 MN L 29. 28. 20. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 LM 6036. 02. 
 Hence LN 10690. oo. 
 
 In the 13^ Triangle ILN. 
 ILN 32. 40. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 LN 10691. oo. 
 IL 11186. 04. 
 IN 18905. oo. 
 
 Here are found three Parts 
 of the Space intercepted be- 
 tween the two Places E and N, 
 viz. EG, GI, IN, not ex- 
 aflly in the Meridian Line it 
 felf N A ; but fo as the Meri- 
 dional Diftances may be found 
 by the following Operations. 
 Alfo after they had found the 
 Length of G I and IN by ano- 
 ther Series of Triangles, as they 
 hid done before in the Line 
 GE, they propofed to meafure 
 a new ftraight Line RS (and 
 found it to be 3902 Fatb.) by 
 which the Meafures of the a- 
 E 3 
 
 fbrefaid Lines might be verified, 
 and fo be a Foundation to them 
 in their proceeding to the 
 Point Q^ 
 
 Hence were $ *? o 37 ' 
 
 found che Lines') {* l8 97- 
 
 & IG 17564. 
 
 In the i4i< Triangle LMO. 
 
 LMO 58. 21. 50. 
 
 MOL 68. 52. 30. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 
 ML 6037. oo. 
 
 Hence LO 5510. 03. 
 
 In the i 5^ Triangle NOL. 
 
 NO L 115. 01. 30. 
 
 ONL 27. 50. 30. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 
 LO 5510. 03. 
 
 Hence NO 7122. 02. 
 
 In the 16^ Triangle NOP 
 
 NPO 72. 25. 40. 
 
 PNO 67. 21. 40, 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 
 NO 7122. 02. 
 
 NP 4822. 04. 
 
 ' In the 1 7'* Triangle N P Q^ 
 NPQ^. 58. 40. 
 PNCL 7 o. 34. 30. 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 NP 4822. 04. 
 04. 
 
 Therefore 
 they had got 
 the Lines 
 
 QN 11161- 4. 
 
 N I 18907. o. 
 
 I G 17564. o. 
 
 GE 31895. o. 
 But before they could actu- 
 ally fet upon meafuring the 
 Earth, all thefe were to be re- 
 ferred to the Meridian Line 
 A $ puffing thro' the Point N, 
 that thefe Lines following might 
 be known, viz.
 
 54 
 
 I 6or 
 
 Tie AbfolutePart 
 
 ( O^N 
 
 anfweringj 'N I 
 
 the Lines y I G 
 
 t GE 
 
 "SECT. II. 
 
 In the Triangle G E e, reft- 
 a-nglcd at \ y 
 
 EG s oo. 26. oo. 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 
 of which the Line /3*iscom- GE 31895. o. 
 
 pounded, mewingtheDiltance Hence Gi, or f A 31894. o. 
 between Q_0 and ,, Parallels 
 
 Hence the Diftance between 
 the Parallels of the Places N 
 and E, viz. the Sum of the 
 three Lines, N y, y /, <T a, is 
 68348 Fathoms; to which if 
 the Line N fi be added, it 
 will make up the Diltance be- 
 tween the Parallels of the 
 PlacesQjind E 78907 Fatb. $ 
 
 of Latitude of the Places Q^and 
 E. For this being found, and 
 an Arch of the Meridian inter- 
 cepted between the fame Pa- 
 rallels being known, they had 
 in Effect obtained their Defire, 
 viz. the Mc-afure agreeing to 
 a known Part of the Periphery 
 of the Earth. 
 
 Let therefore 0N y A, 10, Feet. 
 
 G be Parts of the Meridian 
 Circle, pafling thro' the Places 
 N, I, G; alfo Qj3, ly, G/, 
 and A E e Parallels of Latitude 
 pafling perpendicularly rhro' 
 thofe Meridians in the Places 
 QJ G E. 
 
 Then in the Triangle Qj3 N 
 yighiAngled at p, the Inclina- 
 tion of the Line Q^N to the 
 Meridian Line N $ is obfer- 
 ved, viz. 
 
 ' The An-gle QJSf 1 8. 5 5 '. 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 
 And the Line NQjs 11161.4. 
 Hence NB 10559. 3- 
 
 In the Triangle N y I reft- 
 angled at y, 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 
 IN 18907. o. 
 
 Hence N^ 18893. 3. 
 
 In the TriangJeG 1 9, reft- 
 
 angled at 0, GIfl i. 9. o. 
 
 Fatb. Fe. 
 
 I G 17564. o. 
 
 Jfencc 1 9, or y 17560.3. 
 
 Then it remained to obferve 
 the Difference pf Latitude of 
 the Places E, N, and Qj or 
 the Arches of the Meridian in- 
 tercepted between their Paral- 
 lels. To which end there 
 were taken three Stations, a 
 little diftance from the Places 
 themfelves; for the fake of bet- 
 ter Obfervation. 
 
 The firft Station was diftant 
 from the Place E 18 Fathoms 
 Southward; the fecond frorn 
 the Place N 65 Fathoms North- 
 ward ; the third from the Place 
 Q_/5 Fathoms Eaftward. 
 
 The Arch of the Meridian 
 intercepted between the firft 
 and fecond Station was found 
 to be IP. 1 1 '.57". between 
 the fecond and third was 122. 
 
 But if 83 Fatb. fthe Sum of 
 1 8 and 65, by which the firft 
 and fecond Station were further 
 than the Place N" and E) be 
 added to 68%348 (that is to the 
 Line N * the Diftance between 
 the Parallels of the two Places 
 N and E) the Sum will be 
 68.431
 
 CH 
 
 A P. 4. of Un'roerfal Geography. 5 5 
 
 68.43 * F af b- (d 1 * Diftance be- 
 tween the Parallels of the firft 
 and fecond Station) which is e- 
 qual to an Arch of i 1 1' 57". 
 Therefore the Length of i 
 Degr. is 57064 Fatb. 3 Feet. 
 
 Alfo if 57 Path, (the Diffe- vinces 
 rence between 75 and 18) be 
 fubftra&ed from 78907 Fatb. 3 
 Feet (the Diltance between the 
 Parallels of the Places Q and E) 
 
 This the famous Caflinizfa- 
 cled a few Years ago, at the 
 Command of the moft Chriftian 
 King, as he was marking a 
 Meridian for the O'^fervatory 
 at Paris, thro' the South Pro- 
 of France. He then 
 meafured with the fame Care 
 all that Space between Paris 
 and the Pyrenean Mountains ; 
 to which if the former Diftance 
 
 the Remainder will be 78. 850 between Malvojine and Amiens 
 Fatb. 3 Feet, (the Diftance be- be added, they make 7^ Degr. 
 Hence the Meafure 
 
 tween the Parallels of the firft 
 and third Station) which agrees 
 to the Arch of i. 22'. 55". 
 Hence i Degree is 57.057 
 Fathoms. 
 
 Therefore there was taken 
 for i degr. $j.o6oFatb. an in- 
 termediate Number betwixt 
 thefe two. 
 
 Thus with great Labour they 
 acquired the Meafure of i Degr. 
 of the Periphery of the Earth 
 as accurately as poffible. Ne- 
 verthelefs it is to be confefled, 
 
 of the 
 
 Earth is procured more accu- 
 rately, and concluded on more 
 fafely, than from the former 
 Obfervationsonly. And by this 
 Menfuration he found i Degr. 
 to make 57. 292Fath. which by 
 the former was computed to 
 be 57.060 Path. 
 
 Monfieur 1'Abbe Bignon tells 
 us, that the fame Meridian 
 would have been obferved round 
 the whole World by M.nfieur 
 de Chafel (a Per/on tf great 
 
 the Difficulty of making Obfer- Courage and Experience] with 
 
 the fame Exaftnefs as it was 
 begun', but that the War was 
 
 vations (efpecially thole about 
 
 the Latitude of the Place) was 
 
 fo great, that it really baffled at that Time every where tin- 
 
 the profound Endeavours of the fortunately kindled, whereby we 
 
 diligent Obfervers. And tho' are deprived of a more accurate 
 
 the Inltrument was exquilitly Meafure. 
 
 divided, and of 10 Foot Radi- But to proceed. The fame 
 
 us, yet they could not avoid an 
 
 Error of 2 Seconds, which on 
 
 the Earth make 22 Fathoms ; 
 
 by which the obferved Lati- 
 
 Cajffini, by comparing the fe- 
 veral Degrees in the afotefaid 
 Space, thought himfelf to. have 
 found that there was no cer- 
 tude of each Place might be tain and determinate Meafure 
 
 wrong. 
 
 to a Degree ; but that one fur- 
 
 Since this Error could not pafTed another continually to- 
 be avoided, it was thought wards the Equator by almoft 
 neceffary to meafure a greater an 8oo :tl Part. So that to a 
 Space, fo that it might be di- Degree northward from the Ob- 
 vided among more Degrees, fervatory of Paris there were 
 by which means a lefler Por- found 57 055 Degr. and to the 
 tion of it would fall to any one. next Degree Southward of 
 
 4 it
 
 The Abfolute Part S E c T. IL 
 
 is not towards the South, as 
 CaJJini thought, but to the 
 North. Neverthelefs, becaufe 
 France is almoft an Intermediate 
 between the Pole and the E- 
 quator ; the Degrees there will 
 be in a Medium betwixt the 
 leaft at the Equator and the 
 greateft at the Pole. 
 
 According to the aforefaid 
 Dimenfions, 
 
 it 57.1262 which is more by 
 71-2- See. H<-fl- dead. Scien. 
 1701. 
 
 Put by what we faid above, 
 about the Figure of the Earth, 
 in our Notes upon the third 
 Chapter, it appears there is feme 
 fun all Difference between one 
 Degree and another ; which can 
 fcarcely be perceived by meer 
 Obfervation- Tho' this Increafe 
 
 One Degree of the Circumference of the Earth contains 
 Paris Feet 343/52 French Leagues each 2000 Fath. 
 London 366669 Englijb Miles each 5280 Feet ( 
 
 Rbintan4 356117 R&taJjxJM'dcs each 1 8000 Feet 
 
 The Periphery of the Earth contains 
 
 Paris Feet - - r - 123750720 French Leagues 
 
 London Feet 132000768 Englijh Miles - - - - 250005^ 
 
 RbinlandFett- - 128202185 Rbinland Miles 7122J3 
 
 The Diameter of the Earth contains 
 
 Paris Feet 39391077 French Leagues -- 
 
 London Feet * 42017149 Englijh Miles- - - - 7957 
 
 ftbinland Feet - - - 40808032 Rhinland Miles - - 2267 x 
 
 ^ 
 
 trench 
 
 Englijh 
 
 kbinl. 
 
 
 *: 
 
 Fren 
 
 Eng. 
 
 Rbin 
 
 h 
 
 Feet 
 
 Feet 
 
 Feet. 
 
 
 '".' 
 
 Feet 
 
 Pftt 
 
 Feet 
 
 1 
 
 ~ 57 2 9 
 
 61 1 1 
 
 5935 
 
 
 , .1 
 
 ^95 
 
 102 
 
 ~99 
 
 2 
 
 1,458 
 
 12222 
 
 11871 
 
 
 4 
 
 191 
 
 204 
 
 198 
 
 3 
 
 17188 
 
 ^333 
 
 17806 
 
 
 3 
 
 286 
 
 3 06 
 
 297 
 
 4 
 
 22917 
 
 24445 
 
 2374 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 382 
 
 407 
 
 396 
 
 I 
 
 28646 
 
 34575 
 
 3556 
 36667 
 
 29676 
 35612 
 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 477 
 573 
 
 509 
 
 611 
 
 495 
 
 594 
 
 7 
 
 40104 
 
 42778 
 
 4' 547 
 
 
 7 
 
 663 
 
 7 ! 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 692 
 
 8 
 
 45834 
 
 48889 
 
 47482 
 
 
 8 
 
 764 
 
 815 
 
 791 
 
 9 
 
 51563 
 
 55000 
 
 534'* 
 
 
 *9 
 
 859 
 
 917 
 
 890 
 
 10 
 
 57292 
 
 DJJ.I1 
 
 59353 
 
 
 10 
 
 955 
 
 1019 
 
 989 
 
 20 
 
 114584. 
 
 122223 
 
 118706 
 
 
 20 
 
 1910 
 
 2037 
 
 1978 
 
 3 
 
 40 
 
 <0 
 
 60 
 
 171876 
 229168 
 286460 
 34375 2 
 
 83334 
 244446 
 
 305557 
 366669 
 
 178059 
 237411 
 296764 
 356117 
 
 
 3^ 
 
 40 
 ! 
 
 60 
 
 2865 
 38.19 
 
 4774 
 5729 
 
 3056 
 4074 
 
 5093 
 6111 
 
 2968 
 3957 
 4946 
 5935 
 
 Jurin's
 
 CHAP. 4. of Univerfal Geography. 57 
 the three following Methods *. Let P B (Fig. 9.) 
 the Altitude of a Tower or Mountain, be found 
 out by Altimetry , and imagine P S, the furtheft 
 Diftance from which it may be feen, to be a right 
 Line, as being fo very fmall a Part of the Earth's 
 Periphery ; and the Triangle B P S rectangled. 
 In which having B P and P S given, the Angle 
 P S B may be found ; which is equal to the Angle 
 PRS, whofe Meafure is the Arch SP(). There- 
 fore as this Arch" is to i degr. fo is the Diftance 
 PS meafured by fome known Meafure to the 
 Length of i degr. in that Meafure. For Exam- 
 ple, Let the Altitude B P be 480 Paces or % part 
 of a German Mile , and let the Diftance of P from 
 S, the Point which terminates the Sight, be 40000 
 Paces, or 10 German Miles. Then by the Pro- 
 blem Cap. 2. fay, As PS 40000 Paces is to 480: 
 fo is the Radius 10000000 to 11904, the Tran- 
 gent of the Angle BS P, or S R P, or of the Arch 
 S P, which is 41. min. And as 41 min. is to 60 : 
 fo is 40000 Paces to 590005 that is, about 15 
 Miles for i Degree. 
 
 O R the Semidiameter P R may be found with- 
 out the Table of Sines, thus ; As B P is to P S : 
 fo is P S to P R : Or as 480 is to 40000 : fo is 
 40000 to 3333333 Paces, for the Semidiameter 
 PR(0, 
 
 fbf Jixtb, but fecond ferreftnal, Method without 
 knowing the Diftances. 
 
 THE fame Semidiameter P R (Fig. 9.) may be 
 thus found. Suppofe P B to be a high Mountain, 
 
 * The three following Ter- Height and Horizontal Di- 
 
 reftrial Methods, are more to be ftances of Mountains, hinder the 
 
 admired for their Theory, than Exaftnefs which is required in 
 
 for any Truth in their Prafticc. a Matter of fuch Nicety. 
 For tho* they be all Geome- (b) Euclid. Lib. 6. Prop. 8. 
 trically true; yet Refraaion and (t) Euclid, Coroll. to Prop. 
 
 want of Accuracy, in taking the 8. Lib. 6. 
 
 or
 
 5 3 The Abfolute Tart S E c T. II. 
 
 or a Tower. If a Tower, it's Altitude may be 
 found by a Plumb-line to be, fuppofe, i oo Pa- 
 ces : If a Mountain, the Height P B may be known 
 by dltimetry to be, fuppofe, 480 Paces. Then 
 with a Quadrant at the Top B, find the Angle at 
 thefurtheft Point of Sight PBS 88 degr. 37 min. 
 wherefore B R S will be i degr. 23 min. Let the 
 Sine of 8 8 degr. 3 7 min. be taken from the Canon of 
 Sines, and fubflraded from the Radius 100000000, 
 and tlien fay ; As the Remainder is to the Sine of 
 
 88 degr. 37 min : fo is B P 100 Paces to the Semi- 
 diameter S R in Paces (d}. 
 
 fbe fevttttb, but third ftrreftriat, Method. 
 
 THIS Method (Fig. 9.) feems to be more ac- 
 curate and fitter for Practice, where two Moun- 
 tains or Eminences are ufed, whofe Diftance (with- 
 out their Altitudes) is found by Longimetry. For 
 Example, Let BP be a Mountain, Tower, or 
 Caftle -, and let S T be another, whofe Diftance, 
 fuppofe, 5 German Miles. Fir/I, by a Quadrant 
 (or otherwife) find the Angle BTR 89 <&gr. 45 
 min. and on the other Mountain the Angle T B R 
 
 89 degr. 55 min. which will make the Angle PRS 
 to be 20 min. becaufe the three Angles T, B, and 
 R, are equal to two right Angles, or 180 degr. 
 Then fay as 20 min. : 60 min. : : 5 miles to 15 
 Miles for i Degree (e). 
 
 THESE are the chief Methods of meafuring 
 the Earth ; for by knowing the Meafure of i degr. 
 the whole Perimeter, Diameter, Superficies, and 
 Solidity, may be found. 
 
 BUT the Perimeter of the Earth, according to 
 Snellius^ is 6840 Dutch Miles, or 10260000 Rbin- 
 knd Perches, or 1 23 1 20000 Feet. Therefore the 
 
 (<0 See Prop. 14. of Cbap. 2. above. (/) Kid. 
 
 2 Semidi-
 
 CHAP. 4. rf Uniwrfal Geography. 59 
 Semidiameter of the Earth is, by the Prob. of Chap. 
 2. found to be 1088^ Miles, or 1633190 Perches, 
 or 19598300 Feet , and the Superficies 18811353!- 
 fquare Dutch Miles *. 
 
 A N D the Solidity of the whole is 4095683 1512 
 Cubic Miles. 
 
 BUT becaufe accounting by German Miles is 
 more common, 15 of which make a Degree, 
 thefe may be ufed on this Condition, that 15 of 
 fuch Miles may equal 19 Holland Miles, or that 
 one Mile may contain 1900 Rbinland Perches, or 
 22800 Rbinland Feet. 
 
 O F fuch Miles the Circumference of the Earth 
 is 5400, the Semidiameter 860, the Superficies 
 9278181 fquare Miles, and the Solidity 265693384 
 cubic Miles. 
 
 YET the Italian Miles are moft commodious, 
 60 of which make a Degr. and a Mile a Minute. 
 Tho' thefe Italian Miles are to be computed fuch 
 as each of them may contain 475 Rbinland Per- 
 f hes. The Circuit of the Earth in this Meafure is 
 21600 Miles, and it's Semidiameter 3440. 
 
 THESE Things being explained, let us next 
 confider why the abovementioned Meafures of 
 feveral Authors differ j and what is wanting in 
 each. 
 
 I N the firft Method, thefe Things are dubious. 
 i. The Elevation of the Pole might, perhaps, 
 have been taken wrong. 2. It may be doubted 
 whether the Places obferved were in the fame Me- 
 ridian or no. 3 . Their Diftance is not particularly 
 known ; nor the Mealure which the Arabians then 
 ufed. So that in this Menfuration thefe Things 
 are required. I. The Length of their Mile (ac- 
 counted 
 
 * According to our Nvrtmtcl, the Surface, 199,444,201 
 
 and the Famous Cajfini, the Miles; and the folid Concent, 
 
 Meafures are thus; the Diame- 264,856,000,000 Miles. 
 ter 7,967,7 Englijb Milei
 
 do The Absolute Part S E c T. II. 
 
 counted 4000 Cubits according to Alfraganus] is 
 not well known to us. 2. They do not mew us 
 the Situation of the Places whofe Latitude they 
 took ; neither can we be certain of their Diligence 
 in taking them. 3. Nor do they tell us by what 
 Method they meafured their Diftances. 
 
 I N Eratojibenefs Menfuration, thefe Things are 
 to be obferved. i. He did not add 15 min. (for 
 the Angle made by the Sun's apparent Ray x z 
 and the true central Ray) (Fig. 7.) to the Arch 
 found B Z 7 degr. 12 min. 2. He did not prove 
 Syene and Alexandria to lie under the fame Meridi- 
 an. 3. The Termination of Shadows cannot be 
 accurately obferved ; and alfo a Style at any o- 
 ther Place within 150 Furlongs of Syene would 
 have been without a Shadow. 4. He took the 
 Diftance between Syene and Alexandria from com- 
 mon Computation which is feldom exact , neither 
 do we certainly know the Length of his Furlong. 
 
 I N PoftJoniufs Method thefe Errors may be 
 objected, i . He fuppofed Canopus not to rife a- 
 bove the Horizon of Rhodes ; tho* it is known to 
 be elevated two Degrees there : however, he could 
 not be fure it exactly touched it. 2. He deter- 
 mined the Diftance between Rhodes and Alexan- 
 dria by Guefs, and computed Voyages. 3. The 
 Length of his Furlong is not truly ftated. 4. It 
 may be doubted whether Alexandria and Rhodes 
 lie under the fame Meridian, ts?<r. 
 
 I N the Terreftrial Methods there are thefe De- 
 fects, i . An Error is eafily committed in taking 
 the exact Altitude of any Mountain. 2. The 
 extream Point of Vifion cannot be exactly deter- 
 mined, by reafon of the Refraction and the Weak- 
 nefs of the Sight. 
 
 THUS far concerning the Dimenfions of the 
 
 Earth's Perimeter,- it's Semidiameter, Superficies, 
 
 and Solidity -, from whence we might compute it'-s 
 
 2 - Solidity
 
 CHAP. 4. of Univerfal Geography. tfi 
 
 Solidity or Weight : but becaufe it's Parts are of 
 different Gravities and Textures unknown to us, 
 we cannot fo well determine jt's Weight but by 
 Suppofition. 
 
 I 1 muft be remembefd that the Semidiameter 
 of the Earth is the Model' of all Celeftial Dimen- 
 fions, both in determining the Diftances of the 
 Planets from the Earth, and from one another, 
 and in computing their Magnitude. Thus we fay, 
 the Sun is diftant from the Earth 1 200 Semidia- 
 meters, and the Moon 59, &c. 
 
 I N Geography not only the greater Circles, as 
 the Equator, fciV, are to be confidered, but alfo 
 the letter are of Ufe, that are parallel to the Equa- 
 tor, viz. how many Miles, or Perches, make a 
 Degree in fuch or fuch a Parallel ? Therefore we 
 have taken the following Table out of Snellius, 
 and have added to his Meafure of a Degree in 
 Perches, the fameTn German, Dutcb, and Italian 
 Miles. 
 
 ;;';i j^irch . +*'*= j ^ \ 
 
 fable Jhewing the Extent of one Degree In the feve- 
 ral Parallels. 
 
 The Latitude of the Place, 
 or the Diftance of each Pa- 
 rallel from the Equator. 
 1 ' fe*irl.'*r^ -* : 
 
 
 Perches in 
 i Degr. 
 
 Holland 
 Miles 
 
 German 
 Miles 
 
 Italian 
 Miles 
 
 Deg. 
 
 
 Miles Penh. 
 
 Miles M:n. 
 
 Mites Min. 
 
 Equ. 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 28500 
 28496 
 28483 
 28461 
 28431 
 28392 
 
 9 
 18 1496 
 18 1483 
 18 1461 
 18. 1431 
 18 1392 
 
 15 o 
 H 59 
 H 59 
 H 5 8 
 H 57 
 14-56 
 
 60 
 59 59 
 59 58 
 59 54 
 59 51 
 59 4-; 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 28344 
 28288 
 
 i8'i344 
 18 1288 
 
 H 55 
 
 H ?3 
 
 59 4i 
 
 ^q 34.
 
 The Abfolute Part SEC T. II. 
 
 Lati- 
 tude ' 
 
 Perches in 
 i <f r. 
 
 He/land 
 . Miles 
 
 German 
 
 Miles 
 
 Italian 
 Miles 
 
 f>fK- 
 3 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 2822 
 28149 
 28061 
 
 ' Miles Per cb ; 
 
 1 8 1223"" 
 i 8 i i 49 
 
 i 8 1067 
 
 Miles M.n. 
 
 14 51 
 1448 
 14 46 
 
 Mites Mm. 
 
 ~ 9 ~*T~ 
 
 59 16 
 ?9 6 
 
 ii 
 
 12 
 
 '3 
 '4 
 15 
 
 27976 
 27877 
 27769 
 
 27653 
 
 27526 
 
 1 8 976 
 18 877 
 8 769 
 .8 65? 
 1 8 529 
 
 H 43 
 14 40 
 
 M 37 
 H 33 
 14 20 
 
 58 55 
 58 42 
 58 29 
 5814 
 
 57 58 
 
 16 
 
 7 
 18 
 ; 19 
 
 20 
 
 27396 
 27255 
 
 27105 
 
 26947 
 
 26781 
 
 18 396 
 .8 255 
 18 105 
 7 H47 
 17 1281 
 
 14 25 
 1421 
 14 16 
 - 14 ii 
 14 6 
 
 57 42 
 57 24 
 57 4 
 56 44 
 56 24 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26607 
 26425 
 26234 
 
 26036 
 __2$g3o 
 
 , 17 1107 
 17 925 
 
 '7 734 
 17 536 
 
 17 130 
 
 14 o 
 
 3 54 
 13 48 
 
 13 42 
 
 13 36 
 
 56 o 
 
 55 3 6 
 55 12 
 
 54 48 
 54 24 
 
 26 
 
 3 
 
 29 
 
 JO 
 
 3 
 32 
 33 
 34 
 3? 
 
 25616 
 
 2 5394 
 25164 
 
 24927 
 ^2468 1 
 
 24429 
 24169 
 23902 
 23628 
 23346 
 
 17 1 16 
 16 1394 
 i 6 i i 64 
 16 927 
 16 681 
 
 '6 4*5"" 
 16 169 
 15 1402 
 15 1128 
 - 15 846 
 
 3 29 
 
 I 3 22 
 
 5 5 
 - !J 7. 
 
 'T 59 
 
 12 5I 
 
 12 43 
 9 I2-35L 
 
 12 26 
 
 12 17 
 
 54 
 53 28 
 53 o 
 52 28 
 
 _lj^ 96 
 51 24 
 50 52 
 
 50 20 
 
 49 44 
 49 8 
 
 30 
 
 g 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 4i 
 42 
 43 
 44 
 4j 
 
 23057 
 22761 
 22458 
 22149 
 21832 
 21509 
 21180 
 20843 
 20501 
 
 201 s Z 
 
 5 557 
 15 261 
 14 1458 
 14 1149 
 14 832 
 14 509 
 14 1 80 
 
 3 1343 
 13 1001 
 
 13 6^2 
 
 12 8 
 
 11 59- 
 ii 49 
 
 '' 39 
 
 ii 29 
 
 ii Tg"" 
 
 ' 9 
 
 10 58 
 10 47 
 10 36 
 
 48 32 
 47 S.6 
 47 1 6 
 46 39 
 46 o 
 - 4-5 16 
 44 36 
 43 S 2 
 43 8 : 
 
 4.2 24 
 
 40 
 47 
 48 
 
 19798 
 
 19437 
 19070 
 
 13 298 
 
 13 o 
 
 12 1070 
 
 10 25 
 10 14 
 
 10 2 
 
 41 40 ; 
 
 41 o 
 
 4o 8
 
 C H A P. 4. of Univerfal Geography. 
 
 Lati- 
 
 tude- 
 
 Perches in 
 T Dfgr. 
 
 Holland 
 
 Miles 
 
 German 
 
 Miles 
 
 Italian 
 Miles 
 
 De%. 
 
 
 Mi let Perch- 
 
 VLilet Mm 
 
 Miles Min 
 
 49 
 
 18698 
 18319 
 
 12 698 
 12 ^IQ 
 
 9 5 
 9 38 
 
 39 20 
 38 32 
 
 5 1 
 
 5 2 
 53 
 54 
 
 55 
 
 17936 
 17546 
 17152 
 
 .1.675 2 
 16347 
 
 II 1436 
 II "1046 
 I I 652 
 11 252 
 
 10 1347 
 
 9 20 
 9 H 
 9 * 
 
 8 49 
 8 36 
 
 37 44 
 37 
 36 8 
 
 35 26 
 34 2 4 
 
 56 
 
 ; 57_ 
 
 '5937 
 
 .15522 
 
 14679 
 14250 
 
 i.o 937 
 id 522 
 10 id3 ; 
 
 9 H79 
 
 9 750 
 
 K? 
 
 7 57 
 7 44 
 
 7 30 
 
 33 3 2 
 32 40 
 31 48 
 31 o 
 
 30 o 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 13817 
 13380 
 12939 
 12494 
 12045 
 
 9 3'7 
 8 1380 
 8 939 
 8 494 
 
 8 45 
 
 7 16 
 
 6 48 
 634 
 
 6 20 
 
 29 4 
 28 8 
 27-12 
 26 16 
 
 25 20 
 
 66 
 
 68 
 69 
 
 70 
 
 11592 
 11136 
 
 10676 
 10213 
 9748 
 
 7 1092 
 7 6 39 
 7 *7" 
 6 1213 
 
 6 748 
 
 6 6 
 5 5 2 
 5 38 
 
 S3 
 
 24 24 
 23 28 
 22 32 
 21 32 
 
 20 32 
 
 7' 
 
 73 
 74 
 
 7s 
 
 9279 
 8807 
 
 8 333 
 7846 
 7376 
 
 6 279 
 
 5 '37 
 
 5 933 
 5 346 
 4 i 376 
 
 4 53 
 4 38 
 4 23 
 4 * 
 3 53. 
 
 19 32 
 l8 32 
 17 3* 
 
 16 32 
 
 76 
 77 
 78 
 79 
 80 
 
 6*95 
 6411 
 5925 
 5438 
 4949 
 
 4 895 
 
 r//4< 4" 
 
 3 1425 
 3 938 
 3 449. 
 
 3 3^ 
 3 23 
 3 8 
 2 52 
 2.36 
 
 14 32 
 13 32 
 
 12 32 
 II 23 
 
 io 24 
 
 81 
 82 
 
 83 
 84 
 85 
 
 3*966 
 
 3473 
 2 979 
 2484 
 
 2 1458 
 2 966 
 
 * 473 
 
 i 1479 
 i 984 
 
 2 20 
 2 5 
 
 I 50 
 
 34 
 r 18 
 
 9 20 
 
 8 20 
 
 7 to 
 
 6 12 
 
 /O CO 00 00 OC 
 1 O NO 00>J O> 
 
 1988 
 1492 
 995 
 497 
 
 
 
 i 488 
 o 1492 
 o 991 
 o 498 
 
 
 
 1 3 
 o 47 
 o 31 
 o 10 
 
 o b 
 
 4 12 
 3 12 
 
 2 4 
 
 4 
 o o
 
 The Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Motion of the Earth. 
 
 TH E Pythagorean Motion or Circumvolution 
 of the Earth (not a Nutation or Quaking) 
 is according to the Copernicans the Caufe of moft 
 of the Changes in the Celeftial Appearances, which 
 would otherwife be conftantly the fame in every 
 Place (a). Tho' indeed there is not any Property 
 
 of 
 
 (a) This Syftem was not in- 
 vented by Pythagoras, as fome 
 imagine, for Diogenes LaPrtius 
 exprefsly faith, that Pythago- 
 ras'* Opinion was, That the 
 World was round, containing 
 the Earth in the middle of it ; 
 and that Philolaus, the Pythago- 
 rean, was the firft that faid the 
 Earth moved in a Circle : But 
 fome fay Hercetas the Syracu- 
 fian* Derham's Aftro-Theology* 
 
 Pythagoras, who Jived in So- 
 ciety with the Egyptian Priefls 
 feven Years, and was initiated 
 into their Religion, carried 
 home from thence, befides fe- 
 veral Geometrical Inventions, 
 the true Syftem of the Uni- 
 verfe, and was the firft that 
 taught in Greece, that the 
 Earth and Planets turned round 
 the Sun, which was immovea- 
 ble in the Center; and that the 
 Diurnal Motion of the Sun and 
 fixed Surs, was not real but ap- 
 
 parent, arifing from the Mo- 
 tion of the Earth round it's 
 Axis. 
 
 The next Perfon who made 
 a confiderable Figure this way, 
 was Ptolemy with his Cycles, 
 Epicycles, and Eccentrics, he 
 quite burthened Nature, and his 
 Hypothefis mews too much of 
 Art ; thefe are all now explo- 
 ded, and his folid Spheres broke 
 to pieces; he left behind 
 him a Work entitled Almageft, 
 or the great Conftrudion, 
 which v?as founded on tke 
 Obfervations of Hipparchus. 
 
 Copernicus had the Honour 
 to reftore' the ancient Pytha- 
 gorean Syftem, notwithftandihg 
 the Prepofleffion the Ptolemaic 
 had gained in the World. 
 
 To thefe fucceeded the No- 
 ble Dane, fycbo Brahe, whofe 
 Hypothefis in a great Meafure 
 is compounded of the other two, 
 and feems dcfigned to account
 
 CHAP. 5. of Unfoerfal Geography* 6$ 
 
 of the Earth fo much difputed againft and cavil- 
 led at as this ; fo as even not long ago to have 
 undergone the Cenfure of the Romijh Church. 
 However, becaufe it feems very probable to many 
 that there is fuch a Motion, we mall endeavour to 
 explain it. 
 
 I T is known to all, even the Vulgar, that the 
 Sun, Moon, and Stars, appear to move from Eaft 
 to Weft, and to return to almoft the fame Places 
 again in the Heavens, in the Space of twenty four 
 .Hours. So that either they muft really move, 
 or we our felves be moved ; and attribute our 
 Motion to them. For it is a felf-evident Prin- 
 ciple, that if two Things change their [Diftance 
 from one another, one of them, at leaft, muft 
 have moved. 
 
 T H A T the Earth is fixed, or at Reft, and the 
 Stars with the Heavens in Motion, was a common 
 Opinion ; and is fo ftill among thofe that are ac- 
 counted Ptolemaic Aftronomers : But the Pythago- 
 reans of old maintained, that the Stars conftantly 
 kept their Places ; and that the Earth was revol- 
 ved about it*s Center. Of which Seel: was the 
 celebrated Ariftarcbus of Samos ; who, for defend- 
 ing this Opinion, was by his Enemy and Adver^ 
 fary accufed, before the Bench of the Areopagites^ of 
 having violated the Laws of Religion ; but was 
 fortunately abfolved by them *. Afterwards, but 
 
 very 
 
 for the difficulties of both of the Celeftial Bodies obferve in 
 
 them, and fo is liable to feveral their Motion, and laid the 
 
 Objections in them both. He Ground -work of the Modern 
 
 was very skillful in obferving, Philofophy. Thus I have given a 
 
 and in the Furniture of his Ob- fhort Sketch of the Rife and 
 
 fcrvatory exceeded even Prin- Perfe&ion of this Science, 
 
 ces and Kings. * The Great Galilao, the 
 
 John Kepler, the laft I mall Modern Affertor of the fame 
 
 mention, by the help of Tycbo's DoStrine, met with the fare of 
 
 Labours, found ouc the "Laws the ancient &wz/rfPlulofopher; 
 
 VOL. J. F He
 
 66 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 very few affented to this Opinion ; fo that it lay 
 hid, or, as it were, buried in Oblivion for many 
 Ages ; infomuch that we find not the leaft men- 
 tion of it in the Schools, till the famous Aftrono- 
 mer Copernicus , about 200 Years ago, brought it 
 again into Estimation, and backed it with feveral 
 Arguments, fo that many excellent Aftronomers af- 
 ter him embraced it ; among whom flourifhed not 
 long fmce the great Kepler , Profeffor of Mathema- 
 tics to the Emperor ; and Galllceo an Italian, Ma- 
 thematician to the great Duke of Tufcany ; as alfo 
 Lanfberg a Dutchman. 
 
 AND whereas we obferve two apparent Mo- 
 tions in the Heavenly Bodies (one by which all 
 the Stars both fixed and wandering feem to be car- 
 ried about the Earth, and to rife to the Meridian, 
 and fet under the Horizon nearly in the fame or 
 equal Times: The other, which is called their 
 Annual Motion ; by which the Planets with dif- 
 ferent Motions, and the fixed Stars with equal Ve- 
 locity, are carried the contrary Way from Weft 
 to Eaft) the Ptokmaics affirm both thefe Motions 
 to be in the Stars themfelves, or in their Orbs ; 
 But the Copernicans attribute this firft apparent Mo- 
 tion to that real one of the Earth, not in being 
 transferred from one Place to another, but to it's 
 Rotation about it's Axis from Weft to Eaft, while 
 it continues ftill in it's own Place (which caufeth 
 the apparent Motion of all the Stars the contraiy 
 way). And they alfo free the Sun and the fixed 
 Stars from the afore&id annual Motion, by attri- 
 
 He was brought before the proper Center. The poor Man 
 
 Inquifition, snd obliged folemn- was forced to fay, that he did, 
 
 ly to abjure his Aflronomical with a fincere Heart, and Faith 
 
 Tenets, that the Sun flood im- unfeigned, abjure, curfe, and 
 
 movable in the Midft of the deteft, the afore&id Errors and 
 
 Univerfe, and that the Earth Herefies. 
 moved round it, as about ift 
 
 bating
 
 C H A P. 5. of Unfoerfal Geography. 67 
 
 buting the apparent Motion of thefe to the real an- 
 nual Motion of the Earth round the Sun ; and to 
 the Inclination of it's Axis: Notwithftanding they 
 aflign this faid annual Motion to the reft of the 
 Planets ; only they deny the Sun to be a Planet, 
 and advance him to the Center of the Syftem, 
 where Ptolemy had placed the Earth ; and make 
 the reft of the Plantts, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, 
 the Earth, Venus, and Mercury, revolve round 
 him. 
 
 THE Reafons for the Copernican H-jpothefis are 
 thefe. 
 
 1. T H E Motion df the Earth round it's Axis, 
 continuing in the fame Place, will beft account for 
 the Appearance of fuch a vaft Number of Stars 
 which feem to perform their Revolutions round 
 the Earth in 24 Hours ; and therefore this Mo- 
 tion is moil agreeable to Reafon : As it happens 
 with us when we lit in a Ship^ failing towards o- 
 thers at Reft in the Harbour ; tho 5 they feem to 
 approach and come nearer us, yet we do not affign 
 that to any Motion in them. And as Nature ne- 
 ver performs that by many means which may be 
 done by a few 5 it is very likely the fame Rule is 
 obferved here. 
 
 2. THE Motion of the Stars Would thus be 
 incredibly fwift and beyond all Imagination ; be- 
 caufe their Biftance, in Reipect of us, is almoft infi- 
 nite, and the Orbit they have to run round fo 
 prodigioufly great, that they muft move at leaft 
 i ooooo Miles in a Minute: On the other hand, 
 if this Motion be affigned to the Earth, we need 
 not introduce a progrejfive Celerity ; for tho' fhe re- 
 mains ftill in the fame part of Space, me folves 
 the Phaenomena by revolving about her Axis. 
 
 3. THIS Argument is the ftronger if we com- 
 pare the vaft Bulk of the Celeftial Bodies with the 
 Bulk of the Earth. For as the Sun is at leaft 200 
 
 F 2 times
 
 68 The Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 times bigger than the Earth, and feme of the fixed 
 Stars 1000 times; it is much more probable, that 
 the Earth revolves round it's Axis with an eary 
 natural Motion, than that fuch vaft Bodies mould 
 move from one Place to another with incredible 
 Swiftnefs. 
 
 4. THE moft celebrated Aftronomers are, 
 with Vycbo 9 forced, by the Phenomena, to deny 
 that there are folid Orbs, fuch as the Ancients 
 made ufe of the better to explain their imaginary 
 Motion of the Stars ; hence their Arguments for 
 this diurnal Rotation about the Earth, are lefs co- 
 gent. The Reafon why they are forced to deny 
 this, is, becaufe that one Planet is often feen with- 
 in the Orb of another ; which muft caufe a mutual 
 Penetration. 
 
 5. NO Reafbn can be given why the Stars 
 Jhould move round the Earth : But, on the other 
 hand, it is moft agreeable to Reafon, that the- 
 Earth, and the reft of the Planets, Jhould move 
 about the Sun. 
 
 6. NEITHER the Pole nor the Am about 
 which the Stars are fuppofed to revolve, is real : 
 On the contrary, there is a known Pole and Axis 
 in die Earth. 
 
 7. FOR this Reafon alfo Navigation is much 
 eafier from Weft to Eaft than the contrary Way. 
 For they can fail from Europe to India in about 
 four Months ; but can fcarce return in fix Months : 
 becaufe in their going they move to the fame Point 
 with the Earth ; but in their returning they fleer 
 contrary to the Earth's Motion. 
 
 8. BECAUSE the Cekftial Phenomena, fuch 
 as the rifmg and fetting of the Stars, the Inequali- 
 ty of Days, &c. cannot be accounted for, by any 
 other Motion than that of the Earth. And the 
 Commodioufnefs and Neceflity of this Hypothefis, 
 is more particularly perceived in the wonderful Ap- 
 pearances
 
 C H A P. 5. of Unfoerfal Geography. 69 
 
 pearances of the Planets ; for explaining of which 
 the Ptolemaics are forced to fuppofe feveral unnecef- 
 fary interfering Circles, Epicycles, and Eccentrics, 
 without any Reafon : Whereas the Copernicans can 
 naturally account for them all, (without any pre- 
 vious Suppofitions,) by the annual Motion of the 
 Earth, or it's Revolution round the Sun, viz. 
 i. Why the Planets feem fometimes retrograde; 
 and why Saturn is oftener and continues longer fo 
 than Jupiter ; and Jupiter oftener and longer fo 
 than Mars, &c. and alfo why they are carried 
 fometimes with a fwifter Motion, and at other 
 times appear ftationary. 2. Why Mercury and 
 Venus can never be feen a whole Night together. 
 3. Why Venus is never carried 'further from the 
 Sun than 48 degr. and Mercury never more than 
 28 ; and fo can never be feen in Oppofition to the 
 Sun. 4. Why Venus may be feen in the Evening 
 after the Sun is fet ; and the next day in the Morn- 
 ing before the Sun rifes, &V . 
 
 I FORBEAR to mention any more Phse- 
 nomena, (thefe being the principal from whence a 
 folid Argument may be drawn for the Motion of 
 the Earth^ fince they are all eafily and naturally 
 accounted for upon this Hypothecs ; fo that it 
 would be ftrange if the Earth mould not move, 
 when fuch evident Appearances require fuch a Mo- 
 tion. And tho* thefe Arguments are not demon- 
 ftrative, yet they render this Hypothefis prefera- 
 ble to the other, which fuppoieth the Motion of 
 the Heavens. And we mult admit of the one or 
 the other. 
 
 BUT the Arguments which fome alledge to 
 the contrary are eafily anfwered ; fuch as, j . The 
 Earth is not fit for Motion, becaufe of it's Gravi- 
 ty. 2. The Parts of the Earth naturally tend in 
 a right Line to the Center ; and therefore a circu- 
 lar Motion is againft Nature. 3. If the Earth 
 F 3 wer
 
 Abfolutt Part SECT. II. 
 
 were moved, a Stone dropped from the Top of a 
 Tower would not fall juft at the Foot of it. 4. A 
 Ball fhot from a Cannon Eaftward at a Mark, 
 could not come home to it, if the Mark with the 
 whole Earth did at the fame Time move towards 
 the Eaft : or at Jeaft would hit the Mark fooner 
 when mot towards the Weft, Alfo a Bird flying 
 towards the Eaft would be retarded : but forward- 
 ed in flying the contrary Way. 5. Towers and 
 Buildings could not ftand upright, but would fall : 
 and Men, by the quick Rotation, would become 
 giddy. 6. Becaufe (fay theyj the Stars are obfer- 
 ved to change their Places, but not the Earth f 
 7. Becaufe the Earth is in the Center of the World ; 
 tut die Center of any Thing is not moved. 8. Be- 
 caufe the holy Scriptures confirm the Stability of 
 the Earth, 
 
 T O all which the Copermcam anfwer thus. To 
 the firft^ that the whole Earth, taken together, is 
 not abfolutely heavy. For Gravity confifts in the 
 Tendency of the homogeneous Parts to the whole j 
 and tho' this kind of Gravity be found in the Sun 
 and Moon, they are neverthelefs not accountetf 
 weighty. 
 
 T O the fecond they anfwer, that the circular 
 Motion of the whole does in no wife hinder the 
 relative Motion of the Parts, which are moved in 
 in a direft Line towards the Center ; as appears 
 by the Parts of the Sun and Moon. 
 
 T O the tbird they anfwer three ways, i . That 
 heavy Bodies are not carried directly towards the 
 Center of the Earth, but in the fhorteft Lines po 
 fible to it's Superficies ; which are thofe parallel to 
 the Tower , as Iron does not tend to the Center 
 of the Loadftone, but to the Loadftone it felf. 
 2. The whole Atmofphere adheres to the Earth, 
 and is moved along with it : therefore when Bo- 
 dies a.re thus let fall, they partake ojf this circular 
 
 Motion,
 
 C H A P. 5. of Unherfal Geography. 7 1 
 
 Motion, and are carried downwards as it were in 
 a Veflel. B- Gaffendus, by repeated Experiments, 
 found, that if a Body be projected from another 
 Body in Motion, it will partake of the Motion of 
 that other Body ; as a Stone dropped from the 
 Top of a Maft, while the Ship is in a very fwift 
 Motion, is not left by the Ship but falls at the 
 Foot of the Maft. Alfo a Ball (hot perpendicu- 
 larly from the Foot of the Maft falls in the very 
 fame Place. Therefore the Objection is of no 
 Force. 
 
 T O the fourth they anfwer as to the third. 
 
 THE fifth Objection hath no Place, becaufe 
 the Motion of the Earth is even and uniform, with- 
 out darning or ftriking againft any other Body 5 
 and the Buildings being heavy Bodies, and homo- 
 geneous to the Earth, are moved as if they were 
 in a Ship ; which tho* it fails either fwiftly or (low- 
 ly, yet if the Motion be even and fteady without 
 Waves and on fmooth Water, Bodies fet upright 
 will not be overturned, nor a Glafs of Wine be 
 fpilt. 
 
 T O the ftxth we anfwer, that we are not fen- 
 fible of any Change of Place in the Stars, only of 
 their Situation in Refpect of our felves ; which 
 may appear and really be, whether we with the 
 Earth, or the Stars themfelves are moved ; or 
 even tho' both we and the Stars fhould be in Mo- 
 tion (b). I N 
 
 (b] Molt of thefe Objeftions the Top T, in the fame Time 
 
 are anfwered by the Laws of that the Ship moves from M 
 
 Mechanics, thus: Let W, E be to D. From the Conjunction 
 
 the Line of Motion of a Ship of thefe two Forces (M T the 
 
 from Wto E, reprefenting the Projection, and MD the Ship's 
 
 Motion of the Earth from Weft Motion) it is manifeft, by the 
 
 to Eaft. Let MT (in Fig. 9) known Laws of Motion, that 
 
 be a Maft, from the Foot of the Body will not be carried 
 
 which, M, fuppofe a Body to perpendicularly to the place 
 
 be thrown perpendicularly to T, but in the Diagonal Lin 
 
 F 4 MB,
 
 72 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 IN diefeventh Objedion both the Aflertions are 
 falfe j or at leaft doubtful. 
 
 TO 
 
 M B, fo as to accompany the 
 Malt in it's Motion from 
 M T to BD. Then fuppofe 
 the Body to fall from the 
 topoftheMaft B to the foot 
 D, in the fame Time the Ship 
 moves from D to G ; and it 
 is plain, that, by the mutual 
 aftingofBD, the centripetal 
 Force, and BF=DG, the 
 Ship's Motion, the Body will 
 fall in the diagonal Line B G, 
 and alfo accompany the Maft 
 in it's Motion from D to G; 
 fo that tho' it was really carried 
 in the Lines MB, BG, yet it 
 will feem to have moved, only 
 upwards and downwards, paral- 
 lel to the Line FG. 
 
 Alfo (in Kg. 10.) let M T 
 be the fame Maft, and fuppofe 
 a Projeftile to be caft eaft- 
 ward from the Stern S, to the 
 top of the Maft T, in the Time 
 the Ship moves alfo eaftward 
 from M to D ; then will it's 
 Motion upwards defcribe the 
 Diagonal S B; where let it be 
 obftrucled fo as to feem to fall 
 perpendicularly to D, in the 
 Time the Ship moves from D 
 to G ; then, as before, it will 
 defcribe the Diagonal B G, tho' 
 it feemedto move upwards only 
 in the Line TS, and down wards 
 inFG 
 
 So (in Fig. II.) if a Body 
 be projected weft ward from 
 the Head of the Ship H to the 
 top of the MaftT, in the Time 
 it moves eaftward, H G equal 
 to the Diftance M H, then will 
 it's Motion upwards defcribe 
 
 the perpendicular Line H B. 
 And if in the fame rime it 
 feems to defcend from B to H 
 that the Maft moves H G=s 
 G =M H, it's Motion down- 
 wards will defcribe the Diago- 
 nal B G. So that, in this Cafe, 
 it afcends by a perpendicular 
 Line, and falls by an inclining 
 Line; tho' itfeemed to afcend 
 by the inclined Line b F, and 
 to fall by the perpendicular 
 Line F G. 
 
 Hence it is plain that Bodies 
 may appear to have a Motion, 
 direftly contrary to their real 
 and abfolute Motion : fo that it 
 is pleafant to conceive, how 
 falfly we may judge of the Mo- 
 tion of Bodies by their unequal 
 Diftance from us; not confider- 
 ing that we may be infenfibly 
 moved from them. 
 
 Hence alfo is deduced that 
 ingenious Experiment of Gali- 
 l<eo t mentioned in Derkam's 
 Aftro-Theology, as follows. 
 
 ' Shut yourfelf up (fays be) 
 * with your Friend in the great 
 ' Cabin of a Ship, together 
 ' with a Parcel of Gnats and 
 ' Flies, and other little winged 
 ' Creatures. Procure alfo a 
 ' great Tub of Water, and put 
 Fifties therein. Hang alfo a 
 ' Bottle of Water up to empty 
 ' itfelf, drop by drop into ano- 
 ' ther fuch Bottle placed under- 
 ' neath with a narrow Neck. 
 ' Whilft the Ship lies #11, di- 
 ' ligendy obferve how thefe 
 ' little winged Creature fly 
 with the like fwiftnds to eye-
 
 CHAP. 5- of Umverfal Geography. 73 
 
 T O the eighth is anfwered, i. The holy Scrip- 
 tures, in phyfucal matters, always fpeak according 
 to Appearances, and the Capacity of the Vulgar ; 
 as where the Moon is faid to be a great Light crea- 
 ted to give Light in the Night (c) : tho* the Moon 
 
 ry Part of the Cabin ; how 
 
 * the Fifhes fwim indifferently 
 ' towards all Sides; and how 
 
 * the defending Drops all fall 
 
 * into the Bottle underneath. 
 ' And if you throw any thing 
 to your Friend you need ufe 
 
 * no more Force one way than 
 ' another; provided the Di- 
 
 * ftances be equal. And if you 
 leap, you will reach as far 
 
 * one way as the other. Hav- 
 
 * ing obferved thefe Particulars 
 ' whilft the Ship lies ftill, make 
 
 * the Ship to fail with what 
 
 * Velocity you pleafe; and fo 
 long as the Motion is uni- 
 
 * form, not fluctuating this 
 f Way and that Way, you fh all 
 
 * not perceive there is any Al- 
 teration in the aforefaid Ef- 
 
 * fedts ; neither can you from 
 
 * them conclude whether the 
 Ship moveth or ftandeth ftill. 
 
 * But in leaping you (hall reach 
 as far on the Floor as you did 
 before ; nor by any Reafon 
 ' of the Ship's Motion fhall you 
 ' make a longer Leap towards 
 ' the Poop than the Prow ; 
 notwithftanding that whilft 
 
 * you were up in the Air, the 
 Floor under your Feet had 
 run the contrary Way to 
 your Leap. And if you caft 
 any thing to your Compa- 
 ' nion, you need ufe no more 
 f Strength to make it reach 
 
 * him, if he mould be towards 
 ? the Prow and you tgward* 
 
 the Poop, than if you flood 
 in a contrary Pofition. The 
 Drops fhall all fall into the 
 Bottle that is lower ; and not 
 one towards the Poop, al- 
 tho 1 the Ship fhall have run 
 many Feet, whilft the Drop 
 was in the Air. The Fifties 
 in the Water fhall have no 
 more Trouble in fwimming 
 towards the fore part of the 
 Tub, than towards the hin- 
 der Part ; but fhall make to 
 the Bait with equal fwiftnefc 
 on any Side of the Tub. 
 And laftly the Gnats and Flies 
 fhall continue their Flight in- 
 differently towards all Parts, 
 and never be driven together 
 towards the Side of the Ca- 
 bin next the Prow ; as if 
 wearied with following the 
 fwift Motion of the Ship. 
 And if by burning a few 
 Grains of Incenfe you make 
 a little Smoak ; you fhall 
 perceive it to afcend on high, 
 and hang like a cloud, moving 
 indifferently this Way or 
 that, without any inclination 
 to one Side more than ano- 
 ther.' All which Obfervati- 
 ons depend upon the aforefaid 
 Laws of Mechanics ; and fuffi- 
 ciently anfwer the moft con- 
 fiderable Objections, deduced 
 from Philofophy, againft the 
 Motion of the Earth. 
 [c] Gen. i. 16. 
 
 be
 
 74 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IL 
 
 be not great in Refpeft of the Earth and fixed 
 Stars, nor hath any Light in itfelf ; ^neither doth 
 it give Light to the Earth every Night. Thus 
 the Sun is faid to go forth from the End of the Hea- 
 vens, and to bafle to it again (d ) ; whereas in Truth 
 there is no fuch End to be found. So in the Book 
 of Job (*), the Earth is faid to be of a plane and 
 fquare Figure, underpropped and fupported with 
 Pillars ; which is not to be underftood in a literal 
 Senfe, as even the mofl ignorant may perceive (/) : 
 
 More 
 
 (d] Pfal. xk. 6. Ecclef. i. 
 
 5- 
 
 (e) Job ix. 6. aatviii. 24. 
 
 {/) Befides, Things are of- 
 ten fpoke of as they appear, 
 not as they really are. For as 
 St Hierom fays (upon the thir- 
 teenth Chapter of St Matthew} 
 It is the Cuftom of the Scrip- 
 tures, for the Hiftorian to relate 
 the Opinion Men bad of many 
 Matters, as at that Time thofe 
 Matters were by all People ta- 
 ken to be. And in another Place. 
 There are many Things in the 
 Holy Scriptures, which are 
 fpoken affording to the Opinion 
 of the Time in which they were 
 done ; and not according to Rea- 
 lity. And we ihould find very 
 abfurd Conclufions would fol- 
 low the taking of thefe Texts 
 in a literal Senfe. For in Jo- 
 fl>ua x. 12, 13. the Sun is or- 
 dered to ft and flill upon mount 
 Gibeon, and the Moon in the 
 valley of Ajalon. But it would 
 be very abfurd to take this in a 
 flrift literal Senfe, and imagine 
 thofe two great Luminaries 
 were confined to thofe two Pla- 
 ces, otherwife than in Appea- 
 lance to the victorious jrae- 
 
 lites. And if fo confiderable 
 a Part . of the Tranfaftion be 
 fpoken according to it's Ap- 
 pearance, why may not the 
 whole ? Why might not this 
 Station as well be an Arreft of 
 the Earth's Motion, as that of 
 the Heavens ? If the whole 
 Miracle was not (as fome not 
 improbably think) effe&ed by 
 Means of fome preternatural 
 Refractions, or extraordinary 
 Meteors, &c. And fo for the 
 Recefs of the Sun, or it's Sha- 
 dow in Hezekiab's Cife(z Kings 
 xx. 10. and Ifai. xxxviii. 8.) 
 which in appearance feemed to 
 be the Sun, is, by divers learned 
 Men, thought to have been the 
 Effeft of fuch like extraordi- 
 nary Refraftions or Meteors, as 
 mentioned in the laft Cafe: Or 
 if it was a real Regrefs, why 
 not of the Earth rather than 
 the Sun and whole Heavens? 
 See Derham's Ajiro-Tbeol. Be- 
 fides, Hiftoriographers feldora 
 confine themfelves to a Geo- 
 metrical or Aftronomical nicety 
 in their Defcriptions of Things. 
 As, in i Kings vii. 23. it is 
 written, that Solomon made a 
 malttn fea t ten (ubits from oni
 
 C H AP. 5, cfUnherfal Geography. 7$ 
 
 More Places might be quoted, but thefe are fuffi- 
 cient 5 for the holy Scriptures were not given us 
 to philofophize by, but to increafe our Piety. 
 2. Some Places of Scripture are alfo produced, 
 which do not fpeak of the Mobility of the Earth, 
 but of it's Stability and Permanency ; as that in Job 
 aforefaid (g), 
 
 THUS we have declared in brief what that 
 Motion is, which the Copernicam afifign to the Earth ; 
 the more full and accurate Explication of which 
 belongs to dftronomy. And this Motion being 
 fuppofed, all the Phenomena we obferve in a 
 jGlobe revolved about it's Axis, mull be applied 
 to the Earth, viz. That the Axis upon which it is 
 turned, is one of the Diameters : That the Poles 
 are two immoveable Points in the Extremities of 
 the Axis : That the great Circle, or Perimeter, in 
 which the Rotation is made, is the Equator with 
 jt's Parallels, &c. 
 
 L E T us now confider the Velocity of the Earth's 
 Motion ; which, in that about it's Axis, is not 
 over all the Earth equal, but different according 
 to the Pittance from the Equator ; being there 
 
 trim to the other, round all hended to be 25031,4 Miles, 
 
 flbout, and a line of thirty tu- which, divided into 24 Hours, 
 
 bits did compafs it round about, makes the Revolution to be 
 
 But as 7 : 22 :: 10 : 31^- Cu- at the Rate of about 1043 
 
 bits is very near the true Length Miles in an Hour ; a Rotation 
 
 of the Line that ought to en- that would as eafily throw off 
 
 compafs a round Veffel of ten the Parts of the Earth, efpe- 
 
 Cubits Diameter. dally the Waters, as the whirl- 
 
 (g) Such as Pfal. xciii. I. ing round of a Wheel, or a 
 cxix. 90. civ. 5. Ectlef. i. 4. Globe, would the loofe Duft 
 and \ Cbron. xvi. 30. which and Water thereon ; but by 
 Texts are all underftood by Reafon the Gravitating Power 
 learned Commentators to mean exceeds the Centrifugal, as 
 the unalterable Condition, Se- 2174 exceeds 7,54,064, that 
 curity, Peace, and Tranquility, is, above 288 times ; there- 
 of the Earth. fore all Parts lie quiet and ie- 
 
 The Ambit of the Earth, cure in their refpeaive Place*. 
 
 \>y the moft accurate, jsappre- fterbanfs ^ftro-'Tbcol p. 149. 
 
 fwifteft
 
 76 The Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 fwifteft as paffing thro* a greater Space, and fo 
 by Degrees flower towards the Poles, as paffing 
 thro* a lefs Space in the fame Time. Therefore 
 fmce every Part of the Earth is moved thro' the 
 Space of it's Periphery (or 360 Degr.) in 24 
 Hours ; the Space of one Hour's Motion is found 
 by dividing 360 by 24, which gives in the Quo- 
 tient 15 Degr. and fo much doth any Place on the 
 Earth move (whether in the Equator or without it) 
 in an Hour. Alfo 15 Degr. in the Equator make 
 125 German Miles, therefore it revolves 15 fuch 
 Miles Cor one Degr J in 4 nan. and in one mm. 3^ 
 Miles. 
 
 BUT Places without the Equator, lying to- 
 wards either Pole, are in the fame Time revolved 
 the fame Number of Degrees : but thefe Degrees 
 are much lefs than thofe in the Equator ; fo that 
 the Celerity of Motion, or Progrefiion, is as the 
 Sines of the Arches by which thefe Places are 
 diftant from the Pole. Example. The Diftance 
 from the Equator (or Elevation of the Pole) of 
 Amsterdam is 52 degr. 23 mm. therefore the Di- 
 ftance from the Pole (or Complement of Latitude,) 
 is 37 degr. 37 mm. whofe Sine is 61037. Suppofe 
 another Place, under the Equinoctial, diftant from 
 the Pole 90 Degr. whofe Sine alfo is 100000, but 
 the Place under the Equinoctial moves 15 Miles 
 in 4 mm. and 225 an Hour. Therefore by the 
 Golden Rule, as 100000 : 61037 : : 15 : 9 Miles, 
 or fo is 225 to 137 Miles. So that Amsterdam is 
 carried every Hour 137 Miles, and in 4 min. 9 
 Miles, by this Motion. 
 
 THIS is more eafily found by the foregoing 
 Table , for by dividing 360 by 24 we find each 
 Place to more 15 Degr. of it's own Circle in an 
 Hour, and therefore i Degr. in 4 min. &V. con- 
 fulting the Table with the Latitude of the Place, 
 we find how many Miles it moves in 4 min. For 
 
 Ex ample $
 
 CHAP. 5. tfUniverfal Geography. 77 
 
 Example ; The Latitude of Stockholm is about 60 
 Degr. oppofite to which in the Table is 71 Miles. 
 Therefore Stockholm revolves fo many Miles in 4 
 win. and fuch is the firft Motion in divers Places. 
 
 THE Second Motion of the Earth, is it's Change 
 of Place ; whereby every Part of it moves the 
 fame Space with the fame Velocity. This Motion 
 is determined by the Diftance of the Earth from 
 the Sun, or the Semidiameter of the Orbit in which 
 it performs it's annual Revolution, moving in a 
 Day about a Degr. and in an Hour 2! mm. 
 
 A S to the third Motion of the Earth, becaufe 
 it is more difficult to conceive, we mall leave it 
 to Aftronomers, who have found it necefiary to 
 be fuppofed. Origanus moves a Doubt about the 
 fecond Motion ; and fuppofes the Earth to be on- 
 ly moved by the firft, but the Sun and fixed Stars 
 by the fecond: Tho' the above-cited Appearan- 
 ces, in the Motions of the Planets, fuificiently 
 confirm this Annual Motion (&). 
 
 (b) This imaginary third and the Rfgrefs of the Nodes ; 
 
 Motion of the Earth they were from which Thing never the left 
 
 ebliged to fuppofe, to account no Variation of Declination,prt~ 
 
 for the difputed Inequality of ferfy fo called, can arife. Wbi- 
 
 the Declination of the Ecliptic, ftoitt Aftron. Left. pag. 57. 
 
 which is now by moft Aftro- That there is fuch a Nutation 
 
 nomers thought to be always whereby the Axis of the Earth 
 
 the fame ; feeing there is no- doth twice incline towards the 
 
 thing which Jhould diflurb the Ecliptic, and twice return to- 
 
 ferpetual ParalleUfm of the it's former Pofition, fee in 
 
 artb, on which this Equality Newton's Prin. Phil, Nat. Soti 
 
 depends, except it Jhould be the iii. Prop, 21. 
 igfenfible Nutatien of tbt Axis t 
 
 CHAF,
 
 73 the Atylute Part SECT. IL 
 
 CHAP, VI, 
 
 Of the Situation, or Place, of the Earth, in Re* 
 fpetf of the Planets andjixed Stars. 
 
 TH E Situation of the Earth, in the Syftem of 
 the World, in refped to the reft of the Pla- 
 nets, hath fome Relation to the Account we gave 
 of the Earth's Motion, in the preceeding Chap- 
 ter. For it is the general Opinion of the Ptolemaic 
 Aftronomers and Philofophers, that the Earth, 
 being the Center of the World, is placed in the 
 middle of the Stars and Planets (a] : But the Co* 
 pernicans, with the antient Pythagoreans, place the 
 Sun in the Center of all the Stars, and make the 
 Earth a Planet performing an annual Revolution 
 about him, between Mars and Venus ; as is beft 
 underftood by a Diagram of the Syftem. Never- 
 thelefs they both agree in this, that the Earth may 
 be accounted the apparent Center of the diurnal 
 Motion, by which the Stars feem to be carried a- 
 bout in twenty four Hours. For both Aftronomy 
 and Geography require this Suppofition ; ib that 
 whether we adhere to the Ptolemaic or Copernican 
 Hypothecs, we do not detract from the Certainty 
 of general Aftronomy or Geography. Becaufe 
 the Difference of thefe Opinions conflfts only in 
 this -, that the Ptolemaici will have this Motion to 
 
 (a] Since the World, orUni- by the World here is only our 
 vcrfe, is infinite, the central Solar Syftem, in which Senfe 
 PJace of it cannot be determi- he inuft be taken in what fol- 
 fced: What our Author means low*. 
 
 be
 
 C H A P. 6. of Unherfal Geography. 79 
 
 be in the Stars themfelves, but the Pythagoreans 
 in the Earth ; the Stars in the mean time retting : 
 neither of which need be determined in Geography 
 or common Aflronomy. 
 
 A C C O R D I N G to the Ptolemaics the Situa- 
 tion of the Earth, in refpect of the Planets and 
 fixed Stars, is this ; The Earth in the Center , then 
 the Moon, Mercury, Venus, The Sun, Mars, Ju- 
 piter, Saturn, and the Fixed Stars. 
 
 ACCORDING to the Copernicans ; The 
 Sun is placed in the Center of the Syftem, as the 
 Heart and Focus of the World ; and next him is 
 the Orbit of Mercury, then that of Venus, the 
 Earth, with the Moon, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and 
 the Fixed Stars. 
 
 I F it be required how far diftant we are from 
 each of the Planets, we muft know that the Di- 
 fiance is not always the fame, but continually chang- 
 ing ; and therefore Aftronomers reckon three De- 
 grees of Diftance, viz. the leaft, greateft, and 
 mean or middle Diftance -, which laft of the Earth, 
 from the reft of the Planets, is as follows, accor* 
 ding to moft Aftronomers (). 
 
 1 
 
 The Earth is 
 diftant from 
 
 ' The Moon Co ' 
 Mercury no 
 
 ^of it's Semi. 
 > diameters. 
 
 T 
 
 I'he Sun 1150 
 Man about 5000 
 Jupiter about 1 1 ooo 
 b Saturn about- 1 8000 _ 
 
 NEVERTHELESS the Diftance of the 
 Earth from Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and the fixed 
 
 (V) Se$ Note (m) at the cad of this Chapter. 
 
 2 Stars
 
 8o ' the Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 Stars, is not fo perfectly determined, for want of 
 -Certainty in their Parallaxes. Alfo in the Coperni- 
 can Syftem the Diftance varieth, not only from 
 the Motion of the Planets ; but alfo from the Mo- 
 tion of the Earth itfelf. 
 
 THE Reafon for either Opinion, (viz. of the 
 Ptolemaic and Copernican] about the Situation of 
 the Earth, are much the fame with thofe we dif- 
 cufled in the preceeding Chapter about the Earth's 
 Motion. For this Difpute is of great Affinity 
 with the former. Becaufe, if the Sun hath an an- 
 nual Motion, then the Earth and not the Sun pof- 
 fefifes the middle Place : But if the Earth fo move, 
 the Sun and not the Earth will certainly be in the 
 Center. 
 
 THE following Arguments favour the Coper- 
 mcan Hypothecs. 
 
 1 . T H E Sun is not only the glorious Fountain 
 of Light, which like a clear mining Torch, illu- 
 minates the Earthy Moon, Venus , and, without 
 doubt, the reft of the Planets -, but is alfo the Focus 
 of Heat, and the Source of vital Spirits ; whereby 
 the whole Univerfe is fubfifted and nourifhed: 
 and therefore very probably poffefleth the Center 
 about which they all revolve. 
 
 2. I T is more likely that the Earth, with the 
 reft of the Planets, fhould revolve about the Sun, 
 when they receive Light and Heat from him j than 
 that the Sun mould move about the Earth, when 
 he receives nothing from it. 
 
 3. THERE are many Caufes why the Sun 
 fliould poffefs the middle Place, and the reft of 
 the Planets revolve round him, (efpecially if we 
 embrace the Hypothefis of Kepler concerning the 
 Motion of the Planets) the chief of which is, that 
 the Sun, being a vaft Body, is moved about it*s 
 Ms, and by a ftrpng [ftftory] Force exciteth tha 
 
 2 Earth
 
 CHAP. 6. of Univer/a/ Geography. 8 1 
 
 Earth and the reft of the Planets to a circular Mo- 
 tion (c). 
 
 4. THIS Rotation of the Sun about it's Axis 
 is proved from the Obfervations of the Spots upon 
 it's Surface by Galileo (d), Scbeiner, &c. and we 
 may reafonably prefume, it is owing to this com- 
 mon Caule that the reft of the Planets revolve j> 
 bout theirs ; but we cannot perceive a likelihood 
 of any Motion in this Luminary (e). 
 
 5- IF 
 
 (c] The fagacious Kepler 
 was the Founder of the New- 
 tonian Pbilofopby : it was he 
 that firft found out the true 
 Syftem of the World, and the 
 Laws which theceleftial Bodies 
 obferve in their Motions ; it was 
 he that determined the true 
 Path of the Earth, and the 
 reft of the PJanets about the 
 Sun, and difcovered the har- 
 monic Proportions and Concin- 
 nities of their Diftances and 
 Motions : and tho' he did not 
 demonftrate (and fhew a Reafon 
 for the neceffity of) fuch Laws 
 and Proportions ; yet he gave a 
 Hint, and laid a Foundation 
 for that Prince of Geometers 
 Sir IS A AC NEWTON, to 
 demonftrate an abfolute Necef- 
 fity of thefe Laws ; and that 
 without a total Subverfion of 
 the Laws of Nature, no other 
 Rule could take Place in the 
 Revolutions of the heavenly Bo- 
 dies. 
 
 (d] He was the firft that 
 allied a Telefcope to the Hea- 
 vens, and Ay iff means difco- 
 vered a great may new fur- 
 frijing Phenomena; as the 
 Means or Satellites of Jupiter, 
 and their Motions ; the various 
 
 VOL. I. 
 
 Phafes of Saturn ; the Increafe 
 and Decreafe of the Light of 
 Venus; the mountainous and 
 uncertain Surface of the Moon ; 
 the Spots of the Sun ; and the 
 Revolution of the Sun about 
 it's own Axis : all which were 
 firft difcovered and objerved by 
 this great Pbilofopher. Keill's 
 Aftron. Left. Pref. Pag. 1 1 . 
 
 (e) From the later Obfer- 
 vations of Aftronomers it is 
 manifeft to our Sight, that al- 
 fo every Heavenly Body we 
 have any good Views of, is 
 turned round fome principal 
 Point, and alfo it's own Axis, 
 viz. hath the like Annual 
 Revolutions, and Diurnal Mo- 
 tions as thofe are which we 
 afcribe to the Earth ; yea even 
 the more mafly Globes of Sa- 
 turn and Jupiter, which feem 
 not in their own Nature more 
 fitted for fuch Rotations. 
 Wherefore we may certainly 
 conclude, that it is as poffible, 
 and as probable, that this our 
 lefler Globe, mould perform 
 it's Revolutions according to the 
 fame Law which is obferved 
 in the reft of the Planets, 
 whereby the beautiful Order 
 and Hirmony of Motions is 
 G every
 
 82 Tfc Abfolute Part S E c T. II. 
 
 5. IF we fuppofe the Earth placed betwixt 
 Mirj and Venus, and alfo place the Sun in the Cen- 
 ter of the Syftem ; the Motion of each of the Pla- 
 nets will be exactly in Proportion to their feveral 
 Diftances from that Center : But this will not hold 
 in the Ptolemaic Hypothefis, as is manifeft by 
 comparing the Motion of the Sun, Venus, Mercury, 
 &c. (/). 
 
 6. T H E Celeflial Phenomena, mentioned in the 
 former Chapter, to prove the annual Motion of the 
 Earth, do likewife as effectually prove that this is 
 the right Place in which it ought to be moved, 
 viz. The Retrograde Motion, and feeming Immo- 
 bility of the Planets -, the admirable apparent Mo- 
 tion [and Pbafa] of Venus and Mercury, &c (g). 
 For fmce the annual Motion of the Earth is prefup- 
 poied in this Place, or in fome other very near it ; 
 
 :re pr 
 
 of Nai 
 
 the Frame of Nature. 
 
 (f) Sir Ifaac Neat tit's De- 
 monftration, That the Squares 
 of the Planets Revolutions 
 are as the Cubes of their Di- 
 jlances, every where takes Place, 
 if the Sun be fuppofed the 
 Center of the Planets about 
 him ; but does not hold at all 
 in Relation to the Earth; for 
 if the Moon revolve round the 
 Eirth in (27^ Days) a Perio- 
 dical Month, as it certainly does, 
 the Sun, as being at a greater 
 Diibnce, will take no lels than 
 54700 Years, according 1 to the 
 aforefaid Law, to make his Re- 
 volution about the Earth. But 
 fince this Law, is found to be 
 obferved not only in the pri- 
 mary Planets about the Sun, 
 but alfo in the Secondaries a- 
 bout Jupiter, Saturn, and the 
 Earth, it is an inconteftable Ar- 
 
 gument that the Sun is as much 
 the Center of the Earth and 
 Planets about him, as the Earth 
 is of the Moon. 
 
 (g) Thefe Obfervations, 
 which utterly overthrow the 
 Ptolemaic Hypothefis, are ow- 
 ing to later Aftronomers. For 
 they, by their Glafles, have 
 found out that the fpherical Fi- 
 gure of Venus and Mercury, 
 feen from the Earth, will be 
 altered, and have the fame va- 
 riety of Phafes as the Moon 
 hath, viz. will appear opake, 
 horned, bifetled, gibbous, and 
 full, at proper Diltances from 
 the Sun, as explained upon 
 the Copernican Hypothefis ; 
 which certainly eftablifhes and 
 confirms that Order and Situa- 
 tion, namely that Venus and 
 Mercury revolve about the Sun 
 in Orbits that are included 
 within the Earth's Orbit. 
 
 this
 
 C H A p. 6. of Umverfal Geography. 8 j 
 
 this Argument, in my Opinion, is the beft to de- 
 fend it by i fmce this fituation of the Earth cannot 
 be proved immediately from it's diurnal Motion '. 
 Becaufe it might poffefs the Center of the Univerfe, 
 and have a diurnal Motion, tho* it wanted the an-- 
 nual ; as Origanus fuppofed. 
 
 7. B Y this Hypctbefis likewife, the Variation of 
 the Diftances of the Planets from the Earth is ac- 
 counted for. 
 
 THE Ptolemaics, on the other hand, oppofe 
 the Pythagorean Opinion, and endeavour to prove 
 that the True Place of the Earth is in the Center 
 of the World, by the following Arguments, i, 
 That heavy Bodies are all naturally carried towards 
 the Center ^ but that the Earth is more ponderous 
 than the reft, therefore it ought to refide in the 
 Center (/&). 2. Heavy Bodies would recede from 
 the Earth towards the Center of the World, if 
 the Earth itfelf was not in the Center. 3. The 
 Center is the bafeft Place, and the Earth the igno- 
 blefl Part of the Creation ; therefore it ought to be 
 placed in the Center. 4. If the Earth was placed 
 out of the Center of the World, and was not the 
 Center of the Stars and Planets Motion, then would 
 the Stars and Conftellations at fome Seaibns of the 
 Year appear greater than at others (z). 5. The 
 Medium of the Heavens could not always be percep- 
 tible, nor would Taurus rife when Scorpio fets. 6. 
 Neither would there be Equinoxes. 7. Nor would 
 the Moon fet, nor be eclipfed when the Sun was 
 rifing. 8. -Neither could an equal Number of 
 
 () This Aflertion is falfe : far greater in the middle of 
 
 See the Note at the end of this their RegrefTes than in the 
 
 Chapter. middle of their Progress, be- 
 
 (;') Tho' this does not hold caofe the Earth, in their Re- 
 in the fixed Stars, becaufe of grefles, comes nearer thefe 
 their immenfe Diftance ; yet Planets an entire Diameier of 
 all the luperior Planets feem the Orbit Magnus. 
 
 G 2 Miles
 
 84 *fbe Abfolute Tart SECT. II. 
 
 Miles on the Earth anfwer to each Degree in the 
 Heavens. 
 
 THE Copernicans eafily refute thefe Arguments 
 of the Ariflotelians. For the firft and fecond is re- 
 jected, becaufe the Motion of heavy Bodies is not 
 towards the Center of the Univerfe, but towards 
 the Earth, a homogeneous Body ; as is proved 
 from the Parts of the Sun and Moon, and of the 
 Loadftone. In the third both the AfTumptions are 
 falfc , For the Center is an Honourable Place , and 
 the Earth is no ways dilhonourable. The reft of 
 the Arguments are eafily difproved by a Defcrip- 
 tion of the Syftem , it being firft prefuppofed 
 that tho* the Earth's Diftance from the Sun be 
 very great, yet if compared with the Diftance of 
 the fixed Stars, it is fo fmall, that it hath no Pro- 
 portion to it ; which feems to fome a great Poftu- 
 latum in the Copernican 4/lronomy (k}. 
 
 (k) To find this Variation Skill, determine any fenfible 
 of the Diftance of the fixed Parallax at all (only they dif- 
 Stars (arifing from the annual covered a feeming new Motion 
 Motion of the Earth, and cal- of the fixed Stars, which (ai- 
 led their annual Parallax) hath lowing the progreffive Motr- 
 been often attempted by the on of Light) does in fome Mea- 
 Copernican Aflronomers i be- fure demonftrate the annual 
 caufe that the annual Motion Motion of the Earth^. There 
 of the Earth would thereby be appearing therefore, after all, 
 not only made probable, but no fenfible Parallax in the fix- 
 certainly demonstrated. This, ed Stars, the Anti-Copertiicans 
 I fay, was attempted without have ftill room, on that Ac- 
 Succefs, 'till Dr Hook and count, to objeft againft the Mo- 
 Mr Flamfteed, by new inven- tion of the Earth. And the 
 ted accurate Inftruments, feem- Copernicans are ftifl obliged to 
 ed to have found out this an- hold, that the Orbis Magnus 
 Bual Parallax to be at ieaft as is but as a Point in Compari- 
 much again as the double of fon of the Diftance of the near- 
 the Sun T s diurnal Parallax, viz. eft fixed Stars; which is cer- 
 47 Seconds. But Mr Mofy- tainly (as our Author obferveth) 
 r.eaux and Mr Bradley, by a great Blot in the Copernican 
 their late accurate Obfervati- Aftronomy, left to be wiped 
 ens, coulti not, with all their out by future Ages. 
 
 i IT
 
 C H A P. 6. of Univerfal Geography. 8 5 
 
 IT belongs to this Place to explain this Theorem ; 
 that the Diftances of the fixed Stars, and fuperior 
 Planets, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn, are fo great 
 from the Earth that it's Semidiameter hath no 
 fenfible Proportion thereto ; tho' it is not fo in 
 the Diftance of the Moon, Mercury, and fonus : 
 And if there is any Proportion between the Earth's 
 Semidiameter, and the Sun's Diftance, it is fo very 
 fmall that we are ftill not able fenfibly to difcover 
 it (/). 
 
 THIS Theorem is thus demonftrated. i . The 
 fixed Stars, and fuperior Planets appear to rife 
 the very fame Moment in our fenfible Horizon, 
 that they are found by Calculation to do, if we 
 were at the Center of the Earth ; therefore our 
 Diftances from the Center Cor the Earth's Semidia- 
 meter) hath no Proportion to the Diftance of the 
 fixed Stars. 2. If we take the Meridian (or other) 
 Altitude of a fuperior Planet, or any of the fixed 
 Stars, with an Inftrument, we find it the fame as 
 if we had obferved it at the Center of the Earth : 
 Therefore the Semidiameter of the Earth is nothing 
 in refpecl of their Diftance. 3 . If there were any 
 fuch Proportion, the Diftance of two fixed Stars 
 would appear lefs near the Horizon than at the Me- 
 ridian, where they are nearer the Earth by almoft 
 it's Semidiameter. 
 
 THIS alfo is true in the Sun, whofe apparent 
 Diameter is not perceived greater in the Meridian 
 than in the Horizon. 
 
 &) 
 
 rallax 
 
 The quantity of the Pa- Diftances of the Planets from 
 
 of Mars is determined, the Sun, we have, in effedl, ac- 
 
 by M. Caflini'i and Flamjieed^ quired the Parallax of the Sun 
 
 Obfervations, to have been fcarce itfelf, and of the reft of the Pla- 
 
 30 Sec. when in Oppofition to nets, and alfo their Diameters 
 
 the Sun, and alfo in his Peri- and Diftances from the Sun 
 
 helion ; from whence having and the Earth j of which fee the 
 
 the true Proportions of the Note at the end of this Chapter. 
 
 G3 BUT
 
 $6 *fbe AbjoluU Part S E c T. II. 
 
 BUT -the apparent Diameter of the Moon is 
 found to be Ibmewhat enlarged in the Meridian -, 
 becaufe Ihe is there nearer us, than when fhe is in 
 the Horizon, almoft a whole Semjdiameter of the 
 Earth (). CHAP. 
 
 (n) Here follow the Di- ded Means for determining the 
 
 fiances, Periods, Diameters, fame, as Mr Wbifton has cal- 
 
 Gravities, and Quantities of culated them from the lateft 
 
 Matter, in thofe of the Cele- Obfervations, by Sir IJaac New- 
 
 Jtial Bodies which have affor- tan's Rules. 
 
 Mercury 
 
 Venus 
 
 The Earth 
 
 Mars 
 
 Jupiter 
 
 Saturn 
 
 Mercury 
 
 Venus 
 
 The Earth 
 
 Mars 
 
 Jupiter 
 
 Saturn 
 
 Mercury 
 Venus 
 The Earth 
 Mars 
 Jupiter 
 Saturn 
 The Sun 
 The Moon 
 
 n:;3 iris 1-^ , 
 
 The Moon 
 The Earth 
 The Sun 
 Jupiter 
 Saturn 
 
 i, Diftances, 
 
 32.000000 
 59.000.000 
 
 diftant from the Sun, Englijh ) 81.000.000 
 Miles, each 5280 Feet 
 
 2* Periods, 
 
 revolves about the Sun 
 in the Space of 
 
 -'-.f A 
 
 H. M. 
 
 87. 23. i 6. 
 
 224. 17. 49 . 
 
 365. 6. 9. 
 
 686. 23. 27. 
 
 4332- 12. 20. 
 
 10759. 7- 36- 
 
 3. Bwmeiers. 
 
 rT.Li?, ;rj r-i ' :~ ,- : r { L E ] 
 contains 'in Diameter, EngUJb 
 
 4240 
 
 7906 
 
 7935 
 
 4444 
 
 81155 
 
 67870 
 
 763460 
 
 
 contains in Denfuy, Parts, 
 
 5. Gravitia. 
 
 f
 
 C H A P. 7. of Univerfal Geography. 8 7 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Sub/lance and Conjiitution of the Earth. 
 
 IN the preceding Chapters we have confidered 
 Four general Properties of the Earth, without 
 Regard to it's Subftance or Conftitution : it will 
 therefore be here proper to confider what kind of 
 Body the Earth is, that we may not be ignorant 
 how it's Parts cleave or are cemented together : 
 which tho' it feem more to belong to Pbyftcs ; ne- 
 verthelefs becaufe it renders the Knowledge of the 
 Earth more perfect, we mail here briefly difcufs 
 it ; leaving the accurate Theory thereof to Natu- 
 ral Pbilofophers. 
 
 The Moon 
 The Earth 
 The Sun 
 
 Jupiter 
 Saturn 
 
 5. Gravities. 
 .-:, evSi'oc! ..^U> { ? 
 
 contains in Gravity, or quan- 
 tity of Matter, Parts, 
 
 ^229600 ' 
 208 72 
 97.328 
 
 6. The Weight of Bo- 
 dies on the Surface' 
 of the 
 
 7. The Time of the' 
 Rotation about it's , 
 Axis of the - - - 
 
 . to,>;l : ' 
 
 
 ' Sun is 24 Parts 
 
 kEarth is. i 
 
 Jupiter is i .99 
 
 /Saturn is .... j.y 
 
 .Moon is---------- 0515 
 
 Sun is 25 Days 
 
 Earth is - i Day 
 
 Moon is- 29 Days 
 
 Jupiter is 10 Hours 
 
 Mars is 24.;|Hours 
 
 Venus is '- - - - 23 Hours 
 
 o: 
 
 G 4 
 
 P R 0-
 
 88 The Abfolutt Part SECT. II, 
 
 PROPOSITION L 
 
 70 fljew of what fimpk or fimilar Bodies the Earth 
 may confift, or be compounded. 
 
 T H E R E are feveral Opinions of Philofophers 
 concerning this matter. The Peripatetics reckon 
 four Elements in the Earth and the whole Sublu- 
 nary World, fufficiently known to every on, viz, 
 Fire, Air, Water, and Earth. Many of the An- 
 cients, as Democritus, Leucippus, &c. were of Opi- 
 nion, that the whole World confuted of very 
 fmall folid Particles, which only differed in Mag- 
 nitude and Shape. Which Opinion is followed 
 by feveral of the Moderns ; and fome time fmce, 
 des Cartes endeavoured to account for all the 
 Phenomena of Nature upon this Hypothefis. 
 
 THE Chymifts imagine that there are three 
 Principles of Nature, viz. Salt, Sulphur, and Mer- 
 cury, to which fome reafonably add Caput Mortu- 
 um. But there feems to me upon a thorough 
 Confideration of the Matter (to drop all ambiguous 
 terms and quibbles), to be frvefjmple Bodies which 
 are the firft Elements or Principles of all things, 
 viz. Water, Oil or Sulphur, Salt, Earth, and a 
 fixed Spirit ; which fome call an Acid, and is per^ 
 haps like the Mercury of the Chymifts (a}. For 
 
 it 
 
 (a) The illuftrious Sir Jfe, 
 
 'aat 
 
 Newton thus explains the true 
 Principles of Nature. " It feems 
 probable to me (fays be] that 
 God in the Beginning form- 
 ed Matter in folid, mafiy, 
 hard, impenetrable, move- 
 able Particles, of fuch Sizes 
 and Figures, and with fuch 
 other Properties, and in fuch 
 
 Proportion to Space, as moft 
 conduced to the End for 
 which he formed them ; and 
 that thefe primitive Particles 
 being folid, are incompara- 
 bly harder than any porous 
 Bodies compounded of them ; 
 even fo very hard as never 
 $o wear or break in Pieces : 
 no ordinary Power being able 
 " to
 
 C H A P. 7- f Univerfal Geography. 89 
 
 it is plain that all Bodies, and Parts of the Earth, 
 may be refolved into thefe five elementary Sub* 
 ftances. Neverthelefs I do not fuppofe them to 
 differ fo much in their particular Efiences, as in 
 the Variety of their feveral Shapes and Magni- 
 tudes. 
 
 O F thefe Bodies, mixed after different manners, 
 is the whole Earth compofed j from which pro- 
 ceeds fuch a furprifing Variety in the Nature of 
 Bodies , tho* they are apparently fimilar (). But 
 fince the more accurate Explication of thefe things 
 belongs to Phyfics, we mail fay no more to them 
 here j but handle them at large in another Place. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 ^fhe Earth is divided into dry and moift Parts, or in- 
 to Land and Water ; to which feme add the At- 
 mofpbere. 
 
 THIS is the common Divifion of Geography. 
 But then Water is taken, in a large Senfe, for 
 all forts of Liquids and Fluids ; and Land for the 
 whole dry and confiftent Parts of the Globe : whilft 
 
 the Beginning. And there- 
 fore, that Nature may be 
 lafting, the Changes of cor- 
 poreal things are to be placed 
 only in the various Separa- 
 tions, and new Aflbciations 
 and Motions of thefe perma- 
 nent Particles ; compound Bo- 
 dies being apt to break, not 
 in the midft of folid Particles, 
 but where thofe Particles are 
 laid together, and only touch 
 in a few Points.* Newton's 
 
 Optics, Pag. 375. 
 
 (b) See the Notes below on 
 
 Prof. 6 and 7 of this Chap. 
 
 both 
 
 ' to divide what God himfelf 
 ' rnade one in the firft Crea- 
 ' tion. While the Particles 
 ' continue entire, they may 
 
 * compofe Bodies of one and 
 
 * the fame Nature and Texture 
 
 * in all Ages : But mould they 
 ' wear away, or break in Pie- 
 ' ces, the Nature of Things 
 ' depending on them would be 
 ' phanged. Water and Earth 
 ' compofed of old worn Parti- 
 ' cles, and Fragments of Parti- 
 ' cles, would not be of the fame 
 
 * Nature and Texture now, 
 
 * with Water and Earth com- 
 ? pofed of entire Particles ia
 
 go ' fbe Abfolute Part .S E c T. II. 
 
 both comprehend various Bodies of Different Na- 
 tures. To the Earth belong, i . Sand, Gravel, 
 Clay, and Mineral Earth ; alfo Chalk, Minium, 
 Oker, Terra Sigillata, Earth of Samos, Bole-Arme- 
 xiac, and feveral other Kinds of Earth. 2. Stones 
 of various forts. 3. Metals; as Gold, Silver, Cop- 
 per, .jTin, Lead, Mercury or Quick-filver, &c. 
 4. Sulphur, Salt, Nitre, All-urn, Bitumen, Vi- 
 triol, Antimony, 6JV. 5. Herbs, Animals, &c. 
 
 TO the Water belong, i . The Ocean and Seas, 
 2. Rivers and frefh Waters. 3 . Lakes and Marmes. 
 4. MineralWaters, as Hot Baths^ Spaw Waters^ &c. 
 
 THE Atmofphere is a fubtile Body which fur- 
 rounds the whole Globe of the Earth, and in- 
 cludes the Air, Clouds, and Rain, &c. So that 
 the Earth is beft divided into thefe three Parts. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 70 explain bow the Earth and Water cleave one to 
 another ; and conftitute the Terraqueous Globe. 
 
 THE Earth, that is the dry Part of the Globe, 
 is not terminated by an even and fmooth Surface ; 
 but is here and there hollowed into Cavities, and 
 in other Places elevated into Protuberances. In the 
 Cavities found all over the Earth is contained the 
 Ocean or Sea ; fo that this Part of the fuperficies 
 of the Earth is covered with Water, and the other 
 Part is raifed and appeareth above the Waters. 
 Thefe Cavities are not deprefled into an equal hol- 
 lo wnefs, but are in fome Places rugged and rocky ; 
 and in others funk down into Gulphs and Whirl- 
 Pools. Alfo thofe Places of the Earth which are 
 raifed above the Waters, have in the middle of 
 them, as it were, certain Navels or Eminences ; 
 and fome Parts are either raifed or deprefled more 
 than others. Hence the Water /unrounding the 
 
 whole
 
 C H A p. 7. of Univerfa! Geography. ty i 
 
 whole Globe is hindred from covering the higher 
 Parts which appear above the Surface of the Ocean ; 
 and are called I/lands : whereof fome are great and 
 others are fmall. 
 
 * BESIDES that continued Cavity or Chanel in 
 the Sarface of the Earth, there are alfo within it's 
 Bowels innumerable Openings, Recefies, Fiffures, 
 Chafms, Mazes, Swallows, Water Pafiages, and 
 vaft Receptacles ; fome of which arc filled with 
 fait Water, viz. fuch as are joined by iubterra- 
 neous PafTages to the Main Ocean ; others with 
 frefh Water, Rivers and Brooks , in fome alfo 
 are fulphureous Vapours, and fmoaking Subftan- 
 ces. So that Seneca feems to be in the right when 
 he fays, That he trufts too much to his Sight, who does 
 not believe that there is a large Quantity of Sea in the 
 hidden Receffes of the Earth. Nor do I perceive 
 why there mould not be much Sea Water receiv- 
 ed by thefe fubterraneous Swallows ; and formed 
 into Bays by Banks or Bounds. And from the fol- 
 lowing Observations we cannot doubt, that there 
 are a great many Cavities in the Bowels of the Earth. 
 For feveral fubterraneous Rivers are found in Places 
 where the Earth is dug to a considerable Depth ; 
 as is common in Mines. 2 . The Depth of the Sea 
 is in fome Places unfathomable. 3. There are in 
 feveral Places, Caverns difcovered nea^ the Sur- 
 face of the Earth. Thus in the Weft part of the 
 Ifland of Hifpaniola^ there is a Mountain of a vaft 
 Height all hollowed within, into feveral Dens and 
 Openings, in which Rivers rum precipitantly with 
 fuch a violent Torrent and Noife of Waters, that 
 they may be heard at five Miles diftance. 4. Se- 
 veral Whirl-Pools are found in the Sea, and called 
 in the Dutch Language Maelflroom. 5. Earth- 
 quakes alfo mew that there are fuch fubterraneous 
 Caverns. 6. Several Rivers hide themfelves under 
 the Earth, as the Niger., Tigris , &c. 7. Brackifh 
 
 Fountains
 
 $2 ' The Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 Fountains are obferved in feveral Places, moft of 
 which certainly flow from the Sea. 8 . In many 
 Places the Ground trembles when People walk up- 
 on it, as at the Abby of S. Omer in Flanders -, and 
 in the Province of Brabant upon Peel Marijh. 
 
 COROLLARY 
 
 Hence it is evident, that the Opinion of thofe 
 old Philofophers, who maintained that die Earth 
 at firft floated upon the Waters, is falfe ; for by 
 this Means there would be no Chanels in the Sea, 
 but it would be every where of an immenfe Depth. 
 Some indeed of the Antients (efpecially Democrilus} 
 are faid to have been of the following Opinion, 
 viz. that the Waters were formerly mixed with the 
 Earth ; and that the whole Mafs being perfectly 
 fpherical, was foft and of an indifferent Confiftence 
 betwixt wet and dry : But afterwards when the 
 Particles of Water were gathered into one Body, 
 according to the natural Property obferved in 
 Water, the earthly Particles, being feparated from 
 the watery, came together and were curdled into 
 Earth and wrought into Chanels by the Water in 
 feveral Places. The fame Hypothefis is embra- 
 ced by many modern Chriftian Philofophers, who 
 think thefe Words of Mofes (or rather of GOD 
 delivered to us by Mofes} Let the Waters be gather- 
 ed together into one Place, and let the dry Land appear, 
 ought to be thus underftood. But the Fathers of 
 the Primitive Church thought otherwife about this ; 
 for they judged that the Waters were feparated 
 from the earthy Particles [before the Creation] and 
 covered the Face of the whole Earth j and fo oc- 
 cupied their natural Place ; and then miraculoufly 
 receded, and uncovered the Earth by the Power 
 of thefe words of Jehovah ; and that to this day 
 they are hindred and reftrained, by the efpecial 
 
 Providence
 
 C H AP. 7. oflfniverfal Geography. 93 
 
 Providence of God, from flowing back and cover- 
 ing the Face of the whole Earth as before ; fo that 
 the prefent Constitution of the Earth and Sea is by 
 them accounted a perfect Miracle. But that there 
 is no great Occafion to think it fo much a Miracle 
 we mail prove in Chap. xiii. where we mail mew, 
 that the Inundation of the Waters, or Ocean, up- 
 on the adjacent Land, is hindred by the Altitude 
 and Confidence of the Earth, which if removed by 
 fome certain Caufes, whereof there are many, the 
 Ocean will foon overflow the dry Land and cover 
 it : whence there is manifeftly, no need of a Mi- 
 racle in the matter. Neither does the beforemen- 
 tioned Opinion of the Antients want it's Defects ; 
 for if the Earth and Water had been once mixed 
 into one Mafs , why did not the earthly Particles 
 rather fubfide, and the Waters, being of lefs Gra- 
 vity, cover the whole Earth ? This they arc for- 
 ced to afcribe to a fortuitous Motion and Conjun- 
 ction of the watery and earthly Particles. Thefe 
 things are faid, by the way, to gratifie fome that 
 earneftly enquire into fuch matters , tho* they do 
 not fo properly belong to Geography ; which hath 
 no Regard to the Opinions of the Ancients, nor 
 need fly to Miracles in explaining the Properties 
 of the Earth (r). 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The Superficies of the Earth Is continued, but not that 
 of the Waters. 
 
 THE Superficies of that Part of the Earth 
 which is raifed above the Waters, is continued to 
 the Superficies of the Chanel of the Sea, and that 
 again to other elevated Parts of the Earth* Alfo 
 
 ((} Sec Dr Woodward 'sE/ay towards a Nat, Hijt. of the Earth, Sec, 
 
 the
 
 94 ?be Abfilute Tart SECT. IL 
 
 the Ocean, Bays and Rivers have one continued 
 Superficies; but all Waters have not: for there 
 are fome Lakes whofe Superficies are not joined 
 with that of the Ocean, as the Lake Parime, 
 and the Cafyian Sea, &V. 
 
 PROPOSITION V, 
 
 fbe Conftitution of the Eartb^ far within the Sur- 
 face (which is our Habitation) towards the Center, 
 is uncertain. 
 
 SOME think that Water taketh up the loweft 
 Place about the Center ; but it is more likely that 
 dry Earth fhould occupy that Place (d}. Gilbert 
 
 was 
 
 (d) The learned and faga- 
 cious Dr Halle-), to account 
 for the Changes of the Needle's 
 Variation, hath fhewed a Pof- 
 iibility that the exterior Parts 
 of the terraqueous Globe are 
 formed inwardly like the con- 
 cave Surface of a petrified Shell; 
 and the internal as a Nucleus, 
 or inner Globe, included with- 
 in ours, with a fluid Medium 
 between, which moves along 
 with it, as having the fame 
 common Cehter, without fenfi- 
 bly approaching one Side or ano- 
 ther, like the Globe of Saturn 
 environed with his Ring. ' And 
 tho' (fays be) thefe included 
 Globes can be of very little 
 Service to the Inhabitants 
 of this outward World, nor 
 can the Sun be of Service to 
 them : yet fince we . fee all 
 Parts of the Creation abound 
 with animate Beings, why 
 ihooid we think it ftrange 
 
 that the prodigious Mafs of 
 Matter, whereof this Globe 
 doth confift, fhould be capable 
 of fome other Improvements, 
 than barely to ferve to fup- 
 port it's Surface ? Why may 
 we not rather fuppofe, that 
 the exceeding fmall quantity 
 of Matter in refpedl of the 
 fluid Either, is fo difpofed 
 by the Almighty Wifdom, as 
 to yield as great a Surface 
 for the Ule of living Crea- 
 tures, as can confift with the 
 Conveniency and Security of 
 the whole. 
 
 ' And tho' without Light 
 there can be no living, yet 
 there are many Ways of pro- 
 ducing Light which we are 
 wholly ignorant of: The Me- 
 dium itfelf may be always lu> 
 minous after the Manner of 
 our Igna Fa tut: The con- 
 cave Arches may in feveral 
 Place* Ihine with fuch a Sub- 
 ' fiance
 
 C H A P. 7. of Univerfal Geography. 9 
 
 was of Opinion that the Body of the Earth with- 
 in is nothing but a very hard Loadftone ; and that 
 thefe exteriour Parts towards the Surface, which 
 are penetrated into by digging, and on which 
 Herbs grow and we live, are but as it were the 
 Bark and Cruft of the Earth, and the Seat of 
 perpetual Generation and Corruption. The Opi- 
 nion of des Cartes is not much different from this ; 
 for he believed there were three Strata in the Bo- 
 dy of the Earth of divers Confidences. The firft 
 and innermoft porTeffing the Center, the fecond 
 of a denfe and opaque Nature, confifting of the 
 minuteft Particles ; the third (being replete with 
 Men and Animals) he fuppofes to be compoun- 
 ded of Particles not flicking fo clofe together. 
 
 NEVERTHELESS, for want of Obfer- 
 vation, we cannot affirm any Thing for Certainty 
 in this Matter ; and tho' it be true that in feveral 
 fubterrarieous Places, there is a glowing Heat, 
 and that Smoke and fulphureous Fumes are ex- 
 haled from feveral hot Baths : and alfo tho* Thurn-* 
 heufsr affirms, that he found by Experience that 
 the nearer they digged to the Center of the Earth, 
 there was the lefs Water in Mines , yet we are 
 ftill in a Doubt, and cannot pofitively depend 
 upon his particular Obfervation. 
 
 fiance as invefls the Surface ' been ; and a Notion not fo 
 
 of the Sun; nor can we, with- ' much as ftarted in the World 
 
 out a Boldnefs unbecoming a ' before.' 
 
 Philofopher, adventure to af- Thus far Dr Halley. Hovr 
 
 fert the Impoflibility of pe- he accounts for the Variation of 
 
 culiar Luminaries below, of the Needle from this Hypothe- 
 
 which we have no fort of fis; See the Notes upon Cbap. 
 
 Idea. 38. Prop. 4. of the Comparative 
 
 Thus have I fliewn a Pof- P-rt, or Plilof, Tranfatt. N 
 
 fibility of a much more ample 148. Pag. 208. and N 195.., 
 
 Creation than has hitherto Pag. 564. 
 
 PRO-
 
 96 ' Vhe Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 PROPOSITION VL 
 
 fbe Confidence or Coherence of the Particles of the 
 Earth is from Salt. 
 
 THE artificial Separation of the Particles of 
 Bodies demonftrate, that in the Competition of the 
 whole there is a certain kind of Salt which is more 
 abundant in harder Bodies, as in Metals, Stones, 
 &V. (a few oily Subftances only excepted) (*). 
 And that all folid Bodies are concreted by Salt, 
 is manifeft from the artificial Petrefaftion of thofe 
 that are foft, to any Degree of Hardnefs by it. 
 
 (e] Tho' moft forts of Bo- 
 dies are replete with faline and 
 vitriolic Particles, fuch as may 
 in fome Means contribute to 
 their Coagulation and Confo- 
 lidation; yet the primary and 
 naturally indivifible Corpufcles, 
 of which the Particles of all 
 Bodies are compofed, are not 
 connected by fait or hooked 
 Atoms, as fome imagine ; nor 
 glewed together by Reft, which 
 is an occult Quality or nothing, 
 nor ftick together by confpiring 
 Motions, but rather cohere and 
 are united by mutual Attraction. 
 So that the fmalkfl Particles 
 of Matter may cohere by the 
 jftrongeft\Attratlions, and compofe 
 digger Particles of weaker Vir- 
 tue ; and many of tbefe may co- 
 bere t and compofe bigger P'ar ti- 
 tles tohofe Virtue is Jlill wea- 
 ker. See Newton's Optics, Pag. 
 
 37- 
 
 Hence Particles of Bodies 
 which touch one anotherin large 
 Superficies's, by a ftrong mutual 
 
 Attraction of their Parts, corfl- 
 pofe a Body very bard', and if 
 thefe Particles are not fo ftrong- 
 ly attracted or entangled with 
 each other, the Body will be 
 brittle ; if they touch one ano- 
 ther in lefs Superficies, the 
 Body is not fo hard, but yet 
 may be more folid ; if they only 
 approach each other, without 
 flipping one under another, the 
 Body is Elaftic, and fprings to 
 it's former Figure; if they flip 
 under each other the Body is 
 foft, and eafily yields to the 
 Stroke of the Hammer ; if they 
 fcarce touch one another the 
 Body is crumbling, or fuch whofe 
 Parts may be eafily feparated ; 
 if they are fmall, round, flip- 
 pery, and eafily agitated by 
 Heat, the Body is fluid ; if 
 thefe Particles are of an unequal 
 Superficies, and hooked or en- 
 tangled one with another, then 
 is the ^Bo^y flexile or pliant, 
 &c. See Dr Clarke's Notes up- 
 on Robaulfs Pbyjicf. 
 
 So
 
 CHAP. 7. of Univerja I Geography. 97 
 
 So that if Salt be feparated from Bodies, their 
 Particles will no longer be cemented ; but they 
 will become Powder, which cannot be brought 
 to a Coherence without the Admixtion of ialine 
 Particles. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 Various kinds of Bodies are feveral Ways mixed to- 
 gether in the Globe of the Earth. 
 
 I N Mines there are found Particles of Gold, 
 Silver, Lead, &c> not gathered into a Mafs and 
 feparate from others , but fometimes mixed a r 
 mong themfelves, and fometimes with ufelefs 
 Earth, in fuch very imall Particles that the beft 
 Judges in Metals cannot at firft Sight difcover 
 what fort of Mineral is contained in fome Me- 
 talline Earths (/). Alfo in the Fields, Sand is 
 
 fometimes 
 
 (f) The indefatigable Dr 
 Woodward, in his Ejfay towards 
 a Natural Hi/tory of the Earth, 
 reafonably fuppofes all thele 
 Commixtures of the Particles 
 of Bodies in the Strata of the 
 Earth, to proceed from thofe 
 ftrange Alterations that were 
 every where made in the Ter- 
 reftrial Globe at the Deluge, 
 when the whole Globe was 
 difiblved, and the Particles of 
 Stone, Marble, and all other 
 folid Foflils diflevered, taken 
 up into the Water, and there 
 fuftained together with Sea 
 Shells, and other animal and 
 vegetable Bodies: that at length 
 all thefe fubfided from the Wa- 
 ter, according to the Nature of 
 their Gravity; the heavieft Bo- 
 dies firft, then thofe that were 
 
 VOL. I. 
 
 lighter ; but all that had the 
 fame Degree of Gravity fettled 
 down at the fame Time ; fo 
 that thofe Shells, or other Bo- 
 dies, that were of the fame fpe- 
 cific Gravity with Clay, Chalk, 
 Sand, &c. funk down together 
 with them, and fo were in- 
 cloled in the Strata of Chalk, 
 Clay, Sand, or Stone, which 
 their Particles formed; (hat at 
 the general Subfidence, Metals 
 and Minerals, as well thofe 
 which were amafled into Lumps 
 as thofe which continued afun- 
 der, and in fingle Corpufcles, 
 funk down to the Bottom along 
 with Sand, Coal, Marble, &(. 
 .and fo were lodged widi the 
 Strata which the Sand, &(. 
 conllituted. That all the metal- 
 lic and mineral Matter which 
 H is
 
 ^8 ' fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. II. 
 
 fometimes mixed with Clay or Lime, and fome- 
 times with Salt, &V. Not long fmce at Amfterdam^ 
 -when the Earth was digged up to the Depth of 
 two hundred thirty two Feet to make a Well, 
 thefe kinds of Earth were gradually difcovered. 
 Firft feven Foot of Garden Mould, then nine 
 Foot of black combuftible Earth, which is called 
 Peat, (not like that they properly call Dutch Turf) 
 then nine Foot of foft Clay, then eight Foot of 
 Sand and four of common Earth, then ten Foot of 
 Clay, and again four of common Earth, next that 
 ten Foot of fuch Sand as the Foundations of the 
 Houfes in Arnfterdam are laid in, then two Foot 
 of Clay, next four Foot of white Gravel, then 
 five Foot of dry Earth, and one Foot of Mud, 
 again fourteen Foot of Sand, then three Foot of 
 fandy Clay or Mire, afterwards five Foot of Sand 
 mixed with Clay, and next four Foot of Sand 
 mixed with little Sea-Shells, then there was a 
 Stratum of Clay one hundred and two Foot deep, 
 and laftly thirty one Foot of Gravel, where the 
 Shaft was fmifhed. 
 (>' f ati'ii 
 
 is now found in the Fiflures, ted Strata, Tome elevated and 
 or perpendicular Intervals of the others deprefled, by which 
 Strata, was originally lodged in Means all the Inequalities of 
 fingle Particles among the Sand, the Globe, Fiffures, Grotto's, 
 &V. having been detached and Mountains, Vallies, Iflands, 
 drawn thence by little and little the Chanel of the Sea, and all 
 by the Water, which continual- others, were formed, and chat 
 ly pervades the Strata ; and the whole Terraqueous Globe 
 that Trees, which are found in (with all it's Materials) was, at 
 great Plenty in Moffes, Fens, the Time of the Deluge, put 
 or Bogs,were depofited thereby nearly into the Condition that 
 the Deluge ; fo that the prefent we at this Day behold it. See 
 .Earth was formed out of this Woodward's EJay, or Pbilo- 
 rjromifcuous mixed Mafs of fopbital franfaftions N 217. 
 Sand, Earth, Shells, and Me- p. ijr. 
 tills, and of broken and difloca- 
 
 PRO-
 
 CHAP. 7< vfUmverfal Geography < yg 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 *he Cavities of the Earth ^ and the external .and in- 
 ternal Difpofetion, or Situation of it's PartSj are 
 not perpetually the fame, but different at different 
 
 THE Sea not only makes many Devailations 
 and Changes in the Parts of the Earth, by fome 
 of it's Pallages being Hopped, and others more 
 opened ; but alfb that fpirituous and fulphureous. 
 Sabftance which here and there lies hid in the in- 
 terior Parts, when it begins to heat and evapo- 
 rate, impetuoufly makes the exterior Parts of the 
 Earth, raifing them up, as is ufual in Earthquakes. 
 And it is probable the like Eruditions may of- 
 ten happen in the more interior Parts of die Earth j 
 which for the moft part we have no Notion of. 
 
 W E mall treat of the mutual Changes of Land 
 and Water in Chapter 1 8 . hereafter, 
 
 The Terraqueous Globe is divided inter 
 
 Earth whofe J" covered with Water, or raifed a- 
 Surface is \ bove the Waters ; and into Water '. 
 
 THE Superficies of that Part of the Earth 
 which appeareth above the Waters, is, by the In- 
 terflux of the Sea thus divided. 
 
 I. INTO large Continents, or great Iflands,- 
 which we fuppofe to be four. 
 
 ~ North by 
 the Hyperbc- 
 rean Frozen 
 and Tarlaric 
 
 H 2 
 
 Ocean. 
 
 i. The
 
 100 
 
 The Abfolute Part SECT. II. 
 
 
 
 
 Eaft by the 
 
 i.TheO/Jc Europe * 
 
 > and is 
 
 Pacific and 
 
 World which 
 
 P Afia and ( 
 
 > bounded < 
 
 IndianOcean. 
 
 containeth - 
 
 t Africa ; 
 
 > on the 
 
 South by the 
 
 
 
 
 Southern Oce- 
 
 
 
 
 an. 
 
 
 
 
 Weft by the 
 
 
 
 
 Atlantic^ or 
 
 
 
 
 We fern Oce- 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 an. 
 
 2. The New C North 
 
 World which ^ and 
 contained! - - C South 
 
 bound- 4 
 ed on the 
 
 North by 
 Davift 
 
 Streights. 
 Eaft by 
 the Atlan- 
 tic Ocean* 
 South 
 by the 
 Streights. 
 of Magel- 
 lan. 
 
 Weft by 
 the Pacific 
 L Ocean. 
 
 3. THE Arftic Continent , or Greenland is fur- 
 rounded on every Side with Seas and Streights. 
 
 4. THE Antarctic Continent^ or Terra Au- 
 Jlralis Incognita. 
 
 II. INTO Peninfula's, or Cberfonefu/es, which 
 are Parts of thefe Continents. 
 
 Of which fome C Africa. 
 
 are of a round Fi- [North and South America] 
 gure, whofe Lon- J Peloponnefus, or the Morea in 
 gitude and Lati-| Greece -, Taurica Cberfonefitf or 
 tude are almoft e- Crim-fartary. 
 
 qual, as [ Cambaya or Guzarat. 
 
 Others
 
 
 CHAP. 7. 
 
 Others ob- 
 long of which 
 there are ma-' 
 ny, as 
 
 Others which 
 are almoft like 
 Peninfula's, which 
 are 
 
 of Um'ver/a/ Geography. i o i 
 Cberfonefa a" or, or Malacca in India. 
 Cimbrica, or Jutland ', contiguous to 
 
 Holftein. 
 
 Corea contiguous to tfartary. 
 * California, Tucatan, the Cherfonefus 
 
 of Romania. 
 Ionia [as Smyrna'] Cnidus and Myndus. 
 
 Italy, Greece, and proper Achaia. 
 Spain, Afia minor ; and Arabia. 
 Norway, with Sweden , and Lap- 
 
 land. 
 Patagon near the Streights of 
 
 Magellan and New Guinea. 
 Indoflan, Cochinchina, New Bri- 
 
 tain^ Monopatapa, &c. 
 
 III. INTO Iflands of which there are three 
 
 Claflfes, viz. 
 
 (Britain 
 *Japa 
 
 Britain 
 
 n[Ele- | * Japan 
 oeri\ very <^ Iceland 
 large ones I James Ifland] 
 I Sumatra 
 L 
 
 2. [Eleven]\f il y , 
 
 of a middle l?** , 
 
 1 Hifpamola 
 
 Luconia] 
 
 Madagascar 
 
 * Nova Zembla 
 
 Newfoundland] 
 
 California. 
 
 Size 
 
 Cuba 
 
 s, j. 
 
 Landia 
 c j. 
 Sardinia 
 
 , . , 
 Mindanao. 
 
 Gihlo, Amboina, Timor, among the 
 
 Indians Iflands 
 3 . LJ L.* t j . Corfica, Majorca^ Cyprus ^ Negropont^ 
 
 lefler ones 
 
 in the Mediterranean 
 Zealand in Denmark, and Jamaica in 
 the Gulf of Mexico. 
 
 /> #Wj f ^ fx/ Chapter. 
 
 H 3 Very
 
 *fbg Abfolutf Part SECT. II, 
 
 Very many 
 fmall ones, of 
 which we rec- ' 
 
 The Canary Iflands 
 The Azores 
 Cape F^Ifland^ 
 The Antilln 
 The Maldivia Ifland 
 The Comoro Iflands 
 
 The rrioft remarkable Solitary 
 ones, are Rhodes, Malta, 
 Lemnos, $1 Helena, St Thomas, 
 Madera, &c. 
 
 The noted Clufters of Iflands 
 which lie near one another in 
 great Numbers afe 
 
 The Molucca and Ban- 
 dana Iflands. 
 The Philippine Iflands 
 The Ladrone Iflands 
 Thofe in the JEgean Sea 
 The Britannic Iflands 
 The Iflands of Solomon. 
 
 IV. IJlbmuSs or narrow Necks of Land. 
 
 That of Suez, between Africa and Afia. 
 That of Corinth, joining the Morea to Ackaia. 
 That of Panama, in America, longer than any of the 
 
 reft. 
 
 That between Jutland and Holflein, 
 TJrat joining Malacca to India. 
 
 SECT.
 
 C H A P. 8. if Utiiverfal Geography. 1 03 
 
 SECT. III. 
 
 In which the Conftitution of the Earfb, or the 
 dry Part of the terraqueous Globe., is explai- 
 ned, in four Chapters. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the natural Divifion of the Earth into Parts by the 
 circumfluent Ocean. 
 
 WH A T we mall exhibit in this Chapter, con- 
 cerning the Divifion of the Earth, and that 
 in Chap. xv. about the Diftribution of the Sea, will 
 be of great ufe to young Students, for underftand- 
 ing, and remembring the Bounds and Situation of 
 the feveral Countries on the Earth's Superficies : 
 wherefore thefe two Chapters ought to be read 
 throughout with great Attention, and compared 
 with Maps, or the artificial terreflrial Globe. We 
 faid before, in the preceding Chapter, that the 
 Terraqueous Globe, as to it's condiment Parts, 
 may be bed divided into a Body of a firm Con- 
 fiftence as Earth, and a fluid matter as Water ; to 
 which may be added the Atmofphere as a circun> 
 ambient Fluid or Covering. 
 
 I N the firft Place, we fhall treat of the Earth, 
 or that Part of the Globe which hath Confi- 
 itence, 
 
 H 4
 
 104 *Tbe Abjolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 Part of the Earth is covered with Water , and Part, 
 of it is raifed above the Superficies of the Water, 
 and fur rounded thereby. 
 
 THE Truth of this Proportion is manifeft from 
 Experience. Neverthelefs there are fome Places 
 which are now and then covered with Water, and 
 at other Times dry and confpicuous, as the Iflands 
 near Norway, Scotland, and other Countries, to 
 which may be added Sand-beds or Shelves, and Sea- 
 fhores -, but becaufe thefe are fo fmall in compa- 
 rifon of the reft, we fhall take no notice of them 
 at prefent. Nor mail we trouble our felves here 
 with difputing whether the greater Part of the 
 Superficies of the Globe be taken up by Land 
 or Water, but leave it to be difcufled in Chap, 
 xviii. and confider here only the apparent Parts of 
 the Earth which we call JJJands, 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 The Parts of the Earth, which are raifed above 
 the Waters, are not always joined together by one 
 continued Superficies, but often feparated one from 
 another, and formed into I/lands by the Interflux of 
 the Sea. 
 
 THESE may be djftributed into five Clafles, 
 viz. Plats of Land or I/lands, that are great, and 
 Continents that are greateft , fome fmall, and others 
 that are fmalleft; and laftly fome of a middle 
 Size. 
 
 W E mail treat of the Origin, and Caufe of thefe 
 Iflands in the proper Place, Chap, xviii,
 
 CHAP, 8. of Umverfal Geography. 105 
 
 T H O* all the feparate and apparent Parts of 
 the Earth ought to be called I/lands, becaufe an 
 Ifland is nothing but a Part of the dry Land every 
 where environed with Water ; yet, in the common 
 Way of fpeaking, this Word is feldom ufed to ex- 
 prefs thefe iarge Traces of Land whofe Boundaries 
 by the main Ocean, (by reafon of their vaft Ex- 
 tent,; are not fo perceptible. Such as thofe are 
 frequently called the Terra firma, or great Conti- 
 nents^ which peculiar name they ought to be di- 
 ftinguimed by on account of their Magnitude, in 
 refpect of the reft of the Iflands, which are very 
 fmall in comparifon of them. Therefore we mall, 
 in what follows, call them the Terra firma or great 
 Continents. But the word Continent is frequently 
 ufed to exprefs feveral Parts of the Terra firma as 
 well as the whole. And fometimes it is taken 
 ftrictly for a Part of the Earth, on no fide conti- 
 guous to the Sea : Or in a large Senfe for a Country 
 bounded by the Sea on one fide, and on the other 
 joined to a large Tract of the Terra firma. It is 
 alfo often taken in general for a Part of the Earth 
 joined to another, whether by a large or a narrow 
 Tract of Land. In thefe Senfes the Word Continent 
 differs from that in which it is frequently ufed to 
 exprefs large I (lands. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 Thefe large TraRs of Land, Continents or Terra fir- 
 ma, (which you will pleafe to call them) are accoun- 
 ted four in Number. 
 
 j. T H E old World. 2. The new World, or 
 America. 3. The Northern Continent, or Terra 
 Arftica. 4. The Southern Continent, or Terra 
 Auftralis. 2 
 
 I. THE
 
 io6 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 1. 'J'HE Old World (being the moft famous of 
 the four, which we inhabit, and which was only 
 known to the Ancients) is divided, by the Sea 
 into two Parts, which are only joined one to a- 
 nother by a fmall neck of Land, whereof one is 
 Africa , while Europe and Afia jointly make the 
 other. It is thus environed by the Ocean. 
 
 O N the North by the Icy or North Sea, the 
 White Sea, and the Tartaric Ocean. 
 
 O N the Eaft by the Great South Sea and Pa- 
 cific Ocean. 
 
 O N the South by the Indian Sea, the Southern 
 and j&thiopic Ocean. 
 
 ON the Weft by the Atlantic Sea, 
 
 THE aforefaid Divifion of this Continent is 
 made by the Mediterranean, f and Arabian Gulph or 
 Red Sea. The Diftance of thefe two Bays, or the 
 Breadth of the intervening Tract of Land being 
 about 40 German Miles , fo that Africa would 
 have been an entire Terra firma, and numbred a- 
 mong the Continents, but for this fmall Iftbmus. 
 
 THE Old World is not far diftant from America 
 in the Eaft about the \_fuppofed~] Streights of Anian 
 [or Uries,~\ if there be fuch , but the leaft [known'] 
 Diftance of Europe from America is between Nor- 
 way and Newfoundland. 
 
 THE Diftance between the Old World, and 
 the Arctic Continent is fhorteft about the [Icy Sea] -, 
 alfo the Old World is not far diftant from the South 
 Continent about New Guinea. 
 
 2. THE New World, or America, is thus encom- 
 paired by the Ocean. 
 
 O N the North we are in Doubt whether there 
 be Sea or Land beyond the Streights of Davis. 
 
 O N the Eaft it is bounded by the Atlantic 
 Ocean. 
 
 O N the South by the Magellanic Streights. 
 
 i ON
 
 CHAP. 8. of Univerfal Geography. 107 
 
 O N the Weft by the Pacific Ocean. 
 
 THE New World is alfo nearly divided into 
 two Iflands at Panama and Nombre de Dios, where 
 the Atlantic and Pacific Ocean are hindred from 
 meeting by a very fmall Ridge of Land. 
 
 AMERICA is not far diftant from the Old 
 "World about the Streights of Anian [or the Sea of 
 Japan] , and not far again from the Arctic Continent 
 at Davids Streights, and feparated from the South 
 Continent only by the Streights [of la Maire\ and 
 the Magellanic Sea. 
 
 THE Arctic and AntarcJic Continents are every 
 where environed with Sea, the former [as is fuppof- 
 ed] with the North Sea at the Streights of Davis, 
 [Uries or] Anian, [and the Icy Sea] -, the later with die 
 South Sea, Pacific and Indian Ocean, and the Streights 
 [of la Malri\. 
 
 3. THE ArcJic Continent is not far diftant from 
 the Old World [at the Icy Sea], nor from America at 
 Davis's Streights ; but it is feparated from the South 
 Continent by a vaft Interval. 
 
 4. THE Antarctic Continent is not far removed 
 from the old World at the Peninfula of New Guinea, 
 and feparated from America by the Streights of Ma- 
 gellan [and la Maire]. 
 
 B U T we have.not been able to find for certain 
 whether the Old World, America, and the Northern 
 Continent, be each of them encompafled with Sea, 
 and feparated one from another ; tho' it be very 
 probable that they are, by reafon of the feveral 
 Bays and Entrances of Streights that run in from 
 the Ocean to the Landward. Only the Southern 
 Continent hath been actually failed round, and 
 therefore is certainly known to be environed on 
 all fides with Sea, and therefore feparated from 
 the reft. But this has not yet been done by the 
 
 other
 
 . The Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 other Parts , for men have not failed about the 
 Old World much further then Streigbts of ffai- 
 gats, tho' the whole Weftern, Southern, and Ori- 
 ental Shores have been vifited, and there is but a 
 fmall Part of the North [Eaft] Coaft that remains 
 to be difcovered (a). America alfo hath been failed 
 
 round 
 
 (a) All the Attempts made 
 by the Europeans to difcover a 
 Nortb-EaJl-Pa/age to the Ori- 
 ental Countries have been hi- 
 therto unfuccefsful. The Rea- 
 fon was formerly thought in a 
 great meafure owing to the 
 Difcoverers not fleering their 
 Courfe near enough the North 
 Pole ; being either mifled by an 
 Opinion, that that Part of the 
 Sea which lies betwixt Nova 
 Zembla and the Continent of 
 Tartarj had been paflable; or 
 that they might have coafted it 
 along the North ofNova'Lembla 
 and Tartary, till they had enter- 
 ed the Streights ofjeffb, which 
 could never be effected by Rea- 
 fon that moft of thefe northern 
 Coafts are frozen up many 
 Leagues from the Shore, efpe- 
 cially in the Winter, tho' in the 
 open Sea it is not fo, even 
 under the Pole itfelfj unlefs, 
 for Example, upon the Approach 
 of the Summer when the Froft 
 breaketh, and the Ice, whichwas 
 congealed near 40 or 50 Leagues 
 from the Shore, goes off from 
 the Land and floats up and 
 down in the Sea ; whereby fe- 
 veral have been forced to quit 
 their Defign and (land back for 
 their own Country. See Pbilof. 
 Tranf. NO. nS.Pag. 417. Big 
 with this laft notion our Coun- 
 try-man Capt. John Wwd, the 
 
 lateft Adventurer who attempt- 
 ed the North- Eaft Paflage, in 
 the year 1676, fteered direftly 
 NE from the North Cape of 
 Norway, in order to fall in 
 between Green/and and Nova 
 Zembla ; but he could find no 
 Sea or Inlet between thofe 
 Countries ; on the contrary, he 
 obferved the Ice to adhere im- 
 movably to the Coaft of Nova 
 Zembla, and that all the Englijb 
 and Dutch Pilots had been mif- 
 taken in their Conjeftures of an 
 open Sea thereabouts, for he 
 could pafs no further this Way 
 than to the 76 Degr. of Lati- 
 tude, on account of the Ice, 
 which muft have then taken up 
 fome Centuries to thaw. He 
 concludes therefore thatGrray- 
 land and Nwa Zembla muft be 
 the fame Continent, by Reafon 
 there was no Current found 
 there, but only a fmall Tide 
 which rifes about eight Foot, 
 and ebbs back again. And ifit 
 fhould be admitted, to the con- 
 trary, that the Continent of dfia 
 and America are feparated by the 
 Ocean, yet we may now reft 
 fatisfied that the Difficulties to 
 be met with in a North-Eaft 
 PafTage are not to be furmount- 
 ed, and poffibly will never be 
 attempted again. Salmon's Pre- 
 fent State of alt Nations. Vol. 
 6. Pag. 380. 
 
 [I forbear
 
 CHAP. 8. ofUniverfal Geography. 109 
 round except a Part of the Northern Shores, on 
 account of the Uncertainty of the Streights and 
 other Difficulties. This therefore is the Situation 
 of the four Continents. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 :# V '-ft "-::*". -:.'*>V. ^fc V- 
 
 To enumerate the great Iflands difperfed over the Sur- 
 face of the Terraqueous Globe : viz. 
 
 1. BRITAIN^ comprehending England and. 
 Scotland, is fuppofed to be the greateft of thofe com- 
 monly called Iflands (thofe in the preceding Pro- 
 pofition excepted). It lies betwixt Europe and A- 
 tnerica, near France and Flanders. It is furrounded 
 by the Atlantic Ocean^ and it's Form is oblong. 
 
 2. J A P A JV, in Maps and Globes is reprefented 
 of a lefs Magnitude than it ought to be -, for they 
 that have been there affirm it to be larger, or at 
 lead no lefs, than Britain (b). It lies eaftward of 
 Afia not far from China. It is furrounded by the 
 Pacific Ocean , and is of a curve Figure. 
 
 3. LUCONIA, which is alfo called, from it's 
 Metropolis, Manilba, is the Principal of the Pbilip- 
 
 [ I forbear to enlarge upon an of JeJ/o, the Inhabitants of 
 
 Account given us lately, as ad- both Countries doubt; becaufe 
 
 vices from Muftovy, of an Ex- vaft and inacceflable Mountains 
 
 pedition entered upon, under interpofe which hinder the 
 
 the Commandofone Capt. Ber- Communication. Neither doth 
 
 ring, to find out this Nor thEajl- it as yet clearly appear, whe- 
 
 PaJJage, whofe Voyage is now ther this Land of JeJjTo is a. 
 
 faid to be Printing at Mofcow, Part ofTartary, or whether it 
 
 in which he affirms, that there is by an Arm of the Sea divid- 
 
 is a free and open Sea to about ed from it. The Cbinefe affirm 
 
 the North-Eaft Point of Tartary, that Tartary runs 300 China 
 
 and believes it to be likewife Leagues beyond their famous 
 
 open to the Sea of China, or, as Wall ; fo that if we follow them 
 
 fome Geographers call it, the the Country ofjejfi, and alfo 
 
 Japan, may feem not to be 
 Iflands 
 
 (b) Whether Japan be an Iflands but annexed to Tartary. 
 Ifland, or annexed to the Land Pbilof. Tranf. N 1 1 8 .
 
 1 10 The Abfolute Part SECT. HI. 
 
 fines, which are thefurtheft, of the Oriental Iflands, 
 on the Borders of Afia. Some will have it to be 
 larger than Britain -, but they who have been there 
 fay it is fomething lefs. It is encompafTed by the 
 [great South Sea,] and is of a curved oblong Figure, 
 with many Inlets and Windings. 
 
 4. MADAGASCAR, or the Ifland of St 
 Laurence, lies on the eaftern Shore of Africa, not 
 far from the Streights of [Edbelmandel or\ the Red 
 Sea. It is environed by the Indian Ocean (all the 
 Sea between Africa and India being now called by 
 that Name). It's Form is oblong, 
 
 5. SUMATRA, thought by fome Geogra- 
 phers to be the Taprobana of the Ancients, lies near 
 the Borders of Afia among the [Sunda Iftands] not 
 far from the Peninfula of Malacca (c}. It ftretches 
 to a great Length, and is furrounded by the Indian 
 Ocean. 
 
 6. BO RNEO is fituated in the Indian Sea not 
 far from Sumatra : ii's Form is almoft round. There 
 is a great Difference among Authors about it's Ex- 
 tent j fome make it's Circumference to be about 
 2100 Miles, and will have it to be the greateft 
 among the Indian Iflands: others but about 300. 
 
 7. 1C EL AND, Part of which is fituated in 
 the Temperate, and Part in the Frigid Zone, be- 
 twixt Greenland, and Norway, is encompafled by 
 die Northern Ocean, and it's Form is 'oblong. 
 
 8. NEWFOUNDLAND is an Ifland adjacent to 
 Canada, in North America. It is fomething larger 
 than it is mewed in our common Maps. It is en- 
 vironed by the Northern Ocean, and receiveth the 
 Sea in at a great many Creeks. 
 
 (f) Not Sumatra but Ceylon called by the Indians Tenerafin, 
 
 is thought, by all modern Geo- i. e. A Land of Delights, as 
 
 graphers, to be the Taprobane it was reprefented by the 
 
 of the Ancients. And it is itill Ancients.
 
 C H A p . 8 . of Univerfal Geography. i i * 
 
 9. [JAME&sor Cumberland's IJland~] lies in the 
 Northern Qcean near the Arffic Continent^ between 
 Davis's arid Hudfon's Streights. I have not found 
 it in any Map before that of Vifcherm, printed in 
 1 594. It is a large I/land of an oval Figure. 
 
 10. NOVA Zembla is fituated between the Arftic 
 Continent and the Land of the Samoieds and [Oftiacs]. 
 It is bounded on the North by the Icy and [Mufco- 
 vian\ Sea, and feparated from Europe at the Land 
 of the Samoieds by the Streights ofWajgats (d). It's 
 Form is oval. 
 
 11. CyfL7FO/?A^/^maybeaddedtothefe 
 if it be an Ifland, and not a Part of America (ej. 
 The Dutch found in a Spanijb Ship a large Geogra- 
 phical Map) in which California was repreiented as 
 an I/land not contiguous to America, but furrounded 
 with the Sea. 
 
 (d] Mr Witfen tells us, in 
 
 Pbilof. Tranf, N 101. Pag. 3. 
 
 ' That he had received out of 
 
 " Mufcovy, a new Map of Neva 
 
 Zembla and Waygats, as it 
 
 had been difcovered by the 
 
 exprefs Order of the Czar ; 
 
 by which it appears, that 
 
 Nuva Zetnbla is not an LQand, 
 
 as hitherto believed, and that 
 
 the Mare Glaciate is not a 
 
 <l Sea but a Bay". Tho' Mr 
 
 Witfen himfelf feems to be of 
 
 a contrary Opinion afterwards, 
 
 in another Tranfaftivn N 193. 
 
 Pag. 494. where he fays. " I 
 
 " formerly thought Nuva 
 
 " Zembla a Continent ; but I 
 
 " have fihce been better in- 
 
 c< - formed. Therefore fin ce no 
 
 " Ships have failed beyond it, 
 
 ." k may be both joined to the 
 
 " Continent, and extended to 
 
 " the Pole, for ought we can 
 
 difcover". 
 
 
 
 (f) Gemelli tells us, that a 
 Provincial at Manilha, in tbt 
 year 1697. " Thought Call- 
 " fornia a Part of the Conti- 
 " nent; becaufe fome Fathers 
 " of the Society having gone 
 " to the Mouth of theStreight* 
 " which it 60 Leagues over, 
 " and run many Leagues up it, 
 " found at laft that there wa* 
 " but very little Water in the 
 *' Chanel, and could go no 
 " further ; by which he guef- 
 " fed, that long Bay had no 
 " Communication with the 
 " Northern Sea to make Ca- 
 " //fornia an Ifland". Colletl. 
 Voyages and Iravels. Vul. 4. 
 Pag. 420. Father Eufebiut 
 Francis Kino is alfo of the fame 
 Opinion, as is underftood from 
 his Map communicated to the 
 Royal Society, Anno 1708, Nc- 
 verthelefs it is generally repre- 
 foued in our 
 
 Maps as an Ifland. 
 
 PROPO-
 
 H2 n'e Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 2*0 enumerate the I/lands of a middle Size fcattered 
 over the Surface of the Globe: viz. 
 
 1 . J A FA, one of the Sunda I/lands betwixt Afia 
 and New Holland, is replenifhed with every Thing 
 fit for human Life, and is a perfect earthly Para- 
 dife. It is furrounded by the India Ocean ; and 
 it's Form is oblong. 
 
 2. CUBA, one of the Antilles, betwixt Florida 
 and New Spain, is encompafled by the Atlantic Ocean 
 at the Entrance into the Gulpb of Mexico. It's Form 
 is oblong. 
 
 3. HISPAN10LA lies to the South of Cuba, 
 and is almoft as large. It is furrounded by the 
 North, or Atlantic, Sea, where it flows into the 
 Gulph of Mexico. It is of an oval Figure, with fe- 
 veral Notches in it. 
 
 4. IRELAND lieth near Britain, towards Ame- 
 rica. It is environed by the North Sea -, and it's 
 Form is oval. 
 
 5. C AND I A in the Mediterranean, near Greece, 
 is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 6. 5/C/Ll'lies in die Mediterranean, near Italy. 
 It*s Form is [fomewbat Triangular.] 
 
 7. CETLON, near the furtheft Promontory of 
 Cormandel in India", is furrounded by the Indian 
 Ocean, and is of a round Figure. Barrius will 
 have this to be the Taprobana of the Ancients. 
 
 8. MINDANAO, one of the Philippine I/lands 
 in the Pacific Ocean, is of an oval Figure. 
 
 9. SARDINIA lies in the Mediterranean. It's 
 Form is oblong. 
 
 10. CELEBES, an Ifland not far from Borneo, 
 is encompafled by the Indian Ocean , and is of an 
 oblong Figure. 
 
 u. FRIES-
 
 C H A P. 8. of Univerfal Geography. 1 1 3 
 ii. FRIESLAND, riot far from Iceland, may 
 alfo be referred to this Clafs. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 9fr enumerate tbefmall I/lands in the Globe's Superficies : 
 viz. 
 
 1. GILOLO, one of the [Molucca I/lands] is 
 furrounded with the [great Souib-Sea~] and fhaped 
 like a Horfe-Shoe. 
 
 2. AMBOINA, not far from Gilolo in die fame 
 Ocean ; is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 3. TIMOR, an Ifland adjoining to [Arnhetns 
 Land in] the Continent ; it is one of the [Sunda 
 I/lands] and it's Form is round. 
 
 4. JAMAICA, one of the [Antilles] in die 
 Gulph of Mexico, is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 5. Z ELAND, an Ifland in Denmark between 
 Jutland and Gotland. It is furrounded by the 
 North-Sea, as it flows into the Baltic, and is of 
 a round Figure. 
 
 ;r . NEGROPONT, new Greece in the [yfr- 
 chipelago], is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 7. MAJORCA, in the Mediterranean, near 
 Spain, [ii of a quadrangular Figure]. 
 
 8. CORSICA, [near Sardinia] in the Mediter- 
 ranean, [is of an oval Figure]. 
 
 9. CTPRUS, not far from the 7^r /#?* in the 
 Mediterranean, is alfo of an oval Figure. 
 
 10. ISABELLA, one of Solomon's Iflands, in 
 the Pacific Ocean. 
 
 THE RE are feveral other Iflands that might 
 be referred to this Clafs, but we fliall confider 
 them among the following. 
 
 ^OL. b:i tj I PRO- 
 
 , 
 .TAG
 
 1 1 4 The Abfolute Part S E c T. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 *There are almoft an innumerable Multitude of very 
 little I/lands difperfed over the Surface of the 
 Globe ; among which thefe following deferue a par- 
 ticular Confederation, i. 'The celebrated Solitary 
 ones. 2 . I'bofe that are collefted into Clufters, and 
 for their Affinity to one another, included under one 
 Name. 
 
 THE moft noted Solitary I/lands are, Thofe 
 in the Mediterranean ; viz. Rhodes, Malta, Tvica, 
 Minorca^ Scio, Cephalonia, &c. 
 
 T H O S E in the Atlantic Ocean between Africa 
 and Brafil, St Helena, well known to Mariners, 
 Afcenfion IJle, St Thomas's IJle, lying in the Equator. 
 
 MADERA which lies off the Streights of 
 Gibraltar, towards America. 
 
 ZOCOTORA lying before the [Streights of Ba- 
 belmandel]. 
 
 GOTLAND lying in the Baltic. 
 
 PAR ADO N, fuppofed by the Portuguefe Sai- 
 lors (as IJnfcboten relates,) to lie about a hundred 
 Miles Weft of the Canaries, hath this peculiar Pro- 
 perty, that it is fometimes perceptable, but for the 
 moft part invifible ; fo that feveral Geographers 
 difpute it's Exiftence. They tell us it's Fields are 
 green and fertile, and that the Inhabitants are 
 Chriftians, but they know not from what Nation 
 they are defcended, or what Language they ufe. 
 The Spaniards once made a Voyage from the Ca- 
 naries to feek it, but could never find it : There- 
 fore fome have thought it to be an Illufion, or 
 Apparition , others will have it to be feen only 
 fome certain Days of the Year, and at other 
 Times to be covered with a Cloud. The whole 
 Story feems to me fabulous and foolim. 
 
 FLOAT-
 
 C H A P. 8. of Univerfal Geography. 115 
 
 FLOATING Iflands ought alfo to be rec- 
 
 koned among thefe, for which fee Chapter xviii. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 To enumerate the Clufters of Iflands in the federal 
 
 Parts of the Globe. 
 
 J - -' 
 
 WE generally call: thefe C//fc of Iflands, having 
 no better Name to exprefs them by, fuch as : 
 
 1. THE Canaries, formerly called the Por- 
 tunate Iflands, which lie in the Atlantic Ocean,.mtt 
 the Weftern Shore of Africa , over againft Mount 
 Atlas. They are [Seven'] in Number, not reckon- 
 ing the Salvages. 
 
 2. THE Azores, or Flandrian Iflands, betwixt 
 Europe and America, in the Weftern Ocean ; they 
 are accounted Nine in Number. 
 
 3. THE Iflands of Cape Verd, or the Hefpe- 
 ferides of the Ancients, lie in the Atlantic Ocean, 
 near the Weftern Shore of Africa, over againft 
 Cape Verd. Thefe are Ten in Number. 
 
 4. THE Maldivia Iflands lie in the Indian Ocean 
 not far from the Coaft of Malabar in India, and ' est- 
 tend North-Weft from the fecond Degree of South 
 Latitude, to the feventh Degree of North Latitude. 
 Their Number is very uncertain, fome reckoning them 
 one Tboufand, and others twelve Thoufand. Narrow 
 Chanels, which fiem to be worn by the Currents, 
 feparate them one from another, of which fome a're 
 not a Stone* s-caft over. 
 
 5. [THE Antilles comprehending] i. The Lucaios 
 or Bahama Iflands, fituated between Cape Florida 
 and Cuba, are remarkable in being one of them 
 (viz. St Salvador) the firft Land feen by Columbus, 
 the firft of the Europeans that difcovered America. 
 The Chief of them is Lucayo, from whence the 
 reft are named [being of the larger fort, about feven 
 
 I 2 in
 
 r 16 The Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 in Number']. 2. [The Virgin Caribee, or Leeward 
 I/lands'] between Hifpaniola and the Old World. 
 3. \be Stotovento and Bermundas IJlands] to which 
 are referred all thofe in the Gulph of Mexico. 
 
 6. THE [Comoro and Admiralty I/lands] lie be- 
 tween Madagafcar and Africa. 
 
 7. THE Molucca [and Sunda~] IJlands are many 
 in Number, of which five are particularly called 
 [Spice- Iflands]. They are furrounded by the Indian 
 Sea. . on 
 
 . 8. THE. [old and new} Philippine IJlands near 
 the remote Parts of Ajia, are almoft innumerable. 
 
 $'. THE Banda I/lands, and others betwixt Ja r 
 va and [Timor], tri , 
 
 10. THE AZgean IJlands, or "thofe in the 'Arcbi- 
 felago. 
 
 u. THE Japan IJlands. 
 
 1 2. [PRINCE William's Iflands] or thofe of So- 
 lomon in the Pacific Ocean. 
 
 13. THE Ladront IJlands, in the fame Ocean. 
 
 14. THE Britijh IJlands, or thofe about Eng-* 
 'land and Scotland. 
 
 15. THE. Iflands of Terra del Fmgo, between 
 the Streights of Magellan and thofe of la Maire. 
 
 TO thefe may be referred fuch Iflands as are 
 found in large Rivers, as thofe in the Nile in Afri- 
 ca, the Wolga, St Laurence in Canada, and in other 
 Rivers : Alib thofe 1 obferved in Lakes -or Morafles, 
 fuch as are in the Morafs ofLambre in Africa, and 
 in the Lakes of South America. 
 
 WE do not here reckon thofe Iflands, that in 
 great Numbers are ftretched along the Shores of 
 fome Counties, as Norway, China, Brafil, Davit's 
 Stragbls, &c. 
 
 kW3 vv -. fchsJ- JiTr; -^\r (<, . 
 ^.b f '- / >il> 5J?H? \M.-. irw' 
 
 s I
 
 CHAP. 8. of Univerfal Geography. 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 
 Befides thefe I/lands there are other Parts of the Earth y 
 whofe Surfaces are different in Shape or Figure 3 
 fetch as Peninfulas'; and Ifthmufles. 
 
 A Peninfula, called by the Greeks Cherfonefus, is 
 a Part of the Earth joined to another by a narrow 
 Neck of Land, and on every Side elfe encompaf- 
 fed with the Sea. That narrow Tract or (Irak Paf- 
 fage, whereby one Country hath communication 
 with another by Land, is called an Ifthmus. We 
 muft alfo here obferve thofe Parts of the Earth that 
 are flretched out into the Sea, but are joined by a 
 larger Tra6t to the main Land, for fuch extended 
 Parts form a Species of Peninfula's, and may in fome 
 fenfe be fo called. 
 
 S U C H are Italy, Spain, part of England, Greece 
 and proper Achaia, Afia minor, Norway with Swe- 
 den and Lapland, Indoftan, New Guinea in the South 
 Continent, [New Holland'] New Britain, and [New 
 Scotland] in America, Cambodia, Patagon, the ex- 
 tream Parts of Africa, &c. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 To enumerate the Peninfula's. 
 
 THESE Peninfula's are oblong, viz. 
 
 1. CHERSONESAd' or, or Malacca, contigu- 
 ous to India. 
 
 2. C I MB RICA, or Jutland, contiguous to 
 Holjlein. 
 
 3. C AL IFO R NIA, on the Weftern Shore 
 of 'North America, is thought, by fome, to be a Penin- 
 fula ; J)ut commonly reprefented in our Maps as an 
 Jjland. 
 
 I 3 4. TUCATAN
 
 1 1 8 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 4. TUCATAN, in the Bay of Mexico, contigu- 
 ous to New Spain. 
 
 5. THE Cherfonefus of Romania, near the Hel- 
 lefpont. 
 
 6. CORE A ', was formerly thought to be an 
 Ifland, and not a Peninfula. In fome Maps I have 
 feen it joined to Tartar*}, and in others furrounded 
 with the Sea. Neverthelefs, the lateft Obfervations 
 make it a Peninfula -, but even now it is not fettled 
 among Geographers. 
 
 7. TO thefe may be added the three fmall ones 
 of Ionia in leffer Afia [or Smyrna], Melajfo, and Hali- 
 carnajjiis. 
 
 THESE Six Peninfula's are roundifh, viz. 
 
 i. AFRICA, a great Part of the old World, 
 furrounded by the Mediterranean, Atlantic, Mthio- 
 pc, Indian, and Red Sea. It is joined to Afia by 
 a narrow Neck of Land near ASgypt. 
 
 2.3. NORTH and South America viz. Mexico and 
 Peru. They are joined together by the Streights 
 of Panama. 
 
 4. PELOPONNESUS, now called the Mbrea, 
 a Part of Greece. 
 
 5. 7 'AURIC A Cherfonefus, now called [Crim 
 Tartary] in the Black Sea, near the Streigbts ofCaffa* 
 
 6. CAMBATA, or Guzarat, in India. 
 
 PROPOSITION*!. 
 
 There are as many Ifthmus's as Peninfula's. Tbofe of 
 mojl note are, 
 
 1. THAT of Suez, which joins Africa to Afia. 
 
 2. THAT of Corinth, which joins the [More* 
 to Achaia.~\ 
 
 3. THAT of Panama, which joins North Ame- 
 rica to South America. 
 
 4. THAT joining Malacca to India. And, 
 
 5. THAT joining [Crini to Precop Tartary."] 
 
 CHAP,
 
 C H A P. 9. of Um'ver/at Geography. 1 1 ^ 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of Mountains in general 
 
 MANY Things occur worthy of particular 
 Notice, in explaining the Nature of Moun- 
 tains, and therefore they are copioufly handled by 
 Geographical Writers, efpecially the Computation of 
 their Altitudes , becaufe they feem to many to make 
 againft the Earth's Rotundity. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 A Mountain is an elevated Part of the dry Land^ over- 
 topping the adjacent Country j and a Hill or Cliff 
 is a fmall kind of Mountain. A Promontory, if a 
 Mountain jlr etching it felf into the Sea, and Rocks 
 are Stones raifed above the Sea or Land> in the 
 Form of Mountains, 
 
 "We mufl know that all the Parts of the Earth 
 which appear plain, are not exactly of the fame 
 Altitude, but commonly elevated towards the In- 
 land Parts, and depreflfed towards the Sea Shores, 
 as is manifeft from the Origin and Courfe of Ri- 
 vers , for that Part towards which they flow, is al- 
 ways more deprefled than that where they Spring ; 
 and Fountains feldom are increafed into Rivers, 
 unlefs they take their Origin from Mediterranean 
 or inland Countries : which mews, that thofe Coun- 
 tries are more elevated than the Maritime Parts. 
 So Bohemia is known to be higher than Holflein^ be- 
 I 4 caufe
 
 120 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 caufe the River Elbe rifes in the former, and falls 
 into the later. Alfo from the Danube, the Wefer^ 
 the Rhine ^ and the Mofelle^ we perceive the greater 
 .Altitude of thofe inland Countries, from whence 
 they flow. For this feafon, Switzerland and the 
 Country of the Grifon^ are accounted the higheft 
 Lands in Europe ; becaufe the Rhine^ the Danube^ 
 and the Rhone, derive their fource from them. 
 Moreover, the inland Countries are elevated above 
 the maritime Parts, according to the different De- 
 clivity and Rapidity of the Rivers. 
 
 HERE follow fome Problems, by which we 
 may form a Judgment upon the controverfial Wri- 
 tings handed down to us, about the different Alti- 
 tudes of Mountains. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 I'o take the Height of a Mountain by AUimetry, 
 
 THIS is performed the fame Way as we 
 take the Height of a Tower, provided the very 
 Top of the Mountain be perceptible by any 
 Mark. 
 
 LET AB (Fig. 12.) be the Altitude of a 
 Mountain, A the Foot of it, B the Mark feen at 
 the Top. Take the Line FC at a convenient 
 Diftance, fo that neither of the Angles A F C or 
 A C F may be very acute, but nearly equal. Let 
 the Angles BFC and BCF be obferved ; and 
 the Sum of their Degrees being taken from 180 
 the Remainder will give the Angle CBF (a]. 
 Then let C F the Diftance of the two Stations be 
 accurately meafured ; which done, fay, as the Sine 
 of the Angle F B C, to the Sine of the Angle 
 CFB: (orofFCB: if you would find FB) fo 
 
 (a] By Article 14. of Chap, ii. above.
 
 CH AP. 9. ofUmverfat Geography. 121 
 is F C to B C the Diftance of the Top of the 
 Mountain from C. Then [with a Telefcope fxed 
 to a Quadrant or otberwife\ take the Angle B C A, 
 and you will have alfo the Angle ABC, becaufe 
 the Triangle CAB is rectangular *. 
 
 T H E R E F O R E in the Triangle ABC, As 
 the Radius 10000000, is to the Sine of the Angle 
 BC A : fo is the Diftance BC, to the perpendicular 
 Altitude of the Mountain AB. 
 
 FOR Example. Let us fuppofe that Xenagora^ 
 the Son of Eumelus, ufed fome fuch Method as 
 this to find the Height of the Mountain Olympus, 
 which he is laid to have meafured exadly. Where- 
 fore if he found the Angle BFC 84 degr. 18 min. 
 and the Angle B C F 85 degr. 34 min. then was 
 CBF i o degr. 8 min. And fuppofe, by meafuring, 
 or fome other Method, he found FC 1200 Grecian 
 Feet, or 2 Furlongs. Therefore as the Sine of 
 the Angle CBF 10 degr. 8 min. 17594 is to the 
 Sine of the Angle BCF 85 degr. ^^.min. 99701: 
 fo is CF 1200 Feet to BF68oo Feet, the Diftance 
 from the Top. Likewife the Angle BFA being 
 found, by fome Inftrument then in Ufe to be 63 degr. 
 30 min. by faying, in the Triangle FAB, As 
 Rad. i ooooo to the Sine of the Angle BFA 89500 : 
 foisFB 6800 to AB 6096 Feet, the Altitude 
 of Mount Olympus. But 600 Feet make a Grecian 
 Furlong ; therefore dividing 6096 by 600, the 
 Quotient, 10 Furlongs 96 Feet, is the Height of 
 Mount Olympus in Grecian Meafure, as Xenagoras 
 found it. Note, Each of thefe Furlongs is about 
 rs of a German Mile. 
 
 ARISTOTLE and feveral others affirm, that 
 this Mountain, Olympus, is fo high, that there is 
 no Rain, nor the leaft Motion of Air upon the 
 Top of it ; which he, and the Ancients underftood 
 
 By Article 14 ofCbaji. ji. 
 
 from
 
 122 *fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 from their finding the Draughts of Letters made 
 in Afhes, which had been regularly fcattered, to 
 remain entire and frefh as they were at firft, with- 
 out being either confufed or defaced in many 
 Years , therefore they fuppofed it to be raifed a- 
 bove the fecond Region of the Air. 
 
 THERE is alfo another Method of taking 
 the Altitude of Mountains, by two Stations in the 
 fame Plane, with the perpendicular Height of 
 the Mountain , but this is fubjedt to Error becaufe 
 of the fmall Difference of the Angles (). 
 
 ALSO 
 
 () There is a very pleafant 
 and expeditious Method of tak- 
 ing the Height of Mountains by 
 the Barometer, thus: It is to 
 be obferved how many Inches 
 or Parts of Inches the Quick- 
 filver is deprefled at the Top of 
 the Mountain, we have a mind 
 to meafure, below the Altitude 
 it hath acquired, at the fame 
 Time, at the Bottom, or Su- 
 perficies of the Sea; from 
 whence the true Height of the 
 Mountain is found by an efta- 
 blifhed Proportion. This Pro- 
 portion may be known by the 
 Table we have added below to 
 Chap. xix. Prop. 7- Alfo, by 
 this Table, the Height of the 
 Quickfilver at the Surface of the 
 Sea may be feund, by obferving 
 it's Height at any Place, whofe 
 Altitude above the Sea is known. 
 But this is to be obferved, that 
 the Altitudes found this way 
 will be more accurate, the near- 
 er the Height of the Quickfd- 
 ver is to 28 French Inches or 
 
 Jurat* Appendix. 
 This way of taking the 
 Height of Mouxtainit is very 
 
 expeditious and pleafant, as 
 Dr Jurin faith, and with due 
 care may be very ufeful to fe- 
 veral purpofes; particularly in 
 meafuring the Height of Iflands 
 above the Sea, by two Obfer- 
 vers, with well adjufted Baro- 
 meters ; and at the fame Inftant 
 of time, obferving the Baro- 
 metrical Heights, by the Sea- 
 fide, and on the higheft Part 
 of the IJland. So alfo it may 
 ferve to give an Eftimate of the 
 Height of a Fountain, or Ri- 
 ver, that we would have con- 
 veyed to fome Miles Diftance. 
 But in all thoi'e Experiments, it 
 is neceflary that the Barometer 
 (as I faid) mould be well ad- 
 jufted, and (if two Obfervers) 
 that the Obfervations mould be 
 made at the fame time, to pre- 
 vent errors that may arife from 
 errors in the Barometer, or 
 from the Alteration of the 
 Weight of the Atmofpbere\ 
 which fometimes changes in 
 the very time of Obfervation, 
 if we are not fpeedy therein. 
 
 For the Diff every of a Moun- 
 tain's, or any other, Height, Dr 
 Halley (from Barometrical 
 Obfeiva,
 
 CHAP. 9. of Univerfal Geography. 123 
 ALSO having the Height of a Tower given, 
 and it's Diftance from the Mountain, we may 
 more accurately find the Height, of the Mountain 
 itfelf 5 thus, fuppofe F to be a Tower 300 Foot 
 high, and from it's Top, or fome convenient 
 Place, let BFP be obferved to be 83 degr. 30 min. 
 then will BP be found to be 5796 Feet, to which 
 the Height of the Tower is to be added : P A. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 *The perfpicuous Altitude of a Mountain being given, tf 
 find what Diftance we are from it ; by a Quadrant 
 [Theodolite] or any other Surveying Inftrument, 
 for taking Heights or Angles. 
 
 LET the Height of the Mountain A B be 
 known beforehand, by the Obfervations of others, 
 to be 10 Grecian Furlongs 96 Feet, or 6096 Feet. 
 And let the Place of Obfervation be at F ; (Fig. 
 13.) the Diftance FA is fuppofed to be required. 
 Let the Angle BFA by a Quadrant or [Theodolite] 
 be found 63 degr. 30 min. Then in the right- 
 angled Triangle B A F, where three Things are 
 given, it will be as the Radius 100000 is to the 
 Tangent of the Angle ABF 26 degr. 30 min. 49858 : 
 fo is AB 6096 to AF 3040 Feet, or 5 Furlongs 
 
 Obfervations on Snowdm-Hill) with excellent Inftruments at 
 
 concludes, that the Quickfilver divers Altitudes in St Paul's 
 
 defcends a Tenth of an Inch, Dome, and when the Barometer 
 
 every 30 Yards of A fcent. And was at a different Height, he 
 
 Dr Derham (by good Obferva- found, at near go Feet, the 
 
 tions on the Monu me nt in Lon- Quickfilver funk n>, and at 
 
 don) reckons 82 Feet for every fomewhatlefs than double, and 
 
 tenth of an Inch. Vid. Low- treble that Height, ,% and ,^, 
 
 fborfs Abridg. Vol. 2. p. 13, according to Dr Halle fs Table, 
 
 fcjV. But by very nice Obfer- ibid. p. 16, and Mr Cajfinfs 
 
 yatipn? he aftef waf ds made referred to in this Note (b.) 
 
 40 Feet
 
 I 24 *fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 40 Feet, the Diftance required between the Place 
 of Obfervation and the Mountain. 
 
 THERE are fome Inftruments by which you 
 may perform this, without making ufe of the 
 Canon of Sines, &c. as is apparent from their De- 
 fcription, but the Refult is this way lefs accurate, 
 for Want of Exactnefs in the Lines of Propor- 
 tion. 
 
 Note. In both thefe Problems we have taken 
 the Diftance FA for a right Line, becaufe of 
 the fmall Difference between it and a Curve ; 
 but mall confider it as Part of the Periphery of 
 the Earth in the following Methods. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 Having the Dijlance between a Mountain and the 
 Place where it's Top may be firft feen, given : to 
 find Geographically the Height of the Mountain. 
 
 L E T us take, for Example, the prodigious 
 high Mountain in the Ifland ofTeneriff, one of the 
 Canaries, commonly called the Pike of Tenerif. 
 Let AFC. -(Fig. 14.) whole Center is R, be the 
 Periphery of the Earth, or the Meridian of the 
 Mountain, and let AB be the Mountain itfelf. 
 Draw from B the right Line BF a Tangent to the 
 Periphery, and F will be the firft or laft Point 
 from which the Top of the Mountain can be feen. 
 (Then Draw R F.) Mariners affirm, that they firft 
 difcover the Top of this Mountain when they are 
 4 Degr. of the Meridian diftant from it (and they 
 need not be at a lofs for finding the Diftance from 
 any Mountain in Degrees when they are failing 
 under the fame Meridian it is in). Therefore, fup- 
 pofmg their Relation to be true, and the firft 
 vifual Ray B F to come in a direct Line from 
 the Top B, let us endeavour to find out the Alti- 
 2 tude
 
 CHAP. 9. ofUniverfal Geography. 
 tude of the Mountain. In the Triangle BRF there 
 are three Things known, i. RF the Semidiame- 
 ter of the Earth. 2. The Right-angle BFR. And 
 3 . Becaufe the Arch F A is 4 Degr. the Angle 
 B R F is alfo 4 Degr. Therefore fay, As the Ra- 
 dius (100000000) is to the Secant of the Angle 
 B RF 4 Degr. (10024419) fo is RF (3440 Italian 
 Miles or 860 German Mifes) to RB (3448 Italian 
 Miles or 860 German Milesj ; fubftract RA C344O 
 or 86oj and there will remain BA (8 Italian Miles, 
 or 2 German Miles, for the Height of the Moun- 
 tain- \wbicb is extraordinary, and even above the 
 Computations of the Antienti}. Therefore we muft 
 know that there; are two Things affumed as Truths 
 which are actually falfe. i . It is fuppofed that the 
 Ray of Light which firft ftrikes the Eye, comes 
 from B in a right Line, when it is known on the 
 contrary to be curved, or refracted, by Reafon of 
 the Denfity of the Atmofphere. For a Right 
 Line cannot be drawn from the Top B to F 
 (FA being 4 Degr.) without palling thro* a Part 
 of the Earth, and therefore the Top B cannot be 
 feen in a right Line from the Place F, but by 
 the bowed Ray BTF, being the firft of the 
 refracted Rays that can touch F. From whence 
 we may reafonably infer, that this Refraction caufes 
 the Mountain to be difcovered fooner by i Degr. 
 (or 1 5 German Miles) than if there had been no Re- 
 fraction at all ; fo that fuppofmg A F but 3 Degr; 
 the Height of the Mountain will be found but 46 
 Furlongs, or 5 Italian Miles. 2. It is to be con- 
 fidered, that Sailors allow themfelves a Liberty of 
 fpeaking largely, efpecially about their Diftances ; 
 if therefore, in Confideration of this, we deduct 
 half a Degr. more, and fuppofe the Top firft feen 
 jat 22. Degr. or 38 German Miles equal 'to F A ; 
 then will the Altitude of the Mountain A B be 
 
 ttfcwn'D found
 
 I 2 6 f&e Abfolute Part SECT. IIL 
 
 found by the former Calculation to be a Mile, 
 or thereabouts. 
 
 I F a Mountain be firft feen at 2 Degr. diftance, 
 (fetting afide the Refraction) it will be found 2 Italian 
 Miles high ; but if at i Degr, or 15 German Miles, 
 it will be half an Italian Mile/ or 5 Furlongs high* 
 
 To this Purpofe is calculated the following Table t 
 
 If the Altitude of \ L Ger. I A I 
 
 a Mountain be 8 Mil. 7 
 
 BUT thefe are all to be underftood without 
 Refraction, whereby the apparent Height and 
 Diftance is generally increased, as may be feen 
 by the Figure j where the refracted Ray T F being 
 produced to N, gives the apparent Altitude N A. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Having the Altitude of a Mountain given, to find 
 
 Geographically it's Diftance from the Place y whence 
 
 it may be firft feen. 
 
 >u';x>U: . --;^^:;; ;'.,! *Hl 
 
 THIS is but the converfe of the laft Propofi- 
 tion, and may be had from the foregoing Table : 
 but Calculation will give a more accurate Solution. 
 
 LET therefore A B be the Height of a Moun- 
 tain given, and fuppofe it to be firft feen at F, to 
 find the Diftance A F. (Fig. 14.) In the right an- 
 gled Triangle B F R, the Angle F is a right An- 
 gle, and the two Sides F R, R B are given, the 
 former being the Semidiameter of the Earth, and 
 the later the fame added to A B, which fuppofe 
 half a German Mile 5 fo that R F or R A being 
 
 860
 
 CHAP. 9. cfUniverfal Geography. 12 j 
 860 Miles, BR will be 86oz. Therefore fay, as 
 R B 86o is to F R 860 : fo is the Radius 10000000 
 to the Sine of the Angle R B F 9994186. 88 degr. 
 2 min. 40 fee. Wherefore B R F or the Arch A F 
 will be i. degr. 57 min. 20. fee. which being turned 
 into German Miles make 291, the Diftance from 
 whence a Mountain whofe Altitude is half a Mile, 
 may be firft feen without any Refraction, upon 
 which Account we may add 8 Miles, fo that it may 
 be actually feen 37* Miles off. But the Refraction 
 varies according to the different Altitude of the Sun, 
 or the different Denfity of the Air, when the Sun, 
 is below the Horizon ; as we mall mew more at 
 large, when we come to treat of the Atmofphere ; 
 and in the third Part of this Book, where we mall 
 Difcourfe of the vifible Horizon. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. *jt 
 
 ^Tbe Length of the Shadow of a Mountain, and the 
 Altitude of the Sun at the fame Time^ being given, 
 to fnd the Altitude of the Mountain. 
 
 W E propofe this Problem more for the Anti- 
 quity and Elegancy of it, than for any Accuracy 
 we believe to be in the Method. Plutarch and 
 Pliny have writ, that Mount Atbos, on the Mace- 
 donian Shore, is fo high as that it overfhadoweth 
 the Ifle ofLemnoSy [now c ailed Stalimene~] as far as the 
 Market-place of the City of Myrrhina [or Lemnos], 
 when the Sun is in the Summer Solftice ; where the 
 ancient Inhabitants for the Curiofity of the Appear- 
 ance erected a Brazen Calf, at the termination of 
 the Shadow, as is teftified by the old Greek Mo- 
 noftich, which may bt thus Engli/hed. 
 
 2 
 
 Mount
 
 128 The Abfokte Part SECT. III. 
 
 Mount Atho's Shadow covers half 
 The Bulk of Lemno'j molten Calf, (c) 
 
 . FLINT writes, that the Diftance between 
 Atbos and the Ifle of Le mnos y was accounted 87000 
 Paces, or 87 Italian Miles, but neither he nor any 
 other Author have determined the Altitude of the 
 Sun, at the Time of this Shadow ; tho' it is pro- 
 bable, it was projected upon the Town of Myrrhina 
 when Mount Athos, a little before Sun-fet, began 
 to intercept their View of the Sun-Beams , the 
 Sun being then in the fame vertical Circle, which 
 pafleth over Atbos and Myrrhina (becaufe Athos is 
 fituated weftward of Myrrbina}. We may fup- 
 pofe the Sun to have been almoft in the very Ho- 
 rizon of Myrrhina F O, and fo the Ray O F, paf- 
 fing the Top of the Mountain, to llave projected 
 the Shadow AF. (Fig. 15). Here OF is a Tan- 
 gent to the Periphery, and from having the Angle 
 FB R given, and alfo FR, ("or FA in the Trian- 
 gle, BAF taken as a right Line; B A will be 
 found to be 8 Furlongs, or i Italian Mile for the 
 Height of the Mountain. But becaufe in this Pofi- 
 tion of the Sun, the Shadow would be infinitely 
 continued, and therefore it's Extent could not be 
 obferved ; and as the Interpofition of the Houfes 
 in the Town, would alfo intercept the neighbour- 
 ing Rays, to thofe that bounded the Shadow ; there- 
 fore, we" muft allow the Sun to have been elevated 
 at leaft 2 Degr. above the Horizon of Myrrbma j 
 
 * 'A'.AyNx 1C /Ji^Tsrij . J 
 
 tO'"A$f f KAX^ei :. *Mv S ft faw the Shadow of the Pike of 
 
 htiuvist< fiobf. Tenerif upon the Sea reaching 
 
 . Mr Salmon looks upon this to over the Ifland Camera, and the 
 
 be a very ridiculous Aflertion, Shadow of the upper Part, viz. 
 
 aiid tells us that there never was of the Sugar/oaf to be imprinted 
 
 a Shadowdifcernableat lO'Miles like another Pike in the Sky it 
 
 Diftance from the Hill that made felf. See Salmon's Prefent State 
 
 it. But in Oppofition to this, of all Nat. Vol. 5. Pag. 396. and 
 
 Mr Idem fays, that he aftually Pbilof. Tranf.N 345- Pag. 3 1 7. 
 
 For
 
 C H A P. 9. of Um'ver/a! Geography. 129 
 For Example, to S ; fo that S F O may be 2 Degr. 
 and S F a Ray of the Sun pafimg the Vertex of the 
 Mountain T, and terminating the Shadow in F. 
 
 THERE FORE in the oblique angled Tri- 
 angle RFT, the Angle TFR 92 Degr. and 
 F R T i degr. 6 min. (i. e. the Diftance F A 87 Ita- 
 lian Miles, turned into Degr.) hence F T R 86 degr. 
 54 min. and alib the Semidiameter FR, 860 Ger- 
 man Miles, being all given; the Side T R may be 
 found by this Proportion. As the Sine of the An- 
 gle F T R 86 degr. 54 min. is to the Sine of the An- 
 gle T F R 92 degr. fo is FR 860, to JIT 861 Ger- 
 man Miles. So that AT, the Altitude of Mount 
 Athos, is i German Mile, -or 3 2 Furlongs, which 
 is too much i for the Grecians account it not above 
 ii Furlongs 
 
 I F we aiTume the Altitude of the Sun to be but 
 one Degr. the Altitude of the Mountain will be 
 found but 20 Furlongs. 
 
 BUT Pliny, I fuppofe, has given us too large 
 a Diftance betwixt Atbos and Myrrbina, which may 
 perhaps be a Reafon, that too great a Height arifes 
 from this Calculation : and in moft of our modern 
 Maps of Greece, the Diftance F A feems to be but 
 about 55 Italian Miles ; wherefore the Angle FRT 
 will be but about 55 min. So that fuppofing the 
 Sun's Altitude to be i degr. 30 min. the Angle TFR 
 will be 91 degr. 30 min. and FT R 87 degr. 35 min. 
 Therefore in the Triangle FRT, as the Sine of the 
 Angle FRT 87 degr. 35 min. is to the Sine of the 
 Angle TFR 91 degr. 30 min. fo is FR 860 to RT. 
 
 OR in the Triangle TFA right angled at A, 
 TFA will be i degr. 30 min. and FA, fuppofed 
 a right Line, 55 Miles, from whence the Height 
 TA will be found by this Proportion. As the Ra- 
 dius is to the Tangent of the Angle TFA, i degr. 
 30 min. fo is FA $5 Miles to AT, tte Altitude of 
 the Mountain. 
 
 VOL. I. K TO
 
 1 30 The Abfolute Part S E c T. III. 
 
 T O this Place belongs the Solution of this Pro^ 
 blem, vifs. Having the difference of Time be- 
 tween the Sun's rifing (or fettingj on the Top of a 
 Mountain, and it's firft Appearance to (or Occul- 
 tation from) an Obferver at the Bottom, to find, 
 if required, the Height of the Mountain -, and con- 
 verfly, having the Height of the Mountain, to find 
 this difference of Time. Artftotle and Pliny, have, 
 by this Method of Calculation, fuppofed fome 
 Mountains to be of incredible Altitudes, as ap- 
 pears from their Writings. However, fince the 
 Solution of thefe Problems depends upon anodier, 
 which we have referred to the fecond Part of this 
 Work, we mail refer them to Chapter xxx. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 tfbe bigbeft Mountains have no fettfible Proportion to 
 tbe Semidiameter of the' Earth ; or fo little, that 
 their Altitude no more ajfefts it's Rotundity, than a 
 fpeck or particle of Duft upon the Surface of tbe 
 artificial Globe does it's Rotundity. 
 
 ,~. J : r. 'J ; f. J t ' 'J. 
 
 WE have mewed, that the Mountain in the 
 Ifland of Teneriff, called tbe Pike, is at moft no 
 higher than a German Mile, or a German Mile and 
 a half; and we are affured, that there are but few 
 Mountains in the World higher than that : There- 
 fore fince the Earth's Semidiameter is 860 fuch 
 Miles, the Altitude of this high Mountain is to the 
 Earth's Semidiameter as i to 860. But few Moun- 
 tains are of this Height, moft of them not exceed- 
 ing a quarter of a .Mjle ; wherefore they -nq more 
 obftract the Earth's fpherical Figure, than, the 
 fmall inequality obferved in Globes turned artifi- 
 cially, does their Rotundity 5 and Nature hath not 
 i yet 
 
 OT .1 .JCV
 
 C H A p. 9. of Univerfal Geography. 131 
 yet been able to produce a Body of an exad Geo- 
 metrical Roundnefs (d). 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 50 explain the Origin of Mountains. 
 
 THIS is a great Queftion with fome Philofo- 
 phers, but others think it fuperfluous, and not fit 
 to be enquired into ; becaufe they fuppofe Moun-* 
 tains to have had a Being ever fmce the Creation. 
 Neverthelefs Hiftory acquaints us, that not a few 
 Mountains have been undermined by interiof 
 Ruins, and funk down into fubterraneous Chafms 
 and Receptacles, or wafted by fome other Means ; 
 fo that fmce we can perceive a natural Decay and 
 Corruption of them, we may judge they do not 
 proceed from a fupernatural Origin. Moreover, 
 that feveral Mountains were raifed fuccc-flively, and 
 at feveral Times, is apparent from the Quantities of 
 Sea-lhells that are found in fome of them, as in thofe 
 of Gelderland, &c. Such Mountains as thefe feem 
 to be generated by a rapid Wind, carrying Sand 
 and Gravel by Degrees into the form of the Moun- 
 tain, which is afterwards foaked and made folid by 
 the Rain. This is to be underftood in little Moun- 
 tains, as to the very large ones it is probable, they 
 
 (d)' Tho' the Body of the when flie is viewed thro' a good 
 
 Moon be three times as little as Telefcope, we can fee the out- 
 
 the Earth, and the Protuberan- ward Edge of her Disk notched 
 
 ces or Mountains upon her Sur- and made rugged, by the Tops of 
 
 face, three Times as high as the the Mountains rifing far above 
 
 higheftupon the Earth's Surface; the other Parts of the Surface ; 
 
 yet when me is at the full, and which need not feem ftrange, 
 
 obferved with the naked Eye, when the beft polifhed Globe 
 
 we cannot perceive that thefe that ever was made, being 
 
 vaft Mountains in the leaft ob- viewed thro 1 a good Microf- 
 
 ftruft, or deface her apparent cope, is found not to be free 
 
 Rotundity. On th contrary, from fuch Rugofities. 
 
 K 2 arc
 
 132 *fbe Abfdute Part SECT. III. 
 
 are of the fame Age and Origin with the Earth it- 
 felf. They that argue more Theologically, fup- 
 pofe the Globe of the Earth to have been at firft 
 created perfectly round, and with a foft Surface, 
 without any eminent Parts or Mountains, without 
 any Fiffures or Grottos-, and afterwards, when 
 GOD commanded the Waters to be gathered 'together 
 in one Place, then there were Chanels made to 
 receive the Waters, and the Earth that was remov- 
 ed out of thefe Chanels, was converted into Moun- 
 tains. But we leave it to them to prove, whether 
 the Mountains be fo many, and fo large, as to fill 
 all the Chanels of the Sea (*). 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 To explain the Caufes, why Rain, Mifts, and Snows, 
 are frequent upon the 'Tops of the Mountains ; when 
 in the neighbouring Fallies, the Air is ferene and 
 calm without any fuch Meteors. 
 
 W E are informed by thofe, that have travelled 
 over the Mountains of Afia, Peru, and other Coun- 
 tries, 
 
 (*) ' Dr Woodward, in his 
 ' Efiay towards a Natural Hi- 
 
 * ftory of the Earth, propofes 
 ' to prove, that the Strata at 
 
 * firft, whether of Stone, of 
 Chalk, of Coal, of Earth, or 
 
 * whatever other Matter they 
 ' confiftcd of, (lying each up- 
 
 * on other) were all originally 
 ' parallel : that they were plain, 
 ' even, and regular; and the 
 ' Surface of the Earth like- 
 ' wife even and fpherical : that 
 
 * they were continuous, and 
 ' not interrupted or broken : 
 
 * and that the whole Mafs of 
 
 * the Water lay then above 
 
 I 
 
 them all, and conftituted a 
 fluid Sphere environing the 
 whole Globe. That after 
 fome Time the Strata were 
 broken on all fides of the 
 Globe : that they were dif- 
 located and their Situation 
 varied, being elevated in 
 forne Places, and deprefied 
 in others. That the Inequa- 
 lities and Irregularities of the 
 Terreftrial Globe, were cauf- 
 ed by this Means : date their 
 Original from this Difrup- 
 tion, and are entirely owing 
 unto it. That the more 
 eminent Parts of the Earth, 
 Mountains
 
 C H A P. 9. of Univerfal Geography. 1 3 3 
 tries, that while they were on their Tops, they 
 were frequently attacked with Showers of Rain, 
 Snow, and thick Fogs ; but defcending thence in- 
 to the neighbouring Vallies, they obferved no fuch 
 Meteors, but enjoyed a ferene arid pleafant Air. 
 We alfo obferve the fame in the Mountains of our 
 own Country. 
 
 SOME fay, theCaufe of this Phenomenon is 
 owing to an occult Power that Mountains have 
 of attracting Air, Clouds, and other Meteors ; 
 but fmce they cannot explain this Power, they fay 
 nothing to the Purpofe (/). The following Ex- 
 plication feems to me the moft rational, viz. That 
 Vapours and Exhalations being condenfed into 
 fmall Drops, in the middle Region of the Air, (into 
 which the Tops of feveral Mountains rife) begin to 
 defcend and fall upon the Tops of the fubjacent 
 Mountains which are nearer them than the Vallies, 
 and coming there firft to Ground, they leave their 
 Places in the Air, which are prefently taken up 
 by the fmall Drops that are next them ; thefe be- 
 ing prefled and forced downwards by others, ei- 
 ther to avoid a Vacuum, or becaufe it is the Na- 
 
 Mountains and Rocks, are Agitation, and, in fome mea- 
 
 only the Elevations of the fure, condenfed by Winds, or 
 
 Strata; thefe wherever they other external Caufes, they ga- 
 
 were folid, rearing jpgainft ther themfeves inro Clouds and 
 
 and fupporting each other in Mifts, and by their own fpeci- 
 
 the Pofture wherein they fie Gravity, fall downwards, till 
 
 were put, by the burfting they meet with fuch Air as is 
 
 or breaking up of the heavy and able to fupport them, 
 
 Sphere of the Earth.' with which they mix and fwim 
 
 Woodward's Eflay. Pag. 90, about, and are every way difper- 
 
 91, 92. fed in it, whereby the Sky is 
 
 (f) The Air in Vallies is made ferene and clear : but if 
 
 much heavier than the Vapours, they meet not with fuch Air, 
 
 and therefore fitted to fupport or light upon the Top of a 
 
 them better than that light Air Mountain before they come at 
 
 which is upon the Tops of high fuch Air, then they are formed 
 
 Mountains. Therefore when the into Drops, and fall down to 
 
 yapours are put into a violent the Ground, 
 
 K 3 tre
 
 134 ft* Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 ture of Water to flow to the loweft Place, or to 
 that Place where the Flux was firft begun. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 tfbere happen to Mountains, Ruins, Ruptures, Tranf- 
 pofitions, &c. 
 
 I T is but feldom fuch Accidents happen, yet 
 fome Inftances are found in Hiftory, -^ecially of 
 Ruptures, whereof we fhall give lome Examples 
 in the following Chapter. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 Whether the Superficies of a Mountain be more ca- 
 facious than the Plane whereon it ft ands? 
 
 T HAT it is larger is proved from Geometry : 
 But whether it can fupport a greater Number of 
 living Creatures, or produce a larger Quantity 
 of Corn is another Queftion ; to which I anfwer 
 in the Affirmative. For tho j every thing placed 
 upon the Surface of the Mountain, is fuppofed to 
 {land perpendicular to the fubjacent Plane, yet 
 there is a greater Quantity of Earth, and a larger 
 Superficies. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 CHAP. 10. of Urn 'verfal Geography, 135 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Of the Difference of Mountains and their Ex- 
 tent, and particularly of Burning Mountains. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 Some Mountains are of fmall Extent ', and others run 
 out to a great Diftance. 
 
 H E latter Sort, called Ridges, or Chains of 
 Mountains, are found almoft in every Country 
 throughout the World ; and fuch might be account- 
 ed one continued Mountain, if it were not for fmall 
 Breaches or PafTages that fometimes intervene. 
 They are indifferently extended feveral Ways ; 
 fome from North to South, others from Eaft to 
 Weft, and fome to other Points collateral to the 
 four Cardinal ones. 
 
 THE moft celebrated Ridges of Mountains 
 are, 
 
 i . THE Alps, which feparate Italy from the 
 neighbouring Provinces, extending themfelves over 
 vaft Tracts of Land, and ftretching out their 
 Arms, or Branches, into distant Countries, viz. 
 thro' France to Spain, where they are called the 
 Pyreneans ; and thro* Rhcstia [i. e. the Country of 
 the Grifons'] where they are called the Rhetian 
 Mountains ; alfo thro* Hungary, where they are 
 named the Hungarian Mountains ; and above Dal- 
 tnalia, where they receive the Name of the Dal- 
 matian Mountains i from whence they are ftretch- 
 K 4 cd
 
 136 ke Abfolute Part S E c T. III. 
 
 cdthro* Macedonia into [Romama~] t and even to the 
 Coaft of the Bla,ck-Sea. But becaufe there is in 
 Dalmatia a confiderable Space between the dips 
 and the Dalmatian Mountains, the former is reck- 
 oned by fome to end here. Neverthelefs they fend 
 out one continued Ridge, which pafleth, with a 
 winding Courfe, in the Form of a Half-Moon, 
 thro* the whole Length of Italy, and divides it 
 into two Parts even to the Streights of [Meffina] ; 
 tho* it does not run every where directly for- 
 ward in one Tract, but here and there fends out 
 collateral Branches that run fideways from it. Se- 
 veral of thefe Mountains are diltinguiflied by par- 
 ticular Names, by Reafon of their Altitude, or 
 for fome other Caufe, as Monte Majfo, Gaurus, 
 Monte di Capua , the burning Mount Vefu- 
 vius, &c. 
 
 2. THE Ridge of Mountains in Peru [called 
 the Andes] is the longeft in the World. They run 
 in a continued Tract about 800 German Miles, 
 (whereof 1 5 make a Degree) thro' all South Ame- 
 rica^ from the Equator to the Streights of Ma- 
 gellan, and feparate the Kingdom of Peru, from 
 other Provinces. And fo high are the Tops of 
 thefe Mountains, that they are reported to tire the 
 Birds in their Flight over them -, there being but 
 one only Paffage over them as yet difcovered, 
 and that very difficult. Many of them are covered 
 with perpetual Snow, as well in Summer as in 
 Winter. The Tops of others are hid in the 
 Clouds, and fome are raifed above the middle 
 Region of the Air. Several of the Spaniards, with 
 their Horfes, have fuddenly expired upon the 
 Tops of thefe Mountains, in their PafTage from 
 Nicaragua to Peru, and growing ftiff with the 
 Cold, they, in a Moment, became immoveable 
 d.s Statues. The Caufe of which feems to be 
 no other than the Want of fuch Air as was fit 
 
 for
 
 CHAP. 10. of Unfoerfal Geography. 137 
 for Refpiration. There are alfo found among 
 this Ridge of Mountains feveralthat SLTQ fulf bureaus 
 and fmoaking. 
 
 3. THERE are many other Ridges of 
 Mountains between Peru and Brafil, which arc 
 ftretched out thro* unknown Countries as far as the 
 Streights of Magellan, where their Tops are cover- 
 ed with continual Snow, tho' they lie in the La- 
 titude of 52 Degrees. 
 
 4. TO thefe may be added the Ridges of 
 Mountains in Canada , and New England, whofe 
 Tops are alfo perpetually covered with Snow, tho* 
 they are not fo famous as the reft. 
 
 5. MOUNT Taurus, in Afia, was antiently 
 thought to make a Part of the largeft and nobleft 
 Ridge of Mountains in the World. It begins to 
 mew itfelf in the Leffer Afia near [the Gulpb of 
 Slatalla], and runs from Weft to Eaft, under fe- 
 veral Names, thro* divers large Kingdoms, and 
 Countries, even to India , whereby all Afia is di- 
 vided into two Parts, of which that on the North 
 Side is called Afia intra Taurum, and that on the 
 South, Afia extra Taurum. This Ridge is as it 
 were fenced on either Side with feveral others that 
 accompany it, among which the moft celebrated 
 are the Greater and Leffer Antitaurus, which fepa- 
 rate the Greater Armenia from the Leffer ; alfo 
 where Taurus itfelf pafies between Armenia and 
 Mefopotamia, it fends forth many Branches towards 
 the North and South. 
 
 6. THE Mountain Imaus is extended North 
 and South, and alfo Eaft and Weft, in the Form of 
 a Crofs. The North Portion of it, is now called 
 Alkai : It is ftretched out fouthward as far as the 
 Borders of India, to the very Head of the River 
 Ganges, and is computed in Length about 400 Ger- 
 rntn Miles. It divides [Afiatic Tartary] into two 
 
 Pans
 
 138 The Abfolute Part S E CT. III. 
 
 Parts, formerly called Scytbia infra fcf extra I- 
 maiitn. 
 
 7. THE Mountains of Caucafus are about 50 
 Miles in Breadth, and extend themfelves length- 
 way from the Confines of the Cafpian-Sea towards 
 the Euxine-Sea. They are a fure Sea-Mark to thofe 
 that fail in the Cafpian-Sea^ to fleer their Courfe 
 by. An Arm of them reaches to Mount Ararat 
 in Armenia, upon which it is faid, in Sacred Scrip- 
 ture, the Ark of Noah refted ; and the 'Turks and 
 Perfians will have it to be prefervcd there to this 
 very Day. Ararat is alfo not far .from Mount 
 Taurus, where all thefe Mountains are contiguous. 
 We mail treat of the Height of Mount Caucafus 
 in Chapter xxx. 
 
 8. T H E long Range of Hills in China, which 
 comprehends the Damajian Mountains of the An- 
 tients towards the Weft, and the Oltorocoran to- 
 wards the North. This Range is compofed of a 
 vaft Number of Mountains, not altogether conti- 
 nued, but here and there affording a Paffage be- 
 tween them. The Mountains of Cambodia feem al- 
 fo to be a Part of this Range. 
 
 9. THE Mountains of AraUa are drawn out 
 in three Ranks, whereof the holy Mount Sinai is 
 a Part. 
 
 10. MOUNT Atlas, in Africa, is made famous 
 by the innumerable Fictions of the Greek Poets. It's 
 Rile is near the weftern Shore of Africa, from 
 whence it ftretches itfelf to the eaftward as far 
 as the Confines of Egypt. Moft of the Rivers in 
 this Continent take their Rife from it -, and tho* 
 it lie in the Torrid Zone it is cold and covered 
 with Snow in feveral Places, 
 
 11. THE Mountains of the Moon, near Monotno- 
 tapa in Africa, fendeth out feveral Branches, which 
 furround almofl. all Monomolapa, and are diftin- 
 guifhed by divers Names, as Zetb, \Gibel , Capb,"\ 
 
 &e.
 
 CHAP. 10. ofUniverfal Geography. 139 
 
 &c. There are almoft innumerable other Branches 
 in Africa, feparated one from another only by nar- 
 row PafTages, infomuch that they all leem to be 
 Parts of the fame Range of Mountains. 
 
 12. TYLE.Ripbean Mountains, in Europe, run 
 from the White-Sea^ or Mufcovian-Bay^ to the 
 Mouth of the River Oby ; from whence they are 
 called fometimes -by that Name. The Mufcovites 
 call them Weliki Kamenypoys, i. e. the great ftony 
 Girdle ; becaufe they fuppofe them to encompafs 
 the whole Earth. Near thefe there is another 
 Ridge of Mountains, which the Ruffians call Joe- 
 goria ; they reach from the South Borders of Tar- 
 tary to the Northern Ocean. Several Rivers take 
 their Rife from them, viz. Witfagda, Neem, Wiffera^ 
 and Pelfiora. Thefe are none of them well re- 
 prefented in Maps, and very often totally omit- 
 ted. Alfo between Rujfia and Siberia there are, 
 befides thefe, a triple Range of Mountains run- 
 ning from North to South. The firft of thefe the 
 Rujfiam call Cofvinfcoy Camen, which is two Days 
 in palling over. The next to this (fome Vallies 
 intervening) is called Cbirginfeoy Camen, which is 
 alfo two Days Journey over. The third, being 
 higher than the reft, is named Podvinfcoy Carney 
 and in feveral Places is all the Year round co- 
 vered with Snow and Fogs, fo that a PafTage is, 
 with great Difficulty, obtained in four Days. 
 The Town of Vergatena^ in Siberia, is near this 
 Range. 
 
 13. [THE Dofrine Hills ,~\ which feparate Swe~ 
 den from Norway, arife near the South Pro- 
 montory of Norway, and proceed in feveral 
 Ranges to the fartheft Part of Lapland, being al- 
 fo diftinguifhed by feveral Names, as Fillefiel y Do* 
 frefel, &c. 
 
 14. THE Hercynian Mountains in Germany 
 now Fiechtelberg Mountains] furround Bohemia ; 
 
 and
 
 140 *fhe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 and various Ways extend themfelves into divers 
 Countries where they have different Names. In 
 die Dukedom of Brunfuuic they retain fomething 
 of their antient Name, being called Der Hark*, 
 Mount Brufterus is a Part of this Ridge. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 Inmofl IJlands, and Parts of tbe Continent that run 
 out into the Sea, the Ridges of Mountains are fo 
 fituated as to take their Courfe thro* the middle of 
 them, and divide them into two Parts. 
 
 I N Scotland the Grampian Mountain (or Granf- 
 lain as the Inhabitants call it) runs from Weft to 
 Eaft tho' the middle of this Peninfula ; and di- 
 vides it into two Parts, which very much differ 
 both in the Nature of the Soil, and the Inhabi- 
 tants. So in the Iflands of Sumatra, Borneo, Lu- 
 conia, Celebes, Cuba, Hifpaniola, &c. Chains of 
 Mountains are found which arife gradually to a 
 great Height, from the Sea-Shore to the Inland 
 Parts. 
 
 THUS die Mountain Gate, in India, begins 
 at the Extremity of Mount Caucafus, and reaches 
 to Cape Comorin ; whereby the Peninfula of India 
 is divided, from North to South, into two Parts, 
 whereof that Part which lies on this Side Gate, 
 towards the Weft, is called Malabar ; and the other 
 beyond the Mountain towards the Eaft is called 
 Cormandel. Part of the fame Ridge of Mountains 
 is alfo ftretched out into that Part of India which 
 is now called Bengal, and from thence thro* Pegu 9 
 Siam, to the extream Parts of Malacca. 
 
 THERE is the like Ridge of Mountains in 
 the Peninfula ofCambaya, and in the Hand, or 
 Peninfula, of California -, alfo in the procurrent 
 Pans of Africa, there is a Ridge which reaches 
 
 frorn
 
 CHAP. 10. of Uniwrfal Geography. 141 
 from the Morafs of Zaire to the Cape of Good-Hope. 
 In Italy there are the Apennine Mountains j and 
 the like in Corea^ &c. 
 
 A S to the Origin of thefe Ridges, whether they 
 are of the fame Date with the Earth, or were af- 
 terwards generated from natural Caufes, is uncer- 
 tain (a). 
 
 PRO- 
 
 (a) The learned Dr Wood- 
 
 * ward, in his EfTay abovemen- 
 ' tioned Page 280, proves, 
 ' that there were Rivers as well 
 ' as Sea in the Antediluvian 
 
 * Earth, from the great quan- 
 ' tides of River- Shells that were 
 
 * then brought forth, and left in- 
 clofed among others in the 
 Strata of Stone, &V. And 
 ' if there were Rivers, there 
 ' muft needs alfo have been 
 ' Mountains ; for they will not 
 f flow unlefs upon a Declivity, 
 ' and their Sources be raifed a- 
 ' bove the Earth's ordinary Sur- 
 ' face, fo that they may run 
 ' upon a Defcent. Mofes alfo, 
 ' treating upon the Deluge, 
 ' faith in Gen. vii. 19. &c. 
 
 * And the waters prevailed ex- 
 f ceedingly upon the earth ; and 
 ' all the high hi Hi that were 
 
 * under the whole heaven were 
 4 (nvered. Fifteen cubits up- 
 
 * ward, did the waters prevail t 
 
 * and the mountains were tover- 
 
 * ed. And all flejh died: 
 
 * ell in whofe noftrils was the 
 
 * breath of life. Here he 
 ' plainly makes thefe Antedilu- 
 ' vian Mountains the Standards 
 ' and Meafures of the Rife of 
 ' the Water ; which they could 
 ' never have been, had they not 
 
 * been Handing when it did fo 
 f rife and overpower the Earth. 
 
 ' His Intention, in the whole, 
 ' is to acquaint us, that aH 
 
 * Land Creatures whatever, 
 Both Men, Quadrupeds, 
 ' Birds, and Infefts, periihed, 
 ' and were deftroyed by the 
 ' Water ; Noah, only exceptcd, 
 ' and they that were with 
 ' him in the ark. And at the 
 ' fame Time to let us fee the 
 Truth and Probability of the 
 
 * Thing: to convince us there 
 was no Way for any one to 
 efcape, and particularly that 
 none could fave themfelves 
 ' by climbing up to the Tops of 
 ' the Mountains thatthenwere, 
 
 * he affures us that they, even 
 ' the higheft of them, were all 
 ' covered and buried under 
 ' Water. Now to fay that 
 ' there was then no Mountains 
 
 * and that this is meant of 
 ' Mountains that were not for- 
 ' med 'till afterwards, makes k 
 ' not intelligible, and indeed 
 ' hardly common Senfe/ 
 Thus far Dr Woodward. But 
 at the univerfal Deluge, the 
 Mountains in general were de- 
 faced, levelled, and diflblved, as 
 it were, and promifcuoufly mix- 
 ed with the Waters, which ran - 
 facked and tore up their very 
 Foundations, fo as to make one 
 common confufed Mafs. There- 
 fore thefe Mountains of our pre- 
 fers
 
 I4Z fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 30 enumerate the Mountains famous for their Height. 
 
 i. THE Pike offencriff, which the Inhabitants 
 call Pico de Terraira, is accounted the higheft 
 Mountain in the World ; and it's Top is plainly 
 perceived at Sea 60 Miles before we come up 
 to it, as was faid in the preceding Chapter. There 
 is no afceriding it but in the Months of July and 
 jlugujl, for at other Times it is covered with 
 Snow, tho* there is never any feen in the reft of 
 the Ifland, or in the neighbouring Canaries. It's 
 Top doth plainly appear to be above die Clouds, 
 which are often feen to furround the middle Part v 
 but becaufe it is ufually covered with Snow, it 
 is certainly, not elevated above the middle Region 
 of the Air. It requires three Days to afcend this, 
 Mountain, whofe Vertex is not Iharp-pointed but 
 plain ; from whence, on a clear Day, one may 
 fee diftin&ly the reft of the Canaries^ tho* fome of 
 them are fifty Miles remote from it. In the two 
 Months abovemention'd great Quantities of ful- 
 phureous Stones are dug out of the Side of this 
 Mountain, and carried into Spain. Scaliger writes, 
 that this Mountain continually vomited out burn- 
 
 fent Earth, are not the fame juft as the fubfiding Waters 
 with the Antediluvian Moun- happened to dafh out, or pile 
 tains, but were formed at the up, their Particles, by wafhing 
 Deluge, out of the confuied and hollowing their Sides, or 
 Heaps of feveral forts of Mat- carrying the loofe and unfet- 
 ter, which (when the Caufe of. tied Earth, towards the Drains 
 the general Devaftation ceafed) and Sluices which were natu- 
 began to curdle as it were, and rally formed to carry the Wa- 
 fettle in innumerable Forms and ter downward to the Ocean. 
 Shapes; fome extending them- How the Antediluvian Moun- 
 felves into long Ridges, others tains were formed fee Chapter 
 into round and rugged Shapes ; vii. Note (f) above. 
 
 ing
 
 C H A p. I o. of Unherfal Geography. 1 4 3 
 
 ing Coals formerly (). I am ignorant from what 
 Author he had it, and never found any fuch Thing 
 in thole I have read. 
 
 2. I N one of the Azores , or weftern Iflands, 
 near the Ifland Fayal, there is found a Mountain 
 called the Pike of St George, from whence the Ifland 
 itfelf is called Pico. It is faid to be as high as the 
 Pike of Teneriff^ or fomething higher. 
 
 3. T H E Ridge of the Cordileras, or Andes, in 
 South- America, which feparates Peru from other 
 Countries, is one of the vafteft and higheft Moun- 
 tains in the World. It is extended from the Streights 
 of Magellan to Panama. 
 
 4. y TN A, a Mountain in Sicily ; when it caft- 
 eth forth Fire the Sparks are feen from the Ifland 
 of Malta, from whence it is fuppofed to be at leaft 
 a [German] Mile high ; but that this is a Decep- 
 tion of Sight we have Ihewed in the preceding 
 Chapter. 
 
 5. HECLA a Mountain in Iceland.- 
 
 6. PICO de Adam in the Ifland of Ceylon. 
 
 7 . M O U N T Brufterus and Abnoba in Germany. 
 
 8. MOUNT Figenojamma in Japan is thought 
 to reach above the Clouds. 
 
 9. MOUNT Caucafus was thought to be of 
 an incredible Height by die Antients. 
 
 : . -iHT ,M 
 
 (b] It; is very likely this fine Brimftone, or Sulphur, 
 
 Mountain might burn former- flicking to them. Alfo at the 
 
 ly, for there is a Crater, or Bottom there are Stones which 
 
 Tunnel, on the Top, that pro- fhine, and look like Drofs that 
 
 duceth a fort of fulphureous comes out of a Smith's Forge; 
 
 Earth, which, being rolled up which, without Doubt, was 
 
 long-ways, and put to a Can- occafioned by the extream Heat 
 
 die, will burn like Brimftone; of the Place they came from, 
 
 and feveral Places upon the This is teftified by Mr Edens 
 
 Ledges of the Pike are even who made a Journey thither in 
 
 now burning or fmoaking ; and the Year 1715, which fee in 
 
 in fome Places, if you turn up Pbilof. Tranf. No. 345. Page 
 
 she Stoocs, you will find very 317. 
 
 I0 . PELION
 
 
 144 ?t> e dbfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 10. PELION [now Petras] a Mountain in 
 Macedonia. Pliny fays, that the Mathematician 
 Dicearcbus Siculut meafured this Mountain by the 
 Command, and at the Expence, of fome Princes, 
 and found it to be 1250 Paces, that is io Fur- 
 longs, or | of a German Mile : and Geminus tells 
 us, that the fame Dicearcbus found the Mountain 
 Cylltne to be of the fame Altitude. 
 
 11. MOUNT At bos was thought by Mela 
 to be fo high as to rife above the highefl Clouds, 
 and therefore never to be rained upon. This O- 
 pinion had it's Rife from the Ames which were 
 left upon the Altars, erected at the Top of it, 
 being not warned away, but found upon a Heap as 
 they had been left. It runs out with a long Ridge 
 into the Sea. Xerxes, when he made his Expedi- 
 tion to Greece, cut thro* this Mountain in that 
 Place where it is joined to the Continent, and let 
 the Sea in at the Breach, whereby it was made 
 navigable. 
 
 12. MOUNT Olympus in leffer Afia, of which 
 we have treated in the preceding Chapter. 
 
 13. CASIUS [now Lifon] a Mountain in A- 
 fia y which is faid by Pliny to the four Miles high. 
 
 14. MOUNT Hamut [now Balkan] is faid by 
 Martianus Capella to be fix Miles high. 
 
 15. THE Rock of Sifimetbra, Strabo tells us, 
 was found to be fifteen Furlongs high ; and the 
 Rock Sodiane twice the Height. 
 
 1 6. MOUNT Atlas in Africa, which we 
 fpoke of before. The Poets feigned it fo high, 
 that it fupported the Heavens upon it's Shoulders ; 
 but Experience hath taught us that it's Height is 
 not fo very confiderable. 
 
 PRO-
 
 CHAP. 10. of Univerfal Geography. 145 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 20 enumerate the remaining Differences cf Mo 
 
 I N the former Proportions we have explained 
 three Differences, viz. 
 
 1. SOME are extended in a long Tradt, o- 
 thers are bounded with narrow Limits. 
 
 2. S OM.E run thro' the middle of Countries, 
 others are extended here and there in them. 
 
 3. SO ME are of a remarkable Altitude, o- 
 thers of a middle, and fome very low. To theie 
 we may add, 
 
 4. S O M E are Cindy, others rocky, fome 
 chalky, and others of Clay, &c. 
 
 $. SOME produce Fountains and Heads of 
 Rivers, others are without them. 
 
 6. S O M E are adorned with Woods, others 
 are bare and deftitute of Trees. 
 
 7. S O M E are burning and fmoking, others 
 without Fire or Smoke. 
 
 -8. SOME Mountains yield Metals, as Gold, 
 Silver, Iron, &c. others produce no fort of 
 Metal. 
 
 9. S O M E are continually covered with Snow, 
 others have none in Summer. 
 
 PROPOSITION V, 
 
 To enumerate the burning Mountain^ andfucb as caft 
 out Fire. 
 
 SUCH Mountains are called Vulcano^ a Name 
 firft ufed by the Portuguese Sailors, and now they 
 are commonly fo called. 
 
 I . T H E moft famous of thefe is Mount Mtna y 
 (now Gibel} in Sicily t whofe Erupticns of Flame 
 
 VOL. I. L and
 
 146 The Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 and Smoke are difcovered at a great Diftance, by 
 thofe that fail on the Mediterranean^ even as far as 
 the Harbour of Malta, which is 40 German Miles 
 from the Shore of Sicily. Tho* Fire and Smoke 
 are continually vomited up by it, yet at fome 
 particular Times, it rages with greater Vio- 
 lence. In the Year 1536 it fhook all Sicily, from 
 the firft to the twelfth of May : after that, there 
 was heard a moft horrible bellowing and crack- 
 ing, as if great Guns had been fired : then were 
 a great many Houfes overthrown throughout the 
 whole Ifland. When this Storm had continued a- 
 bout eleven Days, the Ground opened in feveral 
 Places, and dreadful Gapings appeared here and 
 there, from which ifiiied forth Fire and Flame 
 with great Violence, which in four Days confumed 
 and burnt up all that were within five Leagues of 
 /Etna. A little after, the Funnel, which is on the 
 Top of the Mountain, difgorged a great Quantity 
 of hot Embers and Ames, for three whole Days 
 together, which were not only difperfed through- 
 out the whole liland, but alfo carried beyond Sea 
 to Italy -, and feveral Ships that were failing to Ve- 
 nice, at 200 Leagues diftance fufFered Damage (<:). 
 Farellus hath given us an Hiftorical Account of the 
 Eruptions of this Mountain, and fays, that the 
 Bottom of it is i oo Leagues in Circuit. 
 
 2. HRCLA, a Mountain in Iceland, rages fome- 
 times with as great Violence as Mtna, and cafts out 
 great Stones. The imprifoned Fire often, by want- 
 ing Vent, caufes horrible Sounds, like Lamenta- 
 tions and Howlings, which make fome credulous 
 People think it the Place of Hell, where the Souls 
 of the wicked are tormented. 
 
 (c) Mr QMenbcrge hath alfo na, which fee in Pbilof. Tranf. 
 given us an Hiftorical Account, N. 48. Pag. 967. 
 ef the Eruptions of Mount J5V- 
 
 . -VESUVIUS
 
 CHAP. 10. of Univerfal Geography. 147 
 3. VESUVIUS (now Monte de Soma) in Cam- 
 fama^ not far from the Town of Naples, tho* it be 
 planted with mod fruitful Vines, and at other 
 Times yieldeth the beft Mufcadd Wine ; yet it is 
 Very often annoyed with violent Eruptions ( d ). 
 
 Dion 
 
 (d) That the Reader may 
 have a better Idea of thefe turn- 
 ing Mountains, and their dread- 
 ful Eruptions, 1 Jkall tranfcribe 
 (from Philof. Tranf. N. 354. 
 Pag. 708.) an Extra ft of a Let- 
 ter of Mr Edward Berkeley 
 from Naples, giving an Account 
 of the Eruptions of Fire and 
 Smoke, from Mount Vefuvius. 
 Communicated to the Royal So- 
 ciety by Dr John Arbuthnot, 
 M. D. and R. S. S. as follows: 
 ' April if. 1 71 7. With much 
 Difficulty I reached the Top of 
 Vefuvius, in which I faw a vaft 
 Aperture fullof Smoke, which 
 hindred the feeing it's Depth 
 and Figure. I heard within 
 that horrid Gulph certain odd 
 Sounds, which feemed to pro- 
 ceed from the Belly of the 
 Mountain ; a fort of Murmur- 
 ing, Sighing, Throbbing , 
 Churning, dafhing (as it were) 
 of Waves, and between whiles 
 a Noife like that of Thunder 
 or Cannon, which was con- 
 ftantly attended with clatter- 
 ing, like that of Tiles falling 
 from the Tops of Houfes on 
 the Streets. Sometimes as the 
 Wind changed, the Smoke 
 grew thinner, difcovering a 
 very ruddy Flame, and the 
 Jaws of the Pan, or Crater, 
 itreaked with red, and feveral 
 fhades of Yellow. After an 
 Hour's Hay, the Smoke being 
 
 moved by the Wind, gave 
 us fhort and partial Pro- 
 fpefts of the great Hollow in 
 the flat Bottom, of which I 
 could difcern two Furnaces, al- 
 moft contiguous; that on the 
 left, feeming about 3 Yards 
 in Diameter, glowed with red 
 Flame, and threw up red hot 
 Stones, with a hideous Noife, 
 which as they fell back caufed 
 the forementioned clattering. 
 May 8. In the Morning I af- 
 cended to the Top of Velui.*- 
 us a fecond Time, and found 
 a different Face of Things. 
 The Smoke afcending up- 
 right, gave a full Profpeft of 
 the Crater, which as I cou'd 
 judge, is about a Mile in 
 Circumference, and a hun- 
 dred Yards deep. A conical 
 Mount had been formed fince 
 my laft Vifit in the middje 
 of rhe Bottom. This Mount 
 I could fee was made of the 
 Stones thrown up and fallen 
 back again into the Crater. 
 In this new Hill remained 
 the two Mouths or Furnaces 
 already mentioned : that on 
 our left Hand was in the Ver- 
 tex of the Hill, which it had 
 formed round it, and rnged 
 more violently than before, 
 throwing up every three or 
 four Minutes, with a dread- 
 ful bellowing, a v.ift Num- 
 ber of red hot Stones, fo,m- 
 L 2 times
 
 148 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 Dion Coffins relates, that in the Reign of Vefpafian^ 
 there was fuch a dreadful Eruption of impetuous 
 Flames, that great quantities of Afhes and fulphu- 
 reous Smoke were carried not only to Rome by the 
 Wind, but alfo, beyond the Mediterranean ^ into 
 
 Africa^ 
 
 ( times, in Appearance, above 
 1 1000, and at Jeaft 300, Foot 
 1 higher than my Head as I 
 1 flood upon the Brink. But 
 ' there being little or no Wind, 
 ' they fell back perpendicular- 
 1 ly into the Crater, increafing 
 ; the conical Heap. The other 
 1 Mouth was lower in the Side 
 of the fame new formed Hill, 
 ; I could difcern it to be filled 
 with red hot liquid Matter, 
 1 like that in the Furnace of a 
 Glafs-houfe, which raged 
 ; and wrought, as the Waves 
 of the Sea, caufing a fhort a- 
 brupt Noife, like what may 
 be imagined to proceed from 
 a Sea of Quickfilver, dafhing 
 among uneven Rocks. This 
 fluff would ibmetimes fpew 
 over, and run down the con- 
 vex Side of the conical Hill, 
 and appearing at firft red hot, 
 it changed Colour, and hard- 
 ned as it cooled, {hewing the 
 firil Rudiments of an Erup- 
 tion, or, if I may fo fay, an 
 Eruption in Miniature. Had 
 the Wind driven in our Face, 
 we had been in no fimll 
 Danger of Rifling by the ful- 
 phureous Smoke, or being 
 knocked, on the Head, by 
 lumps of molten Minerals, 
 which we law hjd fometimes 
 fallen on the Brink of the 
 Crater, upon thofe fhot from 
 the Gulph at the Bottom. 
 
 But as the Wind was favour- 
 able, I had an Opportunity 
 to furvey this odd Scene for 
 above an Hour and a half to- 
 gether; during which it was 
 very obfervable, that all the 
 Vollies of Smoke, Flame, and 
 burning Stones came only out 
 of the Hole to our left, while 
 the liquid fluff in the other 
 Mouth wrought and over- 
 flowed, as hath been already 
 defcribed. June 5. After a 
 horrid Noife, the Mountain 
 was feen at Naples to fpew a 
 little out of the Crater. The 
 fame continued the 6 th . The 
 7 tJ >. nothing was obferved 
 till within two Hours of 
 Night, when it began a hi- 
 deous bellowing, which con- 
 tinued all that Night, and 
 the next Day till Noon, cauf- 
 ing the Window?, and, as 
 fome affirm, the very Houfes 
 in Naples to fhake. From 
 that time it fpevved vaft 
 Quantities of molten Stuff to 
 the South, which ftreamed 
 down the Side of the Moun- 
 tain, like a Pot boiling over. 
 This Evening I returned from 
 a Voyage thro' dpulia, and 
 was furprized, paffing by the 
 North Side of the Mountain, 
 to fee a great Quantity of 
 ruddy Smoke lie along a huge 
 Traft of Sky over the River 
 of molten Stuff, which was 
 itfelf
 
 C H A p. io. of Unherfal Geography. 149 
 
 Africa^ and even into Egypt. Moreover, Birds 
 were fuffocated in the Air, and fell down dead 
 upon the Ground, and Fifhes perifhed in the 
 neighbouring Waters, which were made hot and 
 infeded by it. There happened another Eruption 
 
 in 
 
 itfelf out of Sight. The 9 th , 
 Vefuvius raged lefs violently ; 
 that Night we faw from Na- 
 ples, a Column of Fire moot 
 between whiles out of it's 
 Summit. The io th , when 
 we thought all would have 
 been over, the Mountain 
 grew very outragious again, 
 roaring and groaning moft 
 dreadfully. You cannot form 
 a jufler Idea of this Noife, in 
 the violent Fits of it, than 
 by imagining a mix'd Sound 
 made up of the raging of a 
 Tempeft, the murmur of a 
 troubled Sea, and the roaring 
 of Thunder and Artillery, 
 confufed all together. It was 
 very terrible, as we heard it 
 in the further End of Naples, 
 at the Diltance of above i 2 
 Miles. This moved my Cu- 
 riofity to approach the Moun- 
 tain. Three or four of us 
 got into a Boat, and were fet 
 afhore at Torre del Greco, a 
 Town fituate at the Foot of 
 Vefuvius to the South Weft, 
 whence we rode four or five 
 Miles before we came to the 
 burning River, which was a- 
 bout Midnight. The roaring 
 of the Vulcano grew exceed- 
 ing loud and horrible as we 
 approached. I obferved a 
 mixture of Colours in the 
 Cloud over the Crater, green, 
 yellow, red, and blue; there 
 was Ukewife a ruddy difmal 
 
 Light in the Air over that 
 Tradl of Land, where the 
 burning River flowed ; Ames 
 continually fhowered on us 
 all the Way from the Sea- 
 Coaft. All which Circum- 
 ftances, fet off and augmen- 
 ted by tlie horror and filence 
 of the Night, made a Scene 
 the moft .uncommon and a- 
 ftonifhing I ever faw ; which 
 grew ftill more extraordinary 
 as we came nearer the Stream. 
 Imagine a vaft Torrent of li- 
 quid Fire rolling from the 
 Top down the Side of the 
 Mountain, and \vith irrefilti- 
 ble Fury bearing down and 
 confuming Vines,. Olives, 
 Fig-trees, Houies, in a word, 
 every Thing that flood in it's 
 Way. The largeft Stream 
 feemed half a Mile broad at 
 leaft, and five Miles long. I 
 walked fo far before my Com- 
 panions up the Mountain, a- 
 long the Side of the River of 
 Fire, that I was obliged to 
 retire in hafle, the fulphure- 
 ous Steam having furprizcd 
 me, and almoft taken away 
 my Breach. During our Re- 
 turn, which was about three 
 o'Clock in the Morning, we 
 conftantly heard the murmur 
 and groaning of the Moun- 
 tain, which between whiles 
 would burlt out into louder 
 Peals, throwing up huge 
 fpouts of Fire, and burning 
 L 3 ' Stones,
 
 1 50 7 he Abfolute Part SECT. HI, 
 
 in Martial's Time, which he elegantly defcribes 
 in one of his Epigrams, and laments the fad Change 
 of the Mountain, which he faw firil in it's Ver- 
 dure, and immediately after black with Ames and 
 Embers. When the Burning ceafed, the Rain and 
 Pew watered the Surface of the Mountain, and 
 made thefe fulphureous Allies and Embers fruitful, 
 fo that they produced a large Increafe of excellent 
 Wine , but when the Mountain began to burn 
 again, and to difgorge Fire and Smoke afrem 
 (which fometimes happened within a few Years) 
 then were the neighbouring Fields burnt up, and 
 the High-ways made dangerous to Travellers. 
 
 4. A Mountain in Java, not far from the Town 
 of Panacura, in the Year 1586, was mattered to 
 Pieces by a violent Eruption of glowing Sulphur, 
 (tho s it had never burnt before) whereby (as it was 
 reported) i oooo People perifhed in the underland 
 Fields : it threw up large Stones, and caft them as 
 far as Pancras, and continued for three Days to 
 throw out fo much black Smoke, mixed with 
 
 Stones, which falling down 
 ag:.in, re'embled the Srars in 
 our Rockets. Sometimes I 
 observed two, at others three, 
 diilinfl Columns of Flame, 
 and fometimes one vaft one, 
 th.u feemetl to fill the whole 
 Crater. Thefe burning Co- 
 lumns, and the fiery Stones, 
 feemed to be fhot 1000 Foot 
 perpendicular above the Sum- 
 mit of the Vuhano. The \ i^ 
 at Night, I ohferved it from 
 a Terrafs at Naples, to throw 
 up incefiantly a vatt Body of 
 Fire and gre.it Stones, to a 
 furpr.'fing Height. Thei2 tf ? 
 in the Morning, it darkened 
 the Sun with Afh.es and 
 Smoke, caufing a fort of E- 
 
 clipfe. Horrid Bellowings, 
 this and the foregoing Day, 
 were heard at Naples, whi- 
 ther Part of the Afhes alfo 
 reached. Qn the 13 th , the 
 Wind changing, we law aPil- 
 hr of black Smoke fhoot up- 
 right to a prodigious Height. 
 The 1 5 th in the Morning, the 
 Court and Walls of our Houfe 
 in N.ipks were covered with 
 Afhes. In the Evening, 
 Flame appeared on the Moun- 
 tain thro' the Cloud. The 1 7^, 
 the Smoke appeared much di- 
 minifhec!, fat and greafy. The 
 i8' h , the whole Appearance 
 ended, the Mountain remain- 
 ing perfectly quiet without a- 
 ny vifible Smoke or Flame.' 
 
 Flame
 
 C H A P. I O. of Umverfal Geography. 1 5 1 
 
 f Flame and hot Embers, that it darkened the Face 
 
 of the Sun, and made the Day appear as dark as 
 the Night. 
 
 5. MOUNT Gonnapij in one of the Band* 
 Iflands, when it had burnt for 1 7 Years together, 
 in April 1586, broke out with a terrible bellowing 
 Noife, anddifgorged fuch large Quantities of great 
 Stones, and thick fulphureous burning Matter all 
 over the Sea and Land, that it threatned Deftru- 
 ftion to all that were near it. Hot Ames and Em- 
 bers were vomited out with fuch a Force, and in 
 fuch great Quantities, that they covered the great 
 Guns of the Dutch, which were planted upon the 
 Walls of their Citadel, and rendered them unfer- 
 viceable. Red hot Stones above a Span long, 
 were caft into the Sea, and fuch a Number of little 
 ones, that fmall Ships had fcarcely a free Pafiage 
 out of the Harbour. The Water near the Shore 
 was heaved up, and feemed to boil for feveral 
 Hours, as if it had been fet over a Fire ; and 
 feveral dead Fifties were found floating upon die 
 Surface. 
 
 6. MOUNT Balaluanum in Sumatra^ vomi- 
 teth Flame and Smoke as ^Etna doth. 
 
 7. T H E Ground in feveral Places in the Mo- 
 lucca Iflands belches out Fire with a raging Noife -, 
 but none are fo terrible as the Spiracle in the 
 Ifland Ternata. The Mountain, which is fteep 
 and difficult to afcend, is covered towards the 
 Bottom with thick Woods, but the Top which is 
 .elevated to the Clouds, is made bare and rugged 
 by the Fire, The Funnel is a vaft Hollow, which 
 goes fhelving down, and by Degrees becomes lefs 
 and lefs, like the infide of an Amphitheatre , from 
 whence, in Spring and Harveft Time, or about 
 the Equinoxes, when fome particular Winds blow, 
 ffpecially from the North, there are caft forth, with 
 a rumbling Noife, Flames mixed with black 
 
 L 4 Smoke,
 
 I ^2 be Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 Smoke, and hot Embers , whereby all the Places 
 far and near are ftrewed with Ames. The Inhabi- 
 tants vifit it at fome certain Times of the Year, to 
 gather Sulphur, tho' in fome Places the Hill can- 
 not be afcended, but t>y Ropes faftned to Iron 
 Hooks. 
 
 8. There is an Ifland about 60 Leagues from 
 the Moluccas^ (being one of thole that belong to 
 the Moors] which is often all together fhaken with 
 Earthquakes and Eructations of Fire and Ames in 
 abundance } fo that whole Rocks and Mountains 
 are often made red hot by the Heat of the fubter- 
 raneous Fire, and burning Stones are blown up in- 
 to the Air, as large as the Trunks of Trees. 
 When there is a brifker Wind than ordinary, fuch 
 Clouds of Ames are blown all over the Country, 
 that People labouring in the Fields are forced to 
 haften Home, half covered with them ; and 
 Boars, and other living Creatures, are found buried 
 in them, after the Storm is over. Fifhes near the 
 S'ja Shore are poifoned with the Ames, and Ib are 
 the Inhabitants if they tafte any of the Water 
 wherewith they are mixed. This difafterous black 
 and poifonous Fire breaketh out, from the Top of 
 a Mountain, with a difmal rumbling Noife like 
 Thunder-claps, or the report of great Guns, and 
 bringeth up with it abundance of Ames, and burnt 
 Pumice Stvnts. 
 
 9. THERE is a Mountain injapan^ which 
 continually vomiteth forth Flames ; where it is re- 
 ported the Devil mews himfelf, farrounded with 
 a bright Cloud, to fome particular Perfons after 
 they have, for Performance of their Vows, kept 
 themfelves lean for a long Time. 
 
 10. THERE are feveral other Vulcanos in 
 the Japan Iflands -, about feventy Miles from Fi- 
 randv there is one, and in a fmall Ifland between 
 Tanaxima and the Seven Sijien (Iflands fo named) 
 
 there
 
 CHAP, i o. of Umverfal Geography. 153 
 
 there is another, which now and then is obferved 
 to burn, and at other Times to fmoke. 
 
 11. NEAR the Cape Spirit u Sanfto in landa^a^ 
 one of the Philippines, there are found fome fmall 
 Vulcanos , and one in Marinda, which is a Part 
 of the faid Iflands. 
 
 12. IN Nicaragua a Province of America, thirty 
 Leagues from the Town of Leon, there is a Moun- 
 tain, of a vafl Height, which difgorgeth fuch 
 quantities of Flame, that they may be perceived 
 at ten Miles diilance. 
 
 13. IN the Peruvian Range of Mountains 
 (called the Cordilleras] there are in feveral Places 
 burning Rocks and Mountains, fome vomiting 
 Fire and Flame, and others fmoaking ; eipecial- 
 ly thofe in Carrapa a Province of Popaiana, which 
 are perceived in clear Weather to emit a deal of 
 Smoke. 
 
 14. NEAR Arequipa, a Town in Peru, 
 about ninety Leagues from Lima, there is a Moun- 
 tain which continually vomits fulphureous Fire, 
 which, the Inhabitants are afraid, will fome Time 
 or other burft and overthrow the Town adjacent 
 to it. 
 
 15. IN Peru, near the Vale called Mulahallo 9 
 about fifty Leagues from Quito, there is a Vulcano, 
 or fulphureous Mountain, which, fome Time fince, 
 burft and threw out great Stones, with a dreadful 
 Noife, which frighted People even at a great Di- 
 itance. 
 
 1 6. I N one of the Iflands called Papons, which 
 La Maire difcovered (tho 5 perhaps it be not an 
 Ifland, but is joined to the eaftern Shore of New 
 Guinea} there is a Mountain which, at that Time, 
 burnt and fmoked. 
 
 17. THERE are feveral Mountains fas the 
 ites tell us) in the Country of the Ton-Gvi- 
 
 fins,
 
 1 54 Th* Absolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 fas, upon the Eaft of the River Jenifer fome 
 Weeks Journey from the River Oby, wliich pro- 
 duce Vulcanos and fmoking Mountains. 
 
 1 8 . THERE are alfo fome of this fort near 
 the River Pefida beyond the Country of the Ton- 
 Gui/ins. 
 
 19. THERE is a Mountain in Fez, called 
 Beni-Gua-zeval, which hath a Cave in the Side 
 of it, that vomiteth out Fire, 
 
 20. IN Croatia, not far from the Sea- Shore 
 near the Town of Apolknia, there is a rocky 
 Mountain, from whole Top there often breaks out 
 Fire and Smoke , and, in the adjacent Places, 
 feveral of the Springs are hot. 
 
 THERE are alfo fome Mountains which 
 have left off burning ; fuch as that in the I (land 
 Queimoda upon the Shore of Brafil, not far from 
 the Mouth of the Silver River, or Rio de la Plata, 
 which burnt formerly, but now ceafes. Likewife 
 the Mountains in Congo or Angola ; alfo thofe in the 
 Azores (efpecially in Tercera and St Michael) which 
 ufed formerly to burn in feveral Places, but at 
 prefent only emit, now and then, Smoke and 
 Vapours -, whence they are annoyed with more 
 frequent Earthquakes. The Iflands of St Helena 
 and Afcenfton produce Earth which feems to be 
 compofed of Drofs, Afhes, and burnt Cinders ; 
 Co that in Time paft it is probable the Mountains 
 in thefe Iflands burned , and further, becaufe in 
 thefe, as well as in the Azores, there are found 
 iulphureous Earths and Slags, like die Recrements 
 of Smithy Coal, which are every Way fit to take 
 Fire, and make Smoke ; it will be no wonder if 
 ew Vulcanos mould, fome Time hence, be kind- 
 led and break forth in thefe Iflands ; for the Caufe 
 of thefe burning Mountains is a fulphureous and 
 
 bitumi-
 
 C H A P. I o. of Univerfal Geography. 
 
 bituminous Matter, which is contained and kind- 
 led in them (*). 
 
 (e) Earthquakes and Vulca- 
 nos are both produced from the 
 fame Caufe ; which may be thus 
 explained. Thofe Countries 
 which yield great ftore of Sul- 
 phur and Nitre, or where Sul- 
 phur is fublimed from the Py- 
 rites, are by far the moft inju- 
 red and incommoded by Earth- 
 quakes; for where there are fuch 
 Mines they muft fend up Exha- 
 lations, which meeting with fub- 
 terraneous Caverns, they muft 
 ftick to the Arches of them, as 
 Soot does to the Sides of our 
 Chimnies, where they mix 
 themfelves with the Nitre or 
 Saltpeter, which comes out of 
 thefe Arches, in like manner as 
 we fee it come out of the In- 
 fide of the Arch of a Bridge, 
 and fo makes a kind of Cruft, 
 which will very eafily take Fire. 
 There are feveral ways by which 
 this Cruft may take Fire, viz. 
 I . By the inflammable Breath of 
 the Pyrites, which is a kind of 
 Sulphur that naturally takes Fire 
 of itfelf. 2. By a Fermentation 
 of Vapours to a degree of Heat, 
 equal to that of Fire and Flame. 
 3. To the falling of fome great 
 Stone, which is undermined by 
 Water, and ftriking againft ano- 
 ther, produces fome Sparks 
 which fet Fire to the combufti- 
 ble Matter that is near; which, 
 being a kind of natural Gun- 
 Powder, at the Appulfe of the 
 Fire, goes oft" (if I may fo fay) 
 
 with a fudden Blaft or violent 
 Explofion, rumbling in the 
 Bowels of the Earth, and lift- 
 ing up the Ground above it, 
 fo as fometimes to make mife- 
 rable Havcck and Deftrudion, 
 'till it gets Vent or a Difchargc. 
 Burning Mountains and Vulca- 
 nos are only fo many Spiracles 
 ferving for the Difcharge of 
 this fubterranean Fire, when it 
 is thus preternaturally affembled. 
 And where there happens to be 
 fuch a Structure and Confor- 
 mation of the interior Parts of 
 the Earth, that the Fire may 
 pafs freely and without Impedi- 
 ment from the Caverns therein, 
 it aflembles unto thefe Spiracles, 
 and then readily and eafily get* 
 out, from Time to Time, with- 
 out fhaking or difturbing the 
 Earth. But where fuch Com- 
 munication is wanting, or the 
 Paffages not fufficiently large 
 and open, fo that it cannot come 
 at the faid Spiracles without firft 
 forcing and removing all Ob- 
 ftacles, it heaves up and mocks 
 the Earth, till it hath made it's 
 Way to the Mouth of the Vul- 
 cano; where it ruftieth forth, 
 fometimes in mighty Flames, 
 with great Velocity, and a ter- 
 rible bellowing Noife. See 
 Woodwards E/ay Page 157, 
 158. Robaufrs Pbyjtfs Pa rt 3 . 
 Chap. 9. S>#. 23, 24. Pbilof. 
 Vranj. NO 157. Pag. 512.
 
 156 T&e Abfolnte Tart SECT. III. 
 
 j * - >-*-. i, ,- ' |i n toi-Mf? 
 
 PROPOSITION .VI. 
 
 Some Ranges of Mountains afford no Apertures, as 
 ctfars afford many , and fame are difcontinued but 
 in one or two Places. 
 
 THESE Streights, or PafiTages, were for- 
 merly called fbffmopylee, of which the moft fa- 
 mous are, i . The ttermopyltg of Mount Oeta [or 
 Banina] in VbtJ/alia, [now called Bocca de Lupo] 
 which gave Name to the reft. 2. The Cafpian 
 Streights, thro' which there is a Pafiage between 
 the Cafpian Mountains. 3. The Pafiage thro' the 
 Ridge of the Cordilleras in Peru. 4. The Paffage 
 thro' the Mountains on the Weft-fide of the Ara- 
 lian Gulph, by which Merchandize is carried from 
 Aty/mia into Arabia. 5. The two PafTages thro* 
 Mount Caucafus, &V. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 When a Mountain rum out into the Sea, or feems 
 \to Mariners'] to overtop the reft of the Country , 
 it is called a Promontory, Cape, or Head-land. 
 3he mojl famous are, 
 
 1. THE Cape of Good Hope at the extream 
 Point of Africa, which muft be doubled by thofe 
 that fail into India. 
 
 2 . CAPE Viftory at the further end of the 
 Streights of Magellan. 
 
 3. CAPE Verd^ the moft weftern Point of Africa^ 
 where the Coaft begins to wind towards the Eaft, 
 
 4. CAPE Vincent in Spain. 
 
 5. T H E Promontory of Atlas was, fome 
 Ages ago, called a Head-land by Mariners, be- 
 caufe they fuppofed it unpaffable, or that if any 
 
 failed
 
 CHAP. io f ofUmverfal Geography. 
 failed beyond it they could not return fafe ; where- 
 fore it was the utmoft Bound of their Navigation 
 on the African Coaft. Other Promontories may 
 be feen in Maps. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 To Mountains are oppofed Chafms, deep Pits, and 
 Caves, -which are found in feme Places of the 
 Earth. 
 
 THERE is a flinking fulphureous Cave in 
 Ireland, which was formerly very famous, now 
 called St Patrick's Purgatory ; and in Italy there is 
 that called Grotto, del Cane (/). Leo Africanm 
 mentions one which emits Fire on a Mountain in 
 Fez, called Beni-gua-zeval. 
 
 I N Bardefay, an Ifland adjacent to the Princi- 
 pality of Wales in Britain, there is a Rock near 
 the Sea in which there is a Cave, unto which 
 if you apply your Ear, you will hear the Strokes 
 of a Hammer, the blowing of Bellows, and the 
 riling of Iron, as if it were in a Smith's Shop. 
 
 NOT far from the Town of BeJJe in Aquitain* 
 there is a Cave, called by the Natives Du Souley* 
 in which there is heard a Noife like Thunder in 
 the Summer Seafon. 
 
 I N fevend Places there are found among 
 Mountains, Vallies of fuch a prodigious Depth, 
 that they ftrike the Beholders with Horror, and 
 caufe a Giddinefs in the Head. 
 
 (f) See Stur mius Pbilof. pours which would otherwi r e, 
 
 Exercit. II. de Terra Mot. being imprifoned, occafion fre-' 
 
 Cbnp. 3. where fome of themoft quent Succuffions, and dreadful 
 
 eminent Specus's are enumera- Convulfions of the Earth. Set 
 
 ted, and lome of their Ufes, the Note above. And for more 
 
 viz- that they ferve for Spiracles to this purpofe, fee the Pbilo- 
 
 and Funnels to the Countries fopbical Tranfaftions, and French 
 
 where they are to vent and Memoirs: fa/Jim. 
 difcharge the Damps and Va- 
 
 CHAP.
 
 158 The Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Of Mines, Woods, andDefarts. 
 
 MINES, Woods, zndDefarts, make feveral 
 Tracts of the Earth remarkable, of which, 
 tho* but little can be faid, yet it will not be unne- 
 ceflary for the more perfect Knowledge of the Parts 
 of the Earth's Superficies, to confider thefe Places, 
 and to trace out their Situations , which we lhall 
 briefly do in this Chapter. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 Mines are Places in the Earth, out of which Metals^ 
 Minerals, and other Kinds of Earth are dug. 
 
 S O many different Kinds of Foflils as there are, 
 fo many various Names have their Mines, viz. 
 Gold- Mines, Silver-Mines, Copper -Mines, Iron- 
 Mines, Coed-Mines, Salt-Mines, and fuch as produce 
 Gems, &fr. 
 
 THE moft celebrated Gold and Silver-Mines, 
 are. 
 
 i . T H O S E of Peru, and Caftetta del O0,which 
 are the richeft in the World, yielding Gold and Sil- 
 ver in abundance, and not being deftitute of other 
 Metals ; infomuch that the Natives of Peru, and 
 the Spaniards uied to boaft, that this Kingdom was 
 founded upon Gold and Silver, Girava, a Spanijb 
 
 1 Writer
 
 CHAP. 11. of Umverjat Geography. 
 Writer affirms, that there were formerly Mines 
 about the Town of Quijo, which produced more 
 Gold than Earth. And when the Spaniards made 
 their firft Expedition into this Golden Country, they 
 found feveral Houfes, efpecially in the Regal City 
 Cufco, which were all covered over within and with- 
 out with Plates of mafTy Gold. And the Officers 
 of the Peruvian Forces, not only wore Silver Ar- 
 mour, but all their Arms were made of pure Gold. 
 The moft rich and advantageous Mine of Silver is 
 in the Mountains of Potofi, where 20000 Work- 
 men are daily employed to dig it, and carry it up 
 at leaft 400 Steps. Thefe Mines produce that vaft 
 Quantity of Gold and Silver, which the King of 
 Spain receives out of America every Year, to the 
 Mortification of other Kings and Potentates , and 
 which, he therefore keeps fortified with ilrong 
 Forts and Garrifons. 
 
 2. T H E R E are excellent rich Mines of Silver 
 in the Japan I (lands, whence they are called by the 
 Spaniards, the Silver Iflands. There are alfo fome 
 Mines of Gold found there , but thefe are not fo 
 rich as formerly. 
 
 3. THERE were more plentiful Gold-Mines 
 formerly in Arabia, than at prefent. 
 
 4. I N the Mountains of Perfia, and in China, 
 there are fome Silver-Mines. 
 
 5. I N Guinea there are feveral Mountains, that 
 produce Gold, but they are remote from the Shore, 
 and the Gold-Duft that is brought from thence, is 
 not dug out of the Ground , but gathered up and 
 down by the Natives. Their in- land Kings are how- 
 ever faid to poffefs each his Mine, the Product of 
 which he fells to the Neighbouring Merchants, and 
 they again to others, till it reaches the Sea-Shore, 
 where it is exclianged with the Europeans, 
 
 .6. IN
 
 160 The Abfolute Part SECT. Ill; 
 
 6. I N Monomotapa, there are found rich Mines 
 of Gold and Silver, and alfo in Angola, both which 
 are thought to be Parts of one continued Vein. 
 
 7. G E R MA NT excels the reft of the King- 
 doms of Europe for plenty of Mines, of which fome 
 produce fmall Quantities of Gold, others abundance 
 of Silver, and a great many of them Copper, Iron, 
 Lead, Vitriol, Antimony, &c. about which confult 
 the Descriptions of Germany. 
 
 8. SWEDEN 'is enriched with the beft Cop- 
 per-Mine of any hitherto difcovered ; it is in a vaft 
 high Mountain, which they call Kopperberg, out of 
 which as much Copper is dug as makes up a third 
 Part of the King's Revenue. Here are alfo Iron-' 
 Mines, and fome Silver- Mines, but they fcarcely 
 defray the Expence of digging them. 
 
 9. THERE are Mines of precious Stones found 
 in the Ifland of Ceylon, and alfo in Congo ( where 
 there is a Silver-Mine, and fo much Marble, that 
 the Earth under Ground is thought to be all Mar- 
 ble ) and in Peru, about Portovejo in Smaragdina ) 
 and in Guiana, near the Coail of which there is a 
 fmall Ifland, called St Maria, which yields abun- 
 dance of Gold , even i oo Pound Weight every 
 Year, if we may believe the Dutch. In the King- 
 dom of Golunda , there is a Mine which yieldeth 
 precious Stones , particularly Diamonds in abui> 
 dance, but it is not now dug. 
 
 i o. I N Chili, there are Mines yielding Gold, Sil- 
 ver, and Gems, but the warlike Inhabitants, fet- 
 ting more by Iron Weapons than Gold or Silver, 
 have partly killed, and partly driven away the Spa- 
 niards , and demolifhed the Mines that were but 
 newly begun. 
 
 ii. THE Ifland Madagascar abounds in Iron 
 and Tin, with a moderate Quantity of Silver, a little 
 Gold, but no Lead. Wherefore the Natives value 
 Lead Spoons above Silver ones. 
 
 12. IN
 
 C H A p. 1 1 . of Umverjat Geography. 1 6 1 
 
 12. IN the Ifland of Sumatra, it is reported, 
 that there are rich Mines of Gold, Silver, Brafs, and 
 Iron ; and that the King in one Year (viz. 1 62p ) 
 received into his Treafure 1000 Pound Weight of 
 Gold. 
 
 13. I N the Philippine Iflands, and in Java, Hi- 
 fpaniola, Cuba, and others ; there are found Mines 
 of Gold, Silver, Copper, and Iron : and in the 
 Mountains of Siam there is got Gold, Silver, and 
 Tin. 
 
 14. THERE are Mines of Salt in Poland at Pocb- 
 nia, four Miles from Cracow ; ( where huge Lumps 
 of tranfparent white Salt are cut out of the Ground) 
 in Tranfifaania, in the County of 'Tyrol in Spain, in 
 Leffer Afea, and in Places near the Cafpian Sea, not 
 far from the River JVolga , over-againft the Ifland 
 Kiftowat, where the Ruffians dig their Salt and boil 
 it to a more pure Subflance, and after tranfport it 
 to all Parts of Ruffia, Jn Cuba, there is a whole 
 Mountain of Salt. All the Mountains in the Ifland 
 of Ormus, at the Mouth of the Perfian Gulph, are 
 of Salt, which may be gathered in any Part of them, 
 in fuch great Quantities, that the very Walls of their 
 Houfes are built of cryftalline Salt. In a Valley in 
 Peru, about eighteen Miles from Lima to the North- 
 ward , are found deep and large Pits of Salt, 
 where every one may take away what Quantity he 
 pleafes, beeaufe it continually increafeth, and feenv 
 eth impoflible to be exhaufted. In Africa there is 
 no other Salt ufed, but fuch as is dug out of Pits, 
 or Quarries, like Marble, of a white, greenifh, or 
 Afh, Colour. All India fetch their Salt from the 
 great Salt-Mines of Bagnagar in Cormandel, &c. 
 We fhall treat of Salt-Springs in another Chapter. 
 
 VOL. f, M PRO-
 
 162 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 A Wood is a multitude of Trees extended over a large 
 IraEt of Land, which fpring up without planting, 
 and grow without being cultivated. 
 
 S EVE R A L Woods produce only one fort of 
 Trees, from which they receive their Names ; fo 
 that as there is a great Variety in Trees, there is 
 alfo the fame in Woods, viz. Palm Woods, Oak 
 Woods, Ofier Woods, Beech Woods, &c. Groves and 
 Forefts, are alfo thus diftinguifhed. Divers Coun- 
 tries, especially thofe more remote, produce diffe- 
 rent Sorts of Woods. In Africa, about Cape Verd, 
 there are whole Woods of Lemon and Orange- 
 Trees, which the Sailors may pluck for a very 
 fmall Matter. In France, there are whole Woods of 
 Chefnut-Trees : In Ceylon there are Woods of 
 Trees, whofe Bark yieldeth Cinnamon : In the Mo- 
 lucca Iflands, there grow Clove-Trees : In the Ban- 
 da Iflands, there groweth plenty of Nutmegs : In 
 Brazil there groweth a hard fort of Wood, which 
 we call Brazil Wood : In Africa, efpecially in Nu- 
 midia, there grow Grapes, of which are made Rai- 
 fins of the Sun : In the Ifland Madagafcar, and in 
 other Places of India, there are Trees which bear 
 Tamarinds : In Mount Lebanon there are Cedars, 
 and whole Woods of them in Japan ; of which they 
 make Marts of Ships. In Spain, France, and Italy , 
 there are whole Woods of Olive and Myrtle Trees. 
 In Germany there are Woods that produce Fir, 
 Oak, Alder, Beech, Pine, Juniper, Maple, Po- 
 plar, Am, and Elm. 
 
 THE moft noted Woods are, the Hercynian 
 Foreft, which formerly overfpread almoft all 
 Germany, and at this Day taketh up large Tracts of 
 Land in feveral Countries, and under feveral Names. 
 
 The
 
 C H A p. 1 1. of Univerfal Geography. 163 
 The ancient Caledonian Wood in Scotland, with feve- 
 ral others in other Countries ; efpecialJy in Nor- 
 way, where there grow more large Trees than in 
 any other Country, and from whence all Europe 
 procures Mafts for their Shipping. Lithuania is 
 alfo overfpread with Woods, and Forefts ; ; from 
 whence large Taxes are raifed for the King of Po- 
 land. 
 
 PROPOSITION .III. 
 
 Defarts are vaft Drafts of Land uninhabited by Men. 
 
 THESE are of two forts, fuch whofe Soil is 
 barren and unfruitful, properly called Defarts; and 
 fuch whofe Ground is fertile enough, but are never- 
 thelefs faid to be defart, becaufe they are unculti- 
 vated by Men. In Mufcovy, and in Places near the 
 Cafpian Sea, along the Banks of the Wolga , there 
 are large Tracts of fertile and fat Meadow Ground, 
 which lie defart and uncultivated -, in the former 
 Place, by reafon of it's Plenty, and the Lazinefs of 
 the Inhabitants : And in the later, by the Wars of 
 Tamerlane, when thefe Countries were laid wafte, 
 and depopulated. But fuch as thefe are impro- 
 perly called Defarts. 
 
 THERE are four kinds of Defarts (properly 
 fo called) viz. fandy Defarts, marjhy Defarts, ftony 
 Defarts, and heathy Defarts ; which laft produce 
 Woods and Forefts in feveral Places, and are 
 more ufeful and eafy to be cultivated. 
 
 i . THE Defarts of Africa are almoft all fandy, 
 and there is not any part of the Earth fo much 
 over-run with Defarts. Thofe in Libya furround 
 all Egypt; and are accounted the largeil upon 
 Earth. 
 
 M 7. 2. THE
 
 164 The Abfilute Part SECT. III. 
 
 2. THE Defarts of Arabia, are fomeofthem 
 fandy, and others ftony : the greateft is vulgarly 
 called the Sand-Sea. 
 
 3. THE Defarts about the Mountain Imaiis. 
 The fandy Defart of [Kama] in Mongul, where the 
 rich Kingdom of Catbaia formerly was (tho ? falfly) 
 fuppofed to be. 
 
 4. THE Defarts of Cambodia. 
 
 5. THE rocky Defarts of Nova Zembla. 
 
 6. T H E Defarts of Norway, Lapland, Sweden, 
 and Finland. 
 
 7. T H E Defarts of Germany, are all Heath -, 
 hence thofe in Lunenburg, are called Lunenburg- 
 tJeath, &c. 
 
 SECT.
 
 CHAP. 12. ofUniverfal Geography. 165 
 
 SECT. IV. 
 
 Containing HTDRO GRAPHT-, which 
 is explained infix Chapters. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Divifion of the Ocean by the Interpofition of 
 Lands. 
 
 HA V I N G treated of the Divifion of the Earth > 
 and it's Parts, in the foregoing Chapters ; 
 Order requires that we alfo confider the Situation 
 and Divifion of the WAFERS , which make 
 the other Part of the Terraqueous Globe , and 
 explain fuch of their Properties as belong to Geo- 
 graphy. 
 
 I N the fecond Propofition of Chapter vii. we 
 divided the Waters into four Species, viz. i . The 
 Ocean and Seas. 2. Rivers and frefh Water. 3. 
 Lakes and Marines. 4. Mineral Waters. In this 
 Chapter we fhall Difcourfe of the Divifion of the 
 Ocean. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 The Ocean, in a continued Extent, encompajjeth the 
 whole Earth, and all it's Parts, nor is it's Superficies 
 any where interrupted, cr altogether broken by the 
 inter pofed Earth ; only a larger Traft of Sea, or a 
 wider Communication is in fame Places wanting. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition cannot be 
 
 proved but by Experience, which is chiefly gained 
 
 M 3 by
 
 1 66 Tke Mfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 by failing round the Earth, which hath been often 
 attempted and happily accomplimed ; firft by the 
 Spaniards under Capt. Magellan, who firft diicove- 
 red the Streights, called by his Name ; then by the 
 Englijh, viz. by Sir Francis Drake, Sir Thomas Ca- 
 vendijh, and others , after by the Dutch, &c. 
 
 THE Antients never doubted that the O- 
 cean was .thus continued , for they fuppofed the 
 old World to be raifed above the Waters , and 
 every where furrounded thereby (and fome of them 
 thought it floated). But when America was dif- 
 covered (which is extended in a long Tract from 
 North to South, and feems to hinder tjie Conti- 
 nuation of the Ocean ) and alfo the Arctic and 
 Antarctic Continent, then they began to think o- 
 therwife ; for they imagined, that America was join- 
 ed to fome Part of the South Continent ( which 
 was not unlikely ) in like Marnier as moil of our 
 modern Geographers, fuppofe that North America 
 is joined to Greenland. If both thefe Conjectures 
 had been true, then indeed the Ocean had not en- 
 compafled the whole Earth. But Magellan removed 
 all Doubts and Scruples about it, by difcovering, in 
 the Year 1520, the Streights between America and 
 the South Continent, which join the Atlantic to the 
 Pacific Ocean. What therefore the Antients hap- 
 pened to ftumble upon, by a wrong way of ar- 
 guing, we have found out to be a real Truth by 
 Experience. The fame may be faid about Africa ; 
 for the Antients, without any Hefitation, fuppofed 
 it to be bounded to the Southward by the Ocean, 
 and not to be extended fo far beyond the Equa- 
 tor, as it really is , but when the Portuguese had fail- 
 ed along the weftern Coaft of Africa, and found 
 it to be extended a great way beyond the Equator, 
 it was queftioned whether Africa could be failed 
 round ( fo far as to afford a PafTage to India ), 
 that is, whether Africa was extended Southward or 
 
 encom-
 
 C H A P. 1 2 . of Univerfal Geography. 1 67 
 encompafled by the Ocean. But this Doubt was 
 alfo removed by Vafco di Gramma -, who, in the 
 Year 1497, firft failed round the moft fouthern 
 Promontory of Afric, called, 'The Cape of Good- 
 Hope -, which Name it had received from John II, 
 King of Portugal, in the Year 1494, when Bar- 
 tbel Diaz ( who firft returned from it, tho* he did 
 not double the Cape for want of Provifion, and 
 by Reafon of tempeftuous Weather ) had given 
 him a large Account of the itormy troubled Sea 
 about this Promontory. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 The Ocean, taken altogether ', is formed by the Land 
 into fever al Portions, of which there are three Spe- 
 cies , viz. i. Oceans, or great Seas. 2. Bays or 
 ' Gulphs. 3. 'Streights. 
 
 1 . THE Word Ocean is taken in a double 
 Senfe, fometimes for that general Collection of Wa- 
 ters which furround the whole Earth : and very of- 
 ten for a Part of that Collection, which is joined 
 on both fides to other Parts by broad Tracts. 
 Thus we fay , The Atlantic Ocean , The German 
 Ocean, The Ethiopic Ocean, and Indian Ocean. We 
 mall here ufe the Word Ocean fometimes in the 
 later Senfe according to Cuftom, inftead of Sea ; 
 which alfo is a Part of the whole Ocean, becaufe 
 the Word Sea is often ufed in a fomewhat dif- 
 ferent Senfe, as will be fhewed by and by. 
 
 2. A BAY, orGulph, is a Part of the Ocean 
 which flows between two Shores, and is every where 
 environed with Land, except where it communi- 
 cates with other Bays, or the main Ocean. It is 
 very often called a Sea. 
 
 A STR EIGHT is a narrow Paflage, ei- 
 ther joining a Gulph to the Neighbouring Ocean, 
 M 4 or
 
 168 fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 or one Part of the Sea or Ocean to another. Thefe 
 Differences are found in the Ocean, as will appear 
 from what tollows. 
 
 PROPOSITION lit. 
 
 *fbe mam Ocean is divided into four large and parti- 
 cular Parts, 'which are alfo each of them called Oce- 
 ans, and anfwer to the four Continents, or great 
 Ijlands of the Earth. Thefe are, 
 
 1 . T H E Atlantic Ocean, which is placed be- 
 tween the weftern Shore of the old World, and the 
 eaftern Shore of the new World. It is alfo called 
 the weftern Ocean, becaufe it lieth to the weftward 
 of Europe. It is beft divided into two Parts, by 
 the Equator , whereof the one is contiguous to the 
 Hyperborean Ocean, the other to the Icy or South 
 Sea. 
 
 2. T H E Pacific Ocean, or great South Sea, 
 which is placed between the weftern Shore of Ame- 
 rica and Afea, and is extended to China, and the 
 Philippine Iflands. 
 
 3. THE Hyperborean, or northern Ocean, a- 
 bout the Arftic Continent. 
 
 4. THE fouthern Ocean , about the South 
 Continent, of which the Indian Ocean is a Part, 
 
 OTHER Geographers divide the main Ocean 
 into four Parts, after this Manner : They make 
 the Atlantic one Part, but do not extend it beyond 
 the Equator, where they begin the Ethiopic : They 
 alfo reckon with us the Pacific, and add thereto 
 the Indian , but we , in our Divifion, have more 
 regard to the four great Continents. Some make 
 but three Parts, viz. the Atlantic, Pacific, and In- 
 dian ; but then they extend the Atlantic further. 
 Let every one ufe what Divifion he likes beft, it is 
 
 no
 
 ' . W 
 
 C H A P. 1 2 . of Umverfal Geography. 169 
 no great matter which , for thefe are not made by 
 Nature, but contrived by the Fancy. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 Some Parts of the Ocean borrow a Name from the 
 Countries which they bound. 
 
 THUS we fay the German Ocean, the Briti/b 
 Sea, the Indian Ocean, the Gulph of Venice* &c. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Some Bays are oblong, others broad ; fome primary, 
 and others fecondary ; the former flow out of the 
 Ocean , the latter out of fome other Bay : and fucb 
 may be called Arms or Branches. The oblong are, 
 
 i . THE Mediterranean Sea, which breaks out 
 from the Ocean, between Spain and Barbary ; and 
 runs a long fpace between Europe and Africa, even 
 as far as Syria, Afia-minor and Thracia. The entrance 
 is called by way of Eminence the Streights. Hence 
 to fail up the Streights, is to vifit by Sea, Italy Greece , 
 Syria, Sicily, Venice, and the reft of the Countries 
 that lie upon the Coaft of this Bay. 
 
 THERE are feveral fecondary Bays, or Arms, 
 which proceed from it, viz. the Adriatic, Sea, or 
 Gulph of Venice, the Archipelago, &c. 
 
 I T may be reafonably enquired, whether the 
 Euxine Sea be a Part of this Bay. Of which fee 
 Chap. xv. 
 
 THE Mediterranean hath divers Names from 
 the feverai Coafts it reaches ; on the North it hath 
 Spain, France, Italy, Sicily, Sclavonia, Greece, Can- 
 dia, Romania, Afia-minor ; on the South it hath 
 Morocco, Fez, Tunis, Tripoli, Egypt. From whence 
 k is called the Gulph of Lyons, the Tufcan Sea, the 
 
 Ionian
 
 170 The Abfolute Part S E CT. IV. 
 
 Ionian Sea, the Levant, &c. It is extended from Weft 
 to Eaft, and receives into it many Rivers. 
 
 2. THE Baltic (or Eaft Sea, improperly fo cal- 
 led) breaketh out from the Ocean between Zeeland 
 and Gotland, part of the Continent of Sweden, and 
 alfo between Zeeland and Jutland, from whence it 
 flows a long way to the South-Eaft, and afterwards 
 winding to the northward, it reaches a prodigious 
 length between the Provinces of Mecklenburg, Pome- 
 rania, Courland, and Livonia, on the Eaft ; and on 
 the Weft, Sweden and Lapland. It fends out two 
 Arms, viz. the BotbnicRay, and the Gulphof Fin- 
 land -, to which may be added the Livonian Sea, or 
 Gulph of Riga. It receiveth feveral great Rivers. 
 
 3. T H E Arabian Gulph, or Red Sea, floweth out 
 of the Indian Ocean between Aden, a Town in Ara- 
 lia, and Cape Mujledon in Africa, having Africa on 
 the W T eft, and Arabia on the Eaft. It runs to the 
 Eaftward as far as the Ifthmus of Africa, to the 
 Town of Suez, where there is a Harbour for the 
 Turkijb Fleet, and receiveth only a few fmall Rivers, 
 but not one out of Africa. It is extended from the 
 South-Eaft to the North- Weft. 
 
 4. THE Perfian Gulph [or Gulph of Balfora] 
 floweth out of the Indian Ocean, near the Ifland of 
 Ormus, from the South-Eaft to the North -Weft, 
 between Perfia on the Eaft, and Arabia on the Weft, 
 as far as the ancient Cbald&a, where it receiveth the 
 Euphrates and Tigris, joined a little before in one 
 Chanel ; but few Rivers of note befides. 
 
 5. THE Gulph of California, or Red-Sea, runs 
 from South to North, between the Weft of Mexico 
 in America and California, and ends at Tatonteac, an 
 unknown Part of America. Modern Difcoverers 
 will have California to be an Ifland ; and this not to 
 be a Gulph or Bay, but a Streight or Sea (a). 
 
 (a) See Note (e) Chap. viii.
 
 CHAP. 12. ofUnherfal Geography. 171 
 6. T H E Gulph of Nankin [or Gang] runs north- 
 wards, between Corea and China, towards Tartary, 
 where fome place Tenduc, in the Kingdom of Ca- 
 tbaia : others will have Corea to be an Ifland. It 
 receiveth but a few Rivers. 
 
 T O thefe may be added feveral leffer Bays, fuch 
 as the Gulph Cambaya, &c. Only the two firft of 
 thefe, viz. The Mediterranean and the Baltic, afford 
 fecondary Bays. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 The broad and open Bays arefeven in Number , viz. 
 
 1 . T H E Gulph or Sea of Mexico, which flows 
 out of the Atlantic Ocean from Eaft to Weft , be- 
 tween North and South America, where it is flop- 
 ped by the long Ifthmus that joins thefe two Conti- 
 nents, and feparates the Atlantic from the Pacific 
 Ocean. It receiveth a great many Rivers and for 
 Multitude of Iflands may compare with the Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 2. THE Gulph of Bengal, or Ganges, ftrikes 
 out from the Indian Ocean, towards the North, be- 
 tween India and the Peninfula of Malacca , it i$ 
 bounded by Orixa, Bengal, Pegu, &c. Kingdom? 
 of India, and receives, befides the Ganges, a great 
 many famous Rivers. 
 
 3. THE Bay of Siam, between Cambodia and 
 Malacca, is extended northward to the Kingdom 
 of Siam. 
 
 4. T H E White-Sea , or Ruffian Gulph, flows 
 from the Northern Ocean towards the South, be- 
 tween Lapland, and the remote Shores of RuJJia. It 
 flretcheth out an Arm towards Lapland, and endeth 
 at Archangel in Mufcovy ; which is a Mart much 
 frequented by the Englijh and Dutch. It receives 
 feveral great Rivers. 
 
 5. THE
 
 172 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 5. THE Lantcbidal Sea, is a Bay between [New 
 Holland] and New Guinea ; two Peninjula's of the 
 South Continent. It is extended Southward, and 
 terminated at Carpentaria. 
 
 6. THERE is another Gulph a little to the 
 weftwardofthe laft, between [Nuyt's Land] and 
 Van Diemen's Land (two Sea Captains, by whom 
 thefe Parts were difcoveredj. 
 
 7. HUDSON'S Bay is bounded by New Britain, 
 New France, New Denmark, &c. and runneth out of 
 the Northern Ocean. To which may be added, 
 Baffin's Bay, the Bay of Bifeay, &c, 
 
 PROPOSITION VIL 
 
 Streights either join the Ocean to the Ocean , or tbf 
 Ocean to a Bay, or one Bay to another. 
 
 O F Straights we reckon fifteen, viz. 
 
 i. T H E Streights of Magellan, tho* they may 
 yield to others for Antiquity, are neverthelefs, ac- 
 counted very famous for their exceeding long Reach, 
 thro* which there is a free PafTage from the Atlan- 
 tic to the Pacific Ocean. The Streight is in Length, 
 from Eaft to Weft one Hundred and ten Leagues ; 
 but the Breadth is various , in fome Places two 
 Leagues, one League , and in fome Places but a 
 quarter of a League. Magellan firft difcovered it, 
 and failed thro* it in the Year 1520., Tno J it is re- 
 ported, that Vafcus Nunnius of Balboa, l^d before 
 (viz. in the Year 1513) taken notice of it when 
 he failed that Way, to make Difcoveries to the 
 Southward. It lierh in 52 degr. 30 mm. South La- 
 titude, between Patagon, a Part of South America 
 on the North, and the Iflands of Terra del Fuego on 
 the South. 
 
 2. A little further, to the fouthward, are the 
 Streights of La Maire> which are much ihorter than 
 
 thofe
 
 CHAP. 12. of Uniwrfal Geography. 
 
 thofe of Magellan. They have a Part of the South 
 
 Continent on the Eaft, and the Iflands of Terra del 
 
 Fuego on the Weft. A Paffage is more expediti- 
 
 ouQy made thro* thefe into the great South-Sea, 
 
 than the other, They lie in 54 degr. 30 min. South 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 3 . T H E Streights of Manila, between Luconla 
 and Mindanao, and others of the Philippine Iflands, 
 are faid to be one hundred Leagues in Length, and 
 are a very dangerous Paflage to Ships, by reafon 
 of dreadful Quick-fands in feveral Places. They 
 are extended from Eaft to Weft, and join, in part, 
 the Pacific to the Indian Ocean, which are alfo not 
 far from thence, joined by broader Streights in ma- 
 ny Places. 
 
 4. T H E R E are feveral other Streights among 
 the Indian Ifles, and between them and the Conti- 
 nent ; as between Ceylon and India ; between Suma- 
 tra and Malacca , between Sumatra and Java, &c, 
 
 5. T H E Streights of Way gats, thro' which 
 there is fuppofed to be a Paflage from the Ruffian 
 or North Sea, into the Tartarian Ocean ; but it is 
 fo Ihut up with Ice, that it never could be failed 
 thro* by the Europeans (). It lies between Samoie- 
 da and Nova Zemtta. 
 
 6. T H E Icy Sea, between Nova Zembla and 
 Spitsbergen, or New Greenland. 
 
 7. DAVIS's Streights, between North America 
 and Greenland, have not been yet failed thro ; there- 
 fore we are in a doubt, whether it be a Streight or 
 a narrow Sea. 
 
 8. FQRBISHER's Streights, which afford a 
 Paflage from the Atlantic Ocean into Hudforfs Bay. 
 
 9. THE Streights of Anian, between North 
 America and Tartary in Afta, through which there 
 }s faid to be a Paflage between the Tartarian Ocean, 
 
 (b)
 
 174 fh Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 and the Pacific Sen \ but this is as yet unfettled. 
 They who have failed in that Part of the Pacific 
 Ocean pretend to be certain, that there are 
 Streights, or Sea, both between America and Tar- 
 tar -y, and alfo between America and Greenland r , by 
 reafon that for feven hundred Leagues from Japan 
 towards North America, the Currents fet ftrongly 
 from the North North- Weft, tho* the Wind be va- 
 riable, and blow from other Points of the Compafs : 
 but when they are come within one hundred Leagues 
 of New Spain, thefe Currents ceafe, and others flow 
 to the Northward, as if it were to fome broad Sea 
 on the North of New Spain. Alfo in thefe feven 
 hundred Leagues failing, Whales are daily feen, 
 and other forts of Fifh, that are known to delight 
 in Streights and narrow Seas, which it is proba- 
 ble, come from the Streights of Anian, to that Part 
 of the Pacific Ocean ; becaufe they are not found 
 elfewhere (c}. However, feveral of our modern 
 Geographers take no notice of thefe Streights, but 
 place a vaft unknown Ocean, between Tartary or 
 Core a and America. 
 
 10. THE Streights of Gibraltar, thro' which 
 the Atlantic Ocean gufheth into the Mediterranean 
 Sea. They lie between Spain and Africa, and are 
 about two Leagues over at the ftraiteft Place, but 
 much longer. The Ancients believed that there 
 
 (c) It is certain the Sea of Whale pafled from Spitsberg 
 
 Corea and Japan, is annexed thro* the neareft Arm of the 
 
 to the Tartaric Ocean, and alfo Sea, rather than thro' the more 
 
 to the Sea of Green/and; be- remote. But be it how it will, 
 
 caufe that fome Hollanders af we may hence fafely conclude, 
 
 firm, (who were fhipwreck'd that the Sea which lies beyond 
 
 upon Corea, a Peninfula of Japan and Spitsberg, is pafla- 
 
 Cbina) that they faw there a ble ; and thro* more perhaps 
 
 Whale, upon whofe Back ftuck than one Arm or Chanel, by 
 
 a Harpon Iron of Gafcony, which they communicate, . Set 
 
 which not being queftioned Note (a) Chap. viii. and Pbilof. 
 
 by any, it is mod probable Tranfaft. abridged by Lowtborp. 
 
 to be conjeftured, that this Vol. iii. Page 612. 
 
 were
 
 CHAP. 12. of Univerfal Geography. 
 were no fuch in the firft Ages of the World, but 
 that they were made by the breaking in of the Sea 
 upon the Land. 
 
 n. THE Streights of Denmark [or the SoundJ 
 lie between Zeeland and Scbonen, thro* which the 
 Atlantic, in part, flows into the Baltic, where they 
 are ftraitelt. They are about half a German Mile 
 over. Near to this there are two other fmall 
 Streights, the one between Zeeland and Funen, and 
 the other called the Belt, between Funen and Jut- 
 land. 
 
 12. T H E Streights of BaMmandel, at the 
 Mouth of the Arabian Gulph, near the Sea-Port 
 Aden, thro' which there is a Paflage out of the 
 Indian Ocean into the Red-Sea. 
 
 13. THE Streights [ofOrmus] at the Mouth, 
 of the Perfian Gulph, are not properly ib called, 
 becaufe they are but little narrower than the Gulph 
 itfelf. 
 
 14. THE Hellefpont, a Streight famous among 
 the Grecians, thro' which there is a Paflage from 
 the Archipelago to the Propontis , near to this there 
 is another narrow Sea, called the Tbracian Bofpbo- 
 rui, which joins Propontis to the Euxine Sea. 
 
 15. T H E Faro, or Streights, of Me/ma, be- 
 tween Italy and Sicily. 
 
 MANY have been of Opinion, that there were 
 Streights fomewhere northward of Virginia, which 
 is in 40 degr. North Latitude, whereby the Atlantic 
 is joined to the Pacific Ocean, and thro* which they 
 might find a free and open Paflage to China, and 
 the Philippine Iflands : but this, in the Year 1 609, 
 was in vain attempted thro* Hudson's Streights. 
 
 THUS have we explained and pointed out the 
 Parts of the Ocean, diflinguifhed by the Situation of 
 the Land, in like manner as in Chapter viii. we de- 
 fcribed the different Plans of Countries, occafioned 
 by the breaking in of the Ocean. That the Geo- 
 grapher
 
 176 fbe Abfolutt Part SECT. IV. 
 
 grapher may keep all thefe in his Memory, it will 
 not be unferviceable to him to trace out the Peri- 
 meter of the Sea Coaft, and to take a tranfient 
 View of the Shores and Bounds of each Country, 
 and alfo how they are fituated, and joined one to 
 
 PROPOSITION VIIL 
 
 b trace out the Sea Coafts, that environ the four 
 Quarters of the Earth ', viz. The old and new World, 
 and the North and South Continent.'} 
 
 i. THE old World, (comprehending Europe, 
 Aft a, and Africa,} is extended northward to the 
 Streights of Waygats, adjoining to Samoieda ; up- 
 on the Weft of which is the Kingdom of Mufco^ 
 vy, where the White Sea is received into a large 
 Bay from the North ; on the further Side of which 
 is Lapland, and next to that, on the Weft, Norway, 
 whofe Shore runs North and South i then winding 
 to the Eaft, we came to the Shore of Gotland and 
 Schonen, where there is a Gulph that receiveth the 
 Baltic Sea, which is bounded by Sweden, Finland, 
 Livonia, Pruffia, Courland, Pomerania^ Mecklenburg, 
 Holftein, and Jutland ; then turning fouthward on 
 the further Side of Jutland and Holjlein, we find 
 the Shores of Weftphalia, Holland, Flanders, France, 
 and Spain ; where there is another Inlet that re- 
 ceives into a vaft Bay the Mediterranean Sea, which 
 is hemmed in by Spain, France, My, Sclavonia, 
 Greece, Romania, Afia minor, Egypt, Barbary, an4 
 Morocco, over-againft the Spanijh Shore ; then we 
 turn along the Weftern Shore of Africa, to Cape 
 Ver d -, and from thence the Shore bends eaftward 
 along Guinea, and fouthward by Congo and Angola^ 
 to the Cape of Good Hope ; where it is again refle- 
 dted northward, and gives Bounds to Sofala % Zam-
 
 CHAP. 12* of Umverfa! Geography. 1 77 
 
 guebar, and [Anian] -, here the Arabian Gulph, or 
 Red-Sea, is extended to Egypt, which is joined to 
 the Arabian Shore, and to the Shores of the Perfu.n 
 Gulph : upon the Eaft of thefe, are the Shores of 
 Perjia, Cambaya, Indoftan, Malacca in India, Bengal, 
 Cambodia, China, Tartary at Corea, to the Streights 
 of Uries -, where follow the unknown Coaft of Nor- 
 thern Tartary, and the Samoieds, which is [very like- 
 ly] joined to the Streights of Waygats, where we 
 began. 
 
 2. AMERICA is thus encompafied by the 
 Ocean. On the North at the Streights of Davis, 
 there is Hudfon's Bay, from whence follow in order 
 to the fouthward the Shores of New- Britain, New- 
 England, New-France, Virginia, Florida, Mexico, 
 and New-Spain, on the Ifthmus ; then New-Caftle, 
 Guinea, Brafil, and Pat agon, at the Streights of 
 Magellan, where the Shore from running fouthward 
 begins to turn towards the Weft; thence from 
 South to North are extended the Shores of Chili, 
 Peru, New-Spain and New- Mexico, which is bound- 
 ed by the Gulph of California. -, [where follow the un- 
 known Shores of Mozembec, &c. (bounded perhaps 
 by the Streights of Anian} which may be contiguous 
 (for any thing that we know) to thofe of DaviSs 
 Streights.] 
 
 3 . THE Arttic Continent is extended to Da~ 
 VH'S Streights, and from thence begin the Shores 
 of Greenland, which run a little to the South, and 
 then return northward to Spit/berg, where they are 
 called the Shores of New-Greenland: thefe are 
 llretched out over againft Nova Zembla, and the 
 North of Tartary ; from whence the reft of the 
 Shore to Davifs Streights is unknown. 
 
 4- THE South Continent ft retches to the 
 Streights of La Maire, whence the Shore is per- 
 haps continued to New-Holland, where the Lant- 
 cbidd Sea is received into a Gulph, on the other 
 
 VOL. I. N Side
 
 178 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Side whereof is Ntw Guinea, which [very proba- 
 bly] is contiguous to the Shores at the Streights 
 of La Maire. 
 
 L E T us now trace out the Perimeter of the 
 Ocean. Between Davis' s Streights, and Nova 
 Zembla there is the northern Ocean, and Icy Sea, 
 or Sea of Greenland , which is continued till be- 
 tween Europe and America, where it is called the 
 German Ocean, the Briti/h Ocean, the French and 
 Spanijb Ocean, and, in the whole, the Atlantic 
 Ocean ; (and maketh three Bays, viz. the Mediter- 
 ranean, the Baltic, and the Mexican Gulph) which, 
 when it comes between the Coafts of Africa and 
 Brafil, is called the Ethiopian Sea on the one 
 Hand, and on the other the Sea of Magellan : fur- 
 ther to the Eaft, between Africa and the South Con- 
 tinent, is the fouthern Ocean, and between Afia 
 and the fame Continent the [eaftern or] Indian 
 Ocean ; alfo between Afia and South America is 
 the Pacific Ocean [or great South Sea] which is 
 extended northward to the Streights of Waygats 
 and Anian, and fouthward to the Streights of 
 Magellan [and La Maire~\ by which it is joined to 
 the Atlantic. It goes under feveral Names along 
 the Coaft of America, as the Sea of Chili 9 Peru, 
 Mexico, California, &c. 
 
 The Terraqueous Globe is divided into Land 
 and Water. Again Water is divided into 
 the main Ocean, Lakes, Morafles, and Ri- 
 vers. The main Ocean is formed by the 
 Earth into three forts of Portions. 
 
 i. be Ocean, wbofe prime Parts are four. 
 
 i. The
 
 CHAP. 12, of Unfoerf al Geography. 179 
 i. The Atlantic [or 
 
 weftern Ocean] with 
 
 the Etbiopic Sea, be- 
 
 tween Europe and A- C The Britannic O;ean, 
 
 frica on the one Hand, < The German Oc^an, 
 
 and America on the o- C The Spanijh Ocean, fee* 
 
 ther. It obtains vari- 
 
 ous Names from the 
 
 Places it watereth, viz. 
 
 2. THE Pacific Ocean, or great South Sea, 
 between the furthefl Parts of Ajia and the In- 
 dian Iflands, 6n the one hand i and the weftern 
 Shore of America on the other. 
 
 3. THE northern Ocean, about die Arftic 
 Continent, fometimes called the Icy Sea, Tarta- 
 rian Ocean, &c. 
 
 4. THE fouthern Ocean, about the Antarctic 
 Continent, a Part of which is the Indian Ocean. 
 
 2. 'Bay} or Gulpbs. 
 
 t [TlKTyrrbene 
 
 . The Mediterranean J%\ Sea. 
 Sea between Europe(z}T\\z Ionian 
 and Africa as far asQc < \ Sea. 
 Afia minor - - -J-"/The Lev 'ant ', 
 " 
 
 The Gulph of Venice',, 
 P 
 
 Bays 
 
 III 
 
 2. The Baltic Sea with it's fecondary Bays," 
 viz. the Both/lie Bay, the Gulph of Finland, 
 the Livonian Sea, &c. 
 
 3. The Arabian Gulph, or Red-Sea, between 
 Africa and Arabia. 
 
 4. The Perfian Gulph, or Gulph of Balfora, 
 between Arabia and Perfia. 
 
 5. The Sea of California, between California 
 and New-Mexico. 
 
 6. The Gulph of Nankin, between Corea and 
 China. N 2'- Thefe
 
 o 
 
 2& 
 
 ^ t>n 
 
 g-E 
 
 
 
 j 80 Vbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 1. The Gulph of Mexico, between North 
 p and South America. 
 
 2. The Gulph of Bengal, between Indujlan 
 and Malacca. 
 
 3. The Bay [of Siam] between Malacca 
 and Cambodia. 
 
 4. The White Sea, between Lapland and 
 Mufcovy. 
 
 5. The Lantcbidol Sea, between New-Hol- 
 land and New-Guinea. 
 
 6. The Gulph between Nuyt's Land, and 
 Van Diemen's Land. 
 
 7. Hudfon's Bay , between New-France and 
 New-Denmark. 
 
 * v 
 
 3. S freights. 
 
 1 . T H E Streights of Magellan, which join the 
 Atlantic to the Pacific Ocean. Thefe are longer 
 than any of the reft. 
 
 2. THE Streights of La Mairs near thoie of 
 Magellan, and of the ime ufe. 
 
 3. THE fuppofed Streights of Anian, which 
 join the Pacific to the 'Tartarian Ocean. 
 
 4. DA VIS's Streights which join [Baffin's 
 Bay] to the Atlantic, near which arc Forbi/herfs 
 Streights. 
 
 5". THE Streights of Waygats, which join the 
 Icy Sea, perhaps, to the Tartarian Ocean, if the 
 Ice do not interpofe. 
 
 6. T H E Streights of Gibr alter, which join the 
 Atlantic to the Mediterranean Sea. 
 
 7. T H E Streights of Denmark, or the Sound, 
 join the Atlantic to the Baltic. 
 
 8. THE Streights of Babelmandel, at the mouth 
 of the Arabian Gulph. 
 
 9. THE Streights of Ormus, at the mouth of 
 the Ptrfian Gulph. 
 
 10. THE
 
 C H A P. 1 3- f Univerfal Geography. 1 8 1 
 10. THE Hellefpont and Bofphorus, which join 
 
 the Archipelago to the Euxine or Black Sea. 
 
 WHETHER the Cafpain Sea be a Lake or 
 
 a broad Bay, which is joined to the main Ocean 
 
 by fome fubterraneous Streights, is not fettled a- 
 
 mong Geographers, 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Of the Ocean, and certain Properties of ifs 
 Parts. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 The Surface of the Ocean, and of all other Liquids, is 
 round and fpherical : Or the Surface of the watery 
 Part joined to the Surface of the dry Part, do 
 both together make up the Superficies of the terra- 
 queous Globe. 
 
 TH E Truth of this Theorem is proved from 
 the Arguments ufed in Chapter iii. to prove 
 the fpherical Figure of the Earth, for they hold as 
 well here as there -, but becaufe thofe Proofs are 
 chiefly built upon the Phenomena that are rea- 
 fonably fuppofed to proceed from fuch a Figure, 
 that is, rather from the Effects than the Caufe ; 
 we mail propofe, in this Place, a Demonftration 
 which is wholly founded upon natural Caufes, and 
 by which Archimedes proved the Superficies of all 
 liquid Bodies to be fpherical : in order to which he 
 N 3 took
 
 1 82 9 Abjbhie "Part SEC t. IV. 
 
 took for granted the three following Poftulata : i. 
 That the Earth hath a Center, and is therefore fphe- 
 rical. .2. That it is the Nature of all Liquids, 
 whofe Parts are continueid jmd lie at equal Di- 
 ilances from the Center, that the Parts lefs pref- 
 fed are expelled from their Places by thofe that 
 are more preffed, as is manifeft from Experience. 
 3. That every Part of the Liquid is prefled by 
 that Part which is above it ? perpendicularly 
 'towards the Center of the Earth, if the whole 
 'be defcending, or is prefled by any other Body. 
 Befides thefe Poftulata, Archimedes ufes a Geome- 
 trical Propofition which is not found demonftrated 
 any where in the Elements , and therefore he demon- 
 ftrates it himfelf, which is this: If a Superficies be 
 " cut by feveral Planes, kll palling thro' one 'Point, 
 and each Section be the Periphery of a Circle, 
 whofe Center is that one Point, then will the Su- 
 perficies be fpherical, and that Point the Center of 
 the Sphere ', as is eafily demonftrated, 
 
 LET the Superficies of any Body be cut by 
 the Plane I F K E P (Fig.. .16.) thro' D, and let the 
 Perimeter of the Section I F K E P be circujar, ha- 
 ving D for it's Center ; alfo let every other Section, 
 made thro' P, have circular Perimeters, and D 
 for their Center. It is to be mewn, that the 
 Superficies of this Body is fpherical, and that D 
 is it's Center , i. e. that all the Points in. the Su- 
 perficies are equidiftant from D. For we may 
 imagine feveral right Lines to be drawn from D 
 to other Points of the Superficies, and' we mult 
 prove them to be all equal, We may fuppofe 
 a Plane to pafs thro* any of them drawn from 
 D to the Superficies, and alfo thro' DF (for two 
 right Lines cutting one .another, or meeting, are 
 in the fame Plane by Euclid Lib. ii. Prop. 2.) and 
 the Periphery of the Section will be circular by 
 the Hypothefis ; tlierefore, the fuppofed Line 
 2 drawn
 
 CHAP. 13. of Unherfal Geography. 183 
 drawn will be equal to D F, and fo will all other 
 Lines drawn from D to the Superficies be in like 
 manner equal to D F (#). Hence we prove the 
 Superficies to be fpherical, having D for it's Cen- 
 ter (by. This being premifed, the Superficies of 
 all Liquids are thus demonftrated to be fpherical. 
 Let us fuppofe a Liquid at Reft, in the form of 
 EFGH, (Fig. 17.) and let the Earth's Center be 
 D, and imagine this Liquid to be cut by a Plane 
 palling thro' D, fo as the Section may be repre- 
 lented in the Superficies by EFGH. We are 
 firft to prove that this Line EFGH is circular, 
 or an Arch of the Periphery of a Circle, whofe 
 Center is D. If it were pofiible not to be cir- 
 cular, then would two Lines, drawn from D to 
 it, be unequal. Let the unequal Lines D E, D G 
 be drawn, viz. let D G be greater than D E, alib 
 let the one be the leaft, and the other the 
 greateft that can be drawn from D. Then draw 
 another right Line D F to E F G H, bifedling the 
 Angle G D E, fo as to be longer than D E, but 
 morter than D G. With this D F as a Radius up- 
 on the Center D, defcribe in the fame Plane the 
 Arch I F K H, which will cut the Line D E pro- 
 duced in the Point I, and the . Line D G on this 
 Side G, in the Point K. 
 
 LIKEWISE with the Radius D L, fomething 
 lefs than D E, upon the Center D, defcribe the 
 Arch LMN within the Liquid in the fame Plane 
 I F K H. Then are the Parts of the Liquid within 
 the Arch LMN continued, and at equal diftances 
 from the Center D : but the Parts between M N 
 are more prefled than thofe between L M, having 
 above them a greater Quantity, and therefore a 
 greater Weight of Water. 
 
 f/j) By the Definition of a I (b] By the Definition of a 
 Circle Chap. ii. Article 3. j Globe Chap, it Article i z- 
 
 N 4 AND
 
 j 84 Tbe Absolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 AND the Parts of the Liquid within L M, 
 being lefs prefTed, are driven out of their Places 
 by thofe witiiin M N which take them up, and 
 put the Liquid in Motion. But it was before 
 fuppofed to lie in this Form at Reft, and flill : 
 So that the Liquid, by this, will be both at Reft 
 and in Motion,, which is inconfiftent. Wherefore 
 the right Lines, drawn from D to E FGH, are 
 not unequal, but equal ; and fo the Line E F G H 
 is an Arch of a Circle, whofe Center is D. The 
 fame may be demonftrated in all Planes cutting 
 the Superficies of the Liquid, and pafling thro* 
 D, wfz. that the Section is an Arch of a Circle 
 whofe Center is D. Therefore fince, in the Su- 
 perficies of Liquids, all Planes pafling any how 
 thro' D, are found to produce circular Sections, 
 it will follow, from the foregoing Proposition, that 
 the Superficies of all Liquids is fpherical j having 
 the Point D, that is, the Center of the Earth, 
 for their Center ; as will more manifeftly appear 
 from the Proof of the following Propofition. 
 
 PROPOSITION II, 
 
 The Sea is not higher than the Land, and therefore 
 the Earth and Water are almoft every where of the 
 fame Attitude, high Mountains excepfed. 
 
 'jflr.-; "j , T'-" r^ -"-*) .*,-, ; * 
 
 THE Truth of this is demonftrated by the 
 preceeding Propofition. For if the Superficies of 
 the Ocean be fpherical, and have the fame Center 
 with the Superficies of the Earth, and alfo if the 
 Sea, near the Shore, be no higher than the Land, 
 neither will the middle of the Ocean be elevated 
 above the Earth, becaufe both their Surfaces make 
 up the Superficies of one and the fame Sphere. 
 But foine perhaps will not believe the former Pro- 
 pofition, by Reafon of the affumed Hypothefis j 
 2 therefore
 
 CHAP. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 
 therefore we fhall mew the Truth of this Theorem, 
 without that, from it's known Effects. 
 
 1. WE know, by Experience, that Water, if 
 it is not hindred, will flow from a higher to a 
 lower Place. If therefore there were about the 
 Shore any Place lower than the middle of the 
 Ocean, the Water would continually fettle from 
 thence towards the Shore, and be always flowing, 
 and in Motion ; but the contrary is obferved when 
 the Weather is calm. 
 
 2. IF the Ocean, far remote from the Shore, 
 was much higher than the Sea Coaft, it might be 
 feen at a greater Diftance than if it were fphe- 
 rical, even over all the intervening Parts that 
 were of a lefs Altitude. But Experience fheweth 
 to the contrary, that when we come from die 
 Inland Parts nearer the Shore, we difcover by 
 little and little the more remote Parts of the Sea, 
 and the nearer we approach the Shore, the further 
 we can fee upon the Ocean. Therefore the remote 
 Parts of the Ocean are not elevated above the Sea 
 Coaft, but are of the fame Altitude with them 
 and the Earth. 
 
 3. SAILORS cannot difcover any Difference 
 between their Altitude, at the Sea Coaft, and in 
 the middle of the main Ocean, tho f they ufe the 
 moft accurate Inftruments ; which certainly they 
 might, if the remote Parts were elevated above 
 the reft, as a Tower, or a Mountain, For as 
 we can find the Altitude of a Mountain, or Tower, 
 above the Places of Obfervation by Inftruments, 
 fo might they (if there were any) find the fupe- 
 rior Altitude of the middle of the Ocean above 
 the Parts next it, by fuch accurate Inftruments as 
 are now in Ufe. 
 
 4. THERE are found, in feveral Places, 
 great Numbers of Iflands, which are, fome of 
 them, extended far into the main Ocean, and 
 
 others
 
 The Abfolute Part .SECT. IV. 
 
 pthers almoft contiguous to the Continent. There- 
 fore no Part of the main Ocean is higher than 
 the Land ; becaufe it is not higher than the Shores 
 -of thefe Iflands. 
 
 5. THE Waves upon the Ocean never keep 
 long upon a Heap, but are naturally diffufed 'till 
 they make a fmooth Surface : wherefore it is un- 
 realbnable to fuppofe, that the Water mould be 
 heaped up towards the middle of the Ocean. 
 
 6. I F the Waters in the main Ocean are higher 
 than the reft, why do they not flow into the 
 Chanels of the Rivers, whofe Waters are more 
 deprefied? for we find, by Experience, that Wa- 
 ter naturally flows from the Place where it is, to a- 
 ny other that is lower, which is the Caufe of fo 
 many Inundations* 
 
 F R O M the whole I think it fufficiently appears, 
 that the Sea is not higher than the Shores; and 
 but very few Shores are elevated to the Height 
 of the Inland Parts, for thefe .are often obferved 
 to rife gradually above the other, 'till they be- 
 come high Mountains : from whence we conclude 
 that no Part of the Ocean is higher than the Su- 
 perficies of the Earth, That the Inland Parts are 
 more elevated than the Sea Shores, appears alfo 
 from the Rife and Currents of Rivers, which, for 
 the moft part, breakout, and are directed, from 
 thefe Mediterranean Places, towards the Ocean. 
 Thefe Places therefore are higher than the mari- 
 time Parts, becaufe they pour down their Waters 
 upon them. Not but that there are fome Countries 
 which are iituated a little lower than the Surface 
 of the Ocean, but then they are defended either 
 by the Altitude of the Shores, or by Banks, or 
 long Ridges, of interpofed Ground. Some Coun- 
 tries alfo are not fenced with Banks, becaufe they 
 fear a calm and fettled Sea mould overflow them, 
 but left, when it is ruffled with Winds and made 
 
 impetuous,
 
 B 
 
 CHAP. 13. ofUniverfal Geography. 187 
 impetuous, it fhould violently break in upon 
 them. 
 
 ' ' 
 
 I T is therefore in vain to tell us, that the Sea is 
 higher than the Land, and that by a miraculous Pro- 
 vidence it is kept from overflowing the whole Earth, 
 and caufing another Univerfal Deluge ; for we have 
 fliewed, that both Land and Water are included 
 within our fpherical Superficies, and that moft 
 Parts of the Earth, at leaft the Shores are higher 
 than the middle of the Ocean, which for that Rea- 
 fon cannot overflow Countries, or caufe a Deluge, 
 unlefs the Shore or Banks are wafted, and their 
 Height diminimed, or a greater Quantity of Wa- 
 ter force them open, or overpower them, and then 
 indeed there may happen an Inundation. Neither 
 is it impoffible, or contrary to Nature, that the 
 whole Earth by fuch Means might be overflowed, 
 as will be made evidently appear at the End of 
 'this Chapter. 
 
 -'- - - i . ."' . H ilf ''v '-"f t\ %' ^ff* 
 
 snj mo ; 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 the Ocean, feenfrom the Shore, appears to rife 
 and fwell to a greater Altitude, by bow much the 
 more remote it is. 
 
 THIS is a Deception of Sight, or to fpeak 
 more accurately, in the Eftimation, which hath 
 brought many into an Error, and by which divers 
 have fuppofed the Sea to be in fome Places feve- 
 ral Furlongs higher than the Land. But it is a 
 wonder they have never taken notice of a common 
 Experiment, which is to be met with every Day, 
 whereby this Fallacy is eafily detected. If we look 
 upon a long Pavement, r Area, or upon a row of 
 
 Pillars,
 
 r i88 <fke Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Pillars, the Parts that are remote, will appear 
 higher than thofe that are near, and the whole 
 Pavement, or Area, will feem to be elevated by 
 little and little, as it's Parts are more remote from 
 us, notwithftahding, in Truth, it be every where 
 of the fame Altitude. After the fame manner we 
 eftimate the Height of the Sea ; for if we take a 
 levelling Inftrument, and obferve from the Shore 
 the remote Parts of the Sea, we mail find it not to 
 be elevated above us, but rather deprefied below 
 the Horizon where we ftand. 
 
 THE Caufe of this Deception is thus explained 
 from Optics. Let the Eye at A obierve a Pave- 
 ment, or the Superficies of the Water, a pretty way 
 extended a e (Fig. 1 8). Let the Angle a A e be di- 
 vided into four equal Parts, or Angles e A d, dAc, 
 c A b, b A a , by the right Lines A , A c , Ad. 
 Thefe will divide the right Line a e into four un- 
 equal Parts, a b, be, cd, de, of which the more re- 
 mote will be the largeft, as appears by the Figure, 
 viz. E d larger than dc, and dc larger than be, and 
 be than ab. Altho* thefe Parts are very unequal, 
 yet, by a Deception of the Sight, they will be judged 
 to be all equal, and at an equal Diftance from the 
 Eye ; fo mat A b, A c, A d, A <?, will feem to be 
 A/, Ag, A6, A, where 0/,/g, gb, bk, are equal ; 
 and thus the Parts be, cd, de, feem elevated, as 
 if they were fg, gb, bk. 
 
 O RJhorter thus. Becaufe the Eye is raifed to 
 fee things at a Diftance, and deprefled to view 
 things near, therefore things at a Diftance feem ele- 
 vated, and things near depreffed. Or becaufe we 
 meafure the Diftance of the Parts that are near by 
 the elevation of our Eye, and therefore diey feem 
 low ; but we cannot do fo by the Parts at a Di- 
 ftance, and therefore they feem not low? but raif- 
 ed more than they really are. 
 
 HENCE
 
 CHA?. 13, o/Umverfal Geography. 189 
 H E N C E we gather, that tho* the Ocean may 
 feem to be raifed above the Shore, and the more 
 the further off, yet we are not to think that it is 
 really fo. 
 
 SOME imagine the Ocean to be higher than 
 the Earth, becauie unlefs it was fo, they think it 
 impoffible that Water mould flow from it to the 
 Heads of Rivers (which are commonly placed very 
 high in inland Countries) fmce it never flows, but 
 from a higher to a lower Place. But we mall dif- 
 cufs this Point, when we treat of the Origin of 
 Springs. 
 
 OTHERS may infer, that the Pike of ftne- 
 riff is not fo high as to be feen on the Ocean at fo 
 great a Diftance as frxty German Miles, or four 
 Degrees, unlefs either the Foot of the Mountain, or 
 the Ocean itfelf, be higher than the Sea upon the 
 Coaft of Teneriff; the like may be faid of other 
 Mountains. What is to be anfwered here appears 
 from Chapter ix. where we treated of the Altitude 
 of Mountains. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 fo explain the Caufe and Origin of Bays and Streigbts. 
 
 BAYS, properly fpeaking, are in the Earth and 
 not in the Sea, and therefore they ought to be cal- 
 led the Arms, Branches, or procurrent Parts, of 
 the Ocean. For thofe are more properly called 
 Bays of the Ocean, where it receives Peninfula's, 
 fuch as Malacca, Jutland, &c. 
 
 BUT cuftom hath obtained that the word Bay, 
 mould, contrary to it's Signification, belong to 
 the Ocean, and be the fame as an Arm or Branch 
 of it. 
 
 THESE Bays or Gulphs are thus produced. 
 When a part of the Sea Shore is by fome external 
 
 Caufe
 
 ffa Abjolute fart S E c T. I V. 
 
 Caufe fhattered and rent in two, fo as to leave an 
 Opening, whofe Surface is lower than the Surface 
 of the Ocean, the Water naturally gufheth in be- 
 tween the Cliffs, and is not flopped till it meet 
 with more elevated Ground, by which it is bound- 
 ed, and formed into a Bay. 
 
 STREIGHTSare from this Caufe alfo pro- 
 duced. 
 
 THE reafon why thefe Parts are now and then 
 fo miferably torn in Pieces, as to admit Inundati- 
 ons (by which Bays and Streights are formed) is 
 the impetuous Motion and violent darning of the 
 Waves againft the Shore, being forced by Winds, 
 or fome other Caufe, almoft daily, to warn away 
 and wafte them : whereby, in procefs of time, the 
 Earth is broken and disjoined, and made unfit to 
 refift the rulhing of the Ocean. But this is more 
 likely to happen if the Shore be low, and confift 
 of loofe and crumbling Earth, eafy for the Sea to 
 work upon, which will with fmall refiftance burft, 
 and make room for a whole Bay of Water. 
 
 I T is manifeft, that fome new Bays and Streights 
 are thus produced, but we muft not thence con- 
 clude, that all which are at this Day found in the 
 Earth were fo generated : for it is very likely, that 
 a great many of them are of the fame Date with 
 the Earth and Ocean \ and the rather, becaufe 
 none, nor any thing like them, have been produ- 
 ced in the memory of Man. Tho* the ancient 
 Grecians have fuch Fables ; and tell us, that the 
 Mountain Calpe upon the Spanijh Shore, and Abyle 
 in Africa were formerly joined, but afterwards fe- 
 parated by Hercules , from whence thefe Mountains 
 were" called Herculefs Pillars, and the Streights, 
 Herculefs Streights (). 
 
 IT 
 
 (a) There are a great many ! veral other Realbns, to induce 
 'Teltinionies of Authors, andfe- | us to believe, that Britain was 
 
 not
 
 CHAP. 13. of Umverfa! Geography. ipf 
 IT was a common Opinion of the Ancients, 
 that the Streights between Italy and Sicily 9 were 
 made by the Irruption of the Sea, which we do 
 not fo much doubt of : nor do we think it impof- 
 fible, that the like fmall Streights have been and 
 are ftill generated. Streights alfo may be turned into 
 Bays, and Bays into Streights ; as if, for Example, 
 the Mouth of the Streights of Magellan or ManUba* 
 mould be flopped on the one fide or the other, 
 they would be changed into long Bays : or if (on 
 the other hand ) the Iftbmus between Africa and 
 Afia> mould be removed, then the Red-Sea would 
 be joined to the Mediterranean ', and they both be- 
 come Streights, and afford a Paflage to the Indian 
 Ocean. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Whether the Ocean le every where of the fame 
 Altitude. 
 
 IT appears from the firft Proportion, that the 
 Face of the Ocean in it's natural Situation, and when 
 no Obftacle hinders, is every where of the fame 
 Altitude, having, as was there proved a fpherical 
 Surface, and being concentrical with the Earth : 
 but it may be here doubted, whether for fome 
 Reafons, it may not in one Place be higher than 
 in another ; which is very worthy of Obfervation, 
 and of great Moment to be well underftood, by 
 
 not an Ifland from the Begin- every Day on both Sides, was 
 
 nirtg, but was formerly joined wore away and wafted. The 
 
 to France by an Iftbmus t be- great Dr Wallis was of this O- 
 
 tween Dgver and Calais, and pinion, and fo was DrMi/Jgrav e. 
 
 that this Iftb'mus, in procefs of See both their Arguments in, 
 
 Time, being continually beat Pbilof. Tranf. abridged by Motte. 
 
 upon by two impetuous Tides Par 14. Page 35,40. 
 
 thofc
 
 tgz he Abfolute Part SECT. IV* 
 
 thofe that propofe the cutting thro* of Ifthmus's, 
 and joining one Part of the Ocean to another. 
 
 SEVERAL will have both the Sea and Land 
 to be higher towards the Northern Parts, than about 
 the Equator, and this was Arijiotle's Thought (in 
 Lib. 2. Chap. ii. de Cxlo) (c) t The Reafon they 
 bring for it is, that the Ocean feems to flow from 
 the Northern Parts as from a Fountain ; but this 
 does not prove it's fuperior Altitude there: for 
 whether the Northern Countries, or rather the Nor- 
 thern Chanels, be higher or lower than the Cha- 
 nels near the Equator (as is yet doubtful, or at leaft 
 not fufficiently proved from that Motion which is 
 not generally found in all the Northern Parts) it 
 does not follow, if they were fo admitted, that the 
 Ocean is there higher ; becaufe that to lower that 
 fuperior Height, and to make the other equal with 
 it, the Ocean is conftantly flowing towards the 
 Equator. Ariftotle in the forecited Place adds ano- 
 ther fabulous Reafon, taken from the Poets, which 
 is not worth an Anfwer, viz. that the Sun when it 
 fets, hides itfelf beyond the great Bulk of the Nor- 
 thern Regions. 
 
 THIS Opinion of the fuperior Altitude of the 
 North Pole, feems to arife from hence ; that when 
 we turn our Faces that way, we imagine the Pole 
 to be raifed above the Horizon of the Place we are 
 in, and therefore judge the Countries thereabouts 
 to be elevated above us. 
 
 SOME think the Indian Ocean to be higher 
 than the Atlantic^ which they endeavour to prove 
 from the Flux of the Sea in at the Streights of Gi- 
 It -alter , and of the Arabian Gulph: but then, this 
 doubt is to be confidered, whether the Altitude of 
 Bays, efpecially in their extream Parts, be the fame 
 
 (} The Earth and Ocean are highcft about the Equator. See 
 
 the Note (b] on Chap. Hi. 
 
 with
 
 CHAP. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 193 
 with that of the Ocean, or lefs ; and chiefly thofe 
 Bays which are joined by very narrow Streights to 
 the Ocean. 
 
 THAT the Atlantic and Indian Ocean are 
 higher than the extream Parts of the Mediterranean, 
 near Egypt and Afia minor, none need doubt ; for 
 unlefs the Streights ofGibralter (where the Atlantic 
 floweth into the Mediterranean} were fomething 
 lower than the Ocean, there would not be fuch a 
 ftrong Current there as it is. Perhaps at the- 
 Streight's mouth there may be but little difference ; 
 but then further, to continue the Flux all over that 
 large Tract between Europe and Africa, the depref- 
 fion of the Bay muft by Degrees be greater, other- 
 wife the Water 'could not flow when it is fo often 
 obftrucled by Rocks, Iflands, Peninfula's, and o- 
 ther Obftacles, which repel the Current of the Wa*. 
 ter, and diminifh the Force of the Influx. We 
 need not doubt of this, if it be true what is record- 
 ed of Sefoftris, Darius, and other Kings of Egypt, 
 by fome Authors of good Credit, how they at- 
 tempted to cut a Chanel between the Red-Sea and 
 the Nile, that out of the Indian Ocean and thro* 
 the Red-Sea, they might fail that Way from the 
 Mouth of the Nile into the Mediterranean ; which 
 would be of great Advantage to Egypt and other. 
 Countries upon the Coaft of the Mediterranean. But 
 they were forced to defift from this Enterprife, 
 when the Red-Sea was difcovered by the Artificers 
 to be much higher than the Inner Egypt. If there- 
 fore the Red-Sea be higher than the Land of Egypt, ' 
 it will be alfo higher than the Water of the Nile 
 and the Mediterranean itielf, into which the Nile 
 flows ; and confequently the Red- Sea, and alfo the 
 Indian Ocean, are both higher than the Mediterra- 
 nean, efpecially the furtheft Parts of it about E- 
 gypt, Romania, and the Archipelago. 
 
 VOL.1. O MORE-
 
 194 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 MOREOVER, otlier Kings of Egypt of old, 
 and of late the Egyptian Sultans, and Turkijk Em- 
 perors, had frequent Confultations about cutting 
 through that IJtbmiu that joins Africa to Afia, and 
 feparates the Mediterranean from the Red-Sea ; but 
 the Reafon, as we are told, why they did not fet 
 about it was, that the Indian and Red-Sea were found 
 to be much higher than the Shores of the Mediter- 
 ranean: and therefore it was feared, that the Red- 
 Sea mould overflow them, efpecially Egypt, which 
 is reckoned by every one to be a very low Coun- 
 try. 
 
 THAT tht Red-Sea is higher than the Medi- 
 terranean appeareth from thefe Obfervations ; but 
 this, not without Caufe, may be doubted by fome, 
 bccaufe they are both Bays, the one of the Atlan- 
 tic and the other of the Indian Ocean. Therefore 
 to give a plaufible Reafon, why the one mould be 
 higher than the other, it will not be amifs to con- 
 fider; that tho' they are both deprefTed more than 
 the Seas from which they flow , yet the Difference 
 is lefs fenfiblc in the extream Part of the Red-Sea^ 
 which is nearer the Indian Ocean, than the extream 
 Parts of the Mediterranean are to the Atlantic. For 
 J cannot think that the Indian Ocean is higher than 
 the Atlantic^ as fome imagine. 
 
 IF therefore the Ifthmus was cut through, no 
 doubt but a great Quantity of Water would flow 
 from the Red-Sea into the Mediterranean ; but I can- 
 not think fo much as to bring Egypt, and other 
 Places about the Levant, into danger of being over- 
 flowed : becaule if the Indian Ocean poured in more 
 Water, the Atlantic^ would very liktly emit lefs, 
 that fo they might each retain the fame Altitude in 
 Proportion. 
 
 BESIDES this, I fuppofe the Sultans of Egypt 
 
 and the Turks, were induced by other Political 
 
 i Caufes
 
 CHAP. i 3. of Univerfal Geography. 195 
 Caufes and Reafons to omit cutting through this 
 lithmus. 
 
 THE firft fcruple was no doubt the greatnefs 
 of the Work, for it would be no fmall Labour and 
 Expence to cut thro' an Ifthmus, whofe Breadth at 
 the narroweft Part is at leaft forty German Miles, 
 and the Earth rocky ; befides there muft have been 
 Dams and Wears made in feveral Places, which 
 could not have been done without fkillful Work- 
 men, which thofe Nations have always wanted. 
 
 THE lecond Reafon was, becaufe they fup- 
 pofed the Chriftian Nations in -Italy, Venice, France ', 
 Spain, &c. would receive greater Benefit than they 
 themfelves from this Canal, by failing thro* it to 
 Perfea and India, and bringing thence thofe pre- 
 cious Commodities, which the Turks and Egyptians 
 at prefent carry at their own Prices by Land, and 
 for which they receive large Duties, which bring 
 confiderable Revenues into the Grand Seignior*s 
 Coffers. See Mafeus's Hiftory of India, Book iii. 
 where he tells us, how much the Sultans of Egypt 
 were formerly offended at the Portuguefe failing and 
 trading into India. 
 
 A third Caufe why they neglected this was per- 
 haps, becaufe they knew the Chriftians excelled 
 them in Navigation , and were therefore afraid left 
 they mould invade thofe Streights, and the adjacent 
 Countries, or even Medina itielf, the Sepulchre of 
 Mahomtt. For a confiderable Fleet would in a 
 fhort time tranfport a great Army of Men, and all 
 neceffary Provisions from Europe to Arabia, by this 
 Canal. 
 
 BUT Alpbonfus Albuquerce, Governor of the 
 Portuguefe Indies, was of another Opinion, when 
 he had intended to have turned the Nile from 
 Egypt, by cutting a Chanel thro' Abyffima (which 
 borders upon Egypt, only a few Defarts interpo- 
 fing) to the Red-Sea, that by this means he might 
 O 2 render
 
 196 'The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 render Egypt barren and unfruitful to the Turks ; 
 but he died before he could undertake it. 
 
 THUS far, concerning the Altitude of the 
 Mediterranean compared with that of the Red-Sea^ 
 Atlantic, and Indian Ocean. We were obliged 
 to explain it ; becaufe from thence fome take 
 Occafion to argue the unequal Altitude of fome 
 Parts of the Ocean. 
 
 BUT thefe things may be confirmed by ano- 
 ther Example, if we may compare great Things 
 with fmall. The German Ocean, which is a Part 
 of the Atlantic , running between Friejland and Hol- 
 land, forms a Bay ; which tho' it be but fmall, in 
 comparifon of thefe famous ones juft now men- 
 tioned, yet it is called a Sea, and watereth Am- 
 fterdam the Capital of Holland. Not far from thence 
 is the Lake of Harlem, which is alfo called the 
 Sea of Harlem : this is as high as the foremen- 
 tioned Bay, and fends cut a Branch to Leyden ; 
 where it is divided into feveral lefler Canals. And 
 becaufe neither the Lake nor the Bay overflows 
 the bordering Country (when they are fettled and 
 at quiet, and they have Bulwarks provided againft 
 a Storm) it appears that they are not higher than 
 the Lands of Holland. But that the German Ocean 
 is higher than thefe Countries, hath been experien- 
 ced by the Inhabitants of Leyden, when they under- 
 took to cut a Canal from their City to the German 
 Shore, near the Town of Catwic, which is about 
 two Holland Miles in Length -, ib that the Sea be- 
 ing let in, they might fail into the German Ocean, 
 and from thence to other Countries. But when 
 they had finifhed a great Part of it, they were for- 
 ced to leave off, having at length found, by Ob- 
 fervation, that the.. German Ocean was higher than 
 the Ground between it and Le\den\ from whence 
 the Place where they left off is called by the Dutch, 
 ffet malle Gat. i. e, unprofpercus. Therefore the 
 i German
 
 CHAP. 13. ofUniverfal Geography. 197 
 German Ocean is fomething higher than [the Zuy- 
 der Zee or] the Bay of Holland. 
 
 BUT all Bays are not depreffed below the 
 Ocean, for thofe that run out into the Land at 
 broad and open Paffages, fuch as thofe of Mexico^ 
 Bengal, &c. are, without doubt, of the fame Al- 
 titude with the Ocean itfelf : tho* I know the Spa- 
 niards doubted this (whether the Pacific Ocean was 
 higher than the Bay of Mexico) when they conful- 
 ted about cutting thro* the Ifthmus of Panama^ 
 that they might with more Expedition fail to Peru, 
 China, and the Indian Iflands. But befides this 
 Sufpenfe, we underftand that they had a Political 
 Reafon for not doing it ; they were afraid left the 
 Engiijh, Dutch, and other Nations mould make 
 ufe of it, and lie in wait at the Entrances, or in- 
 vade Peru. For the Englijh and Dutch would not 
 care to make fuch long and dangerous Voyages 
 thro' the Streights of Magellan or La Maire, when, 
 with a well furnimed Fleet, they could force their 
 way thro' thofe Streights, and perhaps take Peru, 
 or at leaft crufh the force of the Spaniards there. 
 
 THAT we may put an end to this, it is beft 
 to determine, that the divers parts of the Ocean 
 and broad Bays are all of the fame Altitude, (as 
 was proved in the firft Propofition) but long Bays, 
 and chiefly thofe produced from narrow Streights, 
 are fomewhat depreffed, efpecially at their extream 
 Parts : but I could wilh there were more diligent 
 and accurate Obfervations made by thofe who have 
 the Opportunities of making them, to remove, 
 ifpoilible, the following Doubts, viz. i. Whether 
 the Indian, Atlantic, and Pacific Ocean are of the 
 fame Altitude, or the Atlantic be lower than the 
 other two. 2. Whether the northern Ocean, near 
 the Pole, and within the Frigid Zone, be higher 
 than the Atlantic. 3. Whether the Red-S^a be 
 higher than the Mediterranean. 4. Whether the 
 O 3 Pacific
 
 1 98 *fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 Pacific Sea be higher than the Mexican Bay. 5. 
 Whether the Baltic be as high as the Atlantic. 
 And thefe Differences ought to be obferved in 
 hudfotfs Bay, the Streights oi' Magellan, and others. 
 We fhall treat of the Euxine Sea in Chapter xv. 
 
 THE continual Flux and Reflux of" the Sea, 
 and Currents, make the Face of the Ocean 
 mutable, and it's Parts of a different Altitude, at 
 different Times i but thefe arife from external 
 Caufes, and we here only confider the natural Con- 
 ftitution of the Water : betides, they do not feem 
 to alter the Altitude fo much in the middle of the 
 Ocean, as near the Shores. 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 THEREFORE we cannot affent to Papy- 
 rius Fabianus and Cleomedes, who determined the 
 greateft Height of the Ocean to be fifteen Furlongs, 
 or half a German Mile ; unlefs they mean the Depth, 
 which is not at all well expreffed by the Word Alti- 
 tude, as it appears in the Tranflation of Arijlotle, 
 Book i. Meteor. Chap. xi. at the end, where &6ta. 
 7* T'OVTX is explained of the Altitude of the Sea. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Fbe Depth of the Sea, or Ocean, in moft Parts may 
 be tried yoith a founding Lead ; and there are but 
 few Places where the Bottom cannot be reached. 
 
 THE Depth of the Ocean varies according to 
 the greater or lefier Depreflion of the Chanels j 
 being found $o of a German Mile, 3*0, ro, 5, *, 
 &c. deep , and in a few Places a whole German 
 Mile or more, where the Line was commonly not 
 long enough to try how much, tho* even there 
 it is likely the Bottom is not at a vaft Diftance, 
 
 unlefs
 
 CHAP. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 199 
 unlefs perhaps in fome Places theie may be deeper 
 Pits than ordinary, or fubterranecus PafTages. 
 
 THE Depth of Bays is not ib great as that 
 of the Ocean, and their Chanels are lefs hollowed 
 by being nearer the Land : for the fame Reafort 
 the Ocean is not fo deep near the Shore, as in re- 
 mote Places i which happens by reafon of the con- 
 cave Shape of the Chanel. 
 
 SAILORS find the Sea's Depth with a found- 
 ing Lead, in the Shape of a Pyramid, of about 
 twelve Pound Weight, fattened to a Line about 
 two hundred Perches long, tho* fome require a 
 Lead of a greater Weight : yet they may be fome- 
 times deceived in this Obfervation if the Line 
 fhould be carried away by a Current or Whirl- 
 pool, fo as not to deicend perpendicularly, but 
 obliquely. 
 
 BUT when the Depth is fo great that no Line 
 is fuffkient to found it, fome have thought of a 
 Method to try it thus (d}. In the firft Place they 
 obferve, how long a known Weight of Lead will 
 be in defcending a known Depth ; then they fatten 
 04 a Cork 
 
 (//) The learned Dr Hook has Wire C, with a bended End F, 
 
 given us a Method (much like and into the (aid Staple, prefs in, 
 
 the following) to found the with your Fingers, the fpring- 
 
 Depth of the Sea without a ing Wire on the bended End : 
 
 Line, which, becaufe it pro- and on it hang the Weight D, 
 
 mifeth Succefs, we (hall here by it's Hook E, and fo let the 
 
 defcribe from the Pbilof. Tranf. Globe and all fink gently into 
 
 N 9. Page 147. the Water, in the Pollure repre- 
 
 Take a Globe of Fir, or fented in the Figure, to the 
 
 Maple, or other light Wood, Bottom, where the Weight, D, 
 
 as A ; (Fig. \g.) let it be well touching firft, is thereby ilop- 
 
 fecured by Varnifti, Pitch, or o- ped ; but the Bail, being by 
 
 ther wife, from imbibing Water; the Impetus it acquired in def- 
 
 than take a Piece of Lead, or cending carried downwards a 
 
 Stone, D, confiderably heavier little after the Weight is Hop- 
 
 than will fink the Globe: let ped, fuffers the fpringing Wire 
 
 there be a long wire Staple B to fly back, and thereby lets 
 
 in the Ball A, and a fpringing itfelf at Liberty to re-afcend. 
 
 And
 
 200 the Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 a Cork or a blown Bladder to the Lead, fo as it 
 may be difengaged from it, as foon as the Lead 
 mall touch the Bottom : this being done, they let 
 down the Lead, and obierve the time between it's 
 touching the Bottom, and the Cork's rifing to the 
 Surface of the Sea , from whence by comparing this 
 with the aforefaid Oblervations, and ftated Pro- 
 
 And by obferving the Time of 
 the Ball's ftay under Water, 
 (which may be done by a 
 Watch, or a good Minute 
 Glafs, or beft of all by a Pendu- 
 lum vibrating Seconds, (which 
 muft be three Foot three Inches 
 and one fifth of an Inch long) 
 you may by the help of fome 
 
 A wooden Ball A weighed - 
 Another wooden Ball B 
 A Lead A 
 Another Lead B 
 
 The Ball B and the Lead B 
 were let down at fixteen Fa- 
 thoms ; and the Ball returned 
 in forty eight fingle Strokes 
 of a Pendulum, held in the 
 Hand, vibrating fifty eight fin- 
 gle Strokes in a Minute. 
 
 A fecond time repeated with 
 the fame Succefs ; wherefore 
 the Motion was four Foot 
 every Second. 
 
 Again the Ball A, and the 
 Lead B, whofe Nail was bend- 
 ed into a (harper Angle ; the 
 Ball returned in thirty nine 
 Strokes. A fecond time repeat- 
 ed with the fame Succefs, at 
 the fame Depth. 
 
 Ball A, Lead A, at eight Fa- 
 thoms and one Foot, returned 
 at twenty; repeated at eight 
 Fathoms, returned at nineteen. 
 
 Tried the third time at ten 
 
 Tables, come to know any 
 Depth of the Sea. Which Ta- 
 bles may be calculated from the 
 following Experiments made by 
 the Lord Vifc. Brounker, Sir 
 Robert Murray, and Mr Hook* 
 in the Chanel at Sbeernefsi 
 mentioned in Pbilof. Tranf. N 
 24. Page 43 9. 
 
 Oz. Gr. 
 - 5 2 r6 oo 
 
 30 20 
 
 30 oo 
 30^ oo 
 
 Fathoms four Foot, returned 
 at twenty eight. 
 
 A fourth Tryal at the fame 
 Depth, juft the fame. 
 
 A fifth, at ten Fathoms five 
 Foot, returned at twenty feven. 
 
 A fixth Tryal, juft the fame. 
 
 A feventh at twelve Fathoms 
 five Foot, returned in thirty- 
 feven. 
 An eighth Tryal juft the fame. 
 
 But if it be alledged, that it 
 muft be known, when a light 
 Body afcends from the Bottom 
 of the Water to the Top, in 
 what Proportion of Time it 
 rifes ; it may be confidered, that 
 in thefe Experiments the Times 
 of the Defcent and Afcent arc 
 both taken and computed to- 
 gether ; fo that for this Pur- 
 pofe, there needs not the Nice- 
 ty which is alledged. 
 
 portions,
 
 C H A P. 1 3 . of Univerfal Geography. 201 
 portions, they find the Depth of the Ocean. But 
 there is fuch a Nicety required in making thefe Try- 
 als, and the time of Obfervation is Ib ihort, that 
 it is very rare to find the true Depth by this Me- 
 thod. However it appeareth, that the Depth of 
 the Ocean is every where finite, and not extended 
 to the Antipodes', becaufe if two Portions of Earth 
 were divided by any Part of the Ocean, which 
 might be continued thro* the Center to the oppo- 
 fite Side of the Globe, unlefs they were fupported 
 with Arches, they would immediately fall together 
 at the Center, becaufe the Earth is heavier than the 
 Water. Befides, the whole Bulk of Earth and Wa- 
 ter is finite and fpherical ; and therefore the Depth 
 of the Ocean cannot be infinite. 
 
 MOREOVER, from the Obfervations of the 
 Depth in divers Places, it is manifeft, that the Cha- 
 nels in Depth are nearly equal to the Mountains 
 and inland Parts in Elevation, that is, as much as 
 the one is raifed, fo much the other is deprefled, 
 and as the Altitude of the inland Parts is gradually 
 increafed from the Shore, fo is the Sea deeper and 
 deeper towards the Middle of the Ocean, where 
 the Depth is for the moft part greateft. 
 
 THE Depth of the Sea, is in the fame Place 
 often altered by thefe or the like Caufes. I . By the 
 Flux and Reflux. 2. by the Increafe and Decreafe 
 of the Moon. 3. By the Winds. 4. By the moul- 
 dering and fubfiding of the Shores -, whence the 
 Chanel is made higher in procefs of time by Sand 
 and Mud. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 Vhe Ocean doth not flow from Springs, but is contained 
 within the Cavities of the Earth ; tho* it is not al- 
 way* numerically the fame ^ but continually increafeng 
 and dimimfe'wg. 
 
 WE
 
 202 fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 W E know by Experience that the Water o* 
 Rivers is produced by Springs, and becaufe it hath 
 been io for many Ages pait, it necefiarily follows, 
 that the Water which is continually flowing to the 
 Sea, returns again to the Fountains, either by fub- 
 terraneous Duels, or fome other way. The Phi- 
 lofophers of old were alfo of Opinion, that the Sea 
 i filled forth at feveral Springs ; neither could the 
 Magnitude nor the Perpetuity of it's Bulk convince 
 them of their Error, for they faid, that it was con- 
 veyed by fubterraneous Fiflures to thefe Fountains, 
 which therefore kept continually flowing. Ariftotle 
 (Book ii. Meteor. Chap, ii.) endeavours to prove 
 the contrary, and to refute the Arguments of the 
 Ancients, but fays very little to the Purpofe ; we 
 think thefe following will be more effectual to dif- 
 prove them. If the Ocean have Springs they muft 
 either be in the raifed Parts of the Earth, or in that 
 Part which is covered with die Ocean, that is r in 
 the very Chanel of the Sea, That there are no 
 fuch upon the dry Land is apparent, becaufe there 
 were never yet found any ; and to fay that they 
 are in the unknown Countries towards the North 
 or South Pole is to take a Thing for granted with- 
 out any manner of Reafon for it, becaufe moft of 
 thefe Countries are covered with Ice continually, 
 and as many as are difcovered of them afford no 
 Springs at all. Neither can they pretend to fay 
 that they are in the Chanel of the Sea ; for if they 
 were, they would be no further diftant from the 
 Center than the Ocean itfelf; and therefore the 
 Water in them would not flow, but be at Reft, 
 becaufe it is againft Nature that it mould afcend 
 from a lower to a higher Place ; and the Springs 
 of all Rivers are higher than the Waters they emit. 
 Some indeed may object that this Motion is vio- 
 lent, becaufe that the Bottom of the Ocean, being 
 perforated into Ducts, Meanders, Fiflures, or Ca- 
 nals,
 
 CHAP. 13. cfUnherfal Geography. 203 
 nals, (which you'll pleafe to call themj is not ter- 
 minated in the Earth's Bowels, but extended to a- 
 nother Part of the Bottom of the Ocean by more 
 Intercourfes than one ; fome of which convey the 
 Water one way, and fome another, fo that it iilii- 
 cth out of each, as if they were fo many Springs. 
 And fmce (fay they) it is not contrary to Reafon 
 to fuppofe many of thefe Paflages or Intercourfes, 
 nothing hinders but that there may be alfo as many 
 Springs in the very Chanel of the Ocean. But 
 thefe are all vain Fancies, and no way agreeing 
 with the Nature of Water , for tho' the Water be 
 continued thro* thefe Orifices, it will not flow thro* 
 one or the other, but be at Reft, unlefs it be ur- 
 ged by fome external Caufe -, and tho' it be prefled 
 by the incumbent Water on this fide the Inter- 
 courfe, it will not difcharge itfelf at the other ; 
 becaufe it is as much prefled by the incumbent 
 Water there, which keeps it in dSquilibrio, and at 
 Reft, as may be proved by Experiment thus : r^ 
 Let ABC D (Fig. 20.) be a Veflel full of Wa- 
 ter, and A B it's fpherical Superficies. Let R P E F 
 be a hollow Beam of Wood, lying obliquely un- 
 der Water, fo that the whole at g under A may be 
 higher than the Hole at b under B. Then the 
 Water will flow in at both ends of the Beam 'till 
 the hollow Part be full ; but there will be no Flux 
 at either Orifice , not at g becaufe it is higher 
 nor at h, becaufe, tho' it be lower than g, yet the 
 greater Weight of the Water about B will ftop 
 the Flux *. 
 
 (<?) For, by the Laws of Hy- of Water under A, and itV 
 
 droftatics, the Weight of the own relative Gravity in the 
 
 greater Column of Water un- declining Bore is to prefs k 
 
 der B is of the fame force to downwards at the Hole g; 
 
 prefs the Water upwards at the therefore it remains in jE$xi- 
 
 Hole b, as the lefler Column libris, and at Reft. 
 
 IF
 
 204 Tb* Abfolute Part S E c t. IV. 
 
 I F it fhould be again objected, that the incum- 
 bent Water upon the one Orifice is of a lefs Alti- 
 tude, and therefore not of fo great Force to repel 
 the Flux of Water, which is immitted at the other : 
 We anfwer, i . That fuch a thing may be, if the 
 Superficies of the Water, which prerTethone Orifice, 
 be feparated or not continuous to the Superficies of 
 the Water that prefleth the other Orifice ; but if 
 thefe two Surfaces are continuous, the Water will 
 fooner defcend by that Continuation to the lower 
 Place, than by this fubterraneous Duel:. 2. If what 
 was objected be allowed, this Motion would in a 
 fhort time ceafe, viz. when fo much Water was 
 run out by the Intercourfe from the higher to the 
 lower Place, as to make both their Surfaces of an 
 equal Altitude. And further, fuppofe one part of 
 the Ocean was perpetually higher than the other, 
 there could be no Reafon given, why the Water 
 fhould circulate, or interchangeably be poured from 
 one Part into another. 
 
 FROM whence it is evident, that the Ocean 
 hath no Springs, but is a vaft Collection of Waters 
 contained in Chanels. 
 
 YET there are fome things to be taken no- 
 tice of, which are commonly objected againft this, 
 viz. 
 
 i . THAT our proof is built upon a Suppofi- 
 tion, that the Ocean, as to it's natural Conftitution, 
 is continually at Reft, without taking notice of it's 
 being moved by any external Caufes : but there is 
 no time in which the Ocean is not in Motion, either 
 by the Wind or Tide, or fome other violent Agent, 
 which caufes the Altitude and quantity of the Wa- 
 ter to be greater fometimes in one Place and fome- 
 times in another ; and then the Water which is more 
 elevated, is poured into thofe fubterraneous Inter- 
 courfes, and rufhes towards the Parts that are of a 
 lefs Altitude, and where the incumbent Water is 
 
 lefs
 
 CHAP. 13. ofUniwrfal Geography. 205 
 lefs able to refift the Eruption. To which I an- 
 fwer, that tho* this is pofiible, yet it cannot be prov- 
 ed either by Reafon or Experience, fo neither can 
 the contrary, therefore this Problem is a Dilemma, 
 or doubtful. That there are indeed fubterraneous 
 Receptacles and Cavities in fome Parts of the 
 Bottom of the Sea we cannot deny, becaufe in fome 
 Parts it is of an immenie Depth, where the neigh- 
 bouring Places are but mallow ; but if this were 
 admitted it will not follow, that the Water runs 
 thro' thefe PafTages, or that they extend from 
 one Chanel of the Ocean to another : or even if 
 they were, fmce they are not in all Places, and 
 fince thefe external Caufes operate fometimes in 
 one, and fometimes in another Part of the Ocean, 
 it will not be granted, that there are perpetual 
 Springs of the Ocean in any one Place, but that 
 the Water flows fometimes from one Part of the 
 Chanel, and fometimes from another, according to 
 the Place and Continuance of the external Caufe. 
 
 2. SOME may thus argue, that there is a con- 
 tinual Current of the Sea from North to South, be- 
 tween both Sides of America and the Old World ; 
 but that we cannot perceive a Current in any Place 
 whereby the Water is conveyed towards the Nor- 
 thern Regions : therefore fince the Flux is perpetual, 
 and hath no apparent Source there, nor Convey- 
 ance thither, it is probable, that the Water flows 
 to the North thro' fubterraneous Paflages, and iflii- 
 eth out at the Holes in the Bottom of the Chanel, 
 as out of a Spring , from whence it returns again to 
 the fouthward. There is another Caufe taken from 
 the former, viz. That the Sea- Water in the Tor- 
 rid Zone is much heavier than in the Northern Re- 
 gions, as we mall prove in Propofition 8, and 12; 
 and therefore there is a greater PreiTure and Force 
 to pufh. forward the Water thro* the Paflages there, 
 than there is to refift it at the Northern End of the 
 
 Jntercourfes,
 
 206 The Abfolute Part S E CT. IV. 
 
 Intercourfes, where, for want of an equal Preffure, 
 it breaks out at the Holes in the Bottom of the 
 Chanels. To this we anfwer, that the Flux of the 
 Ocean from the North is not fo great as is fup- 
 poied, and as the Ancients imagined ; (who would 
 have the Water to flow from the Pole thro' four 
 Chanels, as is reprefented in fome old Geogra- 
 phical Maps ,) nor are the Currents conftant, but 
 only frequently obferved, by reafon of the frequent 
 North-Winds, and the great quantities of Snow 
 and Rain which very often raife the Waters, 
 and caufe them to flow towards the South. And 
 further, in other Parts another Motion of the 
 Sea is obferved, of which fee the following 
 Chapter. 
 
 3. IT is no Notion, but a real Truth, that all 
 the Springs of Rivers, which flow into the 
 Sea, are Springs of the Ocean : For fmce there is 
 in Procefs of Time a vaft quantity of Water 
 poured into the Sea, no doubt but it returns from 
 the Ocean to the Heads of the Rivers thro* fubter- 
 raneous Paffages, or by Dew and Rain. We mail 
 not contend about this ; for we do not, in the 
 Proportion, mean iiich Springs as thefe ; but whe- 
 ther there are Springs in the Caverns of the Earth, 
 under the Chanel of the Sea, which fupply the O- 
 cean with Water. 
 
 4. IT appears probable, that there are fuch 
 Springs in the Chanels of the Sea ; becaufe there 
 is found, in fome Places, frefh Water at the 
 Bottom of die Sea, which muft certainly arife from 
 Springs in the very Chanel. Linfchoten tells us, 
 that in the Gulph of Ormus^ near the little Ifland 
 Bareyn, there is brought up frefh Water, by the 
 Divers, at four or five Fathoms depth ; and the 
 Jike Springs are found at the Bottom of the Seas 
 and Bays. To this we anfwer ; that there are but 
 few fuch Springs found, and thofe not fufficienc 
 
 CO
 
 CHAP. 13. of Unherfal Geography. 2 07 
 
 to fupply the Ocean with Water ; befides the 
 Queftion is not about fuch, as we faid before. 
 
 FROM thefe Things it appears, that the Sea 
 may be rightly faid to have Springs in fome Senfe, 
 tho' different from what we mean by the Springs 
 of Rivers ; in which Senfe this Proportion ought 
 to be underftood. Hence alfo we know what to 
 think of the Queftion ; Whether the Ocean be 
 always one and the fame, and conftantly remains 
 fo, or whether it be a Body whofe Parts are con- 
 fumed and renewed again perpetually. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 The Saltnefs, or Salt Tajle, of the Sea-Water proceeds 
 from the Particles of Salt which are mixed with 
 it : but whence thefe Particles proceed, or bow they 
 are continued and increafed, is uncertain. 
 
 EXPERIENCE proves the firft Part of this 
 Propofition, for every Body knows that Salt is 
 made either by evaporating Sea- Water with the Sun, 
 or by boiling it with the Heat of our Fires. In 
 Germany, and other Countries, they make ufe of 
 Fire to feparate the Water from it. But in France, 
 where the Sun is hotter, the Sea-Water is let into 
 Pits or Ponds, where in a few Months, by the ex- 
 tream Heat of the Sun, it's frefh Particles are ex- 
 haled or evaporated, and it's fait ones are concre- 
 ted and formed into Grains of Salt. Alfo upon 
 the Shores of feveral Countries, as England, &c. 
 there is gathered abundance of Bay-Salt, which 
 the Sea (continually overflowing them) leaves daily 
 in moift Particles, from whence the moft fubtile, 
 or frefh, Parts are exhaled, and what is left be- 
 comes Heaps of Grains of Salt, whofe Blacknefs is 
 taken off by boiling; tho' this fort of Salt is 
 warned away and diilblved from many Shores by 
 
 the
 
 208 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 the Violence of the Ocean, and therefore is not 
 found upon all Shores. And fmce this is a com- 
 mon Experiment which every one knows, Anjlotle 
 need not have inltanced a falfe one (by letting 
 down a VefTel of Wax into the Sea) to prove the 
 Truth of this Propofition. 
 
 HENCE it appears, that the true Caufe of 
 the Saltnefs of Sea Water, is the Particles of Salt 
 which are contained in it, and mixed with it. 
 Therefore the Ariftotelians, with their Matter, fpeak 
 improperly, and obfcurely, when they aflert that 
 this Saltnefs is caufed by the Water's being ex- 
 treamly heated by the Rays of the Sun , but of this 
 we mall fay more by and by. 
 
 BUT the chief Controverfy is about the other 
 part of the Propofition, viz. whence thefe Parti- 
 cles of Salt proceed ? 
 
 JRIS.TOTLE was of Opinion that the dry 
 Exhalations, or Fumes, (which he thought were 
 burnt, and of a faline Nature) being elevated 
 from the Earth, and mixed with moift Particles, 
 when they are turned into Rain, fall down with it 
 into the Sea, and that from thence proceed the faline 
 Particles,.iid the Saltnefs in the Sea- Water. Thefe 
 are his exprefs Words in Lib. ii. Chap. vii. Meteor. 
 And he takes a great deal of Pains to defend this 
 Opinion, becaufe by it he could mew a Reafon 
 why the Sea continues always fait. 
 
 OTHER Peripatetics (who alfo pretend to 
 have Ariftotle on their Side) aflert, that the Sea 
 is fait in itfelf, by reafon of it's being perpetually 
 fcorched with the Sun-Beams -, and for this Reafon 
 they fay it is frelher towards the Bottom, and falteft 
 at the Surface. 
 
 BOTH thefe Opinions labour under fuch great 
 Difficulties and Abfurdities, that it is a Wonder fo 
 many learned Men and Philofophers could be fa- 
 tisfied with them. 
 
 THESE
 
 CHAP. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 209 
 THESE things may be objected againft 
 AriftotlSs Hypothefis ; i . That Rain-Water, ac- 
 cording to this, ought to tafte fait, upon the O- 
 cean, which is contrary to Experience, for it is 
 found not to tafte fait at all. And Scaliger's Re* 
 medy for this is inefficient, who fays, that it 
 ought not to tafte fo at firft, becaufe the hot 
 Vapour hath not had time to be condenfed, being 
 more rare, and alfo having lately defcended from 
 a colder Region of the Air ; but fuch Rain-Wa- 
 ter hath been preferved feveral Days by Mari- 
 ners, in which time it would certainly have tailed 
 fait, if it had held any in it. 2. The lefs it rained 
 the lefs fait would the Sea- Water tafte, which is 
 found to the contrary. 
 
 THE other Opinion hath thefe Abfurdities : 
 i. It is falfe that the Sea is not fo brackifh 
 nearer the Bottom ; for this only happens where 
 Springs of frefh. Water rife from the Bottom of 
 the Chanel. 2. Experience mews that frefh Water 
 doth not become fait by long boiling, or by be- 
 ing long expofed to the Sun. Scaliger likewife 
 endeavours to obviate this Objection by a fubtile 
 Argument. He fays that this happens fo by reafon 
 of the fmallnefs of the quantity of that Water 
 which is ufed in the Experiment, which doth not 
 thicken but is diflblved. But let us take ever fo 
 great a Quantity, and put it over a gentle Fire, 
 that the diflblution (into Vapours as he means) 
 may be hindred, yet the Water will tafte no more 
 brackifh than it did at firft. 3 . Lakes and Marfhes, 
 though they are conftantly heated by the Sun- 
 Beams, yet do not grow fait. Scaliger alfo 
 would wave this Objection, faying, that this 
 happens becaufe of the continual Succeffion of 
 frefh Water. But if we obferve Lakes and Mo- 
 rafifes that are fed only by Rain and melted Snow, 
 where there is n fuch Succeffion, we mail find 
 VOL. I. P them
 
 210 'The dbfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 them rather to dry up, thro* a long want of 
 Rain, than to become brackifh, or be turned in- 
 to fait. 
 
 THEREFORE, rejeding thefe falfe Opi- 
 nions concerning the Origin of Salt in the Ocean, 
 let us lay hold of fome others that feem more 
 probable (/). 
 
 i. THESE 
 
 (/) The moft probable Caufe 
 of the faltnefs of the Ocean is 
 thus explained by Dr Hal/ey, 
 in Pbilof. Tranf. N 344. ' I 
 have obferved (fays he) that 
 all the Lakes in the World, 
 properly fo called, are found 
 to be fait, fome more fome 
 lefs than the Ocean Sea, 
 which, in the prefenc Cafe, 
 may alfo be efteemed a Lake ; 
 fince by that Term I mean 
 fuch Handing Waters as per- 
 petually receive Rivers run- 
 ning into them, and have no 
 Exit or Evacuation. 
 ' The number of thefe Lakes, 
 in the known Part of the 
 World, is exceeding fmall, 
 and indeed, upon enquiry, I 
 cannot be certain there are in 
 all any more than four or five, 
 viz. i - The Cafpiaa Sea. 2. 
 The Mare Mortuum, or Lacus 
 Afpbaltites. 3. The Lake on 
 which ilands the City of 
 Mexico; and 4. Tituaca a 
 Lake in Peru, which, by a 
 Chanel of about fifty Leagues, 
 communicates with a fifth and 
 fmaller, called the Lake of 
 Paria, neither of which have 
 any other Exit. Of thefe the 
 Cafpian, which is by much 
 the greateft, is reported to be 
 fbmewhat lels fait than the 
 
 Ocean. The Lacus Affbdl- 
 tites is fo exceeding fait, that 
 it's Waters feem fully fated, 
 or fcarce capable to diflblve 
 any more ; whence, in Sum- 
 mer time, it's Banks are in- 
 cruftated with great Quan- 
 tities of dry Salt, of fome- 
 what a more pungent Nature 
 than the Marine, as having 
 a relilh of Sal Ammoniac ; as 
 I was informed by a curious 
 Gentleman that was upon the 
 Place. 
 
 ' The Lake of Mexico, pro- 
 perly fpeaking, is two Lakes 
 divided by the Caufways that 
 lead to the City, which is 
 built in Iflands in the midft 
 of the Lake, undoubtedly for 
 it's Security ; after the Idea, 
 it is poffible,Jt's firft Founders 
 borrowed from their Beavers, 
 who build their Houfes 
 in Damms they make in the 
 Rivers after that manner. 
 Now that part of the Lake 
 which is to the northwards 
 of the Town and Caufways, 
 receives a River of a confider- 
 able Magnitude, which being 
 fomewhat higher than the o- 
 ther, does with a fmall fall 
 exonerate itfelf into the fouth- 
 ern Part which is lower. 
 Of thefe the lower is found 
 ' to
 
 C H A P . 1 3 . of Univerfal Geography. 2 1 1 
 
 1. THESE Particles are coeval with the O 
 cean itfelf, and therefore it is the fame thing to en- 
 quire about the Origin of the terraqueous Globe, 
 and the Fabric of the whole World, as to dif- 
 pute how the Ocean came to be fait. 
 
 2. IF this Opinion do not pleafe, we will propofe 
 another, viz. that thefe Particles were, in times 
 paft, warned and disjoined from the Earth, and 
 difiblved in the Water ; for we need not doubt 
 but that there are feveral Mountains and Rocks 
 of Salt in the Chanel of the Sea. The IQand of 
 Ormus is nothing but white hard Salt, of which 
 they make the Walls of their Houfes, and there 
 
 to be fait, but to what De- 
 gree I cannot yet learn ; 
 though the tpper be almoft 
 frefli. 
 
 ' And the Lake of Titicaca, 
 being near eighty Leagues in 
 Circumference, and receiving 
 feveral confiderable frefh Ri- 
 vers, has it's Waters, by the 
 Teftimony of Herrera and 
 Acofta, fo brack ifh as not to 
 be potable, tho 1 not fully fo 
 fait as that of the Ocean; 
 and the like they affirm of 
 that of Paria, into which the 
 Lake of liticaca does in part 
 exonerate itfelf, and which 
 I doubt not will be found 
 much falter than it, if it were 
 enquired into. 
 
 ' Now I conceive, that as all 
 the Lakes mentioned do re- 
 ceive Rivers, aod have no 
 Exit or Difcharge, fo 'twill 
 be necefiary that their Waters 
 rife until fuch time as their 
 Surfaces are fufficiently ex- 
 tended, fo as to exhale in 
 Vapour that Water that is 
 poured in by the Rivers ; and 
 
 P 2 
 
 confeqaently that Lakes muft 
 be bigger or lefler according 
 to the Quantity of the frefli 
 Water they receive. But the 
 Vapours thus exhaled are per- 
 fectly frefli, fo that the faline 
 Particles that are brought ia 
 by the Rivers remain behind, 
 whillt the frefli evaporates; 
 and hence 'tis evident, that 
 the Salt in the Lakes will be 
 continually^ augmented, and 
 the Water grow falter and 
 falter. But in Lakes that have 
 an Exit, as the Lake of Gen- 
 nefaret, otherwife called that 
 of Tiberias, and the upper 
 Lake of Mexico, and indeed 
 in moft others, the Water bg- 
 ing continually running off, is 
 fupplied by new frefli River- 
 Water, in which the falin* 
 Particles are fo few as by no 
 means to be perceived. 
 Now if this be the truff 
 Reafon of the Saltnefs of 
 thefe Lakes, ' tis not improba- 
 ble but that the Ocean itfelf 
 is become fait from the fame 
 Caofe, &V.
 
 212 *fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 is not one Spring of frefh Water in the whole 
 IQand. There are alfb feveral Mines of Salt in 
 the Earth, as every one knows, fome of which 
 we have defcribed in Chapter xi. But there is 
 no need of particular Examples ; let us confider 
 the whole Earth, and we mall find a great Part 
 of it to be nothing but Salt ; it's Coherence and 
 Compofition is by Salt, and, as Chymifts and Na- 
 tural Philofophers rightly obferve, all folid Bo- 
 dies are concreted and joined by Salt ; which Ex- 
 perience alfo proves ; for if any hard Body be 
 b\irned and confumed to Alhes, much Salt will 
 be found in it. 
 
 NOTHING can be alledged againft this O- 
 pinion of any Weight, and which may not be 
 eafily refuted. Some have thought it impoflible 
 that thefe fait Particles of the Earth mould per- 
 petually fuffice, and mould not at fome time be 
 quite warned away by the Water of the Ocean, 
 which conftantly takes away fome Part of them : 
 To which we anfwer ; that the Salt, thus wrought 
 upon, is not fo much leflened as to need great 
 recruiting ; and if any be disjoined, or fliaken 
 from the reft, it is not carried without the Ocean, 
 but laid up in fome other Place. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 Whether the Sea-Water befrejher nearer the Bottom ? 
 and why, in fome Places^ frejb Water is drawn 
 from the Bottom of the Ocean ? 
 
 T O thefe Queftions I anfwer \ That we have not 
 found it frefher near the Bottom, except in fome 
 particular Places , where, it is very probable, 
 there are Springs of frelh Water. For it is a- 
 
 fainft Nature that Salt Water mould float above 
 elh, when it is heavier. 
 
 THOSE
 
 CHAP. 13. of Umverfal Geography. 213 
 THOSE Places of the Sea where there feem 
 to be frefh Water Springs, at the Bottom, the 
 Studious may colled: out of Geographical Au*. 
 thors (/). 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 The Water of the Ocean is lefe fait by how much it 
 is nearer the Poles , and faltejl about the Equator, 
 or in the Torrid Zone. 
 
 THIS is only to be understood of mod Parts 
 of the Ocean, for the Proportion admits of fome 
 few Exceptions. 
 
 T H E R E are feveral Reafons for this unequal 
 Saltnefs, viz. 
 
 i. THAT the Heat of the Sun in the Torrid 
 Zone exhales more Vapours than in the northern 
 Countries, and thefe Vapours are all frem Water 
 for the Particles of Salt are not fo eafily evapora- 
 ted by reafon of their Gravity j and therefore the 
 
 (f) That the Curious may Refinance of the Water keeps 
 
 not be at a Lofs to examine the up the Bucket in the Poiture 
 
 Saltnefs of the Water at feveral C, whereby the Water hath, 
 
 Depths, Dr Hook invented an all the while it is defcending, a 
 
 Internment to fetch it up at any clear Paflage through ; whereas, 
 
 Depth, which is defcribed in as foon as the Bucket is pulled 
 
 Pbilof.TranJ. N 9. Page 149. upwards by the Line F, the Re- 
 
 and N 24. Page 447. or in fifhnce of the Water to that 
 
 Lowtborp'i Abridgment, Vol. 2. Motion, beats the Bucket down- 
 
 Page 260. Thus : wards, and keeps it in the Po- 
 
 Let there be made a fquare flure G, whereby the included 
 wooden Bucket C, (Fig. 21.) Water is kept from getting out, 
 whofe Bottoms EE, are fo con- and the ambient Water kept 
 trived, that as the Weight A from getting in. 
 finks the Iron B, to which the By th e ad vantage of this Vef- 
 Bucket C, is fattened by two fel, you may know the Con- 
 Handles DD, on the end of ftitution of the Sea- Water in 
 which are the moveable Valves feveral Depths ; and whether 
 or Bottoms EE, and thereby it be falterat, and towards, the 
 down the Bucket; the Bottom. 
 
 P 3 Water
 
 214 ^he Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Water that is left in the Ocean ought to be more 
 fait about the Equator than towards the Poles, 
 where there is not fo much frefh Water exhaled 
 becaufe of the wak Heat of the Sun. 
 
 2. A fecond Caufe is the Heat and Coldnefs 
 of the Water j for the fame Water, fait Meat, 
 pickled Beef, Pork, &c. tafte falter when hot than 
 when cold, as every one knows from his own Ob- 
 fervation : becaufe the Heat, or the Particles of Fire, 
 agitate and fharpen the Particles of Salt contained 
 in fuch Meat, and feparate them one from ano- 
 ther j fo that they ftrike and prick the Tongue 
 more Iharply. Therefore, becaufe the Sea-Water 
 near the Equator is hotter, and col deft towards 
 the Poles, it follows, that tho' every Part of the 
 Ocean were admitted to be of equal Saltnefs, yet 
 it ought to tafte falteft about the Equator, and 
 frefheft near the Poles. 
 
 3 . A third Caufe is a greater or lefs quantity of 
 Salt in divers Parts of the Chanel of the Sea , for 
 as we find not Mines of Salt all over the dry 
 Land, nor a like quantity of Salt in the Places 
 where they are found, the fame may be fuppofed 
 at the Bottom of the Ocean, where fome Shores 
 and Chanels are not fo full of Salt as others. 
 Therefore where there is a greater quantity of 
 Salt at the Bottom of the Ocean, there the Sea- 
 Water is more fait, becaufe there is greater Plen- 
 ty of this Mineral imbodied or foaked in it, as 
 is eafy to conceive. For this Reafon the Sea- 
 Water near the Ifle ofOrmus is extream fait, be- 
 caufe the Ifland itfelf is all Salt. But whether 
 there be a greater quantity of Salt Mines under 
 Water in the Torrid Zone than about the Poles is 
 uncertain for want of Obfervations ; but fome 
 think it probable (becaufe of the greater Heat of 
 the Sun whereby the frefh Particles are exhaled) 
 
 i that
 
 CHAP. 13. ofUnherfal Geography. 215 
 that there is more Salt in the former : tho s this be 
 but a weak Reafon. 
 
 4. A fourth Caufe is die frequency and fcarcity 
 of Rain or Snow. In the northern Countries they 
 have both very frequent : but under the Torrid Zone 
 they have no Rains at all for fome Parts of the 
 Year, and at other Times they are almoft conftant. 
 Therefore, in thefe Places, the Ocean, near the 
 Shores, is not fo fait in rainy Months as it is in 
 dry ones. Yea in feveral Places on the Coaft of 
 Malabar, in India, the Sea- Water taftes fweet in 
 the rainy Months, by reafon of the vaft quantity 
 of Water which flows from off Mount Gate, and 
 falls there into the Sea. This is the Reafon why, 
 at different Times of the Year, the fame Parts of 
 the Ocean are of different Degrees of Saltnefs. But 
 becaufe in the northern Countries there are con- 
 ftant Rains and Snow almoft throughout the whole 
 Year, therefore the' Sea there is lefs fait than in 
 the Torrid Zone. 
 
 5. A fifth Caufe is the different quality of the 
 Water to diffolve and mix the Salt with it ; for 
 hot Water diflblves Salt much fooner than cold : 
 and therefore tho' there were the fame quantity 
 of Salt under Water in the Chanels of the Sea, 
 near the Poles, as about the Equator ; yet becaufe 
 the Water is cold there, it cannot fo quickly dif- 
 folve it into minute Particles and mix with 
 it, as the Water in the Torrid Zone which is 
 hotter. 
 
 6. A fixth Caufe is the great and many large 
 Rivers that empty themfelves into the Sea ; but 
 thefe only caufe an Alteration upon the Coafts i 
 for the main Ocean is not fenfibly affected by them. 
 Mariners relate that upon the Coaft of Brafel where 
 the Rio de la Plata empties itfelf into the Sea, 
 the Ocean lofes it*s fait Tafte, at almoft fifteen 
 Leagues Diftance from the Shore \ and the fame 
 
 P 4 may
 
 2 1 6 The Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 may be faid of the African Ocean on the Coaft 
 of Congo, and in feveral other Places, as about 
 Malabar in India, (as was obferved before) &V. 
 To thefe Caufes we may add the fpringing up of 
 frelh Water income places from the Bottom of the 
 Sea. 
 
 THESE Caufes (whether feparate or united) 
 make a great variety of Saltnefs in different Parts 
 of the Ocean, and by thefe that variety is explain- 
 ed and accounted for. 
 
 HENCE there is given a Reafon why the 
 Water of the German and northern Ocean will 
 not yield fo much Salt by boiling, as the Water 
 of the weftern Ocean about Spain, the Canary 
 Iflands, and Cape Verd in Africa, (from whence 
 the Dutch fetch abundance of Salt and tranfport it 
 to feveral northern Countries, viz. to Pruffia, Po- 
 land, &c.) becaufe thefe Coafts are nearer the 
 Torrid Zone than the other , tho* perhaps both their 
 Chanels may contain an equal quantity of Salt. 
 
 THE Sea-Water in the Ethiopic Ocean, over 
 againft Guinea, yields white Salt, with once boiling, 
 as fine as Sugar, fuch as neither the Spanijh Ocean, 
 nor any other in Europe will produce at once 
 boiling. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 Why Rain-Water catched In the middle of the Ocean 
 is found to be fweet and frejh, when it proceeds 
 from the Vapours which are exhaled from the Sea ; 
 whereas the Water, which, by boiling or diftilling, 
 we feparate from the fait Water of the Sea, is 
 found to be fait. 
 
 THOSE that have diligently fearched into 
 the Secrets of Nature, I mean the learned Chy- 
 mifts, (not thofe ignorant Pretenders to Chymiftry) 
 
 have
 
 C H A P. 1 3 . of Unherfal Geography. 2 17 
 have hitherto laboured in vain to find out a Me- 
 thod of diftilling or extra&ing frefh Water from 
 the Sea- Water, which would be of great ufe and 
 advantage to Navigation (g). And tho' both by 
 Decodion and Diftillation, which are in Effect 
 the fame, there is Salt left in the Bottom of the 
 
 (g) Mr Hauton firft found 
 out the Secret of making Sea- 
 Water fweet. It confifts firft 
 in a Precipitation made with the 
 Oil of Tartar, which he knows 
 to dr.w with fmall Charges. 
 Next he diftils the Sea- Water ; 
 in which the Furnace taketh 
 up but little Room, and is fo 
 made, that, with a very little 
 Wood or Coal, he can diftil 
 twenty four French Pots of Wa- 
 ter in a Day; for the cooling 
 of which he hath this new In- 
 vention, that inftead of making 
 the Worm pafs thro' a Veflel 
 full of Water fas is the ordi- 
 nary Practice), he maketh it go 
 thro' a Hole, made on purpofe 
 out of the Ship, and to enter 
 in again thro' another ; fo that 
 the Water of the Sea perform- 
 eth the cooling Part ; by which 
 means he faveth the Room 
 which the common Refrigerium 
 would take up ; as alfo the La- 
 bour of changing the Water 
 when the Worm hath heated 
 it. But then, thirdly, he joins 
 to the two precedent Operations 
 Filtration, whereby perfectly to 
 correftthe malignity of the Wa- 
 ter. This Filtration is made by 
 meansofa peculiar Earth, which 
 he mixeth and ftirs with the di- 
 ftilled Water, and at length fuf- 
 fers to fettle at the Bottom 
 
 He maintains that this diftil- 
 Jed Sea- Water is altogether fa- 
 
 I 
 
 lubrious : he proves it from Ex- 
 perience, it having been given 
 to Men and Beads, without any 
 ill EfFeft at all upon them. 
 Secondly, from Reafon grounded 
 on this, that that peculiar Earth, 
 being mixed with the diftilled 
 Water, blunts the Points of the 
 volatile Spirits of the Salt, and 
 ferveth them for Sheaths, if I 
 may fo fpeak, taking away 
 their Force and malign fharp- 
 nefs. Philof. Tranf. abridged 
 by Lowtborp. Vol. 2. Page 297. 
 I have been credibly inform- 
 ed by experienced Sailors ('par- 
 ticularly fome that had an En- 
 gine on Board) that Salt-Wa- 
 ter made frefh by Diftillation, 
 would not quench Third ; but 
 that, when they had drank as 
 much as they could get down, 
 their Thirft, was not at all a- 
 bated. So necefl'ary are the 
 Impregnations, which the 
 Waters receive in their paf- 
 fages about the Earth, to make 
 them nutritive. And the richer, 
 and more fulphureous, thofe 
 Impregnations are, fo much the 
 richer, and better, fuch Wa- 
 ters are accounted. An in- 
 ftance of which we have in 
 the Richnefs and Spirituoufnefs 
 of the Thames-Water at Sea, 
 which no doubt it receive* 
 from it's Impregnations by the 
 Soil, and Filth, of the London 
 Kcinels, 
 
 Veflel,
 
 2 1 8 The Alfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Vefiel, yet the Water thus feparated is ftill fait, 
 and not fit for drinking, which feems ftrange to 
 thofe that are ignorant of the Caufe of it. This 
 is taught by Chymiftry (which is the trueft Phlio- 
 fophy), by the help of which there are found two 
 kinds of Salt in all Bodies, which tho' they per- 
 fectly agree in Tafte, yet they exceedingly differ in 
 other Qualities : Artifts call the one fixed Salt, the 
 other volatile. The fixed Salt, becaufe of it's Gra- 
 vity, is not evaporated by Diftillation, but re- 
 mains in the Bottom of the Veflel : but the vola- 
 tile Salt is fpirituous, and indeed nothing but a 
 moft fubiile Spirit, which is eafily raifed with a 
 very gentle Fire , and therefore in Diftillation af- 
 cends with the fweet Water, and is well mixed 
 with it by Reafon of the fubtilty of it's Particles. 
 This fixed and volatile Salt is found, by Chymifts, 
 to be not only in Sea- Water, but almoft in all 
 Bodies, tho' more in fome than in others ; in Herbs 
 that tafte (harp there is more, but in oily and in- 
 fipid Things lefs. The Difficulty therefore lies 
 in feparating the volatile Salt, or the fait Spirit 
 from the Water ; for it is this which hath render- 
 ed all the Efforts hitherto fruitlefs. 
 
 BUT why Rain-Water mould be as fweet and 
 frefh on the main Ocean as it is at Land, when 
 it is generated from Exhalations, which arife 
 from the Sea by the Heat of the Sun, or is exhaled by 
 the Force of fubterraneous Fire, which Evapora- 
 tion no way differs from Diftillation, there feemeth 
 to be a fourfold Caufe. 
 
 i. A flow and gentle Evaporation, by which 
 only the more fubtile Part is exhaled out of the 
 Ocean, which tho' it contain the volatile Spirit 
 of Salt, yet it is in a lefs quantity than when the 
 Evaporation is made by a ftrong Heat. 2 . The long 
 Space which this Vapour panes thro' before it 
 arrives at that Region of the Air where it is con- 
 
 denfed
 
 C H A P. 1 3 . of Univerfal Geography. 2*9 
 denfed into Rain : in which Paffage it is poflible 
 that the faline Spirit may be by degrees feparated 
 from the watery Particles. 3. The Mixture of 
 other frefh Particles of Water that are in die Air. 
 4. The Refrigeration and Coagulation or Conden- 
 fation of the Vapour. For thefe Vapours in their 
 afcent from the Ocean become, by degrees, colder, 
 and mixing with others in their Way, they are 
 condenfed and turned in Clouds ; and in this Re- 
 frigeration and Condenfation the faline Spirits fly 
 away, with fiery Particles, into a higher Place 
 of the Air. 
 
 BUT why this doth not happen in Diftilla- 
 tion (where the Vapours exhaled become more 
 cool and condenfed) proceeds from hence : i . In 
 this fhort FafTage the faline Spirit fticketh clofe 
 to the watery Particles. 2. The Vapour is kept 
 in a Veffel which doth not admit the Spirit to 
 fly thro* it. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 Sea-Water is heavier than frejh ; and Sea-Water in 
 one Place is heavier than in another (ty. 
 
 THE Reafon of this is plain from what we 
 have laid before, viz. that the Sea-Water contains 
 a fixed Salt which is a much heavier Body than 
 
 (b) Mr Boyle having recom- 
 mended this Matter, among o- 
 thers, to a learned Phyfician that 
 was failing to America, and fut- 
 nifhed him with a fmall hydro- 
 ftatical Inftrument to obferve, 
 from time to time, the differ- 
 ences of Gravity he might meet 
 with ; this Account was retur- 
 ned him ; ' that he found, by 
 ' the Glafs, the Sea-Witcr to 
 
 increafe in Weight the nearer 
 he came to the Line, 'till he 
 arrived at a certain Degree 
 of Latitude; as he remembers 
 it was about the 3o th ; after 
 which the Water feemed to 
 retain the fame fpecificGravity 
 'till he came to Barbodoes, or 
 Jamaica. Lowtbcrp's Abridg- 
 ment tfPbilof. Tranfaft. Page 
 297. Vol. 2. 
 
 frefh
 
 220 *tbe dbfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 frefh Water : and we have ihewn that there is a dif- 
 ferent quantity of Salt in different Parts of the Sea ; 
 which muft caufe the Gravity of the Water to be 
 unequal. But fome Sea- Water may happen to tafte 
 more fait than others, and yet be not more weigh- 
 ty ; becaufe it perhaps contains a greater quanti- 
 ty of volatile Salt, which does rather diminifh 
 than increafe it's Weight, tho* it make it more 
 fait. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 Sea-Water doth not fo eaftly freeze asfrejh ; or a grea- 
 ter Degree of cold is required to congeal Sea-Water, 
 than to congeal frejh. 
 
 EXPERIENCE mews this, contrary to the 
 Opinion of the Peripatetics, who mention that by 
 how much Water is more pure, it is Jefs liable to 
 freeze, and that Sea- Water being more elemen- 
 tary than frefh will freeze the fooner ; which is 
 falfe. 
 
 BUT the Caufe is, that in Salt there is a cer- 
 tain Spirit which refifts Coagulation, and this being 
 feparated from it, will not congeal in the hardeft 
 Froft, as is well known to Chymifts : for they 
 frequently make ufe of this Spirit of Salt (/). 
 
 (/) The Particles of two dif- tion. So that Water mixed 
 
 ferent Bodies, which would be with Salt, is more in Motion 
 
 more at Reft when feparate, than Water alone ; and there- 
 
 when they are mixed are put fore the Particles of Sea- Water 
 
 into new Motions by Attraflion, are not fo eafily congealed, or 
 
 which afts upon them only made to reft, as the Particles of 
 
 when they approach one ano- frelh, which do not jefift the 
 
 ther; and caufes them to meet cold with fuch violent Motions, 
 
 and clam with great Violence, See Newton's Optics. Pag. 355. 
 and to keep hot with the Mo- 
 
 PRO*
 
 CHAP. 13, ofUntverfal Geography. 221 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 the Ocean is not enlarged when it receives fo 
 many Rivers. 
 
 THE Caufe is; i. The Water returns from 
 the Sea, thro* fubterraneous Fiflures to the Heads 
 of the Rivers. 2. Plenty of Vapours are raifed 
 from the Ocean, a great Part of which being turn- 
 ed into Rain, fall partly into the Ocean, and part- 
 ly on the dry Land (k). 
 
 PRO- 
 
 (J) Since the Ocean con- 
 ftantly receives a prodigious 
 quantity of Water, both from 
 Rivers that exonerate thera- 
 felves into it, and alfo from the 
 Air, in Dew, Rain, and Snow, 
 that fall; it is impoffible but it 
 (hould be enlarged, andencreafe 
 to an immenfe Bulk, unlefs it 
 be as much leflened fome other 
 way. And feeing there hath 
 not been obferved any fuch 
 great increafe in the Sea, and 
 that the bounds of the Earth 
 and Ocean are found to be in 
 all Ages the fame, it remains 
 that we inquire by what means 
 the Ocean lofes fo much Wa- 
 ter as it receives from Rain 
 and Rivers flowing into it. 
 There are two Hypothefes a- 
 mong Philofophers ; one is, that 
 the Water of the Sea is car- 
 ried, by fubterraneous Conduits 
 to the Springs of Rivers, and, 
 in it's draining thro' the Fif- 
 furcs, lofes it's Saltnefs : the o- 
 ther is, that it happens by the Va- 
 pours that are drawn up from it's 
 Surface. The former is now re- 
 
 jected bymoft, it being difficult, 
 if not impoffible, to explain how 
 the Water of the Ocean, being 
 more deprefled than the very 
 Mouths of the Rivers, can come 
 up to their Springs, which are, 
 for the moft part, on very high 
 Mountains ; but in the latter Hy- 
 pothefis we have no Occasion to 
 explain this, neither to hinder 
 the Growth of the Ocean, nor 
 to fuppty the Springs with Wa- 
 ter; both which may be more 
 eafily done by the Vapour*, 
 which we certainly know to be 
 drawn up from the Surface of 
 the Sea. 
 
 The quantity of Vapours 
 drawn up from the Sea was 
 tried by Dr Halley, who made 
 the following Computation. 
 Pbilof. Tranfatt. N 189. Page 
 366. 
 
 By an Experiment made with 
 great Care he found that Wa- 
 ter, falted to the fame Degree 
 as is common Sea- Water, and 
 heated . to the fame Degree of 
 Heat, which is obferved to be 
 that of Air in our hotted Sum- 
 mers,
 
 222 
 
 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 Some Parts of the Ocean differ in Colour from others. 
 
 W E obferve that towards the North Pole, the 
 Sea feems to be of a black Colour, and in the Tor- 
 rid Zone of a dufky Colour, and in other Places of 
 a green Colour. Upon the Coaft of New Guinea, 
 
 the 
 
 roers, to exhale the thicknefs 
 <jf a fortieth Part of an Inch 
 in two Hours. From whence 
 it appears that a Bulk of Wa- 
 ter a tenth Part of an Inch 
 high will be exhaled into Va- 
 pours in twelve Hours. 
 
 So that if the Superficies of 
 the whole Ocean, or a Part of 
 it, as the Mediterranean Sea be 
 known, it may alfo be known 
 how much Water arifes in Va- 
 pour from it every Day; fup- 
 pofing the Water to be equally 
 hot with the Air in Summer. 
 
 " For from what hath been 
 " laid down, a Superficies of 
 ' ten fquare Inches emits daily 
 ' a cubic Inch of Water; 
 ' one fquare Foot, half a 
 * f Pint; a Square whofe fides 
 ' are 4 Feet, one Gallon ; a 
 'fquare Mile, 6914 Tuns; 
 " and one Degree fqaare, (fup- 
 ' pofed confifting of 69 Eng- 
 " iijb Miles) 33 Millions of 
 Tuns." 
 
 This learned Gentleman 
 eftimates the Mediterranean to 
 be about forty Degrees long, 
 and four broad; allowances be- 
 ing made for the Places where 
 it is broader by thofe where it 
 is narrower, fo that h's whole 
 
 Superficies may be accounted 
 one hundred and fixty fquare 
 Degrees ; and consequently the 
 whole Mediterranean mud lofe 
 in Vapour, according to the 
 foreftated Proportion, in a Sum- 
 mer's Day, at leaft five thoufand 
 two hundred and eighty mil- 
 lions of Tuns. For what quan- 
 tity of Water is licked off the 
 Surface by the Winds, (which 
 is even more fometimes than 
 is exhaled by the Heat of 
 the Sun) feems impoflible to be 
 reduced to any Rule. 
 
 It remains that we compare 
 this quantity of Water with that 
 which is carried daily into the 
 Sea by the Rivers, which is 
 very difficult to do, when we 
 can neither meafure the Breadth 
 of the Chanels of thefe Rivers, 
 nor the Velocity of the Cur- 
 rents. One thing is left, that 
 a Comparifon being made be- 
 tween thefe and the River 
 Thames, and by fuppofing them 
 rather greater than they are, we 
 may have a greater quantity of 
 Water than is really poured by 
 them into the Mediterranean. 
 
 The Mediterranean receives 
 
 thefe nine conliderable Rivers ; 
 
 thd Her us, the Rbwe, the Tiber* 
 
 (he
 
 C H A P. 1 3 . of Univerfal Geography. 223 
 the Sea in fome Parts appears white, and in others 
 yellow: In Streights, or narrow Seas, it appears 
 whitifh. Upon the Coaft of Congo , not far from 
 Baya d'Alvaro, where the fmall River Gonzalez 
 falls into the Sea, the Water is of a reddifh Colour 
 which Tincture it receives from a red mineral 
 Earth, thro* which the River flows. But the moft 
 famous for it's Colour is the Arabian Gulph, being 
 therefore called the Red Sea. Some will have it 
 to be only a bare Name, and taken from Erytbrus, 
 fome time King on that Coaft ; others will have it 
 to be called red from a certain Brightnefs peculiar 
 to it, which is caufed by the reflected Rays of the 
 Sun (/). But the moft probable Opinion, and which 
 
 the Po, the Danube, the Neijter, 
 the Bonftbenes, the Tanais, and 
 the NiJe; all the reft being of 
 no great Note. Each of the fe Ri- 
 vers, this ingenious Gentleman 
 fuppofesto be ten times greater 
 than the Thames, not that any 
 of them is fo great in Reality, 
 but to comprehend with them 
 all the fmall Rivulets that fall 
 into the fame Sea. 
 
 He fuppofes the River 
 Tbamet, at Kingfton Bridge, 
 where the Flood feldom reaches 
 to be in breadth about 100 
 Yards, and in depth 3 ; and the 
 Water to run two Miles an 
 Hour. If therefore the breadth 
 of the Water, ico Yards, be 
 multiplied by 3, the depth, 
 and the Produdt 300 fquare 
 Yards by 48 Miles, or 84480 
 Yards, which the Water runs 
 every Day, the produft will be 
 25344000 cubic Yards of Wa- 
 ter, or 20300000 Tuns that are 
 carried every Day into the Sea. 
 
 Now if each of the aforefaid 
 Bine Rivers yield ten times as 
 
 much Water as the Thames; 
 it will follow, that each of 
 them carries every Day into 
 the Sea 303 Millions of Tuns: 
 and the whole nine, 1827 
 Millions of Tuns in a Day. 
 
 But this is but little more 
 than one third of what is pro- 
 ved to be raifed, in Vapour, 
 out of the Mediterranean in 
 twelve Hours time. Hence it 
 appears that the Mediterranean 
 is fo far from increafing or o- 
 verflowing by the Rivers run- 
 ning into it, that in a fhort 
 Time it would rather be eva- 
 porated, and drawn out, un- 
 lefs the Vapours that it exha- 
 led returned in Dew or Rain 
 upon it. 
 
 Jurin's Appendix. 
 
 (!) 8ome will have this to 
 be the fame with Efau or E- 
 dom, who firft inhabited Uu- 
 meea, a Country near the Ara- 
 bian Gulph, from whence, fajr 
 they, it came to be called the 
 Red-Sea, viz. from EJom, i. c. 
 Red.
 
 224 ^ Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 is confirmed by Experience, is, that it came to be 
 fo called from the red Sand that lies upon the Shore, 
 and is often contrary to it's Nature, mixed with 
 the Water by the vehement Flux and Reflux of the 
 Sea, which is extraordinary in this Gulph ; info- 
 much, that it tofies it to and again like Ames, and 
 keeps it from falling to the Bottom by it's violent 
 Agitation. This is related by Sailors, who tell us, 
 that it fometimes appears as red as Blood ; but if it 
 be kept in a Veflel without making, the red Sand 
 will fubfide, and may be feen in the Bottom. It 
 very often happens, that violent Storms blowing 
 from the Red-Sea, towards Arabia or Africa, carry 
 with them fuch Heaps of red Sand, as to cover 
 whole Caravans, or Troops of Men and Beads, 
 whofe Bodies in time are thus converted into true 
 Mummy. There are other Opinions among Au- 
 thors, about the Name of this Gulph, but they are 
 all of no Weight, as appears from Experience. 
 
 WHETHER the fame or fome other Caufe, 
 Bath urged Mariners to call the Gulph of Califor- 
 nia or (iSermejo] the Red-Sea, I have not yet found 
 obferved by Authors. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 tfbere are certain Peculiarities obferved in fome Parts 
 of the Ocean. 
 
 T H E Sea called by the Portiiguefe di Sargajfi, 
 begins about the Salt I (lands, nor far from Cafe 
 Verd, and extends itfelf from the 2o th Degr. of 
 North Latitude, and to 34 Degr. South. It feems 
 to be of a green Hue, tho' this be not it's proper 
 Colour, but owing to a certain fmall leaved Herb, 
 (not unlike Water-crefles) which we call the Sea- 
 Lentile, or fmall leaved Pariley, but the Portuguefs 
 SargaJJb. The Leaves of this Weed are fo mu- 
 tually
 
 C H A P. 1 3 . of Univerfal Geography. 225 
 tiially intermixed one with another that they cover 
 the Surface of the Ocean in this Place -, fo that 
 the Water can fcarcely be feen, and Sailors afar 
 off take it to be an liland or green Fields j nor 
 can they fail thro' this Knot of Herbs unlefs they 
 be driven by a tolerable Wind. The Herb bears 
 a fmall Berry, not unlike our red Currants, but 
 infipid and hollow within. Whence they proceed 
 is uncertain, not from the Land for that is too 
 far off this Sea, nor from the Bottom (as I think) 
 becaufe the Ocean is here of a vaft Depth and in 
 many Places unfathomable. 
 
 BETWEEN the Cape of Good- Hope and the 
 Iflands of 'f rift an dc Cunha, there are feveral long 
 Sjalks like Reeds of a confiderable thicknefs, 
 f6und floating on the Water, and thefe very often 
 are entangled with Sea-Alkanet, or with Sargaflb. 
 The Sailors call them Thrombs, and they take 
 it for a fure Sign if they meet with it at Sea, 
 as they are failing to India, that either they are 
 near the Cape of Good- Hope, or have pafled it. 
 
 U P O N the Coaft of the Ifland of Madagascar -, 
 die Ocean calls out red and white Coral, which 
 grows like a Shrub under Water : and tho' they 
 are foft in fome Places, yet between Madagafcar 
 and Africa, there are faid to be Rocks of hard 
 Coral (). 
 
 UPON the Coaft of Pntffia in the Baltic, the 
 Sea cafts up excellent Amber, which the Inhabi- 
 
 (m) Mr Guifony is of Opi- alledging that he can fhew a 
 nion, that Coral is fo far from Salt of Coral, which, being caft 
 being a Plant that 'tis a meer into Water, and there dif- 
 Mineral, compofed of much folved, upon the Evaporation 
 Salt, and a little Earth ; and that of that Water by a gentle Heat, 
 it is formed into that Subftance is prefently coagulated and con- 
 by a Precipitation of divers Salts, verted into ft ore of fmall Sticks 
 that enfues upon the Encoun- refembling a little Foreft. Pbi- 
 terof the Earth with thofe Salts, /of. Trar.j. abridged by Lctu- 
 This Sentiment he confirms by 'thorp, Vol. 2, Page 493. 
 
 VOL. I. tants
 
 226 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 tanrs are taught to draw to the Shore with Nets 
 of Wire, when certain Winds blow. 
 
 THE Ocean cafts up Ambergris only in the 
 Torrid Zone^ (if we may believe fome Authors) 
 viz. at the Shore of Brafil (where a Dutch Soldier 
 once found a Piece weighing five hundred Pound, 
 and prefented it to Count Maurice of Naffau} ; 
 alfo at Madagascar ', at the Cape of Good-Hope^ at 
 the Ifland of Maurice (by the Portuguefe called de 
 Cerne], at Sumatra^ and other Indian Iflands. Garcias 
 relates, that there was a Piece one time found of 
 two thoufand Pound Weight, and that fome Iflands 
 are all of Ambergris -, but he does not tell us 
 where they are fituaied (). 
 
 THE Ethiopic Ocean, at Guinea^ Congo, and 
 Angola , has this peculiar Property , that Shells as 
 
 freen as Grafs ftick to the Sides and Keels of 
 hips , while they remain or fail there, which re- 
 tard their Courfe and eat out the Timber. 
 
 UPON the Coaft of Bntagne in France, wild 
 Fowls are generated on the Sides and Keels of 
 Ships, being at firft unfhapely, but afterwards are 
 formed by degrees, and having their Bills faft- 
 ned into the Wood, they begin to move, and at 
 laft pull themfelves off, and fwim in the Sea like 
 Ducks. [Thefe we call Barnacles.'] 
 
 (n) Ambergris is found in Some will have it to be the 
 
 feveral other Places ; as st Wax or Honey of fome living 
 
 Cape Comorin, there was taken Creature; others fay it iflues 
 
 up a Piece of three hundred out of the Root of a Tree, 
 
 Weight, and another weighing that grows in the Sea, like 
 
 fifteen hundred Pound ; at Am- Gum ; others that it is a Bi- 
 
 bergrh-P oint in "Jamaica there tumen, and comes from the 
 
 was found a Piece one him- Entrails of the Earth, which is 
 
 dred and fifty Pound Weight; the moft likely Opinion. See 
 
 and in feveral Places without Philof. Tranf. No 9 2. Page 6 1 1 . 
 
 the Torrid Zone, as upon the No 232. Page 71 1. and No 263. 
 
 Coaft of New England, on the Page 573. 
 weflern CoaH of Ireland, &c. 
 
 THE
 
 C H A P. 1 3 . of Univerfal Geography. 227 
 
 THE Excrement of the Ocean, which we call 
 Froth, is obferved to float in feveral Places, and 
 more in fome than in others. 
 
 THERE are found Water Lentils in feveral 
 Parts of the Ocean, as between England and France, 
 upon the Coafl of the South Continent, and elfe- 
 where. 
 
 O N the Coaft of Malabar and Cambaya there 
 are found Serpents upon the Surface of the Water : 
 from whence Sailors guefs at their approach to 
 thefe Countries. 
 
 ABOUT four Leagues from New- Spain, fe- 
 veral Roots, Reeds, and Leaves, like thofe of 
 the Fig-Tree, float to and again, upon the Wa- 
 ter, which they commonly eat ; and their Tafte 
 is fomething like Cabbage. 
 
 W E read in the firft Voyage of the Dutch to 
 the Streights of Magellan, that on the twelfth of 
 January 1599. tne Water of the Ocean, not far 
 from the Mouth of the Silver River, (Rio de Plata} 
 appeared of a red and bloody Colour ; but when 
 they had drawn up a Bucket, and obferved it 
 more narrowly, they found in it an innumerable 
 Multitude of little Worms of a red Colour, which, 
 being taken into their Hands, leaped up and down 
 like Fleas. Hence the Seamen call them Sea- 
 Fleas *, and believe that they are vomited by 
 Whales, at a certain Time of the Year. Others 
 think they proceed from an innumerable Company 
 
 of 
 
 * Dr Derkam in his Pbyf. Months, as to change the Wa- 
 
 Tbeol. lib. iv. c. ii,Note(a) ter red, or yellow, according 
 
 faith, the Infecis that for the to the Colour they are of. 
 
 molt part difcolour the Waters, Of which Dr Florence S(buyl 
 
 are the frnall Infeds of the told Swammerdam this merry 
 
 Shrimp- Kind, called, by Swam- Story, ' That one day, when 
 
 nerdatn, Pulex aquaticus ar- ' he was very intent in his 
 
 borefcens. Which are fometimes ' Study, he was difturbcd with 
 
 ib numerous in the Summer ' a horrible Rumour ; and 
 i when
 
 228 *Tke Abfolute Tart SECT. IV. 
 
 of fmall Crabs, that fill the Sea towards the South 
 Continent, fo that in a weak Light, as in the 
 Morning and Evening Twilight, the Ocean ap- 
 pears to Sailors of a bloody Colour. 
 
 BUT this is not the Place for treating of A- 
 nimals of different Kinds that are found in dif- 
 ferent Parts. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 
 Why the Sea appears bright andjhining at Night -, ej~ 
 perially if the Waves are violently agitated with a 
 Storm. 
 
 THIS Phenomenon requires the Knowledge 
 of that difficult Point, the Caufe of Colours. The 
 Opinions of Philofophers are divided about it. 
 They that explain Colours by certain and various 
 Motions bed folvethe Phenomenon j die more ac- 
 curate Explication of which belongs to Phyfics (o). 
 
 * when he was fcarce gotten up Sir Ifaac Newton will perhaps 
 ' to enquire what was the give us the beft Notion of this 
 .' matter, his Maid, half dead Appearance. ' Do not (fays he) 
 ' with the fr.'ght, came run- ' all fixed Bodies, when 
 ' ning, and fighing told him, ' heated beyond a certain De- 
 
 * that all the Water of Leyden ' gree, emit Light, and fhine ? 
 "' was changed to Blood.' The ' And is not this Emiffion 
 
 Caufe of which, upon exami- ' performed by the vibrating 
 
 nation, he found to be from the ' Motions of their Parts ? And 
 
 numerous Swarms of thofe Pu- ' do not all Bodies, which a- 
 
 liees. * bound with terreftrial Parts, 
 
 The Caufe of this Concourfe ' andefpeciallywithfulphureous 
 and Appearance of thofe little ' ones, emit Light as often as 
 Infeds, Dr Derham fays is for ' thofe Parts are fufficiently a- 
 their Coitus. At which time ' gitated, whether that Agita- 
 they are very ve"nereous, frisk- ' tion be made by Heat, or by 
 ing, and catching at one ano- ' Fridlion, or Percuffion, orPu- 
 ther; and many of them con- * trefaftion, or by any vital Mo- 
 joined Tail to Tail, with their tion, or any other Caufe ? as 
 Bodies inclined towards one ' for Inftance ; Sea- Water in a 
 another. raging Storm, &(. Optus 
 
 (o) The following Q^ery of ' Page 314. 
 
 i PRO-
 
 CHAP. 13. ofUniverfal Geography. 229 
 PROPOSITION XVIII. 
 
 The Ocean, and indeed all Waters, caft on the Jhore 
 terreftrial Bodies, efpecially about the Time of, Full' 
 Moon. 
 
 I T is not difficult to explain the Reafon of 
 this Property, which is found to be true by Ex- 
 perience. For the Water being in Agitation con- 
 tinually, either one way or other, carries with it 
 the terreftrial Bodies towards that Part whereto 
 it is moved : which is always towards fome Shore, 
 where the Motion ceafmg they are left upon the 
 Sand. 
 
 BUT this Agitation of the Ocean is greateft at 
 the Full -Moon. 
 
 THEREFORE their Opinions are abfurd 
 who believe the Ocean to be a fenfible living Crea- 
 ture, and that it continually purgeth itfelf of Dregs 
 and terreftrial Bodies. The Reafon of it is here 
 plain. 
 
 Qj CHAP.
 
 230 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 Of the Motion of the Sea in general ; and of 
 if s Flux and Reflux in particular. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 Water has hit one natural Motion^ by which it moves 
 from a higher to a lower Place. And if the ad- 
 joining Places are of an equal Altitude , or higher 
 than the Superficies of the Water ^ it naturally refts, 
 and is not moved out of it's PJace but by jome exter- 
 nal Caufe. 
 
 O M M O N Experience manifefts the Truth of 
 this Propofition. For if you take a Veflel of 
 Water and move it, the Water will fluctuate, and 
 be in Motion, 'till no part of it be higher than ano- 
 ther , that is, 'till it's Superficies be ipherical, as 
 was faid in Chapter xiii. And although perhaps 
 this Motion may proceed from an external Caufe, 
 viz. the Preffure of the Atmofphere, or the Mo- 
 tion of the Air round the Globe , yet becaufe 
 there are great Difputes about this Cauie, and the 
 Motion is fo apparent in the Water itfelf, that it 
 doth not feem to proceed from any external Agent, 
 therefore it may be called natural, to diftinguifh it 
 at leaft from other Motions of the Water. And 
 this Motion is towards that Part which is more de- 
 prefied. 
 
 i PRO-
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univer/al Geography. 231 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 When any Part of the Ocean is moved, the whole 
 is moved, or all the other Parts of the Ocean move 
 fucceffively -, but the Motion is greater by how much 
 it is nearer the Part f.rft moved. 
 
 BECAUSE when one part of the Ocean is 
 moved, it neceflarily changes it's Place, and leaves 
 that it was in, to be taken up by the Water that 
 was next it , whofe place is again fupplied by the 
 Water next that, and ib on. But the Motion be- 
 comes lefs in the more remote Parts ; becaufe 
 that there the Water was firft moved, the next 
 to it rufhes in, not from one Part, but all round 
 about ; fo that it leaves a round Space like the 
 Periphery of a Circle, which is fupplied from a 
 larger Periphery, and that again from a larger, 
 and fo on. But the greater the Periphery is from 
 whence the Water flows, the lefs is the progref- 
 five Motion inwards, being diftributed into a lar- 
 ger Space. Juft as, when a Stone is thrown into 
 the Water it forces it into a Round, and that 
 forces the next Water to it into a larger Round 
 and fo on ; and the further thefe Peripheries are 
 from the Immerfion of the Stone, their Motion 
 is diminimed and lefs fenfible j and tho* there may 
 at lalt feem to be none all, yet there will be (till 
 fome very fmall Undulation, except it be hin- 
 dered by another Motion of the Water. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 70 find which way the Current of the Sea fets. 
 
 C H U S E a Time, if poffible, when no great 
 Winds are ftirring, and call a Body into the Wa- 
 
 ter
 
 232 *fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 ter of almoft the fame Gravity with it ; mark the 
 Place where it was thrown in, and let a Boat re- 
 main there immoveable ; then, when the Body is 
 carried by the Current a little way irom the Place 
 where it was thrown in, let another Boat be 
 placed there , and obferve how the one Boat bears 
 from the other, and you have the Point of the 
 Compafs toward which the Current fets (a}. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 fhe Motion of the Sea is either direff, vortical^ or 
 tremulous. 
 
 I call the Motion direct, when the Water runs 
 towards a certain Point ; and vortical, when it turns 
 round in a Whirl-Pool, and is at Times abforbed 
 and vomited up , and tremulous, when it quakes* 
 and is troubled without the leaft Wind. We mall 
 defer the Confideration of the two laft to the end 
 of this Chapter ; and treat, firft, of the direct Mo- 
 tion, which we mall call, in general, the Mo- 
 tion of the Sea. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Of the Motions we obferve in the Sea^ fame are gene- 
 >&Lfame particular > and others accidental. 
 
 (a] The Method that Sailors rent, and ride as firmly as if 
 
 commonly ufe, in the Gulph of it were fattened by the llrangeft 
 
 Mexico, to keep the Boat im- Cable nnd Anchor to the Bot- 
 
 moveable where rhe Sea is deep, torn ; this Method will perhaps 
 
 and perhaps not to be founded fucceed in fcveral other Places 
 
 isthis. They fink downa Plum- where there are under-Currents, 
 
 met of Lead about forty or fifty fuch as have been obferved in 
 
 Pound Weight, to a certain the Downs, at the StreigbJs- 
 
 number of Fathoms deep, as Mouth, and in the Baltic. See 
 
 they are taught by Experience, Dr Stulb's Obfervations in a 
 
 and tho' the Lead is nothing Voyage to the Caribbee Ifonds. 
 
 near the Bottom, yet will the PbiloJ. Tranf. No 27. 
 Boat turn Head againfl the Cur- 
 
 I call
 
 CHAP. 1 4. ofUniverfal Geography. 233 
 
 I call that a general Motion of the Sea, which 
 is obferved in all it's Parts, and at all Times. 
 
 I call thofe proper or particular Motions, where- 
 by only fome Parts of the Ocean are moved, 
 which are twofold, either perpetual or anniverfary ; 
 the former continue without Ceffation or Intermif- 
 fion *, the latter are inconftant, and only obferved 
 at fome certain Months or Days. 
 
 THE accidental Motions of the Sea are fuch 
 as now and then happen, without any regular 
 Order j and fuch as thefe are infinite, 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 The Winds caufe the accidental Motions of the Sea, 
 by blowing the Waters toward fome oppojite Point j 
 nor is the Sea ever free from fuch Motions. 
 
 THE Wind, being nothing but a violent Mo- 
 tion of the Air, and a Preffure of it towards the 
 Earth, endeavours to impel the Water of the 
 Sea out of it's Place *, and becaufe the Sea is a 
 Fluid, and cannot refift the Force and Preffure 
 of the Air, it is hereby moved out of it's Place, 
 towards the oppofite Point, and drives the adjacent 
 Water before it, and that again the Water before 
 it, and fo on. 
 
 AND fince there is always fome Wind in 
 the Air towards one Point of the Compafs or ano- 
 ther, and very often towards different Points, in 
 divers Countries, at the fame Time ; it follows, that 
 fome of thefe Motions continually affect the Sea, 
 but more fenfibly where the Wind blows hardeft ; 
 becaufe it being a Fluid is foon put in Agitation 
 t>y fo violent an Agent, 
 
 PRO.
 
 234 ?*' Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 
 The general Motion of the Sea is twofold -, the one is 
 conflant, and from Eafi to Weft : the other is com- 
 fofed of two contrary Motions, and called the 
 Flux and Reflux of the Sea, by which, at certain 
 Hours, it flows toward* the Shores, and at others 
 back again. 
 
 T H A T the Ocean is continually moving from 
 Eaft to Weft, is chiefly proved from the Motion 
 of the Sea which lies between the Tropics in the 
 Torrid Zone ; where it is ftrongeft, and lels impe- 
 ded by other Motions. 
 
 THIS Motion of the Sea is manifeftly per- 
 ceived by thofe that fail from India to Madagafcar, 
 and Africa ; alfo in the Pacific Ocean between New- 
 Spain and China, and the Moluccas , likewife in the 
 Ethiopic Ocean, between Africa and Brafil. 
 
 THUS the Currents fet ftrongly, and run 
 with a rapid Motion, from Eaft to Weft, thro* 
 the Streights of Magellan -, which induced the firft 
 Difcoverer (whether Magellan, or fome other be- 
 fore him) to conjecture, that there were Streights 
 thro' which they might fail out of the Atlantic 
 into the Pacific Ocean. Ships are carried by the 
 Currents, from Eaft to Weft, thro* the Streights 
 of Manilha, and alfo thro* the little Chanels be- 
 tween the Maldivies. The Sea runs impetuoufly 
 into the Gulph of Mexico, between Cuba and Yu- 
 catan, and flows out again, thro* a rapid Chanel, 
 between Cuba and Florida. There is fo rapid a 
 Flux into the Gulph of Paria, that the Streights 
 are called the Dragon's Jaw. This Motion is 
 alfo remarkable at the Land of Cana'da. The Sea 
 ieems to run out of the Tartarian Ocean thro* the 
 Streights of Waygats> as appears by the fetting 
 
 of
 
 CHAP. 14. ofUniverfal Geography. 235 
 
 of the Current, and the great Flakes of Ice which 
 are commonly found in thefe Streights. Upon the 
 northern Coaft of America, the Pacific Ocean flows 
 towards the Streights of Anian ; there is alfo a 
 Current from Japan towards China ; and another 
 from Eaft to Weft, thro* the Streights of Ma- 
 coffer. In fhort, the whole Atlantic Ocean makes 
 towards the Shores of America, and the Pacific from 
 them, as is moft remarkable about Cape Correntes 9 
 between Panama and Lima. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 The Winds frequently change the general Motion of the 
 Sea, efpecially thofe called Periodical Winds^ or 
 Monfoons^ which we Jhall treat of in Chapter xxi. 
 
 BECAUSE thefe Winds blow moft frequent- 
 ly from the North or South, or from other col- 
 lateral Points, they muft needs obftruct the ge- 
 neral Motion of the Sea, which is from Eaft to 
 Weft, and caufe it to turn afide, from the Weft, 
 towards the North- Weft, or South- Weft. And 
 even the conftant, or Trade-Winds, which fel- 
 dom blow directly from the Eaft, but from 
 fome other collateral Points, change this general 
 Motion of the Sea in many Places. Alfo the 
 North Winds make a moft fenfible Difference 
 in this general Motion in the northern Ocean, 
 where thefe Currents are not ftrong, except in a 
 few Places. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 The Caufe of this general Motion of the Sea from 
 Eaft to Weft is uncertain. 
 
 THE
 
 The Abfolute Part 
 
 THE Ariftoteliam (tho* neither they, nor their 
 Matter, nor any European Philofopher, had the 
 feaft Notion of thefe Things, before the Portu- 
 guefe failed thro* the Ocean in the horrid Zone) 
 iuppofe, that it is caufed by the Prime Motion of 
 the Heavens, which is common not only to all 
 the Stars, but even, in part, to the Air and O- 
 cean ; and by which they, and all things, are car- 
 ried from Eaft to Weft. Some Coper means (as 
 Kepler, &V.) altho' they acknowledge the Moon, 
 to be the prime caufe of this Motion, yet they 
 make the Motion of the Earth not a little contri- 
 bute to it, by reafon that the Water, being not 
 joined to the Earth, but contiguous only, cannot 
 keep up with it's quick Motion towards the Eaft ; 
 hut is retarded and left towards the Weft ; and fo 
 the Sea is not moved from one Part of the Earth 
 to another, but the Earth leaves the Parts of the 
 Sea one after another. 
 
 OTHERS, who are fatisfied with neither of 
 thefe Caufes, have recourfe to the Moon ; which they 
 will have to be the Governefs of all Fluids, and 
 therefore to draw the Ocean round with her from 
 Eaft to Weft. If you alk, how fhe performs this ? 
 They Anfwer, it is, by an occult Quality, a cer- 
 tain Influence, a Sympathy, her Vicinity to the 
 Earth, and fuch like. It is very probable indeed 
 the Moon, fome way or other, caufes this Motion, 
 becaufe it is obferved to be much more violent 
 at the New and Full Moon, than about the Qua- 
 dratures, when it is, for the moft Part, but 
 fmall. 
 
 THE ingenious da Cartes mechanically 
 explains how the Moon may caufe this Motion, 
 both in the Water, and the Air. He fuppofes, 
 according to his general Hypothecs, that 
 there are an infinite number of Atoms, which re- 
 solve about the Earth, and fill up the Space be- 
 tween
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 237 
 tween it and the Orbit of the Moon, fo as not 
 to leave any Vacuum; this Space he calls the 
 Earth's Vortex (b). Let FEHG (Fig. 22.) be the 
 Earth* 2143 the Water, 6587 the Air, BADC 
 the Vortex of the Earth, and B the Moon. Now, 
 fays he, if there was no Moon in the Vortex 
 BADC, it's Particles would without any Impe- 
 diment revolve about the Center T ; but fince 
 the Moon is there, die Space, thro* which the cele- 
 ftial Matter flows, is narrowed between B and T j 
 therefore this Matter flows fwifter between B and 
 T, and by that means prefies both the Super- 
 ficies of the Air at 6, and of the Water at 2, 
 more than if the Moon had not been in the Dia- 
 meter of the Vortex B D : and becaufe both the 
 Air and the Water are Fluids, and eafily give 
 
 (b) The Flux and Reflux of 
 the Sea, which des Cartes has 
 endeavoured to explain, by 
 an imaginary Plenum and Vor- 
 tices, may be more eafily and 
 fully explained upon other 
 Principles (as mall be fhewn 
 hereafter); for thefe are mere 
 Fi&ions, and no way agreeable 
 to Nature and Motion, as ap- 
 pears from the following Ar- 
 guments. 
 
 i . If fome Vacuities were 
 not fuppofed to be interfperfed 
 among the Particles of Bodies, 
 it would be very hard to con- 
 ceive how Motion could be 
 any way performed. For if 
 we fuppofe every Place to be 
 abfolutely full, a fmall Body 
 cannot move ever fo little, with- 
 out moving all the Bodies in the 
 Univerfe, and whither, or to 
 what Place they mould move, 
 when all Places are already full 
 is not ealy to conceive. 
 
 2. Since Comets are carried 
 with a continual Motion thro* 
 the heavenly Spaces, from 
 every Part, and all Ways, and 
 to all Parts; it is evident 
 from thence, that the heavenly 
 Spaces muft be void of any 
 fenfible Refiftance, and con- 
 fequently of any fenfible 
 Matter. Newton's Optics, 
 Page 310. 
 
 3. The Hypothefis of Vor- 
 tices, and a Plenum, direftly 
 contradifts the Attronomical 
 Phenomena, and tends more to 
 confound the celeftial Motions 
 than to explain them, See 
 Newton's Princip. Book 2. 
 Schol. to Prop. 53, and the 
 general Scholium at the end ; 
 and C/arke's Notes upon Re- 
 baitlfs Phyfics. Part i. Chap. 
 8. Art. 2. and on Part 2. Chap. 
 25, Art. 22. 
 
 way
 
 238 The Abfolute Part S E CT. IV. 
 
 way to Prefiure, they ought to become lower 
 under B, at 2, and higher under A, at r. And 
 while the Earth is turned from E, by F, towards 
 G, or from Weft to Eaft, the fwelling of the 
 Water 412, and of the Air 856, which is now 
 higheft at E, moves by little and little to the weft- 
 ward, and in fix Hours time is higheft at the Part 
 of the Earth H, and after twelve Hours at G. 
 Hence it follows, that both the Water and the 
 Air are perpetually moving from Eaft to Weft. 
 Thus far des Cartes. The ftrefs of his Demon- 
 ftration lies here; that the Earth EFGH, and 
 Water 1234, are revolved round the Center T, 
 together with the celeftial Matter in theVortex, be- 
 tween BADC and 6587 ; but the Moon, being in 
 B, makes the Space B6 narrower, whereby the ce- 
 leftial Matter is fqueezed thro*, and in it's PafTage 
 prefles the Air and Water below B, at 6 and 2, 
 towards 5 and i , and while E pafles beneath B, 
 it is prefied towards H and F, and fo round. 
 Nor doth this celeftial Matter, ftrained between 
 B and 6, rebound upward being fupprefled, be- 
 caufe all things are full of Matter. And tho* it 
 prefs the Air and Water from 62 F not only 
 towards the Weft E 15, but alfo towards the Eaft 
 73 G, yet becaufe the Parts between F and G, 
 to the eaftward, are, by degrees, removed from 
 the Streight B6, and the Pans towards E, to the 
 weftward, do more and more approach it, there- 
 fore this Force is chiefly received by thefe. 
 
 BUT the following Particulars feem wanting 
 in this ingenious Explanation. 
 
 i . IT mould then follow, that the Sea would 
 fettle when the Moon approached it, and rife 
 in thofe Places that are diftant a Quadrant, 
 or fix Hours, from it, viz. it would fall at 2, 
 where the Moon is vertical, and rife at 6. But 
 this is contrary to Experiences for at 2, under 
 
 the
 
 CHAP. 14. of Uniwrfal Geography. 239 
 the Moon, it rifes, and at i it falls. How this 
 Abfurdhy may be avoided, we lhall Ihew in the 
 following Proportion. 
 
 2. IT is not plainly mewed (des Cartes himfelf 
 totally omitting it) why, when the celeftial Matter 
 in the Streight B6 prefles the Air at 6, and the 
 Water at 2, it is not equally moved towards 637, 
 feeing that the Earth, and Air, and Water, are 
 all carried that way, as well as the celeftirfl Matter, 
 which mould therefore enforce the Air and Wa- 
 ter rather towards the Eaft than the Weft. 
 
 3 . T H E Moon approaching any Sea, there 
 ftiould a ftronger Wind blow from Eaft to Weft 
 than at other Times , but this feldom happens. 
 
 4. I T is more likely that the Sun mould caufe 
 this Motion of the Air, and thefe conftant Winds, 
 becaufe in many Places they are obferved to blow 
 frefher a little before, or about, Sun-rifmg, when 
 it is diftant a Quadrant from the Vertex of the 
 Place (c\ Thefe things are worthy to be confi- 
 dered in the aforefaid Explication, not to fay any 
 thing for or againft the Hypothefis itfelf. 
 
 I very much doubt whether this Motion of the 
 Sea has any relation to the general, or Trade- 
 Winds ; becaufe thefe Winds, in the 'Torrid Zone* 
 are conftant , and therefore mould caufe the Mo- 
 tion of the Water to be conftant alfo ( d). Indeed 
 when the Wind blows harder the Motion is per- 
 ceived to be greater; but this is no Argument 
 that they have a Dependance, or proceed one from 
 another. What hinders is, that there appears to be 
 
 (i] See the Notes upon ftant one, without doubt, Jsef- 
 
 Chap. xxi. Prop. 2 below, fefted by the Trade- Winds, 
 
 where the Caufe of thefe Trade- which conftantly blow from Eaft 
 
 Winds is explained. to Weft, tho* notwithftanding 
 
 (d) As periodical Currents the Moon may interfere, and 
 
 are produced by the fhifting alter or divert it's ordinary 
 
 Winds or Monfoons : fo this con- Courfe. 
 
 a Corrc*
 
 240 ^be Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 a Correfpondence between the Motion of the Sea, 
 and that of the Moon, for when this approaches 
 the other, it caufes it to fwell at 2, and the Cur- 
 rents are obferved to fet ftronger to the weftward 
 at the New and Full Moon, than at the Quadra- 
 tures. This laft is excellently explained by des, 
 Cartels Method ; for fince the Moon is nearer the 
 Earth at the New or Full than when ihe is in the 
 Quadratures, the Pafiage for the celeftial Matter, 
 B6, is then made narrower, and therefore the 
 PrefTure is greater (*). 
 
 I F any fliould alledge, that perhaps the greater 
 Light of the Moon, at Full, caufes the greater 
 Intumefcence ; I anfwer, that at the Change all 
 her Light is taken away ; which fhews that Light 
 is not the Caufe of this Motion, but rather that 
 Prefiure of des Cartes, which we fhall further ex- 
 plain below. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 $be fecond general Motion of the Sea, is it 9 3 Flux and 
 Re flux i by which, in about twelve Hours and a 
 half's Time, the Water is found to flow towards 
 the generality of Shores, and to ebb back again, 
 viz. to flow when the Moon approaches the Me- 
 ridian Circle above or below ; and to ebb when it 
 departs from thence towards the Horizon. 
 
 (e) ' Neither the Moon's 
 ' greateft Diftance, nor her 
 leaft, Falls in the Quadratures 
 ' but both there and in the 
 
 * Conjun&ion or Oppofition; 
 ' contrary to the Opinion of 
 des Cartes ; who aflerts, that 
 
 the Orbit is elliptical indeed, 
 ' but fo that the leffer Axis of 
 
 WE 
 
 it is always in the Conjun- 
 ctions and Oppofitions, or 
 pafleth thro' the Center of 
 the Sun, and the greater 
 in the Quadratures. Which 
 Aflertion is very wide of the 
 Truth. Wbifion's Aftrono- 
 mical Leftures, Page 107.
 
 C H A P. 1 4. of Univerfal Geography. 241 
 
 W E are firft to enquire whether the Sea flows 
 towards one certain Point by this Motion, viz. 
 from Eaft to Welt, or from Weft to Eail. 
 
 FOR the Shores of Bays, and the Chanels 
 of Rivers, where this Flux and Reflux is chiefly 
 obferved, more dian in the main Ocean, are di- 
 vers ways extended ; fome from Weft to Eaft 4 
 as the Mediterranean Sea, and others from South 
 to North, as the Arabian Gulph, &V. And in all 
 thefe the Water flows thro* the Streights towards 
 the furtheft Point of their extent , and therefore 
 in different Bays, this Flux of the Ocean tends 
 towards divers Points of the Compafs. We muft 
 therefore firft be refolved, whether this Flux, or 
 Motion, tends indifferently to any Point, or only, 
 obferves two, viz. the Weft in flowing, and the 
 Eaft in ebbing ; or even only the Weft in both ebb- 
 ing and flowing ? In my Opinion the laft is trueft, 
 viz. that the whole Ocean is moved from Eaft 
 to Weft, both in it's Flux and Reflux, and that 
 the difference is, diat in it's Flux it is moved with 
 greater violence and in a greater Quantity : but^ 
 in it's Reflux (or more properly it's Deflux) tho* 
 it be not moved a contrary Way, yet it feems to 
 be fo, becaufe there flows a lefs Quantity of 
 Water. 
 
 HENCE we may determine, that the Flux 
 and Reflux of the Sea is no way diftinct from 
 that general Motion, which we explained in the 
 former Propofition, whereby the Ocean is perpe- 
 tually moved from Eaft to Weft , for it is only a 
 certain Mode or Property of that Motion. And 
 therefore if this Motion be obferved, and rightly 
 confidcred in the main Ocean, where it is not ob- 
 ftrucled, we mail find it not to be fo much a 
 Flax and Reflux of the Sea, as a Flux and De- 
 flux, or (that we may diftinguifh, by proper Terms, 
 the Quality of the Motion or Flux from the Mo- 
 
 VOL. I. R tion
 
 242 *fbe Abfilute Part SECT. IV, 
 
 tion or Flux itfelf), it is moil aptly called the 
 Swelling and Swaging of the Sea. 
 
 FOR the Sea perpetually flows from Eaft to 
 Weft, and only feems to flow back again, when h*s 
 more violent Force is flackened and wafted, which 
 a little before was quickened and augmented. But 
 this is called the Reflux, becaufe the Sea feems, 
 on Shores and in Bays, to approach and retire by 
 fits, which is not owing to the quality of the Mo- 
 tion itfelf, but to the Situation of the Shores and 
 Bays, which requires that the Water fhould fall 
 back to the contrary Point; but the fettling of 
 the Sea in general doth not proceed from the Situa- 
 tion of the Shores, but from the quality of the Mo- 
 tion of the W T ater. 
 
 BUT the Motion of the Sea can by no means 
 be eftimated by it's approach to the Shores, for 
 whatever this Motion be, or to what Point ibever 
 it is made, it will always fluctuate towards the 
 Shores , which happens by reafon of the fluid Na- 
 ture of the Water. 
 
 T H A T the Sea moves towards the fame Point, 
 that is, from Eaft to Weft both in the Flux and 
 Reflux (or Swelling and Swaging) and never 
 moves the contrary way appears from the fol- 
 lowing Obfervations, i. In the main Ocean be- 
 tween the Tropics, there is no other Motion per- 
 ceived than this from Eaft to Weft. 2. In 
 Streights that join the Parts of the Ocean and run 
 directly Eaft and Weft, as the Streigltfs of Magel- 
 lan, Mamlha, Java, and others among the Indian 
 Iflands.-, in thefe, I fay, the Sea rifes and fettles in 
 1 2 Hours Time, but in fettling it doth not flow 
 back out of the Streights to the eaftward ; but is 
 carried by other Paflages, ftill to the weftward - 9 
 which is a plain Sign that this Ebbing and Flow- 
 ing are not two contrary Motions, but a Modifi- 
 cation, of the general Motion from Eaft to Weft. 
 
 *!Ci2 I SO
 
 CHAP.- 14. of Univerfal Geography. 343 
 
 So that Scaliger and all the reft are deceived, who 
 reprefent this as a double Motion to and again. 
 
 IT is to be underflood, that when we fay this 
 Motion is from Eaft to Weft, we do not mean 
 punctually the two cardinal Points, but include all 
 their Collaterals, even to the North and South 
 Poles, towards which however the Motion is 
 weaker. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 70 explain the Caufe of the Swelling and Swaging of 
 the Sea, vulgarly called it's Flux and Reflux (/). 
 
 THERE 
 
 (f) Sir Ifaac Newton moft 
 fuccefsfuliy explains as well the 
 Flux and Reflux of the Sea, as 
 raoft other Appearances of Na- 
 ture, from his univerfal Princi- 
 ple of Gravity or Attraction. 
 Gravitation is a certain Force im- 
 printed on all Bodies by the Au- 
 thor of Nature, by which they 
 mutually endeavour to accede; 
 but how this Force is exerted 
 we know not. Thus the Globe 
 of the Sun and Planets gravitate 
 mutually towards each other in 
 proportion to their feveral Mag- 
 nitudes, and Diftances from one 
 another. As to this Earth of 
 ours, it hath but little Commu- 
 nication with the other Planets, 
 whofe Bodies are too fmall to 
 ajFeft us much, at iuch a vaft 
 Diftance ; only the Sun and 
 Moon are refpedled by it, the 
 one becaufe it is placed fo near 
 us, and the other by reafon pf 
 the Bulk of it's Body; which 
 tho' it be at a vaft Diftance, 
 yet afts with a ftrong attractive 
 Force. F^r a Bo4y is more 
 
 forcibly attracted by how much 
 the Diftance of the Attrahent 
 }s nearer, or it's Bulk greater. 
 
 i. Thus; Let L (Fig. 23.) 
 be the Moon, fuppofed to be 
 above any Part of the Earth* 
 covered with the Ocean as b ; it 
 is evident that this Place, being 
 nearer the Moon than any 6- 
 ther Part of the Earth, is more 
 ftrongly drawn thereby, and 
 fwelleth up towards it: But 
 the Water in the Place a be- 
 ing diametrically oppofitc to the 
 Place b, and further off from 
 the Moon than the rell-of the 
 Earth, hath a lefs Tendency 
 towards it than the other Parts} 
 and therefore, being left as it 
 were by the Earth, is lifted up, 
 orfwelled, the contrary Way m 
 a. Henc the Water flowing 
 from d to e towards A and B, 
 makes two Protuberances in the 
 Ocean, the one in B direftly 
 under the Moon, the other in 
 A juft oppofite to it ; and thefe 
 always fhift and accompany the 
 Moon in it's feeming Motion, 
 
 R 2 aboO,
 
 244 e Abfolute Part SECT. IV, 
 
 THERE is no Phenomenon in Nature that 
 hath fo much exereifed and puzzkd the Wits of 
 
 Philofo-r 
 
 of the Month and the time of 
 the Year. 
 
 3. For, becaufe the attractive 
 Force of the Sun reaches the 
 Earth as well as that of the 
 Moon; when both thefe Forces 
 confpire, or are united, they 
 raife the Waters higheft, and 
 make what we call Spring Tides ; 
 but when the Sun depreffes what 
 the Moon heaves up, then hap- 
 pen the loweft or Neap Tides. 
 Thus we oblerve higher Tides 
 when the Sun and Moon in Con- 
 junction or Oppofition, are right 
 over any Place B, or diametrical- 
 ly oppofite over A and B, than 
 when they are in the Quadra- 
 tures, viz. when the Sun is in 
 the Point H or I, and the Moon 
 in the intermediate Point A or 
 B. But the Force of the Sun is 
 fmall compared with that of the 
 Moon; becaufe the Semidia- 
 meter of the Earth C B, by 
 which the Water in B is nearer 
 the Sun than the Center C, is 
 fcarce fenfible, if compared with 
 the immenfe Diftance of the 
 Sun. 
 
 4. Since the Eminences of 
 Water are carried round the 
 Earth by the diurnal Motion, 
 the Motion, Agitation, and 
 Height, of the Tides, are the 
 greater, the larger the Circle is 
 in which the Watersrevolve. So 
 the Mssn being in the Equino- 
 ftial, and leading about the two 
 oppofite Eminences of Water in 
 the Equator, makes greaterTides 
 (cteteris paribus] than when Ihc 
 is in the Tiopics. 
 
 Hence 
 
 about the Earth, and occafion 
 thereby two Floods and Ebbs 
 in the fame Place, every five 
 and twenty Hoars. 
 
 2. Of thefe two Tides that 
 happen in the Time of one di- 
 urnal Revolution in any Place, 
 that is the greateft, wherein 
 the Place cometh neareit the 
 Eminence of the Water A or 
 B. Thus, in fuch a Figure as 
 the Jaft, let, P/> (Fig 24.) be 
 the Poles, JE Q_ the Equator, 
 FG a Parallel to it, which a- 
 ny place defcribes by it's diur- 
 nal Motion ; it appears that the 
 two High- waters happen in the 
 Place, when it is fituated in G 
 or F, having the Moon in the 
 Meridian ; but the higheft Tide 
 is found in the Point G, which 
 comes neareft the Eminence of 
 the Waters in B. It further 
 appears from the Figure, that 
 the Moon, in the Time of the 
 higheft Tide, is above the Hori- 
 zon of the Place, if (he is on the 
 fame fide of the Equator with the 
 Place itfelf: but if (he decline the 
 contrary Way, flie is under the 
 Horizon in the Point A, at the 
 Time ofthe highea Tide. For 
 Example, in Europe the diurnal 
 Tides are the higheft of the two 
 when the Moon is found in 
 the elevated Semicircle ofthe 
 Meridian, or in the Northern 
 Signs of the Ecliptic; but the 
 loweft when fhe is in the South- 
 ern Signs. 
 
 .Moreover, the Height ofthe 
 Tides is varied generally all over 
 the Earth, according to the day
 
 CHAP. 14. of Umverfal Geography. 245 
 Philofophers and learned Men as this. Some have 
 thought the Earth and Sea to be a living Creature, 
 whicn, by it's Refpiration, caufeth this ebbing and 
 flowing. Others imagined that it proceeds, and is 
 provoked, from a great Whirl-pool near Norway, 
 which, for fix Hours, abforbs the Water, and 
 afterwards difgorges it in the fame fpace of Time. 
 Scaliger, and others, fuppofed that it is caufed by 
 the oppofite Shores, efpecially of America, where- 
 by the general Motion of the Sea is obftru&ed and 
 reverberated. But moft Philofophers, who have 
 obferved the Harmony that thefe Tides have with 
 the Moon, have given their Opinion, that they 
 are entirely owing to the Influence of that Lumina- 
 ry. But the Queflion is, what is this Influence ? 
 To which they only anfwer, that it is an occult 
 
 Hence alfo both the Lumi- 
 naries, placed in the Equinoctial 
 at the Time of their Conjun- 
 ftionorOppofition, which hap- 
 pens near the Equinoxes in 
 March, or September, produce 
 the higheft Tides in the whole 
 Year. 
 
 Which Experience alfo con- 
 firms, becaufe the Sun is a 
 little nearer the Earth in the 
 Winter than in the Summer; 
 therefore the higheft Spring 
 Tides happen a little before 
 the Vernal Equinox, and a lit- 
 tle after the Autumnal, viz. 
 in February and OHober, rather 
 than precifely upon the Equino- 
 flial Days. 
 
 5. The librating Motion of 
 the Waters, which are apt to 
 retain the Motion imprefied up- 
 on them, and continue to move 
 tho' the Actions of the Lumina- 
 ries ceafe, make the greateft 
 menjlrual Spring Tidei (explain'd 
 
 in Artie. 3.) not precifely on the 
 New and Full Moons, but gene- 
 rally they are the third Tides af- 
 ter them. 
 
 6. Things would happen con- 
 ftantly and regularly thus, if the 
 whole Earth were covered with 
 very deep Sea ; but by reafon of 
 great and fmall I {lands which 
 ftop the Tide, and the Streights 
 between them, alfo the Shelves 
 and Shallows along which the 
 Tides are to be propagated, the 
 Variety of this Phenomenon is 
 almoft infinite, and fcarcely to 
 be explained by this Theory ; 
 but when juft Obfervations are 
 diligently made, all thefe parti- 
 cular Caufes may be found out 
 and known. See Newton's 
 Prm. Math. Phil. Book 3. Prop. 
 24. Greg. Phyf. and Geometr. 
 Aftron. Book 4. Prop. 64, 6$. al- 
 fo HalleyV Di/ertation in Phil. 
 Tranf. No 226. 
 
 J tariff t Appendix. 
 
 R 3 Quality.
 
 246 The Abjblute Part SECT. IV, 
 
 Quality, or Sympathy, whereby the Moon at- 
 tracts all moift Bodies. But thefe are only Words, 
 and figniry no more than that the Moon does it by 
 ibme means or other, but they do not know how : 
 Which is the Thing we want. 
 
 D E S Cartes explains it by his general Hypo- 
 thefis thus : In the forementioned Figure of Pro- 
 pofition 9. let A B C D be the Vortex, with the 
 Earth in it's Center, and which, with the Earth 
 and Moon in it, is carried in a larger Vortex a- 
 bout the Sun. Let M be the Center of the firft 
 Vortex, EFGH the Earth, 1234 the Superficies 
 of the Sea, which for plainnefs we will fuppoie to 
 cover the whole Earth , and 5678 the Superficies 
 of the Air furrounding the Sea. If therefore there 
 were no Moon in the Vortex, the Point T, the 
 Center of the Earth, would coincide with the Point 
 M, the Center of the Vortex -, but fmce the Moon is 
 about B, the Center of the Earth muft be betv/een 
 M and D ; becaufe, fmce the celeftial Matter of 
 this Vortex moves fomething Iwiiter than the Earth 
 or Moon, which is carried only with it, unlefs 
 the Point T were a little further diftarit from B 
 than from D, the Pretence of the Moon would 
 hinder it from moving fo freely between B and 
 T, as between T and D ; and feeing the Place 
 of the Earth in the Vortex is not determined, but 
 by the equal Force of the circumambient celeftial 
 Matter, it is plain that it ought therefore to ap- 
 proach fomewhat towards D. And for the fame 
 Reafon, when the Moon mail be in C, the Center 
 of the Earth ought to be between M and A, fo 
 that always the Earth may recede a little from the 
 Moon. Moreover, finCe we fuppofed the Moon 
 to be about B, not only die Space between B ancj 
 T, but alfo that between T and D, thro' both 
 which the celeftial Matter flows, is made fome- 
 thing narrower 5 hence it follows, that the cele^ 
 "
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 247 
 
 itial Matter floweth fafter there, and therefore 
 prefleth more, both the Superficies of the Air at 
 6 and 8, and of the Water at 2 and 4, than if" 
 .the Moon had not been in tjje Diameter of the 
 Vortex B D, Now feeing the -Air and Water 
 are both Fluids, and eafily give way to the Pref- 
 fure, they muft be more depreffed about F and 
 H, than they would be if the Moon were not 
 in this Diameter B D ; and alfo more elevated 
 towards G and E, where both their Superficies 
 bulge or are prominent. And further, becaufe the 
 Part of the Earth at F, under B, where the Sea 
 is now loweft, in fix Hours Time will be at G, 
 under C, where it is now highefl, and after other 
 fix Hours in H, under D, and fo on : or rather, 
 becaufe the Moon is moving a little in the mean 
 Time from B towards C, fo as to perform the 
 whole Revolution A B C D in a Month, by which 
 t he part of the Earth that is now in F under the 
 Moon's Body, will be in fix Hours, twelve Mi- 
 nutes Time, or .thereabouts, a little further thaa 
 G, in that Diameter of the Vortex, which is 90 
 Degr. diftant from the Place into which die Moon 
 in the mean Time hath moved ; therefore the Wa- 
 ter will in that Time increafe and be higheft at 
 F, and in other fix Hours, twelve Minutes, wheji 
 the Moon is got beyond D, will fettle and be 
 loweft there, tsV. Hence it is plain, that the Wa^ 
 ter of the Sea mull conftantly ebb and flow in 
 the fame Place, every twelve Hours, twenty four 
 Minutes Time. 
 
 THIS is des Cartels Demonftration, which is 
 very ingenioufly contrived to account both for the 
 Tides that happen when the Moon is in the Me- 
 ridian of the Place, and thofe alfo that occur when 
 Ihe is in the oppofite Point of the Meridian Circle 
 ^sader the Horizon. 
 
 R 4 BUT
 
 248 *Tbe Absolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 BUT according to what we obferved in the 
 ninth Propofition, there are feveral Imperfections 
 in this DemOiiftration. As firft, it is a wonder 
 that des Cartes did not confider, that, according 
 to his Demonftration, the Water ought to ebb 
 at 2 and 4, when the Moon approaches the Me- 
 ridian B : and, on the contrary, to flow, when the 
 Earth or Moon ('viz. either of tnem) is removed fix 
 Hours from each other , but this is contrary to Ex- 
 perience, for when the Moon approaches the Meri- 
 dian of any Place, theWaters flow in that Place, and 
 ebb, back again, at it's departure. But both des 
 Cartels Words and Figure fhow the contrary ; fo 
 that to take away the Abfurdity (and in des Cartels 
 Method) let us fuppofe the Vortex of the Earth 
 A BCD, and the Waters 1234, to be interfper- 
 fed equally about the Center T without any Pro- 
 tuberance, and to revolve with the Earth and the 
 celeftial Matter between A BCD and 5678. Let 
 us fuppofe again the Moon to happen into this Vor- 
 tex at B, and therefore the Space T B to become 
 narrower, and the Water at 2 to be preffed towards 
 E by the celeftial Matter fqueezing thro' it. 
 
 THEN while the Water is expelled from 2 
 to E, I afk where the greateft fwelling will be, 
 whether in the Place E, which is diftant a Qua- 
 drant from F (where the Moon is vertical), or in 
 the Place next to F towards E ? If you anfwer, 
 the fwelling is greateft about the former Place E, 
 I deny it, becaufe it is contrary to Experience -, 
 but Experience mews the latter to be true, and 
 even Reafon convinces us, that when the Moon 
 is over the Place F, the Water will be forced 
 from 2 towards i, which happens becaufe the 
 greateft fwelling is about 2, not about i, for here 
 it will be leaft , hence the Places to the weftward have 
 their Tides later, as we know by Experience. And 
 Reafon and the Laws of Hydroftatics require this. 
 
 For
 
 CHAP. 14. of Unherfal Geography. 249 
 
 For if Water be poured in at 2, that it may flow 
 towards E, there will be the greateft quantity of 
 Water at 2, and a little lefs in the next Place, 
 but leaft of all at E ; and the fame Thing will 
 happen if it be expelled or driven towards E. 
 But by the Circumrotation of the Earth, E comes 
 into the Place of F, where at length there will 
 be the greateft Protuberance at E, and the 
 Water will be repelled towards H. 
 
 THEREFORE^ Cartels Figure and De- 
 monftration is to be changed, that the fwelling may 
 arife fomewhere about 2, viz. where the Moon 
 is vertical. What more might be faid here we 
 refer to our Treatife upon dfs Cartel's Pbyjics. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 The general Motion of the Sea from Eajl to Weft is 
 Jlronger, and the Tides are higher at New and Full 
 Moon, than at the Quadratures. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition appears from, 
 Experience. For People that ufe the Sea teftify, 
 that at New and Full Moon, the Face of the Ocean 
 is conftantly rough and troubled, but calm and 
 quiet at the Quadratures. This is eafily ac- 
 counted for by the aforefaid Hypothefis ; for 
 when the Moon is at the New or Full, me is 
 nearer the Earth than at any other Time of 
 her Age, and is furtheft diftant in her Qua- 
 dratures, as is fhewn by Aftronomers (g). But 
 when the Moon is nearer the Earth, that is, when 
 the Space BT is lefs, the celeftial Matter being 
 hindered, or obftructed, prefles with greater force 
 the Water from 2 towards i. But happens o- 
 therwife in the Quadratures. 
 
 fc) This is falfe. Sit tie Nate ( e) bn. 
 
 YET
 
 250 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 YET in fome Places there are higher Tides 
 at the Full Moon than at the New, which I can- 
 not account for, unlefs they be the Effecls of 
 it's greater Light at that time. Nor can it be o- 
 therwife explained, why at the Full Moon Vege- 
 tables and Animals are impregnated wkh a greater 
 quantity of Sea Moifture, than at the New, tho* 
 even then the Tides are every whit as high. It 
 |s very wonderful what one ffejf?, a Dutchman^ 
 relates in his Defer iption of India. He fays, that 
 in the Kingdom ofGuzarat (where he lived many 
 Years) their Oyfters, and Crabs, and other Shell- 
 Fifh, are not fo fat and juicy at the Full Moon 
 as at the New, contrary to their Nature in all 
 other Places. Nor is it lefs admirable, that on 
 the Coaft of the fame Kingdom, near the Mouths 
 of the River Indus^ the Sea fwells, and is troubled, 
 at the New Moon, when not far from hence, viz. 
 in the Sea of Calicut the greateft Rile of the Wa- 
 ters is at the Full. But it is requifite that we 
 fhould have repeated Enquiries and Obfervations 
 about thefe Matters, before we pretend to folve 
 their Phenomena. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIIL 
 
 tte Flux and Reflux of the Sea varies with the 
 Seafons of the Tear, and the Tides are obferued to 
 le bigbeft about the Equinoxes ; i. e. at the Spring 
 and Fall * but kweft at the Soljlices. 
 
 .'.. .( '-. i 4\'. : - -^ -i ,\ t <"'j Liil^fSniH 
 
 D E S Carles pretends to account for this Phe- 
 nomenon by his Hypothefis, but I cannot ap- 
 prehend his Meaning by his Words, nor how it 
 can- be deduced- from it (6). It is probable, that the 
 Sun and the general Winds may contribute much 
 
 (b) See the true Reafan eftkis in Artie. 3. of Note (f) above.
 
 C H A P. 1 4. of Univerfal Geography. 3 5 1 
 
 to raife thcfe Tides, when, in the Equinoxes, the 
 Sun is vertical to the Ocean in the middle of the 
 Torrid Zone^ and therefore may caule both the 
 Wind and Water to rage, and the former to a- 
 gitate the latter. The contrary of which may, 
 happen about the Solftices. Or we may fay, that 
 thefe extraordinary Tides then happen by the 
 fame Reafon, and proceed from the fame Caufe 
 that frequent Rains and Inundations proceed from 
 in thefe Seafons. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 Infome Parts of the Ocean, Bays, and Shores., the 
 Tides ebb and flow very high ; and in others but 
 low: and in fame few Places ihsre are no fenfible 
 Tides at all. 
 
 THOSE Places have the greateft Tides; i. 
 which are in the Torrid Zone between the Tropics, 
 where the Moon, being almoft conftantly vertical, 
 preffes the Water with greater force -, 2. thofe 
 which lie direftly Eaft and Weft with their Col- 
 laterals ; 3 . thole Bays that are long and narrow ; 
 4. thole Places where there are but few Iflands 
 or Forelands. 
 
 THE Tides are therefore greater or lefs in 
 a Place, according as it is fituated or extended. 
 
 THE greateft known Tides are obferved in 
 the Bay of Guzarat, at one of the Mouths of the 
 River Indus^ and has ftruck many with Admira- 
 tion. The W T ater there recedes from the Shore 
 very quick, and leaves it uncovered for a great 
 Space ; fo that this Bay is, not without Reafon, 
 thought to be the fame into which Alexander the 
 Great failed, when he attempted to tranfport his 
 Army by Sea into India y but was hindered, as 
 it is reported, by the Sea which retired quick 
 
 from
 
 252 The Abfohite Part SECT. IV. 
 
 from the Shore, and left all his Ships a-ground, 
 .fo that he could not proceed further, but thought 
 that the Gods had there fixed Bounds to his 
 Expedition. This Story is reported for a Truth 
 by the Inhabitants of Cambaya. The Caufe of 
 this is the fhallownefs of the Chanel, which makes 
 the Water in it's Ebbing leave fo much more 
 Ground uncovered, tho' perhaps fome other Caufe 
 may confpire with this. 
 
 A T the Town of Daman, not far from Surat 
 in India, the Tide rifes and falls two Fathoms 
 and a half, and the Sea recedes from the Shore 
 half a German Mile. 
 
 IN the Bay of Cambaya the Tide flows five 
 (or as fome fay feven) Fathoms high, which vio- 
 lent Flux caufes many Ships to be loft by unex- 
 perienced Seamen , for at the Ebb, when the Wa- 
 ter falls back, they are frequently fplit upon the 
 Rocks. 
 
 UPON the Shores and Bays at the Magellanic 
 Streights, there is no conftant Time obferved be- 
 tween the Tides, which ebb and flow irregularly, 
 fometimes in three Hours, and fometimes in twelve 
 Hours -, which variety is caufed by the violent 
 breaking of the Sea into thefe Streights, and the 
 frequent Agitation of it by the Winds. 
 
 PRODIGIOUS high Tides are obferved a- 
 bout Malacca-, and in the Streights of Sunda. 
 
 I N the Aralian Gulph, or Red-Sea, the Tide 
 of Ebb is fo great, that as fome of the Antients 
 have writ, (quoted by ScaRger) Mofei, and the 
 Jfraelitts? migh , at low Water, have pafled thro* 
 it without a Miracle. But this is falfe, for it ne- 
 ver ebbs fo much as to leave the Chanel dry. 
 
 I N Button's Bay, near Hudfon's Streights, when 
 Mr 'Thomas Button, an Engli/hman, wintered there 
 in the Latitude of 57 Degr. North Latitude, he 
 obferved the Tide of Flood to rife fifteen Foot and 
 
 above :
 
 CHAP. 14, ofUniverfal Geography. 253 
 above : and in the Latitude of 60 Degr. the Summer 
 after, he found it to come up to the fame Height ; 
 tho* in neither Hudfon's nor JameSs Bay it rifes- 
 much above two Foot. 
 
 T H E R E are prodigious high Tides upon the 
 Coaft of China, and about the Iflands of Japan. 
 
 A T Panama, a Town on the Coaft of America, 
 the Pacific Sea flows very high, and immediately 
 ebbs again , at the Full Moon the Agitation is 
 fo great that it drives the Water into the Houfes 
 of the Town. All along this Shore the Tides of 
 the great South Sea are ftrangely high -, fo that 
 in ' their Reflux they retreat two Miles of Ground, 
 and in fome Places the Water falls of out Sight. 
 
 I N the Bay of Bengal, on the Shore of Siam 9 
 the Tide rifes fifteen Foot. 
 
 BUT in the Mediterranean Sea, which flows 
 from Weft to Eaft thro* the Streights of Gibralter, 
 there is no fenfible Tide at all ; becaufe it's En- 
 trance is fituated oppofite to that Point, to which 
 the Ocean Sea in general flows. It may perhaps 
 increafe a little, but in the main it is not fenfible, 
 only in the Gulph of Venice there is a fmall Agi- 
 tation perceived, by reafon of the great length 
 and narrownefs of the Bay, which, in the broader 
 Parts of the Mediterranean, is no where percep- 
 tible. Therefore the Flux and Reflux of the Sea 
 was unknown to the Grecians, and alfo to the 
 Romans in the Time of Scipio Africanus ; and there- 
 fore when they found it in other Places, accounted 
 it a Miracle ; as appears from the forementioned 
 Expedition of Alexander the Great, and the Wars 
 of Scipio with Carthage j but in Cicero's Time this 
 was well enough known to the Romans. A fmali 
 Tide is obferved at Marfeilles in France^ and an 
 inconfiderable Rifing is perceived along the Coaft 
 of Barban. 
 
 IN
 
 Attfolute Part SECT. IV; 
 
 I N the Baltic Sea, and all over the northern 
 Ocean beyond England and Norway the Tides 
 are ngt in the leaft perceptible j nor in the northern 
 Parts of the Pacific Ocean (i). The Reafon is not 
 well known, unlefs we fix it upon the great Di- 
 ftance thefe Seas are from the way of the Moon, 
 and their being extended from Weft to Eaft, and 
 North-eaft, with the many Iflands and Forelands, 
 all which confpire to obftruct the Flux of the 
 Tides in thefe Places. But this cannot be faid 
 of Hudjotfs Bay ; which is properly extended from 
 Eaft to Weil, to receive the Flux of the Tides ; 
 and therefore it is no Wonder if they are much 
 more remarkable here than in the Baltic, or in the 
 northern Ocean. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 fbe Flux of the Sea is forced by a Jlrong Impulfe > 
 but the Reflux is the natural Motion of the Water. 
 
 THE Flux is caufed by the Preffure of the 
 Moon, or the celeftial Matter, between it and the 
 Sea, and continues no longer than the Caufe forces 
 it : but in the Ebb, the Sea only flows from a 
 higher to a lower Place, which is the natural 
 Motion of the Water. 
 
 (*) The Tides are very fimll on the Coaft ofNovaZemb/a the 
 
 in feveral Parts of the Northern Water was obferved by Capt. 
 
 Ocean, yet they may be felt in Wood to rife eight Foot. See 
 
 fome particular Places. Thus Note [a] on Chap. 8. above. 
 
 LEMMA
 
 CHAP. 14. ofUnherfal Geography. 255 
 
 LEMMA. 
 
 The Place of the Afyon in the Zodiac being known, 
 from an Ephemeris, or by Calculation* or Aftrono- 
 micai Observation, and alfo it's Latitude, and the 
 Hour of the Day ; to fad, on the Terreftrial Globe^ 
 what Place the Moon will be vertical to at the 
 given Hour, and to Jhew all the Place* that the 
 Moon will pafs over, one after another, that Day. 
 
 THIS Problem is of great Ufe for obferving 
 the Flux and Reflux of the Sea. You will find 
 the Method of folving it in Chapter xxx. Propo- 
 fition 14. where it is more commodioufly explain- 
 ed. However the more knowing Reader may 
 anticipate it here, or learn it aforehand from the 
 Rules there delivered. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 Ihe Ttdes are higheft in thofe Places over which the 
 Moon is vertical, unlefe fame of the Obftacles above- 
 mentioned in Proportion 1 4 hinder ; but the fur- 
 ther any Place is from that, the lefs (cseteris pari- 
 bus) is the Flux and Reflux. 
 
 BECAUSE thofe Places are more prefled, 
 and the fwelling of the Sea is greater, over which 
 the Moon fqueezeth the celeftial Matter, where- 
 by greater Tides are produced : but where the in- 
 cumbent Matter is lefs fqueezed, and other Caufes 
 confpire, the Alteration will be lefs. 
 
 PRO*
 
 256 The Abplute Part S E c T . I V. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 
 The Altitude of the Tides are divers in the fame Place 
 at different Times^ and they are high and low^ ac- 
 cording as the Moon is further from or nearer to 
 the Zenith of the Place. 
 
 SINCE the Moon every Day changes her 
 Place in the Ecliptic, me will be vertical now to 
 one Place, and then to another, and confequently 
 varies her Diftance from the Zenith of any particu- 
 lar Place. Which being granted, it follows, as a 
 Corollary of the laft Propofition, that the Tides in 
 any one Place are conftantly altering, whether their 
 Variation be fenfible, or infenfible. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIII. 
 
 The greateft fwelling of the Ocean, or High-Water, 
 ought to be in that Place when the Moon is in the 
 Meridian Circle (above or below} ; but in divers 
 Places it h High-Water when the Moon is otherwife 
 fofited. 
 
 SINCE the Moon, in the Meridian, is nearer 
 any Place than when fhe is in the Horizon, (be- 
 caufe the Hypotenufe of any right-angled Tri- 
 angle is longer than the Perpendicular) it follows 
 (by Propofition 16, of this Chapter) that then it 
 ought to be High-Water in that Place (where fhe 
 is full SouthJ. And when fhe is full North, or in 
 the lower Part of the Meridian Circle, it ought to 
 be alfo High- Water in the fame Place, becaufe, 
 tho* fhe be not there, yet the oppofite Part of the 
 Vortex of the Earth is ftraitned, and hath the fame 
 Effect, as if the Body of the Moon itfelf were 
 prefent. 
 
 BUT
 
 CHAP. 14. of Unherfal Geography. 257 
 BUT there are many Places and Shores where 
 it is not High- Water precifely at the Time of the 
 Moon's fouthing or northing in the Meridian Circle, 
 (as the Philolbphers of the former Age thought) 
 but perhaps a little before, or after, me makes her 
 appulfe to the Meridian, viz. when me approacheth 
 a Vortex fomething diftant from it, Eaft or Weft. 
 Neither doth a full Tide always happen when 
 the Moon is in the fame Azimuth ; but it is very 
 often High- Water, efpecialry at the New and 
 Full Moon, a little before the conftant Time, or 
 before the Moon approaches that Azimuth. At 
 London it is High-Tide when the Moon is three 
 Hours from the Meridian, or South- Weft, and 
 North-Eaft (). On the Shore of China , in the 
 Harbour of Maccao, a Portttguefe Sailor thus fta- 
 ted the Time of High- Water. The Elevation of 
 the Pole, or the Latitude of the Place, is 22 degr. 
 20 min. In the Year 1584 on the nineteenth Day 
 of September it was Full Moon, and the fame Day, 
 it was High- Water half an Hour, or three quar- 
 ters, pad Eight in the Morning -, fo that the 
 Moon was then three Hours and a quarter diftant 
 from the Meridian-, hence the Azimuth, or Point 
 me was then in, may be found by a Problem in 
 Chapter xxx. 
 
 I N the Year 1585, February the third, which 
 was alfo the third from the New Moon, it was 
 obferved to be High-Tide a little after twelve ; and 
 therefore at the New Moon, which was February 
 the firft, it was full Sea about forty Minutes af- 
 ter Ten. 
 
 HENCE the Azimuth the Moon was then in 
 may be found. 
 
 (k) See the Nott (m) 
 
 VOL. I. S IN
 
 258 We Abfohte Tart SECT. IV, 
 
 I N the Year 1585, February the fixteenth, it 
 was obferved to be High- Water, at Full Moon, 
 almoft at Noon, viz. at half an Hour paft Eleven. 
 
 IN the Year 1585, June the fecond, which 
 was the fourth Day after the New Moon, it was 
 High-Tide exactly at twelve, therefore at the 
 Conjunction it was High-Tide at nine in the Fore- 
 noon. 
 
 THE fame Sailor adds, that the Time of High 
 and Low- Water doth not agree with the Time 
 that is computed from the Motion of the Moon, 
 except for five Days before and after the New 
 Moon. But there is fome Ambiguity in thefe 
 Words, and others following, which we have there- 
 fore omitted. But the Caufe of this Variation is, 
 that the Sea rifes nine Hours in the Port of Mac- 
 coo, and ebbs only three, as is obferved in the next 
 Proportion. 
 
 HERE follow fome Obfervations made by a 
 Dutch Sailor of the Time of High-Water, on the 
 Days of the New and Full Moon, at different 
 Places. 
 
 AT twelve o 5 Clock (on the New and Full 
 Moon Days) it is High- Water along the Shore 
 of Flanders, at Enckhuyfen in Holland, at Hoorn, at 
 Emden in Eaft Friejland, at the Mouth of the 
 River Elbe, at the Mouth of the Eyder, at the 
 Iflands of Jutland, at Dover in England, &c. 
 
 AT forty five Minutes paft twelve, at Flujb- 
 ing in Zealand. 
 
 AT half an Hour paft one, at the weftern 
 Shore of the Ifle of Height, at Calais, at the Mouth 
 the River Thames in England, along the Shores of 
 Zealand, at the Mouth of the River Schelde, in 
 the Meitfe, at [Gorcum\. 
 
 AT three o'Clock, at Amflerdam, Rotterdam, 
 
 Dort, and Newcaftle in England, before the Fle- 
 
 ffii/b Sand-Banks, at Armenlier in Flanders, at the 
 
 i Mputh
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 259 
 Mouth of the River Garonne, along the South Shore 
 of England, on the Coaft of France, Gafeoigne, Bif- 
 ca-j, Gallicia, Portugal, and Spain -, on the weilern 
 Shore of Ireland, all the way to Shetland. 
 
 A T a quarter before four in the Afternoon, 
 at Rohan in France, in the Maefe, at Rochelle in 
 France, in the River Garonne, in the Bays upon 
 the Shore of Spain, Portugal, Gallicia, in the Bays 
 on the Southern Shore of Bretagne in France, on 
 the Shore of Gafeoigne, on the weftern Shore of 
 Ireland. 
 
 AT half an Hour paft four, from the I'exel to 
 the fouthern Shore of Ireland. 
 
 A T a quarter paft five, in all the Ports on the 
 South of Ireland, at Plymouth in England, and at 
 other fouthern Places between that and Wales. 
 
 A T fix o'Clock in the Morning and Evening, 
 at Hamburgh in the Elbe, at Bremen, on the Eaft 
 fide of the I'exel, at Antwerp, in the Englijb Cha- 
 nel as far as the Stilly Iflands. 
 
 AT a quarter before feven in the Evening, 
 at Falmouth, and in Brtftol Chanel, at St Nicolas 
 and PodeJJamke, as far as Weymouth and Hartpool. 
 
 AT half an Hour paft feven at the Road in 
 the Texel, at Kilduyna, in the middle of the Cha- 
 nel, befide Plymouth, and as far as the Foreland of 
 Lizard-Point. 
 
 A T a quarter paft eight in the Evening, about 
 the Ifle of Wight, at the Weft fide of the File 
 Ifland. 
 
 A T nine o'Clock, at die Mouth of the River 
 Eems in Friejland, on the Eaft fide of the Flie 
 Ifland, along the Shores of Friejland, and on the 
 eaftern Shore of the Ifle of Wight. 
 
 A T half an Hour paft ten, at the Mouth of 
 the River 'Thames, on the Shore of Normandy and 
 
 S* AT
 
 260 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 A T a quarter paft eleven, in the River Thames, 
 and other Places in England. 
 
 I T is very difficult to explain the Caufe of thefe 
 'wonderful, and extraordinary Differences of the 
 Tides in all Places, tho* it properly belongs to 
 Naturalifts, and Geographers, to do it. It is like- 
 ly that the various windings of the Shores, and 
 their different Situation to the Sea-ward, the Re- 
 fiftance of the Iflands, the Concurrence of feve- 
 ral Tides, the Diftance of Places from the Moon's 
 Way, the various Winds, chiefly thofe that are 
 general and conftant, the Declivity and Shoalnefs 
 of the Shores, and other things, very much con- 
 tribute to this furprifing Diverfity. For Ex- 
 ample, at the Port of London the Tide rifes 'till 
 the Moon comes to the South- Weft, when me hath 
 South Latitude, and only then begins to ebb, 
 not when me approaches the Meridian : for which 
 we give this Reafon, viz. that while the Moon is 
 moving from the Meridian of London towards 
 Brafil (or from Brafil towards London} the Water 
 ought not to fettle, but ftill to rife, becaufe the 
 Shore of America repels the Water towards Eng- 
 land^ which is drawn thitherward by the Moon, 
 fince there is no Paflage for it to proceed any fur- 
 ther. But it may be afked why, when the Moon 
 hath North Latitude, it mould happen to be High- 
 Water before me approaches the Meridian of 
 London, viz. when me is in the South- Eaft Point ? 
 To which I anfwer, that when the Moon hath 
 North Latitude me is much nearer England than 
 when Ihe hath South, and therefore raifes up the 
 Water fooner -, and the Reafon why the Flux is not 
 continued fo long as 'till the Moon approaches 
 the Meridian is, becaufe me impels the Ocean 
 more towards the American Coaft, and Hudfon's, 
 -Bay, where the greateft Floods are then obferved. 
 
 AND
 
 CHAP. 14. .ofUmverfal Geography. 26 r 
 AND for this Rcafon it is. High- Water along 
 the Coafts of China, before .the Appulfe of the 
 IVj oon to the Meridian, becaufe the continual Eaft 
 Winds drive the Sea towards the Weft. 
 
 BUT all thefe Allegations are not fufficient to 
 fatisfie me in thefe Matters, and therefore I would 
 have the curious Naturalifts examine them with 
 greater Scrutiny. For to find the true Caufe, it 
 is requifite, that we be furnifhed with accurate 
 Obfervations how the Tides ebb and flow in dif- 
 ferent Places, and what Azimuth the Moon is in 
 when it is High-Water in thofe Places ; and how 
 her Bearing varies according to her Place at the 
 Change and Full ; efpecially in thole Places where 
 the Moon is vertical, and thofe that bear from them 
 diredly Eaft, Weft, North, and South (/). It is 
 alfo to be diligently obferved, what height the 
 Tides flow at thefe times j when the Moon is in 
 the North Part of her Orbit, and moves not over 
 fo much Sea, but over that vaft Tradl of Land 
 which lies between China, and the weftern Shore 
 of Africa. For fince me prefTes not the Water 
 directly when fhe moves over thefe Mediterranean 
 
 (/) The following Directions 3. Obfcrve the Increafe and 
 
 are of excellent ufe for oblerv- Decreafeof the Velocity of the 
 
 itg the Tides, given by Sir Ro- Currents. 
 
 bert Murray, in Pfrilof. Tranf. 4. Meafure the Height ofeve- 
 
 N* 1 7. ry utmoft High Water and Low 
 
 i. Obferve the Situation of Water, from one Spring Tide 
 
 the Place of Obfervation, viz to another, 
 
 what Currents, Seas, Iflands, 5. Meafure the exaft Height 
 
 Bays, Shores, Shelves, &c. are of SpringTides and Spring Ebbs, 
 
 neat it. 6. Obferve the Pofuion and 
 
 z. Obferve in what proportion Strength of the Wind, the State 
 
 the Increafes of the Tides from of the Weather; the Height of 
 
 the Neap to the Spring Tides, the Barometer, &c. 
 
 and their Decrenfes, and the Ri- 7. Calculate rhe Moon's Age 
 
 fings and Fallings of the Ebbs, and Phce in ail Refpecls. 
 
 happen to be in regard of one See Lowthorp's ^^ria^iaeHt 
 0/Philof. Tranfaft. p. 260. 
 
 S 3
 
 262 <fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Places, I fuppofe this will caufe a fenfible Varia- 
 tion of the Motion of the Water. Likewife thefe 
 Phenomena are to be obferved when the Moon 
 is in the South Part of her Orbit, and moves 
 over Brafil, or South America. For without a 
 perfect Notion of thefe Occurrences, we fhall 
 fcarce be able to find out the true Reafon or 
 Caufe of the Tide. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 The Sea flows to mofl Shores in twelve Hours twelve 
 Minutes i and ebbs back again in as many. 
 
 I N fome few Places it takes more Time in flow- 
 ing than in ebbing j and on the contrary, in others 
 it flows in lefs Time than it ebbs : yet fo that the 
 Time of the Flux and Reflux (or the Time be- 
 tween the two full Seas ) make together twelve 
 Hours, 24-8 Minutes, and two of thefe Times 
 make twenty four Hours 48^: Minutes, or almoft 
 twenty five Hours. So that High- Water happens 
 every Day later by almoft an Hour than the Day 
 before, becaufe the Moon comes later to the Ver- 
 tex, or Meridian of any Place, by almoft an Hour 
 (fifty Minutes) every Day. 
 
 WE have fufficiently explained this Propofi- 
 tion in our Demonftration of the eleventh ; tho' 
 in that we accounted it to be full Sea, when the 
 Moon is in the Meridian of any Place , but be- 
 caufe, as we ihewed in the laft Propofition, it 
 is found to be High- Water in feveral Places when 
 the Moon is not in the Meridian, we do not, 
 in this Propofition, reckon the forementioned 
 Flours from the Time the Moon is in the Me- 
 ridian of thefe Places, but from the Time me 
 is found, by Experience, to be in that Vertex 
 when it is high Water. Neverthelefs this Period 
 
 ot
 
 CHAP. 14. of Unherfal Geography. 263 
 of the Flux and Reflux is not performed exact- 
 ly in twelve Hours, twenty four Minutes, (or 
 in twenty four Hours, fifty Minutes) but fome 
 Times fooner or later, becaufe the Moon con- 
 ftantly changing her Diftance from the Zenith, 
 returns at unequal Times to the fame Vertex ; 
 but this Difference is fmall. 
 
 THEREFORE tho' the Flux and Reflux 
 together be performed, in all Places, in abouc 
 twelve Hours, twenty four Minutes (when there 
 are no Storms) -, yet in fome, the Time is equally 
 divided between the Flood and Ebb , and in others, 
 the Time of flowing is more or lefs than that of 
 ebbing. 
 
 THE Garonne, a River in France, is feven 
 Hours in rifing, and but five in falling. And in 
 the Port of Maccao, upon the Shore of China, the 
 Tides flow nine Hours, and only ebb three, or 
 lefs if the Eaft Winds blow. 
 
 O N the contrary, in the River Senegal, in Ne~ 
 groland, the Sea flows four Hours, and ebbs eight. 
 
 IT is hard to aflign Reafons for this Diffe- 
 rence. Some attribute it to the ftrong and fwift 
 Current of certain Rivers, or to their ordinary 
 Flux. Thus the River Garonne refills the Influx 
 of the Sea with it's ftrong Current and hinders 
 it ; but helps the Reflux, and haftens it. Others 
 will have the Flux to be prolonged another Hour, 
 becaufe the return of the Flood from the northern 
 Seas, hinders it's Egrefs at the Mouth of the Ga- 
 ronne, and rather forces it: further up the River. 
 But it is my Opinion, that the River pours itfelf 
 into the Sea, to a considerable Diftance, with a ra- 
 pid Motion, which is obftructed in part by the 
 Tide, and made to ftand, fome Time before the 
 Moon forces the Sea up into the very Chanel. 
 
 THE Reafon why the Sea flows only four 
 Hours into the River Senegal, is either becaufe 
 S 4 H's
 
 264 We Abfolute Part SECT. IV, 
 
 it's Chanel is extended from Weft to Eaft, or be- 
 caufe the fwiftnefs of the Stream, may hinder the 
 Flux for two Hours. There may be perhaps o- 
 ther Caufes which we are ignorant of, for want of 
 Obfervations ; for we are not certain whether it 
 really leflens all the eight Hours, or only fix, and 
 is (tagnant the other two, by Reafon of the Equa- 
 lity of the Current and the Tide, 
 
 W E are alfo to confider that low Places have 
 apparently a longer Flux, and a morter Ebb. 
 
 PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 Whether it be Flood in any Place at the Inftant the 
 Moon is in the Horizon of that Place ? 
 
 THEY commonly fay it is ; tho' it be not true in 
 thofe Places where it is full Sea when the Moon 
 is in the Meridian. For when the Moon declines 
 from the Equator fouthward, me approaches the 
 Meridian in lefs than fix Hours, and therefore 
 the Flux muft have begun when the Moon was 
 deprefied below .the Horizon: on the contrary, 
 when the Moon has a North Declination, me 
 requires more than fix Hours to move from the 
 Horizon to the Meridian, and therefore it is 
 Flood when me is elevated above the Horizon, 
 or is in the Horary Circle of the fixth Hour ; 
 and fo it is obferved in moft Places, tho' it be 
 otherwife at London^ as we oblerved above. It 
 feems indeed reafonable that, tho' the Moon has 
 a North Declination, the Flux fhou.ld begin when 
 me is horizontal, becaufe me is then ninety De- 
 grees diflant from the Vertex of the Place, and 
 therefore the Preffure of the Ocean ought firft to 
 touch here. But Obfervations are wanting to con- 
 firm this. 
 
 PRO-
 
 CHAP. 14. of Unfoerfal Geography, 265 
 PROPOSITION XXI. 
 
 Having the Time of High or Low-Water given, on 
 the Day of the Change or Full, in any Place where 
 the Sea ebbs and flows regularly, (viz. in twelve 
 Hours, forty eight Minutes') to find, at any Age of 
 the Moon, the Time of High and Low-Water (^). 
 
 (m) The true Time of the 
 Tides, at all Ages of the Moon 
 is not well computed by Sea- 
 Men and Aftronomers; mod of 
 them reckoning, that the Moon 
 being upon a fet Point of the 
 Compafs, or fomany Hours paft 
 the Meridian, makes High-Tide 
 in fach and fuch a Point at all 
 Times of the Moon. As for in- 
 ftance, a South-weft Moon 
 makes a full Tide at London, that 
 is, when the Moon is three 
 Hours paft the Meridian. Now 
 this is true indeed at the New 
 and Full Moon, but not at any 
 other Times of the Moon, 
 which few take any notice of. 
 
 But obferving more narrow- 
 ly, I find that at London the 
 Tides fall out at lead two Points 
 that is, an Hour and a half (bon- 
 er in the quarters than in the 
 New and Full Moon, and the 
 true Time of the Tides is found 
 to be fomewhat fhorter and 
 fliorter from the New and Full 
 Moon to the quarters, yet not 
 in an equal manner, neither 
 gradually decreafing from the 
 New and Full Moon till the 
 quarters; but rather that there 
 was fomc little Difference of 
 Alteration both at the N\v and 
 
 WE 
 
 Full Moons, and alfo at the 
 quarters, and that the greateft 
 Difference fell out in the midft 
 between them, agreeing very- 
 well to a circular Proportion 
 after this manner. 
 
 1. Divide a Circle into iz 
 equal Parts, or Hours, accord- 
 ing to the Moon's Motion, or 
 Diftance from the Sun, from 
 the New Moon to the Full. 
 
 2. Let the Diameter of the 
 Circle be divided into 90 Parts, 
 or Minutes, that is, according to 
 the Time of the Difference be- 
 tween the New or Full Moon, 
 and the quarters, which is one 
 Hour and a half. 
 
 3. Make perpendicular Lines 
 crofs the Diameter of the Circle 
 from Hour to Hour. 
 
 4. Reckon the Time of {he 
 Moon's coming to the South in 
 the Circumference of the Cir- 
 cle, and obferve the perpendicu- 
 lar Line that falls from that Point 
 upon the Diameter; and the 
 proportional Minute cut there- 
 by, willfhew how many Hours 
 or Minutes are to be fubftrafted 
 from the Time of High Tides at 
 the New and Full Moon, that 
 fo you may have the true Time 
 of the Tides that prefent Day. 
 
 Example,
 
 266 The Alfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 W E obferved before, that the Time of High 
 and Low- Water (if we reckon by the mean Mo- 
 tion of the Mon from the Sun) is every Day 48 1 
 Minutes, (or more accurately 4873) and every 
 half Day 24^ Minutes later than the preceding. 
 
 I F therefore it be High- Water in any Place, 
 on the Day of the New or Full Moon, at twelve 
 o* Clock, it will be full Tide on the fubfequenr. 
 Days of the J^unation, as in the following Table ; 
 
 Moon's 
 Age. 
 
 Hours. 
 
 Minutes. 
 
 i 
 
 XII. 
 
 48 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 37 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 27 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 16 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 55 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 44 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 34 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 23 
 
 IP 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 ii 
 
 9 
 
 I 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 5J 
 
 13 
 
 10 
 
 40 
 
 14 
 
 ii 
 
 29 
 
 14* 
 
 12 
 
 Midnight. 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 Noon. 
 
 Example. At London, on the 
 pay of New and Full Moon, it 
 K high Tide at three of the 
 Clock, that is when the Moon 
 Js three Hour? paft the Meridian, 
 and fo by the common Rule the 
 Moon being about four Days 
 <>ld it will be South about three 
 of the Clock, and it will be 
 Jiigh Tide three Hours after- 
 
 THAT 
 
 wards, that is at fix of the Clock. 
 But now by this Rule, if you 
 count this Tiine of the Moon's 
 coming to the South in the Cir- 
 cumference, the perpendicular 
 Line which comes from three to 
 nine, cuts the Diameter at 45 
 Min. which fhews that fo much 
 is to be abated from the Time 
 of High Tide in the New and 
 Full
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univerjal Geography. 267 
 THAT is, at the end of the firft Day of the 
 Moon's Age it is High- Water later by forty eight 
 Minutes, &f. 
 
 BUT 
 
 Full Moon ; fo that it is High 
 Tide 45 Min. before fix ; that 
 is, at five Hours i 5 Min. and 
 not at fix, according to the 
 common Rule. 
 
 The like you may do for any 
 other Port, or Place, knowing 
 the Time of High Water at the 
 New and Full Moon in that 
 Place : And you may do it the 
 more readily, if you fet down 
 the Time of High Water at the 
 New and Full Moon under the 
 Diameter, as I have done for 
 London where it is high Tide at 
 
 three of the Clock : So when 
 the Moon is fouth at three of 
 the Clock or nine, the Perpen- 
 dicular cuts the Diameter at two 
 Hours 1 5 Min. which, added to 
 the aforefaid three or nine, gives 
 the Time of high Water as a- 
 bove. 
 
 Thus you may eafily make a 
 Table which by the Southing 
 of the Moon mail readily tell 
 you the Time of High Tide in 
 any Place. The following is 
 for London. 
 
 Moon 
 
 Tide 
 
 
 Moon 
 
 Tide 
 
 
 Moon 
 
 ! 
 
 Tide 
 
 
 Moon 
 
 Tide 
 
 South. 
 
 Lnd 
 
 
 South. 
 
 Land. 
 
 
 South 
 
 Load. 
 
 
 Scutb. 
 
 Land. 
 
 H, M\H. M. 
 
 
 H. M 
 
 H. M 
 
 
 H M. 
 
 \H. M. 
 
 
 H M 
 
 H. M. 
 
 xn o 
 
 \ o 
 
 
 II 
 
 5 *5 
 
 
 VI O 
 
 7 30 
 
 
 x c 
 
 1 '5 
 
 10 
 
 i 9 
 
 
 IO 
 
 5 21 
 
 
 10 
 
 7 40 
 
 
 1C 
 
 i 29 
 
 20 
 
 3 18 
 
 
 20 
 
 5 27 
 
 
 2C 
 
 7 52 
 
 
 2C 
 
 ' 43 
 
 3 
 
 i 27 
 
 
 3 
 
 5 3: 
 
 
 30 
 
 8 4 
 
 
 3 C 
 
 ii 57 
 
 40 
 
 3 36 
 
 
 40 
 
 5 4 
 
 
 4 
 
 8 15 
 
 
 40 
 
 2 10 
 
 ?o 
 
 3 40 
 
 
 50 
 
 5 4^ 
 
 
 5 
 
 i 25 
 
 
 5 C 
 
 2 24 
 
 I 
 
 3 54 
 
 
 [V C 
 
 5 5 2 
 
 
 vn o|g 36 
 
 
 X C 
 
 .2 37 
 
 10 
 
 4 2 
 
 
 1C 
 
 5 59 
 
 
 1C 
 
 8 48 
 
 
 1C 
 
 12 50 
 
 20 
 
 1- <J 
 
 
 20 
 
 5 6 
 
 
 2C 
 
 9 
 
 
 2C 
 
 i 3 
 
 3 
 
 4. 16 
 
 
 3 c 
 
 6 \: 
 
 
 3 C 
 
 19 '3 
 
 
 3^ 
 
 i 16 
 
 4 
 
 4 23 
 
 
 4 C 
 
 6 20 
 
 
 4 C 
 
 9 26 
 
 
 4 C 
 
 i 29 
 
 5 
 
 4- 30 
 
 
 $c 
 
 6 28 
 
 
 5l9 39 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 i 42 
 
 II 
 
 4 37 
 
 
 V C 
 
 6 36 
 
 
 ^in c 
 
 1 9 53 
 
 
 XI 
 
 54 
 
 1C 
 
 4 44 
 
 
 1C 
 
 6 4, 
 
 
 1C 
 
 10 6 
 
 
 IO 
 
 2 3 
 
 20 
 
 f 5 
 
 
 20 
 
 6 53 
 
 
 2C 
 
 \10 20 
 
 
 20 
 
 2 16 
 
 3 
 40 
 
 4 57 
 5 3 
 
 
 307 2 
 
 407 I 
 
 
 3< 
 4 C 
 
 Jio 33 
 |Q 47 
 
 
 3^ 
 40 
 
 2 27 
 
 2 3 8 
 
 5 
 
 5 9 
 
 
 5p 20 
 
 
 5< 
 
 Ju i 
 
 
 5 
 
 2 49 
 
 If
 
 2 68 'fhe Abfolute Part SECT! IV, 
 
 BUT for Practice, it is fufficient to add to the 
 Time of High- Water at the New Moon. 
 
 For the firft Day after the Change. Hours oi 
 
 For the iecond = jf 
 
 For the third 
 For the foiFth 
 
 For the fifth . 4 
 
 For the fixth 5 
 
 For the feventh 5f 
 
 For the eighth - 6-| 
 
 For the ninth 
 For die tenth 
 For the eleventh 
 For the twelfth 
 
 For the thirteenth io| 
 
 For the fourteenth 1 1 j 
 
 For the fifteenth 1 2J 
 
 BUT this Calculation fappofes the Motion of 
 the Moon, from the Sun, to be equal, tho j it be 
 not ; for when fhe is in her Perigee me moves 
 much fwifter than when fhe is in her Apogee ; 
 and therefore in the former Cafe fhe prolongs 
 the Time of the Tides, and in the later fhortens 
 them. Befides, fome of the Lunar Months ex- 
 ceed thirty Days, and others are lefs than twenty 
 nine, but the mean is twenty nine Days, twelve 
 Hours, forty four Minutes. 
 
 BUT in thofe Places where it is High or Low- 
 Water when the Moon approaches fome certain 
 
 If you find the Difference not in Pbilof. Tranf. N 34. mbitb 
 
 fo much between the Neap tbo* it be found fault toitb by 
 
 Tides, and the Spring Tides, MrFlamftead (in the fame Tranf. 
 
 the Diameter mull be divided N 143,) yet by many it is fold to 
 
 iuo fewer Parts. This is Mr anftoer very well, and therefore 
 
 Jienrp Philips'/ way t delivered we have tranfiribed it. 
 
 Azimuth,
 
 GH.AP. 14" of Univerfal Geography. 269 
 Azimuth, tho* the Times may be computed by 
 this Method, yet they are not fo accurately found. 
 
 NEITHER do the Conjundtions of the Sun 
 and Moon happen at the fame Time every Change. 
 
 W E mall mew in Chapter xxx. how this may 
 be done by the terreftrial Globe. 
 
 W E may ufe a Method fomething like this, for 
 thofe Places where the Time of the Flux is more 
 or lefs than the Time of the Reflux , fuppofing 
 the Difference be conflant. But the Consideration 
 of the Thing itfelf, and Experience, will fooner 
 teach theie Particulars than Difcourfe, 
 
 PROPOSITION XXII. 
 
 be Winds very often binder, or promote, the Cmirfe 
 of the Tides in all Places ; and not only the fyin& 
 that blow in thofe Places, but even tbofe in others 
 MlbwtbtfameEffiSi. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition is fo clear, 
 that it needs no Demonftration. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIII. 
 
 When any Part of the Ocean hath a proper , or par- 
 ticular^ Motion, it is called a Current. Currents 
 are various and directed towards different Parts of 
 tfye Ocean, of 'which fome are conflant and others 
 periodical. To enumerate the moft famous conflant 
 ones. 
 
 i. THE moft extraordinary Current of the 
 Sea is that by which Part of the Atlantic or 
 African Ocean moves about Guinea from Cape 
 Vert towards the Curvature or Bay of Africa, 
 which they call Fernando Poo, viz. from Weft to 
 Eaft, which is contrary to the general Motion. 
 
 And
 
 70 V& e dbfolute Part S E CT. IV. 
 
 And fuch is the Force of this Current, that when 
 Ships approach too near the Shore it carries them 
 violently toward that Bay, aad deceives the Ma- 
 riners in their Reckoning. Hence it comes to 
 pafs, that Ships which fail in two Days Time 
 trom the Shore of Mouree to Rio de Benin , [or 
 Formofa] which is one hundred Dutch Miles, re- 
 quire fometimes fix or feven Weeks to return 
 from Benin to Mouree, unlefs they run out into 
 the main Ocean, which is not eafily done, be- 
 caufe the Current fets to the North-Eaft, and runs 
 fwiitly from the Ifland of St Thomas, towards the 
 Bay of Fernando Poo, carrying in with it the 
 Ships tho* diey have a fair North-Eaft Wind ; and 
 they can fcarcely get from the Shore, unlefs they 
 be driven by thefe fudden Storms which break 
 from the Clouds (called Travados) which feldom 
 happen, and in fome Months not at all. This 
 Current deftroyed feveral Ships before Mariners 
 were well aware of it ; as being either unadvifedly 
 driven upon the Rocks and Shoals, and perimed 
 by Shipwreck, or detained in the Bay 'till they 
 died with Hunger. 
 
 BUT this Current affects not the whole Etbio- 
 pc Ocean, only that Part which is adjacent to 
 the Shore of Guinea, to the end of the Bay, and 
 to about one Degree of South Latitude. It is 
 obferved not to exceed the Diftance of fourteen 
 Miles from the Shore ; therefore Ships are very 
 careful left they mould approach fo near, when 
 they fail along thefe Coafts ; which would hinder 
 their intended Courfe, and drive them to a Place 
 they would not care to vifit. 
 
 IT is no eafy thing to find out the Caufe of 
 this Current fo near the Shore, when the main 
 Ocean thereabouts moves the contrary Way from 
 Eaft to Weft. Two Things may be faid for it : 
 
 i. THE
 
 CHAP. 14. ofUniverfal Geography. 271 
 
 1 . T H E Ocean being repulfed by the Ame- 
 rican Shore moves flowly to the Eaftward, but 
 this Motion is not felt in the Main, becaufe the 
 other deftroys it, and renders it lefs fenfible, only 
 near the Snore it runs fwiftly towards Fernando 
 Poo 9 which, being tlretched a pretty way into the 
 Land is fitted to receive it ; and the Reafon why it 
 is not felt in other Places upon the Shore of A- 
 frica (as at Congo} is, becaufe the Rapidity of the 
 Rivers breaks and obftructs it. 
 
 2. THERE maybe fome fubterraneous Re- 
 ceptacle in the Bay of Fernando Poo, into which 
 the Sea perhaps may fall and draw the reft of the 
 Ocean. But this may feem lefs probable; they 
 that have opportunity of obferving it better may 
 give better Reafons. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIV. 
 
 j'^"'} ',.-, ""'-I !y ~'r \ ^? 
 
 [To point out the Place of the fecund perpetual Current}, 
 
 THE Ocean moves fwiftly from about Suma- 
 tra into the Bay of Bengal, from South to North ; 
 fo that it is probable this Bay was made by the 
 Rapidity of the Current ; by which alfo perhaps 
 the Peninfula of Malacca was feparated from India, 
 I do not know whether the Caufe may be owing to 
 the many Iflands, and to Cape Mabo, upon the 
 South Continent, whereby the Ocean in it's Pafiage 
 weftward may be diverted northwards: or there 
 may be a fubterraneous Receptacle in the Bay it- 
 felf. 
 
 B E it how it will, I fuppofe the Current doth 
 not fet directly to the North, but rather to the 
 North- Weft. This fame Current is felt between 
 Java and the South Continent, and therefore when 
 the Dutch fail to the Indies^ they firft make to- 
 wards
 
 272 &e Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 wards the South Continent, and then dire6t their 
 Courfe from South to North to come at Java. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXV. 
 
 [To point cut the Place of the third perpetual Current}. 
 
 BETWEEN Madagafcar and the Cape of 
 Good-Hope, and more efpecially between Terra de 
 Natal and the Cape, there is a ftrong Current 
 which fets from North-Eaft to South- Weft (the 
 fame way as the Shore runs) and is carried with 
 fuch a rapid and extraordinary Motion, that Ships, 
 with a brifk Wind, can hardly weather it, or fail 
 agaiiift it, to Madagafcar ; on the contrary, they 
 that fail out of the Chanel, between Madagafcar 
 and Africa, towards the Cape of Good-Hope, ate 
 carried thither without the Help of the Winds, 
 purely by the Force of the Current. I fuppofe 
 this to be the Caufe, that the Indian Ocean, be- 
 ing forced towards the African Shore, and there- 
 by diverted from it's direct .Courfe, naturally flows 
 towards the Cape of Good-Hope-, where it finds a 
 PafTage. For in the main Ocean, remote from the 
 Shores, this Motion is not oblique but direct, 
 from Eaft to Weft. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVI. 
 
 t ' . :;;iii Y'--' :ftl S1 " 
 [To point out the Place of the fourth perpetual Current]. 
 
 I N the Pacific Ocean, along the Shores of Peru, 
 and the reft of America, the Sea flows from South 
 to North ; which, no doubt, is owing to the con* 
 ftant South Winds which blow upon thefe Coafts ; 
 for neither thefe Winds, nor the Currents are ob- 
 ferved out at Sea. 
 
 PRO- 
 
 -
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 273 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVII. 
 
 jY<? obferve the Place of the fifth perpetual Current]* 
 
 THIS is obferved to flow from Cape St Au~ 
 guftin, in Brafil, along the Coaft of America, a- 
 mong the Antilles in the Bay of Mexico, towards 
 Florida, which is from South to North. For the 
 Sea being driven by it's general Motion againft 
 the Shore of Brafil, is there repulfed, and car- 
 ried northward, where the Chanel is broader 
 and more open, which very likely caufes this Cur- 
 rent. The like Motion northwards is found at 
 the Mouth of the Streights of Manilla, one of 
 the Philippines. Likewife in Japan there is a very 
 fwift Current from the Port of Xibuxia towards 
 Arimia. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVIII. 
 
 [Tojhew the Place of the fixtb perpetual Current}. 
 
 THIS is in the Streights of La Maire, where 
 the Sailors in the Najfau Ship obferved the Cur- 
 rent to fet to the Eaft ; but this we cannot give 
 fo much Credit to, fmce La Maire himfelf writes 
 to the contrary. 
 
 THERE are other Currents near the Shores 
 of feveral Countries, but not yet accurately enough 
 obferved or defer ibed. 
 
 VOL. I. T PRO-
 
 274 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIX. 
 
 To thefe perpetual Currents tnay be referred fuch as 
 are made by large Rivers, where they exonerate 
 tbetnfdves into the Sea. 
 
 A T the Shore of Loango, ten or twelve Dutch 
 Miles from Congo in Africa, there is a ftrong Cur- 
 rent from the Land towards the Weft , becaufe 
 of the many vail Rivers, (of which the Zaire is 
 the greateft) which fall headlong into the Sea, 
 and repel the Water ; being helped by the general 
 Motion. Therefore it requires fome Days before 
 Ships can come up to thefe Shores, tho* but a 
 Dutch Mile or two from them. 
 
 S O at the Ifland of Lamton, upon die Coaft 
 of China, the Sea moves from the Shore to the 
 eaftward, contrary to the general Motion, which is 
 from the Eaft to China. This Current is caufed 
 by the ftrong Efflux of the great River Tboncoan 
 [or Ta~\ and is not obferved out at Sea any further 
 than the Bajhee Iflands. 
 
 THUS far concerning the conftant Currents ; 
 we mail add fomewhat about thofe that are ftated 
 or anniverfary. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXX. 
 
 There is a great variety of Jhifting Currents which do 
 not lajl, lut return at certain Periods ; and thefe 
 do moft of them depend upon, and follow, the an- 
 niverfary Winds, or Monfoons, which by blowing 
 in one Place may caufe a Current in another. 
 
 A T Java, in the Streights of Sunda, when the 
 Monfoons blow from the Weft, viz. in the Month 
 
 2 Of
 
 CHAP. 14. of Unherfal Geography. 
 
 of May, the Currents fet to the eaftward, contrary 
 
 to the general Motion (). 
 
 ALSO between the Ifland of Celebes and Ma- 
 dura, when the weftern Monfoons fet, viz. in De- 
 cember, January, and February (or when the Winds 
 blow from the North- Weft or between the North 
 and Weft), the Currents fet to the South-Eaft, or 
 between the South and Eaft. 
 
 A T Ceylon from the middle of March to ORober 
 the Currents fet to the fouthward, and in the other 
 Part of the Year to the northward-, becaufe at this 
 Time the fouthern Monfoons fet, and at the other 
 the northern. 
 
 BETWEEN Cochin-China and Malacca when 
 the weftern Monfoons blow, viz. from April to 
 Auguft, the Currents fet eaftward, againft the ge- 
 neral Motion : but the reft of the Year fet welt- 
 ward i the Monfoon confpiring with the general 
 Motion. They run fo ftrongly in thefe Seas, that 
 unexperienced Sailors here fuppofe the Waves to 
 beat againft fome Rocks. 
 
 S O for fome Months after the fifteenth of Fe- 
 bruary, the Currents fet from the Maldivies towards 
 India, on the Eaft, againft the general Motion of 
 the Sea. 
 
 O N the Shore of China and Cambodia, in the 
 Months of Oflober, November, and December, the 
 Currents fet to the North-Weft, and from January 
 to the South- Weft, when they run with fuch a 
 fwift Motion about the Shoals of Parcel^ that it 
 feems fwifter than that of an Arrow. 
 
 () Thefe Currents cotiftant- Chap. xxi. below ; from whence 
 
 ly follow the Winds and fee to may be formed a better Judg- 
 
 the fame point the Monfoon or ment of the Time of the fe:ting 
 
 Trade Wind does, out at Sea. of thefe Currents than from 
 
 See an accurate Hiftory of thefe what our Author delivers in 
 
 in Note (a) upon Prop. II. of this Proportion. 
 
 T 2 AT
 
 276 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 A T Pulo Condore upon the Coaft of [Cambodia] 
 tho' the Monfoons are Ihifting, yet the Currents 
 fet flrongly towards the Eaft, even when they blow 
 to a contrary Point. 
 
 ALONG the Coafts of the Bay of Bengal, 
 as far as the Cape [Romania] at the extream Point 
 of Malacca, the Current runs fouthward in Novem- 
 ber and December. 
 
 WHEN the Monfoons blow from China to 
 Malacca, the Sea runs fwiftly from Pulo Cambi to 
 Pulo Condore, on the Coaft of Cambodia. 
 
 THERE are ieveral other Examples to be 
 found in Sailors Journals ; tho* lefs accurately 
 given. 
 
 I N the Bay of Sans Bras, not far from the 
 Cape of Good-Hope, there is a Current particu- 
 larly remarkable, by which the Sea always runs 
 from Eaft to Weft to the Landward , and the more 
 vehemently the more the Winds oppofe it from the 
 oppofite Point. The Caufe is no doubt owing 
 to fome adjacent Shore which is higher than this. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXI. 
 
 be Gyrations of the Sea, which we call Vortexes^ or 
 Whirlpools, are of three Kinds, 
 
 SOME Whirlpools only turn the Water in a 
 Round -, others at Times abibrb, and emit or vo- 
 mit it up ; and fome again fuck it in, but do not 
 caft it out. And doubtlefs there is a fourth Kind 
 fomewhcre in the Chanel of the Sea, which may 
 throw out Water but takes none in. I do not 
 remember any fuch to be recorded by Authors ; 
 only upon the dry Land there are feveral obfer- 
 ved. The Dutch Mariners call thefe Whirlpools 
 Maelftroom. 
 
 THERE
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 277 
 THERE are but very few of thefe, at lead, 
 that have been taken Notice of. 
 
 BETWEEN Negropont and Greece there is 
 a famous Whirlpool , called the Euripus^ much 
 talked of becaufe of the fabulous Story of Ari- 
 ftotle's dying there (o). Scaliger endeavours to ex- 
 plain it thus. It is not much amifs (fays he) to 
 iuppofe the Water, received into the Caverns, in the 
 Cliffs of the Rocks below, iflueth from thence ; 
 for by the continual running in of the Water 
 the little rocky Bays are rilled, and being full, 
 they emit what they received, thro' winding and 
 fubterraneous Paffages ; whofe Capacity is fuch, 
 that they pour out the Water for fo many Hours, 
 whereby the Tides are now obftrucled or repelled, 
 and a little after forwarded or helped. But any 
 one may perceive the infufficiency of this Caufe. 
 
 THE Maelftroom on the Coaft of Norway, is 
 the fwifteft and largeft known Vortex ; for it is faid 
 to be thirteen Dutch Miles in Circuit ; in the mid- 
 dle of which there is a Rock, which the People 
 thereabouts call the Moujke. This Whirlpool, for 
 fix Hours, fucks in whatever approaches it, or 
 comes nigh it ; not only Water, but Whales, load- 
 ed Ships, and other Things ; and in as many Hours 
 difgorges them all again, with a hideous Noife, 
 
 (o) There are on each fide the Euripus is regular, and ten 
 
 the Euripus fix or feven in which it is irregular, viz. five 
 
 Gulphs, wherein the Water Days before and after the New 
 
 fhuts it felf up to iffue from and Full Moon, in which there 
 
 thence as often as it enters there; are nine or ten Changes of the 
 
 and the Situation of thefe Courfeof the Water every Day : 
 
 Gulphs perhaps contributes to and in each of thefe Changes the 
 
 this fudden Flux and Reflux, of Water flows about a Foot, and 
 
 which the Moon feems to be ebbs back again. The Phaeno- 
 
 the principal Caufe. menon is very wonderful, and 
 
 There are twenty Days of each it's Caufe dubious. See Pbilof, 
 
 Moon in which the Courfe of t ?rarif.'N ji.Pag. 215. 
 
 T 3 Violence,
 
 278 7 he Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Violence, and whirling round of the Water. The 
 Caufe is latent. 
 
 BETWEEN Normandy in France, and Eng- 
 land, there is a Whirlpit, towards which Ships 
 are drawn with an incredible Celerity ; but when 
 they come near the middle of the Sw.allow, they 
 are, with the fame Force, thrown out again. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXII. 
 
 *%) concujjion or trembling of the Sea proceeds from a 
 certain Spirit, which agitates not only, the Earth^ 
 but alfo the very Water, and caufes it to bubble. 
 
 I N the Bay ofBifeay, not far, from Bayonne, there 
 is a Place, called by the Inhabitants Cap-Breton, 
 where the Sea fometimes grows fo turgid, without 
 the leaft Wind, that the adjoining Shore feems 
 to be in danger of being overflowed , and on a 
 fudden grows calm again. There is the like ra- 
 ging in a Lake in Scotland, called Loch Loumond, 
 which is alfo caufed by a fubterraneous Spirit. 
 
 THE Portuguefe, about the Year 1523, obfer- 
 ved a Percuffion of the* Water in the Sea of Cam- 
 baya. In the greateft Calm, when there was not 
 the leaft. Breath of Wind (as Maffem relates) the 
 Waves on a fudden began to fwell up from the 
 Bottom ; and immediately the Ships feemed to nod 
 as it were to one another -, then their Joints crack- 
 ed, and their Sides and Bottoms gave way. The 
 Sailors, being ftruck with a fudden Fear, and 
 thinking the Fleet had run upon Quickfands, were 
 in the greateft Confufion : Some began to found 
 with the. Lead, others, to, pump, but they that 
 were more wary bethought themfelves of ef- 
 caping, and laid hold of Barrels to fwim upon : 
 but it was afterwards found to be an Earthquake, 
 which had put them^qto that Confternation at Sea.
 
 CHAP. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 
 PROPOSITION XXXIII. 
 
 279. 
 
 Why the Pacific Sea is more ftill andcalm, and with- 
 out high Waves*, and why it is eafily agitated by 
 . the Winds. 
 
 THE Caufe, no doubt, is, that it's Motion 
 to the Weft, is not obftrudted by the Lee-Shores ; 
 as it is in the Atlantic. 
 
 C II A P.
 
 28o tt* Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Of Lakes, Ponds, and MoraJJes or Bogs. 
 
 PROPOSITION I, 
 
 Definition, 
 
 A L A K E is a Collection of Waters contained 
 J[\ in fome Cavity in an inland Place, of a 
 large Extent, -and. every .where furrounded with 
 Land, having no Communication with the Ocean. 
 
 PONDS are little Lakes, which neither re- 
 ceive nor emit Rivers. Some Geographers, or 
 learned Men, may perhaps define them otherwife, 
 but it is no great Matter ; we fhall not ftand to 
 argue about Words : what we have done is to the 
 beft of our Judgment. 
 
 A Morafs, or Bog, is an inland {landing Wa- 
 ter, having Earth raifed and appearing above it 
 here and there, or even Earth, or Mud, mixed 
 with it. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 Lakes are of four Kinds. 
 
 i. SOME neither receive nor fend forth Ri- 
 vers v and if fuch are fmall, we call them Ponds \ 
 but if large, and of a vaft Ex tent j they acquire 
 
 the
 
 C H A P. 1 5. of Unherfal Geography. 281 
 the Name of Lakes. 2. Some again emit Rivers, 
 but receive none. 3. Others receive Rivers, but 
 have no Evacuation. 4. Others again, both re- 
 ceive and emit Rivers : of thefe fome emit more 
 Water than they receive, fome lefs, and others an 
 Equality. Again fome fend out their Rivers al- 
 moft in a ftreight Line with thofe they receive, 
 others difcharge them other Ways, or towards 
 other Points. Likewife fome receive more Rivers 
 than they fend out, others not fo many, and fome 
 an equal Number. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 70 explain the Origin, and Continuance, of thofe 
 Lakes that neither receive nor emit Rivers. 
 
 SOME of thefe are large, others of a mode- 
 rate bignefs, and fome but fmall. Of the two 
 laft fome are always full of Water ; others are 
 dried up in Summer, and when it is conftantly 
 fair Weather ; both thefe Sorts are called Ponds. 
 As to thofe that are dried up, it is eafy to mew 
 their Origin, viz. abundance of Rain, which ga- 
 thers and ftagnates in fome Cavity, or depreffed 
 Place. For if any Pit be fituated in the middle 
 of a defcending Ground, the Rain- Water every 
 way drains thither, and makes a Pond. 
 
 THERE are feveral fuch Ponds as thefe in 
 India, made by the Induftry of the Natives, of 
 which fome are a Mile, and fome two in Circuit ; 
 they are furrounded with a Hone- Wall, and are 
 filled in the rainy Months, to fupply the Inhabi- 
 tants, in the dry Seafons, who live a great Way 
 from Springs or Rivers. 
 
 I N like manner Pools or Ponds are made by the 
 Inundation of the Sea, or the Overflowing of the 
 Rivers, 
 
 THUS
 
 fhe Abfolute Part .S E CT. IV. 
 
 THUS the Nik and. the Niger, the one wa- 
 tering Negroland, the other Egypt,, when they over- 
 flow their Banks and are decreafed, they leave their 
 Water in feveral Ponds v which the Inhabitants 
 fence and fortify to preferve the Water 'till fuch 
 times as they have occafion for it. By this means 
 in Mufcovy, Finland, and Lapland, in the Spring, 
 Summer, and Autumn, they have many little 
 Lakes, which are generated partly by the Rains, 
 and partly by the melting of the Ice and Snow. 
 
 BUT tho' fome of thefe Ponds may happen to be 
 dried up in Summer, or when it hath not rained for 
 a long Time ; yet we are not thence to conclude, 
 that they are wholly fupplied with Rain- Water ; 
 for they may be dried up, tho' there are Sources, 
 or Springs, in the Bottom, which perhaps,are fo 
 little that the Heat of the Sun, in Summer, dif- 
 fipates the Water, and turns it into Vapour. 
 
 A S to thofe that admit no Rivers, and yet are 
 not dried up, they may wholly proceed from Rain 
 if their Chanels are deep and capacious, and in 
 which fo much Rain-Water may be contained, 
 that the Heat of the Sun cannot confume the whole 
 before more Rain fall to replenifh them ; tho' it 
 is very likely, that many of thefe are fupplied 
 by Sources under Ground, which continually e- 
 mit as much Water as is exhaled , efpecially thofe 
 Lakes that are found upon the Summits of Moun- 
 tains, as upon Bruflerus, Cents, Sec. Some of them 
 have perhaps been left, at firft, by an Inunda- 
 tion, and are continually fupplied and kept up 
 by Rain- Water: And we need not doubt but 
 that thofe Salt- Water Lakes, or Ponds, that are 
 found near the Sea, were made at firft by the In- 
 undation, or Immifllon, of the Sea-Water, fome 
 way or other , as the Lake of Harlem, and others 
 in Holland. There are alfo feveral fait Lakes in 
 Peru. 
 
 THERE
 
 C H A P. 1 5. of Univerfal Qeography. 283 
 T H E R E is but a fmall number of thefe Lakes 
 to be found. Some little ones are obferved in 
 Mufcovy and Finland, the Lake Locafda in [JEpiraj,] 
 the Lake Bufaranda, in Amafta ; one in Carniola, 
 called the Zirchnltzer Sea ; a round one in China ; 
 another called Hila in Cochin-China, ; one in Zan- 
 haga in Africa ; two in Mexico, in America, the one 
 of them feven Leagues long, and the other near 
 as big. All thefe are but fmall ones, except that 
 in China, which is of a moderate Bignefs. 
 
 BUT the only one great Lake in the whole 
 Earth of this fort is the Lake Parime in America, 
 lying directly under the Equator. It is in length 
 from Eaft to Weft, about three hundred and five 
 German Miles, and, in the broadeft Place, one 
 hundred Miles over, or thereabouts ; fo that it 
 may be compared with, if it do not exceed, any 
 Lake in the World for magnitude ; yet it neither 
 receives, nor emits any Rivers. It may reafonably 
 be doubted how this Lake was produced, whether 
 by fome former Inundation of the Ocean, or by 
 fubterraneous Springs and Sources ? And whether 
 it is fed and kept up by Rain-Water, or the like ? 
 It feems probable that there are Springs in the 
 Bottom which fupply it with as much Water as 
 is daily evaporated by the Heat of the Sun. For 
 Lakes feem to have the fame Origin as Rivers, 
 only they differ in the Situation of their Springs, 
 and the quantity of their fpringing Water. For 
 if a Spring be furrounded with rifing Ground, and 
 run into a deep and broad Chanel, and alfo fend 
 forth but a fmall quantity of Water, it doth not 
 run, but is evaporated as faft as it fprings. There 
 is no Difference therefore, in the main, between 
 Springs, Lakes, and Rivers, only in fome Circum- 
 ftances -, and there are found feveral Springs which 
 do not emit Water j but fuch are more properly 
 called Wells. 
 
 PRO-
 
 284 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 To explain the Origin and Supply of fuch Lakes as 
 emit Rivers but receive none. 
 
 T H E R E is an infinite Number of thefe Lakes, 
 and very many Rivers flow from fuch, as out of 
 Citterns ; efpecially thofe that have their Rife in 
 Mufecvy, Finland, Lapland, &c. where their Springs 
 being fituated low in the middle of a hollow Place, 
 firft till the Cavity and make it a Lake, which be- 
 ing not capacious enough to hold all the Water, 
 it overflows the adjacent Places and forms a River. 
 And we need not doubt but fuch Lakes have their 
 Rife and Maintenance from Springs at the Bottom, 
 whether they be real Fountains, or apparent ones, 
 viz. Water brought thither by fubterraneous Paf- 
 fages from fome other Places ; which laft is more 
 likely in fome Lakes that immediately produce 
 vaft Rivers. 
 
 O F fuch fmall Lakes as thefe there are, as I 
 faid before, a great Number ; as the Wolga at the 
 Head of the River Wolga ; the Lake Odium, at 
 the Head of the Tanais ; the Adac, from whence one 
 of the Branches of the River Tigris flows , the Ozero 
 [or While Lake] in Mufcovy, that gives Source 
 to the River Sbackfna, which is poured into the 
 Wolga, and many more little ones ; we mail here 
 only reckon fome of the larger fort that are 
 more remarkable. 
 
 i . T H E great Lake Cbaamay in the Latitude 
 of thirty one Degrees North, not far from India, 
 to the eaftward of the River Ganges. Out of this 
 Lake flow four very large Rivers, which water and 
 Fertilize the Countries of Siam, Pegu, &c. viz. the 
 i the Afa, the Caifoumo, and the Laquia. 
 
 Some
 
 CHAP. 15. ofUniverfal Geography. 285 
 Some Maps exhibit a fmall River that runs into 
 this Lake. 
 
 2. THE Lake [Singbay] upon the Eaft Border 
 of China, fends out a great River [fouthward,] which 
 being joined to another enters China. 
 
 3. T H E Lake Titicaca, in [Los Charcas] a Pro- 
 vince in South America, is eighty Leagues in Cir- 
 cuit, and emits a large River, which is terminated 
 in another fmall Lake, and is no more feen. There 
 are feveral Towns and Villages difcovered about 
 this Lake. 
 
 4. T H E Lake Nicaragua, in a Province of 
 the fame Name, in America, is only four German 
 Miles from the Pacific, or South Sea, and above 
 one hundred from the Atlantic, into which it is 
 difcharged at broad Flood- Gates. 
 
 5. THE Lake Front ena, in Canada, out of 
 which ifiues the River of Sf Lawrence. 
 
 6. T H E Lake Annibi, in Afia, in the Latitude 
 of Sixty one Degrees. 
 
 $ 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 To explain the Rife and Maintenance of thofe Lakes 
 which receive Rivers, but emit none. 
 
 IT is manifeft that thefe Lakes were at firft 
 formed, and are Hill fupplied and fed by the 
 Rivers which they receive, or which difburden 
 themfelves into them. For when Rivers in their 
 Courfe meet with a broad Plat of low Ground, 
 they are there collected, and form a Lake ; which 
 (if the Soil be light, and porous to tranfmit the 
 Water to the adjacent Fields, or if there be a 
 fubterraneous Receptacle, or, which is moft like- 
 ly, if the Water work it*s way under Ground^ ne- 
 ver overflows but lofes, infenfibly, one way or a- 
 nother, as much Water as it receives. 
 
 THERE
 
 286 The Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 THERE are not many of thefe Lakes taken 
 Notice of. 
 
 1 . I N the foregoing Propofition we obferved 
 that the Lake \iticaca~\ difcharges a River into a 
 fmaller called Pari-a, which therefore may be re- 
 ferred to this Clafs, viz. to fuch as receive Rivers 
 but emit none. 
 
 2. THE Lake Afphaltites, which is alfo called 
 the Dead Sea, receives the River Jordan, but e- 
 mits none. It's length, from North to South, is 
 feventy German Miles, and it's breadth five, as 
 fome make it. 
 
 3. THERE is one in the lefler Afia. 
 
 4. THERE is a fmall one in Macedonia, cal- 
 led Janna, which receives two little Rivers. 
 
 5. THE Lake of Geneva. 
 
 6. ONE in Perfta near Calgiflan. 
 
 7. THE Lake Soran, in Mufcovy, receives 
 two fmall Rivers. 
 
 8 . T H E River Ghir, in Africa, is reported, 
 by Leo Africanus, to lofe itfelf in a Lake, and 
 fome Maps fo reprefent it ; but others join it to 
 Nubia. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 To explain the Origin of tbojg Lakes that Mb re- 
 ceive and emit Rivers. 
 
 THEY are of three kinds^ as was faid be- 
 fore in Propofition 2. and either emit more Watei' 
 than they receive, or an equal quantity, or lefs. 
 If they emit more, it is evident they have fome 
 hidden Springs in the Bottom: If lefs, the Earth 
 is either fpongy, or there are fubterraneous Aque- 
 ducls, whereby the Water is conveyed tinder 
 Ground : If an equal quantity, it is a Sign that 
 there are neither Springs nor Swallows at the Bot- 
 tom,
 
 CHAP. 15. ofUnfoerfal Geography. 287 
 torn. Their Origins therefore are partly explained 
 in Propofition 4, that is, are owing to a low Ground 
 where there happens to be Springs, and into which 
 Plenty of Rain- Water is drained. 
 
 SUCH as are generated by the Influx of one 
 River, and afford a Pafiage for it in at one Side, 
 and out at another, are found in many Places. 
 Thus the Niger makes three Lakes in it's Courfe, 
 and runs upon the Side of another. The Nile makes 
 feveral more Lakes than are mewed in our com- 
 mon Maps. The River Duina at leaft runs thro* 
 fix, or feven, Lakes. And there are fome Rivers 
 in Mu/covy and Finland, that make, as may be 
 feen in our large Maps, at leaft fixteen Lakes 
 before they exonerate themfelves into the Sea. 
 We mall only here enumerate fuch as produce o- 
 ther Rivers than thofe they receive. 
 
 i. THE Zaire, a Lake, or Morafs, in the 
 Foreland of Africa, lies between the fecond and 
 ninth Degree of South Latitude, and therefore 
 is about one hundred and five German Miles long. 
 In the middle of it there is an Ifland (befides feve- 
 ral fmall ones) fo large and populous, that the 
 Inhabitants can raife an Army of Thirty thoufand 
 Men. This Ifland almoft divides the Lake into 
 two Pans, which have each a peculiar Name ; 
 that to the fouthwarjd is called Zambre. Out of 
 this Lake flow three large Rivers, the Nile, [or 
 rather the Zeebe] the Coanza, and the Zaire (a}. 
 There are fome fmall Rivers that run into it ; 
 
 Opinion of the Geogra- 
 ofhisTime, makeththe 
 
 fa] ' Our Author, according 
 
 to the ~ 
 
 phers o 
 
 Nile to flow out of this Lake ; 
 
 but here (and in other Places] 
 
 we have taken the Liberty to 
 
 alter the Text (tho' as little as 
 
 may be more agreeable to the 
 modernDifcoveries of the Par' 
 tuguefe Jefuits. A more juft 
 and modern account of the 
 Rife and Courfe of the Nile is 
 given in the Note (g) upoa 
 Prof. 20. Chap. xvi. 
 
 poffiblej that the Defcription 
 
 but
 
 288 Vbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 but thefe do not feem able to fupply even the 
 Lake itfelf with Water, and therefore doubtlefs 
 there are Springs at the Bottom ; tho* the Inunda- 
 tion of the Rivers is owing to the great quantities 
 of Rain that fall in the wet Seafons. 
 
 2. T HE Lake Zajlan, not far from Zaire, lies 
 between the third and ninth Degree of South 
 Latitude , and therefore is about ninety German 
 Miles in length. It receives and emits fome fmall 
 Rivers. 
 
 3. THE Lake Zacbaf, not far from Zaire y to- 
 wards the Cape of Good-Hope, emits a River, 
 which being joined to others, is called St Efprit, 
 or Delagoa. 
 
 4. THE Lake Aqullunda receives a Branch of 
 the Zaire i and pours many Rivers into the King- 
 dom of Congo. 
 
 5. T H E Lake Onega, in Finland, lies between 
 fixty two and fixty four Degrees of Latitude, and 
 is about twenty five German Miles long, but fcarce 
 half fo broad. It receives feveral confiderable Ri- 
 vers from other fmall Lakes, and difcharges one, 
 called the Sueri, into the Lake Ladoga. 
 
 6. THE Lake Ladoga is about thirty German 
 Miles long, and fifteen broad ; it receives the 
 River Sueri, out of the Lake Onega, and other 
 lefler ones from other Places ; alfo a confiderable 
 one from the famous Lake Ilmen in Mufeovy. It 
 difcharges one River into the Gulph of Finland. 
 
 7. [THE White Lake] or Ozero, receives 
 fome fmall Rivers, and difcharges the River 
 Shackfna which falls into the Wolga. 
 
 8. T HE Lake or Morafs called \Enare frejk} 
 in Lapland, is about forty German Miles long, and 
 fifteen broad. It receives the River Avila, and 
 fends one called [Paefreka] into the Sea of Lapland. 
 
 9. 'THE Lake.Ula in [Finland] is thirty Ger- 
 man Miles long, and half as broad. It hath an
 
 CHAP. 15. of Unfoerfal Geography. 289 
 Ifland in the middle like the Zaire, and receives 
 a River which paiTeth thro' feveral Lakes, and 
 difcharges a large one into the Botbnic Bay. There 
 are feveral other Lakes in Mufcovy, Finland, and 
 Norway. 
 
 10. IN China there are four remarkable Lakes 
 that receive Rivers, and difcharge others, various 
 Ways. 
 
 11. IN Erafil there is a great Lake, with ma- 
 ny Iflands in it, called Xarryes, which difcharges 
 the Rio de la Plata, and the River Miary. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 Mojl Lakes are filled with frejh Water, only a few 
 have fait or Sea-Water in them. 
 
 THOSE that are produced by Rain or Rivers, 
 or fuch as are remote from the Sea, and are fed by 
 their own proper Springs, for the moft part con- 
 tain fweet Water : but fuch as were formed by 
 the Inundation of the Sea, or are fupplied with 
 Sea- Water, by fome fubterraneous Meatus, or have 
 fait Springs at the Bottom, produce fait Water. 
 Thus the Lake of Harlem, and others in Holland, 
 are fait ; and tafte like Sea- Water. There is a fait 
 Lake alfo in Madagafcar, and another in Pern ; 
 there is one in Cuba, about two Leagues in Cir- 
 cuit, fituated not far from the Sea, which tho* 
 it receives fome frem Water Rivers, and breeds 
 Fifh and Tortoifes, yet is fait. The Lake Afpbal- 
 tites, tho* it fwallows the fweet Water of the Ri- 
 ver Jordan, yet is not fweet itfelf, but exhales fuch 
 a poifonous and {linking Vapour that the Fields 
 thereabouts, for half a Mile round, are rendered 
 barren. 
 
 VOL, I. t) PjRQ-
 
 290 fk Abjblute Part SECT. IV % 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 3T0 determine whether the Cafpian Sea be a Lake or 
 a Bay of the Ocean. 
 
 SOME will have it to be properly called a Sea ; 
 as a Sea, properly fpeaking, is an extended Part of 
 the Ocean, or is joined to it by a continued Tract 
 of Waters. But they will have it to be joined to 
 the Ocean by fome i'ubterraneous Intercourfe. Some 
 indeed of the Antients wrote, that it was joined 
 by an open Streight, to the Indian Ocean ; others, 
 to the northern Ocean-, but both were deceived, 
 as we are well afllired by Experience. Whether 
 there be fubterraneous Intercourfes we do not 
 know , only there feem to be fuch, becaufe fo many 
 and fo large Rivers exonerate themfelves into it, 
 and are conftantly pouring in their Waters, where- 
 by, in procefs of Time, the Chanel would be fil- 
 led and run over, unlefs there were fubterraneous 
 FifTures and Meatus's, thro* which it might eva- 
 cuate it's fuperfluous Waters into the Ocean (b). But 
 others think thefe Waters are diftributed among 
 the adjacent Mountains, and fupply them with 
 that vaft number of Springs which is obferved here- 
 abouts. Scaliger and others were of Opinion, that 
 this Cafpian Sea runs under Ground into the Euxine 
 Sea, but he gives no Reafon for it ; this may be 
 faid, that the Euxine Sea is continually difgorging 
 a large quantity of Water thro* the Bojphorus, 
 and fome think this is more Water than the Rivers 
 pour into it; therefore it may perhaps receive it 
 
 (3) By what means the Caf- flowing into it ; is difcufied 
 
 plan Sea (and all others) lole in the Note (k) upon Prop. xiv. 
 
 as much Water daily, as they Chap. xiii. wbicb fee. 
 receive from the many River* 
 
 from
 
 CHAP. 15. of Univerfal Geography* 291 
 from the Cafpian Sea. It feems to me to have no 
 Communication any way with the Ocean^ and 
 therefore ought rather to be called a Lake, than 
 a Sea. How it came at firft is another Queftion. 
 Some avouch that there are found feveral Moun- 
 tains of Salt in the Bottom, whereby it hath ac- 
 quired fuch a Degree of Saltnefs ; and that it is re- 
 pleniihed by the many Rivers that exonerate them- 
 felves into it. But it feems more feafible, (tho* 
 thefe Rivers may contribute to it's Repletion; that 
 this Sea hath, a great many Ages ago, been joined 
 to the Ocean, and that it's Streights, by fomc 
 means or other, were filled up and flopped, per- 
 haps by interjacent Iflands which gained upon the 
 Shores, in a manner which we mall explain here- 
 after. And very likely, by the fame Cauie, the 
 Euxine Sea may, fome time or other, become a 
 Lake ; the Bofpborus being filled up or obftrudled. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 50 make a Lake in any Place, if it le po/fible. 
 
 THIS may be done if there be a River near, 
 or a Spring upon the Place, and if the Place itfelf 
 be deprefied , tho' fmall Lakes may be made upon 
 the very tops of the Mountains. Firft the Place 
 is to be hallowed, and dug to fuch a Depth and 
 Extent as we defire, and the Sides are to be forti- 
 fy 'd with Wood- Work, if we fee occafion. Then 
 a Chanel is to be made, by which the River is to 
 be let in ; but if there be a Spring upon the fpot, 
 there is no occafion for fuch a Chanel, 
 
 U
 
 fire Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 <-,i7 Oarfvmp-'l 
 PROPOSITION X. :,jifii 
 
 70 drain a Lake. 
 
 THIS may be done two Ways ; i. If the bot- 
 tom of the Lake be a little higher^ or almofV of the 
 fame Altitude with the adjacent Places, dig a Cha- 
 nel, and let out the Water j and by throwing in 
 Heaps of Earth, together with the Heat of the 
 Sun, it will in a fhort time be left dry. 
 
 2. IF the bottom of the Lake be lower than the 
 adjacent Ground, it is to be firft furrounded with 
 a Ditch, leaving here and there fome Canals, or 
 Apertures, in it j to thefe apply Water-Engines 
 and work out the Water i then cover the Ground 
 with Dung, and fow in it fuch Seeds as are of a 
 quick Growth, viz. Muftard-feed, Coleworts, and 
 the like. The Dutch are very expert at draining 
 Lakes by this Method ; and often convert them into 
 fruitful Meadow- Ground. At this time they are 
 confulting how to drain the Lake of Harlem, and I 
 do not doubt but it will be, fome time or other, at- 
 tempted , becaufe this Lake covers much Ground 
 which by draining would be of great Ufe to the In- 
 habitants. 
 
 PROPOSITION XL 
 
 MoraJJes, or Leaches, are of two forts ; fome are 
 oozy and confift of Earth and Water mixed to- 
 gether, fo as not to bear the Footfteps of Men : 
 others are Ponds, or fcanty Colleftions of Water, 
 interfpen'd here and there with fmall Spots of Land. 
 
 THOSE of the former kind neither receive 
 nor emit Rivers, we call them Sloughs or Bogs ; 
 there are many in Holland. In Brabant there is a 
 
 large.
 
 C H A P. 1 5. of Univtrfa! Geography. 293 
 large one called Peel-marjh. There are alfo feveral 
 in Weftpbalia of both Sorts. Thofe of the later 
 kind are chiefly found at the Heads of Rivers, 
 whence fome call thefe Heads MoraJJes , as the 
 MorafTes of Tanais in Mufcovy, and of the Nile. 
 There are feveral of thefe in the Province of Savo- 
 lax in Finland, which cover vaft Tracts of Ground , 
 alfo thofe [called Enare-rejk\ in Lapland; the 
 Marfhes of Cbelours in Africa, the Morafles thro* 
 which the Euphrates runs in Chaldaa, &c. fuch as 
 thefe are alfo found in Woods and heathy Defarts, 
 and are made by the Rain-water gathered into hol- 
 low Places, whereby the Earth is foaked and moi- 
 ilened, and the Rays of the Sun are hindered from 
 drying it up, by the Leaves of the Trees and 
 the Heath. Thefe are found chiefly in Germany 
 and Mufcovj: 
 
 THE narrower fmall Lakes, like the larger Sort, 
 do fome of them both receive and emit Rivers ; 
 fome only receive, others only emit, and the reft 
 neither receive nor emit any. 
 
 THE firft fort are formed and fed, partly by 
 Springs under Ground, and partly by Rain-water 
 which ftagnates for want of a Chanel to carry it off. 
 Of this fort there are many in Mufcovy and Finland. 
 The fecond fort are generated from fmall Springs, 
 and are fed by them and Rain-water. 
 
 ARISTOTLE calls the Sea of Mceotis a 
 Lake, which is truly fo. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 Bogs contain a fulphureous, bituminous, and fat, Earth. 
 
 T H I S is apparent from the black Colour of the 
 
 Tairf that is got out of them, which eafily takes 
 
 fire, (as in Holland and other Places) by reafon 
 
 this fort of Matter is contained both in the Rain 
 
 U 3 and
 
 294 *fhi Abfolute Part SECT; IV. 
 
 and in the Ground, where thefe Lakes are fitu- 
 ated. But all Bogs have not that fort of Earth : 
 and where the Ground is hard and rocky we fel- 
 dom find any Lakes ; and therefore molt part of 
 them contain a foft fpongy and fulphureous fort 
 of Earth. ^ , v .;, 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 *T0 drain, or dry />, a Bog. 
 
 T H O* fome Bogs are of a great Depth, yet 
 no more is required than to drain them to a certain 
 level, which may be done feveral ways> i. By 
 making a Chanel to carry off the Water. 2. By 
 throwing in plenty of dry Earth, when they are al- 
 moft dried up by the Heat of the Sun. 3. By fet- 
 ting their Surfaces on Fire. 4. By turning the 
 "Water that feeds them, another way. 
 
 ^^^ . j A 1 
 
 A*u:.3. e O .-,,, e v,w.\Uv.uiV: ,: -.v.i-Ail^i. r.r^^-> .; ^ 
 Oib'io i;p!v ) ;I :r:id ^il TO;:": ;nqrrr; zi S I 
 
 CHAP.
 
 . 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Uniwr/al Geography. 295 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 Of R IV E R S in general 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 'This Propofition contains fome neceffary Definitions. 
 
 i. A RIVER is a Flux of Water continued 
 j[\ thro* a long narrow Chanel, from one part 
 of the Earth to another. The Chanel is a Cavity, 
 or hollow Place, made lower than the Banks, for 
 the Water to run in. 
 
 2. A Brook is a little River, which is neither 
 broad nor deep enough to carry a fmall Ship of 
 Burden. A Navigable River is capable of carrying 
 all forts of Ships, great and fmall ; but thefe and 
 the other fort are generally called great and fmall 
 Rivers, according as they are in bignefs. A Tor- 
 rent is a violent Flux of Water from the top of a 
 Mountain. 
 
 3. A Confluence, Concurrence, or Conflux, is a 
 Place where two Rivers meet. 
 
 4. BRANCHES of Rivers are the Brooks 
 that run into them, and mix with them ; or when 
 a River is divided and runs in two Chanels, they 
 are called it's Arms or Branches. Where the River 
 is thus divided, it is called the Place of Parting or 
 Divarication. 
 
 U 4 5- A
 
 296 ?be Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 ~5\ A Spring is the Place where running Water 
 fprings out of the Ground. A Well is where the 
 Water rifes and runs not forward, but is kept up- 
 on the fpot. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 Torrents and Brooks are fometimes generated from 
 Plenty of Rain and melted Snow. 
 
 I N the elevated or mountainous Parts of the 
 Earth, there are found many Receptacles, fmall 
 Lakes, and Ponds. And when the Rain is poured 
 into thefe, or the melted Snow, in fuch Quantity, 
 that they are not large enough to contain it, they 
 overflow and difcharge the fuperfluous Water into 
 the under-land Places. This being done every 
 Year, the Water in time makes itfelf a Chanel 
 (tho* it fometimes flows without any certain Cha- 
 nel). Thus a great many Torrents and Brooks, 
 being fed only by Rain, or Snow melted from off 
 tie Mountains, before they have run their Courfe, 
 become moderate Rivers j efpecially if they pro- 
 ceed from a long Range of Mountains , as thole in 
 the Foreland of Africa, India, Peru, Sumatra, &c. 
 And what is remarkable, fuch Torrents flow in 
 the Day-time only. 
 
 PROPOSITION III, 
 t lo q~ "> ' . 
 
 Mo SI Rivers have their Rife from Springs. 
 
 THE great as well as the middle fized Rivers, 
 proceed either from a Confluence or Collection of 
 Brooks and Rivulets, or flow from Lakes and Mo- 
 rafles. But no River of confiderable Magnitude 
 (fuch as the Elbe, the Rhine ^ 8fc.) flows from one 
 Spring or one Lake, but is augmented by the ac-, 
 z cefijon
 
 CHAP. 16. ofUnherfal Geography. 297 
 
 ceffion of others, flowing from other Fountains and 
 Lakes. The Wolga or Rba receives above two 
 hundred Rivers and Brooks, before it exonerates 
 itfelf into the Cafpian Sea ; and the Danube receives 
 no lefs, before it enters the Euxine Sea. 
 
 AND tho* Pliny and Cardan tell us, that no Ri- 
 vers flow into the Nik, yet Experience mews the 
 contrary ; as they that have travelled into Abyf- 
 finia aflure us. 
 
 THIS Proportion may be proved by innume- 
 rable Examples. 
 
 THE Springs of Rivers are fome of them found 
 on the tops of Mountains, and fome on the Planes ; 
 and thofe Rivers that proceed from Lakes, have 
 their Fountains (as was faid in the laft Chapter) at 
 the bottom, or in the Chanel, of thofe Lakes that 
 produce them, which like Citterns contain the effu- 
 lion of Water, 'till in a greater Quantity it be 
 poured into it's proper Chanel. Hence fome Foun- 
 tains are covered with Earth or Water, and others 
 are open. 
 
 THE Springs of the Rivulets which begin the 
 Tanais and the Elbe, are on Planes, to which others 
 are afterwards joined. We might here add feveral 
 Examples, but thefe are fufficient. 
 
 C A RD AN is of Opinion, that thefe Fountains 
 do not flow immediately from the Plane itfelf, but 
 are conveyed by fubterraneous Aqueducts from the 
 adjacent Mountains , however, I believe they firft 
 make a Lake or a Morafs j for the Tanais does not 
 feem to flow immediately from a Spring, but from 
 a Morafs or mallow Lake. 
 
 THE Springs of moft Rivers are upon Moun- 
 tains, as thofe of the Rhine, the Po 9 the Danube, 
 the Niger, &c. 
 
 SEVERAL flow from Lakes, as the Nile, 
 the Wolga, and the great River of St Lawrence in. 
 Canada* 
 
 A great
 
 298 fte Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 A great River may happen to flow from one 
 Spring, if the Spring itfelf be fituated high (as moft 
 are) and a great part of the Chanel low, or but a 
 little higher than it's mouth ; fo that the Water 
 flowing with a fwift Courfe at firft, and by degrees 
 flower, is increafed in the Chanel and becomes a 
 large River, becaufe itdifchargesnot fo much Wa- 
 ter at it's mouth, as it received from it's Spring 
 when it firft began to flow. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 Rivers are much augmented by frequent Rains or melted 
 Snow, and at particular Times of the Year. 
 
 I N the Country of Peru and Chili there are fome 
 Rivers fo fmall, that they do not flow in the Night- 
 time, but only in the Day \ becaufe they are fed 
 by the Snow upon the Mountains of the Andes, 
 which is then melted by die Heat of the Sun. 
 There are alfo feveral Rivers upon both fides of 
 the extream Parts of Africa-) as in Congo, Angola, 
 &c. which are greater by Day than by Night. The 
 like are found both in Malabar and Cormandel in 
 India. The Rivers alfo in thefe Places are almoft 
 dried up in Summer, but fwell and overflow their 
 Banks in Winter, or the wet Seafons. Thus the 
 Wolga in May and June is filled with Water, and o- 
 verflowsit's Shelves and Iflands , which at any other 
 time of the Year is fo fhallow, that it fcarcely af- 
 fords a Pafiage for loaded Ships. For the Snows 
 being melted at this time of the Year, on the 
 Mountains, from whence the Rivulets (being more 
 than an hundred) flow into the Wolga, caufe this 
 Inundation. The Nile, the Ganges, the Indus, &c. 
 s^re fo much fwelled with Rain, or melted Snow, 
 that, in like manner, they overflow their Banks. 
 But thefe Deluges happen at divers times of the 
 
 Year,
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUmverfal Geography. 299 
 
 Year, becaufe they proceed from various Caufes 
 and different Places. Thofe that are fwelled with 
 Rains, are higheft in Winter j becaufe thefe are 
 then more frequent than at other times of the 
 Year; but if they proceed from Snow, which in 
 fome Places is melted in the Spring, in others in 
 Summer, or between both ; die Deluges of the 
 Rivers happen accordingly, viz. in the Spring, 
 Summer, &V. or at the time when the Snow is mel- 
 ted upon the Banks of the Rivulets that form thefe 
 Rivers. Moreover fome Rivers, efpecially the 
 large ones, flow from Places at a great Diftance, 
 where it is Summer at the fame time it is Winter 
 in the Places where they pafs through ; and for 
 this Caufe they overflow their Banks at different 
 times of the Year. But moft of them caufe an 
 Inundation in the Spring, becaufe the Snow is then 
 melted in moft Places. We mail explain the 
 Caufe of their different Properties in the particular 
 Defcription of each River. 
 
 W E fhall alfo in the next Chapter treat of that 
 remarkable Spring in Japan, which only flows for 
 two Hours every Day. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 To explain the Origin of Springs (a). 
 
 THIS is eafier to conceive than when it is 
 propofed thus j From whence are Rivers generated ? 
 
 For 
 
 (a] Since by "BrHalhfs Cal- be no hard matter, feeing there 
 
 culation it appears, that the Va- is fuch an overplus of Water, to 
 
 pours which are drawn up from find enough from thence tofup- 
 
 the Sea exceed almoft three ply Fountains, according to the 
 
 times the Quantity of Water dif- Opinion of the fame learned 
 
 charged into it by Rivers, [as Gentleman. 
 
 teas jbevj n in tht Note (k) upon For thefe Vapours being car- 
 
 Prep, xiv. Chap, xiii.] it will ricd every way by theWind, ne- 
 
 ceflarily
 
 300 ffa Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 For when we fee fuch great Rivers as the Rhine^ the 
 Elbe, &c. we more admire whence they proceed 
 
 becaufe 
 
 ceflarily meet with the high 
 jfcidges of Mountains that are dif- 
 perfed over various Trafts of the 
 Earth: each of which far fur- 
 pafles the ufual Height to which 
 the Aqueous Vapours of them- 
 felves afcend, and on the Tops 
 of which the Air is fo cold, and 
 rarified, as to retain but a fmall 
 part of thofe Vapours that fhall 
 be brought thither by theWinds. 
 The Vapours meeting with thefe 
 Ridges of Mountains are there 
 compelled by the Stream of the 
 Air to mount up with it to their 
 Tops, where meeting with more 
 rarified Air, they naturally fall 
 down in Drops, pervading the 
 Crannies and FifTures of the 
 _ Earth, and gleeting into the Ca- 
 " verns of the Hills, the Water 
 thereof gathers into the Bafons 
 of Stone, or Clay, it finds, which 
 being once filled, all the over- 
 plus of Water runs over, and, 
 where it can find a Paflage, 
 breaks out at the Sides of the 
 Hills, and forms Fountains ; 
 many of thefe, running down 
 the Vallies, or Guts, between 
 the Ridges of the Hills, and 
 coming to unite, from Rivulets 
 or Brooks ; many of thefe again 
 being united into one common 
 Chanel, form vaft large Rivers, 
 as the Rhine, or the Danube. 
 
 This Theory of the Caufe of 
 Springs the fame excellent Per- 
 fbn proves by Experience. For 
 he fays, that when he was in 
 the Ifland of St Helena, taking 
 Agronomical Obfervations in 
 the Night-Time, on the Top of 
 
 the Hills about 800 Yards above 
 the Sea, he found fuch a Con- 
 denfation of the Vapours, that 
 in 7 or 8 Min. Time, tho' there 
 was a clear Sky, the Glafles of 
 theTelefcopes he ufed were co- 
 vered with little Drops, and the 
 Paper on which he wrote his 
 Obfervationswouldimmediateiy 
 be fo wet with the Dew that it 
 would not bear Ink. 
 
 This Hypothefis he thinks 
 more reafonable than that of 
 thofe who derive all Springs 
 from the Rain- Waters, which 
 yet are perpetual and without 
 Diminution, even when no 
 Rain falls for a ?ong Space of 
 Time: Or than that which de- 
 rives them from a Filtration or 
 Percolation of the Sea Waters, 
 thro' certain imaginary Tubes 
 or Pafiages within the Earth, 
 wherein they lofe their Saltnefs. 
 This Opinion labours under this 
 principal Abfurdity, that the 
 greateft Rivers have their moft 
 copious Fountains fartheft from 
 the Sea, and where fo great 
 quantities of frefh Water cannot 
 reafpnably be derived any other 
 way than in Vapour. See Pbilof. 
 Trtnf. N 192. Pag. 468. 
 
 Notwithftanding it is very 
 probable that all Fountains have 
 not the fame Origin ; but that 
 fome proceed from Rain penetra- 
 ting the Fiflures of the Earth, and 
 flowly gleeting thro' the Inter - 
 flices to the Orifices of Springs; 
 and. others, efpecially thofe that 
 are fait, and placed near the Sea 
 Shore, take their Rife from the
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Univerfat Geography. 301 
 becaufe of the Quantity of their Water, than when 
 we look upon fmall Brooks. But we have fliewed 
 in the two laft Propofitions, that Rivers proceed 
 partly from Rain and melted Snow, and partly 
 from Lakes and Concurrences of Brooks and Rivu- 
 lets j and therefore we do not enquire fo much here 
 about the Sources of Rivers, as about the Origin 
 and Permanency of Springs. 
 
 THE Opinions of Naturalifts and Geographers 
 are various about this Matter. 
 
 i . SOME think that all Rivers and Springs re- 
 ceive their Water from Rain, or melted Snow ; and 
 this they bring for a Reafon, that Rain and melted 
 Snow fometimes augment Rivers to fuch a degree, 
 that they overflow their Banks, and lay whole 
 Countries under Water : But in the Summer Sea- 
 fon, when no Rain has fallen for a long Time, 
 
 Sea Water percolating thro' the 
 Sands; but the greatelt part of 
 Fountains, efpecially fuch as 
 break from the fides of high 
 Hills, derive their Waters from 
 Vapours, as was faid above. 
 
 The learned DrWoodtoard, in 
 his Natural Hiftory of the Earth, 
 explains the Origin of Fountains 
 otherwise. He imagines, that 
 there is a great A by fs, or Promp- 
 tuary, of Waters, inclofed in the 
 Bowels of theEarth, which, com- 
 municating with that of the 
 Ocean, is continually exhaled 
 into Vapours, by the Force of 
 a fubterraneous Heat which he 
 proves by many Arguments to 
 be in the interior Parts of the 
 Earth ; and that as thefe make 
 their way upwards, they pervade 
 the Fiffures, and Intervals of 
 the Strata of the Earth, per- 
 meating alfo the very Interftices 
 of the Par tides of Sand, Earth and 
 
 Stone, 'till they come near the 
 Superficies of the Earth, where 
 they are condenfed with cold, 
 and come together by Drops, 
 which, being collected, break 
 out at fome Aperture or other, 
 and form Fountains. But when 
 the Heat above the Superficies 
 of the Earth, is as intenfe as that 
 in the interior Parts thereof, 
 it takes the rifing Vapour, where 
 it penetrates the Superficies of 
 the Earth, and bears it up into 
 the Air, or at leaft diminishes 
 greatly. 
 
 They who would fee thisHy- 
 pothefis more accurately explain- 
 ed, let them confult the learned 
 Authorin his Book : It isenough 
 for us only to mention it, ac- 
 counting Dr Halley's Theory 
 much more clear, and built up- 
 on a better Foundation. 
 
 the
 
 302 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 the great Rivers grow left, and the fmall ones are 
 moftly dried up, becaufe the Chanels of the later 
 are too fhallow to contain any large quantity of 
 Water ; but the former, whofe Chanels are deep, 
 do not ceafe running, nor are dried up, becaufe 
 they have collected fo much Water from the for- 
 mer Rain and melted Snow, that it cannot all be 
 exhaled into Vapours, except it be by a lafting and 
 conftant Heat. 2. Becaufe there are the feweft 
 Rivers where it feldom raineth, as in the inland 
 Parts of Africa there are but few Springs. 
 
 BUT thefe Allegations do not folve the Pro- 
 pofition, which doth not enquire about the Ori- 
 gin of Rivers, but from whence the Water of 
 Springs proceeds , therefore they that take this to 
 be a Solution do not underftand the Senfe of the 
 Propofition, as we obferved before. And even the 
 Property they propofe to prove it by is not uni- 
 verfal , for there are Rivers found in Places where 
 they have feldom any Rain and no Snow, tho* 
 what they fay is true concerning the Rivers in E- 
 gypt and Peru. Befide, Rain- Water doth not pe- 
 netrate into the Ground beyond the depth often 
 Foot ; whereas feveral Fountains fpring from a 
 greater Depth. 
 
 2. OTHERS think, that we are not to en- 
 quire about the Origin of the Water of Springs, 
 fmce it is an Element as well as the Earth, Air, and 
 Fire, whole Origins are not enquired into. This is 
 Seneca's way of arguing. But thefe Authors cut the 
 Gordian-knot when they cannot untie it ; for we 
 do not difpute about the Principles of Water, but 
 enquire how it flows to the Heads of Rivers, ra- 
 ther than to any other Place. Moreover, the 
 Earth is not a Fluid as Water is , and to fay, that 
 the Air and Fire are not enquired into, is falfe. 
 
 3. THE Peripatetics follow the Opinion of 
 their Matter Arijtotk* delivered in Chapter xi. 
 
 2 Book
 
 C H A P. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 3 03 
 Book i. de Meteor, where he endeavours to prove, 
 that the Water of Springs is generated from Air 
 contained in the Bowels of the Earth. Thefe are 
 his Reafons ; i . The Air, furrounding the Earth, 
 is turned into Water, viz. into Rain ; and there- 
 fore fmce there is alfo Air in the Bowels of the 
 Earth, and the fame Caufe to condenfe it, viz. 
 Cold, it is contrary to Reafon to think that Water 
 is not produced from Air there. 2. Experience 
 teaches us, that great Drops gather from fmall 
 ones under Ground, and therefore the Heads of 
 Rivers are only a great many Springs gathered 
 into one Place. For this Reafon, they that make 
 Aqueducts, ufe to draw the Water thro' narrow 
 Trenches and Pipes, which diftils, as it were, 
 from the moift Earth, Drop by Drop. 3. Be- 
 caufe moft Fountains, efpecially of great Rivers, 
 are found on mountainous Pkces, and but few 
 upon Planes, it is a Sign that their Water pro- 
 ceeds from condenfed Air or Vapours, which na- 
 turally tend towards high Places ; and Mountains 
 are Sponges, as it were, lying upon the Planes. 
 Thefe are Ariftotlfs Reafons, to which this follow- 
 ing may be added of no lefs Force than the reft, 
 viz. that when the Air is clouded and filled with 
 Vapours, acid Fountains tafte fweeter, which is a 
 Sign they are augmented by the Air. 
 
 4. C A R D A N and others are of Opinion, that 
 the Water of Fountains proceeds from little Drains 
 or Guts collecting the condenfed watery Vapours 
 both above and under Ground ; but thefe feldom 
 become Rivers, without being increafed with Rain 
 and melted Snow. His Reafons are thefe -, i . If 
 you obferve the Mountains in the Morning you 
 will find them full of Moiflure. 2. Rivers in the 
 Morning are found to fwell, and the more the 
 nearer they are to their Springs. 
 
 BUT
 
 304 f&e Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 BUT the perpetual bubbling and fpringing 
 up of the Water from Fountains, without any 
 intermifiion, does not feem to be produced by 
 fo weak and inconftant a Caufe. Neither is there 
 much Difference between Ariftotlfs Opinion and 
 this of Cardan ; only Ariftotle fays, Fountains pro- 
 ceed from Air condenfed, and Cardan, from Va- 
 pours ; and there is but little Difference between 
 Air and Vapours. 
 
 5. SOME of the Antients were of Opinion, 
 that Rain-Water is hoarded up in the internal 
 Caverns of the Earth, from whence it iffues, as 
 out of a great Promptuary, and that all Rivers 
 are fupplied from one common Fund, or fpring one 
 from another , alfo that no Water is difperfed over 
 the Earth but fuch as is collected in the Winter 
 Seafon, and referved in thefe Receptacles, to be 
 poured in due Time into innumerable Rivers. 
 For this Caufe, fay they, Rivers are greater in 
 Winter than in Summer ; and fome are peren- 
 nial, others not. Their Reafbns are the fame 
 with thofe given for the firft Hypothefis. But 
 Ariftotle and his followers reject this Opinion, be- 
 caufe there is more Water poured out of the 
 Mouth of one River in a Year, than the whole 
 Bulk of the terraqueous Globe. 
 
 6. M A N Y of the modern Philofophers, with 
 the Antients, fuppofe the Earth to fuck in as much 
 Water as it exonerates into the Sea, thro* the 
 Mouths of Rivers ; and that the Sea- Water, by 
 draining thro* the hidden Receffes of the Earth, 
 and by being drained thro' the Mazes and Fifiures, 
 and thro* the Interfaces of the Sand and Gravel, 
 lofeth it's Saltnefs, and becomes pure Water. 
 
 I am alfo of this Opinion, and think it moft 
 reafonable, but do not exclude the Caufes repea- 
 ted in the firft and third Place. The Reafons for 
 it are: 
 
 i. BECAUSE
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Unrocrfal Geography. 305 
 
 1. BECAUSE more than a thoufand Rivers 
 exonerate themfelves into the Sea, and the larger 
 fort produce fuch quantities of Water, that what 
 each of them pours in a Year's Time into the 
 Sea, exceeds the Bulk of the whole Earth ; as 
 what the IVolga pours into the Cajpian Sea, and 
 others. So that it is impoffible but that the Water 
 fhould be refunded out of the Sea into the Earth, 
 and carried to the Heads of Rivers ; elfe we could 
 not conceive why the Sea is not increafed to an 
 immenfe Bulk, or why Springs do not ceafe to 
 emit Water. Neither can any one object that 
 there is as much Water exhaled from the Sea in 
 Vapours, as it receives from the Rivers ; for Rain 
 alone returns thefe Vapours, and if the Water of 
 Rivers were continually turned into Vapours, it 
 would produce more than thofe exhaled from the 
 Sea. 
 
 2. THIS Opinion is alfo thus proved, becaufe 
 that Springs near the Ocean are fait or brackifh, 
 and the nearer they are the Sea, the more they 
 are fated with Salt ; as on the Shore of Africa^ 
 and in India, chiefly on the Shore of Cormandel, 
 where no Vines grow, and all their Wells tafle 
 fait. Near the Town of Suez, at the end of the Red 
 Sea, their Springs are all fait and bitter ; and even 
 the Water which is fetched two German Miles from 
 the Shore, taftes a little brackifh. Alfo in feveral 
 fmall I Hands there are no frefh Water Springs, 
 but all fait ftho' fomething lefs fated than the 
 Ocean) as in the Ifland of St Vincent , and others. 
 In the low Countries of Peru, that border upon the 
 Ocean, their Lakes are falteft, becaufe of the 
 Vicinity of the Sea. And in the maritime Parts 
 of fome eaftern Countries their Coco-nuts are ob- 
 ferved to tafle brackifh. Not to mention the 
 Salt Springs that are found in inland Countries, 
 as in Lor rain, Lumnburg^ &c. 
 
 VOL. I. X 3, BECAUSE
 
 306 *Tbe Abfolute Part' SECT. IV". 
 
 3. BECAUSE it is certain, that the Sea fends 
 it's Water thro* fubterraneous Conduits to the 
 fait Springs of Lunenburg, Hall, &c. whofe Fee- 
 ders are obferved to contain perfect Sea- Water 
 under Ground. 
 
 4. BECAUSE if we dig to a great Depth, 
 as is often done in Mines, we fhall find plenty 
 of Water, which can neither proceed from Rain 
 nor Air. 
 
 BUT by what means the Water is carried 
 from the Sea to the Fountain- Heads, and how, in 
 the Pafiage, it becomes fweet, we have already 
 explained , and mewed that the Bottom of the Sea 
 not being in every Place rocky, but here and 
 there fandy, gravelly, and oozy, imbibes the Sea- 
 Water, and letteth it into the Earth (after the 
 fame manner as when we throw Water upon Sand, 
 Beans, Peas, Wheat, or other forts of Grain) thro' 
 whofe Interftices it is brought by degrees to a 
 great Diftance from the Sea, where at length the 
 fmall Drops come together, efpecially in ftreight 
 Places, as are Mountains, &c. and having found an 
 Aqueduct they difcharge themfelves at a Spring. But 
 if the Cavity, where they are collected, be cover- 
 ed and bound up with the Earth, then the Wa- 
 ter will take another Courfe, where it can with 
 greateft Eafe infinuate itfelf, and fpring up at an 
 Aperture in another Place ; which is not the real 
 Fountain, but a Conveyance of the fubterraneous 
 River to a Place above Ground. And if the Water 
 can find no Way out of the Receptacle, and hath 
 not force enough to make itfelf one, it is not 
 increafed, but the fubfequent Particles of Water 
 are turned another Way. For it is the nature of 
 all Liquids and Fluids, that their Parts or Par- 
 ticles flow towards that Place where the Flux 
 is made. Thus if you fill a Vefiel with Water 
 'till it rife above the- Brim, tho' all the raifed Parts 
 j&i/A-* ... - i -- -.'! of
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Uni'uerfal Geography. 307 
 of the Water equally prefs the Brim, and have 
 an equal Tendency and Power to run over at the 
 next Side, yet if on one Side of the VefTel any 
 part of the incumbent Water be made to flow, 
 the reft will forfake their refpeclive Sides, and move 
 (as if they were drawn) towards that Side where 
 the Flux is begun (the Caufe of which it belongs 
 to Pbyfics to explain) (). Or if you put one end 
 of a Piece of Bread into Water or Wine, you 
 will fee the Water move upwards arid diffufe it- 
 felf thro' the Part above Water. Moreover the 
 Sea eafily pervades the FifTures of the Earth, and 
 therefore with the fame eafe may glide out of 
 them i except we had rather afcribe this to Eva- 
 poration, whereby the Particles are carried up- 
 wards, and condenfed into Drops, when they meet 
 with narrow Places. 
 
 BUT becaufe there are fome Arguments, wliich 
 may feem to render this Opinion lefs probable, we 
 will difcufs them here, left they mould feem like 
 Blots upon our Hypothefis. 
 
 1 . S P R I N G- Heads are more elevated than the 
 Superficies of the Sea, and for the moft part are 
 feated in mountainous Places ; therefore it is con- 
 trary to the Nature of Water to move from the 
 Sea up to thefe Places -, for Water always runs 
 downwards, as is manifeft from Rivers and Drains. 
 
 2. THO' the Bottom of the Sea be fandy, 
 gravelly, and fpongy, fo that the Water may eafi- 
 ly pervade the Interftices ; yet for what Reafon 
 fhould it not rather moiften the fubjacent Parts of 
 the Earth, than afcend upwards, and glide to die 
 Duds of Fountains, when the Earth near the Sur- 
 
 (b} We gather from Sir Jfaac the Parts of one another; Thns 
 
 Newton's Principles, that it is Water attra&eth Water, ar.i 
 
 the Nature of Fluids (an3 of all the Particles that firft begin to 
 
 the Matter in the Univerfe) mu- flow, draw the next Particles to 
 
 tually to attract '.heunfelves, and them, and thefe the^iext, &( 
 
 X 2 face
 
 308 fhe Abfohite Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 face is commonly rocky and ftoney, as in die 
 Mountains of the Ifland of St Helena? 
 
 3 . W E have no Reafon afiigned why the Wa- 
 ter as k flows from the Sea to remote Foun- 
 tains, does not break out in fome intermediate 
 Place. And we are as much in the dark, why 
 there is none or very little Water found in deep 
 Mines, as we are told by Tburnbeufertts. 
 
 4. S P R ING Water muft be fait, if it proceed 
 from the Sea. 
 
 THESE are the chief Arguments which feem 
 to invalidate our propofed Hypcthefis ; for I pals 
 by thofe of lefs moment alledged by others, as 
 that die Sea cannot fupply fo many Rivers : and 
 then again, that Rivers would never leiTen, if they 
 proceed from whence we fay they do. Thefe two 
 are foon anfwered ; for firft, the Sea receives the 
 Water it emits into Fountains, from the Rivers j 
 und the other, as we obferved before, is not the 
 Queftion, for we are not arguing, that all the Wa- 
 ter of Rivers proceeds from die Sea, but only the 
 Water of Fountains, which of diemfelves make 
 Rivers, as we faid before -, where we alfo afTerted, 
 that Fountains are augmented by Rain and Dew, 
 which fink down into the Earth and either foke and 
 moiften it, or are drawn towards the Fountain- 
 heads by the Efflux of the Water, as we mewed 
 by other Examples. Let us therefore return to ex- 
 amine the other four Arguments which feem to be 
 of fome Weight. 
 
 THE firft is thought to be the ftrongeft, as 
 being taken from Experience, and therefore the 
 Learned have contrived feveral Anfwers to it. 
 They come off eafieft who affert that the Ocean is 
 higher than the Earth, and confequently higher 
 than the Fountain-heads ; wherefore fay they, 
 Water t naturally flows to the Fountains, becaufe 
 they ar% of a lefs Altitude than the Ocean. Olea- 
 i - . riut
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 300 
 rius alfo in his Defcripdon of his Travels into Per- 
 fia relates, that having afcended one of the Moun- 
 tains which bordereth upon the Cafpian Sea, he tried 
 the Altitude of it above the Superficies of that Sea 
 with an Aftrolabe (or rather a Surveying Inftrument) 
 and found none j but oblerved, that the extream 
 parts of the Sea feemed to be in the fame horizontal 
 Line, or even a little elevated above it ; and there- 
 fore the bulging of the Sea made it as high, or 
 even a little higher, than the top of the Moun- 
 tain, vhere he took the Obfervation. But this So- 
 lution notwithftanding cannot be admitted, becaufe 
 we proved in Chap. xiii. that the Superficies of the 
 Ocean is not higher than the Land, or than Moun- 
 tains, but rather lower, as appears alfo from fre- 
 quent Obfervations made by expert Mathemati- 
 cians. As to Olearius's Obfervation, it is not to be 
 infifted upon here ; for the Cafpian Sea is not higher 
 than it's Shores, much lefs than the Mountains, 
 as appears from the many Rivers that exonerate 
 themlelves into it. We muft therefore fappofe, 
 that Refraclion obftruded Olearius's Obfervation, 
 and made the Surface of the Sea appear higher 
 than it really is ; and perhaps the fluctuating of the 
 Waves might increafe the Caufe, or the Mountain 
 which he afcended was of no greaj Height. 
 
 THE Weaknefs therefore of this Solution being 
 expofed, others propofe this ; that the natural Place, 
 of the Waters is about the Earth, and therefore they 
 ought to furround or cover it, becaufe they are 
 lighter -, and becaufe they are hindered from pof- 
 fefilng their natural Place by the Mountains and 
 Hills, and the Elevation of the inland Places, that 
 part of the Ocean which mould be where the Moun- 
 tains and high Parts are, being thruft out of it's 
 natural Place, violently preffes the Water under- 
 neath it, which tho* it be in it's natural Pofture, 
 yet being fqueezed and prefied towards the bottom,. 
 X 3 by
 
 310 The AbfoJute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 by the fuperincumbent Water, it is forced to give 
 way, and rinding no place to flow to, it retires to- 
 wards the Sides, and pervades the Foundations of 
 the Mountains , where being collected, as in a Ci- 
 item, it is ftili urged forwards towards the tops of 
 the Mountains by the incumbent Water of the O- 
 Cean. As we may obferve in a Tankard that has 
 a Pipe on the fide (reaching to the very bottom) 
 made to pour Wine thro' into Glailes ; if, I fay," 
 we drop a Stone into fuch a Veffel, whether it be 
 full or half full of Liquors it will fpout out at the 
 Orifice of the Pipe. This is Scaliger's Subtility, but 
 it is too grofs to pafs. For the Water is not thus 
 forced towards the tops of the Mountains, fince 
 Experience mews us the contrary in Mines ; and if 
 it were fo, the Water of all Springs would be fait , 
 befides, it is faife to fay that the Water is not 
 in it's natural Place, and therefore preffes upon the 
 Water underneath, for this is alfumed without 
 Proof, and is contrary to Experience. Water does 
 not prefs upon the Parts below, unlefs it's Surface 
 be of an unequal Altitude, but the Surface of the 
 Ocean is fpherical and confequently at Reft. More- 
 over, if the Waters were moved by any Prefiure, 
 it would be towards -the Shores, where the Paffage 
 is more open than the dmall Fiffures of the Earth. 
 And tho' there be great outlets at the bottom of -the 
 Sea, for the Water to --flow through, yet fmce it is 
 fait, it cannot makefreih -water Fountains. I think 
 the true Anfwer to this Argument is .not far to 
 fetch, if, we conlider how Water is conveyed to 
 Fountains, not by -any -Chanel or Pipefrom the bot- 
 tom of the Sea, 4>r*he Root of the Mountain (by 
 which means it would ftill keep it's Saknefs), but 
 by a continual diftilling, gleeting, and ftraining of 
 the watery Particles thro* the terreftrial Matter, till 
 they find a 'Receptacle fit to celled and condenfe them 
 into Drops, where being continually fucceeded -by 
 
 others,
 
 C H A P. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. j i j; 
 
 others, they have recourfe to fome Conveyance, 
 and through it break forth at a Fountain. And we 
 obferve this very thing in Mines dug to a vaft 
 Depth, how that Water on every Side is continu- 
 ally dropping, and collecting itfelf into fmall Guts, 
 which they call Veins of Water ; and if feveral 
 iiich Guts or Runnels as thefe concur in one Re- 
 ceptacle, they form a Fountain, as they who make 
 Prains, to bring Water into Wells, very well 
 know. For in moft Draw- Wells the Water is col- 
 lected from the dropping of the Earth, round 
 about into the bottom of the Well ; and they that 
 make Aqueducts dig fmall Furrows in Gutters 
 to colled: the Waters, and then convey it in a 
 Jarge one to the intended Place. If it be objected, 
 that many Fountains are obferved to fpring up a- 
 mong Rocks, where it is likely the watery Par- 
 ticles can fcarce be admitted , I anfwer, That this 
 confirms pur Opinion ; for thefe Rocks are not 
 continued to the foot of the Mountain (upon which 
 fuch Springs are found) but only cover the Sur- 
 face to a fmall Depth, and the Earth is lighter 
 and lefs rocky within, or at leaft fit to give 
 Admiffion to the Water, which, when it comes to 
 the Strata of the Stones, can penerate no farther, 
 but is there impeded and collected into Drops, ancj 
 breaks out into a Fountain among the Rocks, if it 
 can find any Aperture. Moreover, the rocky 
 Mountains in the Ifland of St Helena, and in moft 
 other lilands, are not within fo denfe and obdurate, 
 .as appears from the Cinders, Afhes, and fulphu- 
 reous Earth ; which mews that thefe Mountains 
 fome time or other burnt or fmoaked. And to 
 this we may add, that the Fountain is not always 
 in the Place where the Water breaks out, which is 
 conveyed very often from a higher Place, by a Cha- 
 .-nel under Ground, and this caufes it to break forth 
 .with greater Violence, as is very often obferved. 
 X 4 We
 
 3 12 fbe Abfohite Part SECT. IV. 
 
 We may be further convinced of the Truth of 
 theie Things, by confidering that Fire will tend 
 downwards thro* a Continuation of Matter, tho* 
 of it's own Nature, when it is free from Matter, 
 jt tends upwards, Thus if you put one End of a 
 Bar of Iron into the Fire, it will penetrate thro* 
 the whole, and heat the other End, tho' it be 
 turned downwards. And this is fufficient to con- 
 vince any one of the Invalidity of the firft Ar- 
 gument. 
 
 TO the Second we anfwer, That the Reafon 
 why the Sea- Water doth not penetrate and fink 
 into the Earth towards the Center, fo much as 
 into the Mountains, is, becaufe the Earth there 
 is denfer, and full of Metals, as we find by Ex- 
 perience , but where it is not fo obdurate, the Wa- 
 ter glides in, and therefore if there are Receptacles 
 under the bottom of the Sea, we do not deny 
 but that there may be fome frefh and fait Water 
 Lakes there. But becaufe there are few fuch Re- 
 ceptacles, and the Earth every where is denfe and 
 metalline, under the bottom of the Sea, it cannot 
 constantly imbibe Water ; but when it is faturated 
 it receives no more, and then the overplus Water 
 diitils towards the higher Places. And the Sea 
 coriftantly changing it's Altitude, and fluctuating 
 backwards and forwards, may contribute much to 
 elevate the Water ; for where it is higher than 
 ordinary, it muft certainly prefs the Water into 
 the Earth, and drive it to the Fountain- Heads. 
 And fmce the Surface of the Ocean in every Place 
 is conftantly agitated, and made higher and lower, 
 not only by Storms, but alfo by the Tides, there- 
 fore fuch a Preflure as this muft happen every 
 Day. But I queflion whether this can do much. 
 
 T O the third Argument we fay, That this is 
 owing to the Difpofition or Situation of the Strata. 
 of the Earth, or of the Earth itfelf, and that it is 
 
 Che
 
 C H A P . 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 3 1 3 
 
 the nature of all Fluids to gather to a Head, where 
 there is a Flux. I think there is no need of faying 
 any more to this. 
 
 BUT the fourth is not fo eafily anfwered, for 
 we do not perceive Salt to be feparated from Sea- 
 Water only by Percolation or Straining. Befide, 
 there are two kinds of Salt in Water (which the 
 Ariftotelians did not confider) the one of which is 
 very well named, by Chymifts, fixed, and the 
 other volatile. The fixed Salts may indeed, by 
 continual {training, or boiling, or diftilling of the 
 Sea- Water, be feparated from it; but the vola- 
 tile Salt is fo full of Spirit, that it flies up with the 
 Water, and cannot be feparated from it, neither 
 by frequent Diftillations nor any other Art hither- 
 to ufed. Therefore it is very difficult to mew how 
 this volatile Spirit of Salt is feparated from the Sea- 
 Water, in it's Paflage from the Ocean to Fountain- 
 Heads. The following Accounts will ferve our 
 Turn. i. Tho* we have not found out the Art of fepa- 
 rating the volatile Spirit of Salt from Sea- Water, yet 
 we cannot deny but that it may be done, fince we fee 
 it feparated by Nature, when it rains frefh Showers 
 in the main Ocean, tho* they proceed from Va- 
 pours exhaled from the Sea. 2. The Particles of 
 fait Water which pervade the FifTures of the 
 Earth, before they come to their Fountain, are 
 mixed with other frefh Water, which proceeds 
 from Rain and Vapours condenfed there, whereby 
 the fmall Degree of volatile Salt that remains in 
 them is rendered infenfible. 3. It is not true that 
 all Fountains are entirely deprived of Saltnefs, for 
 there are fome fait Springs, as we faid before, a- 
 bout two Miles from Suez, and in feveral other 
 Places not fo far from the Sea. Therefore to fe- 
 parate the volatik Salt from the Water, a long 
 Tranfcolation, and a gentle Evaporation is requir- 
 $d, and thus it is to be feparated by Art j and 
 
 thus
 
 314 -The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 thus alfo is Rain- Water generated and made frelh ; 
 tho' fometiines faltifh Showers are pbferved to fall 
 into the Sea. 
 
 THE Water of Springs therefore proceeds part- 
 ly from the Sea, or fubterraneous Water, and partly 
 from Rain and Dew that moiftens the Earth. But 
 the Water of Rivers proceeds partly from Springs, 
 tnd partly from Rain and Snow. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Some Rivers in the middle of their Courfe, hide them" 
 /elves under Ground, and rife up in another Place % 
 as if they were new Rivers. 
 
 :\ :rf lifts iff :,- v.mv# yri 
 
 THE moil famous are : 
 
 1 . THE Niger, a River in Africa, which fome 
 antient Cofmographers would have to proceed 
 from the Nile, by a fubterraneous Chanel, becaufe 
 it overflows it's Banks at the fame Time of the 
 Year, and after the fame manner that the Nile 
 does : and they could not mew a better Caufe for 
 it's Inundation. This River meeting whh the 
 Mountains of Nubia, hideth itfelf under them, and 
 emerges again on the Weft Side of the Moun- 
 tains (<:). 
 
 2. THE Tigris in Mefopotamia, after it has 
 palTed the Lake Arethufa, meets with Mount Tau- 
 rus, and plunges .itfelf into a ; Qrotto, and flows 
 out at .the ot-her .Side of the Mountain ; alfo after 
 
 (c) This River hides itfelf no taken for the upper Part of the 
 
 where under Ground that we Nile] meeting with the Moun- 
 
 fcnow of; tho' perhaps we are tains of Nimeatnay, is faid to 
 
 not.certain whether.it do or no, divide .itfelf into fevejalftreams, 
 
 becaufe no European has traced and immerge, under them, and 
 
 jit to it's Fountain : Only the to emerge again on the North 
 
 Zeebe, a large Branch of it, fide of the Mountains. But I do 
 
 fwhjich proceeds from the Lake not write this as a Certainty. 
 Zaire, and was fom.e time fmce 
 af/tt it
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 315 
 it has run thro* the Lake fofpia it again immerges, 
 and being carried under Ground about fix German 
 Miles, it breaks out again. Our modern Maps 
 feldom exhibit fuch Receptacles. 
 
 3. ARISTOTLE (in Book i. Chap. xi. Meteor.) 
 writes, that there were feveral fuch Brooks in the 
 Peloponnejus about Arcadia ; fome of which are 
 mentioned by the Poets. The two following, viz. 
 Lycus and Erafmus, are excellently defcribed by 
 Ovid in the following Verfes. 
 
 So Lycus Jwallowfd by the yawning Earth* 
 'Takes in another Place it's fecond Birth : 
 Great Erafinus now feems loft, but yields 
 His rijing Waters to ttf Arcadian Fields. 
 
 M OR RICE. 
 
 4. T H E Alphetis, a River in Greece, is fwal- 
 lowed by the Earth, and, as the Greek Poets 
 write, takes it's Courfe under both Sea and Land 
 into Sicily, where it rifes, as they fay, on the Sy- 
 racufian Shore, and is the fame with the River cal- 
 led Arethufa in Sicily (d). This they were induced to 
 think, becaufe that this River, every fifth Summer, 
 did caft up the Dung of Cattle, at the fame Time 
 that the Olympic Games were celebrated in Achaia, 
 when the Dung of the (lain Victims was thrown 
 into the Alpbeus, which was therefore earned with 
 a direct Courfe into Sicily. 
 
 5. T H E River Guadiana, between Portugal 
 and Andalufia, (formerly called Anas) hideth itfelf 
 
 (d] This (andalfo the former) Mountain Stympbaltis, and run- 
 are thought to meer Poetical ning all it's Courfe above 
 FidHons, for no fuch Rivers are Ground, receives a great Num- 
 found to exift at prefent. That her of Rivers, and afterwards 
 which was anciently called Al- falls into the Gulph of Cajfot 
 pheus is now named Carl/on or di Tornefe, 
 Qrfea, which rifes from the 
 
 under
 
 3 1 6 The Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 under Ground, near the Town of Medelin, and 
 guides out again about eight German Miles from 
 that Place (e). 
 
 6. T H E Brook Dan (which together with Jor 
 makes the River Jordan) emerges fome Miles be- 
 low it's real Fountain the Lake Pbyala ; for Chaff 
 being thrown in here is caft up at the other end 
 of the Orifice, or where the Fountain feems to 
 be. 
 
 P L INT and others have wrote that the Nile, 
 in fome Places, runs under Ground , but we know, 
 by Experience, that it runs it's whole Courfe a- 
 bove Ground. Ariftotle alfo tells us, that the Po y 
 a famous River in Italy, hideth itfelf for fome 
 Space under Ground ; but Experience mews the 
 contrary. 
 
 THE Reafon why t;hefe Rivers hide themfelves 
 under the Earth and appear again, is, becaufe they 
 meet with elevated Ground which they cannot over- 
 flow, and therefore are forced to glide into the next 
 Grotto they meet with : or make themfelves a fub- 
 terraneous Chanel, if the Earth be foft and eafy 
 to penetrate. 
 
 THERE are alfo fome Rivers that hide them- 
 felves under Ground, but do not appear any more > 
 as we mall fliall (hew prefently. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 Moft of the fmall Rivers, many of the middling 
 0nes, and all the large ones, exonerate tbemfelves 
 into the Sea, or into a Lake -, and the Place where 
 .they difcharge their Water is called their Mouth. 
 Some Rivers alfo have one Mouth, fome two, fome 
 
 \t] This River is at prefent merly)by all the Spaniards that 
 fatd, not to bury itfelf under have mentioned it. 
 Ground (as was reported for-
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Umverfal Geography. 317 
 three, and others more. Several of the middling, and 
 fmall Riven difcharge themfelves into the great ones : 
 the reft either ft agnate, or are fwallowed up by 
 the Earth. 
 
 CONCERNING the great Rivers the thing 
 is manifeft, as the Rhine, the Elbe, the Danube, the 
 Wolga, &c. The Danube difcharges itfelf at five 
 Mouths into the Euxine Sea ; the Wolga is reckoned 
 by fome to have at leaft feventy Mouths ; the Nile 
 feven, and, when it overflows, more ( f). 
 
 THE Reafon why thefe great Rivers exone- 
 rate themfelves into the Sea is their fwift Courfe, 
 and their Plenty of Water ; and why at more 
 than one Mouth is, i. [The Situation of the Coaft], 
 2. The Shelves and Sand-Banks, which are gather- 
 ed in their Mouths, and in Procefs of Time be- 
 come Iflands , and if there happen to be but one 
 of thefe, the River is divided into two Branches, 
 and is laid to have two Mouths; if more, the 
 Mouths are increafed accordingly. By this means 
 the Land often gains on the Sea ; and few great 
 Rivers are found without fome Iflands before their 
 Mouths. 
 
 THE Ancients telLus^ that the Nile formerly 
 difcharged it's Water at one Mouth only, which 
 they called the Canobian Mouth. To thefe two 
 Caufes therefore a third may be added, viz. Hu- 
 man Induftry. For People often draw Canals 
 from Rivers, or turn them thro* a new Chanel, in- 
 to the Sea, partly to water their Fields, and 
 partly for the Ufe of Navigation, and in procefs of 
 Time thefe are made larger by the Current. And 
 therefore we may believe the Antients, when they 
 tell us, that all the Mouths of the Nile, except that 
 at Canobus, were made by Human Induftry. But 
 
 (f) See the next Note below, 
 
 of
 
 3 1 8 The Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 of this more fully in the next Proportion, where 
 we fhall explain how it comes to pafs, that one 
 River flows into the Chanel of another. 
 
 THE River Wolcoff, in Mufeovy, (not Wolga) 
 arifes from one Lake, and runs into another. 
 
 RIVULETS, or Brooks, that neither run in- 
 to the Sea, nor into other Rivers, are either pe- 
 culiar Rivers, or Branches of others. They that 
 are the Branches of other Rivers probably flagnate, 
 and do not run under Ground ; and the Reafon why 
 they do not reach the Sea is, i . Becaufe their Cha- 
 nels lie low, and contain but little Water. 2. Be- 
 caufe they meet with rocky Ground, which hin- 
 ders their Progrefs. 3 . Several of them are made 
 by Art, to moiften the Ground, and for the Ufe 
 of their Water. 4. Perhaps their Mouths are 
 {topped or obftructed, by intervening Land, which 
 is gained from the Sea, or by Shelves, which are 
 increafed to fuch a Bulk as to flop their Current ; 
 fo that they are forced to retreat towards their 
 Fountain, or to the Place where they divaricated. 
 Thus a Branch of the Rhine, which formerly ran 
 into the German Ocean, at the Huys le Britain, near 
 Catwick, is now choaked up with Sand, and flag- 
 nates between Cat-wick and Leyden. 
 
 BUT fuch as are proper Rivers, and neither 
 run into others, nor exonerate themfelves into the 
 Sea, but fpring up in one Place, and are fwallowed 
 up in another, are few in Number, and very fmall ; 
 as thofe that flow from the Mountains of Peru, In- 
 dia, and Africa, are buried in the Gravel, or fuck- 
 ed up by die fandy Soil. Alfo at Meten (a Village 
 near the Arabian Gulph) there is a fmall River 
 whofe Chanel is full of Gravel, under which the 
 Water in Summer-Time hides itfelf, and glides a- 
 long out of Sight. If thefe Rivers find no fub- 
 terraneous Paflage they run into fmall Lakes, or 
 Bogs j but fome of them fpring fo flowly, that 
 
 they
 
 C H A P. 1 6. of Unherfal Geography. 3 1 9 
 they are exhaled into Vapours, almoft as faft as 
 they fpring, and thus they are dried up, and . nei- 
 ther make Lakes, nor run under Ground. There 
 are feveral of thefe in Mufcovy ; as the Comtra> the 
 Salle, the Marefsa, the Jeleefa, and others taken 
 Notice of in larger Maps. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 "70 determine whether the Chattels, in which Rivers 
 flow, were originally made by Art or Nature. 
 
 IT is probable the Chanels of thofe Rivers, 
 which are not of the fame date with the Earth it- 
 felf, were made by Induftry, for thefe Reafons : 
 i . We are well allured that when new Fountains 
 break forth, the running Water does not make it- 
 felf a Chanel, but difnifes it's Streams over the 
 adjacent Country, and therefore wants to be 
 brought to a Chanel by Art. 2. Becaufe there 
 are feveral Canals even now cut by Hand. So 
 the Chinefe have cut a Canal for the Water to run 
 out of the yellow River into another. There are 
 feveral other well known Inftances which I omit. 
 3. Becaufe fuch Lakes and Marlhes found a- 
 bout the Fountains of feveral Rivers, viz. of the 
 A 7 */*?, the Tanais^ the Wolga^ &c. confirm this. For 
 fmce thefe Lakes, without donbt, were made by 
 the Effufion and fpreading of the Fountain- Water, 
 the Inhabitants, to drain it from their Fields, which 
 were in danger of being overflowed, made a Cha- 
 nel to contain it, and carry it off. The fame is to 
 be underftood of Rivers, whofe Heads are in Moun- 
 tains. 
 
 T H E R E is a Queftion like this ; viz. Whether 
 the Rivers which exonerate themfelves into others, 
 have of themfelves made their way thither, or have 
 been brought thither by Chanels made with hands ? 
 
 The
 
 320 The Abjblute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 The latter is more probable for the Reafons afore- 
 faid. The fame may be faid of fuch Branches of 
 Rivers as make and enclofe Iflands in the Tanais, 
 the Wol$a, and others. So one Branch of the Eu- 
 phrates, gliding thro* the Marlhes of Chaldcza, was 
 formerly carried that way into the Sea, but after- 
 wards it left it's Courfe, being choaked up with 
 Sand, and partly difperfed it's Streams among the 
 innumerable Canals which were made by the Inha- 
 bitants to water the Fields ; and partly by a new 
 Chanel mixed it's Waters with the Tigris. And this 
 feems to be the Cafe of other Rivers which do not 
 now reach the Sea, but ftagnate ; tho' perhaps they 
 might have had a Paflage into it formerly. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 To explain why there are no fait Rivers, the? there are 
 fo many fait Springs. 
 
 THE Reafon is, becaufe Mankind have no 
 occafion for fait Water, and therefore do not col- 
 led: it into Chanels, fmce they can have Salt at an 
 eafier rate. But if Chanels were made as for other 
 Rivers, we mould have fait Rivulets, fuch as are in 
 Lunenburg, and Hall, under Ground. And no doubt 
 but there are feveral fuch fubterraneous fait Rivers 
 in other Parts of the World. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 The Chaneh of Rivers the nearer they are to their Foun- 
 tains, are generally fo much the higher ; and moft of 
 them are deprejfed gradually towards their Mouths. 
 
 THO' it may fometimes happen, that the 
 Parts of the Chanel which are more remote from 
 the Fountain, are higher than the Places that are 
 
 nearer
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 321 
 nearer it ; for they are not always even throughout, 
 but have here and there Hills and Vallies, as we 
 may call them, interfperfed. Notwithflanding no 
 part of the Chanel is higher than the Fountain- 
 head. 
 
 THE Propofition is plain from the Nature of 
 Water, which never flows but from a higher to a 
 lower Place, and therefore every Part of the Chanel 
 (efpecially the Mouth of the River) muft of Ne- 
 ceitity be lower than the Fountain ; elfe the Water* 
 would flow back again to it's Source, But it is trus 
 alfo, that the parts of the Chanel are elevated either 
 way, becaufe in many Places there are Whirlpools 
 which draw the Water downwards ; befides Shoals, 
 Ridges, and Sand-banks, which increafe the Alti- 
 tude of the Chanel, and make it higher in fome 
 parts than in others nearer the Fountain , yet the 
 River flows forward from the Fountain towards it's 
 Mouths, and fills the hollow Places with a greater 
 Quantity of Water> fo that their Superficies are {till 
 higher than the Shoals, Sands, jfr. which would 
 otherwife obftruct it's Paflage. And there are 
 fcarce any Rivers but what have fuch Inequalities 
 in their Chanels, efpecially the Nile and the Wolga^ 
 which in fome Places are almoft choaked up with 
 Sand, 
 
 W H E N the Water of a River falls from a high 
 to a low Place, if the Fall be fteep, and if it gulhes 
 down fwiftly and with great Force, it is called the 
 Cat araft of the River. And there are feveral fuch 
 Cataraffs in great Rivers ; efpecially in the Nile ; 
 two of which are extraordinary, where the Water 
 guflies between the Mountains with fuch Rapidity 
 and Noife, that the Inhabitants, within the found 
 of them, are faid to be all deaf. 
 
 THE [Wolcoff] a fmall River in Mufcovy r hath 
 alfo two Catarafls near Ladoga. 
 
 VOL. I. Y THE
 
 322 - The Abfohite Part SECT. I W 
 
 THE Laire alfo in Congo hath a Cataratt about 
 fix German Miles from the Sea, where it wholly falls 
 from a Mountain. The Rhine hath two dangerous 
 ones at Scbaffbuyfen and Lauffenburg, where the 
 whole River falls with a dreadful Noife, from the 
 tops of Rocks. 
 
 BUT they that are Ikilled in Hydraulics obferve, 
 that if the Chanel of any River be depreffed one 
 Pace in 500, it is fcarcely navigable, by reafon of 
 it's Rapidity ; and fmce all great Rivers are navi- 
 gable, it ihews that their Chanels in no Place are 
 deprefied fo much as one Pace in 500; except 
 where there are Cataracts and Whirlpools. 
 
 THE Depreflion of one part of a River below 
 another, is called it's Level ; and the difference be- 
 tween the Altitude of the Fountain-head of a River 
 and it's Mouth, is called the Depth of the Level of a 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 7*0 explain why Riven are broader in one Part than 
 another. 
 
 THE Caufes are ; i . If the Bank, or Shore, be 
 lower than ordinary. 2. If the Ground be foft and 
 mouldering, and give way to the violent beating 
 of the Waves, or to the Rapidity of the Water. 
 3. If die Chanel be ihallow or full of Shelves and 
 Sands. 4. If the Water flow from a Cataract, it 
 fpreads and makes the River broader. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 30 explain why the Chanels of Rivers are more deprejffed 
 infome Places than in others* 
 
 KIVERS
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUnfaerfal Geography* 323 
 RIVERS become (hallow by thefe Accidents ; 
 i. If Sands are gathered. 2. If the River run 
 broad. 3. If it run flow. 
 
 O N the contrary they become deep, If the cur- 
 rent runs ftrong, efpecially from a Cataract , or if 
 the Chnael be narrow, or if the Bottom be loft and 
 mouldering. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 30 explain why fome Rivers run with a Jwift Current , 
 and others flow : and why the fame River (for ex- 
 ample the Rhine] acquires different Degrees of Ra- 
 pidity in' fever al Places. 
 
 THE Caufes are-, i. The Altitude of the 
 Fountain. 2. The Declivity of the Chanel, or 
 the Depreflion of the Mouth of the River ; for 
 if the Chanel be deprefled one Pace in five hun- 
 dred, the Current is fo rapid that Navigation be- 
 comes dangerous (as was obferved before) -, there- 
 fore Rivers flow with the greateft Rapidity where 
 there are Cataracts , and thofe Torrents are mod 
 impetuous which fall from the higheft and fteepeft 
 Mountains. 3. The narrownefs of the Chanel, 
 and the abundance of Water , as where a River 
 runs between two Mountains, or Forelands. 
 
 RIVERS famous for their fwift Courfe are ; 
 the Tigris, the Indus, the Danube, the Trtifih m 
 Siberia, the Malmiftra in Cilicia ; which laft makes 
 fuch a dreadful Noife, that it may be heard a 
 great way off. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 \When the Mouths of Rivers are broad and fallow, 
 
 and difcharge but a fmall quantity of Water, and, 
 
 tbatjswh, they are eafih flopped or choaked up.] 
 
 Y 2 FOR
 
 324 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 FOR thefe Caufes make it flow with lefs Force? 
 fo that it cannot difgorge the Sand and Earth 
 into the Sea, but lets them fettle in it's Mouth, 
 whereby it is foon flopped. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Few Rivers run in a direct Courfe from their Foun- 
 tains to their Mouthy but turn various ways, and 
 make innumerable Windings and Curvatures. 
 
 THE Caufe is partly owing to the Induftry 
 of Man, and the Motion of the Water , and part- 
 ly to the Rocks that impede and divert the direct 
 Courfe. 
 
 THE winding Rivers are , i. The [River of 
 the Amazons} in South America, which makes in- 
 numerable Curvatures, fo that it's Chanel is ac- 
 counted above fifteen hundred German Miles long, 
 tho* it be only feven hundred Miles from the Foun- 
 tain to the Mouth in a direct Line. 
 
 2. THE River Madre in Natalia is faid to 
 have fix hundred Curvatures. 
 
 3. THE River far a in Siberia is interrupted 
 by fo many windings and turnings, that the Ruf- 
 fians and Siberians, when they fail on it, often car- 
 ry their Boats and their Burdens, by Land, from 
 one Reach to another, to lave Time and La- 
 bour. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 fo determine whether the Lakes that fome Rivers 
 feem to pafr through, be made by the Rivers them- 
 felves, or are fed by their own -proper Springs, 
 and increafe the Rivers : or whether the Rivers 
 that flow from ihem, be the fame that flow into 
 them. 
 
 2 THERE
 
 C H A P. 1 6. of Vnherfal Geography. 325 
 
 THERE are but fome few Rivers that pafs 
 thro' fuch Lakes i the Nubia in Africa hath hve, 
 the Niger four, and the Rhone has the Lake of 
 Geneva, fcfr. 
 
 WE faid of thefe Lakes in the foregoing 
 Chapter, that the River which runs in, muit 
 be compared with that which runs out ; and if 
 this be larger than the other, there are certainly 
 Springs in the Bottom which feed that Lake, and 
 the River : but if it be lefs, or of the fame big- 
 nefs, then is the Lake made and fed by the River 
 which runs into it ; and the Caufe of this Lake is 
 the Breadth, Depreffion, and Concavity of the 
 Chanel ; and a Lake may be thus made in any 
 River, as we faid before. 
 
 A N D if the River which runs out, be in a 
 direct Line with that which runs in, it is to be 
 accounted the fame, or a Part of the fame River, 
 tho' perhaps it may be greater or even lefs, yet I 
 think it is not to be doubted but that it is ftill 
 a Part of the fame. 
 
 YET the Rhone enters the Lake of Geneva, 
 and flows thro' ir, but doth not make or feed, 
 it i as appears from the different Colour of the 
 Water of the Lake, and of the River, (and other 
 things) neither doth the Rhone make any Lakes, 
 but is wholly fed by Springs and Rivulets. Tho' 
 I da not fay this is certainly true. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 
 The further Rivers have run from their Fountains^ 
 the more they increafe in Breadth \ and are broadeft 
 at their Mouths. 
 
 THE Reafon is 5 i. Becaufe that other Rivers 
 
 mix with them, and continually increafe them. 2. 
 
 Becaufe the Declivity of the Chanel is not fo 
 
 Y 3 great
 
 326 *Tke Abfolute Part S E c T, IV. 
 
 great near the Month, 3 . Becaufe that Sea- Breezes 
 frequently blow the Water up into the River near the 
 Mouth, but do not affect it in Places near the Foun- 
 tain. 4. The Sea- Water alfo enters the Mouth of 
 the River when fuch Breezes blow, and makes it 
 wider by it's violent Agitation. 
 
 THE fewer Mouths any River hath, the 
 broader they are. 
 
 RIVERS remarkable for their broad Mouths 
 $re , the great River of the Amazons in South 
 America^ the River of St Laurence in Canada^ the 
 Zaire in Africa^ and the Rio de la Plata in Erafil. 
 This laft is faid by fome to be forty Leagues broad 
 $t the Mouth, tho' others fay but twenty ; perhaps 
 the former take in the other Mouths of this River, 
 They that have been in Congo relate that the Mouth 
 of the Zaire is twenty eight German Miles broad. 
 Such Rivers as thefe pour fuch vaft quantities of 
 Water into the Ocean, that they take away the 
 Saltnefs of the Sea near the Shore, and difturb 
 it's Motion, for twelve or fixteen German Mile? 
 round them. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIII. 
 
 Rivers often carry along with them Particles of various 
 Metals and Minerals ; as alfo of Sand, and of fat 
 and oily Bodies, 
 
 THE following Rivers are auriferous, that is, 
 have Grains of Gold mixed with their Sands, 
 viz. i. Some in Japan. 2, Some in the adjacent 
 Iflands to Japan, 3 . A Brook called Arroe\ which 
 fprings from the Foot of the Mountains of the 
 Moon in Monomotapa (where there are Gold Mines), 
 and falls into the River Magnics. 4. Some in Guinea^ 
 where the Negroes gather the Grains, and fepa- 
 them from the Sand to exchange with the 
 Z Europeans 3
 
 C H A P. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 327 
 Europeans, who fail thither for that Purpofe. If the 
 Particles are very fmall they call it Gold-Duft, 
 which is the beft, and needs but little clear.fi.ig. 5. 
 In all the Brooks about the City of Mexico, there are 
 found Grains of Gold, efpecially after Showers of 
 Rain ; but there are feldom any found but in the 
 rainy Seafons. 6. In Peru. 7. In Sumatra. 8. In 
 Cuba. 9. In Hifpaniola, and other adjacent Iflands. 
 10. In Guiana, a Province of South America, n. 
 In the Rivulets of the Caribbees, there are found 
 great Lumps of Gold after Showers of Rain. The 
 Inhabitants caft Nets into the Rivers when thefe 
 are out, and catch the Sand, from which they 
 can eafily feparate the Gold. 12. There are fe- 
 veral Rivers and Fountains in the Countries near 
 the Alps in Germany, particularly in the Coun.ty 
 of Tyrol, from whofe Waters they extract Gold 
 and Silver, tho' there be no Grains of either Metal 
 to be perceived in the Water, they lies in fuch fmall 
 Particles or Atoms. The Rhine alfo, and the 
 Elbe has golden Clay in feveral Places. The 
 Tagus, or Tago, a moft celebrated River in Spain 
 was formerly famous for carrying Gold-Sands at 
 the Bottom : but there are none now , nor do I 
 hear of much Riches got that way out of any River 
 in Europe, tho' fome boaft of a fmall Rivulet in 
 Heffe, which has Gold mixed with it's Sand ; but 
 I have not read it in any Author of Credit. 
 
 N O Rivers, which in like manner produce Sil- 
 ver, are taken Notice of by Authors , yet it is 
 not to be doubted but there are as many if not 
 more of this Sort alfo ; only becaufe Silver is not 
 fo eafily difcerned from the Sand, and no great 
 Profit is expected to requite the Pains of extra- 
 cting it, no Body has thought ir worth their while 
 to take Notice of it. And for this. Reafon there 
 hath been no mention made of thofe Rivers that 
 .carry Grains of Iron, Copper, Tin, &c. except 
 Y 4 of
 
 3 28 ttc Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 of fome few, tho* without doubt there are great 
 Numbers of them in the World, at whofe fur- 
 prizing effects Men are amazed i and fuperficial 
 Fhiloiophers have here recourfe to occult Qualities. 
 If we obferve the River in High Germany which 
 turns Iron into Copper (as is commonly thought), we 
 admire that a Horfe-fhoe of Iron fliould, by hang- 
 ing in it for fome Time, be turned into one of 
 perfect Copper. But, in truth, the Iron is not 
 changed into Copper (as is vulgarly fuppofed), but 
 the Grains and Particles of Copper and Vitriol 
 that are in this River, moving with the Water, 
 corrode the Iron, whofe Particles being removed, 
 thofe of Copper fucceed in their Places. 
 
 NEITHER is there much Notice taken of 
 fuch Rivulets as are impregnated with various kinds 
 of Earth, Salt, and other Fofiils, but we lhall treat 
 largely of mineral and metallic Springs, in the fol- 
 lowing Chapter. 
 
 FROM this Mixture of different Particles pro- 
 ceeds a ftrange Diverfity of Waters, in Rivers 
 and Wells. Some Water if you boil Meat in it, 
 makes it black, which is a Sign that it is impreg- 
 nated with Iron , nor will Peafe boil foft fo foon 
 in this, as in other Water that is fomething fat 
 and oily. Neither can the fame Beer be made of 
 different Waters. That Water which hath Par- 
 ticles of Iron in it we call hard Water j but if it 
 be mixed with fat and oily Particles, we call it foft 
 Water. The Elbe is a foft Water River, as we 
 may call it, which fas Experience mews) is owing 
 to the clayey and fruitful Ground it wafhes. And 
 every other variety of Water arifes from the dif- 
 ferent forts of Earth, thro* which the Spring or 
 River is carried, whether it be clayey, rocky, or 
 metallic, &V, 
 
 PRO-
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 329 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 The Waters of moft Rivers differ in Colour, Gravity, 
 and otber Dualities. 
 
 FOR fome Waters are black and fome dufky, 
 fome incline to a red Colour, and others to a 
 white. 
 
 AND this difference is beft obferved when two 
 Rivers meet, where we can difcern the Water of 
 each diftinctly, after they have run fome Paces 
 in the fame Chanel ; alfo by this we may perceive 
 their different Gravity, by Reafon that one tends 
 more to the Bottom of the Chanel than the other. 
 
 THE Water of the River Ganges is accounted 
 very light and wholefome, and the Emperor of 
 Guzarat, or the Great Mogul, in whatever place 
 he is, takes care that this Water be carried along 
 with him in Bottles, of which he alone drinketh. 
 Others will have the Nile to produce the fofteft 
 and moft wholfome Water. Heavy Water is for 
 the moft Part impregnated with Iron or Mercury. 
 
 T O underftand the Nature of great Rivers we 
 muft look into the Rivulets that compofe them ; 
 (for the Rhine receives many mineral Rivers, and 
 the Danube takes in fuch as carry Gold, Iron, 
 Vitriol, &V.) from whence their different Quali- 
 ties arife, tho* moft Fountains have fomething of 
 thefe in them. 
 
 PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 Some Rivers, at a fet Time of the Year, rife beyond 
 their Banks, and overflow the adjacent Countries. 
 
 THE firft and moft celebrated among thefe is 
 t{ie Nile, which fwells to fuch a degree that it covers
 
 330 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 all the Land of Egypt, except the Hills. The 
 Deluge begins about the feventeenth of June, and 
 increafes forty Days, and decreafes as many, fo 
 that at this Time, all the Cities, which are moft 
 of them built upon Hills, appear like fo many 
 Iflands. Antiquity hath given a large Account 
 of this Inundation, becaufe in. that Pan of the 
 Earth which was then known (before the eaftern 
 and weftern Parts were difcovered) no River was 
 found to be the fame, except the Niger, which 
 therefore was fuppofed to communicate with the 
 Nile under Ground. Seneca has defcribed the In- 
 undation of the Nile the beft of all the Antients, 
 and therefore I cannot but give it in his Words. 
 'THE Nile (fays he} is increafed in the middle 
 of Summer, from before the rifing of the little 
 Dog-Star, to beyond the Autumnal Equinox. 
 Nature hath placed this moft noble River in the 
 Sight of all Mankind, and ordered it fo, that 
 it mould overflow Egypt at a Time when the Earth, 
 being drieft with the Summer Heat, might fuck 
 in more of it's Water, and fufficiently quench 
 it's annual Thirft. For in that part of Egypt 
 which lies towards Ethiopia there are few or no 
 Showers, and thofe that fall do not refrefli the 
 Earth, which is unaccuilomed to Rain- Water. 
 Egypt builds her whole hope upon this, and 
 is fertile, or barren, according as the River af- 
 fords it more or lefs Water. The Hufband- 
 man never minds the Heavens, and the Poet 
 Ovid does not jeft when he fays. 
 
 The Herbs lefiech not Jove to pour 
 Himfelf upon them in a Shower, 
 
 *' If we knew where it begins to increafe, we might 
 * perhaps find out the Caufe of it's Increafe. But 
 * aftgr it : .hath wandered over vaft Defarts, and 
 
 * made
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUniverfal Geography. 331 
 
 made it's way thro' Fens and Marfhes, and un- 
 known Countries, it colle&s it's diforderly Wa- 
 ters about Philas. The Ifland of Pbilas being on 
 every fide rocky and rugged, is wafhed by two 
 Rivers which there come together and furround 
 the whole Ifland. Thefelofing their former Names, 
 mix together and are called the Nile, which being 
 increafed in breadth, glides gently from thence 
 thro* Ethiopia, and the fandy Defarts that afford 
 a PafTage to the Commerce of the Indian Sea. 
 The Cararafts afterward receive it, which fill the 
 Eye with fomething great and amazing ; there the 
 Nile rufhes againft the broken Mountains in it's 
 way, and is forced in to the narrow Paffages 
 and Hollows that are made in the hard ROCKS, 
 dalhing againft the Stones that obftrudt it's Cur- 
 rent, and overflowing fometimes all the Obftacles 
 that interrupt it. Here it's Courfe is obftruded, 
 which makes it rife in waves and furges : and 
 there it is confined between two Rocks, and frets 
 and foams to be enlarged ; fo that it's Waters, 
 which before glided gently, along, being now put 
 into a violent Agitation, rufh from one Rock 
 to another, and make it appear more like a 
 Torrent than a River. Now it looks thick, mud- 
 dy and troubled, and half covered with Froth, 
 which is not it's natural Colour, but owing to the 
 Injury of the Places it flowed thro*. At length 
 having freed itfelf from all Obftacles, it falls on 
 a fudden from a prodigious Height, and with 
 a Noife dreadful to the Country thereabouts ; 
 which a Colony that were placed there, by the 
 Perfiam, could not endure , their Ears being 
 fo ftunned with the continual Noife, that they 
 were forced to tranfport themfelves to more 
 quiet Habitations. The incredible Boldnefs of 
 the Inhabitants is reported among the Miracles 
 * of this River. They get into their Boats by 
 
 * pairs
 
 332 be Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 pairs, the one guides it, and the other throws 
 out the Water, and after they have tumbled 
 fome Time among the raging Waves of the 
 Nile, they get into the narrowelt Chanels, and 
 avoid as much as poffible the dangerous Creeks 
 in the Rocks ; then guiding the Boat with their 
 Hands, they are carried headlong down the 
 middle of the Current, by the tbrce of the 
 whole River, and when the Spectators are in 
 great Fear, and begin to lament, believing they 
 are overfet-and drowned by the great Weight of 
 the Water, yet they are in an inftant feen failing 
 a great way from the Place where they fell down, 
 being carried as fwift as a Stone out of an Engine. 
 Nor does the Boat in it's Fall overfet, but is 
 carried fafe into the fmooth Water. The firft 
 rifmg of the Nile is perceived about the fore- 
 mentioned Ifle ofPbilas, a little way from whence 
 it is divided by a Rock (called, by the Greeks, 
 Abaton] which none ever afcend but their Ru- 
 lers : there die rifmg of the River is obferved 
 and marked upon the Sides of the Rock. A 
 great way below this there are two eminent 
 Rocks, called, by the Inhabitants, the Vims of 
 the Nile, from which a great Force of Water 
 floweth i yet not fo much as to do any harm to 
 Egypt* The Priefts throw Offerings in at thefe 
 Mouths, and the Governours Gifts of Gold, 
 while the holy Rites are performing. From this 
 Place the NUe feemsas if it had got new Strength, 
 and is rolled along a narrow and deep Chanel, 
 being hemmed in by the Mountains on each 
 Side, and hindered from enlarging it's Breadth. 
 When it comes to Memphis, it is again at Li- 
 berty, and wanders over the Country, dividing 
 itfelf into Rivulets, and djffufmg it's Streams 
 over all Egypt, thro' innumerable Canals, 'made 
 by Art as commodious as pofiifcle. At firft h 
 
 is
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Umverfal Geography. 333 
 is divided, but the Waters being continued, it 
 ftagnates and appears like a large troubled Sea. 
 The Breadth of the Country thro* which it is 
 extended, breaks the Violence of it's Current, 
 being no lefs than the whole Land of Egypt. 
 As much as the Nile increafes, fo much do their 
 Hopes for that Year , and the Hufbandman is 
 not deceived who computes his product by the 
 Meafure of the River. It brings troubled Wa- 
 ter and mud upon the fandy and dry Soil, and 
 leaves it's Dregs and Filth upon the Ground 
 that is moil chapped with Drought, and what- 
 ever clammy Fatnefs it brings along with it, 
 is fprinkled upon the drieft Places -, fo that it 
 manures the Ground two ways, by watering it, 
 and covering it with Mud ; but the Places it doth 
 not reach are bare and unfruiful. If it increafe 
 above fuch a height it does not fo well. The 
 Nature of this River is alfo wonderful ; for when 
 other fmall Rivers wafte and warn out the Fat- 
 nefs of the Earth, the Nile, by how much it ex- 
 cels others in Greatnefs is fo far from wafting 
 and eating out any Thing, that is rather adds 
 new Vigour to the pining Ground, and at leaft 
 puts it into a better Temper, by faturating 
 the fandy Places with Slime and Mud ; fo that 
 Egypt does not only owe the Fertility of it's 
 Soil to the Nile, but even alfo the Soil itfelf. 
 When it overflows the Fields, it makes a plea- 
 fant appearance, for the Plains and Vallies lie 
 hid under the Water, and die Towns, appearing 
 like Iflands, are only to be feen ; and they have 
 no Commerce one with another in the inland 
 Places but by Boats ; the lefs alfo the People 
 fee of their Lands, the more they rejoice. When 
 the Nile is confined within it's Banks, it is poured 
 into the Sea thro* feven Mouths, and every one 
 of them hath the appearance of a Sea, befides 
 
 feveral
 
 334 The Abfolute Part S E CT. IV. 
 
 feveral other fmall Branches and Canals that are 
 cut from one Shore to another. Moreover it 
 breeds living Creatures, equal in Bulk and 
 Noxioufnefs to any at Sea, from whence one may 
 judge of it's greatneis, by it's affoYding Room 
 to play in, and Suftenance fufficient tor fuch 
 vaft Animals. Babillus, the beft of Men, and 
 Ikilled in all kinds of Learning, relates, that 
 when he went Governour into Egypt he faw 
 at the Heracleotic Mouth of the Nile (which is 
 the greaterl) a Company of Dolphins coming 
 from the Sea, that were met by a Troop of 
 Crocodiles from the River, as it were to give 
 one another Battle. The Dolphins, tho' they 
 are harmlefs Animals, and do not bite, yet 
 they were too powerful for the Crocodiles, 
 whofe Backs are hard and impenetrable even 
 to the Teeth of larger Animals than themfelves , 
 but their Bellies and lower Parts are foft and 
 tender ; into thefe the Dolphins, fwimming un- 
 der Water, thruft their long Spikes, or prickly 
 Fins, which they carry upon their Backs, and 
 wounded them fo that they let out their Bowels, 
 by which feveral of them being killed, the reft 
 turned their Tails and fled. They are Crea- 
 tures that fly from the bold, and purfue the timo- 
 rous ; nor do the Inhabitants of tfentyra over- 
 come them fo much by their natural or fupe- 
 rior Valour, as by their Rafhnefs and Contempt 
 of them ; for they follow them of their own 
 Accord, and drive them into the Snares of Nets 
 that are fpread for them ; tho' a great many of 
 them, that have not Courage enough to purfue 
 like the reft, are deftroyed. Tbeopbraftus relates, 
 that the Nile once brought down Sea-Water ; 
 and it is certain that when Cleopatra reigned it 
 did not rife for two Years, viz. in the eleventh 
 and twelfth Years of her Reign 5 which they fay 
 
 ' portended
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUniverfal Geography. 335* 
 
 * portended bad Fortune to two great Perfons, 
 4 viz. to Antony and Cleopatra, who foon after 
 4 loft their Empires. Callimachus relates, that the 
 
 * Nile in former Ages did not overflow for nine 
 
 * Years. 
 
 * N O W I come to enquire into the Caufe of 
 4 the M/*'s overflowing in Summer, and I mail 
 4 firft begin with the Opinions of the Antients. 
 
 * Anaxagoras was of Opinion, that the melted 
 4 Snow is poured down, from the Mountains of 
 
 * Ethiopia into the Nile, and makes it overflow ; 
 and all the Antients believed this to be the 
 
 * Caufe ; jEfehylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, have 
 
 * taught the fame. But this is evidently falfe 
 4 for feveral Reafons : Firft, Ethiopia is the 
 
 * hotteft Country upon Earth, as appears from 
 
 * the tawny or Sun-burnt Colour of the Inhabi- 
 
 * tants, and the Troglodytes who build their Houfes 
 
 * under Ground : the Rocks alfo are as hot as 
 4 Fire, not only at Noon but even at the clofe 
 of the Day ; the Duft under foot is fo hot that 
 
 * Men cannot walk upon it ; Silver is unfoldered ; 
 
 * the Joints of Images are disjoined, and what- 
 
 * ever is laid on them for Ornament difiblves or 
 
 * is peeled off; the South Wind, which blows 
 ' from thefe Places, is immoderately hot, and 
 
 * thofe Creatures, as Serpents, &c. that eliewhere 
 
 * ufe to hide themfelves in the Winter, never 
 
 * withdraw there, but are found in the open Field 
 
 * all the Year. There is no Snow nor heavy 
 
 * Rain falls at Alexandria, which is a great way 
 
 * removed from thefe immoderate Heats. How 
 ' therefore mould a Country fubject to fo much 
 ' Heat, be covered with Snow all the Winter ? 
 4 Some Mountains indeed may have Snow on them 
 
 * there, but not more than the Ridges of Thracia 
 4 or Caucafus -, and the Rivers that flow from thefe 
 4 laft, fwell in the Spring, and the beginning of 
 
 4 Summer,
 
 336 be Abfolute Part S c T . IV, 
 
 Summer, and are lefs again in Winter ; becaufe 
 that in the Spring the Snow is wafhed down 
 by the Rain, and if any is left it is melted by 
 the firft Heat of the Sun. Neither the Rhine, 
 Rhone, Ifter, nor Cayfter, are fubject to this , they 
 only are out a little in Summer, tho' the Snows 
 are very deep on the northern Mountains. The 
 Phafis and the Boryfthenes would alfo rife at that 
 time, if the Snow could produce great Rivers 
 againft Summer. Moreover, if this were the 
 Caufe of the Increafe of the Nile, it would flow 
 moft at the beginning of Summer , for then 
 the Snow, being large and entire, is melted in 
 greater Quantities. But the Nile is in it's Gran- 
 dure four Months, and is then always the fame. 
 If we may believe Tholes, the anniverfary North 
 Winds refift the Defcent of the Nile, and hinder 
 it's Courfe, by driving the Sea in at the Mouths 
 of it's Chanels, fo that being repulfed it runs 
 back upon itfelf ; and is not increafed, but be- 
 caufe it cannot find a Pafiage, it overflows and 
 breaks out in every Place where it can make 
 it's Way. Eutbjmenes, of Marfeilles, fides 
 with him, and gives this Teftimony : I have 
 failed, fays he, in the Atlantic Sea ; whence the 
 Nile flows larger as long as the anniverfary 
 North Winds blow, becauie that then the Sea, 
 being urged by the Winds, replenifh it's Stream ; 
 but when they ceafe, the Sea grows calm, 
 and the Nile returns with lefs Force. Befides, 
 the Sea- Water is alfo fweet, and the Monfters 
 in it refemble thofe of the Nile. But where- 
 fore then, (fay I) if thefe Winds make the Nile 
 iwell, doth it rife before they begin to blow, 
 and continue after they are over? alfo why 
 doth it not grow greater when they blow ftrong- 
 er? for it is not increafed or lefiened, when 
 they blow more or lefs, which it mould be, ft 
 
 ' it
 
 CHAP. *6. of Unherfal Geography. 337 
 it depended upon their Force. Moreover, theie 
 Winds blow againft the Shores of Egypt, and 
 the Nile defcends the contrary Way againil them, 
 but why ihould it not flow from whence they 
 blow, if it hath it's Origin from them ? Befides, 
 it would flow from the Sea pure and green, 
 not troubled and muddy as it doth now. Add 
 to this, that innumerable Witnefles contradict 
 this Teftimony, and tho* Men might lie fafely 
 and put any Fables upon us, as long as the 
 Coafts were unknown ; but now the foreign 
 Coafls are frequented by Merchant-Ships, yet 
 none of them mention the green Colour of the 
 Nile, or that the Sea hath any other Tafte than 
 ufual ; which is alfo difagreeable to Nature, for 
 the Sun evaporates the lighteft and freiheir. 
 Particles. Befides, why doth it not increafe in 
 Winter, when the Sea is fometimes raifed with 
 greater Winds than thefe annual ones, which 
 are commonly moderate ; and further, if it pro- 
 ceeded from the Atlantic Sea it would cover 
 Egypt at once, and not by Degrees as it does. 
 Oenopides of Chios fays, that in Winter the Heat 
 is kept under Ground, and therefore Dens and 
 Caverns are then hot, and Fountain- Water is 
 warm alfo, that the Veins of the Earth are dried up 
 by the internal Heat ; but in other Countries the 
 Rivers are replenifhed with Rain : only the 
 Nile, which is not fupplied with Rain, is lefTened 
 in Winter, and increafes in Summer, when the 
 interior Parts of the Earth are cold, and the 
 Fountains are frefli and cool. But if this were 
 true, all the Fountains would increafe, and run 
 over in Summer. Befides, the fubterraneous 
 Heat is not greater in Winter, tho' Water, Caves, 
 and Wells, are then warm, becaufe they do not 
 admit the external cold Air , fo that they are not 
 abfolutely hot, but only exclude the cold : for 
 VOL. I. Z * this
 
 338 The Abfolutc Part SECT. IV. 
 
 4 this Reafon they are cold in Summer, becaufe 
 4 the hot Air is kept from them. Diogenes Apollo- 
 4 niales fays, that as the Sun draws Moifture to it, 
 4 fo the dry and parched Earth draws it from the 
 4 Sea and other Waters , for it is impoflible that 
 ' one Part of the Earth mould be dry, when ano- 
 
 * ther is moift, becaufe it is all over perforated and 
 
 * mil of Intercourfes, thro' which the dry Places 
 6 draw Moiiture from the wet, otherwife they 
 4 would long fince have been burnt up. For this 
 4 Reafon, the Sun draws the Waters to it, and the 
 
 * meridian Places that have moft need of it ; alfo 
 4 where the Earth is moft dried, it draws moft 
 
 * Moifture to it. As in Lamps, the Oil runs to- 
 c wards the Place where it is confumed, fo the Wa- 
 4 ter runs towards that Place where the Earth is 
 4 parched up with Heat. From whence therefore 
 4 fhould it come but from the cold northern 
 
 * Parts ? Does not the Propotttis for this Reafon 
 4 conftantly flow into the lower Seas, not as o- 
 4 thers do by a Flux and Reflux, but by a con- 
 4 ftant and rapid Courfe towards the fame Point ? 
 4 And unlefs by thefe Intercourfes, Places that 
 4 wanted were replenifhed from thofe that abound- 
 4 ed, the Earth would be foon dried to Duft, or 
 4 laid under Water. I would willingly afk Dio- 
 4 genes, why, fince the Sea and all Rivers meet 
 4 together, they are not larger in all Countries 
 4 in the Summer ? The Suiv Icorches Egypt more 
 4 than other Countries, and therefore the Nile in- 
 4 creaies more : and in other Parts of the Earth 
 4 there is alfo fome iiicreafe of the Rivers. But 
 4 I afk him, why then is there any Part of the 
 4 Earth without Moifture, fince the hotter it is in 
 
 * any Place the more Moifture it draws from o- 
 ' ther Countries ? And laftly, why is the Nile fo 
 
 * fvveet, if it- receives it's Water from the Sea ? For 
 ' no Water is fo fweet as the Water of the Nile.' 
 
 2, FROM
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 
 
 FROM this Paflage of Seneca we gather 
 the Opinions of the Antients (efpecially of die 
 Greek Philofophers) about the Caufe of the In* 
 undation of the Nile. But none of them are true, 
 becaufe in thole times no Body had travelled out 
 of Europe, fo far as the Springs of the Nile, or 
 had vifited the Nations that border on them, which 
 are very remote from Egy.pt. But the Matter 
 is now well fcarched into, .and the true Caufe 
 is found out, fmce the Portuguefe, and alfo the 
 Engli/h and Dutch, trade with the Nations that 
 border upon thefe Springs, in the Kingdoms of 
 Congo, Angola, Sofala, Mozambique, &c. (g). From 
 
 thefe 
 
 (f) Since we feem to have a 
 better Account of the Nik than 
 our Author had in his Time, it 
 will not be amifs to transcribe a 
 New Delcription ot'it from Mr 
 Salmon's Prefent State of all Na- 
 tions, Vol. .5. Pag. 10, ii. 
 ' The River Nile, or Abancs, 
 which in the AbyJJine Lan- 
 guage fignifies the Father of 
 Rivtrs, hath it's Sources as is 
 generally held, in 1 1 or 12 
 Degr. of northern Latitude in 
 the Empire of Abyjjinia: but 
 whether thePortuguefe}efatts, 
 as is pretended, or any other 
 Perfons have difcovered the 
 very Fountains it iffues from, 
 is very much queftioned. I 
 perceive, the Country where 
 itrifes, as fome of the Natives 
 relate, is covered with vaft 
 impenetrable Woods. This 
 River runs a Courfe of about 
 Fifteen hundred Miles from 
 South to North for the moft 
 Part, an4 a little below Cairo, 
 * dividing itfelf into two Bran- 
 J dies, one inclmrng to the Eaft 
 
 and the other to the Weft, fall 
 into the Mediterranean; the 
 two Mouths being about a 
 Hundred Miles afunder. As 
 for aoy. other Branches of this 
 River our Modern Travellers 
 take no Notice of them, and 
 probably thofe that have been 
 mentioned by antient Writers 
 were only Canals cut from one 
 of thefe, particularly theCaxa/ 
 which was made to convey the 
 Water from the River to Alex- 
 andria feems in our Maps to be 
 laid out for one: However cer- 
 tain it is, that there are no o- 
 ther Branches navigable at this 
 Day than thofe ofDamietta, 
 and Ro/etto. While the River 
 is contained within the Bounds 
 of the ordinary Chanel, I do 
 not find ic is broader at Old 
 Cairo than the Thames at Lon- 
 don, and in the dryell Seafon 
 of the Year is fordableinmany 
 Places. In the upper Parts of 
 the Stream there are feven 
 Catarafts, where the Wate f 
 falls in meets from a very great 
 2 * ! Height^
 
 340 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV, 
 
 thefe we underftand that the Fountains of the 
 Nile are in the great Lake Zaire, fituated in the 
 Foreland of Africa, in the middle between the 
 eaftern and weftern Shore, as was faid in the for- 
 mer Chapter. Near to this Lake are feveral 
 Ridges of Mountains, particularly thofe called the 
 Mountains of the Moon, and ofSetb, between which 
 the Lake lieth as in a Valley among the Moun- 
 tains. And becaufe thefe Places lie on the South 
 Side of the Equator, the Motion of the Sun re- 
 quires that it mould be Winter with them when 
 it is Summer with us ; but by Reafon of their 
 fmall Diftance from the Equator, they have little 
 or no cold Weather, but Rain (inftead of Snow) 
 for two Hours before and after Noon, every 
 Day, in the Kingdom of Congo. And the 
 Clouds (fcarcely ever permitting them to fee the 
 Sun) feem to cover the Tops of the Mountains, 
 and pour down continual Showers of Rain upon 
 thofe mountainous Places ; which flow from thence 
 like Torrents, and have their Confluence in the 
 Lake Zaire; from whence they are difcharged 
 into the Chanel of the Nile, Coanza, Zaire, and 
 other Rivers, which have their Rife from this 
 Lake , but they do not overflow fo much (tho* 
 the Zaire makes an Inundation every Year in the 
 lame manner) as the Nile, becaufe their Chanels 
 are deeper, and after a fhort Courfe they exone- 
 rate themfelves into the Sea j yet all of them in- 
 creafe at the fame time, and difgorge a vaft 
 quantity of Water into the Ocean. Therefore it 
 
 * Height, caufing a prodigious 
 
 * Noife, but thro' Lower Egypt 
 
 * it Hides alongwith .-very gentle 
 Stream, and Pafiengersare fel- 
 dom furprized byTempefts on 
 it Tis obferved, the Water 
 
 * ii very thick and nm.ddy , efp- 
 
 cially when it Is fwelled by 
 thofe heavy Rains which con- 
 ftantly fall within the Tropici 
 in the beginning of the Sum- 
 mer ', and thefe are the Occa- 
 fion ofit's overflowing thelov* 
 Lands of Egypt annually.' 
 
 appear*
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUniwrfal Geography. 
 appears that the Inundation of the Nile is caufed by 
 the vafl quantities of Water it receives from thefe 
 continual Rains j but the Caufe of thefe Rains is 
 unknown, tho* it be likely they proceed from the 
 fame that generates Rain and Snow with us in 
 Winter, which make Inundations not only in the 
 Nile but in our Rivers, when they fall in a greater 
 quantity than ordinary, as every one knows from 
 his own Obfervations. 
 
 THE Time when the Nile begins to overflow, 
 and alib when it ends, agrees with this Caufe ; 
 for the Winter, or rainy Seafon, in Congo and the 
 mountainous Places, begins in our Spring, about 
 the middle of March or April (which is the Time 
 of Autumn to them, viz. from May the Twenty 
 firft to June the Twenty firft) but is not fo ve- 
 hement as in May 9 June, and July : in Auguft and 
 September it is alfo moderate, and ends in the mid- 
 dle of September. The rifmg of the Nile, as was 
 faid before, begins about the feventeenth of June 
 in this Age. But Herodotus teftifies that the Nik, in 
 his Time, was a hundred Days in rifmg, and 
 as many in falling ; therefore it began to increale 
 fome Weeks fooner, viz. about the firft of June, 
 or in May, and before that it muft have rained 
 fome Time upon the Mountains, bordering upon 
 the Lake, that is, from March to May or June. 
 But the Reafon why it begins to overflow not fo 
 foon now as formerly (viz. in the Time of Hero- 
 dotus, when it feems to have begun in April) is 
 becaufe the Nile , by bringing down Mud and ter- 
 reflrial Matter, hath made the Ground, which it o- 
 verflows, higher, and therefore the Chanel is lower 
 and deeper (as well by this as by being fcoured 
 by the rapid Current) and contains more Water 
 than formerly, which is the Reafon that it doth 
 not fo foon overflow it's Banks. And no doubt 
 but the Nik, in a great many Ages, may not 
 Z 3 overflow
 
 342 The Abjolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 overflow it's Banks, at all ; for, by a continual 
 warning down of theiEarth, the Country is railed 
 and the. Banks and Shores . grow higher,' and in 
 Time may make a Chanel big enough to con^; 
 tain -lallfidae Water 1 , of the River when it is at it's: 
 Height;.' :,.,, , 
 
 BUT': we have laid too much of the Nile, and 
 more- than we intended. 
 
 THE fecond of thefe Rivers* .that overflow 
 t^e adjacent Countries "at a certain Time of the 
 Year, is the Niger, a River in Africa, of no lefs 
 Gourfe. than the Nile, tho' not fo famous. It over~ 
 flows at the lame Time that the Nile does. Leo 
 Africanus fays, it begins to rife on the fifteenth 
 of June, and increafes forty Days, and decreafes 
 as many. When it is at the Height, ; People may 
 fail -. in Boats all over Ncgroland, tho'. not without 
 great Danger. 
 
 THE third River that overflows is the Zaire 
 in Congo, as was faid before -,. and to this may be 
 referred other Rivers in the fame Country. 
 
 THE fourth overflowing River, is the Rio de 
 la Plata in Brafil, which waters the adjacent Fields 
 at the fame Time with the Nik, as , Maffeus ob~ 
 leives. br!'j ,7i>. 
 
 THE fifth is the Ganges. 
 
 THE fixth is the River Indus. Thefe two laft 
 pqur out their Waters- upon the' Earth in the rainy 
 Seafon viz. in June, July, and Auguft, when the 
 Inhabitants gather the Water into Ponds, and pre- 
 ferve it, that they hiay be fupplied at other Times 
 of the Year, when there is almoft no Rain. This 
 Inundation makes 'the Land very fruitful, 
 
 THE feventh includes a great many, viz. four 
 or five that flow from about the Lake Caamayin 
 moderate large Chanels, and exonerate themfelves 
 into the Bay of Byigal, flowing thro' Pegu, Siam, 
 and other Places. . . That River which waters die; 
 
 Royal
 
 C H A p. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 3 43 
 Royal City of Siam is called Msnam, and over- 
 flows in September , Oftober, and November, at 
 which Time the Fields and Streets in the City 
 are all covered with Water, fo that the People are 
 forced to make ufe of Boats to fail from one Houic 
 to another. This alfo caufes an exceeding Fer- 
 tility. 
 
 THE eighth is the River [Mecon] in Cambodia, 
 which overflows in Summer ; but is not right placed 
 in Maps. 
 
 THE ninth is the River [Paraguay, which is 
 a Part of the Rio de la Plata] and overflows at the 
 fame Time with it, and the Nile. 
 
 THE tenth includes thofe in Cormandel in /;/- 
 dia, which overflow in the rainy Months, and 
 are fed by the Rain that is poured from mount 
 Gate. 
 
 THE eleventh is the Euphrates, which over- 
 flows MtfopotamU on fome particular Days of the 
 Year. 
 
 THE twelfth is the River Sus, or Agus, in Sit fa j 
 which overflows in Winter. 
 
 I do not remember to have read of any other 
 Rivers, befides thefe, that overflow annually at a 
 ftated Period, tho' there are feveral that, do it 
 moft Years, as the Oby, the [Hoambo] or Yellow 
 River in China, &c. 
 
 T HE R E are many Rivers that overflow with- 
 out keeping a fet Time, and indeed fcarce any 
 of the larger Sort but what break over the Banks, 
 at one Time or other, as the Elbe, the Rhine, the 
 Wefer, &c. And if it were not for the Depth ant| 
 Capacity of the Chanel, all great Rivers would 
 annually overflow ; for moft of them are vaftly in- 
 creafed in the Spring. And ; it may fo happen, 
 that a River which did not ufe to overflow may 
 begin to do it yearly, if any Part of the Chanel be 
 raifed higher by Sands, or otherwife, foasalmoft 
 Z 4 to
 
 344 ^ Absolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 to equal the Height of the Banks. But to pre- 
 vent this, Men commonly raife the Banks in pro- 
 portion. 
 
 THE fole Caufe of thefe Deluges is the great 
 quantity of Water which in fome Places is drain- 
 ed from the melted Snow, and in moft others, 
 proceeds from frequent Rains and violent Showers. 
 Yet it is to be admired why the Indus and the 
 Ganges mould not overflow at the fame Time that 
 the neighbouring Rivers do, which proceed from 
 the Lake Cbaamay ; tho' it may be thought per- 
 haps that this difference of Time, is partly owing to 
 the anniverfary Rains in the adjacent Places, and 
 partly to the Mountains that furround the Sources 
 or Spring-Heads, as we faid of the Nile ; but to 
 avoid Prolixity, we mall forbear examining every 
 Particular, The River \Aifnc] near Paris, in 
 France^ fometimes fwells fo much, without any 
 more Rain than ordinary, as to overflow the 
 Suburbs of St Marcellus, and do a great deal of 
 Damage. 
 
 THE Reafon why almoft all thefe Deluges 
 make the Fields fertile, is becaufe the Water 
 that overflows them is either melted Snow or Rain, 
 which being light and fpirituous, and containing 
 fulphureous Matter mixed with it in the Air, is 
 more prevalent to make the Ground fruitful, and 
 alfo more wholefome than mineral Water; and 
 that Rain- Water contains fuch Sulphur and Spirit, 
 appears, i. From the Worms that are bred in 
 it. 2. From it's quick Putrefaction. 3. From 
 the chymical Diftillation of it. Yet there are 
 fome Rivers that do not make the Land fruit- 
 ful by their Inundation but rather barren, as the 
 Loire in France , whilft the Seyne, with it's fat and 
 Jbft Waters, makes the Land fertile, 
 2 
 
 PRO.
 
 C H A P. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography, 345 
 PROPOSITION XXI. 
 
 70 explain bow Springs break out of the Earth. 
 
 W E have fhew'd in the fourth Propofition, 
 whence the Water proceeds that flows out at 
 Fountains , we now come to enquire how the 
 Collections of Waters are made to fpring out of 
 the Earth, which one would think could not be 
 done without a violent Perforation of the Ground. 
 But there are various Caufes that make way for 
 a Spring : i . If there be a Cavity, or Receptacle, 
 in any Place, the Water, of it's own Nature, and 
 without any other Caufe, will diftil and drain 
 into it, and, in procefs of Time, by conftantly 
 pervading the Crannies and Paffages, will make 
 them larger, 'till at laft the Cavity be full, and 
 overflow into a Rivulet , and the fame may hap- 
 pen if there is no Receptacle, if the Spring be up- 
 on the Side of a Mountain, or even upon the Top 
 of it. For this Caufe there are feveral Springs 
 found in Woods, and fhady Places, where the 
 Rain-Water moiflens the Earth ; and becaufe it i$ 
 not fo foon evaporated by the Heat of the Sun, or 
 a free Air, it draws to it by degrees the fecret 
 Water of a future Fountain. 2. The Spirits that 
 are mixed with the Waters yet in the Earth, and the 
 Rarefaction of them whereby they take up a larger 
 Space, often remove the Earth, and make way 
 for Fountains ; for Water is more fpirituous while 
 it is hid under Ground: fubterraneous Fires alfo 
 contribute much to it's Rarefaction. 3. Foun- 
 tains are brought to Light by Showers of Rain, 
 which pervade the Pores of the Earth, and en- 
 large them, and by mixing with the fubterra- 
 neous Water, draws it to a Head, by a mutual 
 Coherence or Attraction. 4, Sometimes Foun- 
 tains
 
 346 ':fbe Abfolute Tart SECT. IV! 
 
 tains are opened by Earthquakes; as the River 
 Ladon which . run formerly between Hdis and 
 Megalopolis was difclofed by an Earthquake. 5. 
 Sometimes they are difcovered, by chance, as. the 
 Ground is digging. 6. Several have been difco- 
 vered by Animals rooting up the Earth with 
 their Snouts. Thus the firit of the Salt-Springs in 
 Lunenburg was difcovered by a Hog's rooting up 
 the Ground, and making a Gutter, into which 
 the Water ipouted up, and filled it, and he (ac- 
 cording to the nature of them) laid himfelf down 
 in the Water; when he had got up again, and 
 the Sun had iufficiently dried his Back, fome bo- 
 dy difcovered a certain whitenefs. upon him* 
 which, being more narrowly obferved, they found 
 to be white Salt ; then they fought for the Place 
 where he had laid down, and found it to be a 
 Spring, producing Salt ; which made them be- 
 gin to leek for more, and they foon difcovered 
 ieveral others. From this the Town acquired all 
 it's Riches and Splendor, and to this very Day 
 criere is kept in the 'Stadt-boufe .-of Lunenburg the 
 fame JHog quartered and. fmoaked hanging upon 
 a> Beam, whole Parts are grown ib. thin, ; by 
 length of Time, that they feem to be only Pieces 
 of- Leathers - v i 
 
 n .PROPOSITION XXII. A im-aw 
 
 l^'ff.i tr m-,,-fcV noir;::!v-];;K 
 
 'A Place lem^ given in the Eartb^ to know if a Four.-, 
 
 .- taiu : orWett may be mack in it* 
 
 Oibi :'- ^Oj-SKTT^n^ri :L::z;r;-iC >ut>f<u ^ : <l.*Lai 
 - VITRUFIUS In:his -ArchiteAure {Book viii. cap. i . 
 karnedly afiigns the Marks by which we may know 
 th'is, from, whom Pliny and 'Palladia have borrowed 
 what they- wrote upon this Subject. Befonus hatJi 
 klded .ttf it ..in ' his Book published the fame Year 
 i$6f). We fhall-her,e give /^Vrwj's-own V/ords. 
 
 IF
 
 CHAP. 1 6. of Umverfal Geography. 347 
 
 * I F (fays he) your Fountains do not flow, you 
 are to leek out their fubterraneous Feeders, and 
 colled: their Waters together, which are thus to 
 be found. A little before Sun-rifing, lie with 
 your Face clofe to the Earth, in thofe Places where 
 the Water is fought for, and fupporting your Face 
 with your Chin upon the Ground, look round the 
 Country ; for by this means the Sight, being no 
 higher than it ought to be, will not miftake, but 
 fee as much of the Country as is upon the fame 
 level ; then where you obferve the Vapours to 
 vibrate backwards and forwards, and to rife up 
 into the Air, there you may dig ; for this Sign is 
 never obferved in a dry Place. Moreover, they 
 that fearch after Water, ought to confider the 
 Soil, for there are different Sorts of Water in 
 different Soils. In chalky Ground the Water is 
 fmall and weak, of no great Depth ; and not of 
 the fweeteft Tafte , in loofe gravelly Ground it 
 is alfo weak, and if it be drawn from a great 
 Way under Ground, it is muddy and bitter -, in 
 black Ground, there are found feveral fmall 
 Drains and Runnels, the Water of which, being 
 collected into Ponds, made in firm and folid 
 Ground, has an excellent Tafte ; in fandy Ground, 
 or among Grit, there is moderate Water, but no 
 Veins of it found, yet what there is in it is very 
 good , in hard gravelly Ground, mixed with Par- 
 ticles of Coal, you are fure to find excellent, 
 well tafted, Water ; in red ftony Ground there is 
 plenty of good Water, if it do not fink into 
 the Interfaces and wafte away the Stones ; at the 
 roots of Mountains, and among Flint Stones, 
 there is the coldeft and moft wholfome Water, 
 and the greateft Plenty of it ; but Springs that 
 are found in low champain Ground, are fait, 
 t heavy, warm, and unwholfome *, unlefs they 
 come in fubterraneous Paflages from the Moun- 
 
 * tains,
 
 34 8 Me Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 tains, and break out in a part of the Plain 
 that is well fhaded with Trees, for then they 
 excel the Mountain Springs in fweemefs. There 
 are feveral other Signs to find Water by, befides 
 thofe already mentioned , as if there be found 
 growing in any Place, (lender Bull-rumes, wild 
 Willows, Alder Trees, Arnm caftus, Reeds, Ivy, 
 or the like, which cannot grow or be nourifhed 
 without moifture (tho* thefe alfo ufe to fpring 
 up in Ditches, into which the Rain- Water is 
 drained from the adjacent Fields in Winter, and 
 is there preferved longer than ordinary, but you 
 muft not truft to fuch Places) only in thofe 
 Countries or Places which have no Ditches, and 
 where thefe Signs appear growing naturally, 
 Water may be fought for. And in thofe Coun- 
 tries where there are no fuch Signs ; to find the 
 Water, let there be dug a Place about three 
 Foot broad every way, and no lefs than five 
 Foot deep, and let there be placed in it, about? 
 Sun-fet, a brafs or pewter Dim or Bafon (which 
 is at hand) upfide downwards, befmeared all o- 
 ver on the infide with Oil ; let alfo the top of 
 the Place be covered with Leaves or Reeds 
 caft upon the Earth; the next Day let itbeo- 
 pened, and if there be Drops, or a Sweating,- 
 in the Veflel, there is certainly Water there. 
 Alfo if there be put in the fame Place a Vefiel 
 made of Clialk not boiled, the Veflel will be dif- 
 folved or at leaft very moift if there be Water 
 there ; if a Fleece of Wool be placed there 
 over. Night, and if die next Morning Water 
 may be wrung out of it, it is a Sign that there 
 is plenty of Water in that Place. If a trimmed 
 Lamp, full of Oil and kindled, be put cover- 
 ed into that Place, and the Oil is not fpent the 
 next Day, but fome Relicks both of the Oil and 
 
 *" the Wick fomething moift is left, it fliews that 
 
 < there
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUnherfal Geography. 349 
 ' there is Water there-, becaufe all Heat draws 
 
 * moifture to it. If a Fire be made there, and 
 
 * the Earth be throughly warmed and burnt, and 
 
 * a Cloud of Vapours arife, that Place affords 
 
 * Water. When thefe Things are tried, and the 
 
 * foremention'd Signs appear, a Well may be funk 
 
 * there, and as foon as Water is found, Chanels 
 ' may be dug round about to bring it to a Head. 
 ' But thefe are to be fought for chiefly in Moun- 
 
 * tains and northern Countries, where the Water 
 6 is more plealant, wholefome, and plentiful ; for 
 
 * they are turned from the Courfe of the Sun, 
 
 * and are frequently covered with Woods and 
 
 * Trees, and the Mountains themfelves afford cool 
 ' Shades, fo that the direct Rays of the Sun do 
 ' not reach the Earth to draw out it's moifture. 
 
 * The Vallies between the Mountains alfo receive 
 
 * a greater mare of the Showers, and the Snow is 
 
 * longer preferred under the made of Woods and 
 
 * Mountains ; which being melted, pervades the 
 
 * Pores and Veins of the Earth, and is carried to 
 
 * the very Roots of the Mountains ; where it 
 ' feeds fome Fountain or other with Water. But, 
 
 * on the contrary, in plain champain Countries, 
 
 * they have feldom plenty of Water, and if they 
 
 * have, their Springs cannot be fweet, becaufe the 
 
 * vehement Heat of the Sun, being uninterrupted 
 
 * by any Shade, fucks up the moifture -, and if 
 there be any fine, light, and wholefome, Water 
 
 * above Ground it is evaporated by the Heat 
 
 * of the Air, and the hard, heavy, and unwhole- 
 
 * fbme Particles are only left in thefe Fountains.* 
 BUT at this Day, without regarding any 
 
 Signs, they dig up the Ground fometimes to a 
 great Depth, where there are, for the moft part, 
 Jound Veins of Water, or Spring-heads, or Re> 
 cejptacles of Water, or fubterraneous Rivers. 
 
 OTHERS
 
 3 50 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 OTHERS fuperftitioufly take the Branch of 
 a Hazle-Tree, cut down at certain Afpeds of the 
 Planets, and pretend to know thereby where Wa- 
 ter lies concealed. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIII. 
 
 $b make a Well or Fountain in a given Place, if it fa 
 foffible. 
 
 ;,,:"-.:. 
 
 LET us again ufe the Words of Vitruvius, 
 becaufe he was a Perfon well verfed in thefe Af- 
 fairs i and I myfelf never pradtifed any fuch Bu- 
 fmefs. 
 
 ' REASON (fays he in Chapter vii.) muft not 
 be defpifed in digging of Wells j and the na- 
 ture of Things is to be diligently fearched into,' 
 becaufe the Earth hath feveral Sorts of Matter 
 in it, and is (as all other Things are) compo- 
 fed of four Principles, of which the Earthy Part 
 itfelf is one ; and Moifture, from whence Foun- 
 tains proceed, is another : alfo Fire and Heat, 
 from whence proceed Sulphur, Alum, and 
 Bitumen, and the thick Spirits of Air, which 
 pervading the Pores, Interftices, and FifTures 
 of the Earth, gather to the Place where the Well 
 is funk, and fdnd the natural Vapour they bring 
 along with them into the Noftrils, and flop the 
 Motion of the animal Spirits, fo that unlels 
 they can quickly get out they immediately 
 perifh. But to prevent this, they mould let 
 down a lighted Candle, which if it continue^ 
 burning, there is no danger in going down ; 
 but if it be put out, by the ftrength of the 
 Vapour, then they muft dig in other Places 
 near this Shaft, and make Tubes (that the Earth 
 may have Noftrils as it were) to difcharge the 
 noxious Vapours out of it's Bowels. When thefe 
 
 arc
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUnfoerfal Geography. 351 
 are finimed, and you are come to Water, let 
 the Well be built round within, but not fo as 
 to flop the Veins from running ; but if the Earth 
 be hard, and the Veins hot quite at the Bottom, 
 then mud Plaifter-work be made to receive the 
 Water from the Ledges and upper Places. To 
 make your Plaifter durable, let the fineft and 
 hardeft Sand be got, and a certain Weight of 
 Flint broken to powder ; mix the Sand with the 
 beft quick Lime, two Parts of the one to five 
 of the other, and add to this the Cement or 
 Powder ; with which plaifter the Sides of the 
 Well to the intended Depth, and faften it with 
 Beams of Wood nailed into it, left it mould 
 fall in. This being done let the Earth in the 
 Bottom be clean taken out as far as the Plaifter- 
 work goes, and when it is levelled, ram the 
 fame fort of Plaifter upon it, to what thick- 
 nefs you pleafe. If this Work be repeated o- 
 ver and over, and the Plaifter laid on thick, 
 the Water, by being {trained thro* it, will 
 be more refined and made more wholefome ; 
 for the Mud by it's fubfiding will make the Wa- 
 ter clearer ; and it will keep it's Tafte without 
 any noifome Smell ; otherwife it may be needful 
 to add Salt to refine it. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIV. 
 
 30 know whether Fountain-Water be wholefomf. 
 
 OF this yitruviut writes thus (Book viii. Chap, v.) 
 The Proof or Trial of Fountains is to be made 
 in this manner. If they bubble out of the Earth 
 and flow, let the Inhabitants that live near the 
 Fountain- Heads be obferved, and if they have 
 ftrong Conftitutions and healthy Bodies, are well 
 coloured, without diftorted Limbs or blear
 
 352 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Eyes, the Waters are certainly good. In like 
 manner if a Well be new funk, take fome of 
 the Water and fprinkle it upon a Vefiel made 
 of the beft Brafs, and if it leave no Spots or 
 Stains, it is the beft of Water. Let it alfo be 
 boiled in a brazen Kettle, and if, after it is 
 fettled and poured out, there be no Sediment 
 of Sand or Slime at the Bottom, the Water 
 is certainly good. If Peafe or Beans be 
 quickly boiled foft in it, it is a Sign the Water 
 is good and wholefome. Likewife if it appear 
 clear and tranfparent in the Fountain, and no 
 Mofs or Bull-rumes grow in any Place where it 
 flows, alfo if the Places be no way corrupted 
 with Filth, but are of a fine fort of Earth ; 
 
 * thefe are all Signs that it is light and whole- 
 
 4 fome Water.' 
 
 i' * 
 
 PROPOSITION XXV. 
 
 To make an artificial Fountain in any Place if it bt 
 fojfible. 
 
 A Fountain is faid to be artificial or only ap- 
 parent, when it is fed by a fubterraneous Chanel 
 conveying Water from a higher Place ; as we 
 fhewed in Propofition 5. Such an one as this 
 may be made, if there is any Lake, River, or 
 Fountain near, viz. by cutting a Chanel under 
 Ground from the Place propofed to one of thefe, 
 whereby to convey the Water ; as we mall (hew 
 in the next Propofition, 
 
 PRO*. 
 
 (cl
 
 C H A P. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography. 3 53 
 PROPOSITION XXVL 
 
 70 bring a River from a given Fountain^ or River % 
 to a place appointed. 
 
 I F the Fountain or River is higher than the 
 propofed Place, it will be eafily done by thofe 
 Inftruments that are ufed for levelling Places, to 
 convey Water from a certain Height to fuch or 
 fuch a Level. Let there be therefore a Chanel 
 cut from the Fountain or River to the Place pro- 
 pofed, and let it incline, or be more or lefs le- 
 velled, according as you would have the Water to 
 run flow or fv/ift, for you are not ftinted by this 
 Problem. To make Aqueducts that will convey 
 Water with a moderate Celerity, they commonly 
 deprefs the Chanel no lefs than half a Foot in 
 five hundred, othervvife the Water will run too 
 (low, or not at all. Vitruvius requires no lefs 
 than half a Foot in one hundred and no more 
 than a Foot, or at moft a Foot and a half, o- 
 therwife the Courfe will be too fwitt and rapid : 
 But if the Fountain be not higher than the given 
 Place, you muft ufe Engines for raifing the Water* 
 for the making of which you muft confult Mecha- 
 nics : and other things are to be confidered in this 
 Affair. Some of the French write, that the River 
 Seine ^ in running from the Arfenal at Paris to the 
 royal Gardens ofthe Tuilleries, which is five hundred 
 Fathoms, falls fcarce one Foot ; but it is to be con- 
 fidered that in fome Parts of die Chanel there is 
 no need of fq great an Inclination, the Water 
 having acquired fome Force already. By this 
 Problem Rivers are alfo joined, and Canals cut 
 from one to another for the Ufe of Navigation ; 
 as from the Tanais [or Don] into the Wolga, and 
 VOL. J. A a from
 
 3 54 *be Abfolute Part S c T. IV. 
 
 from the Hoamlo, or Yellow River, to the \_Kiani 
 or] Blue River in China, &c. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVII. 
 
 Some Rivers are remarkable for their long Courfes, 
 
 others for- their Breadth , fome are famous for their 
 
 Swifinefs -, and others for the peculiar Nature of the 
 
 Water they carry, and fome again for two or more 
 
 of tbefe Properties. 
 
 THIS Proportion requires no Proof. We 
 need only enumerate thofe of the larger fort, viz. 
 that have a long Courfe, and are famous for their 
 Breadth : of fudi there are but fixteen hitherto 
 difcovered. The Nile, Oby, Jenifa, [the River of 
 the Amazon^, Rio de la Plata, Parana, Miary, 
 Oroonoque, Ganges, Danube (h], St Lawrence in Ca- 
 nada, Niger in Africa, Nubia, Wolga, the blue 
 and the yellow River in China. 
 
 THOSE famous for Breadth, tho* not of fo 
 long a Lourfe, are about twenty. The Indus, Zaire, 
 Coanza, thefe from the Lake Cbaamay, the Eu- 
 phrates, Tanais, Petzora, [Maia] fobol, and Trtifcb 
 in Siberia, St Efprit in Africa, Amana in the Ame- 
 rican Cajlile, Magdalen, Julian in Chic a, St Jaques 
 in Peru, the Rhine, Elbe, Maes, Boryftbenes, and 
 Totonteac in New-Britain. 
 
 WE mail here only trace the Courfe of ten of 
 the largeft Rivers, leaving the more accurate Ex- 
 plication of them and others to fpecial Geography. 
 
 THE Nile, Niger, and Ganges, run almoft in 
 a ftrait Courfe, the reft have many and large 
 Curvatures. 
 
 i . T H E Nile has it's Fountain in the Lake 
 Zaire, in fix Degrees of South Latitude, and it's 
 
 (b] The Danube is faid to I Miles in a ftrait Line, from 
 perform a Courfe of above 1 500 \ it's Rife to it's Fall. 
 
 Mouth
 
 CHAP. 1 6. ofUniverfal Geography. 355 
 Mouth in thirty one Degrees of North. It fldVs 
 from South to North, and is in fome Places very 
 broad ; but in others narrow, and hath two great 
 Cataracts. The length of it's Courfe is about fix 
 hundred and thirty German Miles, or Two thou- 
 fand five hundred and twenty Italian ; which we 
 may reckon to be Three thoufand for it's Curva- 
 tures. It overflows every Year. 
 
 2. THE Niger ('), a River in Africa^ (fometimes 
 called Senegal) arifes from a Lake of the fame 
 Name, in 5 Degr. of North Latitude. Some have 
 formerly thought it to proceed from the Nile by a 
 fubterraneous PafTage, becaufe it annually over- 
 flows at the fame Time with the Nile. One of it's 
 Mouths is in 1 1 Degr. of Latitude, but the fur- 
 theft is 15 Degr. diftant from the Equator. It 
 flows from Eaft to Weft, and in one Place hides 
 itfelf under Ground, and again emerges. It's 
 Courfe is about 600 German Miles, but lefs if you 
 neglect it's greateft Curvatures, and more if you 
 include them. 
 
 3. THE Ganges, in Afia, has it's remote, and 
 not well known, Fountain a great way up in Tar- 
 tar y ; fome place it in 35 Degr. of North Latitude, 
 and others further North. It has it's Mouth in the 
 
 (/') De rifle in his Maps makes in thofe Maps', and that it is a 
 
 the River Niger to lofe it's barr'd River, and capable of 
 
 name at the Lake de GuarJe, admitting nothing larger than 
 
 and from thence to the Sea Barks up to the French Settle- 
 
 which in a ftrait Line is 700 ments, above whkh, only flat- 
 
 Britijb Miles, is called Senegal; bottom'd Boats can fioatfo high 
 
 and makes the River Gambia to asGa/fam : Whereas the Gambia 
 
 have no Communication with is navigable for Ships of any Bur- 
 
 the Niger ; but we have no fuf- then about 50 Leagues above 
 
 ficient Proof that there is any the Englijh Settlements, and for 
 
 fuch River as the Niger: But Mr Veflels of 100 Ton up to Bar~ 
 
 Snow, late Governour of Jama rnconda, and fomething higher, 
 
 Fort on Gambia River, informs (for fo far the Tide prevails^ and 
 
 me, that the Senegal hi'h not is near 150 Leagues above yames 
 
 fo long Courfe as i t is reprefcntcd Fort. TentpJeman's Survey. 
 
 A a 2 Latitude
 
 3 56 The Abfolute Tart SECT. IV. 
 
 Latitude of 22 Degr. and flows from North to 
 South. It's Courfe is about 300 German Miles, and 
 every Year it overflows it's Banks. 
 
 4. THE Oby, a great and every where broad 
 River in Afta* has it's Fountain in the Lake Kan 
 Kifan, among the Mountains of Tartary, in the 
 Latitude of forty eight Degrees North, It has it's 
 Mouth in fixty nine Degrees of Latitude, and runs 
 a Courfe of about four hundred German Miles, 
 without it's Curvatures. It divides itfelf in Siberia^ 
 into two Branches, or rather lends forth an Arm 
 which makes a Curvature, and returns to it again, 
 and fo forms an Ifland, in which there is a City 
 built by the Mufcovites and Siberians, called Jor- 
 goet. 
 
 5. T H E Jenifa, a River in Afia, hitherto un- 
 known to our Geographers, but taken Notice of by 
 the Mufcovit.es. It is laid to be much greater than 
 the Oby, from which it is diilant eaftward, about 
 ten Week's Journey, towards Tartary. There is 
 a Range of Mountains runs for a great Way along 
 it's eaftern Banks , and the weftern Shore is inhabi- 
 ted by the ["Ton-Guifms], It overflows the weftern 
 Shore feventy German Miles every Year in the 
 Spring, when the Inhabitants are forced to betake 
 themselves, with their Cattle and Tents, into the 
 Mountains on the eaftern Shore. Where it begins 
 and ends is not known, but it is thought to run as 
 long a Courfe as the Oby. 
 
 6. [THE Maia or Lena\ is far diftant from the 
 Jenifa eaftward. The eaftern Branches are faid to 
 proceed from the Borders of China, and the King- 
 dom of Catbaia ; if there be fuch a Place. It's 
 Fountain and Mouth are unknown ; and it is not 
 reckoned one of the largeft fort of Rivers ; only 
 we are willing to mention it here, becaufe it has 
 
 not been taken notice of by any Geographer, no 
 
 more than the Jenifa and Trtifcb. 
 
 i 7. THE
 
 CHAP. 16. of Umverfa! Geography. 
 
 7 . T H E River of the Amazons, (or Rio de O- 
 rellana from Francifco Orelli] in America, is thought 
 to be one of the greateft Rivers upon Earth. It's 
 Fountain is in the Province of^uito in the Kingdom 
 of Peru, near the Equator, and it*s Mouth, being 
 j 5 Leagues broad, is in 2 Degr. of South Latitude. 
 It is faid to run a Courfe of 1 500 Spanijh Leagues, 
 by reafon of it's great number of Windings, tho' 
 it extends not above 700 in a ftrait Line. Some 
 confound this with, or will have it to be, a Branch 
 of the Miary. It is in fome Places four or five 
 Leagues" broad, but it receives it's Water not fo 
 much from Fountains, as from the Rains that fall 
 upon the Mountains of Peru ; and therefore is no- 
 thing nigh fo broad in the dry Seafons. This 
 makes Travellers difagree in their Defcriptions of 
 it. 
 
 8. THE River of Plate, Argyropotamus, or Rio 
 de la Plata, in Brafel, hath it's Fountain in the Lake 
 Xarayes, and receives a Branch from about Potoft, 
 and it's Mouth in 37 Degr. of South Latitude, 
 which is faid to be twenty Leagues broad ; but 
 when it overflows, it has a great many Mouths, 
 which are accounted but as one ; for at other times 
 it hath not much Water in it. The Inhabitants call 
 it Paranaguafa, i. e. 'Tb'e Riwr like a Sea, as jfome 
 obferve. 
 
 9. THE Omardnan is likewife a River of Bra- 
 fil, flowing thro* a long TracT: from the Mountains 
 of Peru. Thefe three great Rivers of Brafil, viz. 
 the Orellana, the Rio de la Plata, and the Omara- 
 nan, meet in certain mediterranean Parts of Brafil, 
 fo as to form Lakes, from which they again rife fe- 
 parate. 
 
 10. THE River of St Laurence flows between 
 Canada and New-Holland, in North America, and 
 hath it's Fountain in the Lake [Fronlsnac or] Iro- 
 
 A a 3 quois.
 
 3 58 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 quois. It's Courfe is no lefs than 600 German 
 Miles. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVIII. 
 
 There are Whirlpools and deep Pits found in fome 
 Rivers. 
 
 THUS in the River Soame in Picardy^ between 
 Amiens and Abbeville^ there is a blind Whirlpool, into 
 which the Water rufhes with fuch Violence, that 
 it's clafhing may be heard feveral Miles off. There 
 are many others of this kind. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIX. 
 River Water is lighter than Sea-Water. 
 
 THE Reafon is, becaufe Sea Water hath much 
 Salt in it. From whence it happens, that fome 
 things fink to the bottom in Rivers that floated up- 
 on the Sea , as very often heavy loaded. Veffels, 
 which were born up at Sea, fink in the Harbour. 
 However, the Proportion between them is various, 
 and they both differ in Weight in divers Places. 
 "We commonly fay, they are as 46 to 45, i. e. 46 
 meafured Ounces of River Water equiponderate 
 45 of Sea Water. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 C H A P. 17. of Umverfa! Geography. 3 59 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 Of Mineral Water s^ hot Baths, and Spaivs. 
 
 SINCE there are feveral Species of liquid 
 Bodies, or Waters, whofe peculiar Pro- 
 perties feem furprizing, it has given Occafion 
 to Geographers to treat thereof; but all of 
 them hitherto, except a bare Recital of their 
 Names, and a fhort Account of fome of the 
 moft extraordinary Fountains, have added no- 
 thing to give us an Infight into their Caufe. 
 But we mail here treat of them more fully, 
 and explain their Caujes, and alfo fet them in 
 a clearer Light. 
 
 PROPOSITION' I. 
 
 No Water is pure and elementary ; but contains other 
 Particles mixed with it^fuch as are found in terrejlrial 
 Bodies ; and thefe are not only earthy , but alfo of va- 
 rious other kinds, as Oil, Spirits, &c. But that 
 is called Mineral Water which contains fo many of 
 thefe Particles different from the Nature of Water 
 itfelf, that from them it acquires fuch remarkable 
 Properties, as affeft our Senfss and makes us take 
 notice of it, 
 
 Aa 4 THE
 
 360 The Abfilute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition is apparent 
 from Experience, and is proved as well from the 
 different Taftes of the Waters as from Diftillation ; 
 and all Naturalifts agree that there is no fuch thing 
 in Nature as pure or fimple Water, or any other E- 
 lement feparated from others, becaufe of the con- 
 ftant and various Agitation of the Particles of 
 Bodies. But in mineral Waters (that we may come 
 clofer to our Subject) the caufe of this Mixture 
 is their receiving the fpirituous Particles of he- 
 terogeneous Bodies ; for Rain and the very Air itfelf 
 that covers the Water, is impregnated with ma- 
 ny different forts of Particles. 
 
 ALL Waters therefore have a Mixture of Par- 
 ticles of another Nature, tho* all have not the 
 fame Quantity of them , and tho' there flow into 
 the Rhine, the Danube, and the Elbe, and into all 
 great Rivers, feveral Rivulets impregnated with 
 mineral Particles in fuch Quantities as to affect 
 the Senfes ; yet becaufe, befides thefe, there are 
 many other Brooks that flow into the fame Rivers 
 which are not impregnated with a fenfible Quan- 
 tity of heterogeneous Particles , and becaufe mod 
 of their Water proceeds from Rain and Dew, 
 therefore thefe heterogeneous Particles are not ea- 
 lily difcovered in fuch great Rivers, tho' they 
 are received by them , but require to be fepara- 
 ted by Art, if we would know their Tafle and 
 Qualities. We therefore call that mineral Water 
 which hath fome remarkable Property more than 
 what is obfcrved in common Water, or hath fo 
 large a Mixture of heterogeneous Particles as fen~ 
 fibly to alter it's Tafle,
 
 CHAP. 17. ofUniverfal Geography. 361 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 Mineral Waters are of three kinds. 
 
 S O M E are corporeal, (we want a better Word 
 for it ) others fpirituous, and the reft both corpo- 
 real and fpirituous. Thofe we call corporeal mi- 
 neral Waters do contain fixed and folid. Particles 
 of Minerals and Foffils, which can be feparated 
 from the Water, and feen with the naked Eye 5 
 and fuch as thefe are of two forts : Some carry large 
 Particles of Minerals and Foffils, which may be 
 perceived with little or no trouble in the Water 
 itfelfj nor are they properly fpeaking mixed with 
 the Water : Such as thefe we treated of in the fore- 
 
 foing Chapter, and have in them Grains of Gold, 
 ilver, &c. and therefore are called auriferous, 
 argentiferous, &c. But fuch are not properly called 
 mineral Waters, becaufe they have not thefe Par- 
 ticles mixed with them, but feparate -, neither do 
 they receive any Property or Quality from them : 
 yet becaufe Men admire fuch Rivers and their 
 Explication hath a great Affinity with the Defcrip- 
 tion of mineral Waters properly fo called, we 
 thought fit to mention them under the fame 
 Head , to which may be added bituminous Foun- 
 tains, &c. 
 
 BUT corporeal mineral Waters are more pro- 
 perly fuch as indeed contain folid Particles of 
 Foffils, but fo fmall and minute that they are en- 
 tirely mixed, and cannot quickly be diftinguimed 
 by the Sight, unlefs they are made to fubfide by 
 Art, or a long fpace of Time ; or by Concretion 
 are brought to a vifible Mafs, fuch as Salt and 
 fulphureous Fountains, &V. and chymical Waters 
 in which Metals are difiblved. 
 
 SPIRITUOUS
 
 362 fhe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 SPIRITUOUS Waters are thofe that con- 
 tain only a volatile Spirit, liich as is found in Mi- 
 nerals ; but have no fixed Particles in them ; and 
 therefore their Competition can never be made 
 vifible. 
 
 W E call thofe Waters both corporeal and fpi- 
 rhuous, which contain not only fixed and folid 
 Particles of Minerals, butalfo volatile andfpirituous: 
 Of all which we mail give Examples in the fol- 
 lowing Propositions. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 fo explain bow mineral Waters are generated. 
 
 1 . I F the Water be carried under Ground with 
 a rapid Courfe among metalline and mineral Earth, 
 which is eafily loofened, it is evident that it wafhes 
 Particles from it, and may carry along with it Grains 
 of thefe Minerals ; and this is the generation of 
 thefe corporeal mineral Waters tliat hold Grains in 
 them. 
 
 2. IF the Minerals are imperfect and not fo 
 clofely joined, as Vitriol, Sulphur, sfV. or even 
 Salt, which of their own Nature eafily mix with 
 Water ; and if a Rivulet, or Gut of Water, runs 
 thro* Beds or Mines of fuch Minerals, or be ftrain- 
 ed thro* them (without a Chanel or Duct in fuch 
 a Manner as we explained in Propofition 5. of 
 the preceding Chapter) the Water when it breaks 
 out at the Fountain will have fmall Particles of 
 thefe Minerals mixed with it, and will be cor- 
 poreal mineral Water, of a fubtile Compofition, 
 according to the fmallnefs of the Atoms. Now 
 whether the Water can in like manner diflblve or 
 unite with itfelf the Particles of Metals, is to be 
 queftioned, becaufe they are hard and folid, and 
 therefore are not eafily blended with Water. I 
 
 acknowledge
 
 CHAP. 17. ofUniverfal Geography. 363 
 
 acknowledge this may be done, but not with fimple 
 or common Water, but by a vitriolic and fait 
 fpirituous Water, like the Aqua Foriu of the Chy- 
 mifts ; for as Aqua Fortis diffolves Metals into A- 
 toms, and eafily unites them with itfelf, fo that 
 they do not fubfide at the Bottom, unlefs they 
 be feparated by Art : in like manner when fuch 
 Water runs thro* a metallic Earth, it may dif- 
 folve the metalline Particles and unite them with 
 itfelf ; and thus are the corporeal mineral Waters 
 of the fecond Sort, accounted for and explained. 
 3 . BEFORE Metals are formed in the Bowels 
 of the Earth, Steams and Vapours are condenfed 
 about the extant Corners of the Rocks, to which 
 they (lick faft ; being at firft but of a foft Sub- 
 fiance, though they are afterwards hardened by 
 degrees -, if therefore the Water mould run or 
 gleet thro* the Places where fuch Vapours are in 
 Commotion, it is impregnated with them ; and 
 thus fpirituous mineral, and metalline, Waters are 
 produced. Imperfect Minerals alfo make mineral 
 Waters of their own Nature, after another Me- 
 thod ; viz. when, being heated by a fubterraneous, 
 or their own proper, heat, they fend forth Spirits 
 and Vapours, as Sulphur, Vitriol, Salt, Coal, &c. 
 And fuch Fames and Exhalations are always ftir- 
 red up where there are fuch Minerals ; among 
 which the permeating Water is impregnated with 
 that Spirit. Some think thefe fpirituous Waters 
 may be generated by being only carried thro* a 
 metallic Earth, or by having their Receptacles in 
 it, or in their Mines , but it is found to the con- 
 trary by Experience, that Water receives no Qua- 
 lity from Metals and Minerals, tho* they mould 
 be immerfed in it a great many Years. There- 
 fore, rejecting this Opinion, it is moft reafonable 
 to fuppofe, that thefe Waters receive a certain Spi- 
 rit, from the Seeds of Metals, or firft Principles, 
 
 as
 
 364 *fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 as we may call them ; or we may fay that fuch 
 Waters are impregnated with the fubtile Spirits of 
 Vitriol, Salt, fcfe. by the help of which a Spirit is 
 extracted from hard Metals ; but I do not lay fo 
 great Streis upon this latter caufe -, for a Queftion 
 will arife again about the Generation of this fpiri- 
 luous, mineral, vitriolic, and fait Water. 
 
 FROM thefe together it appears, how mine- 
 ral Waters, both corporeal and fpirituous, are ge- 
 nerated. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 ttere are innumerable Kinds of mineral Waters, accor- 
 ding to the Variety and Diverftty of the Par tide s> they 
 receive from different Minerals. 
 
 W E have mewed and explained in the former 
 Proposition, how mineral Waters receive thefe 
 Particles (from which their extraordinary Qualities 
 arife) from Minerals, or Foflils. Now becaufe there 
 are divers Kinds of Minerals, it hence follows, that 
 mineral Waters are various, and almoft infinitely 
 different in their Qualities ; not confifting of one 
 kind of Water impregnated with only one fort of 
 Mineral, but of various Kinds, mixed with various 
 Sorts. Wherefore mineral Waters are either fimple 
 or mixed ; and the Mixed have two, three, four, 
 or more, forts of Foflils in them. 
 
 H E N C E are, i . Metallic Waters, as of Gold, 
 Silver, Copper, Tin, Lead, Iron, &c. 
 
 2. SALT Waters, as of common Salt, Nitre, 
 Alum, Vitriol, &V. 
 
 3. BITUMINOUS Waters, fulphureous, 
 antimonial, as of Coal, Ambergris, &V . 
 
 4. WATERS proceeding from various kinds of 
 Earth and Stones, viz. Limeitone Waters, (which 
 
 receive
 
 CHAP. 17. of Unfoerfal Geography. 365 
 receive Particles of Lime-Stones) Chalk, Oker, 
 Cinnabar, Marble, Alabafter, fcfr. 
 
 5. MERCURIAL Waters, Gf*. 
 
 ALL thefe kinds of Waters are to be under- 
 flood three Ways, as was faid in the fecond Pro- 
 pofition (as all other mineral Waters are), viz. 
 i . Some of them are corporeal, either fenfibly fo, 
 or by a refined and fubtile Commixture. 2. Others 
 are fpirituous. 3 . Others are both corporeal and 
 fpirituous. Thefe Differences may be applied to 
 the leveral Kinds of mineral Waters. For Ex- 
 ample : There are Golden Waters which are, 
 i . Corporeal, that carry Grains of Gold, of fuch 
 Magnitude, that with fmall Trouble they are dif- 
 cernable, by reafon of their grofs or courfe Mix- 
 ture. 2. Corporeal, that carry very minute Par- 
 ticles of Gold, well mixed with them , and tho* 
 the fmalleft Particles of Gold, do of their own 
 Nature fink to the bottom in Water, yet that there 
 are fuch, appears from the Aqua, Regia of the 
 Chymifts, in which Gold is diflblved into Atoms ; 
 but this Aqua Regia is not a Simple Water, neither 
 does any Water carry Atoms of Gold in it, unlefs 
 it be before impregnated with other mineral Par- 
 ticles. 3. Spirituous golden Waters, that have in- 
 gendered a Spirit and Vapour in the Earth from 
 which Gold is produced. 4. Golden Waters that are 
 both corporeal and fpirituous, viz. that have both 
 Atoms of Gold, and the Spirit that produces it. 
 
 THUS we are to apply this four-fold Variety 
 to all forts of mineral Waters, whether fimple or 
 mix'd (from whence innumerable Species are pro- 
 duced j for either the Bodies of Fofiils, or their Spi- 
 rits, or the Body of one Foffil with the Spirit of ano- 
 ther, are mixed or ingendered in the Water) : fo Lea- 
 den Waters are 'of four kinds, viz. i Vifibly cor- 
 poreal. 2. Corporeal by a fubtile Mixture. 3. Tin- 
 dured by the fpirit of Lead. 4. Impregnated both 
 
 with
 
 366 *Tbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 with the Body and Spirit of Lead. And thefe four 
 Participations of Minerals are to be applied to 
 mercurial Waters, &V. and more efpecially to fait, 
 vitriolic, and fulphureous Waters, becaufe in thefe, 
 Nature itfelf difplays a four-fold Variety ; tho* it is 
 to be doubted, whether there be corporeal Particles 
 of a fubtile Grain in metalline Waters. Spirituous me- 
 tallic Waters are alfo very rare ; but the Water of 
 Salt, Sulphur, &V. both corporeal and fpirituous is 
 very common, becaufe thefe Foffils are found in 
 more Places of the Earth, and in greater Plenty, 
 and their Particles are alfb fooner dafhed to Atoms, 
 and diffolved by the Water -, befide they frequent- 
 ly emit Steams and Vapours. 
 
 L, E T us explain this four-fold Variety of Par- 
 ticipation by one Example of Gold. 
 
 i . IN the preceding Chapter, Propofition 1 6, 
 we enumerated thofe Rivers that carry Grains ojf 
 Gold, and with this Treafure glad the Hearts of 
 the Natives upon their Banks ; as in the County of 
 3V0/, and the neighbouring Places, there are fe- 
 veral fuch ; and as we faid before, die Rhine^ the 
 Elbe, the Danube, and feveral other great Rivers, 
 carry Grains of Gold in feveral Places (and alfo 
 ether Metals and Minerals) which they receive from 
 auriferous Rivulets. The Rhine carries Grains' of 
 Gold, mixed with Clay and Sand, in many Places, 
 but efpecially at .thefe, viz. i. Near Coire, irtthe 
 Grifons Country . 2 . At Mayenfield. 3 . At Eglifait. 
 4. At Sokinge. 5. At the Town of Augft, not far 
 from Eafil. 6. AtNewburg. 7. At Seltz. 8. At 
 Worms. 9. At Mentz. 10. At Bacheracb, n. At 
 Son, &c. The auriferous Rivulets, which the Rhine 
 receives, the Reader may fee in Tburnbeuferus ; and 
 alfo thofe that run into the Danube, and Elbe. 
 Small Grains of Gold are found in the Elbe in 
 thefe Places: i. At Lotomeritz in Bohemia. 2. At 
 Purn. 3. At Drefden in Meifen. 4. At forgaw. 
 
 5- At
 
 CHAP. 17. of Univerfal Geography. 367 
 5. At Magdenburg. 6. At Lavenburgb Tower, five 
 Miles from Hamburg. Several other auriferous 
 Rivers are given an Account of in the forecited 
 BookofTburnbeuferus , and fuch as carry other Me- 
 tals and Minerals. And thefe are auriferous cor- 
 poreal Waters, of the firft kind, carrying vifible 
 Grains,, which are not fo properly called Mineral 
 or Golden Waters, becaufe the Gold Grains are 
 not mixed with the Water, but only carried in it 
 by it's rapid Motion ; the Water itfelf being un- 
 compounded with it. 
 
 2. CORPOREAL Golden Waters of fine 
 Mixture, whofe Atoms are united with the Atoms 
 of Gold, like the Aqua Regia of the Chymifts, 
 which diflblves Gold, and unites it by Atoms to it- 
 felf. For fmce it is pofiible that there may be in 
 Nature fuch Water as this of the Chymifts, which 
 may run thro' Golden Earth, or Gold Mines, it 
 is reafonable to fuppofe, that it eats out Particles 
 and diflblves them into Atoms, and unites them 
 to itfelf ; and from this Caufe proceed thofe (or 
 fuch like) Golden Rivulets as are defcribed'by 
 Si in his Account of the Danube^ Rhine, 
 
 3. SPIRITUOUS Golden Waters are but very 
 few, fome of which perhaps are enumerated among 
 the reft by Thurnbeuferus , but thefe are not fo 
 much known or regarded, becaufe Golden Earth 
 and Gold Mines are very fcarce ; befides where there 
 are fuch Mines, there is fuch a Mixture of other 
 Minerals, that they are not perceptible. Never- 
 thelefs there are fome Rivulets in the high Alps of 
 Bohemia, that are faid to participate of thefe Gol- 
 den Spirits, as in the Fiechtelberg Mountains in Si- 
 lefia. The Hot Baths alfo in the Bifhopric of Coire, 
 are believed to be impregnated with this kind of 
 Spirit, yet becaufe of the Mixture of other Mine- 
 
 ndi
 
 368 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 rals in a greater Quantity, this quality is rendered 
 lefs perceptible. 
 
 4. GOLDEN Waters that carry both the 
 Atoms, and Spirit of Gold, are fome of thofe 
 Rivulets mentioned by the above-named I'burnbeu- 
 ferus. 
 
 L E T us alfo give an example of fait Waters. 
 
 1. CORPOREAL fait Water, which carry 
 grofs and undigefted Particles of Salt, are found in 
 many Places, and fufficiently known -, as Foun- 
 tains, whofe Waters produce Salt ; and Sea-Water 
 from which Salt is extracted by boiling. 
 
 2. SUBTLE corporeal fait Waters, which 
 contain Salt diflblved into the minuteft Atoms, are 
 fuch as are very fait, and yet very clear, as many 
 fait Fountains are, and Sea- Water that is thin 
 and fine , tho' there is a great Difference in this fub- 
 tile Mixture. Hereto may be referred the Urine 
 of all Animals. 
 
 3 . S P I R I T U O U S fait Waters, which do not 
 contain the Particles of Salt, but only the Spi- 
 rit of it, are of fuch a Nature, that if feveral Tuns 
 be ever fo much boiled, they will not yield any 
 Salt. There are a great many of thefe in Germany , 
 and other Places, but they are feldom without 
 Mixture. 
 
 4. C O R P O R E A L and fpirituous fait Waters, 
 which contain the Particles and Spirit of Salt. Al- 
 moft all corporeal Waters have fome fmall Portion 
 of faline Spirits in them, but few of them any 
 Quantity. Thus the Fountains about the City Salt* 
 zinge, near the Rhine, are falter than other fait 
 Springs, and yet yield lefs Salt, becaufe their fharp 
 and brackifh Tafte is heightened by a Spirit or vo- 
 latile Salt, which flies away in the boiling. 
 
 HENCE it appears how this four- fold Va- 
 riety of Participation is to be applied to the feve- 
 ral
 
 CHAP. 17. of Unfoerfal Geography. 369 
 ral kinds of mineral Waters, viz. to vitriolic, A- 
 lum, and Lead Waters, tec. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 To enumerate the moft remarkable Varieties of mineral 
 Waters. 
 
 IN the foregoing Propositions, we have ex- 
 plained the Kinds and Differences of mineral Wa- 
 ters, taken from their Nature, which confift in 
 having mineral Particles in them, which they carry 
 or with which they are impregnated ; but becaufe 
 thefe Varieties are not fo perceptible to the Senfes, 
 and there are feveral Mixtures of Minerals that 
 caufe various, and almofl unaccountable, Properties 
 in the Waters, therefore they are not fo eafily 
 known and diftinguifhed by the Vulgar , for Wa- 
 ters (and other Bodies) become famous amoHg Man- 
 kind, and receive their Names from their manifeft 
 Qualities which ftrike and affect the Senfes, whofe 
 Caufe and Explication is to be deduced from their 
 Compofition and Participation. There are there- 
 fore ten Species of Waters, or Liquids, that flow 
 out of the Ground, which are commoi ly taken No- 
 tice of by the Vulgar, i. Acid Waters. 2. Bitter. 
 3. Hot. 4. Very cold. 5. Fat and oily. 6.Poi- 
 fonous or deadly. 7. Coloured. 8. Boiling. 9. Wa- 
 ters that harden Bodies, change their Colour, or 
 otherwife alter them. 10. Saline, u. To thefe 
 may be added, fuch as are inverted with other 
 uncommon Properties. All kinds of Waters defcri- 
 bed by Authors, may be referred to one or other 
 of thefe Heads. We mall here briefly explain their 
 Generation and Differences ; and give fome Ex- 
 amples. 
 
 VOL. I. B b PRO-
 
 370 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 To explain tie Origin, or Compofition^ of acid Watery 
 their Difference and real Species. 
 
 THESE four Waters, called by the Germans 
 Saur-Brunnen, are celebrated in moft Countries. 
 They proceed from a Mixture of the Spirit of 
 Vitriol, Salt, and Alum ; which Minerals are found 
 partly fimple, and partly mixed, with others more 
 or leis, in the Bowels of the Earth, efpecially with 
 Steel and Iron. We prove this to be the true 
 Caufe of Acidula. i. Becaufe almoft wherever 
 theie acid Fount-dins break out, there are found 
 Mines of Vitriol, Salt, and Sulphur. 2. Becaufe 
 the Spirits of Vitriol and Salt are acid, and alfo 
 the Spirit of Sulphur, as appears from Chymiftry, 
 3 . Becaufe no acid Body can be drawn from thefe 
 dridula, but only a Spirit which is no way unlike 
 the Spirit of Vitriol, Salt, &c. 
 
 THERE is plenty of Acidul& in moft Coun- 
 tries, efpecially thofe that abound in Mines. In 
 Germany alone, their Number amounts to almoft 
 one thoufand. Their Caufe is an acid Spirit which 
 is found in moft Bodies, and in all Herbs and Fruits. 
 
 THE difference of Acidula is remarkable : Some 
 are fo acid, that Men ufe them inftead of Vinegar ; 
 fuch a Fountain as this is found in the Province of 
 Nota^ in Sicily ; and another of are markable four- 
 nefs at Elbogen in Germany. Other Fountains are 
 called vinous becaufe they come near the grateful 
 Relim of Wine -, of which kind there is a famous 
 one at Schwalbacb, in the County of Catzenellebogen 
 in Germany (a). There is a Spring near St Bal- 
 
 domar y 
 
 (a] Such like Chalybeate* or | Jcidulte or Sour Waters ; for 
 5/tfawarenot fo properly called j they do not contain any rough, 
 
 vitriolic
 
 CHAP. 17. ofUnherfal Geography. 371 
 domar, in the Province of Lionnois in France, cal- 
 led la Fontaine forte, which fupplies the want of 
 Wine ; for if one fourth Part of it be mixed with 
 Wine, it will want nothing of it's right Tafte and 
 Relifli ; if it be poured on Flower, it will imme- 
 diately ferment ; they can boil no Meat in it, be- 
 caufe through the Subtility of it's Spirit, it foon 
 evaporates ; */ is fo exraordinary wbolefome, that the 
 Inhabitants thereabouts feldomftand in need of a Pby- 
 fician. 
 
 N O T far from the Town of Bazas in Guietwe, 
 there is fuch a Fountain, of a fharp vinous Tafte, 
 whofe Waters, if they are mixed with a fixth Part 
 of Wine only, will drink like neat Wine, without 
 the leaft mixture of Water. Near Rome there is 
 a fharp tailed Alum- Fountain, whofe Waters being 
 mixed with Wine, make a very agreeable Liquor. 
 There is a great Number of fuch Acidula in High 
 Germany ; fome Part of which flow into the Danube 
 and fome into the Rhine. There are feveral of thefe 
 in the fore- mentioned County of Catzenellebogen, 
 in the Electorate of 'Trier s 3 in Tyrol, in the Grifons 
 
 vitriolic, or acid Salts to make pofein a late Book entitled New 
 
 them tafte (harp or four, but ra- Experiments and Obfervatiens 
 
 ther leave a fweetim Flavour or upon Mineral Waters by Dr 
 
 Farewel behind ; and tho' at the Shaw. See alfo Philof. Tranf. N 
 
 firft thought one would afcribe 137. Pag. 247, and N 351 
 
 a lharp or four Tafte to the Pyr- Pag. 564. 
 tnont, Spaio, or Tunbridge, Wa- The moft celebrated Spaws, 
 
 ters, yet if they be rightly con- Mineral, or MedicinalWaters in 
 
 fidereditistheir fmartbrislcTafte England, are at thefe Places; 
 
 that mifleads us to think them viz. at Bath, and Tunbridge ; at 
 
 acid or truly four. Thus Cyder Farington it Dorfetjbire l at 
 
 and foft Ale when bottled will IJlingtun, Hatnpfted, and Pan- 
 
 give the like Pungency to the eras in Middlesex ; at Scar- 
 
 Tongue, and fuch an acute Af- borough, Harrozogate and Cock' 
 
 feftion to the Palate, when it is grave in Torkfoire; St Winifreds 
 
 far from being four. This is pro- Well in Flintjbirei at Duhvich 
 
 iied from feveral Experiments by in Surn', at Butterby in the 
 
 Dr Stare. See more to this pur- Biflioprick of Durham^ &c. 
 
 B b 2 Country,
 
 372 ?he Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 Country, in Bavaria , and a famous one called Hell- 
 lurn^ near Anderna. Near the Village Valentiola, 
 in the Territories of Toledo in Spain, there are Foun- 
 tains that are acid, and have a vinous Tafte, near 
 the Bottom, but are fweet at the Surface ; which 
 Bacclus thinks proceeds from the fubfiding of the 
 acid and nitrous Particles ; but I believe (if the Re- 
 lation be true) that it proceeds rather from a fub- 
 tile Spirit, which by coming to the Surface, quick- 
 ly expires. 
 
 OTHER acid Fountains are aftringent, and 
 contract the Palate, which is a Sign of a Mixture 
 of the Particles of Iron, or of Vitriol and Alum, 
 &c. 
 
 THE Water of thefe Fountains, is obferved to 
 be not fo four in cloudy and rainy Weather, which 
 is a fign that condenfed Air is mixed with it. Alfo 
 if it beexpofed to the Sun, or Hand for fome Hours 
 in an open Veffel, or be carried in the cold from 
 one Place to another in Bottles not well corked, it 
 lofes it's Acidity \ which is a certain fign that this 
 Acidity proceeds from a fubtile Spirit. 
 
 THEY have alfo the very Atoms of Vitriol, 
 Alum, Iron, Salt, Ink, &ff. and of Clay and Gra- 
 vel, &5V. as appears from the Matter that flicks to 
 the Canals thro' which they flow. 
 
 T H E Studious may collect a great many Ex- 
 amples from Authors. There are no lefs than two 
 hundred acid Fountains or Rivulets, that flow into 
 the Rhine \ but becaufe of the Subtility of their 
 Spirits, the Rhine does not tafte acid in the lead. 
 
 I F any mould enquire, Why there are no acid 
 Fountains in the northern Countries ? I fuppofe the 
 Caufe is owing to the want of fubterraneous Heat, 
 and to the great Denfity of the Earth ; and for this 
 fame Caufe there is little or no Gold found in thofe 
 Countries. 
 
 PRO-
 
 C H A P. 1 7. of Unherfal Geography. 373 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 To explain the Caufe of hoi Baths, and to enumerate 
 
 the mojl famous ones. 
 .vj.-tpi:i..- r- oi-iiirJ:.!!-. H ;,.;!, A, ;i 
 
 THERE is a Fountain in Iceland, which is 
 thought to be hotter than any of the reft, fo that 
 it's Waters differ not from thofe that are heated 
 to the higheft Degree by Fire (b) -, but Caromus 
 writes, that in Japan there is a Spring fo hot, that 
 no Water can be brought to the fame Degree of 
 Heat, by the rnoft vehement Fire , it alfo retains 
 it's Heat three times longer that our common Wa- 
 ter heated. It flows not constantly, but twice a 
 Day for an Hour, with a great Force of Spirits, 
 and makes a Lake, which fas another Author tells' 
 usj is called by the Inhabitants Singacko, i.e. Hell. 
 
 NEXT after thefe, the Baths at Baden in Swit- 
 zerland are famous for their Heat. To thefe fuc- 
 ceed the dponenfean Baths in Italy. There are a 
 great Number of common ones in High-Germany 
 and other Places (c ).* In Scotland there is a Lake 
 
 called 
 
 (b) ' Dr Pa'tlus Bhrnoni'ts which come? out of a Rock in a 
 tells fin Pbilof. Trail/. N frefh Current, near to a fins 
 in. Pag. 238.,) that fome Rivulet, of good cool Water, 
 Fountains in -Icelanders fo hot but is fo hot that it foon boils 
 that in a quarter of an hour Eggs, Crawfifh, Chickens, &f. 
 they will fufficiently boil great The Baths at Baden in Auftria 
 Pieces of Beef, which is this are tolemb'y warm, and tinge 
 ordered: they hang the Kettles Metals with other Colours, 
 with cold Water, over them Thofe at the Town of Bath in 
 in which they put the Meat to Somerjetfoire are not fo very 
 be boiled ; for fear of either hot ( even the hotteft cf them) 
 burning or throwing up the as to harden an Egg ; yet there 
 Meat by the fervent, and ve- is a Spring in the King's Bath 
 hement Ebullition of the Hot fo hot that it is fcarce fuffer- 
 Waters, ' '' able, fothat they are fain to 
 
 ( c) There is a very hot Spring turn much of it away, for fear 
 Of Mineral Waters in Jam#i(a of inflaming the Bath. The 
 
 Bb 3 Queen's
 
 374 ?"& Absolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 called Nefs that difcharges itfelf into a River of 
 that Name ; which tho* they be. neither of them 
 hot yet they never freeze, but ftill fmoke in fro- 
 fty Weather. 
 
 THE Caufe and Generation of hot Baths is, 
 I. A Mixture of fulphureous Particles which arc 
 gleaned by the Water as it is carried thro' the fub- 
 terraneous Pafiages, or rather as it gleets thro' the 
 Sulphur Mines to the Receptacles about the Foun- 
 tains. 2. Fumes, Vapours, and Exhalations in the 
 Bowels of the Earth, where there is pure or impure 
 Sulphur, Foflil- Coals, Amber, &r. For thefe 
 
 * Queen's Bath is not fo hot, 
 " having no Springs of it's own, 
 '- but receives it's Water from 
 
 * the King's. The Croft-Bat b 
 *. is fomething colder than the 
 f others, and eats out Silver ex- 
 
 * eeedingly ; a Shilling in a 
 ' Week's time has been To eaten 
 ' by it that it might be wound 
 
 * about one's Finger. In Sum- 
 ' mer they purge up a green 
 ' fcum on the Top, and in Win- 
 ' ter leave a Yellow one on the 
 '. Walls. The Walls that keep 
 ' in the hot Springs are very 
 ' deep fet, and large ; ten Foot 
 ' thick, and fourteen deep from 
 ' the Level of the Street. The 
 ' Cement of the Wall is yellow 
 ' Clay, Lime, and beatenBricks. 
 ' In the Year 1659, the Bet 
 ' Bath (one particularly fo cal- 
 led of equal Heat with the 
 ' Kings Bath) was much im- 
 ' paired with the breaking 
 ' out of a Spring which the 
 
 * Workmen at laft found, and- 
 ' reftored. In digging they 
 
 * carne^to a firm Foundation of 
 ' faditious Matter which had 
 ' Holes in it like a Pumiceftone, 
 
 * thro 1 which the Water plaid ;. 
 
 ' fo that it is likely the Springs 
 ' are brought thither by Art : 
 ' Whence probably was the Ne- 
 ' cromancy which the People of 
 ' antient times believed, and re- 
 ' ported to have contrived, and 
 ' made thefe Baths ; as in a very 
 
 * antient Manufcript Chronicle 
 I find thefe Words; IVbtn Lud 
 ' Hidibrai was dead, Bladud a 
 ' great Nigromancer was made 
 ' King ; he made the Wonder 
 of the Hot Bath by his Mgro- 
 ' mancy, and he reigned twenty 
 ' one Years, and after he died, 
 ' and lies at the Neto Troy. And 
 ' in another old Chronicle 'tis 
 faid : That King Bladud fent 
 
 * for the Necromancers to A- 
 
 * thens to effeU this great Bufi- 
 ': nefs ; who, 'tis likely were 
 
 * no other than cunning Arti- 
 ' ficers well skilled in Arckitec- 
 ' ture and Mechanics.' This 
 from Mr Jofepb Glan^iTs De- 
 fcription of Bath, in Pbilofoph. 
 Tranf. No 49. Dr Brcwn fays, 
 the natural Baths at Buda are 
 the nobleft in Europe, not only 
 for their variety of hot fprings 
 but alfo for the Magnificence 
 of their Buildings. 
 
 Bodies
 
 CHAP. 17. of Univerfal Geography. 
 Bodies conftantly emit hot Smoke, which warms 
 the Water as it pafles fuch Places (d). Never- 
 thelefs in mod Baths there is a Mixture of the 
 Particles of Alum, Iron, or Nitre, which give 
 them an aftringent and tartim Tafte. Moft Baths 
 that we know of, flow without ceafing, except the 
 famous Pepper-Baths not far from Coire in the 
 Grifons Country in Germany , whofe Waters contain, 
 befide Sulphur, fome Gold, and not a little Nitre. 
 They begin to fpring yearly about the third of 
 May, and ceafe to flow about the fourteenth of 
 September. The moft celebrated Baths in Germany 
 are, the leaden ones in Louvain -, the Emfenbadtt 
 above Conft&nce ; thofe near Geberfweil in Alfatia ; 
 thofe in the Marquifate of Baden ; thofe in the 
 Dukedom of Wirtemberg, called midbad; the Cel- 
 lenfean Baths y the Blafianian Baths, near Tubingen, 
 &c. There are many in Japan and the Indian 
 Iflands : and fome in the Azores fo hot that Eggs 
 may be boiled hard in them. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 To explain the Caufe and Generatoin of oily and fat 
 Liquids that flow out of the Eartb, and to enume- 
 rate the Places in which the chief of them are 
 found. 
 
 SOME Fountains pour out a bituminous Li- 
 quor, others a fat Water, or Water in which 
 Drops of Oil fwim about. Two Miles from - 
 
 (d) They bed account for which Commixture arifes a 
 
 the Heat of thefe Fountains, great Fermentation that caufes 
 
 who fuppofe, that two Streams Heat, as we fee in ^7/r/W and 
 
 having run thro', and imbib- 'Tartar, which when mingled 
 
 ed certain Sorts of different caufe an intenfe Heat and 
 
 Minerals, meet at laft, and Ebullition. See the lafl mii- 
 
 mingle their Liquors ; from tinned Philof. Tranfaft. 
 
 B b 4 dinburgh
 
 376 The Abjolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 dinburgh in Scotland there flows a Fountain upon 
 the Superficies of which fwim Drops of black Oil, 
 which the Inhabitants ule o ibften their Skins, 
 and to remove Scabbinefs (Y). Among the An- 
 tients a River in Cilicia called Liparis was famous, 
 in which they that wafned themfelves, were there- 
 by anointed as if they had been in Oil > but I 
 doubt whether there be any fuch River now. So 
 likewife there was a Lake in Ethiopia which anoin- 
 ted thofe that fwam in it. In India alfo there 
 was a Fountain which, in a clear Sky, fern out 
 abundance of Oil. At Carthage there was a Foun- 
 tain upon which floated an Oil that fmelled like 
 the Saw-duft of a Citron-Tree : this they made 
 uie of to anoint their Cattle with. JSitntvius tells 
 us, that there were Fountains in the Ifland of 
 Zant, and about Dyrrhachium, now Durazzo, and 
 Apolloma, that vomited out a great deal of Pitch 
 with the Water. Near Babylon there was a vaftly 
 
 (e] Pliny faith, that the Salo- 
 niatt Fountain, and Andrian 
 Spring flow with Oil and 
 Wine. ' Polytlytui relates, that 
 near Soli a City of Ciluia 
 there was a Spring that fup 
 plied the Place of Oil. 72w- 
 pbra/?ui fays, that there was 
 a Spring in Ethiopia which 
 had the fame Faculty ; that 
 the Water of the Spring Lycos 
 would burn by putting a Can- 
 dle to it ; and the fame is re- 
 ported of Ecbatana? Clarke 
 upon Robaulfs Pbyf. Vol. 2. Pag. 
 20 1. Many fuch Fountains of 
 Petroleum, and oily Subrtances, 
 are now to Be 1 met with up and 
 down ; as at Pitcbford'in Sbrop- 
 pire, and in the Ifland ofZaat, 
 Very plentifully ; in the Falta- 
 line, fubjeft to the Grifons ; at 
 the Foot of Mount Zebia in the 
 
 Duchy of M dena; at Ga*>ian 
 in the Road from Montfellier 
 to Be^iers in Languedoc. The 
 Inhabitants living near thefe fat 
 oiiy Springs, take Care to gather 
 and feparate the Bituminous fub- 
 ftance from the Water; They 
 gather it with Ladles, and put- 
 ting it into a Barrel, feparate the 
 Water from the Oil by letting 
 out the firft at a Tap towards 
 the Bottom of the Veflel. In 
 the Ifland of Barbadoes there is 
 a Rivulet, called Tugh River, 
 which hath upon it's Surface in 
 many Places a certain oily Sub- 
 ilance, which being carefully 
 taken off, and kept a little 
 Time, is fit to burn in Lamps 
 like ordinary Oil. Near Cape 
 Helene in Peru there are Foun- 
 tains of Rofin (or fomething like 
 it] which flow in Abundance. 
 
 broad
 
 CHAP. 17. of Unherfal Geography. 377 
 broad Lake, called AJpbaltites Limne, that had a 
 liquid Bitumen fwimming upon it, with which 
 Semiramis cemented the large Brick- Walls which 
 furrounded Babylon. At this Day there is a Foun- 
 tain near Degemfce, a Monaftery in Bavaria, whofe 
 Surface is covered with Oil, which is daily car- 
 ried away by the Natives. There are alib great 
 Lakes in Syria and Africa which lend forth Heaps 
 of Bitumen. The Acidula at Scbwalbacb if they 
 be kept quiet in a VefTel for fome Hours, there 
 will be fmall Drops of Oil fwimming on the Top of 
 them. A greater quantity of fuch Drops are found 
 in a Fountain called Odbrunn near the Village Lam- 
 ferfchlocb not far from Hagenaw. And in moll 
 Baths there are found bituminous Particles, after 
 they have ftood to fettle for fome Time i as in the 
 Petrolean Baths in the Kingdom of Naples. 
 
 THERE are alfo great Numbers of Foun- 
 tains which do not produce Oil on their Surfaces, 
 but pour out a meer fat or bituminous Liquor. 
 Near Gerjbacb in the Valley called Leberjlbal^ there 
 flows from an old exhaufted Mine a thick Oil or 
 Bitumen which the Country People ufe inftead of 
 Greafe to the Axle-Trees of their Wheels, but 
 they are ignorant of it's fuperior Virtues ; for 
 Tbernbeuferus tells us, that an excellent Balfam may 
 be prepared from it. In the Ifland Sumatra there 
 is a Fountain which pours out a kind of liquid 
 Petroleum : fome fay it is a kind of Balfam ; there 
 are faid to be alfo Fountains of Ambergris there. 
 They find a bituminous Fountain in Peru near the 
 Sea, which emits a fmall Rivulet into it, and is ufed 
 by the Inhabitants inftead of Pitch ; neither have 
 they any other fort of Matter fo like it. Not far 
 from Scbimacbian in Perfia, at the Foot of the high 
 Mountain Barmacb, there are about thirty Fountains 
 that fend out a Naphtha or bituminous Subftance ; 
 but they lie lw, and faring with great Violence 
 
 into
 
 378 The Abjolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 into Wells about two Ells deep, which are made 
 with wooden Steps for the Conveniency of defcend- 
 ing. They emit a ftrong fulphureous Spirit, which 
 is of two Colours ; in fome places red, and in o- 
 thers white ; the later is of a more pleafant Smell. 
 THE Caufe of thefe bituminous Fountains is 
 a fulphureous and bituminous Matter melted in 
 the Bowels of the Earth, and prefied upwards by 
 a hot Spirit. Their Differences arife from the dif- 
 ferent fat Minerals that fupply them ; as Amber- 
 gris, Amber, the Oil of Petrol, Pitch, Naphtha, 
 Bitumen, &c. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 20 explain the Origin of Waters that tafte litter ; and 
 to enumerate the Places of the Earth in which they 
 are found. 
 
 O N the Shore of Cormandel in India there are 
 feveral Springs and Wells whofe Waters are bit- 
 ter tho' they fpring up among the Rocks. In 
 Pontu^ a Province of Afici minor ^ there is a fmall 
 Rivulet at the Town of Callipade y called Exam- 
 fean^ whofe Water is bitter ; this makes the River 
 Hypanis alfo bitter, into which it flows. The Rea- 
 der may collect feveral more Examples. 
 
 THEY come from an impure Sulphur, Bitu- 
 men, Nitre, Copperas, Copper j as Water by long 
 ftanding in a Copper Veflel, acquires a bitter tafte. 
 But I cannot credit what Molina delivers in his 
 Defcription of Gallicia, viz. that there is a Lake 
 in Ireland whofe Waters are one half of the Day 
 fweet, and the other half bitter. 
 
 THE Lake Afpbaltites^ which is alfo called 
 the Dead Sea, in Palefline^ hath bitter Waters, 
 becaufe of an impure Bitumen mixed with them, 
 fo that by right it belongs to the /at Waters in 
 c^i the
 
 CHAP. 17. of Unfoerfal Geography. 37^ 
 the kit Propofition. It fends forth a naufeous 
 {linking Vapour. Every thing without Life is 
 there drawn to die Bottom : but it fuffers no li- 
 ving Creature to fink ; neither does it grow fweeter 
 tho' it abforbs the whole River Jordan that con- 
 ftantly flows into it. It's Waters are poifonous by 
 reafon of it's containing Arfenic (/). 
 $di <<; .-.; -w -. I -ttwitfut^ipoSr 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 to explain the Caufe of very cold Springs, and to 
 enumerate the Place* of the Earth in which they 
 are chiefly found. 
 
 NOT far from Vienne in the Province of 
 Dauphine in France there is a Fountain fo cold, 
 that it fwells the Mouth of thofe that drink it - 9 
 nor can any one endure his Hands in it. It is 
 not diminimed when Water is drawn out of it, 
 nor augmented by pouring it in. On the Coaft 
 of Abex in Ethiopia (formerly inhabited by the 
 Troglodytes] there are extream cold Fountains, tho' 
 the Sun be exceflive hot there. Four Miles from 
 Gratz in Stiria, are Fountains boiling up in a low 
 Place, fo cold that none can drink the Water run- 
 ning or drawn from thence. About a Mile from 
 Culma there is a Fountain that pours out Water 
 with a ftrong Spirit as if it were boiling, tho' it 
 be very cold, which makes them call it the 
 Mad-Water. 
 
 (f) Our Countryman Mr and it bore his Body in Ayim- 
 
 Maundrel obferved this Lake ming with aniincommon Force; 
 
 narrowly upon the Spot'; but but as to the Report of a Man 
 
 could not perceive any Smoak wading into it as high as his Na- 
 
 or Vapour afcending above the vel, will be buoyed up by it, 
 
 Surface of the Water, as is de- this he found not to be true, 
 
 fcribed in the Writings of Geo- Salmon. 
 graphers. He alfo went into it, 
 
 .
 
 380 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV e 
 
 THE Caufe of their Coldnefs is, i. A Mixture 
 of Nitre and Alum, alfo of Mercury and Iron, &? c . 
 2. The great Depth from whence they fpring, fo 
 that they want the Rays of the Sun, and the ful- 
 phureous Heat under Ground. 
 
 THERE are alfo Fountains that are cold 
 and hot by turns. In Catalonia there is a fait 
 Fountain and Lake, which are extream hot in the 
 Winter and as cold in Summer. This is common 
 to feveral others. I fuppofe the Caufe of it is, 
 that the Pores of the Earth, being open in Sum- 
 mer, let out the fubterranean hot Spirit thro* 
 them : which being fhut in during Winter, keep 
 it as in a Furnace or Oven, to warm the Water. 
 Thus fome Fountains are hotter in the Night than 
 in the Day. 
 
 PROPOSITION XL 
 
 j \ 
 
 o explain the Origin of tbofe Waters that feem to 
 turn Bodies into other Species , and to enumerate the 
 Places of the Earth in which they are found. 
 
 T H E R E are fome Waters which petrify Wood 
 or turn it into hard Stone. A little above the 
 City of Armagh in Ireland^ there is a fmall Lough, 
 in which if a ftick of Wood be fixed, and con- 
 tinue for fome Months, the Part that is faft in 
 the Mud becomes Iron, and that in the Water 
 turns to a Whetftone, and that above .Water con- 
 timies to be Wood. This is reported by Giraldus 
 and Maginus : but Brietius, by what authority I 
 know not, fays that it is a Fable throughout (g). 
 
 In 
 
 ' Ki '/ 
 
 (g ) There is certainly no fuch fying quality ; but upon due ex- 
 
 Lougb as this in Ireland; their animation it is found, that the 
 
 famous Lough Neagb was for- find quality is to be afcribed to 
 
 nvcrly thought to have a petri- the Soil of the Ground adjacent 

 
 CHAP. 17. ofUniverfal Geography. 381 
 In the North Part of Ulfter (a Province in Ire- 
 land) there is a Fountain, in which if Wood be 
 immerfed feven Years it will be petrified. There 
 are Loches of Water in the Province of BeauJJs 
 in France^ that petrify every thing thrown into 
 them. At the Town of Sens in [Champagne] near 
 
 Lake are afterwards taken out 
 and converted into Stones. 
 The fame Thing happens in 
 fome Parts of Italy, if you put 
 in a Rod or a green Leaf, in a 
 few Days after, you take out a 
 Stone. And Pliny Book 2. 
 Chap. 103. fays, * In the 
 Cicous River, and in the Lake 
 oSVelinus, in the Country of 
 Marca di Ancona, Wood caft 
 in is covered over with aftony 
 Bark, and alfo in Surias a 
 River in Colchis ; fo that a 
 hard Bark commonly covers 
 over the Stone ftill. So like- 
 wife in the River Sitarius, be- 
 yondSarretum,noton\y Rods 
 put in, butalfo Leaves turn in- 
 to Stone ; the Water is other- 
 wife very wholefome to drink. 
 Clarke upon RobaulfsPbyf. Vol. 
 2. Pag. 202. InthelfbndofH*);- 
 jian near China there is a Water 
 of fuch a ftrange quality that it 
 petrifies fome fort of Fifties 
 when they unfortunately chance 
 to enter into it. Among the 
 Quiekfilver Mines in Guiana- 
 vilica in Peru, is a Fountain of 
 hot Water whofe Current hav- 
 ing run a confiderable way, turns 
 at laft into a foft kind of Rock, 
 which being eafily cut, and yet 
 very lafting, is ufually employ- 
 ed for building of Houfes there- 
 abouts. There are feveral pe- 
 trifying, and incruftating Wa- 
 ters in Hrginia, &c. 
 
 a Lake, 
 
 to the Lake, rather than to the 
 Water of the Lake itfelf. There 
 are feme Waters in Scot/and that 
 petrify : As in G/eye/y, at a Place 
 called Acbigniglium, there is a 
 Rivulet which fo turns Holly in- 
 to 3 greenifh Stone, that they or- 
 dinarily make Moulds of it for 
 calling of Balls for Fuzees ; and 
 Tinkers that work in Brafs 
 make both their Moulds, and 
 melting Pots of it, and Wo- 
 men their round W'barlf for 
 fpinning. Alfo upon the 
 north Side of the Firth of Forth 
 there is a Cave, from the Top 
 of which drops Water that in 
 falling makes long Columns re- 
 fembling the Pipes of a Church 
 Organ, and fome of different 
 Figures. See Pbilof. Tranf. a- 
 bridged by Low thorp. Vol. 2. 
 Page 321, 325. There is a 
 River in Thrace which if you 
 drink of it, will turn your 
 Bowels into Stone, and cafes 
 with Marble whatever is put 
 into it. Concerning which Se- 
 neca thusfpeaks in his Natural. 
 S>usfl. Book 3. Chap. 20. the 
 Mad of it is of thatNature that 
 it glues Bodies together, and 
 hardens them. As the Duft of 
 Puteoli, if it touches the Wa- 
 ter, it becomes Stone, fo on 
 the contrary, this Water, if it 
 touches any thing folid, flicks, 
 and cleaves to it. Hence it is 
 that Things thrown into this
 
 3 82 The Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 a Lake, there flows a petrifying Fountain. Vi- 
 truvius tells us that there is a broad Lake, be- 
 tween Mazaca and Tuana in Cappadocia, which 
 changes a Reed or a ftick of Wood, in one Day, 
 into Stone. There is a Fountain near Charles's 
 Baths in Bohemia, in which if Wood lie long it 
 is turned into Stone. Such as thefe are found in 
 divers other Places. Other Waters are thought 
 to change Iron into Copper, whkh in fact they 
 do not, only becaufe thefe Waters carry the Spirit 
 and Particles of Vitriol and Copper, they eat out, 
 and by little and little diflblve, the Particles of 
 Copper as they flow along with the Water. 
 
 THE Caufe why thefe Waters turn Wood into 
 Stone is, i . Some do not change the Wood itfelf 
 into Stone ; but the earthy, ftoney, faline Par- 
 ticles contained in the Water ftick to the Wood, 
 and only incruftate it with a ftony Cruft. 2. O- 
 thers do not change the Wood into Stone, but 
 give it a hardnefs equal to that of Stone. 3 . If 
 any Water have a true petrifying Quality, I fup- 
 pofe it may be accounted for thus (). The chief 
 
 Difference 
 
 (b) ' [In the Summer of the 
 year 1729, 1 happened to fee 
 the famous petrifying Spring 
 calledDr opping Wella\ Knaref- 
 borougb in Yiirkfeire. It arifes 
 fome yards from the Top of a 
 Break of hard marly Earth (I 
 cannot call it a Rock, it being 
 feveral Degrees more foft, and 
 crumbling than our common 
 Rygate Stone) made, I iuppofe, 
 fome time or other by the Ri- 
 ver Nild which flows very 
 near to it. The Current, 
 which is but fmall, runs to 
 the Breakwards, where be- 
 ing interrupted with Sticks, 
 
 Twigs, and Mofs laid for that 
 Purpofe on the Edge of it, it 
 is diffufed all over the Stone, 
 and partly gleets down the 
 fides, and partly falls perpen- 
 dicularly in Drops upon fome 
 Pebbles, where there is a 
 fmall Matter of Water below. 
 ' This Well doth by no means 
 petrify Wood, Mofs, fcfr. put 
 into it, butonly incrufts them 
 all over with a ftony Cruft ; 
 Neither hath it this incrufting 
 quality (at the Spring Head) 
 before it comes to the Break, 
 and runs down, or drop, from 
 the foft marly Stone. 
 
 I am
 
 CHAP. 17. ofUniverfal Geography. 383 
 Difference that can be perceived by the Eye be- 
 tween Wood and Stone is, that in the Wood there 
 are as it were long Fibres in which it's Parts co- 
 here, tho' not very clofe. But in Stone the Particles, 
 being as it were Sands or Atoms, are not joined 
 by any extended Fibres. If therefore it be the 
 Nature of any Water to diffolve, and, as it were, 
 grind the long fibrous Particles of Wood, that 
 they do no more cohere after this Manner, but 
 are flill more condenfed, the Difference between 
 it and Stone will not be fo great as to be dif- 
 cerned by the Eye 5 yet it is probable that thefe 
 
 * I am the larger upon this, 
 becaufe it feems to point out 
 the trueReafonofPetrifaclion; 
 for is it not hence reafonable 
 to fuppofe ? that the Water 
 gleetingdown the fides of the 
 foft Stone, corrodes the minu- 
 teftofit's Particles, and isim- 
 pregnated with them ; which 
 are again feparated from the 
 Water, by putting fticks of 
 Wood into it, (by the Power 
 of Attracting) as we fee fome 
 kinds of Salt feparated from 
 Water by the like Means, and 
 other Bodies feparated from 
 thofe that are compounded 
 with them, by fuch as are 
 found by Experience to attract 
 their Particles. Now when 
 thefe Particles are fo minute 
 and fubtile, as to intrude with 
 the Water into the Pores of 
 the Wood, in procefsof Time, 
 when it is throughly foaked, 
 the Interfaces will be quite 
 filled with ftony Particles ; and 
 if any thing ligneous remain, 
 it is fo well guarded and in- 
 crullated by thefe Particles 
 that it is not perceptible, nor 
 
 to be aled upon by Fire : but 
 if fas in the prefent Cafe) the 
 Particles are not fo minute as 
 to penetrate the Pores of the 
 Wood, they only flick clofe 
 to the outfide of it, and parget 
 it over (as it were) by degrees 
 to a confiderable thicknefs. 
 ' What ftrengthens this Opi- 
 nion very much is ; that the 
 Particles of the Cafe or Craft, 
 when ground to powder, are, 
 to all appearance, like the Par- 
 ticles of the Stone from 
 whence theWater drops, only 
 the later is fomething whiter 
 and rounder. 
 
 ' Is not therefore fuch fub- 
 terraneous Earth as this, thro* 
 which the Water, of fuchlika 
 Qualities, runs, the Caufeof 
 Petrifaction ? 
 
 ' Becaufe we may gather 
 from hence the Reafons why 
 Fountains petrify fome forts 
 of Wood throughout, but not 
 others ; alfo why fome petri- 
 fy only the Bark, Sap, or 
 fofteft Part, and others only 
 iucafe it, &e. 
 
 mineral
 
 384 be Abfolute Part SECT. IV, 
 
 mineral Waters communicate fome Subftance even 
 to Wood itfelf. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 20 explain the Caufe of poifonom or lethiferous Wa- 
 ters ; and to enumerate the Place* of the Earth in 
 which fbey are found. 
 
 THE Lake Afpbahites is one of thefe, having 
 Arfenic mixed with Bitumen in it (Y). The Foun- 
 tain of Neptunty near Terracina in the Country 
 of the Volfdam was famous of old, becaufe all that 
 drunk of it immediately loft their Lives ; and 
 therefore it was filled up with Stones by the In- 
 habitants. At Cbycros in Tbracia there was a Lake 
 that killed. not only thofe who drunk of it, but 
 even thofe that warned in it. There is a Foun- 
 tain in Tbeffaly which Cattle are not fuffered to 
 tafte, nor any kind of Beaft to come near it. Vi- 
 truvius relates, that there is fuch deadly Water 
 as this near the Sepulchre of Euripides in Mace- 
 donia. As to the Spring and River Styx in the 
 
 (f) Near Efperies in Upper ' and well ftored with delicate 
 Hungary are two deadly Foun- ' Fi(h; yet in the three Sum- 
 tains whofe Waters fend forth mer Months, June, Ju.'y, 
 fach an infectious Steam that it ' and Av.guft, it becomes every 
 kills either Beaft or Bird ap- Year green in the middle 
 preaching the fsme; for the with an hairy Efflorefcence; 
 preventing of which they are which green Sabitanre being 
 walled round and kept always by fome violent Wind forced 
 covered. In Ireland there is afliore, and with the Water 
 a Lake which commonly lends drunk by any Cattle, Dog, or 
 up fuch a peftilentious Vapour, < Poultry, caufeth certain and 
 as frequently kills Birds that en- fudden Death'. See Mr Kirk- 
 deavour to fly over it. ' Near y's Obfervations upon it in 
 ' Dantzic there is an inland Pbilof. TranJ. N 83. Beyond 
 
 Sea made by the Confluence of the Falls of Rapabanaf in Vir- 
 
 * three Rivers, whole Waters ginia there are faid to be poi- 
 ' are fweet and whoiefome, ibnous Waters, &f- 
 
 Mountain
 
 C H A P. 1 7. of Unlverfal Geography. 385 
 Mountain Nonacrh in Arcadia , the Antients write 
 that it fprings out of the Rocks, and is fo cold 
 and venomous that it is called a River of Hell 3 
 alfo that it can be contained in no fort of Vefiel 
 made of Silver, Brafs, or Iron, but only in the 
 Hoof of a Mule. Some Hiftorians write, that 
 Alexander the Great was poifoned with this Water, 
 by Jolla the Son of Antipater, not without a Sufpi- 
 cion of Arijlotlfs being concerned in it. l r ilru- 
 vius writes, that there was a Water, in the King- 
 dom of Coitus on the Alps, which whoever tailed 
 immediately fell down dead. At this Day there 
 are leveral poifonous Springs found on or about 
 the Alps, but the greateft Part of them are flop- 
 ped up with Stones , fo that they are not fo much 
 as taken Notice of. 
 
 THE Caufe of fuch Waters is their running or 
 gleeting thro' arfenical, mercurial, and antimonial 
 Earths, whereby they are impregnated with their 
 Fumes , for as the Smoke, or -Fume, of Arfsnic 
 kills living Creatures, fo Waters impregnated with 
 fuch a Fume do the fame. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 To explain the Caufe and Differences of coloured Wa- 
 ters \ and to enumerate the Places of the Earth in 
 which they are found. 
 
 ' ' 'ifj 9j{--'i!'V L ?.'*" '' ' ~'{ *!?O V^W~~ ' "^ ' f.i"K* r - ' } 
 
 A T the Town of Chinon in Touraine (a Pro- 
 vince in France] there is a yellowifh Spring gufhes 
 out of a Cave, and as it flows is concreted into 
 a. Stone. In the Kingdom of Congo in Africa there 
 is a River of a red Colour that flows into the 
 Sea. In the Valley of St George near Sultzmat in 
 Alfatia there is a Fountain of red Water, called 
 Rotbwaffer. The Rubicon, (fo called from it's red- 
 nefs) now Pifatello, in Italy, flows from the top 
 
 VOL. I. Cc of
 
 386 *fbe Abfolute Part SECT. IV. 
 
 of the higheft Alps. There are fome Fountains 
 of black, greeniiri, and other colour'd Waters, 
 but thefe are very rare (&). 
 
 THE Caufe of the Colour of thefe Waters, is, 
 the Colour of the Earth thro* which they run, be- 
 fore they come to the Fountain-Head. 
 
 PRO POSITION XIV. 
 
 To explain the Origin of fait Waters ; and to enume- 
 rate the Places in wbicb they are found. 
 
 THEY are owing to two Caufes. i. Some 
 proceed from the Sea in fubterraneous Pafiages, to 
 the Superficies of the Earth, where they fpring up. 
 2. Others are generated from the Salt contained 
 in the Bowels of the Earth, by pervading the Pla- 
 ces where it lies, and mixing with it's Particles and 
 Spirits, before they come to the Fountain. Salt 
 Fountains are very common, and known to every 
 one. In Germany there are thole at Hall, in the 
 County of Tyrol, at Hall in Upper Saxony, at Hall 
 in Swabia, and at Hallen in Bavaria ; likewife thole 
 in the Archbifhopric of Saltzburg, in the Duchy 
 of Magdeburg, at Saltzburg in Lorrain ; and feveral 
 others in other Places, which make up almofl one 
 hundred. We need not fay any more to them 
 here, fmce we alfo treated of them in the laft 
 Chapter , and every one knows whence they pro- 
 
 (k) In the Province of Los in Northumberland, there is 
 
 Carcas in Peru, there is a Foun- Water comes from an old Drifr, 
 
 tain, out of which iffues a con- formerly made to drain Coal- 
 
 fiderable Current, of a Colour Pits, which has an atramentous 
 
 almoft as red as Blood. Near Quality, and is turned as black 
 
 Yfovitle in Somerfetjbire, there as Ink, by an Infufion of Galls, 
 
 is a Pool which contains a There are feveral of thefe atra- 
 
 gi eenilh fort of vitriolic Water, mentous Springs in other Coun- 
 
 At Bajil, there is a Spring of a tries, 
 blueifa Colour. At Eglingbam, 
 
 i ceed,
 
 CHAP. 17. of Univerfal Geography. 387 
 ceed, viz. from hidden Quantities of Salt, lying 
 here and there under Ground j it being itfelf an 
 Element. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 fo explain the Caufe of Wiling Fountains, and thofe 
 that break out of the Ground with great Force ; and 
 to enumerate the Places of the Earth, in which they 
 are found. 
 
 THE Caufe is partly a fulphureous, and part- 
 ly a nitrous Spirit, mixed with the Waters under 
 Ground ; if it be fulphureous, the Waters are hot ; 
 if nitrous, they are cold , but all that boil and 
 bubble up like hot Fountains are not fo, but fe- 
 veral of them are cold , as that near Culma, called 
 the Mad Water, which we mentioned in Propofi- 
 tion 10. The River Tamaga, inGallicia, rifes from 
 a Lake, and at it's breaking out, makes an odd 
 kind of bellowing Noife, for fome Months of the 
 Year (/). The ftrange hot Fountain in Japan, 
 
 which 
 
 (I) There is a boiling Foun- of a lighted Candle, it takes 
 
 tain at Peroul, not far from Fire. One like this was difco- 
 
 Montpeliier, that heaves and vered in the Year 1711, at 
 
 rifes in fmall Bubbles; which Brofeiay, near Wenlock, in the 
 
 manifeftly proceeds from a Va- County of Salop : It was firft 
 
 pour, breaking out of the Earth; found out by a terrible uncom- 
 
 for upon digging any where near mon Noife in the Night ; th 
 
 the Ditch, and pouring other Noife was fo great, that it a- 
 
 Water upon the dry Place new- wakened feVeral People in their 
 
 ly dug, it produces the fame Beds, that lived hard by, who 
 
 boiling. The like bubbling of got up to fee what it was, and 
 
 Water is found round about found the Earth to rumble and 
 
 Peroal, upon the Sea-Shore; fluke in a Place near the Se- 
 
 and in the Etang itfelf. There vern, and a little boiling up of 
 
 is a famous boiling or flaming Water through the Grafs. They 
 
 Well near Wigan in Laneajbire, took a Spade, and digging up 
 
 with which you may boil an fome part of the Earth, imme 
 
 and upon the approaching diately the Water flew up a great
 
 388 fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 which (as we obferved in Proportion 7J only 
 flows twice daily, and at each time about an Hour. 
 When it begins to flow, it is caft out with fuch 
 Force and Vehemency of Spirits, as to heave up 
 great Stones laid on it's Mouth, and flies three or 
 four Yards high, with a Noife refembling the Re- 
 port of a great Gun. In Weftphalia^ there is a 
 Fountain called Bolderborn^ becaufe of the great 
 Noife it makes in fpringing. 
 
 ACID UL M, and moft hot Baths, break out 
 alfo with a great Force of Spirits, and boil up as 
 if they were boiling hot ; in Baths it is caufed by 
 a fulphureous Spirit, and in Spaws and Acidul<z y 
 by the Spirit of Vitriol and Nitre, &V. 
 
 Height, and a Candle that was 
 in their Hand fet it on Fire. 
 To prevent the Spring being 
 dellroyed, there is an Iron Ci- 
 ftcrn placed about it, with a 
 Cover upon it to be locked, 
 and a Hole in the Middle there- 
 of, that any who come may fee 
 the Water through. If you put 
 a lighted Candle, or any thing 
 of fire to this Hole, the Water 
 takes Fire, and burns like Spi- 
 rit of Wine or Brandy. Some 
 People out of Curiofity, after 
 they have fet the Water on Fire, 
 have put a Kettle of Water 
 over the Ciftern, and in it a 
 Joint of Meat, and boiled it 
 much fooner than over any ar- 
 tificial Fire that can be made. 
 Yet what is moft ilrange, the 
 Water ofitfelf is as cold as any 
 Water can be, even juft when 
 the Fire is put out. Of the 
 fame fort is that near Grenoble 
 
 in Daupbin'e ; that near Herman- 
 ftadt in Tranfylvania ; that near 
 Cher may, a Village in Switzer- 
 land; that in the Canton of 
 Friburg, and that not far from 
 Cracow, in Poland. There are 
 many hiffing Springs, bubbling 
 at the top,in Sieitzer/.ind, and 
 in other Places near the Rhine. 
 There are fome boiline Waters 
 that are hot to feveral Degrees, 
 fo as to boil Eggs, and other 
 things pat into them ; as thofe 
 near the Solfatera, not far from 
 Naples ; as alfo upon the top of 
 Mount Zebio, in the Duke of 
 MoJena's Territories, not far 
 from this Villa, near Saffalo ; in 
 the Source of the Emperor's 
 Bath at Men, in the County of 
 Juliers, sY. This in part from 
 Dr Tancred Robin/en's Obferva- 
 tions upon boiling Fountains, in 
 Lowtborp's Abridgment, Vol. II. 
 Pag. 329.
 
 C H A P. 1 7. of Utiiverfal Geography. 389 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 fT<? enumerate the Waters that have other flrange Pro- 
 perties^ and to enquire into the Caufes of them. 
 
 HITHER ought all fuch to be referred, as 
 cannot be conveniently reduced to the former Clafs. 
 There is a Fountain at Cadima (eight Leagues from 
 Coimbra) in Portugal, which fwallows up whatever 
 is thrown into it ; and there was formerly near to 
 this, one that vomited up whatever was thrown in- 
 to it, but it is now flopped. Eufebius Nierember- 
 gius relates, that there is a Lake not far from Gua- 
 daiana in Andalufia, which fortels a Storm, for 
 when a Storm is approaching, it breaks out with 
 horrible Roarings and Howlings, which may be 
 heard at eighteen or twenty Miles diftance *. There 
 is a Well near Calais ', in \P\car die, ~\ into which if 
 you throw a Stone, you'll hear a Noife in the Ca- 
 vity, like a prolonged Thunder-Clap. There are 
 fome Wells on the Alps, whofe Waters caufe thole 
 that drink of them, to have great Swellings about 
 their Necks. There is a Fountain near the Town 
 of Anteque in the Province of Granada, which is of 
 fuch a Nature, as to diflblve Rocks. 
 
 NEAR 'Tours, a Town in France, People vi- 
 fit the dropping Caves, (called les Caves goutlieres] 
 from whofe Concavity Drops of Water fall in feve- 
 ral Figures, as that of Nuts, Almonds, &c. 
 
 THE hot Fountain in Japan, fchorches and con- 
 fumes every thing put into it, Iron, Flefh, Cloth, 
 
 efc. 
 
 THERE was formerly a Fountain at Clitor, 
 a Town in Arcadia, whofe Water, being drunk 
 
 * There is faid to be one like this near Guadalaxara in New 
 
 Cc 3 by
 
 390 The Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 by any Perfon, made him have an Averfion to 
 Wine. 
 
 THERE was a Spring in the IQand of Chios, 
 -made thofe that tafted thereof ftupid ; and at Sufa 
 in Perfia^ there was a little Well, which made their 
 Teeth fall out that drank thereof. The Studious 
 may collect feveral other ftrange Properties of 
 Fountains, in reading of Authors. Their Caufes 
 proceed from the Situation, or peculiar Properties 
 of the Places where they are found (m). 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 
 -To enumerate tbofe Fountains that flow only at certain 
 Times, or that ebb and flow j and to explain their 
 Caufe. 
 
 THIS Propofition belongs to the preceding 
 Chapter, becaufe it is about marvellous Waters, 
 and being then omitted, it mail be explained here. 
 
 (m) Jofepbus, the Hiftorian, 
 tells us of a River, which for fix 
 Days runs violently fwift, and 
 refteth on the feventh always; 
 wherefore it is called the River 
 of the Sabbath. Tavernier tells 
 of a Well at Schiras in Perjia, 
 which is fifteen Years rifing to 
 the top, and fifteen Years link- 
 ing to the bottom. ' About 
 two Leagues from Paderborn, 
 is a treble Spring called Me- 
 A&0r, which has three Streams 
 two whereof are not above a 
 Foot and a halfdiftant from 
 one another, and yet of (o dif- 
 ferent Qualities, that whereas 
 one of them is limpid, blue- 
 ifh, lukewarm, and bubbling! 
 the other is Ice-cold, turbid, 
 whitifh, and heavier than the 
 
 former, and alfo killeth all 
 Poultry that drink of it. As 
 to the third Stream that lies 
 lower than the other two, a- 
 bouttwenty Pacesdiltantfrora 
 them.isofagreenifh Colour, 
 very clear, and of a four fweet 
 Tafle, pleafing enough.' Pbi- 
 lof. Tranf. N 7. Pag. 133. 
 At the City of Toledo in Spain, 
 there is a Fountain, whofe Wa- 
 ters near the bottom, are of an 
 acid Tafte, but towards the Sur- 
 face extreamly fweet. Near to 
 Sanyenga (a Village not far from 
 Rio de la Grace, in Negroland) 
 is a Well often Fathom deep, 
 whofe Water is naturally fo ve- 
 ry fweet, that in Ta(te it comes 
 nothing (hort of ordinary Sugar. 
 Gordon. 
 
 IN
 
 C H A P. 1 7. of U?2herfal Geography. 3 9 r 
 
 I N Wales, not far from Dinevowr Caftle [near 
 Carmarthen^] there is a Fountain which ebbs and 
 flows every day with the Sea. and obferves it's Hours. 
 
 THE like Flux and Reflux, is obferved in ano- 
 ther on the top of a high Hill, in the Province of 
 Contiaught in Ireland^ and yet the Water is fweet ; 
 the fame is obferved in the Fountain Lou-Zara, 
 upon the Chabretian Mountains in Gallicia, twenty 
 Leagues from the Sea ; alfo in the Village Mar face 
 in Guienne^ there is a Fountain that follows the Tides 
 at Sea, and flows at the fame Time with the Ga- 
 ronne at Bourdeaux. There are other Fountains 
 that are faid to increafe and decreafe contrary to 
 the Tides, fuch as Strabo and Mela report to have 
 been in the Ifland of Gades (Cadiz) (). 
 
 I N Walei , near the Mouth of the River Severn, 
 there is a Pool called Linliguna, which fwallows up 
 the Water of the Flood Tides, as long as they 
 flow (but is not increafed thereby) : but when 
 they begin to ebb, then it begins to rife, and to 
 vomit out the Water with great Vehemence all 
 round it's Banks. 
 
 I N Cantabria (Bifcay) there are the Tamarician 
 Fountains, of which three out of the four, are dri- 
 ed up twelve times every day, fo that there feems 
 
 (77) At a fmall Village called Tranf. N 104. Pag. 909. [There 
 
 Newton, in Glamorgan/}} ire, is are two Fountains in Craven in 
 
 a remarkable Spring nigh the Yorkfhire, which ebb and f.szu ; 
 
 Sea, which ebbs and flows con- one at Gigglefweek, called 
 
 trary to the Tides. * Lay-Well, Ebbs and Flows, which dees 
 
 near Torbay, ebbs and flows fo regularly every Day ; the o- 
 
 very often every Hour, vi- ther at Hebden, called Thrus- 
 
 fibly enough ; fometimes fix- kil, which fatnetimes (even in 
 
 teen, fometimes twenty times, a great Drought, when there 
 
 The Diilance between high has been no Rain for a Monti}) 
 
 and low Water Mark, is a- breaks out with a great Force, 
 
 bout five or fix Inches. It is of whitijh, muddy, troubled 
 
 very pleafant to drink, and Water; though at other times 
 
 feems to have no Communi- it rum very clear, and affords 
 
 cation with the Sea'. Phi/of, excellent fweet Water. 
 
 Cc 4 to
 
 392 Ibe Absolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 to be no Water in them. Pliny relates this, but I 
 queftion whether fuch are to be found now. 
 
 IN the Djkedom of Anjou, above Saumur, 
 there is a Village called Varuas, from whence a Ri- 
 vulet flows twice daily, and twice ceafts or ftag- 
 nates. 
 
 IN Savoy, there is a large Spring called the 
 Wonderful Fcunia'w, which ebbs twice every Hour 
 and flows twice, making a great Noife before it 
 begins to flow. It runs into the Lake Rourget. 
 
 O N the Mountains of Foix (in Languedoc, a 
 Province of France] near the Village Belle ft ade, is 
 the fource of the River Lers, wh'ch in June, Ju- 
 ly, and August, ebbs and flows twenty four times 
 every Day. Berthn relates this from Papyrius. 
 
 IN the part of Weftphalla, called Paderborn, 
 there is a Fountain that ebbs and flows twice every 
 Day, tho' it emits as much Water as, a little below 
 the Fountain, turns three Mill-wheels. It breaks 
 cut with a great Noiie, and therefore (as we faid 
 before) is called Bolderborn [/. e. the boijlrous 
 Spring], 
 
 I N the Town of Pillanma in Portugal, there is 
 a Fountain, commonly vifited, that flows only from 
 the beginning of May, to the beginning of No- 
 vember, and then leaves oft"; as Eufebius Nierem- 
 fargius relates. 
 
 I N the County of Palais, in Germany, not far 
 from the Baths called Lsitckerbad, there is a Foun- 
 tain called Si Mary's IVdl ; it ceales to fpring 
 on Si Mary's Day in Autumn, and returns in 
 May. 
 
 I N [Carmola,~\ not far from Laubacb, there is 
 a Lake that is fo dry in Summer, that it is lowed 
 and mowed (o). The Water returns in Autumn, 
 
 and 
 
 (<,} This Lake is fo very re- j Defcription here, which we fhall 
 jyrkablc, that it will defer* e a j give from Phihf. Tranfaci. NO 
 
 54.
 
 C H AP. 17. ofUnherfal Geography. 393 
 and brings Fifh with it. Not far from hence, 
 there is a Fountain that hath the fame Property. 
 
 SO 
 
 54, IO9 19'- It is called the 
 
 a Town upon it's Banks, of a 
 bout three hundred Houfes. The 
 Lake is near two German Miles 
 long, and one broad. It is fur- 
 rounded every where withmoun- 
 t/ms, and no where runs over. 
 
 ter, it draws to it feveral forts 
 of wild Geefe and Ducks, and 
 ether Water-Fowl, which may 
 be Ihot, and are very good 
 Meat. 2. As foon as the Lake 
 is emptied, they pluck up the 
 Rufhesand Weeds, which make 
 Litter for Cattle. 3. Twenty 
 
 In June, July, and fometimes Days after it is fully dry, they 
 not till Augujt, the Water runs cut a great Quantity of Hay upon 
 away, and links under Ground, 
 not only by Percolation, or fal 
 
 it. 4. After the Hay is in, they 
 plow it, and fow Millet, which 
 
 ling through the Pores of the generally comes to Maturity. 
 Earth, but by retiring under 
 Ground, thro' many great Holes 
 at the bottom ; the lictle, if any, 
 that remains in the hilly or rocky 
 Part, is evaporated; and in Octu- 
 ler or Nwemb. it molt common- 
 ly returns again ^though not at 
 any certain Time,) and foon co- 
 vers the Trad of E^rth again. 
 
 This Return and Afcent is fo yields great abundance of Fifh, 
 fpeedy, and it mounts at the which they catch in the Pits and 
 Holes with fuch Violence, that Places, where the Holes are nor 
 it fprings out of the Ground, to big enough to admit them un- 
 the height of a Pike. 
 
 The Holes are in the fhape of 
 Bafor.s or Cauldrons, which are 
 notofthefameDepihorBreadth, 
 being from twenty to fixty Cu- 
 bits more or lels broad, and from enough, but are (lark Blind, and 
 eight to twenty Cubits deep. In have few or noFeathers on them, 
 the Bottom of thefe are feveral They foon fee after they come 
 Holes, at which the Water and into the Light, and in a fmall 
 Fifhes enter, when the Lake 
 ebbs away. Thefe are not in 
 foft or loofe Earth, but com- 
 monly made in the folid Rock. 
 The Lake being thus every 
 Year wet and dry, ferves the In- 
 habitants for many purpofes. be, a Lake (yiz. a fubterraneous 
 For firft, while it is full of Wa- one} under the Bottom cf this, 
 
 with 
 
 5. There is great Variety of 
 Hunting ; there coming out of 
 the neighbouring Woods and 
 Mountains, plenty of Hares, 
 Foxes, Deer, Swine, Bears, &. 
 fo foon as the Water is gone. 
 
 6. When it is full, one may 
 Fiih in it. 7. All the Time 
 when the Water goes away, it 
 
 der Ground. Laftly, when the 
 Water returns, it brings a fort 
 of Ducks with it, which are 
 bred under Ground, and when 
 they firftcome out can fwimwcll 
 
 time get their Feathers, being 
 much like Wild-Duks, and are 
 ofa goodTafte, and e^filycaught. 
 The Caufe, or rather Modus, 
 of all thefe wonderfulPhsenome- 
 na in this Like, is fuppofed to
 
 3 94 The Abfolute Part S E c T. I V. 
 
 S O the Pool or Lake of Maron, between the 
 Sea of Galilee, and the City Helena, is fo dry in 
 Summer p , that it brings forth tall Herbs and Shrubs, 
 yielding flicker to Lions, Wolves, and other wild 
 Beafts. 
 
 I N Guienne, near the Church of St Jean An- 
 geli, there is another that hath almoft no Water in 
 it in Winter, but abundance in Summer. 
 
 THE like is found in Spain, about twelve 
 Miles from Valladolid, which begins to flow in May, 
 and gives over in November. 
 
 ALL hot Baths flow without ceafing, except 
 thofe, already mentioned, in the Gnfom Country. 
 
 with which it communicates by 
 the feveral Holes defcribed. 
 There are alfo one or more 
 Lakes, under the bordering 
 Mountain Javornitk, but whole 
 Surface is higher than that of" 
 the Lake of Zirebnitz. This 
 upper Lake is poffibly fed by 
 fomeofthe many Rivers, which 
 in this Country bury them- 
 ielves under Ground. When it 
 rains, efpechlly in Thunder- 
 Ihowers, which are the moft 
 hafty, the Water is precipita- 
 ted with great Violence down 
 the fteep Vallies, in which 
 
 are the Chanels of thefe Ri- 
 vulets ; fo that the Water in 
 this Lake being increafed by 
 the fudden coming of the 
 Rains, fafler than it can empty, 
 fwells prefently, and finding 
 feveral Holes or Caverns in the 
 Mountain higher than it's or- 
 dinary Surface, it runs over by 
 them into the fubterraneous 
 Lake under that of Zirchnitz, 
 into which the Water comes 
 up by the feveral Holes or Pits 
 in the Bottom thereof, as Jike- 
 wife by vifible Pafiages above 
 Ground. 
 
 SECT,
 
 CHAP. 18. ofUniverfal Geography. 395 
 
 SECT. V. 
 
 Containing one CHAPTER. 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 Of the Changes on the terraqueous Globe -, viz. of 
 Water Into Land, or Land into Water. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 To enquire how much of the Surface of the terraqueous 
 Globe, the Earth and Water fever ally take up. 
 
 IT is impofiible to know this accurately, be- 
 caufe we are ignorant of the Situation of the 
 Earth and Ocean, about the North and South 
 Pole, and becaufe their Superficies are terminated 
 by irregular and crooked Lines, not eafily compu- 
 ted or meafured. But fo far as we can guefs, 
 from a bare Infpeclion of the Globe, it feems that 
 the Superficies of the Earth and Water are nearly 
 equal ; each taking up half of the Globe's Surface. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 The Surfaces of the Earth and Waters, are not always 
 equally extended, but fometimes more, and foms times 
 lefs j and what the one lofes the other gains. 
 
 THE Sea frequently breaks in upon the Land 
 in feveral Places and overflows it, or waftes it by- 
 degrees, and walhes it away ; by which means 
 
 it's
 
 396 <fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. V. 
 
 it's Superficies is enlarged according to the bignefs 
 of the Plane of Earth it overflows ; fuch an In- 
 undation happened of old in TbeJJaly^ &c. But 
 the greateft that we know of have made no fen- 
 fible Alteration in the Su face of the Globe, tho* 
 it is poflible that, fome Time or other, there will 
 happen fuch as may i as we mall mew in Propo- 
 fition xviii. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 30 c&mfute bow much Earth and Water the terraque- 
 ous Globe contains. 
 
 T O find this accurately there ought to be 
 known exadtly the Surface of the Water ; and it's 
 Depth in different Parts of the Sea, and alfo the 
 Bulk of the fubterraneous Waters. All which 
 we are ignorant of, and have no method to find 
 them , and therefore are at a lofs in finding the 
 true quantity of either Earth or Water. We may 
 form an Hypothefis, and take the Superficies of 
 die Water for half the Superficies of the whole 
 Globe, and alfo fuppofe the Sea to be a quarter 
 or half a Mile deep, (one Place with another) 
 not reckoning the Water in fubterraneous Ca- 
 verns. 
 
 THESE being granted, the quantity of Wa- 
 ter is found thus : Take a quarter or half a Mile 
 from the Semi diameter of the Earth, and find the 
 Solidity of a Sphere, whofe Scmidiameter is equal 
 to the Remainder. This Solidity being taken from 
 the Solidity of the whole Globe, half the Remain- 
 der is the quantity of Water. This laft being a- 
 gain fubftracted from the Solidity of the Globe, 
 leaves the quantity of Earth, to which, for the 
 Mountains, you muft add a fourth or fifth Part 
 of the Bjlk of the Water, or even a half: yet 
 
 all
 
 CHAP. 1 8. of Umverfal Geography. 397 
 all this is but guefs-work, and not to be depend- 
 ed upon for Truth. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV, 
 
 The Water may leave the Shore, and the Places of 
 the Earth which it covered before, for fever al Rea- 
 fom ; fo that the dry Land may appear where it 
 was Water or Sea before, and a new Plat of Earth 
 may feem to be formed. 
 
 T R A C T S of Water are feven-fold ; i . The 
 Ocean. 2. Bays. 3. Seas or Streights. 4. Rivers. 
 5. Lakes. 6. Ponds. 7. Bogs. 
 
 THAT Bogs or Marihes may be drained, 
 either by letting off the Water, or drying it up 
 by continual Fires, or by throwing dry Earth in- 
 to them, none need doubt ; for in feveral Places 
 and Countries there are fertile Fields, where there 
 were formerly nothing but Bogs and Marfhes ; 
 as in Weftfthalia, Gelderland, Brabant, Holland, Muf- 
 ccvy, &c. So the Peloponnefus in Greece was, in 
 the Time of the Trojans, barren and marfhy 
 Ground, but was made fertile in Ariftotle^ Time 
 by draining it. 
 
 THE fame may be faid of Pools and Ponds, 
 which are not very different. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Rivers leave their Shores (or part of their Cbaneh) 
 dry, and form new Parcels of Ground in many 
 Places. 
 
 i . I F their Water bring down a great deal of 
 
 Earth, Sand, and Gravel out of the high Places, 
 
 and leave it upon the low, in procefs of Time 
 
 thefe will become as high as the other, from 
 
 i whence
 
 3 98 tte Abfolute Part SECT. V. 
 
 whence the Water flows: Or when - they leave 
 this Filth in a certain Place on one fide of the 
 Chanel, it hems in and raifes Part of the Chanel 
 which becomes dry Land. 
 
 2. I F a River take another Courfe, made by 
 Art, or Nature, or fome violent Caufe, as the 
 Wind, or an Inundation, it leaves it's former 
 Chanel dry. 
 
 3. I F the Fountains that feed a River are ob- 
 ftructed, or ceafe to fend out their Waters, be- 
 caufe of the Earth falling in, or by being flopped 
 with Heaps of Sand driven in by the Wind from 
 the adjacent Places, the Chanel of that River be- 
 comes dry. 
 
 EXAMPLES of Rivers, whofe Chanels are 
 now dried up either wholly or in Part, are fre- 
 quently met with among Authors ; not of any 
 great Rivers, but of thofe of the fmaller fort, 
 and fome Branches of the great ones , thus that 
 Branch of the Rbine^ which formerly run by Ley- 
 den into the German Ocean, fome Ages ago forfook 
 it's Chanel, which is now dry Land, and ftagnates 
 between Leyden and Catwic. 
 
 W E have alfo.feveral Examples of Shores that 
 have been left dry by Rivers making themfelves 
 deeper and narrower Chanels than they ufed to 
 run in ; alfo of Rivers that are not navigable 
 now, which have been fo formerly, their Chanels 
 being made fhallower, and, in procefs of Time, 
 may be quite choaked up, as the Scbelde, &c. 
 Therefore the Rulers of Countries take care that 
 the Sand-Banks, Filth, and Sediment, be conti- 
 nually removed out of fuch Rivers, fo that they 
 may be kept open and navigable as much as pof- 
 fible. 
 
 BUT great Rivers are not dried up, or turn- 
 ed into dry Land in a great many Ages, or even 
 Myriads of Ages, becaufe a vaft number of fmall 
 
 ones
 
 CHAP. 1 8. ofUniverfal Geography. 399 
 
 ones flowing from different Parts make up their 
 Waters and feed them ; fo that if one or two of. 
 them be dried up, or change their Courfe, it will 
 be a long time before fuch an Accident happen 
 to them all. One fmgle Sand-Bank indeed might 
 perform Wonders, in choaking up the PafTage of 
 a River, and make ii take a new Chanel, where- 
 by the former is dried up , but the River itfelf 
 continues to flow, becaufe it's Fountains and 
 Branches are not obflrucled. Neverthelefs it is 
 certain, that neither the Nile, the Tanais, the Elbe, 
 nor the Rhine, &c. did or will always flow in the 
 fame Places, but their Chanels were formerly dry 
 Land, and in future Ages will be fo again, 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Lakes are dried up and turned into Earth. 
 
 I F the Lake be fed by Rivers flowing into it, 
 the Change is made by turning the Rivers another 
 Way, or by their ceafmg to flow, together with 
 Evaporation. If it receive it's Waters from the 
 Ocean or Sea by fubterraneous Intercourfes, thefe 
 are to be flopped or diverted , and fo the Lake 
 at firft is changed into a Fen or Bog, and after- 
 ward into dry Ground. Ariftotle (fpeaking of 
 Lakes fed by Rivers) fays, it is certain that the 
 Force of the Water bringing Mud, or fuch like 
 Matter, into any Lake, changes it into a Fen 
 or Bog, and afterwards into dry Ground ; for the 
 Water flagnating, is in Time dried up. Thus 
 the Mud and Sand, which the many Rivers bring 
 down into the Lake of the Mxotis, have made it 
 fo mallow, that it will not admit fuch large Ships 
 now, as failed upon it about fixty Years ago.
 
 400 *fhe Abfolute Part S E c T. V. 
 
 Of fmall Lakes that are turned into dry Land 
 we have feveral Inftances, efpecially in Holland. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 Streigbts are dried up and turned into Iflhrnu?^ or 
 Paris of Continents. 
 
 T H I S is caufed by the continual gathering and 
 fiibfiding of the Mud and earthy Matter, which 
 in Time choaks up the Streight, and flops the 
 Intercourfe of the Water. 
 
 T H U S it feems very probable that the Ifth- 
 mus between Africa and Afia^ which parts the 
 Red-Sea from the Mediterranean , was formerly a 
 Streight and joined them. The Depth of the Sea 
 in feveral Streights is alfo found to grow lefs, and 
 the Water to become fhallower than it ufed to be, 
 which is a certain Sign that fuch a Streight, fome 
 Time or other, will be left bare, and be turned 
 into dry Land. So that Bay in the Atlantic Sea 
 which the Hollanders call the Zuider Sea, and the 
 Streights of the Texel^ will not now admit of 
 loaded Ships of the firft or fecond Rate, . as they 
 ufed to do formerly ; and as the Water evidently 
 leflens and becomes fhallower every Year, it is 
 likely the TVaW, will one Time or other, become 
 dry Ground : and that Streight which they call 
 Ulie will, very likely, have the fame Fate. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 - tr 
 
 j. . ' ;i"; **/ 
 
 Bap may be in time dried />, and turned into firm 
 Ground. 
 
 THIS may happen from a two-fold Caufe : i , 
 If the Streights which join the Bay to the Ocean 
 become an Ifthmus, or be choaked up with Sand 
 
 and
 
 CHAP. 1 8 . of Univerfal Geography. 40 1 
 and Mud (that fuch a thing may happen, we 
 ftiewed in the laft Proportion) ; by this means 
 the Bay is cut off from the Ocean, and becomes 
 a Lake, which is turned into a Fen, or Bog, and 
 then intodry Ground. 2. If the Chanel of the 
 Bay be heightened continually by the Sand and 
 Gravel, brought down by the Rivers into it, it 
 will in Time be higher than the Ocean, and re- 
 ceive no more Sea- Water. 
 
 THUS the Mediterranean^ Baltic, Red-Ssa 9 
 Psrfean Gulph, &c. which are now Bays, may 
 be changed, one Time or other, into dry Land ; 
 as we fhall further prove in the next Propofition. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 The Ocean in feme Places forfakes the Shores , fo that 
 it becomes dry Land where it was formerly Sea. 
 
 THIS is caufed by thefe Means: i. If the 
 force of the Waves darning againft the Shore, be 
 broken by Cliffs, Shoals, or Rocks, fcattered here 
 and there, under Water, the earthy Matter con- 
 tained in the Water, as Slime, Mud, &c. is made 
 to fabiide, and increafe the Height of the Sand- 
 Banks, whereby the Violence of the Ocean is more 
 and more refifted, which makes it yield more Se- 
 diment -, fo that at length the Sand-Banks, being 
 raifed to a great Height and Bulk, entirely ex- 
 clude the Ocean and becomes dry Land. 2. It 
 contributes much to heightning the Shores if they 
 be fandy and rocky, for then the Sea darning a- 
 gainft them, and withdrawing, carries little or no- 
 thing away from them, but every Time it ap- 
 proaches them it brings Dregs and Sediment, 
 whereby they are increafed in the Manner afore- 
 faid. 3. If fome neighbouring Shore confift of 
 light, mouldring, porous, Earth, which is eafily 
 
 VOL. I, Dd wafhed
 
 402 The Abfolute Part SECT. V. 
 
 wafhed away by the Flux of the Sea, it is mixed 
 with the Water, and left upon fome other adjacent 
 Shore that is harder ; befides, when the Sea en- 
 croaches upon one Shore, it relinquifhes another 
 not far off. 4. Large Rivers bring clown vaft 
 Quantities of Sand and Gravel to their Mouths, 
 (where they exonerate themfelves into the Sea) 
 and leave it there, partly becaufe the Chanel is 
 wider and fhallower, and partly becaufe the Sea 
 refills their Motion -, but this is chiefly obferved 
 in Countries, whofe Rivers annually overflow their 
 Banks. 5. If frequent Winds blow from the Sea 
 to the Shore- wards, and the Shore itfelf be rocky 
 or of tough Earth without Sand, it gathers Slime 
 and Mud, and becomes higher. 6. If the Tide 
 flow quick, and without great Force, but ebb 
 {lowly, it brings a great deal of Matter to the 
 Shore, but carries none away. 7. If the Shore de- 
 fcend obliquely into the Sea for a great Way, the 
 Force of the Waves are broke and lefTened by 
 Degrees, and the Sea leaves it's Filth and Slime 
 upon it. 
 
 THERE arefeveral Places of the Earth, which, 
 it is certain were formerly covered by the Ocean. 
 Where Egypt is now, it was formerly Sea, as ap- 
 pears both from the Teftimony of the Antients, 
 and Experience , for the Nile, flowing from the 
 remote Regions of Ethiopia, when it over- 
 flows it's Banks, covers all Egypt for a Time, and 
 then fettling by Degrees, it leaves the Dregs, Mud, 
 Dirt, and earthy Matter, which the fwift Courfe 
 of the River had brought down , by this means Egypt 
 becomes annually higher and higher. But before fuch 
 a Quantity of Matter was brought down to the 
 'Nile, the Sea covered the Land of Egypt, tho' it 
 be repulfed and hemmed in now by the Earth's ac- 
 quired Altitude. Atijlotle, among others, afferts 
 this, and fays : This Place, and the whole Coun- 
 2 try
 
 CHAP. 1 8. ofUmverfal Geography. 403 
 try (meaning Egypt) were formed by the pouring 
 in of the Nile, and feems to gain Firmneis every 
 Year. But fmce the neighbouring Inhabitants, by 
 Degrees, began to cultivate the Marfhes and Bogs 
 as they dried up, it is impoflible to guefs at the 
 Time of this Mutation. However, it feems that 
 all the Mouths of the Nile have been made by 
 Hand, and not by the River, except that of Ca- 
 nopus. It is further evident, that all old Egypt 
 confiited only of one Town, which they called 
 Thebes. Homer declares this, who flourifhed (I may 
 fay) not long after thefe Changes ; for he men- 
 tions that Place as if there were then no fuch City 
 as Memphis^ at leaft not fo large. Seneca explains 
 this better thus: Egypt (fays he) arofe wholly at 
 firft from Mud , and if we may credit Homer., the 
 Iflarid of Pharos was fo far diftant from the Con- 
 tinent, as a Ship, with all her Sails fpread, could 
 fail in a Day, but now it is joined to the Continent ; 
 for the Nile flowing muddy and troubled, and car- 
 rying down much Slime and Dirt, leaves it about 
 it's Mouths, whereby the Continent is annually en- 
 larged, and Egypt is ftretched further and further 
 every Year. Hence comes the Fatnefs and Ferti- 
 lity of the Soil, and alfo it's Evennefs and So- 
 lidity ; for the Mud fettles and grows dry and 
 hard, and the Ground becomes firm by what is 
 laid upon it. 
 
 THE Ganges and Indus, both famous Rivers in 
 India, do the fame as the Nile, by their Inunda- 
 tions ; alfo the Rio de la Plata in BraJiL And 
 it is very probable that China was formed by 
 this means, or at leaft enlarged ; becaufe the 
 impetuous River, called the Hoambo, flowing out 
 of Tartary into China, and frequently overflowing 
 k's Banks, (tho* not annually) hath fo much Sand 
 and Gravel in it, as to make a third Part of it's 
 Waters, 
 
 Dd2 THESE
 
 404 *fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. V. 
 
 THESE Examples demonftrate the fourth 
 Caufe, viz. that Rivers make the Sea for fake 
 the Shore , but the Sea itfelf, in ieveral Countries, 
 is the Caufe of it's own retiring, by bringing to 
 the Shore, and there leaving Sediment and Matter 
 enough to encreafe the Altitude of the Coaft , fo 
 that it fufrers not the Sea to overflow it any longer. 
 Thus Holland, Zeeland, and G elder land, were formed ; 
 for the Sea covered thefe Countries formerly, as is 
 known both from the antient Monuments mention- 
 ed in Hiftory, and the Quality of the Soil itfelf. 
 In the Mountains of Gelderland, not far from A 7 /- 
 meguett, there are found Sea-Shells, and at a great 
 Depth in Holland are dug up Shrubs and ouzy mat- 
 ter ; add to this, that the Sea itfelf is higher than 
 thefe Countries, and would overflow and cover 
 them, but that it is reftrained by Banks and Dams. 
 On the other hand, there are fome that think Hol- 
 land and Zeeland arofe from the Mud and Sand 
 brought down by the Rhine and the Maes ; nor is this 
 unlikely. Pruffia alfo and the adjacent Countries 
 daily become larger by the Sea's retiring. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 70 explain the Origin or Rife of Sand- Banks. 
 
 BY Sand- Banks we underftand large Collections 
 or Cliffs of Sand in the Water, Handing up above 
 the Chanel of a River, to fijch a Height as to hin- 
 der the Paffage of Ships. The Dutch Sailors call 
 them een Droogte, een Banck, een Rife ; die Portuguefe^ 
 Abrotbes, and Baixes. They differ not from Rocks, 
 only that Rocks are hard, folid, and coherent in 
 their parts \ whereas Sand-Banks confift of grains of 
 Sand, that ftick more loofely together. Tho* 
 thefe two are often confounded. 
 
 THESE
 
 CHAP. 1 8. of Univerfal Geography. 405 
 THESE Sand-Banks lie either in the Cha- 
 nels of 'Rivers, as frequently in the Elbe, and the 
 Wolga ; or at the Mouths of Rivers, as is alfo fre- 
 quent in the two Rivers juft mentioned ; or on the 
 Sea Shores, or in the middle of the Sea. The 
 manner of their Generation is the fame as in the 
 foregoing Propofitions we obferved of the drying 
 up the Courfe of Rivers, and the Shores of the 
 Sea. For it generally happens, that the Ocean, 
 before it leaves any part of the Land for good, 
 firft produces thefe Sand- Banks near the Shore ; then 
 recedes by degrees, and leaves the Sand-Banks a 
 part of the Continent. And after the fame man- 
 ner it happens in the Chanels of Rivers, before 
 they dry up, and are totally forfaken by the Wa- 
 ters. The moft common Caufe is the increafing 
 of the Rivers with Rain, or melted Snow, fo that 
 they rulh down violently, and warn off their Banks, 
 where they are narrow, Slime and Mud -, which is 
 carried down a great way from their Fountains, 
 till 'tis brought to fome wide Place, where the 
 Motion is not fo violent ; and here it fubfides 
 and forms a Bank of Sand, or Mud. 
 
 NOR can any greater Evil happen to the mofl 
 rich and flourifhing trading Towns, whofe loaded 
 Ships have been ruined by them : not to mention 
 Towns, that thro' Time are quite forgot, there are 
 the Cities Stavoren in Frie/land ; Armmude, or Ar- 
 mugen, in Zeeland ; and Dordracum in Holland ; Ant- 
 werp in Brabant ; and Stada, in the Bimopric of 
 Bremen -, all which have had this Fate. 
 
 N O R is there fcarce any trading Sea-Port free 
 from the Danger. Thefe Sand Banks in the Elbe y 
 have loft a great many Ships to the Hamburgbers 9 
 which had efcaped many Dangers on the Ocean ; 
 and in other Places, efpecially the 'Texel^ and the 
 Vile at Amfterdam. 
 
 Dds MANY 
 
 V
 
 406 The Abftiutt Part .~SE.CT. V. 
 
 M A N Y of thefe Banks are feen on the Sea- 
 Shore of Flanders, and Friejland, and at low Wa- 
 ter feem to be pans of the Continent, having fo 
 little Water above them at high Tide, as not to 
 admit: of Ships. The Sand-Banks that are famous 
 or infamous among Sailors for Shipwrecks, are 
 i . Thofe found all in one Place, at the Shore of 
 Brafil, extending in a Tract of feventy Miles, 
 which they that go to the Indies, ought carefully 
 to beware of, when they are failing that way to 
 avoid being becalmed on the Guinea Shore, tho* 
 they come as near them as they can, to get the 
 more Wind , but ought to take Care they do not 
 fall in between thofe Banks, and the Shore. 2. 
 Thofe of St Ann, not far from Guinea m Africa, 
 in fix Degrees of North Latitude : the Ships once 
 carried among them, are not brought eafily from 
 them ; but detained for feveral Days, when the Sea- 
 men think they have got rid of them ; for they 
 do not lie clofe together, but are parted by Gulphs 
 and deep Places ; fo that when they are in ten Yards 
 Water, they on a fudden fhall found but three 
 Yards. 3. Thofe between Madagafcar, and Ara- 
 lia, and Africa, called the Baixas of Judea : they 
 are lharp, ragged Rocks of Coral, of various Co- 
 lours. 4. Thofe about China. 5. Thofe towards 
 Flanders -, and feveral others that may be feen in Sea 
 Charts. 
 
 W E have mown one Way how they are formed, 
 viz. by the fubfiding of the Matter which -the Sea 
 carries with it , we may add a fecond Way , and 
 that is, by the Sea's coming in upon Land, that hath 
 heaps of Sahd on it, which, being covered, are 
 Sand-Banks under the Surface of the Water. Thus 
 at the Shores of Gelderland, and Holland, there are 
 feveral fuch, which they call Dunen -, they are in 
 a long Trad raife'd above the Land, on the 
 
 Shore i
 
 CHAP. 1 8. of Unherjal Geography. 407 
 Shore ; and if the Sea break in, then thefe Hills 
 become Sand-Banks. 
 
 THEY are frequently at the Mouths of Ri- 
 vers where they are broadeft, and where their 
 Motion is not fo rapid but the Matter can fub- 
 fide, and the Waves of the Sea beat back the 
 River- Water, which flops it's Force. It is worth 
 while to diftinguifh and confider thefe two ways. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 2"0 judge whether the Sand-Banks not far from the 
 Shore will become a part of the Continent. 
 
 W E mowed, in the preceding Propofition, that 
 they are formed two ways j one by the fubfiding 
 of Matter, and the other by Heaps of Sand that 
 are overflowed : if they happen in the firft way, 
 and they be found to increafe ftill, it is likely they 
 will be joined to the Continent ; but if in the fecond 
 way, and they are not iricreafed, then it is not like- 
 ly they will be joined, but rather that the Sea will 
 come further : but this we only guefs. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 Jjlands are formed, in the Sea and Rivers, the fame 
 way that Sand-Banks are (which may become I/lands) 
 and alfo another way. 
 
 F O R if there be gathered in any part of the 
 Sea, Sand, Gravel, Slime, or Clay, it will in time 
 become an Ifland ; and if the Sea break in upon 
 the Land, and furround Hills, they become Iflands ; 
 and thus *ds likely thofe were formed which are 
 very high, as St Helena, the Ifle of Afcenfion, &c. 
 efpecially if they be rocky and ftony. 
 
 
 Dd4 AND
 
 408 The Absolute Part S E c T. V. 
 
 AND to thefe belong thofe which the Sea 
 cuts off from the Land that juts out into it ; thus 
 antient Writers tell us, that Sicily was cut off from 
 Italy i by the breaking in of the Sea violently ; 
 and the Verfes of the Poet on this Subject are 
 well known. 
 
 B Y the firft way, viz. by fubfiding and ga- 
 thering of a great many earthy Particles, were 
 formed the Iflands of Zeeland, Denmark, and Ja~ 
 fan; and alfo the Ifles of Molucca: for there 
 were found, by thofe that dug the Ground there 
 a little way down, a great quantity of Sand and 
 Shells. 
 
 THE Inhabitants of the Ifland of Ceylon fay 
 their Ifland was feparated from India, and it is ve- 
 ry likely. Thus the Ifland of Sumatra is thought to 
 have joined Malacca -, and it is probable, becaufe 
 of the feveral Banks and Quick-Sands there. It is 
 certainly believed it was the golden Cberfonefus, 
 and was counted to be a Peninlula, for it appears 
 fo at a diftance, and to be joined to Malacca. 
 
 THE Indians, on the Malabar Shore, tell us, 
 that the Ifles of Maldives, were of old joined to 
 India, in one Continent, and are now a great 
 way from it, and divided into eleven thoufand 
 Jflands j and it is probable they will all in time 
 be joined in one Ifland, they being not diftant 
 in fome Places above four or five Yards. The 
 narrow Seas will become narrower, and fo join 
 one to another. And indeed all the oriental Iflands, 
 between the Continent of Afia and Magellan, feem 
 to arife from the Sea's breaking in violently on 
 the Land, and feparating one part from another ; 
 for the Pacific Sea moves with a continual force 
 to the Eaft from America to thefe Ifles, and the 
 "Wind blowing conftantly that way increafes the 
 force ; it is not therefore unlikely that, feeing all 
 thefe Iflands are in the Torrid Zone^ Afia did of 
 
 old
 
 C H A p . 1 8 . of Univerfal Geography. 409 
 old join the Magellanic, or South Land, the Earth 
 being broke off here and there by the Sea, 'till 
 at lait it made it's way to the Indian Ocean, and 
 formed many I (lands ftrangely fituated clofe toge- 
 ther, as Java, the Celebes, Borneo, Madura, Am- 
 boytta, &c. 
 
 W E may judge the fame of the Iflands in the 
 Gulf of Mexico, and at the Streight of Magellan. 
 
 I T is uncertain whether the Iflands of the Mgean 
 Sea were broke off the Land by the Sea, the 
 Waves from the Euxine and Mediterranean Sea 
 meeting one another, or by the fubfiding of the 
 Matter which was brought from the Euxine to the 
 Propontis ; tho' the former is more probable : and 
 perhaps this was the famous Deluge of Deucalion. 
 It is certain the Ifle ofEubtza, or Negroponte, joined 
 Greece, as famous Writers relate ; for the Sea be- 
 tween them is fo narrow as to have a Bridge over 
 it. 
 
 W E have fe veral Inftances of Iflands made.by 
 Sand-Banks. Thus thofe in the Nile, and in the 
 River of St Lawrence in North America, were Sand- 
 Banks. The Rivers make Iflands alfo when they 
 difcharge a Branch in one Place, and receive it 
 in another, as in the I'anais, and Wolga, and o- 
 thers , which no doubt is done by the Induftry 
 of Men. The Oby does the fame. The two 
 Rivers, Rengo and Coauza, produced the Ifle of 
 Loanda, on the Shore of fouthern Africa, where 
 they exonerate themfelves into the Sea, be- 
 caufe they bring down from the high Places a 
 great quantity of Slime and Gravel with great Vio- 
 lence, which they depofited ftill in the Mouths of 
 the Rivers, and fo made the Ifle of Loanda , which at 
 firft was but a Sand-Bank, and now it is a fruit- 
 ful Ifland, abounding with Inhabitants and fertile 
 Land. We believe a great many Iflands on the Shore 
 were formerly Sand-Banks, or Clay-Banks, tho' 
 
 fome
 
 410 The Abfolute Part SECT. V. 
 
 fome were made by parting them from die Con- 
 tinent, as at Norway : and this is moft probable 
 of thofe that are hard and rocky. 
 
 BUT, in the Indian Sea, fuch may happen 
 by both ways; for while the Sea wears off, it 
 doth at the fame time carry away with it much 
 Earth, which fettles in another Place ; and this is 
 much caufed by furious Winds, and frequent 
 Storms, that come from the breaking of the Clouds 
 in the rainy Months ; from May to September. 
 The Sea is ftrangely difturbed by thefe, fo that 
 the Sand and Clay is raifed from the bottom, 
 and carried to the Indian Shores. Thus the Mouths 
 of the Harbours at Goa are fo obftrucled by 
 Heaps of Sand, which come with the force of the 
 Storms from May to September, that fmall Ships 
 can fcarcely enter ; and thefe Heaps of Sand fo 
 obftruct the Harbour of Cochin, that they are 
 like a Bar, or Wall, that neither great nor fmall 
 Ships can enter. 
 
 FOR continual Rains on Mount Gate, and the 
 frequent Storms from the Clouds which are feen 
 hanging as it were above the tops of the Moun- 
 tains, pour out fo much Water with fuch Vio- 
 lence that the Sea carries a great deal of Sand 
 to the Shores ; where, meeting with Oppofition, 
 the Sand fubfides, which is carried away again by 
 the Sea, when the Winter is over, and the Har- 
 bours cleared. 
 
 THERE are fome Iflands fo near the Land, 
 that they are furrounded at the time of full Sea ; 
 and if the intervening Chanel become higher, 
 thefe Iflands become a Part of the Continent. 
 
 A N D the overflowing of the Nile makes the 
 Towns and Hills look like Iflands; and the Wolga 
 doth fo fwell in May and June as to cover the 
 Iflands and Sand-Banks in it ; and feveral of the 
 Iflands near India become like Sand-Banks in the 
 
 rainy
 
 . C H A P. 1 8 . of Unherfal Geography. 4 1 1 
 rainy Months, when the Nile and Ganges overflow 
 thefe Countries. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 tfbere is another way that IJlands are formed befides 
 the two abovementioned^ which is delivered by feme 
 Writers, viz. that the Earth on a fudden is car- 
 ried from the bottom of the Sea, and/uddenly rifes 
 to the Surface. 
 
 OTHERS think very juftly that this fabulous 
 way comes from the fabulous Greeks and Poets, who 
 will have Delos to have come up that way ; and 
 the grave Author Seneca fays, the Ifland I'berafia 
 did, in his Time, come up in the jEgean Sea, and 
 that the Seamen obferved it : and tho* indeed there 
 are but few Examples of this kind, yet we are not 
 therefore to think it impomble ; for there may be 
 in the bottom of the Sea fome porous, fpongy, 
 hollow, and fulphureous, Earth, (as there are many 
 forts of light Earth,) which is now grown to a 
 great Height under the Water ; and if it come 
 to break off by the force of the Sea, and being 
 of lefs or equal Weight with the Water, it may 
 come to the Superficies, and an Ifland appear on a 
 fudden. Or a Spirit fhut up under the Earth, and 
 endeavouring to break out, may without the force 
 of the Water bring it up to the Surface ; for thele 
 Spirits included Jhave great Power, as appears in 
 Earthquakes, by which whole Mountains have been 
 thrown up and fwallowed down, and the fame way 
 are great Towers and Walls blown up by Gun- 
 Powder placed under Ground. 
 
 I F therefore the Ifland that thus appears fud- 
 denly do yet adhere to the Bottom, it muft be 
 that it was forced up by the Spirits inclofed un- 
 derneath , as fome write, that fometimes Moun- 
 tains
 
 412 *fbe Abfolnte Part S E c T. V. 
 
 tains have been blown up that way ; but if it 
 do not adhere to the Bottom, it might be loofened 
 from the Bottom, partly by the force of the Wa- 
 ter, and partly by the inclofed Spirits, and come 
 up by it's own Lightnefs. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 FROM this another doubt arifes ; Whether 
 ibere are floating I/lands -, as Tbakt thought the 
 whole Earth did float on the Water of the Ocean : 
 but his Opinion is fufEciently refuted from the 
 Sea's Chanel being continued every where, and 
 yet there may be floating Iflands if the Earth 
 be hollow, light, and fulphureous. Seneca tells his 
 Experience, that he faw in the Lake Cutitia, in 
 the Fields of the Town Reate, belonging to the 
 Sabines, an Ifland that floated, and Trees and 
 Herbs on it, that was carried here and there by 
 the Wind, yea by a gentle Gale ; and that he 
 never found it for a Day and Night in the fame 
 Place ; and he fays there was another Ifland that 
 floated in the Lake of Vadimone ; and another in 
 the Lake of Statione. Thus the Antients fay, that 
 Delosy and all the Iflands of the Cyclades, did of 
 old float on the Sea. Nor need it be objecied, 
 why don't they fwim now ? for the Anfwer is eafy -, 
 the floating cannot hold out long, for they reach- 
 ing near the Bottom, and being carried from one 
 place to another, they meet with a Sand-Bank 
 and fettle there, efpecially if they come between 
 two Sand-Banks, then they join and become fix- 
 ed. In Honduras, a Province of America^ th*ere 
 is a Lake in which there are feveral little Hills, 
 planted with Shrubs and Herbs tofled up and 
 down with the Wind. 
 
 I N the large Locb^ called Lomond in Scotland^ 
 there is an Ifland that floats , and is driven by 
 
 the
 
 CHAP. 1 8. ofUniverfal Geography. 413 
 the Wind : it feeds Cattle, as Boetbius, the Wri- 
 ter of the Scots Hiftory, relates. 
 
 S O far of the forming of dry Land where Sea 
 was ; now we fhall confider how there can Water 
 come where there was dry Land. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 The Rivers run in new Cbanels for feveral Caufes. 
 
 1 . WHEN they come from their Fountains, 
 and get a Chanel either made by Art or Nature. 
 
 2. IF a River fend out a Branch from it, 
 which is caufed for the moft part by Men, either 
 to bring Water to a Town, or to another River : 
 Examples whereof we mewed above. 
 
 3 . I F Rivers gain more and more upon their 
 Banks ; which happens, i . When the Chanel grows 
 higher thro' the fubfiding of Mud and Sand. 2. If 
 it wear off the Banks by it's fwift Courfe. 3. If 
 it be increafed by another River flowing into it, 
 or by Rains or Snow. 
 
 4. IF they overflow the Land, and become 
 Lakes by not returning to their former Chanel, 
 which if they do and leave a good deal behind they 
 make Bogs. 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 I T is probable Time was, when the Chanels 
 of the Rhine, Elbe, Nile, and all other Rivers, 
 were dry Ground, and may again become fo. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 Lakes, Bogs, and ftanding Pooh, occupy Places that 
 they did not before. 
 
 i. WHEN
 
 4 14 The Aifolute Part S E c T. V. 
 
 1 . WHEN they are firft formed and enlarged- 
 as in Chapter xv. 
 
 2. IF plenty of Rain fall. 
 
 3. IF the Rivers carry much Water into the 
 Lakes with great force. 
 
 4. I F their Chanel become higher. 
 
 5. IF the Lakes by the frequent and ftrong 
 Waves wear off the Banks, and cover more Ground. 
 Thus the Lake of Harlem, within thefe thirty or 
 forty Years pad, is enlarged about one twentieth 
 of a Mile round. 
 
 COROLLARY. 
 
 I T is probable, that the Places where the Lake 
 Zaire, or Leman, or Parime, or of Harlem, or of 
 Maoris, and the Bogs in Weftphalia, and all others, 
 were once dry Ground. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 There is Ocean where there was none before. 
 
 THIS may happen feveral ways; i. When it 
 breaks into the Land, making Bays and Streights, 
 as the Mediterranean , the Bay of Bengal, the A- 
 rabian Gulph, and Bay of Camboia, &c. Thus 
 the Streights between Sicily and Italy, between 
 Ceylon and India, between Greece and Negroponte y 
 the Streights of Magellan, Manilba, and at the 
 Sound ', yea fome will have the Atlantic Ocean 
 thus made, and to have parted America from 
 Europe, that they may better deduce the Genera- 
 tions of Men there from Adam. It is ceitain the 
 Egyptian Prieft told Solon, the Athenian, that about 
 fix hundred Years before Chrift (as may be feen 
 in Plato's Dialogue called Trm^wj) that there was 
 once an Ifland over againfl the Herculean Streights 
 
 of
 
 C H A P. 1 8 . of Unfaerfal Geography. 
 of GibraUer, greater than Africa and Afta, called 
 Atlantis, and by a great Earthquake and Inun- 
 dation in a Day and Night, that it was after- 
 ward funk (viz. a Pan of it) -, by which we may 
 underfland there was a Tradition among the Egyp- 
 tians, who were given to Learning, that America, 
 was feparated from the old World, many Ages 
 before. It is much more probable as to the 
 North part of America, that New-France, New- 
 England, and Canada, did of old join Ireland ; the 
 Antients fay the Streights of Gibralter were dug 
 by Hercules. 
 
 2. WHEN the Sea is driven on the Shore 
 with ftrong Winds breaking down the Shores and 
 Banks, made by Art or Nature ; there are feveral 
 Inftances of Inundations, as in Tbeffaly of old, and 
 not long ago in Friejland and Holftcitr. 
 
 3 . WHEN it doth, by the fame Caufes, go 
 over the Land in feveral Places making Iflands ; 
 as we faid of thofe in the Eaft Indies, and the Bay 
 of Bengal and Camboia, which flowed into the 
 Land. 
 
 4. W H E N it wears off the Shores, and fpreads 
 in upon the Land : thus the Baltic Ocean came 
 in upon Pomerania, and deflroyed Vtneta, a mofl 
 famous Sea-Port. Thus on the Shore of Norway 
 it broke in, and cut off fome Iflands from the 
 Continent, and the German Ocean broke in on 
 Holland, near the Village of the Catti, and over- 
 fpread a great Tract of Ground ; thus the Ruins 
 of an old Britt/h Caftle, that was a Garrifon of 
 the Romans, is, a great way in the Sea, hid un- 
 der Water. And on the North part of Ceylon 
 near India, the Sea took off twenty Miles, and 
 made the Ifland lefs j and there are many other Ex- 
 amples alfo, 
 
 COROL-
 
 4 1 6 The Abfolute Part SECT. V. 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 HENCE we underftand, that where there is 
 now Sea there was Land, and again may be, if the 
 Earth hath lafted, and fhall continue, fome thou- 
 fand Years ; of which fee Arijiotle in his Book 
 of Meteors, Chap. xii. Lib. i. and Stevin's Geo- 
 graphy. If it be afked how the Sea can cover the 
 Mountains, we anfwer they are not to be covered, 
 but will be high Rocks therein, or Iflands, for 
 all Iflands almoft have Mountains in them j as 
 Ceylon, Sumatra, Java ; and fome are nothing but 
 Mountains ; as St Helen, the Ifle of Afcenfion, the 
 Hef per ides : and feeing thefe Places were once 
 Land, then thefe Iflands and Mountains in it were 
 high Places on the Continent. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIII. 
 
 Iffiether the whole Surface of this Globe may be either 
 all Land or Sea -, or if there may be more Land or 
 Water one time than another. 
 
 I T is fufficiently fliown in the fecond Propo- 
 fition, that there may be lefs Earth, and confe- 
 quently more Sea, one time than another. But to 
 that Queflion, whether there may be a Deluge that 
 fhall cover the whole, even the very Iflands ; we an- 
 fwer the way how fuch a thing may happen, may be 
 conceived and explained, yet can fcarce ever happen, 
 the Earth being ib compactly joined and the Moun- 
 tains fo high. The way it may happen is the fame as in 
 in the fecond Propofition. If the Ocean continually 
 warn away the Shores and lay them in deep Places, 
 at laft all the high Parts will come down and be 
 warned away, and the Sea come in on the whole 
 Earth j there may be fome Mountains or their Roots 
 
 wafhed
 
 CHAP. 1 8 . of Univerfal Geography. 
 waflied away, and they fall down , and it were 
 eafier done if, as fbrne think, the Sea were higher 
 than the Land, but this we have before refuted. 
 And to that, whether the Sea can ever go all into 
 Caverns of the Earthj and there be nothing but 
 dry Land, we anfwer the fame way ; tho' it may 
 fcarce ever be : there is only one way by fuppofing 
 the Caverns fo large as to contain the Sea, and 
 none have yet demonftrated the contrary - t and 
 tho' they are not, they may be made fo by the 
 force of die Water or fubterraneous Spirits. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 Why there are few IJlands in the middle of the Ocean + 
 and no Clufters of them, except at large I/lands, 
 or near the Continent. 
 
 WE need not doubt of the Truth of this, be* 
 ing confirmed by Experience. There is fcarce one 
 little Ifland in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, 
 and there are but few found in the vaft Ocean 
 between Africa and Brafil, except St Helen and 
 the Ifle of Afcenfion , but on the Shores of the O- 
 cean, or great Continent, are all the lilands, ex- 
 cept the few I mentioned, efpecially the Clufters 
 of Iflands ; thofe of the JEgean Sea are near Eu- 
 rope and Afia^ the Hefperides near Africa, the 
 Maldives near India^ and all the Indian Iflands lie 
 between Afia arid the South Land, only the A- 
 zores, or Flandrian Ifles, feem to be in the middle 
 of the Ocean, between America and the Old World ; 
 tho* they are nearer the later. 
 
 THE Caufe of this Phenomenon no doubt is, 
 that they were cut off the main Land by the 
 Sea's breaking in upon it, which could not cover 
 all Places it came to, becaufe of their Height. It 
 is likely they are alfo fome of them made thus : 
 
 VOL. I. e the
 
 Vhe Abfolute Part SECT. V. 
 
 the Sea wafhing off fome Lands cannot carry their 
 fmall Parts far off, but lets them fall down by 
 degrees near the Shore, which being done for a 
 long Time, Iflands are at lafl formed, i . But in the 
 middle Ocean there are few IQands, for the Par- 
 ticles warned off the Shore do not go fo far. 2. 
 Becaufe there is a greater Motion and Force of 
 the Water, which rather increafes the Depth of 
 the Chanel than caufes any Iflands. 3 . Becaufe there 
 being no Continent there, no Clufler of Iflands 
 can be formed, according to the firft way that we 
 fhewed they were made ; yet of old when the 
 middle of the Ocean was not where it is now, 
 there might be a Clufler of Iflands, which might 
 be gradually warned away. 
 
 SECT. 
 
 r j 4
 
 CHAP. 19. ofUnherfal Geography. 419 
 
 SECT. VI. 
 
 Containing the Explanation of the Atmojphere 
 and Wind*) in three Chapters. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Of the ATMOSPHERE and AIR. 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 'There are continually Vapours and Fumes exhaled from 
 the dry as well as moift Parts, into the Space which 
 furrounds the Earth. 
 
 HP H E Caufe is twofold , i. The celeftial Heat 
 JL of the Stars, efpecially the Sun and Moon. 
 2. The terreftrial Heat, or fubterraneous Fire, 
 mixed with the Earth, for we find all Bodies al- 
 moft fend out Exhalations when brought near 
 the Fire, tho' very gentle , and feeing celeftial 
 and terreftrial Heat is nothing but Fire, there- 
 fore Vapours and Fumes muft be raifed thereby. 
 And as the Nature of Heat, fo Experience con- 
 firms the Truth of it ; for Travellers in the Night 
 may fee, efpecially when the Moon mines, and 
 near Waters, the Vapours that are raifed wan- 
 dering about the Air, and that they are raifed 
 in the Day-time by the Sun is commonly known ; 
 as alfo when little Clouds afcend, which is a fure 
 fign of Rain, 
 
 E e 2 P R 0-
 
 420 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 < The Atmofphere is all that Space about the Earth , 
 in which the Vapours are ; and it is uncertain if 
 any thing elfe be contained in it but Exhalations. 
 
 IT is alfo taken for the Exhalations themfelves 
 that are about the Earth. It is no fmall Contro- 
 verfy among the modern Philofophers, what that 
 is which is about the Earth. Several famous Ma- 
 thematicians are of Opinion there is nothing there 
 but Exhalations , and fo the Atmofphere and Air 
 is counted the fame : and above the Atmofphere is 
 the ^ethereal Subilance next it. Others think that 
 there is a kind of Body befides thefe Exhalations, 
 which is called Air, tho' they allow that Exhalati- 
 ons may turn to Air, and Air to thick Vapour and 
 Clouds ; and after this Air, all the Way to the 
 Orbit of the Moon, they place another fubtile 
 Body, different from JEther, which they call Fire, 
 indeed , but they confefs, improperly, as no way 
 agreeing with our Fires , for it is hot, (tho* not burn- 
 ing) dry, and very fubtile, not caufing the Refra- 
 ctions of the Rays of the Sun and Stars, which they 
 own to be in their Air. Thefe things confidered, 
 the two Opinions of the Philofophers differ rather 
 in Words than in the Thing itlelf ; for as to the 
 Air, that is fo grofs as to caufe Refraction, and may 
 be generated from Exhalations, that may be only 
 a more refined Exhalation, tho' not from the Earth. 
 As to the fublunary Fire, feeing they own it is im- 
 properly called fo, and is fo fubtile as to caufe 
 no Refraction, it feems to differ but little from 
 the aethereal Matter ; we may then fay the At- 
 mofphere, or Air, is a Body about the Earth, in- 
 to which the Rays falling, are refracted (laying 
 afide the Queftion whence it comes) 5 which Defi- 
 2 nition
 
 CHAP. 19. of Uniwrfal Geography. 421 
 nition agrees with the foregoing one, nor is it 
 very likely a Body fo fubtile could be exhaled 
 from the Earth, as to make no refraction or hin- 
 derance to the Rays of the Sun, that come thro* 
 the Mther ; and if there be fuch, we know how 
 high they are or if they be out of the Atmof- 
 phere ; which yet, if any would ftrongly main- 
 tain, believing the Particles of Fire that come 
 from the Sun, on the Earth, do again travel back to 
 it, they will not deny but the foregoing Definition 
 is proper. Therefore the Atmofphere and Air is 
 nothing but a great many fmall Bodies interwoven 
 together and adhering to the Earth ; as the Down 
 on a Quince or Peach. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 There are fometimes more, fometimes fewer Exhala- 
 tions fent up -, e/pecially in different Places. 
 
 THE Caufe is, i. The different Elevation or 
 Deprefllon of the Sun above or below the Hori- 
 zon. 2. The different Age of the Moon, and 
 it's Elevation above the Horizon. 3. The rifing 
 and fetting of the other Stars, and their Situation 
 above the Horizon. 4. The Difference in the 
 Parts of the Earth ; for Water and moift Places 
 fend out more Vapours than dry and earthy. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The Exhalations that compofe the Atmofpbere are of 
 different Kinds, efpecially in different Countries, viz. 
 watery, faline, fulpbureous, earthy, and fpirituous. 
 
 THE Caufe is, becaufe there are fuch different 
 
 Bodies in the Earth, and fome are moft eafily, 
 
 and others with difficulty drawn up ; fome may 
 
 E e 3 doubt
 
 4** The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 doubt of the earthy Particles, becaufe of their 
 Weight i but yet this may be, i . Becaufe of the 
 exceeding fmallnefs of the minute Particles of Duft, 
 that have more Superficies in proportion to the 
 quantity of Matter in them, and therefore are 
 lighter. 2. Becaufe of the mixture of fulphureous 
 Particles, which carry them violently along with 
 them. 
 
 AND that there are fulphureous Parts in the 
 Air, appears from the fiery Meteors that are feen, 
 as Lightning, Thunder, Jack with his Lanthorn, 
 and the fulphureous Smell that is after Thunder 
 and Lightning. 
 
 T H E R E can be no doubt of the watery 
 Exhalations that are fpirituous and faline, they 
 being very fmall and eafily drawn up ; and the 
 little Animals that are bred in the Air, in great 
 Quantities do teftify the fame. 
 
 THE Arijlotelians divide Exhalations into two 
 forts, Vapours, and Smoke. The Vapours are 
 from the Water, and do eafily turn to Water 
 again, and the Smoke from dry things ; thus Sal 
 Ammoniac turns all to Fume above the Fire ; and 
 hence it is that different Countries have different 
 Air, and that it rains in one Place, and not in 
 another. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 tfhe leaft and infenfeble Particles of Air beat lack or 
 reflect all the Rays, as a Looking-Glafs doth ; but 
 fome of tbofe that are perceivable and compounded 
 tranfmit more Rays and refteft fewer -, others 
 again, tranfmit fewer Rays and refleft more. 
 
 THEREFORE the Parts of the Air are di- 
 vided into opake and pellucid ; the former tranf- 
 mit fewer Rays, the latter more. 
 
 2 BECAUSE
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerjal Geography. 423 
 
 BECAUSE the Jeaft Particles, like Atoms 
 both from the Earth and Water, are little folid 
 Bodies without Pores, and therefore do reflect 
 and difallow a Paffage to the Rays -, for it is 
 very probable, that Tranfparency, or the palling 
 of the Rays, requires Pores duly difpofed, and 
 void of Matter. 
 
 BUT the Parts of the Atmofphere, or Air, 
 that are compounded of the leaft Particles, if they 
 have feveral Pores, duly difpofed, will be tranf- 
 parent and tranfmit many Rays ; but if the Particles 
 be joined very confufediy, and be without many 
 Pores, they will not admit many Rays to pals 
 through. 
 
 H E N C E it is, that the Sun difperfmg a thick 
 dark and cloudy Air, makes it more porous and 
 tranfparent. 
 
 THAT the leaft Particles reflect the Rays, 
 appears from this ; if the Sun's Rays be admitted in- 
 to a dark Room, in a clear Day, thro' a nar- 
 row Hole, you will clearly fee the Rays reflected 
 in great Number (from the Particles flying in the 
 Air) to your Eye, as it were from a Looking- 
 Glafs j and as thefe Particles are ftill vifible, we 
 may conclude, in fome Degree, the fame of thofe 
 that efcape the Sight, and are leaft of all. 
 
 SOME would have the moift Exhalations to 
 be tranfparent, and not the dry Fumes ; but they 
 are confuted by Experience and Reafon ; i . By 
 Reafon , becaufe the Fumes and dry Exhalations 
 may become as fmall and porous as thofe that are 
 moift , for they think that Tranfparency does not 
 confift in Porofity, but that it is a peculiar Quality 
 of the Medium : and 2 . By Experience ; becaufe 
 a clear Air hath more dry than moift Particles in it. 
 This is underftood from the new kind of Wind- 
 Guns which are difcharged not by Powder and 
 Fire, but by help of the Air, which is com- 
 E e 4 preflcd
 
 424 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 preffed and condenfed, that it fcarce takes up the 
 fixtieth Part of the Room it had before, and yet 
 there is no moiftnefs in the Gun ; which muil have 
 been if the Particles of the clear Air had been 
 from Water. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Exhalations do net of themfelves and of tbsir own 
 Nature afeend, but are forced up : or thus, the 
 Air is not light, but heavy , confidered abfolutely. 
 
 ALL Things are faid to be heavy which would 
 tend to the Center of the Earth if they were not 
 hindered, and that the Air doth , for the Earth 
 being dug, the Air goes down to the Room made 
 there, and it's tending upwards is ; i . Becaufe 
 Heats rarities and makes it take up a greater 
 Room. 2. Becaufe it is forced by other Vapours. 
 
 T H U S in cold Countries, as Nova Zernbla, and 
 with us, no Cloud afcends in the Night, but the 
 Heat of the Sun coming on rarifies it, and makes 
 one Part to prefs and force another : but if 
 the leaft Particles of Air were not folded toge- 
 ther, but at Liberty, they would move up and 
 be light (/<). PRO- 
 
 (f>) That Air is a ponderous Height is, becaufe it is impof- 
 
 Body, appears from a variety of fible for it to defcend, unlefs at 
 
 Experiments, panicubrly one, the fame Time the Mercury in 
 
 from which it's Weight ufes the Veffel afcend ; which, be- 
 
 likewife to be eflimated. ing on every Side prefled with 
 
 Take a Glafs Tube, clofed at the Weight" of the ambient Air, 
 
 one end, which fill with Quick- cannot quit it's Place, un'efs the 
 
 filver, then invert it with the o- Weight of Air exceeded the 
 
 pen end, into a Veflel, alfo filled Weight of Mercury in the 
 
 with Mercury, anci the Mercury Tube. And that this is the Cafe 
 
 in the Tube w!l,fo thwith fubr will appear from hence; put 
 
 fide, and after a few recipro- all the above-mentioned Appa- 
 
 cations, (land at thirty Inches ratus into a large Receiver, out 
 
 above the Surface of the Mer- of which, by the Air- Pump, 
 
 cury, contained in the VefTel. extract the Air ; then, as the 
 
 The Reafon why the Quickfil- Air is extracted, you may per- 
 
 yer is fufpended at fuch a ceive the Mejcury^ contained 
 
 in.
 
 C H A P. 1 9 . of Univerfal Geography. 42 5 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 "The upper Parts of the Atmofyhere are more fubtile 
 than tbofe below j yet it may be, that thofe in the 
 middle Region may be thicker and gr -offer than thofe 
 near the Earth. 
 
 FOR the lighter Parts go upwards and the 
 more fubtile Parts are the lighter, which Ihows the 
 
 Truth 
 
 in the Tube, gradually to fubfide ; 
 but if again you (hall by degrees 
 let in the Air, the Mercury in 
 the Tube will afcend, in pro- 
 portion to the quantity of Air 
 intromitted, 'till at laft it reach 
 it's priftine Height of thirty 
 Inches. This Apparatus, of the 
 Tube and Veflel, together with 
 the contained Mercury, is, from 
 it's Ufe in meafuring the Air, 
 called a Barometer : and from 
 it's Author, Torrifellius, any 
 Experiment perform'd by means 
 thereof, is called Torricellian. 
 
 'Ti? manifeft, that the Weight 
 of the Mercury contained in the 
 Tube, and the Weight of a Co- 
 lumn of Air, whofe Altitude is 
 that of the whole Atmofphere, 
 and whofe Bafis is equal to the O- 
 rificeoftheTube, if weighed fe- 
 parately, the one will be equal 
 to the other ; fb that when the 
 Weight of the Air is diminifhed, 
 the Barometer is deprefled, and 
 vice verfa. Hence by taking a 
 View of the Barometer, you 
 may, at any time, know the 
 prefent Gravity of the Air; 
 which is a Problem of vaft Mo- 
 ment both in Univerfal Phyfics, 
 and in Meteorology in parti- 
 
 cular, and which deferves to 
 be ranked among the nobleft 
 Inventions of the modern Phi- 
 lofophers. 
 
 By the Experiments perform- 
 ed fome time ago before the 
 Royal Society, for comparing 
 the Weight of Air with Wa- 
 ter, and fo with other Bodies ; 
 by the firft Experiment the pro- 
 portion was found to be as I 
 to 840 ; by the next, as i to 
 852; and by the third as I to 
 860. And lately the Ingeni- 
 ous Mr Hauksbee, by a very 
 fimple and accurately perform- 
 ed Experiment, found the Ra- 
 tio of Air and Water to be as 
 i 10885. All which Experi- 
 ments being made in the Sum- 
 mer time, at which Seafon the 
 Air is by the Heat expanded, 
 and confequently lighter j and 
 the Barometer ftanding at about 
 29^ Inches higher ; this might 
 perhaps be fafely determined up- 
 on, that the Barometer afcend- 
 ingto 30 Inches, and the Con- 
 ftitution of the Air at a Me- 
 dium, as to Cold and Heat, 
 the Ratio of Air to Water would 
 be as i to 800 ; and therefore 
 feeing, the Weight of Water 
 compared
 
 426 The Abjolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 Truth of the firft Part of the Proportion : and 
 the Caufe of the fecond Part is, that thofe in 
 the middle Region eafily go together and become 
 groffer, the hot Particles carried up with them ha- 
 ving left them, and the Rays reflected from the 
 Earth having but fmall force in the middle Region, 
 that is fo diftant from the Earth. 
 
 W H E N C E it is, that after Rain the middle 
 Region is more clear ; the grofier Part being fal- 
 len down (j). 
 
 PRO- 
 
 compared with Mercury, is as 
 I to 1 3 j, the Gravity of the 
 Air compared to the Gravity 
 of Mercury would be as i to 
 joSco. 
 
 Jurins Appendix. 
 
 (q) If with the Hnnds we 
 fqueeze a blown Bladder, we 
 feel the included Air make a 
 ftrong Refiftance, and by the 
 Spring thereof, jumping back 
 and difengaging itfelf, the Im- 
 preffions, or Cavities, made by 
 the Hands on the Surface of the 
 Bladder, are immediately, on 
 ceafing to prefs, expanded and 
 fmoothed ; and this is called the 
 Elaftic Force of the Air. Thi3 
 Force, every Particle of Air con- 
 tinually exercifes, and affefting 
 a larger Space, contends againft 
 an equal Force of ambient Par- 
 ticles ; whofe Refinance being 
 either fortuitoufly taken away or 
 impaired, the Particle inftant- 
 ly expands itfelf into the whole 
 Extent, be it ever fo large. 
 Hence if flender glafs Vials, or 
 Bladders full of Air, and care- 
 fully ftopp'd, be put into an 
 Air-Pump, they are burft by 
 the Force of the included Air. 
 
 Thus if a Bladder, only a little 
 blown and flagging, be carried 
 to the Top of a Mountain, or 
 lofty Edifice, it immediately 
 fwells to fuch a Degree, that 
 if the Mountain be of fufficient 
 Height, it feems to be wholly 
 fluffed with Air. For the Al- 
 titude of the Atmofphere not 
 being the fame upon the Top 
 of a Mountain, as upon the 
 plain Surface of the Earth, the 
 prefTure of the ambient Air is 
 not therefore fo ftrong upon 
 the Bladder placed there, and 
 therefore the Air, included in 
 it, fprings into a larger Space. 
 That the Air likewife upon the 
 Top of a Mountain, is lighter 
 than in Places of lower Situa- 
 tion, is evident from the Baro- 
 meter, which being taken to 
 the Top of a Mountain, the 
 Mercury fubfides ; fo that by 
 means of it the Altitude, of 
 Mountains might be very ex- 
 ac~lly calculated, were it once 
 known in what proportion the 
 Mercury falls ; according to the 
 different Height of the Place. 
 Vaftly great, yea almoft in- 
 credible is this elaftic Force, 
 by which, according to the fa- 
 mous
 
 CHAP. 19. ofUnherfal Geography. 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 427 
 
 The Atmofphere^ or Air, growing hot, takes up more 
 Room than before, and the more the Heat leaves 
 it, it contrafts the more, and takes up lefs Room. 
 
 THIS is abundantly confirmed by that In- 
 ftrument called a Thermometer, by which is mea- 
 
 fured 
 
 roous Mr Boyle*, the Air, 
 without the Affiitance of Heat, 
 was dilated into a Space not 
 only 60 or i 50, but 8000, yea 
 i oooo, and at laft 13769 times 
 larger than that it poffeffed in 
 it's natural State near the Sur- 
 face of the Earth. And feeing 
 the Air can be artificially com- 
 preffed f to the fixtieth part of 
 it's natural Space; it appears 
 that the Place into which the 
 Air may be artificially condenf- 
 ed, to the Place, into which 
 it would dilate itfelf, if freed 
 from all Preffure, is at leaft, as 
 i to fixty times 1 3769 ; or more 
 than 826000. 
 
 By a great many Experiments 
 performed in England, France, 
 and Italy, relating to the Con- 
 traction and Expanfion of Air, 
 it is found that the Spaces into 
 which, by different Weights, 
 it is condenfed, are among 
 themfelves in a reciprocal Pro- 
 portion to their Gravities ; or, 
 the greater the Preffure is on the 
 Air, the lefs Space it poffeffes. 
 
 From which Theorem, toge- 
 ther with the Proportion above 
 
 * Walli s" s Hjdroji. Prop. 13. 
 Tranfaft. 
 
 determined betwixt the Weight 
 of Air and Mercury, it is eafy 
 to fee the Grounds of the Con- 
 troverfies contained here and 
 therein the Writings of the mo- 
 dern Philofophers, concerning 
 the leffer denfity of the Air in 
 the upper Regions, as alfo 
 the Altitude of the whole At- 
 mofphere. 
 
 Firft then, if we allow the 
 the Air to have no Elafticity, 
 but that thro' the whole Space 
 'twixt the Earth and the utmoft 
 bounds and extent of the At- 
 mofphere it is every where of 
 the fame Denfity ; juft as Wa- 
 ter, which, howfoever deep, is 
 every where from top to bot- 
 tom equally denfe ; now fince 
 from what has been alrea- 
 dy faid, it appears, that the 
 Weight of a Column of Air, 
 reaching to the top of the 
 Atmofphere, is equal to the 
 Weight of Mercury contained 
 in a Barometer ; and feeing al- 
 fo the Proportion of Weight be- 
 twixt equal quantities of Mer- 
 cury and Air is found ; it 
 were eafy to give a Defini- 
 tion of the Altitude of that 
 Column of Air, or of the whole 
 Atmofphere. For feeing a Co- 
 lumn
 
 428 tte Absolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 fared the Heat or Cold in the Air, for the colder 
 the Air in the Glafs, it takes up lefs Room, and 
 
 the 
 
 lumn of Air one Inch high, is 
 to the like Column of Mercu- 
 ry, as i to 1 0800, it appears 
 that thefe 10800 Columns, or 
 a Column of Air 900 Foot 
 liigh, is equal in Weight to i 
 Inch of the Mercury, and con- 
 fequently that all the 30 Inches 
 of Mercury, contained in the 
 Barometer, require a Column of 
 Air 27000 Foot high. So that, 
 according to this Hypothecs, 
 the Altitude of the Atmoiphere 
 would be only 27000 Foot, or 
 a little more than 5 Miles. 
 
 But when, in the high Re- 
 gions, the Air, by it's elaltic 
 Force, refiles and expands it- 
 felf, according as the Weight 
 of the incumbent Atmofptere 
 is diminifhed, it muft of necef- 
 fity be far more rarified and 
 fubtile than the Air near the 
 Surface of the Earth : and con- 
 fequently a much greater Alti- 
 tude muft be affigned to the 
 Atmofphere, than what was 
 found by the juft now mention- 
 ed Computation. 
 
 For feeing, according to the 
 Theorem above laid down, the 
 Spaces in which the Air is 
 included, are reciprocally pro- 
 portional to the compelling 
 Gravities ; but the denfity of e- 
 very Body is in a reciprocal Ra- 
 tio to the Spaces, which that 
 Body poffeffes; the Denfity 
 therefore of the Air in any 
 Part of the Atmofphere will be 
 proportional to the Weight of 
 the whole incumbent Air. And 
 further, if we fuppofe the Al- 
 
 titude of the whole Atmo- 
 fphere divided into innume- 
 rable equal Parts, feeing the 
 Denfity of Air included in a- 
 ny one of thefe Parts is in 
 proportion to it's quantity, and 
 the Weight of the Atmofphere 
 is alfo as the quantity of the 
 whole incumbent Air; it ap- 
 pears, that the quantity of the 
 whole incumbent Air is every 
 where, as the quantity of Air 
 included in the lower Part, 
 which conititutes a Difference 
 between every two neareft 
 quantities of the whole incum- 
 bent Air. It is a Theorem in 
 Geometry; that fuch Magni- 
 tudes whofe Differences are 
 proportional to the Magnitudes 
 themfelves, thefe Magnitudes 
 are in a continued geometrical 
 Proportion. Whence if, ac- 
 cording to the Hypothefis, the 
 Altitude of the Air, by adding 
 the equal Parts, into which it is 
 divided, increaie in a continued 
 arithmetical Proportion, it's 
 Denfity will be diminifhed, or, 
 which is the fame, the Rare- 
 faclion of the Air will be in- 
 creafed in a continued geome- 
 trical Proportion. Such as 
 know the way of following 
 fuch a Series, by taking a View 
 of one or more of the Rarefa&i- 
 ons of the Air at.different Alti- 
 tudes, may, without any Trou- 
 ble, determine it's Rarefaftion 
 in any Altitude, or the Alti- 
 tude anfwering to any Rarefafti- 
 on, and fo alfo the Altitude of 
 the whole Atmofphere, if it may 
 be
 
 CHAP. 19. ofUnfoerfal Geography. 429 
 the more Room, the more Heat it acquires ; as 
 we mall mow in the following Propofition. The 
 
 natural 
 
 be known, or made the ex- 
 tream Degree of Rarefaction, 
 beyond which the Air cannot 
 pafs. Such as incline to know 
 more on this Subject, may 
 confult the famous Dr Gre- 
 gory's Agronomy, Lib. v. Prop. 
 3. as alfo the excellent Dr 
 Baileys Diflertation in Pbilo- 
 fopbical Tranfaftions N igt. 
 who have demonftrated the 
 fame in a different, and fome- 
 what more difficult way of 
 reafoning, which I have here 
 borrowed from the Demon- 
 ftrations of a very learned 
 Friend. 
 
 But withal we muft not 
 conceal, that thefe things have 
 been rendered uncertain by the 
 Obfervations of the famous 
 Cafflni * and his Affiftants; 
 who, in order to extend the 
 Meridian Line of the Paris 
 Obfervatory, after having with 
 great exaftnefs meafured the 
 Altitudes of feveral Mountains, 
 and marked the Height of the 
 Barometer on the Top of each 
 of them, they found that the 
 RarefadHons difcovered by that 
 Method, no ways agreed with 
 thofe we have lately laid down, 
 but that they were far greater 
 than what ought to come out 
 from the abovementioned Pro- 
 portion : whence becoming fuf- 
 picious, that the Experiments 
 they had formerly made for 
 finding out the Rarefaction of 
 
 * Hijl de I'Acad. Roy. 1703, 
 
 the Air under different pref- 
 fures, had not been managed 
 with fufficient Accuracy, they 
 determined again to put the 
 Matter upon Tryal, which Sub- 
 jed being diligently treated of 
 in the Royal Academy, and 
 when there were made great 
 Dilatations of Air, compared 
 to which, the Rarefactions found 
 on the Tops of Mountains, 
 were woundrous fmall ; yet they 
 found that all thefe exaftly 
 followed the reciprocal Ratio 
 of their incumbent Gravities. 
 So that it feems to be put 
 beyond all doubt, that fuchis 
 the Nature of the Air, which 
 comes neareft to the Earth's 
 Surface, that the lefs preflure 
 it has upon it, the greater 
 Space it dilates itfelfinto: and 
 feeing the upper Air, or fuch as 
 environs the Tops of Mountains, 
 does not obferve this Propor- 
 tion, it follows, that it is of a 
 different Nature from the Air 
 that is next us, which notwith- 
 ftanding needs be no caufe of 
 wonder to us, if, according 
 to the moft approved Senti- 
 ments of Philosophers, we al- 
 low that there is in our At- 
 mofphere, befides Vapours and 
 terreftrial Exhalations, a certain 
 Body of kin to itfelf, and en- 
 dowed with fuch Affeftions, 
 as we have above affigned to 
 the Air ; and further, that thefe 
 Vapours and Exhalations, are 
 no ways capable of fo great 
 Rarefaction, as is the Air ; and 
 that thefe are mixed in far 
 greater
 
 43 The Abfoliite Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 natural Caufe of the Proportion is this ; that the 
 hot Particles of the Sun's Rays, or any Fire, are 
 
 the 
 
 greater plenty with the Air 
 neareft us, than in the upper 
 Air. Thefe things being laid 
 down, it is manifeft that the 
 Air of the higher Countries be- 
 ing Jefs ftored with Vapours, 
 has, in proportion toit'sDenfi- 
 ty, more ElalHcity in it thanthat 
 which comes next to the Earth, 
 whence the reciprocal Ratio of 
 Gravity, which is in the Air 
 next the Earth, does not hold 
 here; and further, that Va- 
 pours and Exhalations have not 
 fuch Elailicityas Air, but that 
 this is much more rarefied and 
 extenuated. But the excellent 
 Mr Fontenelle, Secretary of 
 the Society, explains thefe 
 Phenomena in a quite diffe- 
 rent Manner, in his Hiftory 
 of the Academy, Anno 1708. 
 
 He propofes fome Experi- 
 ments performed by the famous 
 Mr De la Hire, and others, 
 from which he infers, that the 
 elaftic Force of the Air is in- 
 creafed when it is mixed with 
 Moifture, or when compound- 
 ed of Air and aqueous Vapours, 
 the Rarefaction will be greater, 
 than from pure Air ; and that 
 therefore on the Tops of Moun- 
 tains the Air is found more 
 rarefied, becaufe many Vapours 
 are carried thither for produ- 
 cing of Rain. The Experiments 
 are thefe : 
 
 They took a {lender glafs Si- 
 phon, oneofwhofe Legs end- 
 ed in a large hollow Sphere, be- 
 ing open at the other. This 
 
 Siphon was full of common Air, 
 and expofed to the external Air 
 coming into the Siphon. The 
 Globe and Siphon was plunged 
 into hot Water, found by pre- 
 vious Experiments to be of the 
 fame degree of Heat as boiling 
 Water, and confequently cau- 
 fmg the fame degree of Rare- 
 faction ; tho' the Fire under- 
 neath were greater or lefs. 
 
 When the Air included in 
 the Globe was rarefied with 
 this degree of Heat, it would 
 be gradually thruR out at the 
 other end of the Siphon ; 'till 
 at length the Globe being heat- 
 ed to the utmoft, there was 
 left a veryfmall quantity of Air, 
 highly rarefied, that poflcffed 
 the whole Cavity. Then the 
 Water being removed from the 
 Fire, the Air, as it gradually 
 cooled, which before poffefled 
 the whole Globe, being gra- 
 dually contracted by the Cold, 
 gave way to the Water that 
 entered at the Orifice of the 
 external Leg, and at length, 
 when the Water became entire- 
 ly cold, it was contracted into 
 a very fmall Space, whilft the 
 reft of the Globe remained 
 filled with Water. Now by 
 comparing the Space, pofleffed 
 by the Air, cooled and redu- 
 ced to it's natural State, and 
 the whole Cavity of the Globe 
 which it had at the utmoft 
 Heat, it appears how much the 
 Air was rarefied with that de- 
 gree of Heat. 
 
 This
 
 .CHAP. 19. ofUnherfal Geography. 431 
 the moft fubtile in the World, and inconftant 
 Motion, and while thefe are mixed with the At- 
 
 mofphere, 
 
 This Experiment was firft 
 made in clear Weather, again 
 in amoift and rainy Seafon ; and 
 at a third time, a little Water 
 was left adhering to the inner 
 Surface of the Globe. And it 
 was obferved that the Air con- 
 denfed at the end of the Ex- 
 periment, in the firft Cafe pof- 
 fefied f of the Globe, in the 
 fecond pofleffed but f, and in 
 the third ^ |. Whence Mr 
 Fontenelle concludes, that the 
 Air was more dilated in the 
 fecond Cafe, but particularly in 
 the third, than in the firft Cafe ; 
 and therefore as the Air is the 
 more dilated the more moift 
 Vapour is mixed with it ; hence 
 he concludes it probable, that 
 for the fjme Reafon, there is a 
 greater Rarefa&ionon the Tops 
 of Mountains, becaufe the Air 
 that furrounds them is mixed 
 with a greater quantity of Va- 
 pour. But there are two Con- 
 fiderations that render the- Ar- 
 gument inconclufive. For firft 
 in the two later Experiments, 
 as aqueous Vapo-urs were plen- 
 tifully mixed with v the Air, it 
 might happen that 'when the 
 Air was condenfed, and the 
 Water entered thro' the Siphon 
 into the Globe, thefe Vapours 
 might again return to Wa- 
 ter, and mixing with the other 
 Water partly by the Force of 
 Condenfation, and partly by 
 the mutual Attraction there is 
 betwixt the Particles of Liquors, 
 leave but little true Air inclu- 
 ded in the very fmall Space. 
 
 Whence it mightfeem, thatthe 
 quantity of Air which rarefied 
 with the fame degree of Heat 
 poffefled the whole Cavity, was 
 lefs in the two later, than in 
 the former Cafe ; and therefore 
 more dilated, fo as to poffefs 
 the whole Space. 
 
 Again, allowing that the 
 Air was more rarefied in the 
 later Cafes, yet as this was ef- 
 fefled by the means of Heat, 
 I do not fee how it follows 
 that becaufe the Vapours mixed 
 with the Air, and agitated by . 
 Heat, are more rarefied than 
 Air without Vapours, therefore 
 thefe Vapours without Heat, 
 fhould have a greater Elafticity 
 than pure Air. 
 
 We mail here add a Table 
 of M. Cajjtni, junior, made 
 from the foregoing Obfervati- 
 ons, and exhibiting the Height 
 of the Air from the Surface of 
 the Sea, correfponding to the 
 Sinkings of the Barometer ; as 
 alfo the Spaces increafing in 
 arithmetical Proportion, where- 
 in the Height of the Air in- 
 creafes aim oft half a French 
 League, whilft the Barometer 
 finks in twelfths of an Inch, 
 at a time when, being placed 
 on the Surface of the Sea, it 
 Hands at about 28 French Inches 
 or 29!-?- of EngHJb. 1 u-fe t&e 
 French Meafures, being unwil- 
 ling, by reducing them to the 
 Englijh Feet, to difturb tfee 
 beautiful Series of Propor- 
 tions by fmall fractional Parts ; 
 tho 1 thefe may, by the help of 
 the
 
 432 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 mofphere, they feparate them, with great Force, 
 and fo make more Pores, and thefe fiery Particles 
 going away, the Particles of Air left by themfelves, 
 
 do 
 
 the letter Table fubjoined be eafily reduced to EngHJb Mea- 
 fure. 
 
 Barometer falling. 
 
 Twelfths ef 
 Incb. an Inch. 
 o o 
 
 Divijions anfwering 
 to each twelfth 
 of an Incb. 
 
 Fatboms. Feet. 
 10 o 
 
 Height of the 
 above the 
 Surface. 
 
 Fatboms. 
 o 
 
 Air, 
 
 Sea\ 
 
 Feet 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 10 
 10 
 10 
 10 
 10 
 
 II 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 31 
 
 52 
 63 
 
 i 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 9 
 10 
 1 1 
 
 I 
 
 II 
 II 
 1 1 
 II 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 5 
 o 
 
 11 
 
 97 
 109 
 
 121 
 
 '33 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 3 
 i 
 o 
 o 
 
 I I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 12 
 12 
 12 
 
 12 
 12 
 
 '3 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 
 
 H5 
 '57 
 170 
 182 
 '9? 
 208 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 o 
 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 ii 
 
 2 
 
 '3 
 13 
 '3 
 '3 
 13 
 4 
 
 . 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 S 
 
 
 
 221 
 
 235 
 248 
 262 
 2 7 6 
 
 2 9 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 3 
 i 
 o 
 o 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 H 
 14 
 
 '4 
 4 
 '5 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 333 
 347 
 362 
 
 377 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 3
 
 C H A P. 1 9. of Unherfal Geography. 43 3 
 
 Barometer falling- 
 
 Tutf/fibs of 
 Inch. an Inch, 
 
 Divifeons anfwering 
 to each twelfth 
 of an Inch. 
 
 ? atboms. Feet. 
 
 Height of the Air, 
 bwe the Sea\ 
 Surface. 
 
 Fathoms. Feet. 
 
 2 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 10 
 1 1 
 
 3 o 
 
 15 
 '5 
 '$ 
 '$ 
 
 !i 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 o 
 
 392 
 408 
 423 
 439 
 455 
 4?i 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 3 
 i 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 16 
 
 16 
 16 
 16 
 16 
 |7 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 . 
 
 
 
 487 
 
 503 
 520 
 536 
 
 553 
 
 570 
 
 3 
 o 
 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 ii 
 
 4 o 
 
 17 
 '7 
 17 
 7 
 
 '7 
 18 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 5*7 
 005 
 622 
 640 
 658 
 676 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 3 
 i 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 4 
 
 i 
 
 18 
 18 
 
 18 
 18 
 18 
 '9 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 
 
 694 
 712 
 73i 
 749 
 768 
 787 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 ii 
 $ o 
 
 19 
 
 '9 
 19 
 9 
 '9 
 
 ao 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 
 
 806 
 826 
 845 
 865 
 885 
 905 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 2O 
 20 
 21 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 
 
 925 
 
 94? 
 966 
 986 
 1007 
 1028 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 _J 
 
 VOL. I. 
 
 Ff
 
 434 
 
 *Tbe Abfolute 'Part SECT. VI. 
 
 Barometer falling. 
 
 Twelfths of 
 Irifb. __ an Inch. . 
 
 Divifions anjwering 
 to each twelfth 
 of an Inch. 
 
 Fathoms. Feet. 
 
 Height of the Air, 
 above the Sea's 
 Surface. 
 
 Fathoms. Feet- 
 
 ! 
 
 7 
 8 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 21 I 
 
 ZI 2 
 
 21 3 
 
 21 4 
 
 21 5 
 
 22 
 
 1049 4 
 1071 o 
 1092 3 
 1114 i 
 1136 o 
 1158 o 
 
 5 
 
 ' 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 c 
 
 6 
 
 22 I 
 22 2 
 22 3 
 22 4 
 22 5 
 
 23 o 
 
 nbo --.- 
 
 1202 3 
 
 1225 o 
 1247 4 
 1270 3 
 1293 3 
 
 - 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 1 1 
 
 o 
 
 23 I 
 
 '23 2 
 
 23 3 
 
 23 4 
 
 , 2 3 5 
 24 o 
 
 1316 4 
 1340 o 
 
 >3 6 3 3 
 1387 i 
 J4H o 
 |H35 o 
 
 i 
 
 i24 I 
 |H" 
 
 H59 i 
 .HJ 3 
 
 1 -A 
 
 Fathoms,
 
 
 T 8 
 CHAP. 19. ofUniverfal Geography. 435 
 
 Fathoms, Feet, Inches, and Twelfths of an Inch* 
 
 French. Engiijh. 
 
 French. 
 
 Engiijh. 
 
 -IF" i A 
 
 60 
 
 64 
 
 2 2\-j 
 
 70 
 
 74# 
 
 3 3/5 
 
 80 
 
 
 4 4^ 
 
 90 
 
 96^ 
 
 5 5 iS 
 
 IOO 
 
 io6{y- 
 
 6 6^,5 
 
 200 
 
 2I 3 A 
 
 7 7iH 
 
 300 
 
 320 
 
 8 8^ 
 
 4 00 
 
 4265^ 
 
 9 9,-j 
 
 500 
 
 533^ 
 
 IO lO-i- 
 
 600 
 
 640 
 
 20 2 I 'i. 
 
 700 
 
 74677 
 
 30 32" 
 
 800 
 
 853/5 
 
 4O 42i-'" 
 
 900 
 
 960 
 
 5 53 X 
 
 lobo 
 
 io66ff 
 
 Inghjh. 
 
 French. Engiijh. 
 
 French. 
 
 i 
 
 H 60 
 
 56/1 
 
 2 
 
 "it 70 
 
 657^ 
 
 3 
 
 2 ft 80 
 
 75 ^ 
 
 4 
 
 3- 9o 
 4 J ^ oo 
 
 93fl 
 
 6 
 
 5"J f 20 
 
 1 8 7 /6 
 
 7 
 
 6/6 300 
 
 281 ^ 
 
 8 
 
 7/6 400 
 
 375 t 2 
 
 9 
 
 8 *^ coo 
 
 4687*^ 
 
 20 
 
 i8l-| 700 
 
 562/ 6 
 656/1 
 
 3 
 
 28 / 6 800, 
 
 75 
 
 40 
 
 37-*< 9 
 
 843rt 
 
 >o 
 
 461^ 1000 
 
 937/6- 
 
 Ff 2
 
 43 6 "The Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 do again come together, and are folded into one 
 another (r). 
 
 (r) Mr Hauksbte, in his Pby- approached towards A, accord- 
 Jtco- Mechanical Experiments, ing as the Air AB was more 
 pag. 218. has, by a very curious or lefs contracted by the De- 
 
 Experimenr, determined the 
 Ratio of the Places poflefled 
 by the Air according as it is 
 differently heated. 
 
 ABC (P.g. 2;.) isareftan- 
 gular Glafs Tube, B a little 
 Column of Quickfilver : A the 
 
 grees of Heat. And by means 
 of thefe Obfervations he made 
 the following Table ; wherein 
 the Degrees are the fame with 
 thofe marked 06 the Thermo- 
 meter for meafuring the afcent 
 of the Liquor; being the inter-' 
 
 extremity of the Tube, cemen- mediate Degrees betwixt the 
 
 ted to a Screw, fitted with a greateft Heat, and the greateft 
 
 Cap, and flint after the fettling Cold of our Climate. The 
 
 of the Quickfilver, the Space Column of Parts fhews the Pro- 
 
 AB is full of common Air, portion of the Spaces wherein 
 
 included betwixt the Screw and 
 the Quickfilver ; whilll the part 
 of the Tube B C, is open to 
 the external Air. This Tube 
 Mr Hauksbee placed in a pro- 
 per VelTel, along with a Ther- 
 mometer, then pouring in hot 
 Water enough to cover the 
 Ball of the Thermometer, the 
 Quickfilver B moved from or 
 
 Degrees 
 
 Parts. 
 
 
 '30 
 
 144 
 
 
 120 
 
 143 
 
 
 I 10 
 
 142 
 
 
 ICO 
 
 141 
 
 Above. 
 
 90 
 
 140 
 
 
 80 
 
 139 
 
 
 70 
 
 138 
 
 
 60 
 
 137 
 
 
 50 
 
 136 
 
 
 40 
 
 135 
 
 
 30 
 
 134 
 
 
 20 
 
 l l>3... 
 
 ~*~~ 
 
 10 
 
 132 
 
 Freezing 
 
 CO 
 
 131 
 
 Point. 
 
 IO 
 
 130 
 
 
 20 
 
 129 
 
 B(10K. 
 
 30 
 
 128 
 
 
 40 
 
 127 
 
 
 5 
 
 126 
 
 the fame Bulk of Air is includ- 
 ed according to the Degree of 
 Heat annexed ; where it is to 
 be obferved, that the Air con- 
 Itantly and uniformly loles one 
 144^ part of the Space it oc- 
 cupies in the greateft Heat, 
 every twelve Degrees that the 
 Thermometer finks. 
 
 Vie Part of the great e^ 
 Space loft' 
 
 4 
 
 ioS 
 J 3 
 6 
 
 Juriffs 
 Appendix. 
 
 COROL-
 
 C H A P. 1 9. of Umverfai Geography. 437 
 COROLLART. 
 
 THEREFORE the Height of the Atmofphere 
 
 is not conftant, but increafeth and decreafeth, at 
 Mid-day greateft, and Mid-night leaft, and of a 
 mean Height at Sun-rifing or fetting, as in Propo- 
 fition xiv. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 To make a Thermometer, or Tbermofcope, by which 
 we may try the Changes in the Air, as to Heat 
 and Cold. 
 
 L E T us take a Glafs with a long round Neck 
 and round Body LH (Fig. 26.), let it be fattened 
 to a Board MNP Q^ with it's Neck downward, 
 and let there be a Veflel fo filled with coloured 
 Water, put under it, that the Part of the Neck 
 L F may be under the Water, and chufe a Day 
 of a middle Conflitution between Heat and Cold, 
 with which the Heat and Cold at other times may 
 be compared ; and let the Water be poured into 
 the Veflel at that time, when the Air growing cold 
 the Water will afcend above F of it's own accord ; 
 for the Air that before filled the Space F A being 
 condenfed by the Cold takes up lefs Space. On 
 the other Hand, the Air being made more hot, 
 the Water will come down from F towards L , for 
 the Air FH being rarified takes up more Space. 
 
 AND the Degrees of increafe and decreafe of 
 Heat and Cold may be known, if you divide the 
 Line FA into a certain Number of Parts. 
 
 O R without a Veflel underneath, let the Glafs 
 
 L H have, at the end L, a hollow Ball of Glafs, 
 
 with a fmall Hole on one Side, filled with Water, 
 
 F f 3 ' and
 
 43 8 The Abfolute Part S E c T. VI, 
 
 and the Degrees of Heat and Cold will be fhown 
 by the Rjfing and Falling of the Water (j). 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 A clear Air may be fo rarifed by a great Fire as 
 to take up feventy times a greater Space than before^ 
 andfo con den fed in a Wind-Gun as to take up only 
 the fixtieth part of the former Space; but the Heat 
 cf ike Sun will not rarify fo mucb y nor the ordi- 
 nary Cold condenfe fo much. 
 
 THIS is proved from the jEolipile, which if 
 it be taken when white with Heat, it will then 
 receive thirteen Ounces of Water ; but the fame 
 Molipile when cold, or in it's natural State, will 
 take thirteen and half a Dram, and that Part 
 which contains the half Dram is the Difference of 
 the two Spaces, and is almofl the feveuieth Part 
 of the whole Cavity of the 
 
 (/) This kind of Thermome- 
 ter was thought to fhew the 
 Heat or Coldnefs of the Air, 
 with fufEcient Accuracy before 
 the difcovery of the Barome- 
 ter. But after it was found 
 thnt the Air was not of one 
 conftant Weight, but differed 
 at different Times, it was re- 
 icarl-'ed, that the Water in- 
 cluded in the Glafs Neck, ac- 
 cording as the Weight of the 
 Airincreafedordiminifhed, and 
 reeking upon the Water con- 
 tained in the VefTel, mufl alfo. 
 afcend or defcend tho' the De- 
 gree of Heat fhould remain the 
 fame. Whence the Struclure 
 of the Thermometer was necef- 
 farily altered. Moft at prefent 
 ufe a fimilar Tube ABC (Fig. 
 27. ) ending in i Bajl at tie 
 
 Bottom. This they fill to a pro- 
 per Height with Spirit of Wine, 
 fuppofe to 8, then clofe the In- 
 Hrument bv melting it's Extre- 
 mity A at the Flame of a Lamp. 
 The Spirit of Wine, being now 
 rarifiedor condenfed, according 
 to the different Temperature of 
 the Air, marks, by it's afcent or 
 defcent in the Tube, the greater 
 or lefs Degree of Heat. In 
 making this Thermometer they 
 obferve fuch a Proportion in 
 the Capacity of the Ball to the 
 Stenn, that the Spirit of Wine 
 may neither fill the whole Tube 
 in ihe greateft Degree of Heat, 
 nor all fink into the Ball in the 
 greateil Cold. 
 
 Jttrin's 
 
 PRO-
 
 v- ff^ 5 
 
 CHAP. 19. of Unherfal Geography. 439 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 Why in Places of the Frigid Zone, when tbey have 
 not the Sun rifing and Jetting, the Air is fame Days 
 clear, but grofs and cloudy for the moft part. 
 
 THE Caufe of that thick Cloudinefs, which is 
 almoft conftant, is, the fmall Heat of the fubterra- 
 neous Earth, or that comes from the Sufi, or Moon, 
 (which remains for feveral Days and Nights above 
 the Horizon whilft the Sun is below,) and other . 
 Stars , which Heat, being weak, is not able to dif- 
 pel the Cloud ; and fome Days being clear, is not 
 from the grofs Vapours being made fmall, but from 
 their falling down on the Earth, or being driven 
 away by the Wind. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 Why fometimes in the great eft Cold in Winter the Air 
 is fubtile and dear ; whereas Cold condenfes and 
 co nit acts the Air. 
 
 COLD is twofold, moderate and exceffive : a 
 moderate Cold does not make the Air clear but 
 cloudy, for by the fmall Heat that is joined with 
 the Cold, the Vapours are raifed but not difpel- 
 led ; but a vehement excefnve Cold renders the 
 Air clear, for two Reafons , i . It makes the grofs 
 Vapours in the Air more grofs ; and fo they fall 
 down, and the Air is thus cleared. 2. Becaufe 
 the Pores of the Earth are fhut up, and the Va- 
 pours are not exhaled from it, that render the Air 
 turbid and cloudy. The Sea indeed is not frozeft 
 with Cold; yet it's Particles are made fo thick 
 with Cold, that it doth not fo readily fend out 
 Exhalations, tho* it doth a great many, being of 
 another Nature than the Earth. 
 
 Ff4 PRO-
 
 440 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 Why when we look thro* the Air in an horizontal Line 
 it appeals thicker and more cloudy than that above ^ 
 or that in which we breathe. 
 
 THE Caufe is twofold ; the firft becaufe the Air 
 near the Horizon is really more cloudy ; the other 
 is a deceit in our Sight -, for the Eye takes in the 
 Diftances of the Parts of an Arch in the Hori- 
 zon, by very fmall Angles -, as it does the Diftances 
 of Pillars in a long Row : and as we judge thofe that 
 are diftant to be near, fo the diftant Particles of 
 Air are judged to be joined clofe ; but the Diftance 
 of the Particles of Air that is higher, the Eye fees 
 under great Angles and apprehends them the 
 better. 
 
 THE fame is the Caufe why the Air at a 
 Diftance appears to be cloudy ; but when we ap- 
 proach to it, it does not feem fo cloudy. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 IVhelher the Atmofybere or Air be always of the fame 
 Height in all Places ; or if it's Figure be fyherical. 
 
 THAT it is not of the fame but of very dif- 
 ferent Heights, appears in that the Sun is only 
 vertical to one Place at once, and fends it's Rays 
 obliquely to other Places ; and fo more weakly 
 the more they are remote from the Sun, or the 
 nearer the Poles : and therefore the power of the 
 Sun is different in different Places, and muft raife 
 the Vapours differently ; they are higheft directly 
 under the Sun, and loweft in the oppofite Point, 
 and in a middle Height at the Pole, fo that the 
 Air is of an oval Figure. 
 
 YET
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 441 
 YET the contrary, that the Height is the fame 
 in all Places, feems more probable ; tho* the Va- 
 pours are more elevated in fome Places than o- 
 thers ; yet becaufe the Air is fluid and by it's Gra- 
 vity tends downward, therefore the higher Parts 
 prefs thofe below ; and thofe again others fideways, 
 'till all the Parts come to be alike high ; and thus 
 it's fpherical Figure is proved the fame way as 
 that of the Water is proved by Archimedes^ Chap, 
 xiii. for the Suppofitions here are the fame as there ; 
 which if falfe the Demonftration fails. 
 
 D E S Cartes alfo makes it oval, for a particular 
 Reafon j fee Chap, xiv. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 The Condenfation or RarifaR'wn of the Air doth not 
 alter j/'j Height. 
 
 FOR not the whole, but a part only is con- 
 denfed or ratified, fometimes here, fometimes 
 there ; which doth not alter the Height in one 
 Place more than another : only there may be a 
 greater Condenfation in one Part than in another : 
 which can alter the Height but very little. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 The Altitude of the Atmofphere or Air is not only 
 the fame in different Places, but is always the fame 
 both Summer and Winter. 
 
 FOR tho' the Heat in our Summer doth at- 
 tenuate our Air, and raife it more than in Winter, 
 yet becaufe then there is Winter in another Place, 
 the Air there is lefs raifed, and therefore a Part of 
 oi'.r Air will flow there : and when our Air is low 
 by the Cold, the Air of another Place that is hotter 
 
 will
 
 442 *fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 will move to us, 'till the whole Air be equally 
 diftant from the Center. 
 
 AND the fame may be faid as to Day and 
 Night ; for while at Night it is condenfed with us, 
 and is low, it rarities more in another Place, and 
 moves to our Air 'till it makes a fpherical Figure ; 
 and becaufe all things are every where equal, the 
 Height will continue the fame every where ; and tho* 
 it may rarify and condenfe more in one Place arid 
 Time than another, yet the Difference being fmall 
 will not much alter the Altitude ; as we faid in 
 the preceding Propofition. 
 
 T-H E fame may be faid of the Clouds, Rain, or 
 Vapours, in our or another Place, as from thefe 
 a greater or lefs Altitude feems to arife : but I an- 
 fwer, there is fcarce any time in which it doth 
 not rain, or a Cloud fall, in fome Place or other ; 
 and therefore while it rains in one Place the Air 
 becomes no lefs than it was, becaufe it rained be- 
 fore in another Place, and fo it comes all to the 
 fame thing, and the quantity of the Air is neither 
 encreafed nor dimmiihed. 
 
 PROPOSITION. XVII. 
 
 The colder the Air if, the thicker : and therefore it 
 is for the moft fart colder in Winter iban Summer 
 (in any particular Place\ and likewife in the Night 
 more than in the Day, and the grofs Exhalations 
 from the Water in the Winter-time, increafe that 
 efpeciaily in the Evening and Morning. 
 
 THE Truth of the Propofition is clear from the 
 preceding , nor is it any Objection, that a Part of 
 the hotter Air moves where it is colder, and 
 more low ; for it is not that but fome neighbour 
 ing Air that moves to the Place, becaufe of the 
 continual Protrufion, or PrefTure > or tho' it came 
 
 itfelf,
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 443 
 itfelf, yet by coming there, it would become 
 
 cold. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIII. 
 
 There are commonly reckoned three Regions of the Air 9 
 of which that is in the middle where the Syow 9 
 Hail, and Rain are formed ; the fir ft is that in 
 which we live reaching to the middle Region ; the 
 third is from the middle Region to the utmoft Bound* 
 of the Atmofpbere, even to the fery Region, as the 
 Ariftotelians fpeak. 
 
 THE middle Region is colder than the firft and 
 third, which are counted hotter : becaufe the third 
 contains more fubtile, fiery, and fulphureous Ex- 
 halations which go up into it above the Place of 
 the Particles of Water, or are thruft there being 
 lighter. The Ariftotelians fay 'tis hotter becaufe near- 
 er to the fiery Sphere, and colder than the firft ; be- 
 caufe the Rays falling, join with thofe that are re- 
 flected from the Earth, and fo double the Heat. 
 Moreover the Particles of the fubterraneous Fire 
 coming out of the Earth are diffipated there in the 
 lower Region , and the middle Region being with- 
 out all thefe Advantages muft needs be colder. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 The nearer a Place is to the Pole, or the more diftant 
 from the Place where the Sun is vertical, the Place 
 of the Air in which Rain, Snow, and Hail is for?n- 
 ed is the nearer the Earth. 
 
 THE Caufe is, that the Rays fall more oblique- 
 ly on the Places about the Poles than on thofe a- 
 bout the Equator, and therefore being refracted 
 are far removed from the Perpendicular, and thus 
 
 the
 
 444 W* Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 the Heat becomes lefs, and the watry Vapours con- 
 tracl: into lefs Room, and by joining form the wa- 
 try Meteors. 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 THE Superficies of the firft Region is oval, 
 or rather elliptical, or like a Spheriod, bulging 
 out under the 'Torrid Zone. 
 
 PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 'The nearer a Place is to the Pole, the third Region 
 (in which the morefubtile and fulphureous parts move 
 up and down) begins further from the Earth. 
 
 FOR that Part of the Atmofphere which is 
 nearer the Pole contains fewer fubtile and fulphu- 
 reous Particles -, for the Sun brings fewer of them 
 thither from the Earth. And a lefs Number being 
 raifed there than in the Temperate Zone, and fewer in 
 the Temperate than in the Torrid Zone^ and the ut- 
 moft Bounds of the third Region equally diftant 
 from the Earth's Center byPropofition 16 ; therefore 
 the beginning of that Region under the Frigid Zone^ 
 is further from the Earth's Center than it's begin- 
 ning in the Torrid or Temperate Zone. 
 
 CO RO LL A RT. 
 
 THE Superficies bounding the fecond Region 
 is as a Spheroid bulging in the Frigid Zone. Thefc 
 are all to be mown to Students by a Diagram. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXI. 
 
 The Rays of (be Sun^ Moon, and Stars, do not 
 corns direttly from the Heavens thro 9 the A'tr, to 
 
 our
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 445 
 cur Eyes, but turn a little afide from the ftrait 
 Courfe, as foon as they enter the Air ; which is cal- 
 led^ by Writers in Optics, their Refraction. 
 
 T HAT Part of Optics which treats of the Re- 
 fraction of Light is very fine. Experience teftifies, 
 that the Rays coming from any Object out of 
 one Medium into another more grofs, or more 
 fine, do refract or turn afide : the Thing is plain 
 from a common Experiment. Take a VefTel, to 
 the Bottom of which fix a Globe of Gold, or Brafs, 
 or Peice of Money, then go from the Veflfel 'till 
 you cannot fee the Money for the Sides of the Vef- 
 fel, then fill the Veflel with Water and you will 
 fee the Money ; which mews, that the Rays coming 
 from the Money as they go from the Water into the 
 Air turn from their Courfe, before they can come to 
 the Eye ; which is called Refr a ftion, becaufe the Line 
 is broke, as it were, coming from Water to Air. 
 
 THUS, Let the Center of the Earth be T, (Fig. 
 2 8) and L the Eye on it's Surface, and drf the 
 Surface of the Atmofphere, or Air ; and therefore 
 no Ray can come to the Eye at L, which is under 
 L/g for the Rays below would fall on the rifmg 
 Part of the Earth L o j and thus no Star can appear 
 by a ftrait Ray 'till it come to the horizontal Line 
 L /g, but the Stars appear before that, while they 
 are under Lg: for Example in S, from which no 
 Ray can come ftrait to the Eye, but muft be 
 refracted ; i. e. the Line or Ray S / coming into 
 a thicker Medium at S, on the Atmofphere, is re- 
 fracted and runs on in the Line /L, tho' it was di- 
 rected to , and thus the Star appears before it 
 comes to the horizontal Line L/g. 
 
 THUS the Star in /is not feen by the direct 
 Ray />, but by the refracted Ray r L, tho' it was 
 directed at the firft to m ; and therefore the Star 
 at /appears higher by the Refraction than it really 
 
 is,
 
 446 V>e Abfolute Part BE CT. VL 
 
 is, it's Height being the Angle r L g or the Arch 
 #, as if it were in the Point x when it is really 
 inf. 
 
 THIS being the Law of Refraction, that the 
 Rays going into a grofier Medium, turn to the 
 perpendicular at the Point of Incidence, as here 
 / is the Point of Incidence, and X / the Perpen- 
 dicular drawn thro* /, thro* the Superficies drf- 9 
 therefore the Ray S/# will be refracted towards 
 /T that from/ it may become /L. 
 
 AND thus the Line or Ray r m becomes r L : 
 but the contrary happens when the Ray goes into 
 a fine Medium, for then it goes from the Per- 
 pendicular. 
 
 BESIDE it is the Nature of Refraction, that 
 the Rays falling perpendicularly on the Superficies' 
 of 'another Medium, are not refracted, but only 
 thofe that fall obliquely, and thofe are the more 
 refracted the more obliquely they fall. Thus the 
 Rays S T, /T, M d T being perpendicular to the 
 Superficies are not refracted, but the RaysS/,/r 
 that fall obliquely are, and S/more than fr. 
 
 FROM whence it alfo follows, and is manifefl 
 by ^Experience, that the nearer the Stars are to 
 the Horizon, their Rays are the more refracted, 
 and the higher they are, the lefs ; and Aftronomers 
 haVe found, that wheri a Star is twenty Degrees 
 hi^h, the Refraction is infenfible, tho 9 there is frill 
 a ftnall -Refraction. 
 
 AND Mathematicians, fkilled in Optics, have 
 by 'Obfervations found the Laws of Refraction of 
 all oblique Rays, and that in every Medium there is 
 a cbnftant fixed -Proportion between the Sine of 
 the Angle of Incidence and of the refracted Angle 
 (*". *;) between the Angle ;;/T and L/T, the Angle 
 /L Being the Angle of Refraction; and fo in 
 the "Refraction of the Ray/Vw. Therefore the 
 fame Proportion that is betwe'eh ' the -Sine of the 
 
 Angle?
 
 C H A P. 1 9. tf Univerfal Geography. 447 
 Angle T/ and the Sine of the Angle T/L, the 
 fame is between the Sine of the Angle T r m and 
 the Sine of Tr L. Therefore if the Quantity of 
 Refraction be known by Obfervation at one Ele- 
 vation of a Star, the Quantity of Refradion for 
 all other Elevations may be known (t). 
 
 (t} It is of great Moment 
 in the making of exaft Attro- 
 nomical Observations, to know 
 the Refradion which the Rays 
 of Light fuffer in paffiqg thro' 
 oar Atmofphere. This was de- 
 termined by the learned Mr 
 L'jto thorp , by an Experiment 
 made before the Royal Scczety, 
 and fhewn to be as the Sine 
 of the Angle of Incidence and 
 Refraftion. See Pbilof. Tranf. 
 N 257. But this Experiment 
 being queitioned by the Royal 
 Academy of Sciences at Paris, 
 who had not the fame Succefs, 
 [fee their Memoirs for the Year 
 1 700.] Mr Lwtborp repeated 
 it at the Requeft of the Royal 
 Society, and Mr Haukibee aJfo 
 performed it with much greater 
 Accuracy. See Hauksbefs Pby- 
 fico Mechanical Experiments p. 
 175 and found the Proportion 
 betwixt the Angle of Incidence 
 and Refraction was as 1000000 
 to 999736; fo that the refraftive 
 Power of the Air to bend a Ray 
 cf Light from it's ftrait Courfe 
 in coming out of a Vacuum, 
 or the Difference of the faid 
 Sines, proportionable to theSines 
 thernfelves,i3z64!OoooooParts. 
 And the Experiment being fe- 
 veral Times repeated, he found 
 th.u this refraftive Power ex- 
 aftly anfwered to the Propor- 
 tion of the different DehficieJ of 
 
 the Air thro' which the Ray 
 paffed, fo as to be twice or 
 thrice as large when the Air had 
 twice or thrice the Denfuy. 
 Whence we have an eafy Rule 
 for finding the Refraftion in 
 any Time or Place, as being 
 always correfpondent to the 
 Denfuy of the Air. But the 
 Denfity of the Air may be 
 meafured by a joint Obierva- 
 tion of the Barometer and. 
 Thermometer. For as the 
 Spaces, pofTefled by the Air, 
 are reciprocally proportional to 
 the Weights that comprefs it 
 [fee the Note upon Propofitioa 
 7. above] and it's Denfity re- 
 ciprocally as the Space it pof- 
 fefles, the Denfity of the Air 
 mufl be proportional to the 
 Weight that comprefles it, or 
 the Weight of the incumbent 
 Atmofphere; that is, the Height 
 of the Quickfilver in the Baro- 
 meter. And this will be the 
 Cafe if the Heat of the Air 
 remain the fame. But if the 
 Height of the Barometer b 
 known, the Denfity of the Air 
 is reciprocally proportional to 
 the Spaces marked againft the 
 Degrees of the Thermometer 
 in the Tube above. [See the 
 Note \oPropsfition 8-] Whence 
 it follows, according to the 
 known Theorem of compound- 
 ing Ratios, that the Denfity of 
 the
 
 448 f&e dbfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXII. 
 
 ?be Atmofphere or Air caufes the Sun and other Stars 
 to appear before they come to the Horizon at rifwg, 
 or after they are pajed it, atfetting ; and appear 
 higher than they really are, while they are under 
 twenty Degrees of Elevation. 
 
 THE Caufe is fufficiently explained in the pre- 
 ceding Propofition. We may add fome Experi- 
 ments or natural Phenomena. When the Dutch 
 wintered in Nova Zembla, the Sun appeared to them 
 fixteen Days before it came to the Horizon, that is, 
 when under the Horizon four Degrees, and that 
 in a clear Sky ; and famous Aftronomers have 
 
 the Air is always as the d'reft 
 Ratio of the Heights of the 
 Barometer, compounded with 
 the reciprocal Ratio of the 
 Spaces marked againft the De- 
 grees of the Thermometer. 
 ' For Example, at the time 
 the Experiment was made, 
 the Height of the Barometer 
 was 29 Inches, 7^ decimal 
 Parts, and the Thermometer 
 at 60, over againft which 
 the Space of 137 Parts is 
 marked ; Then, it muft be 
 enquired, what the Denfity 
 of the Air is, when the Ba- 
 rometer is up at 30 Inches, 
 and the Thermometer 50 
 degr. below the Line of Freez- 
 ing, then the Column of Air 
 in the former Experiments 
 will "not poflefs above the 
 Space of 126 Parts; fo that 
 the Denfity of the Air fought 
 for, will be to the Denfity 
 of the Air at the Time the 
 
 ' Experiment was made, as 
 ' 30 X 137, to 29, / x 126; 
 ' or as 4110 to 3748. 5. 
 
 And hence may he under- 
 Hood the Reafon why the Dutch 
 who wintered in Nova Zetnbla, 
 found fo great a Refradlion. 
 See Seft. \\. Chap. 19. Prop. 
 30. For hence we underftand, 
 according to the Obfervations 
 of the French and others, (fee 
 Hi/}, de r Acad. Scien. 1700, 
 1706, and La Mefure de la 
 Terre] that the Refractions are 
 greater towards the Poles than 
 near the Equator, and greater 
 in the fame Place in the Morn- 
 ing or Evening than at Noon j 
 tho' there be no Difference 
 perceived in the Height of the 
 Barometer. For all this feems 
 to proceed from the fame Caufe 
 viz. the greater Denfity of the 
 Air by reafon of Cold. 
 
 .Jurin's 
 
 found
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 449 
 
 found, with Tycbo, that* with us, when the Air is 
 clear in the Morning the Sun is feen elevated above 
 the Horizon thirty four Minutes, while 'tis yet 
 under the Horizon and it's Limb but juft touch- 
 ing it, and as long in the Evening. 
 
 T H U S the Virgin's Spike appears when 'tis thirty 
 two Minutes under the Horizon, for it feems to rile 
 when the Lion's Tail is thirty four Degrees, thirty 
 Minutes high, and on the fame Point. But thefe 
 two Stars are diftant thirty five Degrees two Mi- 
 nutes. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIII. 
 
 The groffer the Atmofphere is, the Refraftion is the 
 greater, (other things being alike] i. e. there being 
 the fame Elevation of the Star, and the fame Height 
 of the Air. 
 
 THUS the Angle /L, (Fig. 28.) which is 
 the Angle of Refraction, is the greater, or the re- 
 fracted Ray /L comes nearer to / T the thicker 
 the Atmofphere is, which thofe (killed in Optics 
 have found in all kinds of Mediums. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIV. 
 
 The gr offer the Air is, the more the Star is tinder 
 the Horizon when it firft appears. 
 
 THE Ray JLf(Ftg. 28,) is refracted and firft 
 mows the Star, and L/T is the refracted Angle ; 
 and Sfn being the incident Ray, #/T will be the 
 Angle of Incidence, and /L the Refraction. 
 
 LET us then fuppofe the Air fdLO to be 
 grofTer than when it made the Refraction /L, 
 it will thus make the Angle of Refract ion greater, 
 viz. o /"L, and the incident Ray will be K/V. There- 
 
 V O L. I. G g fore
 
 450 *Fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 fore the Star being in K, the Ray K/will be re- 
 fracted, that the refracted /L may fhew the Star ; 
 but when the Air was not fo grofs the Star was firft 
 feen when in S. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXV. 
 
 Fbe lower the Air^ the Star is the more under the 
 Horizon when it firft appears (other things being 
 alike] i. e. there being the fame Clearnefs or Tbick- 
 nefs in the Air, or is feen tbefooner or later before 
 it rife. 
 
 FOR, fuppofmg the Air low, the refracted 
 Angle T/L (Fig. 28.) will be greater ; for Exam- 
 ple, if the Altitude of the Air be T 4 the Angle 
 refracted (according to the firft Ray that comes 
 to L) will be T4L. Let then 4, 9 be drawn 
 parallel with fn -, then, by the Hypothefis in 
 Prop. xxi. as the Sine of one refracted Angle 
 T/L is to the Sine of another refracted Angle 
 T 4 L, (for the Air differs only in height by fup- 
 pofition and not in thicknefs) fo is the Sine of 
 the Angle of Incidence nfT to the Sine of the 
 Angle of Incidence 3, 4, T, for the refracted 
 Ray 4, L, and the incident Ray 3, 4, 6. But the 
 Sine of the Angle T 4 L hath to the Sine T 4 9, 
 the fame Proportion which the Sine of T/L hath 
 to T/77, as is eafily demonflrated by the Figure 
 for this proportion. Therefore the Sine of the 
 Angle T, 4, L hath a greater Proportion to the 
 Sine of T, 4, 9, than the fame Sine T 4 L hath to 
 the Sine T, 4, 3 , therefore the Sine T 4, 9 is 
 iefs than the Sine T, 4, 3 ; and fo the Angle T 4, 3 
 is greater than the Angle T, 4, 9, and 3, 4, L than 
 9, 4, L, that is, than /L ; and therefore the Line 
 4, 3 drawn out, viz. 3, 4, 6 the incident Ray for 
 die refracted qne 4, L will fall under S/, and the 
 2 Star
 
 C H A P. 1 9. of Um'verfal Geography. 45 1 
 Star will be in 6 to caufe the refracted Ray 4 L ; 
 and thus 'tis lower than when in S where the Al- 
 titude of the Air was T/. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVI. 
 
 A Star may have a different Refraction even in ike 
 fame Place, provided I be Denfity of Air le different. 
 
 THE Problem is better put thus : The Altitude 
 of a Star and it's Refraction being given^ viz. that 
 which is made at a given Height \ and there being 
 given likewife another Altitude of the Air ; to find 
 the Den/it y of the Air requiftte to caufe the fame Re- 
 fraction in that Altitude as was in the other. For Ex- 
 ample, in the Altitude of the Air T/, (Fig. 28.) the 
 Ray S/ makes the Angle of Refraction / L ; if 
 then there be another Altitude of the Air T 4, and 
 yet the Refraction of the Star S in the fame Place of 
 the incident Ray 6, 4 which is almoft parallel with 
 S/, becaufe of the great Diftance , 'tis afked whether 
 the Refraction 3 , 4, L may be equal to the Refra- 
 ction /L ; and if it may, whether or no muft the o- 
 therAirbe thicker or thinner, and in what Pro- 
 portion ? 
 
 I anfwer it may be, if the other given Altitude 
 of the Air be greater than the former T/, the 
 Denfity or Thicknefs of this fecond Air mull be 
 greater , but if the other given Altitude be lefs as 
 T, 4, then the Thicknefs of the fecond Air muft be 
 lefs, or have a greater Rarefaction in it, and how 
 much that muft be is known from this. 
 
 i. FIND the Angle T 9 L (having T 4 and 
 T L) and T/L, then the Sine of the Angle T 4 L, 
 and the Sine of the Angle T 4 3 (which is the 
 Angle of Incidence of the Ray 3, 4, 6) thence is 
 found the Proportion of the Denfity of the Air, to 
 that of the Ethereal Matter, from which the inci- 
 G g 2 dent
 
 452 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 dent Ray comes. In the fame manner, let the Sines 
 of the Angle T/ and T/L be taken, and they 
 will mew the Proportion of the Denfity of the 
 firft Air to that of the Ethereal Matter , and by 
 comparing thefe Proportions it may be known, 
 how much more denfe or rare the Air of the lefler 
 Height mould be. 
 
 YET properly fpeaking 'tis not the fame Re- 
 fraction, for the incident Rays are not equally ele- 
 vated above the Superficies of the Medium's. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVII. 
 
 If the Air of one Place be loth thicker and lower 
 than the Air of another, the Sun, and the reft 
 of the Stars, will be the more deprejfed, under the 
 Horizon of the former Place, when they firft begin 
 to appear than in the latter Place. 
 
 THE Demonftration of this Propofition is 
 manifeft from Prop. xxv. and xxvi ; and it alfo 
 thence follows, that if the Air be lower and grofier 
 in Places of the Frigid Zone than in the Temperate 
 and Torrid Zone, the Sun may be feen there longer 
 before the rifing and longer after the fetting, than 
 in other Places that are higher and more fubtile ; 
 for when 'tis more depreffed under the Horizon, 
 and comes to it more obliquely and more flowly 
 as in the Frigid Zone, it muft then be feen much 
 fooner in the Frigid than in the Torrid Zone. But 
 'tis doubtful whether the Air be lower in the Frigid 
 Zone -, and tho* the Sun be feen fooner before it 
 rife, whether that may be only on Account of the 
 groflhefs of the Air ; of which afterward. 
 
 2 PRO-
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 4 53 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVIII. 
 
 If the Air of one Place be grojjer and higher than 
 that of another ; it may be on account of the greater 
 Thicknefs of the Air in one Place than the other^ 
 that they do not fee the Stars before they rife, when 
 they are a good way under the Horizon. Andfuch 
 alfo may be the great 'Thicknefs of the Air that there- 
 by they Jhall fee the Stars before they rife, tho* 
 they have the fame Depreffion : Tea the Air may be 
 fo thick as to /hew the Stars when in a much greater 
 Deprejffion under the Horizon of one Place than of 
 another. 
 
 YEA the thicknefs of the Air will caufe a 
 much greater Depreflion than the lownefs of the 
 Air , and for the Refractions in Nova Zembla, 
 there is required a great Height of the Air with 
 fome thicknefs. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIX. 
 
 It is impoflible that the Refrattiom of a Star in dif- 
 ferent Altitudes Jhould be equal (if the thicknefs of 
 the Air be the fame] to the Refraffions of the fame 
 Star in the fame Altitudes^ if the Air be either 
 higher or lower ^ or thicker or thinner. 
 
 W E mewed, in the preceding Propofition, that 
 if in the Altitude of the Air T/, (Fig. 28.) the 
 incident Ray S/ make the Refraction /L, the 
 Ray 6, 4, which, becaufe of the great Diftance, 
 may be reckoned parallel with S/, the Rays from 
 the fame Point, we fay the Ray 6, 4 may, in a- 
 nother Altitude of the Air, as T 4, make the fame 
 Refraction 3 4 L equal to n /L, if the Air 4 o L e be 
 thinner than the Air/6? L d , now 'tis demanded if 
 G g 3 that
 
 454 ^fe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 that may be in two Altitudes of a Star. For 
 Example, fuppofe the Star in S, the Air/oLd, 
 and the Air 4.0 L,e be fo difpofed as to make the 
 fame Refraction, whether in another Altitude -as 
 S, and in the fame Atmofphere/r^Lo and 4^Lo, 
 the Refraction may be again equal, or the lame 
 m r L ? And I fay that it cannot be. 
 
 FOR if a Circle be defcribed with the Center 
 T bounding the Air of another Altitude cutting 
 Lr in 2, then 2 L will be the refradted Ray in the 
 other Air, by which the Star/ is feen -, for the 
 Ray 2 L, mult be the fame withrL, as the fame 
 apparent Altitude of the Star xg is luppofed, or 
 the Angle r L/. Moreover, let the incident Ray, 
 anfwering that refracted one, be drawn thro* 2 as 
 7 2 w, which will be parallel with/ r m, if the Re- 
 fraction L 2 w were equal to the Refraction L r m ; 
 for if T 2 be alfo drawn, T 2 w will be the Angle 
 of Incidence, and T 2 L the Angle refracted, and 
 w 2 L the Refraction. 
 
 THEREFOREastheSineof 3 4 T to the 
 Sine L 4 T, fo is the Sine of w 2 T to the Sine of 
 L2T. 
 
 A N D as the Sine of / T to the Sine of L/T, 
 fo is the Sine of m r L to the Sine of L r T, and 3 4 L 
 being equal to #/L, the Angle w 2 T is not equal to 
 m r L,, or w 2 is not parallel with m r t This re- 
 quires a longer Demonftration than can be given 
 here, as belonging to Geometry, which will be evi- 
 dent .from the following Algebraic Work. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXX. 
 
 .pnju.iq .!;> *!} "to ill ,,. i ;rbi/fw' r r ;- ^ -.<;:5 
 Having in two Altitudes, of a Siar obferved tbe Re- 
 fraffionS) to find from tbence tbe Altitude of ike Air* 
 and tbe Proportion of their Denfoitt>_oir tbt Law 
 of Refraflion in that Air. 
 
 '::. 31-2 ftiflj 
 
 : * THE
 
 CHAP. 19. of Unherfal Geography. 
 
 THE Refraction of a Star is equal to the Dif- 
 ference between the obferved Altitude, and the 
 true Altitude, which is known by Calculation, 
 and thus Refractions are eafily known. Then to 
 our purpofe: 
 
 I F it were to be folved Geometrically, it would 
 be brought to this Problem : 
 
 LET the Star be in S (Fig. 29.) fending out 
 the Ray S/, and the Refraction /L. 
 
 AN D in the Altitude fg it's Refraction m rL. 
 
 THEREFORE in the Circle drf 9 whofe 
 Center is T, there is given T L the Semidiame- 
 ter of the Earth, and drawing T r, T/, L/, Lr, 
 the Angles T // and T L r may be had ; the latter 
 being made of the Star's Altitude, and a right 
 Angle, and the Angles /L and m r L are given ; 
 and we know that the Proportion of the Sine of the 
 Angle nfT to L/T is the fame as the Sine of 
 the Angle m rT to the Sine of L r T. From thefe 
 to find the Semidiameter T/or Tr, and the 
 Proportion of the Sine of nfT to the Sine L/T, 
 or to find the Angle T/L. Which will give the 
 Proportion of the Sines. 
 
 THE Algebraic Solution is fomething difficult, 
 but the common fynthetic way requires many Lem- 
 mata to be premifed, which the former Solution 
 doth not. Let us therefore produce the analytic 
 Solution, to mew that it will confirm the pre- 
 ceding Propofition. Let the Sine of the right 
 Angle T L F, or 
 
 The Radius be b 
 
 and Sine T Lrc ^ w find ^ Angle 
 
 L/T; for this being known 
 ^ 
 
 fc ; 
 
 Sine comp. g ^ ^ n 
 Sme^rL 
 
 Sine comp. k 
 Sine T/L a 
 
 Gg4 FIRST,
 
 456 ne Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 FIRST, becaufe there is given the Sine of 
 both the Angles T/L, and L/, the Sine of the 
 whole Angle nf T is given, viz. if the Sine of 
 each Angle be multiplied into the Co-Sine of the 
 other, and the Sum of their Produces divided by 
 the Radius. Thus the Sine of the Angle #/T will 
 
 be 
 
 ag -j d y/ bb a a 
 
 MOREOVER, feeing the Sine T L/ is to 
 the Sine T/L (So is T/to TLor T r to TL) 
 fo is the Sine T L r to the Sine T r L j that Sine 
 
 Tr L will be -7- . And feeing there is given alfo 
 
 the Sine M r L, let there be found, according to 
 the former Rule, the Sine of the whole m r T, 
 
 . k c a-\-b <J b A. ccaa ,, 
 which is-: . I . . i - - - . Thus we have the 
 
 00 
 
 Sine of four Angles L/T, /T, LrT, mrT, 
 for we know they are proportional fmce as a : 
 a a ca kc a -j- b*J ' b 4 . ccaa 
 ~~'' l ~i> : bb 
 
 And therefore cga -j-r d^bb aa~ 
 
 then, after due Reduction, -it will -be n a -j- d 
 v' bb aa b ^ mm aa. And both Sides Iquar- 
 ed bb m m bh a a nna a -ddb b-\-*d J ' a? =z 
 2^J^TF^T^ For p* write h b m m ddbb* 
 and q q for 'dd^-hb n n, and fquare again 
 'baa, and it will be 
 
 . 
 
 And dividing by 4^^, and fubftituting other 
 
 Sines 
 ,T ?#! \- ;?D
 
 C H AP. 19. ofUniverfal Geography. 457 
 Sines a* = r r a a s 4. And a a = ^ r r -j- 
 
 /Y 4 4 
 
 ^ 4"'' 4'4 
 
 FROM this Equation it appears that the Pro- 
 blem is determined, and that a, which is the Sine 
 of the Angle T/L, may be found by extracting 
 the fquare Root. And from thence 'tis found, 
 that two Refractions are fufficient to find the Al- 
 titude of the Air T F, and the Rule of Propor- 
 tion between them ; which I take Notice of be- 
 caufe I fee Kepler 9 in his Epitome of AJtronomy 
 p. 65. takes three Refractions, tho* he did not 
 try this Method himfelf. 
 
 THE Refolution of this Problem may be alfo 
 
 had by the Rule of Pofition, by afluming T/ in 
 
 a certain Proportion to T L, and trying if, by 
 
 that Aflumption, the Sines of the four Angles 
 
 T/L, T/, TrL, T r m will be proportional. 
 
 THEREFORE, in the Triangle/LT, let there 
 
 be found the Angle T/L from having /T, T L, 
 
 and T L/. And likewife in the Triangle T L r, find 
 
 the Angle TrL from having Tr, TL, andTLr. 
 
 LET there be then taken the Sine of the 
 
 Angles T/L, T/, TrL, Tr m ; and let there 
 
 be a fourth Proportional taken to the Sines T/L, 
 
 T/w, TrL. And if T r m be equal to this fourth 
 
 Proportional, then the aflumed Height of the Air 
 
 T/ will be juft j but if the Sine T r m be greater 
 
 than the fourth Proportional, then T/ muft be 
 
 taken lefs -, but if lefs, then it muft be taken more j 
 
 and fo always 'till they become equal, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 SUPPOSE the Virgins Spike, or any other 
 Star, or the Sun, to be Seen in the Horizon L/ 
 "&~i> when
 
 458 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 when 3 2 Minutes under it, as in S ; thus the Re- 
 fraction #/L is 32. 
 
 THEN when the Sun hath the apparent Al- 
 titude g x i degr. 22 mm. or the true Altitude 
 i degr. the Refraction Lrw is 22 min. 
 _T H E Semidiameter T L is 860 German Miles. 
 But fuppofe it 10000, and the Altitude of to be 5 
 
 of thefe Parts, viz. or of the Semidia- 
 
 10000 2000 
 
 meter T L ; that is, abont f of a Mile. 
 
 T H E R E F O R E in the Triangle T L/, the 
 Radius being 10,000,000. 
 
 AS /T to TL, fo is the Sine XL/ to the 
 Sine T/L. 
 
 2001 : 2000 : : 10,000,000 : 95995,992, the 
 Sine of 8 8 degr. 2 ^ min. 40 fee. 
 
 AND thus T/ will be 88 deg. 54 min. 40 fee. 
 whofe Sine is 9,998,200. 
 
 AGAIN, in the Triangle T r L. 
 
 AS X r : T L, fo is the Sine of the Angle X L r 
 to the Sine T r L. 
 
 2001 : 2000 : : 9,997,155 : 9>99 2 > I 59> the 
 Sine of 8 7 degr. 43 min. 40 fee. 
 
 THEREFORE Trm is 88 degr. 5 min. 
 40 fee. whofe Sine is 9,994,500. 
 
 THEN let there be found a fourth Propor- 
 tional to the Sines of T/L, T/jr, T r L. 
 
 AS TfL-.Tfn: :TrL. 
 
 AS 9>995>99 2 : 999 8 > 2 o : : 9>99 2 X 59 : 
 9*994,366. 
 
 AND with that fourth Number compare the 
 Sine of the Angle Trm, which is 9,994,500. 
 
 A N D we find that this Sine is very near to 
 that fourth Number , and therefore the aflumed 
 Altitude of the Air, viz. f of a Mile, is not far 
 from the Trutfi. And if any one defire it more 
 accurately, he may affume another Altitude, and 
 work the fame way, 'till the Sine of T r m be 
 
 nearer
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 459 
 nearer to the fourth Proportional j or, by the 
 Rule of Falfe, having it twice too little, you 
 may find the true Altitude as near as poffible, for 
 it cannot be found perfectly true ; becaufe a fmall 
 Difference in the Sines changes it very much if it 
 be but half a Minute : and befides this the Canon 
 of Sines mint be very exact. 
 
 W E conclude therefore, that the Height of 
 the Air is about the 2000 part of the Semidia- 
 meter of the Earth, which is 1,633,190 Perches ; 
 and the Altitude of the Air 816 Perches, one 
 Perch being twelve Rkinlandijb Feet : but 'tis bet- 
 ter allowed to be half a German Mile, for the Re- 
 fraction L/ was found, by Tycbo, to be greater, 
 and may be thirty fix or forty eight Minutes ; and 
 then the Height of the Air will be one Mile. 
 
 THE Height of the Air being known, there 
 is alfo known the Proportion of the Denfity of 
 the Air to that of the Ethereal Matter, or the 
 Law of Refraction, in that Air making fuch Re- 
 fractions in fuch Altitudes, i. e. the Proportion of 
 the Sine T/L, to the Sine T/, before found, is 
 the Proportion fought. 
 
 AS 9,995,992 to 9,998,200. And the Reafon 
 why thefe Refractions are fo fmall is, becaufe we 
 fuppofed a clear Air, not much differing from 
 the Ethereal Matter in Denfity ; as fome have 
 imagined. 
 
 MOREOVER, whether the Altitude of the 
 Air be the fame in all Places and Times may be 
 known ; if we ufe the fame way two Refractions 
 at two Altitudes in a different Air and Time. And 
 that Students may underftand theie Secrets of 
 Nature, I have, that they may try a Calculation, 
 fet down Examples from Tycbo's Obfervations, 
 who obferved the Refractions of the Sun and 
 Moon for every Degree of their Height ; and be- 
 caufe they differ from the Obfervations of Lanfierg^ 
 
 made
 
 460 
 
 fbe Alfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 made in a different Air (if made at all), I will alfo 
 add them. 
 
 
 R.ef 'ratiion of tbe\l 
 
 lefraition of tht 
 
 efraflion of the Sun 
 
 Degrees of 
 Altitude. 
 
 lun, accarding\l 
 o Tycho. \t 
 
 loon, according 
 9 Tycho. 
 
 id Moon, according 
 Lans'-erg. 
 
 Degrees. 
 
 Minutes. 
 
 Minute i. 
 
 linutef. Secbnds. 
 
 o 
 
 it 
 
 33 
 
 11 
 
 2 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 3 
 
 1 7 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 4 
 
 I? 
 
 1? 
 
 "T 4? 
 
 5 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 14 o 
 
 6 
 
 '3 
 
 H 
 
 12 30 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 3 
 
 11 15 
 
 8 
 
 I I 
 
 12 
 
 10 i; 
 
 ~~9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 __ 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 II 
 
 8 15 
 
 n 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 7 35 
 
 12 
 
 Q 
 
 10 
 
 7 ^ 
 
 13 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 6 40 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 6 19 
 
 15 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 6 o 
 
 16 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 5 42 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 5 27 
 
 18 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 5 7 
 
 *9 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 4 50 
 
 20 
 
 .4 ' 
 
 ? 
 
 4 !H 
 
 2^1 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 ~~ ~~i~' 
 
 2Z 
 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 2J 
 
 3 , 
 
 - r 4 : 3 
 
 3 44 
 
 24 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 _*!_ 
 
 25 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 2 
 
 26 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 56 
 
 2 7 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 ' 2 40 
 
 28 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 24 
 
 29 
 
 2 
 
 
 2 " 9 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 I tT: 54 
 
 3' 
 
 I 
 
 
 i 39 
 
 32 
 
 I 
 
 
 i 24 
 
 33 
 
 I 
 
 
 i 9 
 
 34 
 
 1 
 
 
 o 55 
 
 35 
 
 I 
 
 
 o 41 
 
 36 
 
 I 
 
 
 o 27 
 
 37 
 
 o 
 
 
 13 
 
 33 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 LANSBERQ
 
 CHAP. 19. of Unherfal Geography. 461 
 LANSBERG fets down the fame Refractions 
 for the Sun and Moon ; and fycbo makes a fmall 
 Difference near the Horizon, thofe of the Sun grea- 
 ter, and at the fifth Degree equal ; and afterward 
 the Moon's Refractions fomewhat greater than thofe 
 of the Sun : I confefs I do not fee why, except it be 
 attributed to the weaknefs of the Moon's Light. 
 And moreover, Vycbo omitted Seconds, which are 
 not to be neglected, if they approach near fixty, 
 for they are of ufe in calculating the Height of the 
 Air. But as for the Refractions of all the Stars they, 
 are equal, or very little different, if in one Air , but 
 if the Air be grofler, the Refractions are greater. 
 For Example, the Dutch, at Nova Zembla, found 
 in Winter that the Sun began to appear after a 
 Night of fome Months, when it was 4 Degr. un- 
 der the Horizon, at leaft it's Limb -, therefore the 
 Refraction mfL, is 4 degr. 30 mm. the Caufe where- 
 of none have fufficiently explained. 
 
 AND then, when it was 3 degr. 45 min. under 
 the Horizon, they faw it elevated above the Ho- 
 rizon 30 min. viz. it's upper Limb -, therefore the 
 Refraction mrL, (for we muft conceive mrsto fall 
 under the Horizon, or rL,g to be 30 min.} will be 
 4 degr. 1 5 min. and rLT 90 degr. 30 min. From this 
 may be found the Altitude of the Air I/, and the 
 Denfity of the Air at Nova Zembla, which was clear 
 at the time of Obfervation. And the Altitude of 
 the Air is thereby found much greater, almoft two 
 Miles , nor will the fuppofition of a greater thicknels 
 in the Air help the Matter, as we mall mew in the 
 following Proportion ; becaufe the Angle T/L 
 cannot be greater than 85 degr. 30 min. (if /L be 
 4 degr. 30 min.} tho* it will be greater if dfbe. fup- 
 pofed lefs than two Miles ; therefore the Truth of 
 the Obfervation may be juftly doubted of, feeing 
 there is no fuch Obfervation any where -, yea the, 
 contrary hath been obferved in the fame Place, ' 
 
 fee
 
 462 The Abfolute Part S E CT. VI. 
 
 fee Chap. xxvi. Prop. xiii. at the end. Beiides this, 
 there can be no Reafon given why the Air. after fo 
 long abfence of the Sun, mould be higher than 
 when the Sun left them after it had been prefent a 
 long time; rather the contrary Ihould happen, the 
 Air being made groffer and lower by Condenfati- 
 on, as fome may urge that count the Height of the 
 Air inconftant. Yet, when I confider thefe things 
 more accurately, three Particulars occur to me 
 that might confirm that Appearance and the great 
 Refraction : for the Obfervation cannot be denied, 
 confidering that the Obferver underftood Aftrono- 
 my, and faw the Sun above the Horizon for fome 
 Days after, when it was ftill under the Horizon - y 
 nor muft we doubt of the Number of the Days 
 in the long Night they had, for when they came 
 back they counted the fame Day of the Month, 
 as their own People did, which could not be if 
 they had miftaken before. For if we admit fuch 
 an Altitude of the Air as is inconfiftent with the 
 Refractions in the 'Temperate and Torrid Zone, we 
 muft fay the Air is of the fame Height every where 
 as truly in the Torrid and Temperate, as in the Frigid 
 Zone. But, in the Torrid and Temperate, the upper 
 Region of the Air is fo fubtile, that it doth not 
 caufe Refraction, but only the middle Region of it ; 
 and therefore no wonder if the Refractions in the 
 torrid and Temperate Zones are lefs ; for the Air 
 that caufes them is lower, which mould caufe the 
 Refraction to be greater ; yet it muft be much 
 more rarified than the other Air. But to this it 
 ,may be objected, that the Obfervations of the Sai- 
 lors were made in a clear Air, as themfelves fay ; to 
 which I anfwer, that yet 'tis not probable that the 
 Air was then ib fubtile as the cleared Air in the 
 Torrid and Temperate Zone. Secondly, it may be 
 faid that the Air of the Frigid Zone, when the Sun 
 returns to it after a long abfence, is rirft refined in 
 
 the
 
 CHAP. 19. of Umverfal Geography. 463 
 
 the upper Region, and that the middle is ibmewhat 
 more grofs, and therefore the Sun is feen by two 
 Refractions, as the Stars are thro* Air and Glafs, 
 and a double Refraction deprefieth the Star under 
 the Horizon more than a fmgle one, and fo the 
 Altitude of the Air of one Mile, or three Quar- 
 ters, will be enough. Nor can it be objected, 
 why doth not the fame thing happen when the Sun 
 departs from that Air, and the long Night begins ; 
 for then 'tis probable the Difference of the thick- 
 nefs of the Air is lefs, becaufe of the Sun's long 
 Continuance ; or we may fay the Exhalations are 
 more grofs, in the Mornings of that Zone, after 
 that long abfence. Thirdly, if a double Refraction 
 doth not fatisfy, and it will not be granted that 
 the upper Region caufes no Refraction, as was 
 faid, then it muft be granted that the Air in that 
 Place of the Frigid Zone was then much higher 
 than in our Temperate Zone, and alfo much grofler 
 (for 'tis only the Altitude that leflens the Refra- 
 ction) : but if there be a great thicknefs, the Re- 
 fraction is much more encreafed thereby, than 'tis 
 diminimed by leflening the Altitude. But the firft 
 of thefe three Caufes is beft, that fuppofes the Al- 
 titude of the Air to be two Miles (for it cannot 
 be lefs in Nova Zembla where the horizontal Re- 
 fraction is faid to be 4 degr. 30 min.) : the other 
 two lie under feveral Difficulties. We have faid 
 it was the thicknefs of the Air that was the Caufe 
 why, the Altitude being the fame, the Sun was not 
 feen for fo many Days after it ceafed to rife on the 
 third of November ; and fo we muft anfwer, that 
 the Caufe may be the fame why the fame Dutchmen 
 did not, on the thirtieth of May 1596, fee the 
 Sun in the middle of the Night, in the Latitude 
 69 depr. 42 mm. when it was not one Degree under 
 the Horizon. But we have faid too much of this, 
 occafioned by the difficulty of the thing ; there 
 
 muft
 
 464 Vbe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 muft be, for an accurate knowledge of it, moft 
 accurate Obfervations. Yet we muft not think, 
 that if Obfervations of a Star, in different Eleva- 
 tions, do not give the fame Altitude, that there- 
 fore it hath different Altitudes, on account of the 
 Difference of the Denfity of the Air, which is 
 greater the nearer the Horizon ; and therefore Ob- 
 fervation will give a different Altitude, tho* it be 
 the fame, for, in the Calculation, the Denfity, and 
 confequently the Refraction, is accounted the fame. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXI. 
 
 Having the DepreJJion of a Star under the Horizon 
 when it firjl begins to appear (that is, having the hori- 
 zontal Refraction of a Star], to find the leaft po/ible 
 Altitude of that Air^ in which the Refraction is 
 made \ and the Groffhefs of that Air and the great- 
 eft Quantity pojfible by which it exceeds the Denfi- 
 ty of the jEther ; that is, the greateft Refraction. 
 pojfible. Or more generally thus : Having the Re- 
 fraftion of a Star^ at it's apparent Altitude, to find 
 theleajl poffible Height. 
 
 LET the horizontal Refraction be /L, (Fig. 
 28.) or the Depreffion of the Star under the Hori- 
 zon gfs or g L j, when it firft begins to appear, as 
 it was in Nova Zembla 4 degr. 30 min. 'Tis known 
 from the Doctrine of Optics, if a Ray, as J /, touch 
 the Air in/; that is, if the Angle S/- or /T be 
 a right Angle, then the Ray is not refracted ; but if 
 the Star be under the Tangent, then no Ray can 
 come to/ directly. Therefore it is requifite the 
 Star be above that Tangent, and that s f<& or /T 
 be lefs than 90 degr. Let it then be 89 degr. 59 min. 
 or 90 itfelf, provided it be no greater than from 
 nfT. Let there be taken die Angle of horizontal Re- 
 fraction 4 degr. 30 min. and there remains tjie Angle 
 
 T/L
 
 C H A P. 1 9. of Univerfal Geography. 465 
 T/L 85 degr. 29 min. the greateft that can be ; 
 then if it be made as the Sine T/L is to the Radius, 
 fo is L T to T/, which is the leaft Altitude of 
 the Air poflible. For becaufe the Sine T/L is 
 the greateft that can be, the fourth Proportional 
 T/ is the leaft that can be, if the middle Terms, 
 viz. the whole Sine T L/ and T L, be ftill the 
 fame : if the Refraction of the Ray, that appears 
 at the Horizon, be not given, but the Refraction 
 in the Altitude #Lg, we may work the fame way 
 in the Triangle L r T. 
 
 LIKEWISE the Proportion of the Sine of 
 the Angle /T 89 degr. 59 min. to the Sine T/L 
 85 degr. 29 min. will be the greateft poflible Pr- 
 portion between the Denfity of the Air and that of 
 the ^Ether. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXII. 
 
 Having the Altitude of the Air, and one Re/raff ion 
 in it of a Star in a certain Altitude, to find the 
 Law of Refraftion, or the Proportion of the Sine 
 of the Angle of Incidence, to the Sine of the re- 
 frafted Angle , or to find the tbicknefi of the Air by 
 that Refraftion. 
 
 THE Altitude of the Air muft be greater than 
 that we found to be the leaft poflible, otherwife 
 the Refraction is not right taken, and the Problem 
 is impoflible. (Fig. 28.) Let it therefore be greater, 
 fuppofe T r i and alfo let the Refraction in the ap- 
 parent Altitude #Lg be mr\_*. Then there may 
 be found the refracted Angle TrL (having Tr, 
 T L, and the Angle T L r) to which T r L if you 
 add wirL, you will have the Angle of Incidence 
 mr T, and the Proportion of the Sine m rT to the 
 Sine LrT; which will be the Rule of refractirg 
 
 VOL. I. IJh in
 
 466 fbe Abjolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 in that Air, or the Proportion of the Air's Denfity 
 to that of the 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXIII. 
 
 Having tbt Altitude of the Air^ and tbe Rcfraftiofi 
 if a Star in one Altitude i to find tbe Refraftion in 
 another 
 
 FOR Example, let the Altitude of the Air be 
 T/or TV, and the Refraction #/L at the appa- 
 rent Altitude o, and the horizontal Ray is the re- 
 fracted Angle. Then let there be given the appa- 
 rent Altitude r Lg or xLg, and let the Refraction 
 be found by the preceding Proportion, or the Pro- 
 portion of the Sine /T to T/L. Then in the 
 Triangle T r L, having T r and T L, and the 
 Angle r L T, find the Angle T r L ; and as the 
 Sine T/L is to th e Sine Tfn. So let T r L be 
 to another Sine, which will be the Sine of the 
 Angle m r T, from which take T r L, and there 
 remains the Refraction m r L which was fought. 
 
 THE Antients ufed a more intricate and alfo 
 a falfe Method for finding it. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXIV. 
 
 Having the Altitude of tbe Air^ and the Law of Re- 
 fraftion ; to find the Refraction at the apparent Al- 
 titude of the Star, and from thence the true Altitude. 
 
 THIS is the fame with the former, where the 
 Law of Refraction was to be found from a given 
 Refraction in a given Height. Examples for 
 working may be taken, from the Table laid 
 down before. 
 
 ".. f
 
 GHAP. 19. ofUmverfa! Geography. 467 
 Of the Reflection of Light in the Air. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXV. 
 
 ?he Rays of the Sun and Moon are not only ref rafted 
 after they have entered the Atmofphere^ but alfo re- 
 fleftedfrom the Particles of Air , or beat back as it 
 were from a rough Mirror^ becaufe of the irregular 
 Situation of the Particles. 
 
 FOR ifotherwife, no part of the Atmofphere 
 would be lucid, except that the Sun is above i 
 and the Sun being in the Eaft, the Air in the 
 South and Weft would be dark ; therefore as 
 fome Rays pafs thro* the Atmofphere, fo fome are 
 reflected feveral Ways, from one Particle to ano- 
 ther, and thus they make the Air lucid. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXVI. 
 
 Reflection of the Rays of the Sun from the Particles 
 of Air^ is the chief Caufe of the ^Twilight, that is in 
 the Morning and Evening. 
 
 THIS is evident from the preceding Propo- 
 fition ; for as the Sun being in the Eaft, it's Rays, 
 darted to the Weft, are reflected to our Eyes, 
 and fo render the Weft Part vifible ; fo the Sun 
 being under the Horizon, it's Rays (hot into our 
 Air, are reflected to our Eyes from the Eaft in 
 the Morning, and 'from the Weft in the Evening. 
 
 Hh 2 PRO*
 
 468 The Abfelute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXVII. 
 
 The firft of the Morning Twilight, that is, the en- 
 ligbtned Air in the Eaft, and alfo the end of the 
 Evening Twilight, begins when the Sun is about 1 8 
 degr. under the Horizon. 
 
 THIS Proportion is built on Obfervation ; for 
 if in the Morning, fuppofe about one or two 
 o'Clock, we obfe< ve narrowly towards the Eaft, 
 when a little white Colour begins to appear in the 
 Air to the Eaft Part of the Horizon, and note the 
 Hour and Minute, we may thence know the De- 
 preffion of the Sun. 
 
 WE here fuppofe that the Air is clear, of which 
 there being a great Difference, fome have therefore 
 thought the T wilight begun and ended at the twen- 
 tieth Degree under the Horizon, others only at 
 the fixteenth Degree i for the grofler the Air is, 
 the Twilight is the lefs fenfible ; the contrary of 
 which we faid happened in the Refraction, which 
 is then moft fenfible. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXVIII. 
 
 The Altitude of the Air, or the Matter that caufes the 
 Twilight, cannot be known from the Quantity of Twi- 
 light, as fome have thought ; nor does the beginning 
 of the Twilight proceed from a fingle, but a double 
 Reflection. 
 
 luc u .[ 3erlt 27 zx. r\: r ;;. vitoH '^& < K>tM >. a;>1 
 Let TLh (Fig. 29.; be the Earth, gfomthe 
 Bounds of the Air, and L the Place of the Earth in 
 which the Twilight appears, or the Light in the ho- 
 rizontal Air/, and therefore/ L, is the Ray reflected 
 from the Air/, and the incident folar Ray/| S. Ma- 
 thematicians, who have written of the Twilight, will 
 
 have
 
 CHAP. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 469 
 have the incident Ray in /, which makes the reflect- 
 ed Ray/L, to come from the Sun s ; and becaufe no 
 Ray can come to/from the Sun, while the Sun is un- 
 der the Tangent fb s ; therefore when the Sun comes 
 to the Tangent fbs, for Example to J, then doth 
 the Ray begin to come to/; and becaufe they will 
 have the Reflection to be from/, as from a con- 
 cave Mirror, therefore T fb muft be equal to 
 T/L , and becaufe the Sun is found t be 18 degr. 
 under the Horizon, nfs muft be 18 degr. and 
 L,fb 162 degr. and Tfb or T/L 81 degr. and LT 
 9 degr. from whence T/ is found 174 German 
 Miles (as Clavius and Nonius make it) and the Air 
 about eleven Miles : nay Alhazen and Vitellio make 
 it thirteen Miles. 
 
 SO great an Altitude of the Air is not to be al- 
 lowed as difagreeing with other Phaenomena, and 
 being founded on a falfe Hypothefis, that the Ray 
 gbs 9 which makes the reflected Ray/L, comes 
 from the Sun itfelf, which is falfe , for it comes, 
 by Reflection, from another Ray, for Example 
 from the Ray g I. And that it is not neceflary to 
 make a fmall Light in J, that the Ray/g mould 
 come from the Sun itfelf, but that another Ray 
 may ferve, is proved from hence, that we fee, in 
 the weftern Air, fome Light before the Sun rifes, 
 tho* 'tis certain no direct Kay can come from the 
 Sun to the weftern Air, but from another Particle 
 of Air, for Example from /and o ; and fo the re- 
 flected Ray L m comes from the incident Ray fm 
 which is reflected from the incident Ray gf, and 
 again gf from another g L ; which perhaps comes 
 again from another. Secondly, 'tis worth remark- 
 ing, that they have made the Reflection from the 
 Air as from a concave Mirror ; the Center of 
 which Cavity is T the Center of the Earth, which is 
 falfe i for the Rays reflect from the Air without any 
 regard to the Center of the Earth, but to their Su- 
 H h 3 perfkies,
 
 470 *Fbe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 perficies, as is evident from the Ray L m, which 
 comes from the weftern Air to L *, for if it came 
 from m as from a Concavity, it's incident Ray 
 Ihould have come from the Place #, whereas it 
 comes from o, or between/ and o. Therefore the 
 Ray L m fo reflected, is from the Particle m as the 
 Fig TC required, And in the Air there are Parti- 
 cles of very different Figures ; and fo no wonder if 
 they make Reflections thro* the Air every way. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXIX, 
 
 Suppofing the 'Twilight is not made by one hut a double 
 Refleffion, to find from thence the Altitude of the 
 jftr^ which may agree better wtib other Obfkrva- 
 tions, 
 
 I T was faid in the lafl Proportion, that the 
 Ray g bf 9 (Fig. 29.) which makes the firfl reflect- 
 ed Ray in the Beginning of the Twilight, does 
 not come from the Sun itfelf, but that 'tis reflected 
 in g 5, let therefore the incident Ray be g I (which 
 may touch the Earth m p, and fo Ig is the firft Ray 
 which can come to g) arid let us, now fuppofe it to 
 come from the Sun itfelf immediately, and by Re- 
 fraction to be turned a little afide ; that is, let QL 
 be the Ray from the Sun, and let Ipg be the refract- 
 ed Ray, and h s the reflected Ray, and/L the fe- 
 cond reflected Ray. The Altitude of the Air T/ 
 is to be found , and, becaufe the incident Ray QJ 
 refracts into g /#, let us fuppofe the Angle of Re- 
 fraction g Ix to be 30 min. and that the Center of 
 the Sun is 1 7 degr. under the Horizon, when the 
 Twilight begins , therefore the Limb of the Sun 
 will be 1 6 degr. 45 min. under it, and fubftracting 
 the 30 min, for the Refraction, and Angle nKx 
 will be 1 6 degr. 15 min. which is the DeprefTion of 
 the Sun's Limb after Refraction. And becaufe
 
 C H A P. 1 9. of Univerfal Geography. 47 r 
 KL, K/> are equal, and alfo/L, g/>, then Kg, 
 K/will beeqtfcU, and the Angle Kfg equal to Kg/, 
 and both tegetheY-x equal to g K n 16 d^gr. 1 5 min. 
 therefore K/g is 8 ^r. 7 mm. and/TL 4 *fcgr. 
 and T/L 80 d^gr. whence T/ is found to be 
 861 Miies and a half, and thus the Air's Altitude 
 i Mile and a half, which is far lefs than was for- 
 merly made by the Twilight, and will be found 
 much lefs if a threefold Reflection be made 
 the beginning of the Twilight ; which is not im- 
 poiTible. And this double or triple Reflection is 
 better allowed for the Caufe of the Twilight's 
 Continuance, than that which Kepler brings from 
 the fplendid Matter about the Sun. You may fee 
 more of the Time of Twilight and it's various 
 lengths, in the fecond Part of this Book. 
 
 . f 
 
 :V PROPOSITION XL. 
 
 Tofnd the Altitude of the Clouds by the Quadrant (a}. 
 
 THE Air being calm and clear, fix on fome 
 Point in the Cloud that is remarkable, and mea- 
 
 (a] Mr Boyle tells us, that a 
 good Aftronomer, who had 
 divers times meafured the 
 Height of the Clouds, allured 
 him, that he could never find 
 any that were above three quar- 
 ters of a Mile high, and that 
 few exceeded half a Mile. And 
 Mr Crabtrie (an excellent Ma- 
 thematician of the bit age; upon 
 meafuring their Height, was 
 furprized to find them no high- 
 er, and wrote to his friend (that 
 great Genius of the la II age) Mr 
 Horrox, about it. Who in his 
 Letter, Nov. 23. 1637, tells 
 him, ' I am not furprized that 
 
 H 
 
 you fcund the Clouds fo low, 
 bec.mfe I have often found it 
 fo. I remember that I con- 
 trived a way, about two or 
 three years ago, of taking the 
 Height of the Clouds with, 
 a Quadrant, all ar one Station ; 
 and I never could find any, 
 that were at moil above a 
 Mile and half high.' After- 
 wards, faith he, ' I found the 
 fame method in Kepler (Aftr. 
 Cop. p. 70.) where he faith. 
 The Clouds are never above 
 a quarter of a German Mile 
 liigh, that is one of our 
 Englijb Miles. 
 4 furc
 
 472 The Absolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 fure it's Hajght as if it were the Top of a Steeple, 
 at two Stations : by two Obfervers at the fame time ; 
 and thus you may find it's Height, which is never 
 found to be above a Quarter of a Mile. 
 
 PROPOSITION XLI. 
 
 To msafure the Quantity of the Air, having it's Al- 
 titude given. 
 
 THIS is only to meafure the Space between 
 the Earth and the utmoft Bounds of the Air, which 
 is eafily done, having the Altitude of the Air, by 
 meafuring the Solidity of the Sphere made of the 
 Earth and Air, and then of the Earth only ; and 
 fubflrading the one from the other, there remains 
 the Quantity of Air. f 
 
 PROPOSITION XLII. 
 The Air of certain Places bath fome peculiar Properties. 
 
 THUS in Egypt it feldom, or rather never, 
 rains ; and if fmall Rain fall at any Time, there 
 follow Difeafes, as Catarrhs, Fevers, Afthmas, &c. 
 The Inundation of the A/Sife, and the daily Hoar- 
 frofts in the Morning, fupply the want of Rain. 
 And fo in the Kingdom of Peru, there are never 
 feen Rains : and in feveral Places under the Equa- 
 tor it rains for a whole half Year, and is fair the o- 
 ther. See Part ii. Chap. xxvi. 
 
 THE Ifland Pulon Timor is for the moft part 
 covered with Mifts and Hoar-frcft. 
 
 IN the Ifland Sumatra^ the Air is unwholefome, 
 on account of the feveral (landing Pools in it ; and 
 the like holds of feveral other Places, as in old 
 Mexico^ Malacca^ &c. 
 
 THE
 
 CHAP. 19' of Unfaerfal Geography. 473 
 
 THE Ifland of St Thomas, lying under the E- 
 quator, is thought of all Countries to have the 
 grofifeft unwhollbmeft Air, tho* it be moft fruitful 
 in every kind. 
 
 I N the Province of Chili the Air is fo very 
 fine and fubtile that the Blade of a Sword, Iheathed 
 without wiping, will not ruft. 
 
 I N the Azores the Air and Winds are fb lharp 
 as in a fhort time to corrode Plates of Iron and 
 the Tiles on the Houfes, reducing them to powder. 
 
 JRISfOTLEfcys, that on Mount Olympus 
 there is not the leaft Motion of the Air, nor even 
 any Air at all, for the Characters, written on the 
 Duft there, remain as at firft, after many Years ; 
 and they that go up it, cannot live there, except 
 they carry with them wet Sponges, by the help 
 of which they breathe. 
 
 I N America, when the Spaniards were paffing 
 from Nicaragua to the Province of Peru, many of 
 them, as they pafled over the Tops of the Moun- 
 tains, did, with their Horfes, there breathe their 
 laft, or were turned into Statues with the Cold ; 
 and thus continued 'till they that efcaped returned. 
 Some think this was owing to want of Air, but that 
 is not likely ; nor what Ariftotle fays of Olympus ; 
 for the contrary is found on higher Mountains, 
 whofe Tops are covered with Snow. Therefore 
 'tis certain thefe Mountains could not be above the 
 Air, but the Air fnowed upon them. See the Chap, 
 of Mountains. Bujbequius, an Eye-witnefs, fays, that 
 Olympus in Summer is covered with Snow. 
 
 THE Air about the I (lands in the Indian O- 
 cean is fo fragrant with the fmell of Spices, that 
 Seamen perceive it (efpecially when the Spices are 
 ripe) three or four MUes off, when the Wind is 
 againfl them. 
 
 THE Sea Air is more unwholfome than that on 
 Land, and lefs agreeable to thoie that are not ufed 
 
 to
 
 474 VI* dbfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 to it. The Difference is very fenfible when Seamen 
 come near the Shore ; for they know when they are 
 within a Mile of the Land, by drawing in the 
 Land Air in breathing. This the Seamen of 
 Soffala, on the eaftern Shore of Africa, know efpe- 
 cially. 
 
 WHILST this was printing, I met with an 
 Obfervation made by David Frcelichim on Mount 
 Carpbathus in Hungary, which, becaufe 'tis very 
 ufeftil in forming a Judgment of the Altitude of 
 the Air, and of it's feveral Regions, I thought 
 proper to add it here, tho' it mould have come in at 
 Prop, xviii. He fays ' Carpathus is the chief of the 
 Mountains in Hungary , which Name is common 
 to all that Tract of the Sarmatian Mountains, 
 which leparates the Hungarians from the Ruffians, 
 Polanders, Moravians, Silejians, and thofe in that 
 Part of Auftria beyond the Danube. Their high 
 and frightful Tops that are above the Clouds 
 appear at Cafareopolis. They are called fometimes 
 by a Name importing that they are almoft conti- 
 nually covered with Snows ; and by another 
 Name that imports them to be bald and (haven 
 as it were. And indeed the Rocks there do far 
 exceed the Alps in Italy, Switzerland, and Tyrol, 
 in roughnefs and Precipices : they are almoft un- 
 paflable, and no Body goes near them but thofe 
 that are curious Admirers of Nature. 
 A N D to mention this by the way ; when I 
 was a Youth, having, in 'June 1615, a Defire to 
 try how high thefe Mountains might be, I went 
 up with two of my School-Fellows: when I had 
 got up to the Top of the firft Rock with great 
 Difficulty, and thought I was on the Top of all, 
 there appeared another ragged Rock much high- 
 er , and when I had clamber'd to it, over many 
 large and loofe Stones, (any one whereof being 
 * thrown down would carry fome hundreds far 
 
 greater
 
 CHAP. 19. ofUniverfal Geography. 475 
 
 * greater before it, with fuch a Noife, that one 
 4 would think the whole Mountain were tumbling) 
 ' again another higher appeared, and then fomc 
 ' leffer, the latter whereof ftill exceeded the former 
 
 in Height. Through all thefe Caverns I was obli- 
 ' ged to pafs, with the utmoft Danger of my Life 
 
 * till I gained the Summit. Whenever I look'd 
 
 * down from the fteep Rocks into the Vales below, 
 ' that were thick fet with large Trees, the Appear- 
 
 * ance was like that of a dark Night ; or elfe of 
 
 * the blue and high Sky, which we fometimes fee 
 ' in fair Weather. And it appeared to me, that 
 ' if I had been to fall, I mould have tumbled, 
 ' not to the Earth but into the Heavens. For the 
 6 vifible Objects, on account of the great Declivi- 
 
 * ty, appeared diminimed and confufed. But when 
 6 I afcended to a higher Mountain, I came into 
 f thick Clouds, and having got thro* them, I did 
 ' after fome Hours fit down, when I was not far 
 ' from the Top, and plainly obferved the white 
 
 * Clouds, I was among, moving below ; and over 
 ' them I had a clear profpect fome Miles beyond the 
 
 * Bounds of the Country of Sepujiam, in which the 
 ' Mountains were. I alfo faw other Clouds higher, 
 4 others lower, and fome equally diftant from the 
 
 * Earth , from all which I gathered three things, 
 ' i. That I had paffed the beginning of the middle 
 ' Region of the Air. 2. That the Diftance of the 
 
 * Clouds from the Earth is different in different 
 
 * Places, acccording to the Vapours raifed. 3. That 
 
 * the Diftance of the loweft Clouds from the 
 ' Earth, is far from being feventy two German 
 ' Miles, as fome would have it ; and is only half 
 
 * a German Mile. When I came to the Top of 
 
 * the Mountain the Air was fo thin and calm 
 
 * that I could not perceive the Motion of a Hair, 
 
 * tho* there was a vehement Wind when I was on 
 
 * the Mountains below. From whence I find that 
 
 ' the
 
 476 *fbe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 the higheft Top of Mount Carpathus rifes a German 
 Mile from it's loweft Root up to the higheft Re- 
 gion of the Air, to which the Winds never 
 reach. I fired a Piftol on the Top, which at 
 firft made no greater Noife than if I had broke 
 a Stick or Staff; but, after a little time, there was 
 a murmuring for a long while, which filled the 
 Vallies and Woods below. And coming down 
 thro' the ancient Snows to die Vallies, I fired 
 again, which made a dreadful Sound, as if 
 great Guns had been fired, and I was afraid the 
 whole Mountain mould come down on me. The 
 Sound lafted for half a Quarter of an Hour, 
 *till it had reached the moft fecret Caverns, 
 where the Sound being enlarged reflected back 
 every Way ; which Caverns not being above, 
 there was at firft little rebounding, but when 
 the Sound reached thofe below, it rebounded vio- 
 lently. On thefe high Mountains it hails or 
 fnows for the moft Part, even in the middle of 
 Summer ; viz. as oft as it rains in the neighbour- 
 ing Vallies below : which I have found. The 
 Snows of different Years may be known from 
 vheir Colour and firm Surface. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 CHAP. 20. of U;iiverfal Geography. 477 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Of the Winds in general, and of the Points of 
 the Compafs. 
 
 TH E Wind is a Motion of the Air ; and there?- 
 fore the Confideration of it belongs to the 
 Abfolute Part of Geography ; efpecially feeing the 
 Knowledge of it belongs to Hydrography, and 
 moft of all to Navigation, which requires fome 
 Knowledge of Geography : and tho' I willingly 
 allow 'tis more Phyfical, yet becaufe it contains 
 feveral things, that relate to Geography we lhall 
 fpeak briefly to it. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 'The Wind is a Commotion of the Air which may be felt ', 
 or which hath fome Force. 
 
 T H U S it may be defined by the Confent of 
 all Nations : nor do I care to difpute with Critics 
 about it. If the Motion be gentle, 'tis called a 
 Gale or Breeze; and if it be not felt, 'tis not 
 called a Wind ; for fuch fmall Motions are con- 
 ftantly in the Air, tho' there is no Wind, as ap- 
 pears from the Sun- Beams let into a dark Cham- 
 ber, thro* a fmall Hole, where you fee the Atoms 
 carried with the Air : and therefore we put in the 
 Word felt in the Definition, becaufe the Motion of 
 the Atoms is only feen. 
 
 PRO-
 
 47* Tfo Mfohite Part SECT. VI. 
 
 PROPOSITION II, 
 
 <he Win fa for the moft fart tend from one Point 
 4 to the oppofite-) and drive Bodies before them. 
 
 THIS appears from the Force of Wind on 
 our Bodies, and efpecially from the Vanes fet on the 
 Top-mafts of Ships, which turn to the Point con- 
 trary to that the Wind comes from. Yet this is 
 not always direct and conftant, but with fome 
 Agitation to the adjacent Points. Some think there 
 fhould be added in the Definition, a Commo- 
 tion towards one Point, or to the fame Part ; but 
 we think it may be better left out, feeing there are 
 fome circular Winds , and, fpeaking accurately, 
 no Wkid exactly obferves the fame Point. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 A Point of the Compafs is an imaginary Plane, perpen- 
 dicularly extended from any Point of the Earth to one 
 of thofe that are on the Circumference of a Circle ', 
 having that Point for it's Center. 
 
 ,:' .v*.' 4 omtti?>J&uV.,?; 
 
 SUCH is the true* and coirrmon -Notion of a 
 Point of the Horizon. Sometimes the Points on 
 the Horizon, are the Things we call Points by 
 way of Eminence. 
 
 THE explaining of the Points of the Compafs 
 doth not belong to this Section of Geography, but 
 to the third, of the Comparative Properties -, but be- 
 caufe the federal' Winds are called by them, or they 
 Hy the other ; therefore we here anticipate treating 
 of them. And this is their Ufe, that when feveral 
 Things have different Situations we determine them 
 thereby.
 
 CHAP. 20. of Univerfal Geography. 479 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The Points are infinite in number, for Planes may be 
 drawn from all the Points on the Horizon ; but only 
 thirty two of them, have got Names, which are com* 
 mon to the Winds that blow from them. 
 
 THE Points, and alfo the Winds, are two-fold 
 as the Cardinal and Collateral; the Cardinal are 
 North, South, Eaft, and Weft. The Collateral are 
 thofe between two Cardinal ones, of which there 
 are twenty eight, there being feven in every fourth 
 Part of the Horizon , and of thefe, thofe that 
 are exactly in the middle between the two are 
 the chief ones, being 45 degr. diftant from the 
 Cardinals, as N. E. S. E. S. W. N. W. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Thefe thirty two Points are equally diftant from each 
 other, viz. each from it's adjacent Point ; whence 
 there are 1 1 degr. of the Horizon, and 15 min. be- 
 twixt every two adjacent Points : And the Cardinal 
 P oints are 90 degr. from each other. 
 
 THERE being 360 degr. in all Circles, fo on 
 the Horizon ; and thirty two Points being on the 
 Horizon, each Point muft be u degr. 15 min. 
 
 THIS Divifion, with the feveral Names of 
 every Point, was made by the Germans, as moft 
 commodious j their Names are not eafily exprefled 
 in other Languages: tho' Their Order and 
 Names are in the following Table.
 
 480 he Abfolute Part SECT. VI 
 
 N for North* S for South, E for- Eajt, andW for 
 WJt. 
 
 North Eaft. South. Weft. 
 
 N and by E E and by S S and by W W and by N 
 
 NNE ESE S S W W N W 
 
 NEandbyN SEandbyE S W and by S NWandbyW 
 
 NE SE SW NW 
 
 NEandbyE SEandbyS SWandbyW N W and by N 
 
 ENE SSE WSW NNW 
 
 E and by N S and by E W and by S N and by W. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Becaufe there is a confiderable Diftance between thefe 
 thirty two Points, fame put a Point between every 
 two, and makejixty four j which are cbferved in 
 long Voyages. 
 
 BUT Mathematicians, finding that Divifion not 
 accurate enough, made as many Points as Degrees 
 on the Horizon, viz. three hundred and fixty, 
 which are exprefied by their Diftance from the 
 North and South ; but there is not required 16 
 nice a Divifion for the Wind. 
 
 Y E T the thirty two Winds might be better de- 
 figned than from the thirty two Points, from which 
 they blow ; and this would ferye in all Languages i 
 that is, if they were called the firft, fecond, and 
 third, as they are in order from the one Cardinal 
 to the other. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 The Antienis^ 'both Greeks and Latins, counted few 
 WmdSy or ratber they gave Names to few ; nor 
 are thefefew determinate, one Wind having feveral 
 Names, not taken from any order, which make it 
 bard to under/land their feveral Points. 
 
 INDEED
 
 C H A P. 20. of Unlverfal Geography. 48 1 
 INDEED the Greeks had antiently but the 
 four Cardinal Winds ; nor are any more mention- 
 ed by Homer : and to thefe they afterwards added 
 four ; i , That was made one where the Sun ri- 
 feth at the Winter Solftice, between the South 
 and Eaft, called Eurus ; for the Eaft Wind itfelf 
 was called Subfolanus ; but Gellius calls die former 
 Fulturnus^ and the Eaft Wind Eurus. 2. That 
 Point in which it then fets, called Africus. 3. That 
 where the Sun rifeth in the Summer Solftice, be- 
 tween the Eaft and North ; and the Wind from 
 thence was called Aquilo. 4. Where it then fets 
 between North and Weft, called by the Grecians 
 Corns. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 'The Defignation of the Winds by the Greeks was 
 very incommodious for Sailors, and others , which 
 Inconvenience they did not much find^ not going far 
 from Greece in their Navigations. 
 
 F O R in Places of different Latitudes, thofe 
 Divifions they made, were not the fame , yet the 
 Greeks retained them, augmenting them with o- 
 ther four intermediate Winds, which they gave 
 Names to, and fo made twelve in all : tho* others 
 among them gave other Names to fome of them. 
 The Latins added one between every two adja- 
 cent Winds ; and fo made twenty four. And Se- 
 neca fpeaks of their being obferved of old by Varro 
 to be incommodious, and therefore they were fo 
 ordered as to be made equally diftant, without 
 regard to the Place of the Sun's rifmg and fetting 
 at different Times of the Year. But what Seneca 
 fays, that there are no more Winds than twelve, 
 is erroneous and ridiculous : For they are infinite. 
 
 VOL. I. I \ PRO-
 
 482 The Abfolute Part SECT. VL 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 We have explained the feveral Winds tbat have their 
 Names from the Points tbsy blow from , and Jhewn 
 that the Divifions of the Greeks and Latins are 
 incommodious for Navigation and Geography. 
 
 THEREFORE we retain the Divifion of 
 the Moderns into thirty two Winds, equally di- 
 ftant. And thofe are called oppofite and contrary 
 Winds that blow from the Points diametrically 
 oppofite: for we confider the Winds as coming 
 from another Place to us ; but the Points we con- 
 ceive as extending from us to another Place. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 The Caufes of the Winds are various 5 for feeing the 
 Wind is nothing but a continual Impulfe of the Air^ 
 all thofe things tbat caufe the one, are Caufes of 
 the other. 
 
 i. THE principal and general Caufe is the 
 Sun itfelf, which, by it's fiery Beams, rarities 
 and attenuates the Air ; efpecially that which is 
 juft under it ; and the Air rarified takes up more 
 Room : and hence it is, that the Air thrufts for- 
 ward the Air next to it ; and the Sun going round 
 from Eaft to Weft, the Prefliire is made weft- 
 ward, as appears in moft Places of the Torrid Zone y 
 and every where there on the Sea a continual 
 Eaft Wind blows : and the Air rarified prefies 
 weftward within the Tropics. There is a Prefiure 
 indeed all round, but the Air is not admitted to 
 other Points, the Prefiure not being fo great as 
 towards the Weft, becaufe the Sun moves that 
 way, but in our Climate, 'tis fo only for the moft 
 
 part,
 
 C H A P . 2 o . of Umverfat Geography. 483 
 part, before and after Sun rifmg, when there are 
 no other Winds that blow ftronger, and overcome 
 it. And fome Places, or other Points, are more 
 difpofed to receive this Force than others ; and 
 therefore when the Air is thruft moft to the North, 
 the Wind is faid to blow from the South ; and 
 fo of other Winds. And 'tis to be obferved, that 
 when this is to any Point between the four Car- 
 dinals, then the Wind feems different in different 
 Countries. For tho' the Point, in refpect of the 
 Place the Sun is vertical to, be but one, yet it is dif- 
 ferent in refpect of other Places. And thus one and 
 the fame Caufe makes a Wind that hath different 
 Names in different Places : if that Caufe be af- 
 fifted by others the Wind is ftrong, if hindered"* 
 but weak. And oft-times another Wind blows that 
 is helped by the general Caufe. 
 
 2. T H E fecond and moft frequent Caufe of the 
 Wind, are the Exhalations from Sea and Land that 
 are raifed plentifully, and with fome Force ', but 
 they do not caufe a Wind 'till they begin to ra- 
 rify. 
 
 3. THE Rarefaction and Attenuation of the 
 Clouds, great or fmall, made by the Sun and other 
 Stars, or by the fulphureous Particles and Fire in- 
 clofed in a Place. 
 
 4. T H E melting of Snow and Ice, efpecially 
 that which lies on high Places : for they are not in- 
 tirely melted. 
 
 5. THE Rifmg, and various Situation, of the 
 Moon and Stars. 
 
 6. T H E Condenfation or Rarefaction of the 
 Air and Vapours by Heat or Cold. 
 
 7. THE defcending of Clouds that thereby 
 prefs the Air below. 
 
 THE Confideration of the jEolipile is of ufe, 
 
 for underftanding thefe Caufes of the Wind ; for 
 
 |he Water inclofed in it, being heated with Fire, 
 
 I i 2 fends
 
 484 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 fends, out of a fmall Hole of it, a ftrong Steam of 
 Vapours, like a Wind blowing, which continues 
 'till the Water is all exhaled. The groffer Air that 
 furrounds ferves inftead of that fmall Hole ; and 
 fometimes 'tis ftrengthned by other Vapours and 
 little Clouds behind it, and fometimes 'tis conden- 
 fed, and fo makes way for the Air to move to that 
 Point. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 Wb-j the Wind may blow in a Line perpendicular to 
 the Horizon. 
 
 THE Reafon is, that the Air furrounds the 
 Earth in a fpherical Figure, and the Air is thruft 
 about for the moil part in a great Circle of the 
 Earth , and tho' the Air may be alfo thruft in a 
 tranfverfe Line, yet becaufe the Air doth not prefs 
 fo much, or refills more at the Sides, therefore 
 the Wind blows in the middle. 
 
 W E mail underftand this better if we confi- 
 der the firft Caufe of the Winds. For the Sun 
 thrufts the Air to all the Points of the Place that 
 it is vertical to ; but 'tis not received in all thefe 
 Points, as was faid. If we then confider great 
 Circles to be drawn from that Place, and between 
 thefe, thofe to which the Air is forced, or in 
 which 'tis received, all the Places of the Earth 
 fituated in that Circle, or Semicircle, will feel the 
 Wind coming down perpendicularly , becaufe all 
 great Circles that pafs thro* any Place are per- 
 pendicular to the Horizon of that Place ; for the 
 fame Reafon, if the Wind break out from a Cloud 
 broke, or diflblved, thofe Places that are fituated, 
 beyond thofe Circles will nt feel the Wind, tho' 
 the Air move above their Horizon ; becaufe 'tis 
 not perpendicular, but oblique to that Horizon. 
 
 X J& JL
 
 CHAP. 20. of Univerfal Geography. 485 
 YET 'tis not generally true, that the Wind 
 goes down perpendicular to the Horizon ; for of- 
 ten it blows in the Air tranfverfly. 
 
 THUS we may fee the Smoke that comes out 
 of a Chimney is not carried by the Wind all one 
 way, but a part of it goes another way. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 Why the Winds blow with fome Interruption, rejling 
 as it were for A Time, and on a fudden return 
 with Force ; and why on the Sea they are more 
 constant. 
 
 THE Reafon I fuppofe is, that the Caufe of 
 the Wind is not conflant, and takes fome time 
 to gather it's Strength ; and the Exhalations being 
 more conflant on the Sea, and the Motion of the 
 Wind lefs hindered , therefore that Change is not 
 fo fenfible there, tho' there is fome Change as to 
 the Degrees of blowing. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 Why no Wind blows perpendicularly from the Air or 
 Places of the Earth. 
 
 A R IS TO TL , in his fecond Book of Meteors 
 chap. ix. treats very obfcurely of this QuefHon ; 
 fo that his Followers do not agree about his O- 
 pinion : nor mail I be at Pains to write their O- 
 pinions. The Caufe which feems to be more 
 intelligible is, that the Air being thruft down 
 to the Center of the Earth cannot go that way, 
 but is hindered by other Vapours that are forced 
 up -, and the great Refiftance of the Air below 
 caufes the Force downwards, to tend fideways : 
 which is the more probable becaufe that which 
 H 3 the
 
 486 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 the Wind confifts of is lighter for the moft part 
 than that Air -, and alfo more rarified than the Air 
 near the Earth. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 Why the Eaft Winds are more frequent than the Weft. 
 
 THE Caufe of this is manifeft from Prop. 10, 
 where we made the Sun the chief Caufe which 
 rarifies the Air from Eaft to Weft \ and therefore 
 the Air is more prefled towards the Weft : and 
 this cannot be hindered except there are a great 
 Quantity of Exhalations or Clouds in the weitern 
 Parts, which is not very frequent. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Why the North and Eaft Winds are more ftrong and 
 fevere^ and the South and Weft Winds more weak 
 and gentle. 
 
 THE Reafon is becaufe the North Air is grof- 
 fer on account of the Cold, and the South Air in 
 our Zone is more rarified by the Sun; and the 
 more rarified the Air is, it's Motion is the lefs 
 forcible , yet the South Winds are cold, dry, and 
 .ftrong, in the Temperate Z,one^ contrary to ours, 
 JTO lefs than the North Winds are to us. But 
 the Eaft Winds are fevere or more intenfe on a- 
 -nother Account, viz. that they arife for the moft 
 .part from die Rarefa&ion of the Air by the Sun, 
 which is continually carried from Eaft to Weft, 
 ,and fo is forced more towards the Weft. But 
 .'tis likely there are other Caufes which hinder 
 or promote this Motion. The Portuguefe Sailors 
 cal] the North and Eaft Wind Bryfas ; but the 
 South and Weft they call Vendavaks. 
 
 PRO-
 
 C H A P. 20. of Unfafrfal Geography. 487 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 Why the South and Weft Winds are found to be bo tier 
 than the Raft or North, which have a much greater 
 frigorifc Power. 
 
 THUS is the Queftion ufually propofed , but 
 we muft know 'tis not to be underflood gene- 
 rally of all Places, but only thofe in our Zone ; for 
 in the other Temperate Zone, towards the South 
 from the Equator, the contrary holds good j for 
 in thofe Places the North Winds are hot, and the 
 South more cold, and fo the Nature of the Thing 
 requires. For the South Wind being more hot, 
 and the North more cold, proceeds hence that the 
 South Winds come from Places near the Torrid Zone, 
 and the North Winds from the Frigid Zone ; but 
 the contrary happens in Places near the Antarctic 
 Pole ; for the North Winds come to them from 
 the Torrid Zone, and the South Winds from the 
 Frigid. But another Account is to be given of 
 the Eaft and Weft Winds; for the different Places 
 of the two Temperate Zones are not to be regarded 
 here. Firft we faid in the preceding Proportion, 
 that the Weft Winds are lefs frequent in all Places ; 
 the Caufe of which is the fame with that for which 
 the Weft are found to be hotter ; viz. becaufe they 
 blow for the moft part in the Night-time after 
 Sun fet, where the Air, preffed to our Place, is 
 hotter or lefs cold than the Air of our Place ; as 
 being further from the fetting Sun than the Place 
 between us and the Sun then. There is another 
 Caufe which alfo holds good in the Difference 
 between the North and South Wind ; viz. that the 
 Weft Winds do not blow fo ftrongly, but 
 with fome flownefs , for 'tis known that a Gale 
 -or Breeze is the colder the more fiercely it blows ; 
 I i 4 tho'
 
 488 tte Abfolute Part S E c T . VI. 
 
 tho* it be really in itfelf not colder ; as our 
 Breath (which we can make either cold or hot) 
 /hews. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 
 Why Seamen when they fee a fmall black Cloud ex- 
 fe& Wind from the Part in which it is, efpecially 
 if it be of a pale and blacki/h Colour ; and to ex- 
 plain other Signs of the approaching Winds. 
 
 A twofold Reafon may be given ; for either the 
 Clouds of that Colour mow that they are foon to be 
 reiblved and diflipated into a Wind ; or the Clouds 
 falling down by their Weight, prefs the Air be- 
 low, which caufes a Wind : of that peculiar little 
 Cloud which the Dutch call the Ox-eye, fee the Chap- 
 ter following. 
 
 WHEN the Sun appears fpotted, at it's ri- 
 fing, and hiding itfelf as it were under a pale or 
 black Cloud, it foretels Showers or Winds to 
 come. 2. Iftherifing Sun feem hollow, cafting 
 it's Beams as it were from it's middle, it mews 
 a wet or windy Seafon approaching. 3. If the Sun 
 be of a pale Colour at letting, it denotes Rain ; 
 but if it be of a red Colour, it mews the next Day 
 will be clear and calm. 4. If the Sun fet pale be- 
 hind black Clouds it mews there will be a North 
 Wind foon. 5. If the Moon be red, like Gold, 
 'tis a fure Sign of a Wind to come, according to 
 the common Verfe 
 
 Pallida Luna pluit, rubicunda flat, albaferenat. 
 
 6. A Halo about the Moon ; 7. If the Moon's 
 Horns beblackifh, and, 8. If the North Horn of the 
 Moon appear to be more ilretched out, 'tis a Sign 
 of a North Wind; but if the South Horn appear 
 2 foj
 
 CHAP. 20. of Uni verfal Geography. 489 
 fo, 'tis a Sign of a South Wind approaching. 9. 
 The rifing of the Moon, and remarkable Stars, 
 as Artturus, Orion? and efpecially the rifing of thofe 
 in Capricorn, with the Sun. 10. If the two fmall 
 Stars in Cancer, called Afelli, be covered with a 
 Cloud ; if the North one, then a South Wind ; but 
 if the South one, then a North Wind. u. The 
 Winds do, for the moft part, begin to fettle in a 
 Point, when the Rains are over. 12. A certain 
 Noife and Murmuring , as if there were a Boiling 
 heard in the Sea. 13. The Antients alfo took 
 their Signs from living Creatures , as the Crow, 
 the Goat, the Dolphin, &c. 14. From fiery Me- 
 teors, Lightening, and opening of the Ground, 
 and falling Stars ; but not that Light feen in the 
 Dark, or Jack with his Lanthorn. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIII. 
 
 Why the Winds in Spring and Autumn blow more 
 Jlrongly and frequently than in the Heat of Summer 
 or Cold of Winter. 
 
 I fuppofe 'tis fo in Spring, partly becaufe of the 
 melting of the Snow, eipecially in high Places ; 
 partly becaufe the Pores of the Earth are then 
 open, and fend forth more Exhalations ; and part- 
 ly becaufe the Air and Vapour then becomes more 
 rare j being condenfed in the Winter. Moreover, 
 there falls much Rain a Month before the Spring, 
 and in the Spring itfelf, becaufe the moift Con- 
 ftellations are in thofe Places of the Zodiac, into 
 which when the Sun enters the Spring begins. 
 But the Caufe of the frequent Rains, and blowing 
 of the Winds in Harveft, is, that the Sun then 
 draws up fome Vapours ; but the Heat being 
 fmall, it only draws thofe that are grofier and 
 not fine enough. But in the Summer there are 
 
 few
 
 490 *fhe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 few Winds, for the fame Caufe for which there 
 are Rains but feldom then ; viz. that the Sun does 
 too much attenuate the Exhalations, and fuffers 
 them not to go fo much together as is necefia- 
 ry to produce Wind. Which Caufe is not indeed 
 general, nor always true ; nor is it generally true, 
 that there are no Winds in the hot Summer, but 
 only that it often happens fo. In a fevere Winter 
 there are few W T inds ; becaufe few Vapours are then 
 exhaled, and thofe that are raifed are either con- 
 denfed to Snow, or elfe are not fo rarified or difil- 
 jpated thro' the Cold, as to caufe a Wind. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 t J gjilliM*^ fr& * J>l*jf---- f C -i 
 
 In what Altitude, or in what Region , of the Air, do 
 the Winds begin to blow ? 
 
 SOME think they are not above the lower 
 Region of the Air ; becaufe the Tops of high 
 Mountains, as Olympus, are found to have no 
 Wind on them. I doubt the Truth thereof, for 
 the Smoke from the Top of Mount Mtna is feen 
 to be toiled here and there ; and therefore I think 
 there may be fuch a Commotion of the Air in the 
 higheft Region alfo. 
 
 PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 
 How far may one and the fame Wind blow ? 
 
 THERE is a great Difference in this Matter ; 
 for the Winds blowing from Eaft to Weft, under 
 the Torrid Zone, feem to go round the Earth ; and 
 thofe alfo that blow thither from the South or 
 North ufe to accompany the Seamen a great way 
 for many Days. The fame feems alfo true of col- 
 lateral Winds j but here lies the Difference, that the 
 
 lame
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Unherfal Geography. 49 1 
 fame Winds differ in different Places, as we faid 
 under Prop. 10. at the end of the Explication of the 
 firft Caufe. 
 
 Of the Kinds of Winds, and of fempejls. 
 
 IN die preceding Chapter we gave the Divi- 
 fion of the Winds, their Differences, or rather 
 different Names, which they have from the feveral 
 Points they feem to blow from. This Divifion 
 was therefore accidental, and refpe6ting a certain 
 Place on the Earth, which thefe Points referred 
 to. We mail in this Chapter give other Divifions 
 and Properties of the Winds belonging to certain 
 Places of the Earth, or certain Times of the Year ; 
 tho* we wifli we had more and exafter Obferva- 
 tions of them. But we mail produce fome that we 
 have gathered with much Pains from the Journals 
 of Sailors. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 r .s ut*v 
 
 Some Winds are conftant, others inconflant. 
 
 THE conftant are fuch as blow at leaft one 
 Hour, or two, from tMb fame Point. 
 
 THE inconftant are fuch as blow one while 
 from one Point, and another while from another, 
 in a fmall Time. 
 
 THE Caufe of their mort continuance in one 
 Point, and of their changing on a fudden, feems 
 
 to
 
 492 *fbe Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 to be firft their proceeding from a general Caufe, 
 or a Caufe that is more or lefs durable. 
 
 THUS theWinds that proceed from the Motion 
 of the Air with the Sun are conftant; and thofe 
 likewife that proceed from the melting of the Snow 
 , efpecially in high Places. 2 . There being no fuch 
 Vapours in that Quarter the Wind blows from 
 as are fit to make Wind. 3. If the Air about the 
 Cloud, from which the Wind comes, be thicker, 
 and hinder it's Paflage -, but if the Air is not thick 
 or clofe together, and but a few Vapours, here 
 and there, in the feveral Quarters ; or laftly, if 
 the general Caufes do not operate there, then the 
 Wind is found to be changeable, and for the moft 
 part gentle. 
 
 *:*: -V t 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 ( 
 
 1 tfbere is a General and Particular Wind. 
 ..^,1; ,.:;; . fa } .-.v,\'v? i 7 ! ;\) "aj/ftlti rifi4t :>V/ " o 
 
 THAT is called by Sailors a General Wind 
 which blows in feveral Places at one Time, thro' 
 a large Tradt of the Earth, almoft all the Year 
 round. 
 
 AND this Wind is hindered, i. In Places of 
 the Sea near Land ; for here they drive againft 
 the Vapours that come from other Points ; and 
 therefore 'tis in the middle of the Sea that 
 this General Wind is obferved. 2. There may 
 alfo blow another Wind in the middle of the 
 Sea, when there is a Cloud, or fome other Caufe 
 in another Point, ftrong enough to produce 
 Wind. From thefe two Caufes it is that the Ge- 
 ,ral Winds are not fo conftant as they might be 
 otherwife, 
 
 THESE General Winds are found only be- 
 tween the Tropics round the Earth, except in fome 
 Places where they are feven Degrees beyond the 
 
 Tropics
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Univerfal Geography. 493 
 Tropics ; and they are ever from the Eaft, or 
 from collateral Points, as South- Eaft and North- 
 Eaft, and that the whole Year round ; yet not 
 always with the fame Degree of Force in all thole 
 Places, but they are hindered in fome Places more, 
 in others lefs. They are moft conftant in the Pacific 
 Sea *, viz. that Part of it which lies between the 
 Tropics -, fo that the Ships which come from the 
 Aquapulco, a Port in New Spain in America, to 
 the Philippine Iflands, that is, from Eaft to Weft, 
 often fail three Months without ever changing or 
 mifting their Sails -, having a conftant Eaft or North- 
 Eaft Wind : nor did ever any Ship yet perifh in 
 that vaft Voyage of one thoufand fix hundred and 
 fifty Miles. And therefore the Sailors think they 
 may fleep there fecurely : nor is there any need of 
 taking care of the Ship, when that General Wind 
 carries them ftrait to their defired Port, the Phi- 
 lippine Ides ; near to which indeed there are fome 
 other Winds that come againft the General Wind. 
 And thus 'tis alfo in failing from the Cape of 
 Good-Hope to Brafil in America ; in the middle of 
 which Voyage lies the Ifle of St Helena, to which 
 they commonly go as they return from India to 
 Europe, and lies about three hundred and fifty Miles 
 from the faid Cape : which is run oft-times in fix- 
 teen Days, and fometimes in twelve, as the Ge- 
 neral Winds are more or lefs ftrong ; and the 
 Seamen are as fecure when they come to the 
 fame Parallel of Latitude with Si Helena (for the 
 Cape is beyond the South Tropic) ; their chiefeft 
 care is to obferve that they do not pafs by the 
 IQand, as 'tis very fmall, for if they pafs it but 
 the eighth part of a Mile, they cannot return to it 
 for the eafterly Wind. Thus they are forced to go 
 to Brafil for frefh Water, or the other Ifland called 
 Afcenfion with great lofs of Time, 
 
 IF
 
 494 The Abfolute Part S E CT. VI. 
 
 I F it be afked how they fail when they come the 
 contrary way, i. e. from the Philippines to New Spain, 
 or from Brafilto the Cape of Good-Hope going to /- 
 dia ; in thefe Voyages the Reader muft obferve a 
 threefold Artifice ; for either they fail the Sea be- 
 yond the Tropics, (and thus do not go to St Helena 
 while they go from Europe to India] , or when they 
 fail within the Tropics they do not go direclly from 
 Weft to Eaft but obliquely, from the North, or a 
 Point collateral to it, to the South, and fome Point 
 collateral to it ; or laftly, they chufe thofe Times 
 for failing in which they know the General Wind is 
 often diverted : but this laft feldom happens, and 
 therefore the other two are more frequent ; of which 
 we mail fay more in the Chapter of Navigation. 
 
 T H E R E are then two Seas under the Torrid 
 TAW in which the General Wind, from the Eaft and 
 collateral Points, prevails thro' the whole Year -, 
 viz. that between South Africa and Brafil, and 
 that between America and the Oriental Ifles, of 
 which the Philippines are a Part. And the third 
 Part of this Sea in the Torrid Zone, viz. between 
 South Africa and die Oriental Ifles, is not without 
 the General Wind; tho' 'tis often interrupted 
 becaufe of the many Iflands there ; and more in 
 fome Places than others. This Wind blows moft 
 between Mozambique, in Africa, and India, in the 
 Months of January, February, March, April -, and 
 in the reft of the Months other Winds blow, of 
 which in the following Propofition : This general 
 Wind is more hindered in the Seas among the Indian 
 Ifles. The Eaft Winds begin to blow hard in the 
 Month of May at the Me of Banda, with fome 
 Rain ; and at Malacca in September -, and in other 
 Places otherwile, as will be fhewn in the following 
 Propofition. 
 
 YET this General Wind does not happen alike 
 
 near the Tropic in all Places, but extends itfelf diffe- 
 
 2 rently 5
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Unherfal Geography. 49 $ 
 
 rently , for the Tropics are diftant from the Equa- 
 tor on both Sides twenty three Degrees and thirty 
 Minutes ; and the General Wind extends itfelf in 
 one Meridian to the Latitude of twenty Degrees ; 
 in another to fifteen, in another to twelve. 
 
 T H U S in the Indian Ocean, when the Eaft or 
 South-Eaft Wind blows, in the Month of January 
 and February, 'tis not fenfible 'till you come to 
 the fifteenth Degree of Latitude. 
 
 S O in going from Goa to the Cape of Good-Hope, 
 they have not the General Wind 'till they come to 
 the'twelfth Degree of South Latitude , which they 
 have to the twenty-eighth Degree of the fame 
 Latitude. 
 
 L I K E W I S E in the Sea between Africa and 
 America, between the fourth Degree of North 
 Latitude, and the tenth or eleventh Degree, 
 Seamen have not obferved the General Wind to 
 blow , for when they have failed from St Helena be- 
 yond the Equator with that Wind, to the fourth 
 Degree of North Latitude, then they have been 
 without it 'till they came to the tenth Degree of 
 North Latitude , from which to the thirtieth De- 
 gree the North-Eaft Wind is found to blow con- 
 ftantly, tho' that thirtieth Degree is feven Degrees 
 from the Torrid Zone ; yet in the Parallel of fix, 
 feven, or eight Degrees of Latitude, &c. it blows 
 in fome Places, but in the tenth Degree in all Places 
 'till they come to the thirtieth. In the fame manner 
 beyond the Tropic of Capricorn, between the Cape 
 of Good-Hope and Brafil, the South-Eaft Wind 
 blows to the thirtieth Degree thro* the whole 
 Year. 
 
 AND tho', as we faid, this Wind is not fenfible 
 on all Shores, and much lefs in the inland Parts, 
 yet on fome it is fenfible enough ; thus on the 
 Shores of Brafil, and on the Shores of the Kingdom 
 of Lowango, in Africa, the South-Eaft Winds blow 
 
 daily,
 
 496 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 daily, although other Winds are mixed with 
 them. 
 
 T H E R E is a threefold Caufe afligned by Na- 
 turalifts for this General Wind (for the Antients 
 knew nothing of it, nor of the Torrid Zone itfelf ). 
 Some think the Sun's moving from Eaft to Weft is 
 the Caufe of it ; becaufe it rarifies the Air that it 
 goes over ; which Rarifaction follows the Sun, ftill 
 thrufting the Air before it. 
 
 OTHERS, viz. thofe who fuppofe the Hea- 
 vens fixed, and the Earth to revolve, are of Opi- 
 nion, that the General Wind comes from the 
 Earth's moving from Weft to Eaft, and the Air 
 with it, but not fo faft as we ; and therefore that 
 we go againft the Air, or the Air againft us, 
 from Eaft to Weft. 
 
 A third Caufe is brought by des Cartes, which is 
 altogether new ; (Part 4. Prop. 49. of his Principles) 
 where he endeavours to mew that the Moon caufes 
 this Motion of the Air as well as the Tides ; but 
 becaufe the Knowledge of his Opinion requires 
 alfo the Knowledge of his other Suppofitions, we 
 ihall not fay any thing of it here ; being afterwards 
 to mew that it cannot be fo. The firft Caufe 
 pleafes us beft ; and the fecond feems not to be 
 received ; becaufe feveral of the Copernicans do not 
 admit it ; and no Reafon can be thus given why 
 it mould blow only within the Tropics, and not alfo 
 beyond them (#). 
 
 PRO- 
 
 (u] Dr Halley, a Perfon well rience. But he only takes No- 
 
 skilledln Meteorology, as well tic of fuch Winds as blow in 
 
 as in all parts of Phyfics, has, the Ocean ; there being fo much 
 
 with extraordinary Accuracy, inconftancy and vamblenefs i 
 
 profecuted the Hiftory of the Land-Winds, that from them 
 
 Conftant periodical Winds; a Perfon can make out nothing 
 
 which he deduces not only from clear or certain, 
 
 the Obfervation* of Seamen, Firfl of all then, he divides 
 
 but alfo from his own Expe- the Ocean into three ample 
 
 Seas
 
 C H A P. 2 1 of Umverfal Geography. 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 497 
 
 Some Winds have aftated Time and Period^ othen 
 are unfixed, and blow at uncertain Times. 
 
 THOSE are called Stated and Periodical 
 Winds that blow at certain Times of the Year* 
 
 and 
 
 Seas, viz. I. The Atlantic. 
 2. The Indian; and, 3. The Pa- 
 cific Sea; proceeding to de- 
 fcribe in order, the Winds that 
 generally blow in each of thefe. 
 In the Atlantic Ocean, thro' 
 the whole Year, blows the 
 Eaft Wind ; yet fo as to turn 
 a little South or North, accor- 
 ding to the different Situation 
 of Places. Of which Turnings 
 this is the Sum. 
 
 1 . Seamen near the African 
 Shore, as foon as they have 
 failed paft the Canary Iflands, 
 about twenty eight Degrees of 
 North Latitude, obferve the 
 Wind to blow pretty loud from 
 South- Eaft. This Wind conti- 
 nues with them in their Courfe 
 fouthward 'till they come at the 
 tenth Degr. of North Latitude, 
 provided they be an hundred 
 or more Leagues from the Coaft 
 of Guinea, between which De- 
 gree, and the 4th of North La- 
 titude, there are interchangeably 
 frequent Calms and Hurricanes. 
 
 2. They who fail to the Ca- 
 rlbbee Iflands, as they approach 
 the Coatt of America, perceive 
 the North-Eaft Wind more 
 and more to retire eaftward, in- 
 fomuch that fometimes it is full 
 Eaft ; fometimes alfo, tho' rare- 
 ly, it may turn a little to the 
 
 VOL: L 
 
 South ; whofe violence they ob- 
 ferved perpetually to abate. 
 
 3. As to the conftant Winds, 
 they don't extend further than 
 twenty eight Degrees North 
 Latitude, to the Coaft of Afri* 
 ca, and near the Border of A- 
 merica they go to thirty, thirty 
 one, or thirty two Degrees. 
 The fame is obfervable South of 
 the Equator; where, near the 
 Cape ofGood-Hope, the Limits 
 of thefe Winds are three or four 
 Degrees further diftant from 
 the Equinoctial Line, than on 
 the Coafts of r*/?/. 
 
 4.. From the fourth Degree 
 of North Latitude to the above- 
 mentioned Bounds on the South 
 Side of the Equator, the Wind is 
 obferved almoft perpetually to 
 blow from the intermediate 
 Parts 'twixt South and Eaft, tho* 
 for the moft part 'twixt Eaft and 
 South-Eaft; yet fo, as that 
 thofe who fail near the Coaft 
 of Africa have the Wind turn- 
 ing rather South, but ap- 
 proaching America they obferve 
 it decline fo much to the 
 eaftward, that it almoft blows 
 direft Eaft. I had Occafion 
 to tarry for the Space of a 
 Year on this part of tbe O- 
 cean, during which time the 
 Changes of the Weather were 
 
 kk fo
 
 498 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 and ceafe for a fet Time, and then begin to blow 
 again j fome of thefe are anniverfary, others blow 
 
 after 
 
 fo frequent, that I had fuffici- 
 cnt Employment in obferving 
 thefe Matters. I found there- 
 fore the Wind almoft always 
 to poflefs the third or fourth 
 Point from the Eaft. As oft 
 as it approached nearer the Eaft, 
 it blew more vehemently and 
 raifed a Storm ; but when it 
 came from the Points more 
 fouthward, it was much more 
 calm, and made the Air clear. 
 But i never perceived a Wind 
 blowing from Eaft to North, 
 or from South to Weft. 
 
 5. Thefe Winds undergo 
 fome Change, which is owing 
 to the different Seafons of the 
 Year. For when the Sun paffes 
 the Equator northward a pretty 
 way, this South-Eaft Wind, 
 cfpecially in this narrow Traft 
 of Sea between Guinea and 
 JSra/il, declines fomewhat more 
 to the South, as the North- 
 Eaft does to Eaft. And again, 
 upon the Sun's entering the 
 Tropic of Capri corn, the South- 
 Eaft Wind approaches nigher 
 to Eaft, as doth the North-Eaft 
 to North. 
 
 6. There is found a certain 
 Traft of Sea in this Ocean, 
 which, near the Coaft of Gui- 
 nea, extends for the Space of 
 five hundred Leagues, from 
 Mount Leo to St Thomas's Ifle, 
 wherein South, or South- Weft, 
 Winds conftantly blow. For 
 the South-Baft Wind having 
 once paffed the Equator be- 
 comes conftant, which in our 
 fourth Obfemtion we deinon- 
 
 ftrated to blow to the South of 
 the Equator. About eighty or 
 one hundred Leagues from the 
 Coaft of Guinea, it turns by 
 degrees fouthward, and having 
 turned that Point, it declines 
 to Points near the Weft, 'till 
 touching the very Shore, it 
 either obtains the South- Weft 
 Point, or that ' twixt it and direft 
 Weft. Such kind of Winds on 
 thisCoaftare fix'd, tho' frequent- 
 ly interrupted with Calms and 
 Tempefts, which violently pro- 
 ceed from any Air. Seamen alfo, 
 much to their lofs, fometimes 
 find the Winds eaiterly ; which 
 being attended with Clouds 
 and a grofler Air, are very un- 
 wholefome. 
 
 y.Twixt the tenthand fourth 
 Degrees of North Lat. in that 
 Traft which is bounded by the 
 Meridians of Cape Verd, and 
 the remote Iflands adjacent to 
 it, I know not if I can fay 
 that any Wind blows either 
 conftant or variable. The 
 Calm is almoft perpetual, the 
 Thunder and Lightening ex- 
 treamly terrible, and Rains fo ve- 
 ry frequent, that from them the 
 Traft is named rainy. If there 
 happen any Winds they go off 
 into Blafts, blowing with fuch 
 iuconltancy, that they don*t 
 continue for the Space of one 
 Hour, without Calms ; and the 
 Ships of the fame Fleet, which 
 are all in Sight one of another, 
 have each of them their proper 
 Winds. On which Account fail- 
 ing is fo difficult in thefe Places, 
 that
 
 CHAP. 21. ofUniverfal Geography. 499 
 after they have ceafed half a Year, and others re- 
 turn in a Month's time : and fome blow once a 
 
 Day. 
 
 that fometimes Ships with great 
 difficulty fail thefe fix Degrees 
 in whole Months. 
 
 From the three foregoing 
 Obfervations two things may 
 be explained, which Mariners 
 experience in failing betwixt 
 Europe and India, or Gui- 
 nea. 
 
 In the firft Place, that tho' 
 this Sea, in that Part where 
 it is narroweft between Guinea 
 and Brajil, extends no lefs than 
 five hundred Leagues, yet with 
 great Difficulty Ships, fleer- 
 ing their Courfe fouthward, 
 pafs this Traft, efpecially in 
 the Months July and Auguft ; 
 which arifes hence, that during 
 thefe Months the South- Eail 
 Wind, blowing on the South 
 of the Equator, pafTes it's or- 
 dinary bounds four Degreees 
 North Latitude ; and further, 
 turns fo far South, that fome- 
 times 'tis carried ftrait from that 
 Point, fometimes alfo from the 
 intermediate Points betwixt it 
 and the Weft. When there- 
 fore the Courfe muft be fleer- 
 ed againft the Wind, if that 
 be towards the South Weft 
 Point, they have a Wind that 
 turns more and more to Eaft, 
 as they retire from the Conti- 
 nent of Africa; but the Dan- 
 ger is in paffing the Coaft of 
 Brafel, where Quickfands are 
 fo frequent, But if they go 
 towards South- Eaft, they muft 
 of neceffity come near the Coaft 
 of Guinea, from which they 
 can't otherwife retire, than by 
 
 failing towards the Eift as far 
 as St Thomas's Ifland. 
 
 2. What all Ships loofmg 
 from Guinea to Europe, necef- 
 farily do for the Reafon laid 
 down in our Sixth Obfervation. 
 For near the Shore blows the 
 South- Weft Wind, with which 
 they can neither fail, the land ly- 
 ing in the way, nor go fo againft 
 it, as to direct their Courfe north- 
 ward to Europe. They fail then 
 in a Courfe quite different from 
 that intended, viz. either South, 
 or to the Point next to South- 
 eaftward. Following this Courfa 
 they indeed retire from the 
 Shore, but have the Wind more 
 and more contrary, and are o- 
 bliged to fleer ftill more to the 
 Eaft, 'till they make the Ifland 
 of Si Thomas, and the Lopeftav 
 Cape ; wherefinding a Wind de- 
 clining from South to Eaft, fail 
 wefterly with it 'till they come 
 to the fourth Degree of South 
 Latitude, where they find a 
 South-eaft Wind blowing per- 
 petually. 
 
 On Account of thefe conftant 
 Winds, all Mariners who fail 
 to America, or Virginia, firft 
 fleer fouthward, that by the 
 Afliftance of this conftant Eaft- 
 Wind they may be carried 
 weftward. For the fame Rea- 
 fon, they who come from thofe 
 Countries for Europe, directing 
 their Courfe northward, endea- 
 vour, as foon as poffible, to 
 come at the thirtieth Degreee of 
 North Latitude. For here, firft, 
 thev find the Winds variable ; 
 
 K k * ycC
 
 500 7Vj<? Abfolute Part S E c T. VI . 
 
 Day. The fiated Winds are otherwife fubdivided, 
 viz, fome when they begin to blow, continue for 
 
 fome 
 
 yet more frequently blowing 
 from the South-Weft Points. 
 
 II. As in the Atlantic, fo in 
 the Indian Ocean, the Winds 
 are partly conftant, and partly 
 periodical; that is, they blow 
 for fix Months in one Point, 
 and the fix following in the 
 very oppofite Point. Both 
 the'e Points, and the Seafons 
 at which they turn to the 
 oppofite Sides, differ with the 
 Places. And tho' it be matter 
 of grear difficulty to obferve 
 how the Trafts of the Sea 
 may be defined when fub- 
 jel to each periodical Wind, 
 or Monfoons as they call 
 them : Yet having ufed clofe 
 Application, I don't fcruple 
 believing the following Par- 
 ticulars. 
 
 1. Betwixt ten and thir- 
 ty Degrees of South Latitude 
 thro* that Tract of Sea bound- 
 ed by St Laurence" 1 * Ifland and 
 New Holland, the South Eaft 
 Wind blows all the Year ; yet 
 fo as to be fomewhat nearer 
 the Eaft than South ; juft as a- 
 bout the fame Latitude in the 
 Atlantic Sea, we above Ihew'd 
 them to be. 
 
 2. That South-Eaft Wind 
 blows, from May to November ', 
 to the fecond Degree from the 
 Equator ; in which Month of 
 November, between the third 
 and tenth Degrees of South La- 
 titude, near that Meridian 
 which paffes thro' the northern 
 Part of St Laurence's Iflaad, 
 
 as alfo between the fecond and 
 twelfth Degree about Sumatra 
 and Java, arifes a Wind con- 
 trary to the former, viz. the 
 North- Weft, which reigns the 
 other fix Months ; viz. from 
 November to May. This Mo- 
 tion of V/inds is found to ex- 
 tend to the Molucca Iflands. 
 
 3. Northward from the third 
 Degree ofSouth Latitude, in all 
 the Arabian or Indian Sea, and 
 in the Bay of Bengal, from Su- 
 matra as far as the Shore ofA- 
 
 frica, isobferved a Motion dif- 
 fering from the former, breath- 
 ing from the North-Eaft Cli- 
 mates from QRober to April, 
 which for the next fix Months 
 rifes from the oppofite, or 
 South-Weft, Points. Then it 
 breathes more violently, and 
 brings Clouds and Rain ; but 
 upon the blowing of the North- 
 Eaft Wind the Heavens become 
 ferene. But it is to be obfer- 
 ved, that in the Bay of Ben- 
 gal the Winds keep neither 
 their Force nor their Points 
 with the fame Conflancy, as in 
 the Indian Sea. Alfo the South- 
 Weft Winds, near the African 
 Shore, decline more fouthward; 
 near India, more weftward. 
 
 4. On the South of the E- 
 qaator, thatTraft of Sea, which 
 lies between Africa and Lau- 
 rence Ifland, and which goes 
 as far as the Equator, feems 
 to appertain to the Motion of 
 Winds juft now laid down. For 
 in thefe Places the South-Weft 
 Wind blows from OQober to 
 
 Afrit,
 
 CHAP. 21. ofUnmerfal Geography. 501 
 fome Months, fbme for half a Year, fome for a 
 Month, and fome for a few Days. 
 
 AMONG 
 
 April, fomewhat nearer the 
 South ; but fuch as fail to the 
 North perceive it decline to- 
 wards the Weft, which at length 
 coincides with the periodical 
 South- Weft Wind, which they 
 fay blows at that Seafon of the 
 Year, from the North Side of 
 the Equator. But what Winds 
 daring the reft of the Year, 
 reign in that Sea, I cannot fuf- 
 ficiently determine : becaufe our 
 Sailors, in their return from 
 India, lleer their Courfe be- 
 yond the Ifland of St Lau- 
 rence. This only I could learn, 
 that the Wind for the moft 
 paft comes from the eaftern 
 Points, fometimes declining to 
 the North, and at other times 
 to the South. 
 
 ?. On the Eaft of Sumatra, 
 and North of the Equator, as 
 alfo on the Coafts of Camboia 
 and China, the periodical North- 
 Eait Winds come nearer to 
 North, as do the South- Weft 
 Winds to South. And this is ob- 
 ferved tohold'till you have gone 
 beyond the Philippine Iflands 
 on the Eaft, and as far as Ja- 
 pan towards the North. In the 
 Month Oftober, or November, a 
 northerly Gale arifes ; and in 
 May a foutherly, which con- 
 tinues from that time du- 
 ring the whole Summer. But 
 it is to be marked, that the 
 Points of the Winds are not fo 
 fteadily fixed in thefe Parts, as 
 they are in other Seas: fo that 
 fometimes the South Winds de- 
 cline a Point or two towards 
 
 the Eaft, a? the northern do 
 towards the Weft : which feems 
 to take it's rife from the Bulk 
 of the Lands, that are every 
 where interpofed in this Sea. 
 
 6. About the fame Longitude 
 on the South of the Equator, 
 viz. in the intermediate Space 
 between the Iflands Sumatra 
 and Java lying to the Weft, 
 and New Guinea to the Eaft, 
 nearly the fame periodical Winds 
 blow from the North or South; 
 but fo that the North Winds 
 incline to the Weft, and the 
 South to the Eaft. And thefe 
 blow with the fame inconftan- 
 cy and fhifcing of the Point, as 
 thbfe of the Quarter above- 
 mentioned; but the Motions 
 begin four or fix Weeks later ' 
 than in that Sea. 
 
 7. The Change of thefe Mo- 
 tions does not happen fuddenly, 
 or at once ; but in fome Places 
 there are Calms, and in others 
 changeable Winds. And often 
 on the Shore of Cormandel* 
 towards the end of the acciden- 
 tal Motion ; and the two laft 
 Months there arife furious Tern- 
 pefts in the Cbinefe Sea ; with 
 the periodical Wind at South. 
 All Navigation in neceflarily 
 regulated according to thefe 
 Winds; for if Sailors fhould de- 
 lay the Seafon 'till the contra- 
 ry Motion begins, they muft 
 either fail back, or go into 
 Harbour, and wait >r the re- 
 turn of the Trade-Wind. 
 
 Kk 3 
 
 III. The
 
 502 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 AMONG thefe the chief are thofe which Sailors 
 find to blow, for fome Months, in fome Parts of the 
 
 Sea; 
 
 III. The third, or Pacific 
 Ocean, ftretches nearly as far 
 as the two former taken toge- 
 ther ; viz. one hundred and fifty 
 Degrees, from the weftern Shore 
 of America to the Philippine 
 Ifles. But as this is failed by 
 very few befides the Spaniards, 
 from Spain to the Mani/hat, 
 and that only once a Year; 
 whilft they conftantly take the 
 fame Courfe; it remains in a 
 great Meafure unknown to us ; 
 and cannot therefore be defcri- 
 bed with the fame exaftnefs as 
 the reft. Thus much is certain ; 
 as well from the Observations 
 of the Spaniards , as others, that 
 the Winds which blow here 
 have a great affinity with thofe 
 in the Atlantic ; for the North- 
 Eaft blows to the North cf the 
 Equator, and the South- Weft 
 to the North of the fame, with 
 fuch a Strength and Conflancy, 
 that the vaft extent of this O- 
 cean may be failed in about ten 
 Weeks, without fhifting the 
 Sails. Here alfo are no Tem- 
 J>efts, fo that failing is no where 
 fo commodious, as neither Wind 
 is wanted, nor it's Violence to 
 be feared. Whence fome ima- 
 gine, that it is as (hort a Voyage 
 thro' the Streights of Magellan 
 to China or Japan, as by 
 doubling the Cape of Good- 
 Hope. 
 
 Thefe Trade- Winds extend 
 not to above thirty Degrees of 
 Latitude on both Sides of the 
 Equator, as in the Atlantic O- 
 cean. This appears in part from 
 
 the Courfe obferved by the Spa- 
 niards returning from the Ma- 
 mlhas to New Spain ; for by 
 mejns of the fouthern Wind, 
 which blows in thefe Iflands 
 during the Summer Months, 
 they fail to the South up to 
 the Latitude of Japan ; where 
 they firft meet with various 
 Winds that will carry them to 
 the Eaft. And in part again, 
 from the O'ofervations otSchoo- 
 ten and others, who failing to 
 India thro' the Streights of 
 Magellan, found almoft the 
 fame Diftance of the Winds 
 on the South of the Equator. 
 And in this alfo the Winds of 
 the Pacific agree with thofe 
 of the Atlantic Ocean; that 
 near the Coaft of Peru they 
 approach to the South, as on 
 the Coait of Angola. 
 
 That the Reader may form 
 the better Notion, we mall 
 add a Figure (Tee Fig. 30 .) re- 
 prefenting to the Eye all the 
 Quarters and Points of all 
 the Winds. The Limits of 
 each Tracl; are marked with 
 pricked Lines, as well in the 
 At Ian tic, whether they fepa- 
 rate the variable Winds from 
 the conftant, as in the Indian 
 Ocean, where they alfo feparate 
 the different Monfoons from one 
 another. The eafieft way of 
 marking the Quarters of the 
 Winds feemed to be by a Se- 
 ries oflittle /harp-headed Lines, 
 pointing alternately to the Parts 
 of the Horizon from whence 
 the Winds blow. But as the 
 Pacific 

 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Univerfal Geography. 503 
 Sea; and thefe (as alfo the times of their blow- 
 ing) are called Monfoons ; which are found chief- 
 
 iy 
 
 Pacific Ocean is fo extreamly 
 large, and yet in a great mea- 
 fure unknown to us ; I was un- 
 willing to exhibit the whole, 
 to prevent enlarging the Map 
 beyond a reafonable fize. 
 
 There arifes, from the Pre- 
 mifes, various Queftions worthy 
 the Confideration of Philofo- 
 phers: the principal are thefe. 
 i . Why does the Wind in the 
 Atlantic and Pacific Ocean, 
 continually blow from the Eaft 
 within thirty Degrees on both 
 Sides the Equator ? 2. Why is 
 not the like conftant Wind 
 found beyond thefe Limits ? 
 3. Why is theWeaWind found 
 perpetual near theCoaft of Gui- 
 nea ? 4. Why, in the northern 
 Part of the Indian Ocean, do 
 the Winds for fix Months con- 
 fpire with the aforefaid Winds; 
 and for the other fix, blow 
 from the oppofite Point; whilft 
 that part of the fame Ocean 
 which lies on the South Side 
 of the Equator, has no other 
 Winds but what are found in 
 other Seas ? 5. Why do the 
 conftant Winds on the North 
 Side of the Equator incline to 
 the North ; and on the South 
 Side to the South ; 6. Why 
 in the Cbinefe Sea, chiefly, is 
 there fo remarkable an Inclina- 
 tion of the Winds to the North ? 
 
 For the folving of thefe Pro- 
 blems, I offer the following 
 Particulars to the Confideration 
 of the Learned. 
 
 Wind is properly defined a 
 Current, or Motion of the Air, 
 
 which if conftant, or perpetual, 
 muft have a permanent or con- 
 ftant Caufe. Some imagine 
 this Caufe to be the annual 
 Revolution of the Earth about 
 it's own Axis. This might 
 perhaps be allowed, if almoil 
 continual Calms were not found 
 in the Atlantic Ocean near the 
 Equator ; and alfo Weft Winds 
 upon the Coaft of Guinea, and 
 wefternTrade-Winds in the In- 
 dian Ocean, under the Equator. 
 Befides, the Air being a ponde- 
 rous or gravitating Body, it will 
 acquire the fame Velocity as 
 the Earth ; and as it rolls along 
 therewith in the annual Moti- 
 on, it will feem more to do it 
 in the diurnal; which is not 
 above a thirtieth fo fwift as the 
 other. So that fome other 
 Caufe muft be fought for. 
 
 The true Caufe we judge to 
 be the Sun continually permeat- 
 ing the Ocean; with the Ad- 
 dition of the Nature of the Soil 
 and adjacent Country. 
 
 For by the known Laws of 
 of Hydroftatics, that part of the 
 Air which is moft rarified by 
 Heat, is the lighted ; and con- 
 fequently the others tend to- 
 wards it, 'till an esqillbrium be 
 obtained. But as the Sun con- 
 tinually moves towards the 
 Weft; it is manifeft that the 
 Air, moft heated by it's direct 
 Rays, muft thus move the fame 
 way; and therefore the whole 
 Mafs of the lower Air. By 
 this Means there is produced 
 a general Eaft Wind, which 
 
 Kk 4 putting
 
 504 fbc Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 ly in the Indian Ocean, from Africa to the Phi- 
 lippine Ifles j tho* in other Places they are not quite 
 
 without 
 
 putting all the Parts of the 
 Air, retting upon thevaft Ocean 
 into Motion, they all keep 
 their own Motion 'till the Sun 
 returns ; whence the Eaft Wind 
 becomes perpetual. 
 
 And hence it follows, that 
 the Wind on the North or 
 South Side of the Equator, 
 ought to incline towards the 
 North or South. For as the 
 Air near the Equator receives 
 the Sun's Rays perpendicularly, 
 twice every Year, and never 
 rnore inclined than thirty De- 
 grees, it muft of courfe be 
 greatly mified by fo great a 
 Heat. Near the Tropics alfo 
 the Syn is vertical, for a confide- 
 rable Time ; but as it is diftant 
 therefrom forty-feven Degrees 
 for no lefs a time ; the Air 
 hence becomes fo cold that it 
 cannot afterwards be brought 
 to the fame Degree of Heat, 
 which it receives under the 
 Line. Whence the Air, being 
 lefs rarified on both Sides the 
 Equator, flows to the middle. 
 And this Motion being com- 
 pounded with the Eaft Wind 
 abovementioned, explains all 
 the Phenomena of the general 
 Winds; which, if the Surface 
 of the Earth was every where 
 Covered with Sea, would blovv 
 with the fame conftancy they 
 do in the Atlantic and Etbio- 
 fie Oceans. 
 
 But as the Ocean is interr 
 rupted with fuch large Trafts 
 of Land, regard muft be had to 
 the Nature of the Soil, and the 
 
 Pofition of high Mountains ; to 
 which two Caufes the Changes 
 of the Wind feem principally 
 affignable. For when a Coun- 
 try lying near the Equator is 
 low and fandy, the Heat of 
 the Sun, reflecled by the Sand 
 is fo great as to be almoft in- 
 credible. And thus the Air of 
 this Place being highly rari- 
 fied; the denfer Parts of the 
 Air will neceflarily move thi- 
 ther to reftore t\\c ^Equilibrium. 
 Whence I judge, that near the 
 Coaft of Guinea the Wind con- 
 ftantly blows to the Land ; as 
 it is exceeding probable that 
 the inner Parts of Africa are 
 violently heated : fince even 
 the moft northern Parts thereof, 
 by reafon of their Heat, made 
 the Antients believe all the Parts 
 beyond the Tropics uninhabi- 
 table. 
 
 And hence we may explain 
 thofe frequent Calms; mention- 
 ed above in our fixth Obfervar 
 tion. For as that Part ofth? 
 Atlantic lies betwixt the Weft 
 Winds perceived near Guinea^ 
 and the conftant Eaft WincJ 
 that blows in the Parts fome- 
 what more to the Weft, the 
 Air lying thereon giving way 
 to neither of thefe contrary 
 Winds, keeps it's Place, and 
 makes a Calm. And the Air 
 not able to fupport the Vapours 
 here plentifully raifed by the 
 Heat, as being more light and 
 rarified; the oppofite Winds 
 frequently caufe the Rains tq 
 fall heavy. 
 
 And
 
 C H AP. 2 1 . of Umverfal Geography. 505 
 without them ; the obferving of thofe times is ve- 
 ry material, when Sailors go to the fame Point, 
 
 or 
 
 above mentioned of the inner 
 Parts of Africa-, but when the 
 Sun declines to the South they 
 enjoy a temperate Air. But 
 this is owing to the long Ridges 
 of Mountains whofe Tops be- 
 ing generally covered with 
 Snow in the Winter; this great- 
 ly cools the Air. For this Rea- 
 fon the general North-Eaft 
 Wind blowing in the Indian 
 Sea is at one time of the Year 
 hotter, and at another colder 
 than the Wind carried circularly 
 from the South- Weft ; which is 
 the hotteft of thefe contrary 
 Winds ; when it blows thro' the 
 upper Region of the Air; it 
 follows that the under Courfe of 
 the Air one while moves from 
 the North-Eaft, another from 
 the South- Weft; from the later 
 in the Summer, and from the 
 former in Winter ; as we ob- 
 ferved in explaining the Phae- 
 nomena of the Trade- Winds. 
 
 From the fame Caufe it feems 
 to proceed, that the North- 
 Weft Wind fucceeds the South- 
 Eaft in a certain Tracl of the 
 Indian Ocean, lying without 
 the Equinoctial, at the time 
 that the Sun approaches the 
 Tropic of Capricorn' 
 
 But here we muft not con- 
 ceal, that there is a great dif- 
 ficulty in explaining the 
 Reafon why in the fame Lati- 
 tude of the Indian Ocean thefe 
 Winds are found, there is a per- 
 petual Eaft Wind in the At- 
 lantic without any Variation 
 at all. 
 
 Jt 
 
 And hence it appears, that 
 the Part of the Air rarified by 
 Heat, being conftantly compref- 
 fcd on all Sides by the colder 
 and denfer Air, that furrounds 
 it, muft be continually driven 
 upwards, as it were like a Va- 
 pour, and be there every way 
 equally difperfed to maintain 
 the ^Equilibrium', fo that the 
 upper Courfe or Motion of the 
 Air (hall be contrary the under. 
 And thus, as it were by a cir- 
 cular Motion, the conftant 
 Winds that blow near the. Earth, 
 produce another Wind that 
 blows a contrary way in the 
 upper Regions of the Air. And 
 this Conjecture is alfo in part 
 confirmed by Experience. For 
 when Sailors are got beyond 
 the Limits of the Trade- Winds, 
 they immediady find a Wind 
 blowing from the oppofite Quar- 
 ter. And hence alfo we may 
 eafily explain the Phenomena 
 of periodical Winds, or the re- 
 turn of the Monfoons ; which 
 as it fcarce admits of any other 
 Solution, fo it confiderably con- 
 firms our Hypothefis of the cir- 
 cular Motion of the Air. 
 
 For fuppofing this circularMo- 
 tion of the Winds, we muft ob- 
 ferve that the northern part of 
 the Indian Ocean is every where 
 interfperfed with Land, running 
 oat within the Limits of the 
 periodical Winds, viz. Arabia, 
 Perfia, India, &c. which Coun- 
 tries at the time the Sun is in 
 the northern Signs of the Eclip- 
 tic, fuffers the fame fcleat we
 
 506 Vbe Absolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 or one collateral to the Point they blow to j nor 
 can they return 'till thofe Winds blow the con- 
 trary way, which in a certain time they will do 
 and continue to blow fo long the other way. Tho' 
 they do not immediately begin to blow the other 
 way, when they have done blowing the former 
 way ; but after fome Days more, or lefs, in which 
 die .Winds are unfettled ; and the Sailors fometimes 
 furprized with Calms ; and the Sea- Waves move fe- 
 veral Ways -, yea and frequent Storms arife. Some 
 of the Monfoons return twice in a Year, but not with 
 the fame Vehemence. 
 
 i . I N that part of the Atlantic Ocean which lies 
 in the Torrid Zone y and that alfo in the Temperate, 
 the North Wind blows frequently in the Month 
 of Oftober, November^ and January ; and thefe 
 Months are the beft times to go from Europe to 
 India* that they may get beyond the Equator with 
 the help of them ; for it hath been found, that 
 fome Ships that had gone from Europe in March 
 have not come fooner to Brafil than thofe that 
 left it in Offober ; coming both to it in the Month 
 of February ; being helped by the North Winds. 
 But becaufe this Wind is not fo conftant and 
 certain, Seamen do not reckon it among the Mon- 
 foons. Nor is it eafy to give the caufe of that Wind 
 in thefe Months; except we refer them to the 
 great quantity of thick Vapours at that time, or the 
 conftant preffure then made by the heavy Clouds. 
 And they that wintered in Nova ZemUa fay, there 
 was a conftant North Wind all the Winter ; which 
 could not be by a Rarefaction of the Air made by 
 the Sun, which was under the Horizon. Yet we 
 
 It is alfo very difficult to ex- only in the northern part of 
 
 plain why the Limits of the con- the Indian Ocean ; whilft in the 
 
 Rant Winds fcarce reach beyond South part the North - Eaft 
 
 thirty Degrees of Latitude; as Wind perpetually reigns, 
 alfo why Monfoons are found
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Univerfal Geography. 507 
 think it may be maintained in the genera], that 
 moft of thefe Monfoom come from the melting of 
 the Snow, or the diflblution of the Clouds in the 
 North and South Places, efpecially the Mountains 
 which I am apt to believe, becaufe thefe Monfoons 
 blow, for the moft part, from the North or South, 
 or the Points collateral ; and becaufe the Snow and 
 Clouds in the northern Parts are diffolved by the 
 Sun ; efpecially in that half Year it goes thro* the 
 North part of the Ecliptic, the Monfoons are then 
 from the North, and in the other half from the 
 South. 
 
 THE Caufe of thefe Monfoons in the Sea, blow- 
 ing moftly from collateral Points, as South-Eaft, 
 North-Eaft, or thofe next them, feems to be from 
 the different Situation of the Places in which the 
 Snow and thick Clouds are -, or from the general 
 Wind which may divert them to another Point : 
 for that Wind blowing to the Weft, and the Mon- 
 foons tending North and South, they muft hinder 
 one another ; and thus go in a Point between the 
 Cardinals. But the South- Weft and North- Weft 
 Monfoons are rare and weak, and are fcarce to be 
 reckoned Monfoons ,when the North and South Winds 
 feem fometimes by accident to decline to the 
 Weft, but are drawn to the Eaft by the general 
 Winds. There are required for giving the Caufes 
 of the great variety of the Monfoons in different 
 Places, more accurate Obfervations, not of one 
 Year only, but of feveral Years ; with the Times of 
 the Winter, Rains, Snows, and of the Mountains in 
 thofe Places from which the ftated Winds blow. We 
 ftiould alfo know the Motion and Age of the Moon ; 
 which may caufe a Change in this Matter. 
 
 2. IN the Month of Jul^ and fome Months 
 near it, the South Winds blow at Cape Verd in 
 Africa (when there is a Winter of Rain there) which 
 
 feems
 
 The Abfolute Part S E e T. VI. 
 feems to be from the fame Caufe that makes the 
 North Winds blow in Winter, in our Zone. 
 
 3. A T the Cape of Good- Hope the North-Baft 
 "Wind blows in September. 
 
 4. AT Patanen (which is a Kingdom and a 
 Town of the fame Name in India, beyond the 
 Mountains of the Gate] there are conftant Rains, 
 and a North- Eaft Wind that blows , but in the 
 other Months an Eaft Wind blows thro', and 'tis 
 Summer then. 
 
 5. ABOUT Sumatra the Change of the ' Mon- 
 Jbans is in November and December. 
 
 6. I N the Ifland of del Mayo, one of die fait 
 Ifies in the Azores, there blows a vehement Wind 
 in the end of Auguft from the South, with much 
 Rain, which moiftens the Land, that is naturally 
 dry, and then the Grafs begins to fpring up ; 
 which fattens a great many Goats there, againft 
 the end of December. 
 
 7. I N the Kingdom of Congo in Africa, from 
 the middle of March to September ; when the Win- 
 ter reigns there, the North, Weft, and North- Weft 
 Winds blow, or others intermediate, which force 
 the Clouds together on the Tops of the Moun- 
 tains, and caufe a dark Air with Rain (fee the 
 next Propofition) : but from September to March 
 the Winds are contrary, being South, Eaft, and 
 South-Eaft, and others intermediate. We have 
 taken thefe differences of the annivsrfary andftated 
 Winds from the Obfervations of Sailors, who call 
 them Monfoom when they blow for a great way 
 on the Sea. We would now treat of their Caufes ; 
 but we want to know the Mountains, Snows, and 
 the Times of their dhTolving, and other things ; nor 
 are the Obfervations of Sailors fo exat as to de* 
 ierve an accurate Enquiry into their Caufes. 
 
 THE Monfoons that are moft famous are ; i . 
 Thofe in the Indian Ocean, between Africa and 
 
 India
 
 CHAP. 21. ofUmverfal Geography. 509 
 India , and at the Molucca Ifles they begin in Ja- 
 nuary, and blow to the Weft fix Months to the 
 beginning of June-, and in September and Auguft 
 it begins to blow to the Eaft ; and in June, July, 
 and Auguft, there is a Change of the Monfoom and 
 raging Storms from the North. But when we 
 fpeak of Winds blowing to the Eaft or Weft, we 
 underftand alfo the collateral Points. 
 
 2. B UT at the Shores, the eaftern Monfoon va- 
 ries much j fo that only from January to the end 
 of March or the middle of May, the Ships that 
 go to Perfia, Arabia, Mecha, and Africa, only 
 fail when they come from India on this Side the 
 Gate, or the Shore of Malabar \ for the Storms 
 rage in the end of May, and all June, July, and 
 Augufl, with a North Wind often, or a raging 
 North- Eaft Wind , therefore no Ships go from 
 India on this Side the Gate in thefe Months. But 
 on the Shore of India, beyond the Gate, or the 
 Eaft Shore, or the Shore of Cormandel, they know 
 nothing of thefe Storms. They fail in the Month 
 of September from Ceylon and Java, and other 
 Ifles there to the Molucca Ifles -, for then the Weft 
 Monfoom begin, that hinder the general Eaft Wind : 
 but when they come to the fifteenth Degree of 
 South Latitude, from the Equator, the weftern 
 Monfoon is fenfible in the Indian Ocean, and a 
 general South-Eaft Wind fills the Sails. 
 
 3 . F R O M Cochin to Malacca, i. e. from Weft to 
 Eaft, they begin to fail in March ; for then the 
 Weft Monfoom begin there, or rather the North- 
 Weft Wind blows often. 
 
 4. I N the Kingdom of Guzarat, i. e, in India, 
 on this Side of the Gate, the North- Weft Winds 
 blow the half of the Year from March to Sep- 
 tember, and the other half Year the South Winds 
 and that without much hindrance by other Winds. 
 
 5. THE
 
 510 The Abfolute Part SECT. VI, 
 
 5. T H E Dutch fail from Java, for the moft 
 Part, in the Months of January and February, when 
 they return to Europe -, they fail then with an Eaft 
 Wind to the eighteenth Degree of South Latitude. 
 Here the South Wind begins, or the South-Eaft 
 with which they fail to St Helena. 
 
 6. T H O* in the Indian Ocean, from January 
 to June, the Monfoom are Eaft, and from Auguft 
 to January Weft ; yet, in feveral Parts, when you 
 are to fail from one Place to another, there are 
 fome fet times that are counted beft ; becaufe the 
 collateral Winds blow more or lefs at thofe times 
 or other Winds do more or lefs mix themfelves 
 with thefe. Therefore they take one Monfoon 
 when they are to fail from Cochin to Malacca ; and 
 another when they are to go from Malacca to 
 Maccou, a Port-Town in China ; and another when 
 from Maccou to Japan. 
 
 7. AT the Ifle of Banda the weftern Winds 
 ceafe at the end of March ; and at the end of 
 April the Winds are variable, and become calm 
 on a fudden ; and in May the vehement Eaft 
 Winds begin, with Rain. 
 
 8. AT the Ifle of Ceylon, near the Cape of Ponto- 
 Gallo, on the fourteenth of March there is firft a 
 weftern Wind, then a conftant South- Weft from 
 the end of March to the firft 'ofOftober ; then the 
 North-Eaft Wind begins, and blows to the middle 
 of March : but fometimes the Monfoons come 
 fooner or later by ten Days or more. 
 
 I N the Voyage from Mazambique, in Africa, to 
 Goa, in India, the South Winds rule all the way 
 to the Equator, in the Month of May and June 
 but from the Equator to Goa the South and South- 
 Weft Winds prevail in the Months of July and 
 Auguft, and the following Months. 
 
 10. IN the thirty fifth Degree of the Eleva- 
 tion of the Meridian that paifes thro, Trijlan ds
 
 CH A P. 2 1 . of Unherfal Geography. 511 
 Conha, the Weft Wind rages in the Month of 
 May, at New-Moon. 
 
 1 1 . I N two Degrees thirty Minutes North La- 
 titude, the South Wind prevails on the Sea feventy 
 Miles from Guinea, from the twenty fifth of April 
 to the fifth of May (but not on the Shore, or 
 Guinea itfelf) ; and after the fifth of May the fame 
 Wind is felt at three, and three Degrees and thir- 
 ty Minutes Latitude. 
 
 12. AT the Ifle of Madagafcar the North and 
 North- Weft Winds prevail from the fifteenth of 
 April to the laft of May ; but in February and 
 March the Winds blow from Eaft and South. 
 
 13. FROM Madagafcar to the Cape of Good- 
 Hope^ both thro* Sea and Land, the North Wind 
 and the Collateral to the Eaft, blow continually 
 in the Months of March and April -, fo that 'tis 
 counted a wonder if a South or South-Eaft Wind 
 mould blow then for two Days. 
 
 14. THE South Wind is vehement in the 
 Bay of Bengal after the twentieth of April ; and 
 after that the South- Weft and North Winds are 
 ftrong. 
 
 15. THE South and South-Weft Winds, and 
 oftentimes the South-Eaft, ferve for failing from 
 Malacca to Maccou, in the Months of July* 
 Offober, November, and December -, but in June, and 
 the beginning of July the Weft Winds rage about 
 Malacca in die Sea of China. 
 
 1 6. THE Wind by which they fail from Java, 
 to China, i. e. from Weft to Eaft, begins with the 
 Month of May. 
 
 17. T HE Wind by which they fail from China 
 to Japan, i. e. from Weft to Eaft, prevails in the 
 Months of June and July ; which is a South -Weft 
 Wind; tho* oftentimes there comes in a North 
 Wind, and others collateral to it eaftward ; and 
 that chiefly in the Day- time : but in the Night 
 
 i there
 
 512 tte Abfolute Part SECT. VI 
 
 there comes in a South-Eaft Wind, and South 
 by Eaft. 
 
 1 8. B U T when they fail from Japan to Maccou, 
 i. e. from Eaft to Weft, in February and March, 
 there is an Eaft and North-EaftWind i but thefe do 
 not prevail on the Sea, but at the Shores of China j 
 which they that fail from Japan find in theirVoyage. 
 
 19. WHE N they fail from the Philippines , or 
 China, to Aquapulco, a Port in New Spain, there is a 
 Weft Wind in June, July, and Augujl ; tho' very 
 weak, except at Full Moon ; but they are moftly 
 South- Weft Winds. But they keep from the Torrid 
 Zone near the northern Shores of America to fhun 
 the general Eaft Wind, tho' 'tis but weak then ; 
 for 'tis to be known in general, that the weftern 
 Winds are more weak than the eaftern, becaufe 
 the former are hindered, and the later promo- 
 ted by the general Wind. 
 
 20. IN the Sea of China the South and South- 
 Weft Monjbon is in July, Auguft, and Ottober ; but 
 thefe Winds turn to the Eaft : for they never turn 
 immediately to the South, but firft they blow fome 
 Days to the Eaft, and then to the South ; tho* 
 the North-Eaft Wind is fometimes changed, on 
 a fudden, to the South- Weft, and fometimes from 
 the North to the South immediately; which is ve- 
 ry common here. 
 
 T H U S the more conftant anniverfary Winds 
 are found at Sea ; both thofe that are lefs conftant, 
 and thofe alfo that are anniverfary, as well on the 
 Shores as Places near the Shores. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The Etefian or anniverfary Winds in Greece, proceed 
 from the Rains and Snows melted on the Mountains. 
 
 THE Grecians obferved two Kinds of ftated 
 Winds each Year, which they called Etefus ; i . The 
 
 Summer,
 
 C tt A P. 2 1. of Umver/al Geography. 513 
 Bummer, or Dog-winds, which were called Etefies 
 in general ; becaufe they were more ftrong and fen- 
 fible. 2. The Winter-Winds, which they called Cbe- 
 lidonian or Ornithian. 
 
 THE Etefian Dog-winds are from the North. 
 Writers differ about the time of their begin- 
 ning. Ariflotle, having told us they blow af- 
 ter the Summer Solitice, adds nothing of the 
 exa<5t time ; which was a great negledr. : and the 
 more becaufe when he fpoke of the Ornithic? he 
 omitted both the time and the part they came 
 from. Moreover, they who have marked the time 
 of thefe Etefice, have made their forerunners, which 
 is about eight Days fooner, to begin when the 
 Dog-ftar rifeth, on the fixth or fifteenth of July 5 
 and to continue forty of the Dog-days, and fo end 
 with Auguft : tho* others extend them to the middle 
 of September. They blow only in the Day-time : nor 
 do they come early in the Morning ; which made 
 the Seamen call them delicate and lazy. 
 
 THE Caufe of thefe Winds is no doubt the 
 melting of the Snow on the northern Mountains, by 
 the Heat of the Sun, which is then at the greateft ; 
 having for feveral Months fhone on thofe Moun- 
 tains, without fetting. And with this Caufe it a- 
 grees well that they ceafe at Night ; becaufe then 
 the melting ceafes, or is fmaller than to make aWind, 
 the Sun being then near or under the Horizon. 
 
 THIS fame northerly Dog-wind, not only in 
 Greece, but alfo in Thracia, Macedonia, the jEgean 
 Sea, and it's Ifles, (which I know are fometimes 
 all included in the Name of Grecee] yea in Egypt 
 alfo, and Africa, and probably the fame that we 
 faid in the former Proportion, did blow in the 
 Kingdom of Congo, beyond the Equator, between 
 March and September ; we fay this fame Dog-wind, 
 &c. are the fame with the Etefia of the Grecians, 
 or come from the fame Caufe. And likewife that 
 
 VOL. I, U North
 
 5 14 fbe Abfolute Part SECT. VI. 
 
 North Wind which we faid blows in the Kingdom 
 of Guzarat, from March to September, proceeds from 
 the melted Snow on the Mountains of Afia ; which 
 they called the Sarmatian Mountains, and the 
 Earth's Belt ; and therefore we reckoned it among 
 the Monfoons. 
 
 THE fecond anniverfary "Wind of the Grecians, 
 is the Chelidonian, or the Bird's Wind ; which they 
 tell us began after the Winter : but they do not 
 tell us the Day when it began. Thefe are South 
 "Winds--.-, contrary to the Dog-winds, very weak, 
 and likewiie inconflant, and of lefs Duration -, 
 which makes the Sea pleafant, and fignifies the 
 coming of the Winter Birds, which they call 
 Chelidom. Arifiotle fays they blow by turns to the 
 middle of Summer, 'till the eafterly Winds, or 
 Dog-winds, from the North, begin, but very weakly. 
 
 THEIR Caufe is alfo the melting of the 
 Snow on the Mountains of the Moon in Mono- 
 motapa, which are called fnowy by the Portuguefe : 
 which Snow the Sun melts and ratifies the Air 
 thereby ; becaufe 'tis Summer there, when 'tis Win- 
 ter with us and in Greece ; the Sun then being in the 
 South part of the Ecliptic. And this Wind is alfo 
 found in the Kingdom of Congo, in Egypt, and 
 in the Mgean Sea ; and the like in Guzarat, but 
 for many more Months : for it begins in Congo 
 and Guzarat in September, and blows 'till March. 
 
 I T was the yearly Wind among the Grecians ; 
 which they called Ornithias, or the Bird-Wind ; and 
 they faid it continued after the vernal Equinox, 
 -while the Sun was mounting to our Zenith. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Why thefe Etefian Winds do not blow in Italy, Ger- 
 many, Pruflia, and other Kingdoms, fince they are 
 rearer the Mountains in the North, from which the 
 Etefian Win ds of the Grecians blow, as we faid. 
 i THIS
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Unherfal Geography. 5 1 5 
 THIS Queftion hath no fmall difficulty in it -, 
 and I could wifh to have more accurate Obferva- 
 tions on this Head, to determine what Winds then 
 blow in the feveral Places ; or if they return again 
 each Year ; for I remember to have read, that in 
 Aquitania, a part of France, there is an anniverla- 
 ry Wind. 
 
 BUT if any thing be faid to this Queftion, thefe 
 Particulars feem proper ; i . In our Dog-Days the 
 North Wind blows, which cannot be denied. 2 . 'Tia 
 not fo conftant, nor doth it return every Year ; per- 
 haps it may not be felt, becaufe of the frequent blow- 
 ings of other Winds. 3 . It might be faid i the Moun- 
 tain whereon the Snow begins firft to melt, is fituated 
 directly towards Greece ; and therefore the firft Dog- 
 Wind is carried thither ; and the Vapours from the 
 Snow on the reft of the Mountain is carried thither ; 
 becaufe they then find an open Pafiage that way : 
 but thefe extemporary Thoughts I mail lay afide, fo 
 foon as I find better from better Obfervations. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Some Winds are proper r , and almoft perpetual, to fome 
 Place or Traft of the Earth, others inconftant. 
 
 THERE are few Places where a Wind blows 
 always ; the principal are thefe : viz. i . Places un- 
 der the Torrid Zone, efpecially the Parts of the Pa- 
 cific and Ethiopic Sea in that Zone have a perpetual 
 Wind from the Eaft, or fome collateral Point, which 
 we called, Prop. 1 1 , a general Wind. And this 
 Wind is not fo much to be termed proper as com- 
 mon, or belonging to many Places ; for 'tis by ac- 
 cident that 'tis not felt in all Places ; viz. becaufe 
 other Winds blow more ftrongly. The Caufe of 
 it is given in the forecited Place. 
 
 2. O N the Shores of the Kingdom of Peru and 
 
 Parts of Chili, and the adjacent Places on the Sea, 
 
 L 1 2 the
 
 5 1 6 The Abfolute Pan S E c T. VL 
 
 r he Wind is almoft perpetually South, or in fome 
 collateral Point to the Weft. It begins at the forty 
 fixth Degree of Latitude, and blows to Panama at 
 the American Ifthmus, and makes the Ships (load-, 
 ed with Gold and Silver) come from Lima to Pa- 
 nama, in a few Days ; tho' it takes a great many 
 Days to return : but in Places remote from the 
 Sea this Wind doth not blow. 'Tis hard to give 
 the caufe of this Wind ; becaufe the South Land, 
 from which it feems to blow, is not yet known to 
 us i yet I fuppofe there are found therein Moun- 
 tains continually covered with Snow, from the 
 conftant meltings whereof thefe Winds blow. But 
 I would not here prepofiefs the Reader's Judg- 
 ment with my Conjectures. Perhaps the Snows 
 that are found at the Streights of Magellan, all the 
 Year, are the Cauie of this Wind. But yet thefe 
 Mountains lie from the South eaftward, and the 
 ^Vinds blow from a Point declining from the South 
 weft ward. Let us then leave this 'till we have a 
 better knowledge of the South Continent. 
 
 3 . AT the Shores of the Magellanic Land, or 
 del Fuogo, about the Streights of La Maire, there 
 blow almoft conftant Weft Winds ftrongly ; fo 
 that the Trees decline from a perpendicular to the 
 Eaft. Nor is there any Place where thefe Weft 
 Winds blow fo much. But on the other Side of the 
 Streights of La Maire, the South Wind blows on 
 the Shores of the South Land. I can give no other 
 rcafon for it than the melting of the Snow, and the 
 breaking of the Clouds in the South Land ; which 
 extends itfelf on the Weft Side of that Streight, 
 from South to North. Thefe Things are doubtful, 
 and to be more diligently enquired into. 
 ^.^ ON the Shore of Malabar, in India, the 
 North and North- Weft Wind blows almoft the 
 whole Year. The Caufe is the melting of the 
 Snow on the Mountains ofSarmatia, in Afia, as thofe 
 i of
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Univerfal Geography. 5 1 7 
 of Imam, Caucafus, or from the Clouds on other 
 Mountains in Afia that prefs the Air below. 
 
 5. ON the Sea, near Guinea, the North- Weft 
 Wind blows frequently ; but further off the North- 
 Eaft Wind blows. 
 
 6. HALF way between Japan and Liampo, 
 a Sea-Port Town in China, the Weft Winds blow 
 all the way to Japan, thefe blow there in November 
 and December. 
 
 7. AT the Ifland Guoton, not far from the 
 Ifland dos Cavallos, the South Wind is frequent 
 on the Cbinefe Sea ; whilft on the adjacent Seas the 
 North Wind rages. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 'Tbofe Winds that How for fame Hours every Day, in 
 fome Places, at a certain Time of the Tear, belong 
 to the periodical or flat ed Winds. 
 
 THEY are found to be twofold , but only in 
 fome Places near the Sea. Some blow from the in- 
 land Parts to the Sea \ others again from the Sea to 
 the Land : the former is called a Land-Wind, the 
 latter a Sea- Wind. 
 
 i . O N the Malabar Shore in the Summer-time, 
 from September to April, the Land- Winds blow 
 from twelve at Night to twelve at Noon, which 
 are Eaft Winds , nor are they fenfible beyond ten 
 Miles on the Sea ; and from twelve at Day to twelve 
 at Night the Sea- Wind blows from the Weft, but 
 fo weakly that Ships have little Benefit from it. 
 The former Eaft W inds I fuppote come partly from 
 the general Wind, and partly from the Clouds on 
 the Mountains of the Gate : but the Caufe of the 
 latter is the diflblving of the Clouds by the weftern 
 Sun , which Clouds were forced together by the 
 Eaft Winds. Thefe are my Conjectures ; but in 
 other Months the North Wind rages there, as alfo 
 LI 3 the
 
 5 1 8 The Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 the Eaft, North- Eaft , nor are the gentle Land 
 and Sea- Winds fenfible there, for the frequent 
 Storms. 
 
 2. AT the Town of Mafulipatan^ on the Shore 
 of Coromandel) the Land- Winds begin to blow 
 on the firft Day of June j they laft only fourteen 
 Days, and then it is the Ships go from thence. 
 But thefe are rather to be referred to the Mon- 
 foons i for fo far as I underftand from Sailors Ac- 
 counts, the Land Winds are conftant onthofe Days j 
 nor do the Sea-Winds come after them. 
 
 3. ON the American Shore of New-Spain the 
 Land- Winds blow to the Pacific Sea at twelve at 
 Night-, but the Sea-Winds in the Day. 
 
 4. I N the Kingdom oi'Congo, and the Provinces 
 of Lopo Confalvo^ the Land- Winds blow from the 
 Evening to the Morning, when the Sea- Winds 
 begin to blow and mitigate the Heat of the Day. 
 
 5. AS to the Eaft Winds which blow before and 
 at Sun-rifing, every Day, in all Places, efpecially 
 at Sea, when other Winds blow not, particularly 
 in Brafil where they blow every Day in the Morn- 
 ing i the Caufe is plain : for either they are a 
 Part of the general Wind, or elfe the Sun rarifies 
 the grofs Particles of the Air that were condenfed 
 by Night. 
 
 6. T H E Ettfian Winds of the Grecians, or 
 their Chelidonian Winds come among thefe Quo- 
 tidian Winds. 
 
 7. ON the Shore oiCambaya a Varella, at Pulo- 
 CattCy the Land and Sea Breezes fucceed one ano - 
 ther daily, from the twenty eighth of July to the 
 fourth of Auguft \ for then the Monfoons ceafe, 
 and there is a perfect Calm for a while. The 
 Land Breezes are from the Weft and North- Weft. 
 But the Sea Breezes are from the Eaft, and the 
 collateral Points which turn to the North ; and 
 then turn back to the South ; when 'tis calm 'till the 
 
 Land
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Univerfal Geography. 5 1 9 
 Land Breezes come, which are not felt on the Sea 
 above two Miles from the Shore. Thefe Land 
 and Sea Breezes are alfo found at Havanna in A- 
 merica. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 The nearer we come to the Equator from the 
 Pole, the northern Winds are the weaker -, and be- 
 yond the Equator the South Winds are ftrong, and 
 cold and dry, efpecially in Chili and Peru. 
 
 THE Caufe of both is the fame ; becaufe they 
 come from the northern and fouthern Places : yet 
 there are found South Winds in the northern, and 
 North Winds in the fouthern Parts. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 // appears from what hath been faid, that there are 
 four different kinds of Winds. 
 
 i . THE Common, which blow in all Places, 
 and all times -, except hindered by others, as the 
 General one. 
 
 2. THE proper, or fuch as blow at all times, but 
 only in a certain Place or Trad of the Earth. 
 
 3 . THOSE which blow in feveral Places, but not 
 at all Times, as the Monfoons, or Quotidian Winds. 
 
 4. THOSE which blow neither at all Times, nor 
 in very many Places. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 Some Winds are fudden, and ftrong, but do not laft 
 long', fuch are Hurricanes^ with, and without 
 Lightening ; Whirlwinds , Storms from the Water, 
 and from the Air. Tbefe are in fome Places anni- 
 verfary : and fome are only frequent in certain Places 
 at Sea. 
 
 THE Wind called Prefer; is a flrong Wind 
 
 that breaks out with Lightening and Flame. Such 
 
 L 1 4 fcldom
 
 520 We Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 feldom happen, and fcarce without the Ecnephia ; 
 Ssneca calls Prefter a Whirlwind with Lightening. 
 THE Ecnephia is a ftrong and fudden Wind 
 that breaks out from fome Cloud ; which is frequent 
 in the El bio fie Sea, between Brafil and South A- 
 frica , efpecially at the Cape of Good-Hope, and on 
 the other Side of Africa, at Terra de Natal, and 
 at Guinea, under the Equator. The Portuguefe 
 call them Bravados, the Latins Procella, but the Greek 
 Word Ecnephia is beft : they are moft frequent in 
 certain Places, and in certain Months of the Year. 
 A little Cloud, and fometimes feveral of them 
 black or blackifh, are plainly feen by Sailors to 
 go together, and increafe even in a clear Sky, be- 
 fore the Wind breaks out ; and when they firft fee 
 them, they mould gather in their Sails, and prepare 
 their Ship againft the raging Wind that is at hand : 
 but before the Portuguefe knew this Prognoftic of 
 Wind they loft feveral Ships, being the firft that had 
 failed the Ethiopic Ocean. For when India, was 
 made known by Gamma, the King of Portugal fent 
 a greater Fleet of Ships, of large Bottoms, to the 
 Number of thirteen, under Cafrali in the Year 
 1500; which was the firft Fleet fent to Brafil, 
 with great Joy to the Porluguefe. 
 
 WHEN they had waited there the Month of 
 A^il, they filled in May towards the Cape of 
 Good-Hope, with raging Storms -, and tho* they faw 
 the Signs thereof, yet they knew not the Tempeft 
 that was to follow , which Majfeus thus defcribes. 
 'THEY made a long Run of almoft two 
 hundred Leagues from Brazil towards the Cape 
 (which is about one thoufand German Miles) the 
 Ocean and Winds all the while raging. Having 
 entered that Voyage in Ajfay, with more Bold- 
 nefs than Succefs, a fiery Comet appeared con- 
 tinually to the tenth Day, with a fearful Afpeft ; 
 and the Sea anu Htavens often changing ; the 
 
 black
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Univerfal Geography. 521 
 
 * black and foul Clouds having gathered toge- 
 ther in the ^North into a round Form, and the 
 
 ' Wind feeming to come all againft them as it were 
 by Reflexion : the Sea being faint in deceitful 
 ' Calms. The Sailors not knowing the Tempefts 
 that nied to rage there, fpread their Sails to ga- 
 ' ther the Wind ; when on a fudden the Wind 
 
 * broke out from the Clouds in the North on four 
 
 * Ships whofe Tackling was not in order to be 
 4 handed, arid overfet them in a Moment; 
 6 and tho* the reft were looking on, yet not one 
 c of a great many could be faved from death, 
 except a few that had Oars or broken Pieces 
 ' of Sails thrown to them. The North Wind 
 c continuing, the Sea rofe fometimes high as it 
 ' were to the Stars ; and again fell low to the Bot- 
 
 * torn ; the Sea looked black in the Day-time, 
 
 * and fiery in the Night, which Storm held them 
 
 * twenty Days.' So far Maffeus. 
 
 THE Cape of Good-Hope is difaftrous for fuch 
 Storms from the Clouds. 
 
 NOT far from the Shore there is a high 
 Mountain, broad on the Top like a Table, from 
 which great Storms often proceed ; and this prog- 
 nofticates ftrangely. For when the Sky is clear, 
 and the Sea fmooth, there is a little Cloud feen on 
 the Top of the Hill, which appears at firft no 
 larger than a Hazel Nut, and then like a Walnut 
 which the Dutch call the Ox-eje ; and then covers 
 the whole Plain above, and the Dutch compare 
 it to a Table fpread with all kinds of Meat on 
 it : then the Storms begin to blow from the Top 
 of the Mountain with fuch Force that overwhelms 
 all Ships that are not on their Guard, or have 
 their Sails out ; but Sailors are now more wary, 
 and when they fee the Ox-eye, they run immedi- 
 ately from the Shore as much as they can, and ga- 
 ther in their Sails, and do what is proper to de- 
 fend
 
 522 Tie Abfolute Part S E c T . VL 
 
 fend their Ships : nor does this Sign ever fail. 
 The like Storm rages at Terra de Natal, having 
 the Ox-eye there alfo ; and by it feveral Ships have 
 been loft ; and likewife in the whole Tract between 
 that and the Cape of Good- Hope. There is alfo 
 in Dauphine in France, not far from Vienne, a high 
 Mountain, on whofe Top there is a Lake, from 
 which all the Storms thereabouts arife ; on the 
 Top of it there is a little Cloud or Exhalation, 
 which portends Thunder and Rain. 
 
 O N the Sea under the Equator, between Ame- 
 rica and Africa, and near the Equator ; there are 
 frequently fuch Storms ; efpecially in thofe Months 
 in which there are few or no conftant Winds blow- 
 ing ; and that almoft thro' the whole Year, efpe- 
 cially in April, May, and June, (in other Months 
 'tis more rare) and they are very remarkable on 
 the Shores of Guinea. They break forth three or four 
 times in a Day, and ceafe on a fudden, varying ordi- 
 narily every half Hour , but they are moil vehement 
 at firft. They break out from the black and filthy 
 Clouds that appear when the Sky is clear and the Sea 
 calm, by which the Seamen know they are approach- 
 ing. And with their help it is that Sailors get beyond 
 the Equator ; for other conftant Winds are often 
 wanting, efpecially in thofe three Months, for they 
 do not hinder the Ships failing except at the firft 
 breaking out. 
 
 BUT in that part of the Sea which is next the 
 Kingdom of Loango, in Africa, the Storm is often in 
 the Months of January, February, March, April 9 
 and in different Places of Africa at other times. 
 
 THUS likewife at a Promontory mAfrica, called 
 now Giiardafu, not far from the Month of the Red- 
 Sea, there rages in the Month of May every Year a 
 North Wind, and the Ecnepbias moft vehemently. 
 
 FOR 'tis obfervable, that as fome Winds lefs 
 forcible blow yearly -, fo there are Storms and Tem- 
 
 pefts
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Univerfal Geography. 52 3 
 pefts anniverfary in feme Places : and with fuch a 
 Storm, not far from that Cape, did Sodreus, the 
 Portuguefe Conful, perifh in the Year 1505 , and 
 tho' he was admonifhed by the Africans, yet he 
 would not hearken to it. 
 
 B U T in the Entrance of the Arabian Gulph, 
 and in Arabia, and Ethiopia, there is a peculiar and 
 wonderful Storm happens. A thick black Cloud, 
 mixed with fiery little Clouds (which are terrible to 
 behold), brings Darknefs in the Day, and on a fudden 
 there breaks out a Storm, which is foon over ; but 
 it throws fuch a quantity of red Sand on the Land 
 and Sea, that the Arabians fay it fometimes buries 
 whole Companies of Merchants and Travellers, with 
 their Camels, viz. the Caravans that pafs there once 
 or twice a Year, being gathered (out of all parts of 
 Afia] in Syria, they arrive thence from Aleppo to 
 Arabia, to the Number of fix thoufand Men, who 
 dare not travel by themfelves, becaufe of the Rob- 
 beries by the Arabians, and other Dangers, as they 
 do from India to China and I'artary : and from 
 hence 'tis they fay the Arabian and Egyptian Mum- 
 my comes ; their Bodies being dryed in the Sand 
 with the Sun's Heat. This Storm comes from the 
 North to which the Red- Sea is extended , and there- 
 fore 'tis likely, there being a great quantity of red 
 Sand on that Shore, that 'tis carried up by the Wind, 
 which caufes a red Colour to appear among the 
 Clouds, and afterwards falls down. 
 
 AND 'tis alfo probable, that there is fuch a 
 Storm of Sand in Libya, becaufe of the great Heaps 
 of that Sand there , which the Antients knew when 
 they wrote of the difficult accefs to the Temple of 
 Jupiter Hammon in Libya : nor were they without the 
 knowledge ofthe way how Mummy was made. In 
 Guzarat, a Kingdom in India, Clouds of Sand, or 
 a vaft quantity of fmall Duft raifcd by the Sun's 
 
 Heat,
 
 524 *fhe ^Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 Heat, doth often -opprefs TraveiJers ; as is written 
 by Twijl a Dutchman, who lived long there. 
 
 AS to the Caufe of thefe Storms, 'tis plain they 
 come from the Clouds, and may be formed two 
 ways, i . If a Cloud falls down, by it's Weight it 
 will move the Air under it, as a Sheet, or Sail, let 
 fall -, and hence 'tis the fmaller the Cloud appears the 
 Storm after it is the greater -, for the Cloud, or Ox- 
 eye, is then high, and appears fmall, and falling 
 down, moves the Air with greater force. 2. If fui- 
 phureous Spirits inclofed in the Cloud, break out 
 on a fudden in one Place, 'other Parts being fhut 
 as the Wind breaks out of a Bottle, when the 
 Liquor in it is heated ; but the firft Caufe feems the 
 truer. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 Exhydrias is a Wind that breaks out of a Cloud with 
 a great quantity of Water. 
 
 THIS differs but little from an Ecvepbias *, on- 
 ly the Cloud, from which it feems to break out, is 
 now condenfed to Water, and born up fo long by 
 the Clouds about it, and perhaps forced together 
 by the Winds, *till at laft it falls down, and beats 
 the Air below it, which caufes the Wind : but thefe 
 arc rare, and the Ecnepbias itfelf hath often Showers 
 attending it, and therefore the Difference is only in 
 Degree ; except that the Exbydrias for the moft part 
 comes ftrait down. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 aftrongfwiftlVindtbat blows from all 
 Points, wandring about all quarters and generally 
 comes from above. 
 
 THIS is frequent in the Oriental 'Sea, efpecially in 
 the Sea at Siam, China, and Japan, and between Ma- 
 lacca and Japan. It breaks out violently almofl from 
 
 the
 
 C H A P. 2 1 . of Unherfal Geography. 52 5 
 the weftern Point, and turning round the Horizon 
 with a rapid Force performs the Revolution in twen- 
 ty Hours ; ftill growing ftronger and ftronger j 
 railing thofe Seas with it's ftrong whirling about, to 
 a great Height, every tenth Wave rifing above the 
 reft, which dafhing againft one another with great 
 force the Seamen lofe all hopes of their Lives -, for 
 which, and other Storms, failing from India to 
 Japan is very dangerous ; fo that if one Ship of three 
 get fafe there, 'tis counted to be a profperous Voyage. 
 The Typbon rages moft in Summer, and more than 
 can be conceived by thofe who have not feen it ; fo that 
 'tis no wonder the Ribs of the ftrongeft and largeft 
 Ships mould be loofened : you would think the Hea- 
 vens and Earth were turned to their antient Chaos. 
 
 1 T rages not only at Sea, but on Land, and over- 
 turns Houfes, and pulls up Trees by the Roots, and 
 carries great Ships a quarter of a Mile from the Sea. 
 
 I T feldom lafts above fix Hours. In the Indian 
 Ocean the Sea is at firft plain : but there come after- 
 wards dreadful Waves. Thus about the Town of 
 Arbeil in Perjja, in the Months of June and July, it 
 raifes a great deal of Duft every Day at twelve of 
 the Clock ; and lafts one Hour. 
 
 THE Caufe of it, no doubt, is that the Wind ruth- 
 ing to a certain Point, is obftructed, and returns on it 
 felf, and is thus turned round, as we fee in Water 
 that turns round about in a Vortex, when it meets 
 with an Obftacle ; or it may come from furious 
 Winds meeting one another, which renders the Sea 
 plain, and daffies againft the Ships between them. 
 If this Wind blow from above, 'tis called Catagis. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 Whether fome Winds came from the Earthy either from 
 the Land or Water. 
 
 W E think this is very eafy to conceive ; for fee- 
 ing there are in the Earth, and at the Sea Bottom, fe- 
 
 veral
 
 526 ^be Abfolute Part S E c T. VI. 
 
 veral Cavities ; there may be in them fulphureous Spi- 
 rits, which may break out violently, efpecially if' a 
 little hindered at firft: and if much hindered this caufes 
 an Earthquake, 'till atlaftthey make way for them- 
 felves. Thus in the Maurice Ifles there often breaks 
 out a Smoak from the Earth ; and alfo from fome Ca- 
 verns. In Japan there is a Fountain that breaks out at 
 certain Hours of the Day, with great Force and 
 Noife. 
 
 BUT I do not remember to have read of any 
 Wind coming out of the Sea. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 Whether any Wind arifes from the fides, or the flowing 
 of Rivers. 
 
 EXPERlENCEteftifies, -that in thofe Places 
 where the Tides are fenfible, when the Sea flows, the 
 Wind doth for the moft part blow from the Sea, 
 when other Winds ceafe ; and therefore it feems the 
 Air that is contiguous to the Water flows with it to 
 the fame Point : but 'tis to be confidered, whether 
 that happens conftantly. And I believe there may be 
 another caufe given of that Wind, viz. That the Air 
 is driven from it's Place by the Water that flows ia 
 on the Land : for a fmall matter moves the Air ; and 
 thus 'tis thought the Air moves with the Rivers 
 that run fwiftly, as the Zaire and Rhine. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Why tbe ferj Appearances Ci&oT 9 Pollux, and Hele- 
 na, and what they call Jack in the Lantern, ap- 
 pear amidft Storms. 
 
 . NOT one, but a great many, are feen on the 
 Ivlafts of Ships, wandring with an uncertain Motion, 
 tho* they feem fometimes to cleave clofe to the Sails 
 and Mafts -, but they frequently leap up and down, 
 with intermifllon, affording an obfcure Flame, like 
 
 that
 
 C H A P. 2 1 , of Unherfal Geography. 527 
 that of a Candle burning faintly. If five of them are 
 feen together, which the Portuguefe call the Virgin 
 Mary's Crown, they take it for a fure Sign of the 
 Storm being foon over. Their Caufe is fome fulphu- 
 reous and bituminous Matter beat down by the Mo- 
 tion of the Air above, and gathering together is kind- 
 led by the Agitation of theAir ; as Butter is gathered 
 together by the Agitation of the Cream. And from 
 this Appearance we gather, that thefe Storms come 
 from fulphureous Spirits that rarify die Air, and 
 put it into a Motion. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 Why Calms are fo frequent in the Sea near Guinea, and 
 under the Equator ; in the Atlantic Ocean between 
 America and Africa. 
 
 T H I S is a Phenomenon concerning theWinds, 
 of no fmall difficulty ; that at Guinea, which is two 
 Degrees from the Equator, and under the Equator 
 itfelf, there mould be almoft a conftant Calm, efpe- 
 cially in April, May, and June, where there are no 
 Monfoons, and when the like is not found in other 
 Places fituated under the Equator. There is in- 
 deed an Ecnepbias pretty frequent there fometimes ; 
 and is defired by Seamen, becaufe by the help there- 
 of they get beyond the Equator : for fometimes go- 
 ing from Europe to India, they are kept a whole 
 Month under theEquator : but they take care to keep 
 from the Coaft of Guinea ; and without lofs of rime 
 fail towards the Coaft of Brazil, to avoid being be- 
 calmed ; which hath kept fome Ships three Months 
 near the Shore. I have not yet found the reafon of it, 
 except it may by faid, that there is no Snow found 
 on the Mountains of Africa, between Guinea and 
 arbary ; which may caufe a conftant Wind. 
 
 PRO-
 
 528 f&e Abfolute Part, &c. SEC TV VI. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 Infome Countries the S forms are anniversary. 
 
 W E gave Examples of this before, viz. i . Con- 
 cerning the changing of the Monfoom. 2. Of the 
 Ecnepbias. 3 . Of the Typbon. 4. At the Cap of Good- 
 Hope, in June and July. 5. In the Ifland of Del Mayo 
 at the latter endofdugujl ; to which add, 6. The 
 Storms at Tercera, in Auguft. 7. In thirty five De- 
 grees of the Meridian of Triftan de Cunba. And in 
 the Month of May, at New-Moon, the Weft 
 Wind rages, and fwallows up Ships ; but in thirty 
 three Degrees on the fame Meridian the North and 
 North-Eaft. 8. At Pulon ttmor, in the Cbinefe Sea 
 the Weft Winds rage in June and July, and are 
 dangerous. 9. Between China and Japan there are 
 feveral Storms from the New Moon in July, to the 
 twelfth Day of the Moon. 10. If, in the fame 
 Place, other Winds befides the Monfoons blow 
 fometimes from one Point, and fometimes from 
 another, 'till they fettle in the North-Eaft, a 
 Storm certainly happens. 
 
 The End of the Firjl Volume. 
 
 "
 
 

 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A 000006076 4 
 
 \ 

 
 Un